JP6788206B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of the gaming machines (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-016110

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a game machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (in parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown). The invention according to the initial claim of the present application corresponds to the initial invention 41 among the initial inventions 1 to 54 described later.
The present invention (29th embodiment)
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
When the number of credits is the upper limit ("50"), the predetermined lottery result is determined (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and 15 cards are used. (Any of the small winning combination 01 to be paid out or the small winning combination 13 to 17 to be paid out of 3 cards can be won), and "N-1" (2) reels are stopped. A specific symbol combination (for example, a small payout of 3 reels) in which the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" th (third) reel is accepted and a game medium (medal) is given. In a game (hereinafter referred to as "specific game" ) in which the symbol combination corresponding to the combination 13 is stopped and displayed, when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted , " The excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel can be executed for a predetermined period, and the exciting output can be continued until the predetermined period elapses even after the "N" th reel is stopped.
In the specific game, after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted, before the predetermined period has elapsed for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N" -th reel When the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at a predetermined timing, the number of game media to be provided can be determined before the predetermined period elapses, and the hopper after the predetermined period elapses. The drive signal of (35) can be output,
When the number of credits is "0", the predetermined lottery result is determined, and in a situation where the "N-1" reel is stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is operated. Is accepted, and in a game in which the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game") , when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted , The excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel can be executed over the predetermined period, and the exciting output can be continued until the predetermined period elapses even after the "N" th reel is stopped. age,
In the predetermined game, after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted , the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is performed before the predetermined period elapses. When the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at the predetermined timing, the number of game media to be provided can be determined before the predetermined period elapses, and after the predetermined period elapses. The feature is that the number of credits can be added.

According to the present invention, the performance as a game machine can be improved.

In this embodiment, it is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine which is an example of a game machine. In this embodiment, it is a front view explaining the state until the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot passes through the insertion sensor. In the first embodiment (A), it is a figure explaining the voltage drop at the time of power-off with a time chart. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the insertion sensor and the passage of a medal in 1st Embodiment (B). In the first embodiment (B), it is a figure explaining on / off of a closing sensor with a time chart. It is a schematic diagram when a medal is ejected from a medal payout device in 1st Embodiment (C). In the first embodiment (C), it is a schematic diagram which shows the on (detection) / off (non-detection) state of the payout sensor when a medal is sent out from a medal payout device. In the first embodiment (C), it is a figure which shows on / off of a payout sensor by a time chart. In the second embodiment, it is an exploded perspective view which shows the outline of the main control board and a board case. In the second embodiment, (a) is a plan view showing a substrate case containing a main control substrate. (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 1 of the gate trace. (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA showing Example 2 of the gate trace. In the third embodiment, it is a figure explaining the flow of processing when the disconnection occurs between the main control board and the sub control board. In the fourth embodiment, it is a cross-sectional view (schematic diagram) for explaining the movement of the stop button of the stop switch, (a) shows a no-load state, and (b) is when the detection sensor is turned from off to on. The state is shown, (c) shows the state where the stop button is pushed to the deepest part, and (d) shows the state when the stop button is released and the detection sensor is turned from on to off. In the fourth embodiment, the relationship between the movement of the stop button and the excited state of the motor is shown in a time chart, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. In the fifth embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between the on / off of a power source and a voltage level by a time chart, (a) shows the power-off after the main program is started, and (b) is before the main program is started. Indicates power off. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state before the last ejected medal touches the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is a plan view of the medal payout device in which the last ejected medal is the fixed shaft and the movable shaft. It is a top view of the medal payout device which shows the state which the hopper disk has rotated more than (a) before coming into contact with a movable shaft. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft and the movable shaft, and (b) is movable by being pushed by the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device which shows the state which the shaft has moved. In the sixth embodiment, (a) is a plan view of a medal payout device showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejection unit, and (b) is after ejecting the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device which shows the state which the rotation of a hopper disk is stopped. 6 is a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor, the drive state of the hopper motor, and the discharge status of medals from the discharge unit in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation of the main control board, the driving state of a hopper motor, the detection state of a payout sensor, and the ejection timing of a medal in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of payout processing in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the flow of payout processing in 6th Embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, it is a side sectional view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board and the sub control board. In the seventh embodiment, the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed is described (a). ) Indicates Example 1, and (b) indicates Example 2. In the seventh embodiment, the positional relationship between the main CPU on the main control board and the electrolytic capacitor on the sub control board when the slot machine is viewed from the front with the front door closed is described (c). ) Shows Example 3, and (d) shows Example 4. In the eighth embodiment, it is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower front portion (A portion of FIG. 22) of the slot machine in a state where the front door is closed, and is a diagram for explaining the gap between the cabinet and the front door. is there. In the ninth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of special roles (roles) and ending conditions, and (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the specified number of each gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used in common with non-RT and RT (non-AT) in a ninth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect determination table used in common in RB inside and inside BB in 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in 10th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED in the tenth embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board, (B) is a diagram showing a management information display LED, and (C) is a diagram showing a set value display LED. Is. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit 1a-5a and the digit 1b-5b, and the segments A-G and P in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output port in 11th Embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter value, a digit signal, and a segment signal. Further, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag. It is a figure which shows the address, the label name, the name, etc. of the data stored in the RWM. It is a figure explaining the concept of the difference counter value, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the difference counter value and an advantageous interval, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2. It is a flowchart which shows the program start processing (M_PRG_START) by a main control board. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an AT game count counter update process in step S281. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section transition lottery process in step S283. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section transition process in step S347 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the AT lottery process in step S355 of FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an AT initial game number determination process in step S363. It is a flowchart which shows the push order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning a prize in step S294. It is a flowchart which shows the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 1 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S453. It is a flowchart which shows the sub difference number counter management process in eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-difference number counter management process in 11th Embodiment, and is the flowchart which follows FIG. 56. In the twelfth embodiment, (A) shows the accessory condition device and the operation end condition, (B) shows the specified number for each RT, and (C) shows the number of winnings for each winning number. It is a front view, the plan view, and the right side view which show the outline of the structure including the reel and the stop switch in 13th Embodiment. In the 14th embodiment (A), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (A), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (B). In the 14th embodiment (B), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (B), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (C). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) by a prize in 14th Embodiment (C). In the 14th embodiment (C), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (C), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (D). In the 14th embodiment (D), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (D), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 14th Embodiment (E). In the 14th embodiment (E), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (E), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. It is a front view which shows the outline of the structure including the reel, the operation instruction lamp and the stop switch in 14th Embodiment (F). In the 14th embodiment (F), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (F), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (G), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. In the 14th embodiment (G), it is a time chart which shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (A). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (B). It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the medal addition process in 15th Embodiment (C). It is a schematic diagram which looked at the medal selector, the shoot passage 48, and the shoot sensor 49 in the 16th embodiment from the front. It is a front view of the passage forming member in 17th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the passage forming member in 17th Embodiment. It is a left side view of the passage forming member in 17th Embodiment. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 85 of the passage forming member in the 17th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main thing of the storage area of the RWM described in 18th Embodiment. In the eighteenth embodiment, it is a time chart (example 1) showing the output timing of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5. In the eighteenth embodiment, it is a time chart (example 2) showing the output timing of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5. It is a flowchart (example 1) which shows the external signal output processing in 18th Embodiment. In the eighteenth embodiment, it is a flowchart (Example 1) showing an external signal output process, and is a flowchart following FIG. 344. 18 is a flowchart (Example 2) showing an external signal output process in the eighteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart (example 3) which shows the external signal output processing in 18th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the control of the slot machine in 19th Embodiment (A). In the 19th embodiment, it is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound and the lamp effect, and one game time described later. It is an external perspective view of a pachinko game machine as seen from the front side (player side). It is an external perspective view of a pachinko game machine seen from the back side. It is a block diagram in a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the start-up flow after power-on of a pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in step S702 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of one game in a pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board seen from the front side. It is an exploded perspective view of the board case (upper case and lower case) and the main control board seen from the rear side. It is an external perspective view which shows the state which the main control board is housed in a board case. It is a front view which looked at the state which the main control board was housed in a board case from the front side. It is a front view which looked at the state which the main control board was housed in a board case from the rear (back) side. It is sectional drawing of the side surface which shows the fitting state of the upper case and the lower case, (a) shows the temporary fitting state (before the slide movement), and (b) shows the main fitting state (after the slide movement). .. It is a top view which looked at the vicinity of the side wall from the lower case side in the temporary fitting state. It is a top view which shows the state which the harness is connected to the connector of the main control board. It is a front view which shows the harness and the connector terminal in detail. It is a perspective view which shows the example which hides the lead wire about a start. It is sectional drawing of the side which shows the positional relationship between the upper case of a board case, a cover, a setting key insertion slot, and a setting change (reset) switch. It is a figure which shows the design arrangement of the reel in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display window, the effective line and the like in 23rd Embodiment. FIG. (1) is a diagram (1) showing a combination of symbols of combinations and the number of payouts in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. (2) is a diagram (2) showing a combination of symbols of combinations and the number of payouts in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure (3) which shows the symbol combination of a combination in 23rd Embodiment, the number of payouts, and the like. FIG. (4) is a diagram (4) showing a combination of symbols of combinations and the number of payouts in the 23rd embodiment. FIG. (5) is a diagram (5) showing a combination of symbols of combinations and the number of payouts in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure (6) which shows the symbol combination of the combination, the number of payouts, etc. in the 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (1) which shows the condition apparatus and the winning combination in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (2) which shows the condition apparatus, the winning combination, etc. in the 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (3) which shows the condition apparatus, the winning combination, etc. in the 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (4) which shows the condition apparatus, the winning combination, etc. in the 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (non-RT) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (RT1) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (in 1BB operation and in the non-internal RB) in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (in operation of 1BB and in the inside of RB) in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (1BB operation and RB operation) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the RT transition in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the main game state in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (1) which shows the content of RWM in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (2) which shows the content of the RWM in the 23rd embodiment. It is a figure (3) which shows the content of RWM in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (4) which shows the content of RWM in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (5) which shows the content of RWM in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure (6) which shows the content of RWM in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the stop acceptance designation table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) and stop acceptance designation table 2 ((TBL_ORD_INF1)) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reel production data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reel production execution timer table 1-8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1-TM8) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 139. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG. 148. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STBY) in step S957 of FIG. 149. It is a flowchart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart following FIG. 154. It is a figure which shows the acceleration / deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the deceleration start inspection (I_REDUCE_CHK) in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entanglement prevention output in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the confrontation effect output control in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the volume setting in 23rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the volume setting of the administrator mode in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the hardware structure of a main CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of ROM and RWM of FIG. 164 in more detail. (A) is a diagram showing A to F, H, L, and Q registers, and (B) is a diagram showing the structure of F registers. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an instruction, and (B) is a diagram for explaining execution of the instruction. It is a figure which shows the instruction type (1) in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the instruction type (2) in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the instruction type (3) in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the instruction type (4) in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the RWM which stores the data about an advantageous interval (AT) in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content (1) of RWM in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content (2) of RWM in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content (3) of RWM in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the definition data (1) in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the definition data (2) in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the definition data (3) in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the definition data (4) in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline of various tables used in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (1). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (2). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) (3). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (1). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (2). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (3). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (1). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (2). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (3). It is a figure which shows the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC). It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows 1-line display determination (M_LINE_JUDGE). It is a flowchart which shows the designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the RB operation management in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the RWM53 in the 26th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) is a diagram showing a reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (1). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (2). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (3). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (4). It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1) (5). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (1). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (2). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (3). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (4). It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) (5). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (1). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (2). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (3). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (4). It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) (5). It is a figure which shows the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (1) in the 26th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) (2) in the 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a start switch in step S1133 of FIG. 222. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start preparation process in step S1142 of FIG. 223. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control in step S1135 of FIG. 222. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol array address buffer set in step S1165 of FIG. 225. It is a flowchart which shows the display determination process in step S1137 of FIG. 222. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of the symbol arrangement table in 27th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of the symbol arrangement table in 27th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display window, the effective line, and the RWM area in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the role definition in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 29th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of RWM in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 of FIG. 238. It is a flowchart which shows the input inspection in step S1313 of FIG. 238. It is a flowchart which shows the all reel stop check in step S1316 of FIG. 238. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 31st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of RWM in 32nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 32nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the step-out inspection preparation in step S1374 of FIG. 245. It is a flowchart which shows the step-out inspection in step S1382 of FIG. 246. It is a flowchart which shows the stop acceptance waiting waiting in step S1387 of FIG. 246. It is a figure which shows the content of RWM in 33rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows each signal input to input port 0 in 33rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 33rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the main process (M_MAIN) in 33rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content (1) of RWM in 34th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content (2) of RWM in 34th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK), and (b) is a diagram showing a stop acceptance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 34th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop acceptance check in step S1421 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the stop acceptance inspection in step S1432 of FIG. It is a figure which shows the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop acceptance check in 35th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of a reel 31, the stop display of a symbol, and the output of a tempai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of a reel 31, the stop display of a symbol, and the output of a tempai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of a reel 31, the stop display of a symbol, and the output of a tempai sound in the 36th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) in 36th Embodiment.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"Bet" means betting a medal (game medium) in order to play a game. To bet a medal, the actual medal is groomed and inserted from the medal slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet the credited (stored) medal.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as" storage ")" means that medals are stored inside the slot machine 10, unlike the above-mentioned "bet". In this specification, the term "credit" is used to mean not including "bet".
Further, "insertion" means betting or crediting a medal.
In addition, the "specified number" means the number of bets that can start (execute) the game in the game. For example, in a game in which the specified number is "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number "1".
For convenience of explanation, the "specified number" may be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to something other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3", when one medal is inserted (before the start of the game), the number of bets is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Maintenance" means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
The "care bet" means that the player bets a medal by caring for the medal from the medal slot 47.
The "care credit" means that the player credits the medal (adds the credit) by caring for the medal from the medal slot 47.
"Bet medal" means a medal that has been bet.
"Reserved medal" means a medal that is credited (stored).

The "storage bet" is a bet for playing a part or all of the credited medals within the range where the player can bet in the game by operating the bet switch 40 (described later). To do.
The "automatic bet" means that when the replay wins, the number of medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the control process of the slot machine 10.
Here, the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed (meaning that it has stopped at the valid line. The same shall apply hereinafter) is referred to as "small winning combination". On the other hand, in the "Rules concerning certification of game machines and type verification (hereinafter, simply referred to as" rules ")", when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the condition device related to the replay is activated. It is interpreted that it is not a "winning prize". However, in the present application (the present specification, etc.), the replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying role), and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay may be referred to as "replay winning".
"Payment" means paying out bet medals and / or stored medals to the player. In the present embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" means paying out medals to a player based on a winning combination, or paying out medals by the above settlement. When paying out medals to players based on winning a role, store them as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in RWM53 (described later)) and paying out. Includes both paying out the actual medal by mouth (not shown). For example, "50" medals are credited as the limit number of medals, and medals for which the number of credits exceeds "50" are controlled to be actually paid out to the player.
In addition, "payout" may be referred to as "grant". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may be referred to as the "number of grants".

The "game medium" is a medal in the present embodiment, but in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) game machine, electronic information (electronic medal, electronic data) is used as the game medium. In addition, "electronic information" means, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and a part or all of the electronic information is played by the game machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing the above.
The "game medium" may be referred to as "game value".

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to the game medium credit device provided in the game machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not mean only actually paying out medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but credits the electronic information of the dividend corresponding to the winning combination to the game medium credit device (payout of medals). The process of adding) is also included.

When the game progresses with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" game. When it is an eye, the game of the "N" game is referred to as "this time game". Further, the game of the "N-1" game is referred to as a "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N + 1" game is referred to as the "next game".

In the present specification, a numerical value having "(B)" added to the end of the number (particularly, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with "(H)" at the end of the number means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in a decimal number is expressed as "00010000 (B)" in a binary number and "10 (H)" in a hexadecimal number. Further, a numerical value meaning a decimal number is expressed as "16 (D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, the suffixes of "(B)", "(D)", and "(H)" may be omitted, respectively. ..

The "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing (the timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the effective line).
Further, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means that the game has an advantage / disadvantage in the game result (combination of symbols that stop at the effective line) depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, and has or has a large number of payouts. An operation mode in which the symbol combination is stopped, an operation mode in which the symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT is stopped, or an operation mode in which the symbol combination that does not shift (fall) to an unfavorable RT is stopped. The "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as a correct answer operation mode and a correct answer push order.

The "game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42" is, for example, a game in which any of the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, is won (so-called "pushing order bell"). Equivalent to the game won in). Further, although not shown in FIG. 58, for example, in a game in which a plurality of types of replays are won (when a duplicate replay is won, a game in which a so-called "push order replay" is won), RT shifts depending on the type of replay won. This is also the case.

The "instruction function" means a function of instructing the player of the operation mode of the stop switch 42. The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that showing the content of the "instruction" in a visible manner is "display", and notifying the player of the content of the instruction is "notification". Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".

Further, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the notification of the most advantageous operation mode. Then, the notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be referred to as "operation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be "instruction function operation". It may be "operation".
For example, if the push order bells shown in the winning numbers "3" to "8" in FIG. 58 (B), which will be described later, are in the 6-choice push order, the payout at the time of winning the push order bell is 10 or 10 in the example of FIG. Although it is one, it is assumed that instead of this, one, three, four, ten, or missed (non-winning) is obtained depending on the pushing order.
Here, notifying the pressing order for winning the 10-card combination is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course, it corresponds to "operation of the instruction function".
On the other hand, notifying the push order for winning the 1-card combination, 3-card combination, or 4-card combination may be referred to as "notification of advantageous operation mode (operation of instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode". It is not necessary to say "notification of".

Since the push order for winning the 4-card combination is the push order for not winning the 10-card combination, it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout number is "4" with respect to the bet number "3" and the difference number of the games is "+1", this is an operation mode for increasing the difference number, and is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.
Similarly, the push order for winning the 3-card combination is not the push order for winning the 10-card combination, so it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, since the payout number is "3" with respect to the bet number "3" and the difference number is maintained as it is (the difference number is not reduced), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

Furthermore, similarly, the push order for winning the 1-card combination is not the push order for winning the 10-card combination, and thus is not the most advantageous operation mode. Further, the payout number is "1" with respect to the bet number "3", which is an operation mode in which the difference number is reduced. However, since it can be said that the operation mode does not miss the role, it may not be a disadvantageous operation mode.

In the present embodiment, in the operation of the instruction function when the push order bell is won, the operation mode (correct answer push order) in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts wins is notified.
However, for example, when the difference counter value (described later) in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit value (“2400 (D)”), but there is a margin in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (advantageous section clear counter value described later). Is considered to notify the push order for winning, for example, a 3-card combination or a 4-card combination as described above when the push order bell is won, and control the difference counter value so as to maintain the current status.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, suppose that the specified number for operating the instruction function is set to "3". In this case, in the game of the specified number "2" or "3" during AT, when the game is started with the bet number "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the number of bets "2", the instruction function cannot be operated even when the push order bell is won.

The "game section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". In addition, Unit 5.9 had a "waiting section" (a game section that won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous section), but under the current rules of Unit 6, "waiting section" etc. Is not provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game section other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
The "normal section" refers to a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a push order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct push order) described later, and a peripheral board (for example, a sub control board 80). ) Is a game section that is prohibited from being transmitted to, and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not execute the processing related to the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery of the combination, it is possible to decide whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, it is not possible to display the push order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED or the like) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function cannot be activated. Since the signal related to the above is not transmitted to the peripheral board, it is not possible to display (notify) an advantageous operation mode by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub control board 80.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and specifically, when the instruction function is activated, the instruction is given on the main control board 60. It refers to a game section in which a signal related to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub control board 80 cannot output an effect contrary to the instruction content given by the main control board 60 or the signal related to the received instruction function.

Further, the advantageous section may be a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, or the instruction function may not be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may be always activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
The AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the AT is always in the advantageous section, and the AT is not executed during the non-advantageous section.

Further, in a game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the ball output rate in a predetermined period may be determined. It is also conceivable that the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not notified even in the game in which the game result is advantageous / disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, for the purpose of keeping the range within the range specified by the rules.
For example, if the upper limit of the difference counter is approached during AT, but the number of AT games still remains, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is temporarily not notified from the viewpoint of extending the life of the AT. (The instruction function is not activated) is also conceivable.

In addition, various settings can be made for the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, first, it is possible to set "advantageous section = AT". In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, the AT is started from the first game of the advantageous section. In addition, the AT ends at the end of the advantageous section.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT ≠ advantageous section".
In this case, the AT start (execution) condition is not satisfied only by shifting to the advantageous section, and on the condition that the AT is in the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the AT is decided by lottery or the like, and the AT is determined. When it is decided to execute the AT, the AT may be executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. When the player is non-AT when shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to a normal section, a precursor, a CZ (chance zone (a period during which an AT is likely to be won)), or the like.

When shifting to the precursor after the shift to the advantageous section, the shift to the present precursor may be made so as to shift to the AT after the predetermined number of games of the present precursor is completed. Alternatively, at the time of transition to the advantageous section or after the transition to the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to use this precursor or a false precursor, and when the precursor is determined, the shift to AT may be made after the end of this precursor. .. In addition, when it is determined to be a sign of Gase, the advantageous section may be maintained or the section may shift to a normal section after the sign of Gase is completed.
Furthermore, when the AT termination condition is satisfied, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated. Alternatively, although the AT ends, if the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

In addition, the number of games played in the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and the lottery or the like related to the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is started, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section (lottery, etc.). Can be mentioned.
Further, when a predetermined end condition is set for the advantageous section and the predetermined end condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (or the number of remaining games in the AT) is satisfied, that time point It is possible to end the advantageous section with.

Here, the "predetermined end condition" of the advantageous section means that the difference counter value described later exceeds "2400 (D)", or the advantageous section clear counter (number of games played in the advantageous section) described later is ". It can be mentioned that it has reached 1500 (D). When any of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section.

In the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED (also referred to as “section indicator”) 77, which will be described later, is turned on. The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at all times during the advantageous section, but may be turned on when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" includes, for example, a case where the instruction function is activated in a gaming state in which the section is in an advantageous section and the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". After the advantageous section display LED 77 is once turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, the "section Sim (simulation) ball output rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always displayed as a stop (even when the combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed. Assuming that the combination is stopped and displayed), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (the high bell that is the maximum payout when the push order bell is won) is This is the ball output rate when it is assumed that the game is stopped. In the calculation of the section Sim payout rate, the payout (number of payouts) due to the accessory operation (1BB operation, etc.) is not included. In the game that won the replay, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in the replay based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game that won the replay), the number of bets It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts of the game won in the replay and the number of bets of the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the "game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds" 1 "" includes an RT or a main game state in which the section Sim ball output rate is set to exceed "1".
Here, as an RT in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", for example, an RT in which the replay winning probability is set high can be mentioned.
Further, assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback section and the like are usually provided as the main game state, AT can be mentioned as the main game state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1".

When ending the advantageous section, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous section, for example, during the game end check process described later or the game start set process in the next game of the final game of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off. To do. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section display LED flag described later.

Examples of the "processing related to the advantageous section" include the following processing.
1) Advantageous section (transition) lottery 2) Advantageous section clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Update the difference counter (calculation, clear)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Further, the "process related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following process.
1) Display of push order instruction information (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of game number management type AT (specification that AT ends when the number of remaining games reaches "0"), the AT game count counter is updated (subtraction, addition addition, clear)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification that AT ends when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), the AT difference number counter is updated (subtraction, addition addition, clear).

The current rules stipulate that the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed by one specified number in one gaming state (RT) except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number "3" enables the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function to be executed, and the specified number "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. And said.
However, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to update the advantageous section clear counter and the difference counter, regardless of the specified number.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning combination lottery result is non-winning (for example, when the winning number “0” in FIGS. 26 and 58 described later), in other words, in the game when the condition device is not activated, It is stipulated that the processing related to the advantageous section (advantageous section transition lottery) will not be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the winning combination lottery result is not won, the processing related to the advantageous section may be executed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the winning combination lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, "1/17500" or higher), the instruction function is involved. The process (AT lottery process) can be executed.

Furthermore, when the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) is executed and the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the advantageous section will be set from the next game. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery (process related to the advantageous section) and to notify the correct answer pressing order (process related to the instruction function) in the game in which the advantageous section is won.
However, it is permissible to perform the advantageous section transition lottery (process related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (process related to the instruction function) in one game. Further, for example, when a specific winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as “role ratio monitor” or “ratio display”) 74 is composed of four LEDs, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (B) described later, and is a two-digit identification segment (5 below). It is composed of an LED that indicates which of the items it is by a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) Or instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Character ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous character ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Character ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the bonus ratio (cumulative), if the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." Indicates the bonus ratio (cumulative) is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed. Display in the ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted up to that point, and in the present embodiment, the numbers are counted until at least "175,000" games are played. When the cumulative total is less than the number of "175000" games, the ratio is displayed by, for example, a blinking display, and when the total number of games is "175000" or more, the ratio is displayed by, for example, a lighting display. The cumulative total continues to be added until the value (upper limit value) memorable at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is reached even after the number of games played is "175000" or more.
Further, "6000 games" is the total number of games in which one set is "400" and the 15 sets are totaled.

The "advantageous section ratio" refers to the ratio (ratio) of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all the gaming sections (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section during that period is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instructed bonus ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the total of the number of payouts when the bonus is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts. In a slot machine not equipped with an accessory, the "instruction-included accessory ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum of the number of payouts when the accessory is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included accessory counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated" is based on the fact that the stop switch 42 is operated according to the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function, for example, in FIG. 58 described later, the winning number " When 10 bells of "3" to "8" are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.
On the other hand, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order, and therefore one bell in the example of FIG. "1" is added to.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the winning combination is missed (when the combination is not won) because the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the displayed pressing order, the instruction-included combination counter. Is not added to. In other words, it remains the count value from the previous game.

In the example of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when the common bell (winning number "3") is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same manner as when the push order bell is won, and the winning number display LED 78 is pressed. There are cases where the order instruction information (dummy) is displayed and cases where the instruction function is not activated. Then, when the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the payout number of the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the case where the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct answer pressing order by an image or a voice is also included.

The "continuous bonus character ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts to the total number of payouts when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts".
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of "6000" games is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "Type 1 Special Character (RB)" is activated is "500", the "continuous character" The ratio (6000 games) ”is“ 25 (%) ”.

Further, the "role of the accessory" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "accessory" is, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special accessory, the second-class special accessory (CB) and MB (also referred to as 2BB. The second-class accessory continuous operation device. CB. Is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.
In the above five items, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "---" in the game machine that does not have the function corresponding to the item.
For example, if "RB (Type 1 special accessory)" is not provided, there is no continuous accessory ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment is set to "---. Is lit and displayed.
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later, a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. To do.

In addition, the rules stipulate that the ratio of advantageous sections and the ratio of designated accessories should be 70% or less. In addition, it is stated that the accessory ratio should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the continuous accessory ratio should be 60% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the rule range.

A game machine having a specification of an advantageous section ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a "7U" type, and a game machine having a specification of a designated accessory ratio of 70% or less is referred to as a "7P" type. In a game machine provided with an advantageous section, it is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included accessory ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section needs to be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the total number of payouts paid out by the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is total. It may be 70% or less of the payout number, and for example, the entire period or most of the game sections may be advantageous sections.

For example, when shifting to a non-advantageous section, it is set to win the advantageous section lottery with a 100% probability, and it is set to win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). That, or setting to win the advantageous section lottery with a high probability (for example, 70%) can be mentioned.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to the instruction function by referring to the set value itself (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type performs processing related to the instruction function by referring to the set value itself. It is possible.
In the twelfth embodiment described later, most of the inside of the BB2 is in the advantageous section, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the AT in the advantageous section.

Further, the management information display LED 74 can also be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
The management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) in this case is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of the slot machine (rotary barrel type gaming machine). Then, a real-time (measuring) base value for each "60,000" out spheres (the "base value" indicates how many safe spheres are for 100 out spheres) and "60,000". The base values of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd times before each piece are displayed in sequence. For example, the real-time base value identification segment is displayed as "bL.", The previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b1.", And the previous base value identification segment is displayed as "b2." Is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
As described above, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko game machines among game machines.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10 which is an example of a game machine in the present embodiment. FIG. 1 is a block diagram common to the first to fifth embodiments.
As a typical control board provided in the slot machine 10, a main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like (it does not mean that only those shown in FIG. 1 are provided). The appearance of the main control board 50 and the fact that the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 will be described in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are electrically connected to each other via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit for transmitting a signal to a peripheral device such as a motor 32.
In FIG. 1, the input peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device, and the output peripheral device is indicated by an arrow pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral device. It is shown (the same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the progress of the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (IC having an arithmetic function) provided on the main control board 50, executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs arithmetic, and the like. Specifically, a lottery of combinations and a reel 31. Drive control and payout at the time of winning.

Further, on the main control board 50, an MPU including an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and a register is mounted. The RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.
The MPU including the RWM83, ROM84, and subCPU85 is also mounted on the sub-control board 80 described later. The RWM83 and ROM84 may be provided externally in addition to those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are sent to the inside of the medal selector.
The movement of the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in the medal selector will be described with reference to FIG. 2 and the like described later.
As shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a throw-in sensor 44 (a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b) are provided in the medal selector (but are not limited thereto). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 are configured to be first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the payout slot. To do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 to the hopper 35 is formed. The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that closes an opening (opening leading to the medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector to form a medal passage for guiding the medal to the hopper 35 side. It is composed of an actuator and the like for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 is in a state of disallowing the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 to the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when all the reels 31 are stopped and the winning combination is won). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when the game is not performed.

In the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In the present embodiment, the throwing sensor 44 is composed of a pair of throwing sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance from each other, and the other throwing sensor 44b has passed a predetermined time after the medal is detected by one throwing sensor 44a. It is configured to be detected by. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and an operation switch operated by the player. The checkout switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply," switch ")" switches the electric signal on / off based on the operation of the operating body by the player (operator) (receives an external force). It refers to a device (including an electric circuit and / or an electric component), and does not limit the shape of an operating body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, the light from the light emitting element continues to be incident on the light receiving element (when the light receiving element continues to detect the light, the operation switch is in the off state). Then, when the operation switch (operation body) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light emitting element is not incident on the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electric signal indicating that the operation switch is turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, it turns on. You may.

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 has a lever (rod) shape (hence, also referred to as a “start lever (switch) 41”), a bet switch 40, a stop switch 42, and a checkout switch. The operating body of 43 is in the shape of a push button (for this reason, it is also referred to as “bet button (switch) 40”, “stop button (switch) 42”, and “payment button (switch) 43”). In the fourth embodiment described later, the operating body (the portion pushed by the player) of the stop switch 42 is referred to as a "stop button 42a".

Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided in the operating body of the operation switch and / or in the vicinity or the vicinity thereof. Then, when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the permitted state, for example, the LED corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of the operation switch is in the disallowed state, for example, the operation switch of the operation switch By emitting red light from the LED or the like, the player is shown the permission / disapproval state of the operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switches 42 can be accepted, the LED of all the stop switches 42 is made to emit blue light so that the player can operate the reels 31. Shown in. Then, when one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is stopped and controlled. After that, the remaining stop switch 42 can be operated only when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stop-controlled reel 31 is terminated and the detection sensor 42e of the stop switch 42 is operated (the fourth described later). After the embodiment) is turned off. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. Then, when the excited state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is finished and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to the stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LED of the stop switch 42, which is still emitting red light but has not been operated yet, emits blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the game this time. In the present embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
Not limited to this, a bet switch for two bets may be provided.

It should be noted that the specified number is predetermined, for example, according to when the accessory is not operating / when the accessory is operating. Specifically, it is set such that when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, 3 sheets are operated when 1BB is operated, 2 sheets are set when 2BB is operated, and so on. When the 1-bet switch 40a is operated twice, two medals can be inserted, and when it is operated three times, three medals can be inserted. When the specified number is 3, the 3-bet switch 40b can be operated to insert 3 medals at a time, and when the specified number is 2, the 3-bet switch 40b can be operated. Two medals can be inserted at one time. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated while less than the specified number has already been bet, the betting process is performed so that the number of bets is 3.

Further, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, the stop switch 42 is an operation switch provided by three corresponding reels 31 (left, middle, right) and operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when refunding (paying out) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected to each other. In No. 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other separate boards (relay board, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

A credit number display LED 76 and an acquisition number display LED 78 are mounted on the display board 75.
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credit) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, a high-order digit and a low-order digit.

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the number of payouts (the number of acquired players) at the time of winning a winning combination, and is composed of two digits, a high-order digit and a low-order digit, like the credit number display LED 76. ..
The acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off and only the lower digit may be displayed as "0".

Further, the acquired number display LED 78 normally displays the acquired number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies an advantageous push order) in a game that notifies the push order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the push order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a dedicated LED or the like for displaying push order instruction information may be provided.
Note that during AT, the advantageous push order notification is also executed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In FIG. 1, a motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 or the like of a symbol display device is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes a reel 31 for displaying a symbol (three in this embodiment), a motor 32 for driving each reel 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reel 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and the stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a symbol combination corresponding to the combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, for example, in a convex shape, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one rotation, and the like. Then, each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected. Further, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 should be driven to stop the symbol ahead of the symbol on the reference position on the effective line. It becomes possible to identify whether or not it can be done.

Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cared for and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are formed so as to be housed in the hopper 35.
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 includes a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance from each other. Then, when the medal is paid out, the predetermined moving member (movable piece 39a in FIG. 7, which will be described later) moves by the medal. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off by the movement of the predetermined moving member. It is determined whether or not the medals are correctly paid out based on whether or not the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off within a predetermined time range.

For example, when the on of the pair of payout sensors 37 is not detected even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that the medals have not been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the on signal, it is detected that the medal jam has occurred.
The details of these operations will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8 described later.

When starting the game, the player inserts a pre-credited medal by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or takes care of the medal from the medal insertion slot 47 (maintenance bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with a specified number of medals bet on the game, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) performs a lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and drives and controls all the motors 32 to control all the reels 31. Control to rotate. By rotating the reel 31 by the motor 32 in this way, the symbol on the reel 31 is moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, by pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and the lottery result (internal lottery) of the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery). The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result) determined by the means.

Then, the game result of this game is displayed by the symbol combination when all the reels 31 are stopped. Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops at the valid line (when the winning combination is won), the medals corresponding to the winning winning combination are paid out.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following combination lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The winning combination lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) the winning number. Here, the "lottery of the winning number by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the wind business law rules (rules concerning certification of game machines and type verification, etc., hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"). The lottery result by the combination lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as an "internal lottery means 61" in terms of rules.
When the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device that can be operated in the game, In addition, the accessory condition device will be determined. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, and the like.

The combination lottery means 61 is based on, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. It is equipped with a winning number determining means for determining the winning number.

The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined region (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal numbers). The random number is, for example, a random number that the counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec keeps counting in the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle, and is a random number while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keep counting.

The random number extraction means extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the lottery table described later.

The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all combinations. Then, when any of the winning combinations is won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that winning combination is turned on (the winning flag is set). The winning combination may be a case where there is one winning combination (single winning) or a case where there are a plurality of winning combinations (duplicate winning).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects the push order instruction number (the number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the lottery result (push order bell or push order replay winning) of the winning number by the combination lottery means 61 (the number corresponding to the correct push order) It is to make a decision).
The "pushing order" of the push order instruction number selected here means a push order (correct push order) that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the push order bell is won, it refers to the push order (correct push order) in which the higher bell is won. In addition, when a replay duplicate is won, it refers to a push order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a push order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In the present embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique push order instruction number.
Then, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number on the above-mentioned acquisition number display LED 78, specifically, " Information such as "= *"("*" = 1, 2, ...) Is displayed. As described above, the function of displaying the push order instruction information when the condition device having an advantageous push order is operated is also referred to as an instruction function.
Further, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 uses the sub control board 50 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). A command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted to 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the image display device 23 displays an image of the correct answer pressing order.

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the push order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. In the normal section, it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number.

The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Here, the production group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Then, when the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is different from the push order instruction number described above, is selected for each game, and is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

Further, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub control board 80 receives the effect group number for each game, the effect can be output based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so that the sub control board 80 does not notify the correct answer push order based on the effect group number. .. On the other hand, during AT, when the push order bell or the push order replay is won, the push order instruction number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when the rotation start command of the reels 31 is received, particularly when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in the present embodiment. ..
Further, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the current game after the winning number is determined by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. Is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is set. Drive control is performed to control the reel 31 to stop at the determined position.

For example, the reel control means 65 enables a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is turned on) within the range of stop control of the reel 31 in a game in which at least one winning flag is on. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that it can be stopped on the line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (the winning combination with the winning flag turned off) on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). Means within range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations in one minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for the predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) in which the MB is operating. Is set to. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB operation.

On the other hand, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, for the predetermined reel 31 in which the MB is operating, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated to the time when the reel 31 is stopped is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated. The symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop at the predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped before the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is stopped at a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

On the contrary, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, when the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number stops at the effective line, when the reel 31 is stopped, the reel 31 By controlling the rotation and movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control, it is controlled so that the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Further, in a game in which a plurality of roles are won (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority of the winning combination is predetermined according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the pull-in stop control of the symbol related to the highest priority combination is performed according to a predetermined priority.

When the reel 31 is stopped, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination of the reel 31 stopped on the effective line is a symbol combination corresponding to any combination.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped at the effective line. Specifically, from the condition device operated in the game and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, a symbol combination that stops the reel 31 on the effective line before actually stopping is set in advance. It is determined, or the symbol combination stopped on the effective line after the reel 31 is stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a push order instruction number (only when a winning number having a correct push order is won during AT). , Production group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on the winning combination, and the like.

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during a game and a game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally directed to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends the information (control command) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected by using optical communication means. Further, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The following peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21 as shown in FIG. 1 are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for production are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data or the like captured when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing various data and the like when a lottery related to the production is performed as the production data.

The effect lamp 21 is composed of, for example, an LED or the like, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, each lights in a predetermined pattern. The effect lamp 21 is a back lamp and reel 31 that are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three consecutive symbols that can be seen from the display window) from behind. Includes a fluorescent lamp that illuminates the design on the reel 31 from the top, a frame lamp that is arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinks when a winning combination is won.

Further, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and various effect images during the game (correct answer pressing order, effects corresponding to the condition device operated in the game, etc.). It also displays game information (the number of games played, the number of acquired cards, etc., when the character is operating or during the advantageous section (AT)).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a state in which the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and is a schematic view seen from the front. In FIG. 2, the inside of the medal selector is shown so as to be visible. Further, the medals M indicate M1 to M4 according to their positions. The position of M1 indicates a state in which the medal M is placed in the medal storage portion 47b of the medal insertion slot 47 (a state before being released). That is, at the position of M1, the lowest point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b are in contact with each other when viewed from the front.
In addition, in FIG. 2 (and FIG. 4 described later), it is assumed that the entire substantially square portion displayed as the input sensors 44a and 44b is the light receiving / emitting range (sensor eyes) of the input sensors 44a and 44b, respectively (respectively). It is not the housing of the input sensors 44a and 44b).

Further, the position of M2 indicates the position at the moment when the medal M disappears when viewed from the front. That is, at the position of M2, the uppermost point of the outer peripheral edge of the medal M and the upper surface of the medal placing portion 47b overlap. For example, assuming that the player releases the medal M when the medal M is in the position of M1, the medal M falls from the position of M1. Therefore, at the position of M2, it is in a state of being released from the player's hand and falling (moving) to the downstream side.
The "upstream side" refers to the medal insertion slot 47 side, and the "downstream side" refers to the insertion sensor 44b side (hopper 35 side). Speaking of the position of the medal M, from the upstream side to the downstream side, M1 → M2 → M3 → M4.

In the example of FIG. 2, when the medal M is located at M2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M is detected by the passage sensor 46.
Further, the position of M3 indicates the position at the moment (on) when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. Further, the position of M4 indicates the position at the moment (off) when the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

The medal insertion slot 47 is a portion for inserting the medal M into the slot machine 10 (medal selector) when the player bets or credits the medal M as a game medium. The medal insertion slot 47 includes a medal guard portion 47a and a medal storage portion 47b. The medal placing portion 47b allows a plurality of (up to about 10) stacked medals M to be placed at the same time, and has a substantially curved surface extending in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (curvature slightly larger than the peripheral edge of the medal M). It has a curved surface).

The substantially curved surface of the medal placing portion 47b and the surface of the medal guard portion 47a where the medal M contacts (the surface visible in FIG. 2) are formed so as to intersect substantially vertically.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 2, the portion where the medal placing portion 47b and the medal guard portion 47a intersect has an opening through which one medal M can flow down. When two medals M are stacked, the medals M do not fall from the opening, but when the thickness of one medal M is thick, the medals M are formed so as to flow down from the opening. Therefore, for example, the player places a plurality of stacked medals M on the medal holder portion 47b, and while pressing the plurality of medals M in the direction of the medal guard portion 47a, the pressing force is strengthened. By weakening the medals, the medals M placed on the medal holder 47b can be dropped one by one into the medal selector from the opening.

When the medal M is inserted (released downward) from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M flows down the passage in the medal selector. The passage sensor 46, the insertion sensor 44a, and the insertion sensor 44b are provided in the medal selector from the upstream side. Further, the blocker 45 described above is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the closing sensor 44a (lower side of the closing sensor 44a in FIG. 2).

When the medal M enters the medal selector, it is first detected by the passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of medal clogging or goto action, and detects the medal M for a predetermined time (predetermined) from the time when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M. Further, when the medal M is no longer detected after the elapse of the predetermined time, it is determined that the medal M is normal. On the other hand, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a lapse of a predetermined time after detecting the medal, it is determined that the medal retention error occurs. Further, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M before the predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, it is determined that the medal M has passed illegally.

When the medal M flows down the medal passage, it reaches the position of the blocker 45. The blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side in the medal passage. The blocker 45 forms a medal flow path so that the medal M can be detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b when the blocker 45 is in the on state (among the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is on). In other words, it has a role of sending the medal M that has moved from the upstream side to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b side without sending it out of the medal passage.

On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (of the output ports 52, the output port related to the blocker 45 is off), the blocker 45 moves so as to be displaced in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing in FIG. To form an opening (pit) in the medal passage. As a result, when the blocker 45 is off, the medal M falls from this opening immediately before reaching M3 and is sent out of the medal passage (M5 in FIG. 2). The medal M that has fallen from this opening is returned to the medal return port (not shown) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a.

For example, when the specified number of the game has already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, the blocker 45 is controlled to the off state because no more medals can be bet or credits. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in that state, it falls from the opening and is returned to the medal return opening.
On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the opening is closed by the blocker 45, so that the medal M flowing down in the medal passage passes over the blocker 45 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. It becomes possible to move to the side.

In the present embodiment, the blocker 45 is arranged as shown in FIG. 2, but the arrangement is not limited to this. Regardless of the on / off state of the blocker 45, the medal M can be detected by the passage sensor 46, and when the blocker 45 is on, the medal M can be guided to the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and When the blocker 45 is in the off state, the medal M may be sent to the medal return port without being detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. In other words, the blocker 45 may be located between the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44a.

Further, the passage sensor 46 may be located on the upstream side of the blocker 45, and is arranged at a position where the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 can be detected even when the blocker 45 is off. Just do it. Further, in FIG. 2, the passage sensor 46 is arranged so that the medal M can be detected when the medal M is located at the M2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal M is further downstream than the position of the M2. It is also possible to arrange the passage sensor 46 so as to detect the medal M when moving to.

The throw-in sensors 44a and 44b are sensors for detecting the medal M that has passed through the blocker 45, and these two sensors are installed at a predetermined distance from each other. First, when the medal M reaches the position of M3, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side can detect the medal M (turns from off to on). When the medal M further flows down, the insertion sensor 44b then detects the medal M (turns from off to on). By determining the on / off timing of these two insertion sensors 44a and 44b, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal M is normal. When the medal M reaches the position of M4, it is not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. The medal M that has passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b is sent to the hopper 35.

In FIG. 2, the medal selector is designed as follows.
First, the position of the medal M, that is, the position of the medal M from the moment when the medal M becomes invisible when the medal selector is viewed from the front, that is, the position of the moment when the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b. The time until reaching (the movement locus is shown by the dotted line in FIG. 2) is set to the time T2. It is a value when the medal M is located at M1 and the hand is released from the medal M (at the initial velocity "0") and released downward. Therefore, the speed when the medal M is located at M2 exceeds "0".

Further, the acceleration of the medal M increases as it moves further downward from the position of M2. On the other hand, in FIG. 2, an impact member (not shown in FIG. 2) is provided at a portion where the medal passage is bent from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction. When the medal M comes into contact with the impact member, the speed of the medal M is decelerated so as to move toward the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
Then, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M3 (the moment when it is detected by the insertion sensor 44a) to the moment when it is located at M4 (the moment when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b) is set to the time T3. ..

<First Embodiment (A)>
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a time chart for explaining the first embodiment (A) of the present embodiment.
FIG. 3 shows the voltage level when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned off (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off or when a power failure occurs).
In FIG. 3, the voltage when the power supply is normally turned on is defined as the supply level V0. At the supply level V0, the slot machine 10 operates normally.

FIG. 3 shows an example in which the power supply is cut off (the event that the power supply is cut off occurs) at the time S11. In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the voltage drops to the power failure detection level V1 at time T0.
The time T0 from when the power failure occurs (time S11; supply level V0) to when the power failure is detected (time S12; power failure detection level V1) is at least 20 interrupts (1 interrupt time 2.235 ms × 20). It is designed to have an interrupt (interrupt = 44.7 ms) or more.
A voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50. Then, when the power supply voltage becomes the power failure detection level V1 or less, which is a predetermined value, a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and the power supply is detected by detecting whether or not the signal is input. Detect a disconnection.

When the voltage further drops from the power failure detection level V1 and becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
In the example of FIG. 3, at time S13, the voltage level reaches the drive voltage limit V2 of the main CPU 55, and then drops to Low. Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power off processing when the voltage becomes less than the drive voltage limit V2, when the power off occurs at time S11, the power off processing can be completed by at least time S13. Is set to.

Further, the power cutoff is detected within the interrupt process executed every 2.235 ms, but when the power failure is detected for two consecutive interrupts, the power cutoff process is executed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in FIG. 3, the time S12 is the timing at which it is determined that the voltage is equal to or lower than the power cutoff detection level V1 by the interrupt processing twice in succession, and it is detected that the power cutoff has occurred. Then, in the next interrupt process, the power cutoff process is executed.
In the interrupt processing, the following processing is executed. First, it is determined whether or not a power failure is detected, and when a power failure is detected, the process shifts to the power cut process (without shifting to the normal interrupt process). In the power off processing, first, the output port 52 is turned off. The process of turning off the output port 52 turns off the blocker 45. Further, stack pointer saving processing, power off processing flag (flag for determining whether or not normal power off has been performed) set processing, RWM53 checksum execution processing, RWM53 write-protection processing, etc. After executing sequentially, it becomes a reset waiting state (loop processing state). By design, this reset waiting state is a state in which no processing is performed.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3, the power cutoff process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off in the interrupt process next to the interrupt process (time S12) in which the power failure is detected.
It should be noted that the power cutoff process is not limited to the execution of the power cutoff process in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power failure is detected, and the power supply cutoff process may be executed in the interrupt process in which the power failure is detected. In this case, "T1 = S12-S11".

On the other hand, FIG. 3 also shows the medal positions (M2, M4) after the medals have been inserted. In FIG. 2, it is assumed that the player releases the medal M while the medal M is in the position of M1. In this case, the medal M falls at the initial velocity "0". As a result, the medal M is released into the medal selector. Then, in FIG. 3, the time S11 when the power supply is cut off coincides with the time when the medal M reaches the position of M2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M4 is T2, but similarly in FIG. 3, the time T2 elapses from the moment when the medal M is located at M2. Later, it is assumed that the medal M is located at M4.
In this case, the present embodiment is designed to satisfy the relationship of "T2>T1".

Therefore, if a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process is executed before the medal M reaches M4, and the closing sensor 44b does not detect the medal M. Therefore, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M is sent to the medal return port (lower plate) without being detected by the insertion sensor 44b. Therefore, the medal M does not normally pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the medal M is swallowed, but after the power failure occurs (after the time S11), the medal M "1" addition ("1" addition to the bet or credit) processing is executed. Not done. This eliminates the possibility of betting or credit processing being executed after a power outage occurs.

For example, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 elapses (during the power off processing), when the medal M is located immediately before M4 in FIG. 2 (medal M). After passing through the position of M3), the medal M is detected by the charging sensor 44a, but is not detected by the charging sensor 44b, and the power is turned off.
Further, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the time T1 elapses (during the power off processing), the medal M is located upstream of the position of M3 in FIG. At that time, the power of the medal M is turned off without being detected by either the charging sensor 44a or the charging sensor 44b.

Further, in FIG. 2, the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M3 is defined as the time T2'.
In this case, it is preferable to design so as to satisfy the relationship of "T2'>T1".
In the case of designing in the above relationship, if a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, when the medal M reaches M3, the power cut process is executed and the blocker 45 is turned off. ing. Therefore, the medal M is sent out of the medal passage without being detected by the insertion sensor 44a, and is sent to the medal return port.

Here, the difference between the prior art and the first embodiment (A) will be described.
Conventionally, when a power failure occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the medal M has already passed the position of the insertion sensor 44b when the power failure is detected and the blocker 45 is turned off. Therefore, after the power failure occurred, the medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process) was executed. However, it is not preferable to execute the medal addition process after the power is cut off. This is because after the power outage occurs, all processes related to the progress of the game should be stopped promptly.
Therefore, according to the first embodiment (A), even if the player inserts the medal M from the medal insertion slot 47 and the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2 (immediately after insertion) Since the medal "1" addition process is not executed, the function of the slot machine 10 can be enhanced.

<First Embodiment (B)>
The first embodiment (B) defines the relationship between the input sensors 44a and 44b and the power failure.
FIG. 4 is a front view showing a process from the time when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until the medal M is not detected by the insertion sensor 44b. In FIG. 4, the arrow direction indicates the traveling (flowing) direction of the medal M.
FIG. 4A shows a diagram at the moment when the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. At this time, the closing sensor 44a is the moment when the closing sensor 44a is turned from off to on, and the closing sensor 44b remains off. This position corresponds to M3 in FIG.

Next, when the medal M advances to the left side in FIG. 4 and reaches the state shown in FIG. 4 (b), the insertion sensor 44a remains in the state of detecting the medal M, and the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M. Will be. Therefore, in FIG. 4B, the closing sensor 44a is on, and the closing sensor 44b is the moment when the closing sensor 44b is turned from off to on.
In FIG. 4, even when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M overlap, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b and the medal M are shown by solid lines, but the medal M and the insertion sensor 44a and It does not represent the positional relationship of 44b. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged on the front side or the back side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 4 with respect to the medal M.

When the medal M further progresses and the state shown in FIG. 4C is reached, the medal M is detected by both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, the closing sensor 44a in this case is on, and the closing sensor 44b is also on.
Here, the diameter of the medal M is, for example, 25 mm (so-called 25 pie (φ)) in the general specification and 30 mm (so-called 30 pie (φ)) in the special specification. Therefore, it is necessary to set the distance between the input sensors 44a and 44b so that the state shown in FIG. 4C can be obtained. Here, as will be described later, whether or not the state of FIG. 4C, that is, the time when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are on (detecting the medal M) is within a predetermined range. It is determined whether or not it is judged as a medal insertion error. Therefore, the distance between the closing sensors 44a and 44b also differs depending on how the time when both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are turned on is set.

When the medal M further advances from the state of FIG. 4C, the insertion sensor 44a does not detect the medal M as shown in FIG. 4D. In this case, the closing sensor 44a is the moment when the closing sensor 44a is turned from on to the turning off, and the closing sensor 44b remains on. As the medal M progresses further, as shown in FIG. 4 (e), the insertion sensor 44b does not detect the medal M. Therefore, in this case, the closing sensor 44a remains off, and the closing sensor 44b is the moment when the closing sensor 44b is turned from on to off. The position of the medal M in FIG. 4 (e) corresponds to M4 in FIG.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing on / off of the input sensors 44a and 44b in a time chart. In FIG. 5, the time S21 is the moment when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off (the closing sensor 44b remains off), and corresponds to the timing of FIG. 4A.
Next, the time at the moment (FIG. 4B) when the insertion sensor 44b detects the medal M (turns from off to on) is defined as S22. Furthermore, the time at the moment (FIG. 4 (d)) when the insertion sensor 44a does not detect the medal M (from on to off) is defined as S23. Further, the time at the moment (FIG. 4 (e)) when the insertion sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M (from on to off) is defined as S24.

Here, if the time Ta (between time S21 and S23) during which the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 1), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passage error has occurred.

Further, the time Tb (between times S22 and S23) during which both the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the medal M is within the range of 4.47 ms (2 interrupts) or more and less than 118.455 ms (53 interrupts). If (condition 2), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, it determines that a medal passage error has occurred.

Furthermore, if the time Tc (between time S22 and S24) during which the input sensor 44b detects the medal M is within the range of 6.705 ms (3 interrupts) or more and less than 185.505 ms (83 interrupts). (Condition 3), the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and if it is out of this range, a medal passing error occurs.
When all of the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, it is determined that the passage of the medal M is normal, and when at least one condition is not satisfied, a medal passage error occurs.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, when both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are turned off (time S24), the closing monitoring counter is subtracted by "1".
Here, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "+1" when the passage sensor 46 described above detects the medal M, and when the medal normally passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b (both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are off). → On → Off. Therefore, at time S24.), The counter is set to “-1”. That is, in the normal state, "1" and "0" are repeated.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 does not detect the medal M and only the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 determines that the medal passage error occurs. To do.

Further, when the passage sensor 46 detects the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, the passage sensor 46 further detects the medal M. Then, when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "2" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error occurs. For example, when the normal value of the input monitoring counter is set to "0" to "2" and the input monitoring counter becomes "3" or more, the main control board 50 determines that a medal jam error occurs. Be done.
The closing monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state.

In FIG. 5, at time S24, when the insertion sensor 44b is turned from on to off, the insertion monitoring counter is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined that the medal M has passed normally, the main control board 50 inserts the medal. Perform processing (bet processing or credit processing). For example, if the number of bets is less than the specified number at that time, the "1" addition process of the number of bets is executed. Specifically, when the specified number in the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "0", the number of bets is changed from "0" by the "1" addition process of the number of bets. Update to "1".

Further, at that time, when the number of bets has already reached the specified number and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number "50", the processing of adding "1" to the number of credits is executed. For example, when the number of credits at that time is "10", the number of credits is updated to "11".
When the number of bets reaches the specified number and the number of credits reaches the maximum number of "50", the main control board 50 turns off the blocker 45. As a result, even if the medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal M is returned. In other words, in that case, even if the medal M is inserted, it is not detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

In FIG. 5, in addition to turning on / off the on / off sensors 44a and 44b, the timings when a power failure occurs and when a power failure is detected are displayed. In FIG. 5, Examples 1 and 2 are shown, and the case where the power is cut off occurs at the timing (time S21) when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off is taken as an example.
Then, in Example 1, the power failure is detected after the time T1 elapses from the time S21 when the power failure occurs. Here, in Example 1, "T1>T3" is set. Therefore, when the power-on sensor 44a detects the medal M at the moment when the power-off occurs, the power-off process is started after the medal M "1" addition process has already been executed.

Here, the time T3 from the time S21 to S24 can be represented by "Ta + Tc-Tb". Therefore, the minimum time of time T3 corresponds to 4 interrupts and is "8.94 ms".
The maximum time of time T3 corresponds to 113 interrupts and is "252.555 ms".
Then, in Example 1, the power cutoff process is always set to be executed after the time S24 has elapsed. Therefore, for example, the time T1 from the occurrence of the power off (time S21) to the execution of the power off processing is set to be 114 interrupts or more.

With the above settings, even if the power is cut off at the moment (time S21) when the insertion sensor 44a detects the medal M, the power off processing is executed after the "1" addition processing of the medal M is executed. , The medal M is successfully bet or credited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from being swallowed.

Further, Example 2 is an example in which, contrary to Example 1, the power off processing is executed before the “1” addition processing of the medal M is executed. That is, in Example 2, the relationship is set so that “T1 <T3”.
As described above, the time T3 from the times S21 to S24 corresponds to 4 interrupts in the minimum time. Therefore, in order to satisfy the relationship of "T1 <T3", it is necessary to execute the power off processing within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of the power off. However, since it is difficult to set the power off processing to be executed within 3 interrupts from the occurrence of the power off, the minimum time Tc is set to be longer than 4 interrupts. For example, the minimum time of time Tc may be set to 15 interrupts. Then, if the time T1 from the occurrence of the power off (time S21) to the power off processing is set to about 10 interrupts, when the power off occurs at the time S21, the power off processing is executed before the time S24. It becomes possible.

When the power off processing is executed, the medal M "1" addition (bet or credit) processing is not executed thereafter. Therefore, in Example 2, even if the closing sensor 44a detects the medal M at the time S21 (when the power is cut off), the “1” addition process of the medal M1 is not executed. As a result, there is a demerit that the medal M is swallowed, but as described in the first embodiment (A), after the power is cut off, the medal M "1" addition process or the like is not executed. , The power cutoff process can be executed as soon as possible.

<First Embodiment (C)>
The first embodiment (C) defines the relationship between the payout sensors 37a and 37b and the power failure.
When adding medals to be paid out to credits, the storage area for the number of credits provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is updated without driving the hopper motor 36. Further, the value indicated by the credit number display LED 76 is updated so that the number corresponds to the number of credits stored in the storage area.

Then, when the medal is paid out after the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out the medal from the hopper 35 (discharge from the payout port). In this case, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are configured to detect on / off each time one medal is paid out. When the on / off detection result by the payout sensors 37a and 37b is within the normal range, it is determined that one medal M has been correctly paid out, and when the detection result is not within the normal range, the medal M is determined. Is not correctly paid out, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error occurs.

FIG. 6 is a plan view illustrating an operation when the medal M is paid out from the medal payout device. Although not shown in FIG. 6, a hopper disc (a substantially disk-shaped rotating disc) is attached to the bottom surface of the hopper 35, and the hopper disc is rotated by driving the hopper motor 36. The hopper disc is formed with a plurality of openings capable of holding medals M along the outer circumference of the hopper disc. Then, the medal M in the hopper 35 is configured to enter the opening of the hopper disc. When the hopper motor 36 is driven in this state, the hopper disc rotates and the medals M held in the opening of the hopper disc are ejected one by one. The medal M is ejected, and a new medal M in the hopper 35 enters the empty opening.

In FIG. 6, the medal M located at M1 shows the medal immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disc. Both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b are components constituting the medal payout device. The fixed shaft 38a is a shaft that does not move when the medal M is paid out. On the other hand, the movable shaft 38b is a shaft that reciprocates each time one medal M is paid out. In the no-load state, the movable shaft 38b is arranged at a position shown by a solid line in the figure, and is fixed by a spring (not shown in FIG. 6, which corresponds to the spring 39b in FIG. 7 described later). It is urged to the 38a side. Immediately after being ejected from the opening of the hopper disc, the medal M (M1) is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.
In the state where the medal M is arranged at the position (M1) shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 and is in contact with both the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, the medal M is between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b. Narrower than the diameter. Therefore, at this point, the medal M cannot pass between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

In FIG. 6, a pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M discharged from the opening of the hopper disc. Then, when a pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M, the medal M becomes movable in the F1 direction, and the movable shaft 38b is pushed in the F2 direction in the drawing by the pushing force. The fixed shaft 38a does not move. As a result, the movable shaft 38b moves in the F2 direction in the drawing while maintaining the state of contact with the medal M. Further, the movable shaft 38b moves between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b to a position where the medal M can pass. In other words, the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is wider than the diameter of the medal M. The position of the movable shaft 38b at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in the figure.

As a result, the medal M passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and is discharged in the F1 direction (medal payout port side) in the drawing. The medal M at this time is shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 6 (M2). When the medal M is ejected, the force pushing the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction is released. As a result, the movable shaft 38b is returned to the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6 again by the force of the spring.

FIG. 7 is a plan view illustrating an on (detection) / off (non-detection) state of the payout sensors 37a and 37b when the medal M is paid out in the medal payout device. FIG. 7 shows how the movable piece 39a moves in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (a) each time one medal M is paid out.

FIG. 7A shows the state of the movable piece 39a when the movable shaft 38b is arranged at the position (initial position) indicated by the solid line in FIG. In the drawing, the movable piece 39a is rotatably attached around the central axis and is urged clockwise by the spring 39b.
When the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise in the drawing, the movable shaft 38b in FIG. 6 is urged toward the fixed shaft 38a in the drawing.
In the state where the movable piece 39a is urged clockwise by the spring 39b in FIG. 7 and no force other than the tensile force of the spring 39b is applied to the movable piece 39a, the movable piece 39a has a predetermined stopper (shown). Therefore, it is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7 (a).

As shown in FIG. 7A, a payout sensor 37a (upper side in the figure) and 37b (lower side in the figure) are arranged on the left side of the movable piece 39a. The movable piece 39a is formed so as to extend toward the payout sensor 37a and 37b, and when stopped at the position shown in FIG. 7A, the tip portion thereof is detected by the payout sensor 37a. ing.
In FIG. 7, the payout sensors 37a and 37b both show the housing of the sensor, and the light emitting / receiving unit (eyes of the sensor) is not shown. In this respect, it differs from the input sensors 44a and 44b of FIGS.

Here, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is detected, and is in the off state (for example, FIG. 7B) when the movable piece 39a is no longer detected. It is set to be.
Similarly, the payout sensor 37b is in an off state (for example, FIG. 7A) when the movable piece 39a is not detected, and is turned on (for example, FIG. 7C) when the movable piece 39a is detected. Is set to.
In the state of FIG. 7A, the payout sensor 37a detects the movable piece 39a and is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39a and is in the off state.

As described with reference to FIG. 6, when the pushing force in the F1 direction acts on the medal M in FIG. 6, the movable shaft 38b starts to move in the F2 direction in FIG. 6, but the movable shaft 38b is thus described. When it moves, in FIG. 7A, the movable piece 39a starts rotating counterclockwise against the urging force of the spring 39b. Then, when the movable piece 39a moves to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out from the inside of the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the payout sensor 37a does not detect the movable piece 39a, so that the payout sensor 37a is turned off. Further, even if the movable piece 39a rotates to the position shown in FIG. 7B, the tip of the movable piece 39a does not reach the payout sensor 37b. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7B, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

In FIG. 6, when the movable shaft 38b further moves in the F2 direction and reaches the position of the alternate long and short dash line portion in FIG. 6 (the position where the medal M can pass through the gap between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b), FIG. In 7, the movable piece 39a further rotates counterclockwise to reach the position shown in FIG. 7 (c). As a result, the tip of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b detects the movable piece 39a. Therefore, in the state of FIG. 7C, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state.

In FIG. 6, when the medal M is further ejected from the position of M2, the force for urging the movable shaft 38b in the F2 direction in FIG. 6 disappears, so that the movable shaft 38b is positioned at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. Return. The return force at this time is due to the force of the spring 39b in FIG. As a result, in FIG. 7, the movable piece 39a rotates clockwise, the tip of the movable piece 39a goes out of the payout sensor 37b, and the payout sensor 37b does not detect the movable piece 39b. FIG. 7D shows the state at this time. In the state of FIG. 7D, the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.

Then, when the movable piece 39a further rotates clockwise, the tip end portion of the movable piece 39a enters the payout sensor 37a, and the movable piece 39a is detected by the payout sensor 37a. As a result, the state (initial state) of FIG. 7A is restored. In the state of FIG. 7A, as described above, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. When returning to this position, the movable shaft 38b returns to the solid line position in FIG.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b in a time chart.
In FIG. 8, it is assumed that the medal payout process has started and the hopper motor drive signal is in the ON state.
In FIG. 8, before the time S31, the state shown in FIG. 7A is shown. When the time S31 is reached, the state shown in FIG. 7B is reached, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off (the payout sensor 37b is off). Next, when the time S32 is reached, the payout sensor 37b is turned on. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7 (c). In FIG. 8, the time from time S31 to S32 is Td.

The payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state until the time S33, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state at the time S33. This state is the state shown in FIG. 7 (d). In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S33 is defined as Te. Then, when the time S34 is reached, the state returns to the state (initial position) of FIG. 7A, and the payout sensor 37a is turned on. In FIG. 8, the time from time S32 to S34 is Tf.

The main control board 50 monitors the on / off time of the payout sensors 37a and 37b in the payout process, and if it is not within the predetermined time range, determines that a medal payout error occurs.
For example, in FIG. 8, the time Td is set to less than 29.055 ms (13 interrupts). Therefore, if the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt after the payout sensor 37a is turned off, it is judged to be normal, but if the payout sensor 37b is turned on by the 12th interrupt. If not, a medal payout error will occur.

Further, the time Te in which the payout sensor 37a is in the off state and the payout sensor 37b is in the on state is set to 11.175 ms (5 interrupts) or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Te until the payout sensor 37b is turned off is monitored, and when the time Te is not within the above predetermined time range, the time Te is monitored. , The main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, after the payout sensor 37b is turned on (time S32), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on (time S34) is 11.175 ms (5 interrupts). ) Or more and less than 62.58 ms (28 interrupts). Therefore, when the time S32 is reached (when the payout sensor 37b is turned on), the time Tf until the payout sensor 37b is turned off and the payout sensor 37a is turned on is monitored, and the time Tf is set. If it is not within the predetermined time range, the main control board 50 determines that a medal payout error has occurred.

Further, in FIG. 8, similarly to FIGS. 3 and 5, the time from the occurrence of the power off to the power off processing is also displayed.
First, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off at the timing of time S31, that is, at the timing when the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, in the example of FIG. 3, an example of detecting a power failure with 20 interrupts has been described, but in the example of FIG. 8 (first embodiment (C)), at least after the time S34 has elapsed (time from time S31). It is set to detect the power failure (when T1 has elapsed) and execute the power failure process.

Here, since the maximum time (normal time) of the time "Td + Tf" is the "12 + 27 = 39" interrupt, the time T1 from the power off to the execution of the power off processing is set to, for example, 40 interrupts (89.4 ms). Set. With this setting, even if the power off occurs at the moment when the payout sensor 37a is turned off, the power off process can be started after the payout process of one medal is normally completed. That is, it can be set to "(Td + Tf) <T1".

Conventionally, a power failure (power outage, etc.) may occur during the medal payout process. In this case, depending on the timing of the medal payout process and the power failure, it is determined that the medal has been paid out even though the medal has not been paid out, which may cause a loss to the player.
On the other hand, in the first embodiment (C), even if the power is cut off during the medal payout process, the medals can be paid out correctly.

In particular, even if a power failure occurs at the timing of time S31 in FIG. 8 when the medal payout process is started, the power failure is detected after one medal payout process is completed, and the process shifts to the power cut process. Therefore, for example, the power off processing is not executed when the payout sensor 37a is in the off state or when the payout sensor 37b is in the on state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the power off process from being executed in the middle of the medal payout process and the medal payout process being stopped before the (one) medal payout process is normally completed.

If the time T1 is set longer than necessary, the next medal payout process may be executed. Therefore, the power cutoff process is executed at least before the next medal payout process is executed. In FIG. 8, for example, assuming that the cycle of one medal payout process is time T4 and the payout sensor 37a changes from the on state to the off state at the timing of time S35, it is set to be “T1 <T4”.

<Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment relates to a gate mark formed on a substrate case of the main control substrate 50.
In the prior art, the shape, size, position, etc. of the gate mark of the substrate case have been determined by the mold designer at the time of mold production exclusively for the convenience of mold manufacturing.
However, since the gate mark is an uneven surface, for example, even if a hole is made aiming at the gate mark, it may not be visually discernible (not noticed).

Then, if the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is arranged directly under the gate mark, a hole is made in the gate mark and a wire is passed through the hole to access the main CPU 55 (goto action). Was done). In particular, when the gate mark has a shape that is thinner than the other parts, it becomes easier to make a hole than the other parts.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent the goto action from being performed by using the gate mark of the substrate case.

FIG. 9 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50 and the board case 56 (upper cover 57 and lower cover 58) in an exploded manner.
The substrate case 56 is composed of an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58, both of which are (injection) molded products made of transparent resin. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is housed inside, the state of the main control board 50 can be clearly visually confirmed from the outside of the board case 56.

On the main control board 50, electronic components such as the above-mentioned main CPU 55, management information display LED 74 (4-digit LED, also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display"), and set value display LED 73 are mounted. It is installed. Many electronic components such as the above-mentioned RWM53 and ROM54 are mounted on the main control board 50, but the illustration is omitted in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 9, failure confirmation LEDs for the bet switches 40a and 40b, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the passage sensor 46 in the medal selector, and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are mounted on the main control board 50. Has been done. The failure confirmation LED is not limited to this.
For example, the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 is off when the start switch 41 is off, and when the start switch 41 is operated (when the start switch 41 is operated and the sensor detects on). ) Is an LED that turns on (lights up).

The failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 and the failure confirmation LED of other operation switches and sensors described later are turned off when the operation switch is operated (when the sensor detects on) and when it is off. It may be configured to light up.

Further, two LEDs for checking the failure of the bet switches 40a and 40b are provided for the bet switch 40a and 40b, and are turned off when the bet switch 40 is not operated, and the bet switch 40 is operated. It is an LED that lights up when it receives the electric signal at that time.
Furthermore, a total of three failure confirmation LEDs for the passage sensor 46 and the input sensors 44a and 44b are provided for each sensor, and are turned off when the medal is not detected, and turned on when the medal is detected. It is an LED.
Then, for example, the administrator operates the start switch 41 and confirms that the failure confirmation LED of the start switch 41 mounted on the main control board 50 is lit / extinguished, so that the start switch 41 has a failure (energization). Can be confirmed. The same applies to other switches and sensors.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like when the front door is opened during normal operation (setting is not being changed and setting is not being confirmed). .. Alternatively, the failure confirmation may be executed by opening the front door and executing a predetermined operation after a door open error occurs. Further, it may be turned on / off by operating the start switch 41 or the like at all times (even when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed).

Further, the model number of the board is displayed (printed or the like) on the main control board 50. Although not shown in FIG. 9, the model number and the like are similarly displayed on the upper surfaces of the RWM 53 and the ROM 54.
Furthermore, screw holes 50a for passing screws are formed at the four corners of the main control board 50.
On the other hand, bosses 58c for screwing are formed at the four corners inside the lower surface of the lower cover 58. When the main control board 50 is placed on the lower cover 58, the screw hole 50a and the boss 58c overlap each other, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case 58 by screwing the screw through the screw hole 50a to the boss 58c. can do.

When the upper cover 57 is overlapped with the lower cover 58 in this state, the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed in a shape in which the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted (in FIG. 9, the specific shape of the fitting portion is not shown). Further, caulking portions 57a are provided on both the left and right sides of the upper cover 57 in the drawing. Similarly, caulking portions 58a are provided on the left and right rows of the lower cover 58 in the drawing. In FIG. 9, the specific shapes and detailed shapes of the crimped portions 57a and 58b are not shown.

When the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted and the caulking portions 57a and 58a are used for caulking, after that, at least a part of the caulking portions 57a and 58a must be destroyed (unless it is plastically deformed). The cover 57 and the lower cover 58 cannot be opened.
As a result, the security of the main control board 50 can be ensured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, gate marks 57b are provided at two places on the outer surface of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. In the board case 56 (the state where the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted), the side where the main control board 50 is housed is referred to as "inside", and the side exposed to the outside is referred to as "outside". ..
In FIG. 9, the gate marks 57b are provided at two places, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gate marks 57b may be provided at any place.

Here, the "gate" is a sprue when resin (hot water) is poured into the mold during resin molding, and the gate mark is a mark that remains at the boundary between the gate and the molded product after resin molding. is there.
When the substrate case 56 (upper cover 57, lower cover 58) has a shape as shown in FIG. 9, it is inexpensive to use a mold that is divided in the vertical direction in FIG. Further, in the case of a multi-cavity mold, it is preferable to use a pin gate, and from the viewpoint of the fluidity of the resin (hot water), it is preferable to provide a gate near the center of the molded product. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the gate positions of the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are formed not on the side surface but on the upper surface in FIG.

Further, considering the cutting of the protrusion of the gate mark at the time of molding, it is preferable to provide the gate mark on the outside.
From the above, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 is provided on the outer side of the upper surface.
Further, for the same reason as described above, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside of the lower surface (the surface opposite to the visible surface in FIG. 9). In FIG. 9, the gate marks 58b of the lower cover 58 are provided at two places like the gate marks 57b of the upper cover 57, but may be provided at one place, or may be provided at three or more places. May be good.

Further, when the resin (hot water) is flowed from the gate into the mold, if the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold is not uniform and a cooling time difference occurs, the molded product may be warped and deformed. Therefore, it is preferable that the gate position of the molded product is arranged at a position where the spread of the resin (hot water) in the mold becomes uniform. Furthermore, when the gates are provided at a plurality of locations, it is preferable that the distance from the end of the molded product to the gate and the distance between the gates are as uniform as possible.

In FIG. 10, FIG. 10A is a plan view showing the positional relationship between the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 of the substrate case 56 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 and the main control board 50. FIG. 10A shows a state in which the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 (a state in which the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58 and the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted together. It is a plan view seen from above. Further, the main control board 50 is seen through from the upper surface side of the upper cover 57.

Furthermore, (b) shows Example 1 of the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. (A), and (c) shows Example 2 of the cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. Is shown. In these cross-sectional views, hatching is omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 10A, in a state where the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56, in the vertical direction (main control board 50 side) (directly below) of the upper cover 57 from the two gate marks 57b. The model number display, management information display LED74, set value display LED73, and main CPU 55 (socket) are set not to be located. As described above, the RWM53, the ROM 54, and the failure confirmation LED are also mounted on the main control board 50, but it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above these.

The gate mark 57 is arranged as described above for the following reasons.
It is necessary to visually confirm whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with even after the slot machine 10 has been installed on the market. In particular, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the main CPU 55 or the like (including RWM53 and ROM54; the same applies hereinafter) is suitable, and whether or not it has been modified by a goto act. Further, since the main control board 50 is housed in the board case 56 and the board case 56 is sealed as described above, it is necessary to visually confirm the main control board 50 from the outside of the board case 56. is there.
Then, the board case 56 containing the main control board 50 is attached inside the housing of the slot machine 10, for example, inside the back surface. This is because the numerical values displayed by the set value display LED 73 and the management information display LED 74 are installed at a position where they can be easily seen.

Therefore, it is considered that the administrator of the slot machine 10 visually observes the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) from the direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the upper cover 57. That is, it is considered that the substrate case 56 (main control substrate 50) is visually inspected as shown in FIG. 10A. For this reason, if the main CPU 55 or the like is arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b, the gate mark 57 may hinder its visibility. In particular, the information displayed (printed, etc.) on the upper surface of the main CPU 55 or the like can be visually recognized without disturbing the visibility.

Since the entire upper cover 57 is molded from transparent resin, visibility is not completely impaired even directly under the gate mark 57b. However, as shown in FIGS. 10B and 10C, the cross section of the gate mark 57b becomes an uneven surface, which reduces the visibility directly under the gate mark 57b (it becomes worse than the flat surface). That is true. Further, in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 10B, since the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface, whitening or the like may occur due to stress at the time of cutting the resin. Therefore, even in this case, the visibility directly under the gate mark 57b is hindered.

Further, since the upper surface of the upper cover 57 is a transparent and smooth surface having no unevenness except for the gate mark 57b, even if a hole is made by a goto action, for example, it can be easily noticed visually.
On the other hand, the gate mark 57b is an uneven surface obtained by cutting the resin. Therefore, if a hole is made in the gate hole 57b and then the hole is sealed with, for example, a resin material, it may not be possible to easily visually determine whether or not the hole has been made in the gate mark 57b. For this reason, there is a possibility that a goto act using the gate mark 57b will be performed.

On the other hand, when a hole is made in the gate mark 57b, if the main CPU 55 or the like is located in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b, it becomes easy to perform a goto action. Therefore, if the main CPU 55 or the like is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b, it becomes difficult to access the main CPU 55 or the like, and it is possible to make the goto action difficult.

Further, since the model number displayed (printed, etc.) on the surface of the main control board 50 is also important information for checking the presence or absence of fraud, the model number is displayed in order to make the model number easy to confirm (easy to read). The gate mark 57b is not placed directly above the area. Further, when the gate mark 57b is directly above the model number display, a hole is made in the gate mark 57b to access the inside of the board case 56, and the model number display is prevented from being tampered with. The gate mark 57b should not be placed directly above the model number display.

Further, regarding the set value display LED 73, it is necessary to see the displayed numerical value when changing the setting or confirming the setting. Further, also for the management information display LED 74, it is necessary to look at the displayed numerical values in order to confirm whether or not the advantageous section ratio, the accessory ratio, and the like are within an appropriate range. Therefore, the gate mark 57b is not arranged directly above these LEDs. Further, similarly to the above, in order to make a hole in the gate mark 57b by using the gate mark 57b and access the LED in the board case 56 from there, it is difficult for the goto action to be performed. The gate mark 57b is not placed on the top.

Further, with respect to the above-mentioned failure confirmation LED, the administrator of the slot machine 10 operates an operation switch to check whether or not the failure confirmation LED corresponding to the operation switch is lit, so that the visibility is improved. Therefore, it is preferable that the gate mark 57b is not located directly above the failure confirmation LED. Similar to the above, the failure confirmation LED is not arranged in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark 57b to make it difficult for the goto action to be performed.

In FIG. 10, each cross-sectional view of Example 1 shown in (b) and Example 2 shown in (c) has the same outer shape of the gate mark 57b. Then, in Example 1 of (b), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b remains a flat surface. On the other hand, in Example 2 of (c), the inside of the upper surface of the gate mark 57b is formed in a protruding shape (thickness).
The outside of the gate mark 57b has a protrusion 57d at the center thereof, and a recessed portion 57c formed so as to sink in a cylindrical shape at the outer peripheral portion thereof. The boundary between the gate and the molded product is connected at the time of molding, and when the molded product is separated from the mold, this boundary is cut with a cutter. Therefore, the upper end surface of the protrusion 57d is a cut surface by the cutter. There are two methods for cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product: a method of automatically cutting at the time of injection by a molding machine, and a method of cutting at a post-process.

Here, when cutting the boundary between the gate and the molded product, it is costly to process the cut surface into a completely smooth surface, in other words, to make the height of the protrusion 57d almost "0". It becomes expensive and difficult. Therefore, even if some height remains on the protrusion 57d, the recessed portion 57c is formed so as not to protrude above the outer surface of the upper surface of the upper cover 57. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, an assembling worker from being injured by the protrusion 57d when the upper cover 57 is touched.

As shown in FIG. 10B, when the recessed portion 57c is provided in the gate mark 57, the wall thickness of the upper cover 57 is reduced by that amount. As described above, if there is even a part having a thin wall thickness, there is a possibility that a hole is made in the recessed portion 57c to facilitate the goto action of accessing the inside of the substrate case 56.
Therefore, in Example 2 of FIG. 10C, a protrusion 57e is provided on the opposite side (inside) of the outer surface of the upper surface where the gate mark 57b is provided to prevent the wall thickness from becoming thin only at the recessed portion 57c. There is. If the protrusion 57e is not provided and the portion where the wall thickness is reduced is not provided, it is possible to make it difficult to make a hole in the recess 57c.

Further, the protrusion 57e not only contributes to countermeasures against fraud by preventing a part of the wall thickness of the gate mark 57b from becoming thin, but also functions as a dimple (hot water pool) at the time of molding. In FIG. 10 ((b)), when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate (position corresponding to the protrusion 57d) of the mold, when the resin (hot water) collides with the inside of the upper surface, the resin (hot water) of the resin (hot water) There is a risk that the flow will change rapidly and it will not be possible to flow stably. Therefore, by providing dimples (hot water pools) at positions facing the tip of the gate, it is possible to reduce the sudden change in the flow of the resin (hot water) when the resin (hot water) is injected from the gate. (Hot water) can flow stably. The protrusion 57e may have various shapes such as a quadrangular cross section, a triangular cross section, a trapezoidal cross section (in the case of FIG. 10C), and a dome cross section, and the protrusion 57e may be thinned by providing the recess 57c. Any shape may be used as long as it can prevent the above.

Regarding the visibility of the gate mark 57b in the vertical direction (directly below), it is better that the lower side of the gate mark 57 is smooth than the uneven shape. Therefore, the shape of FIG. 10 (b) is superior to the shape of FIG. 10 (c) in terms of visibility directly below the gate mark 57b. Further, the shape of FIG. 10B simplifies the shape of the mold because it is not necessary to form the portion corresponding to the protrusion 57e in the mold as compared with the shape of FIG. 10C. It can reduce the cost).

Further, the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 is also provided on the outside (lower side in FIG. 9). Furthermore, the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c shown in FIG. 10B are formed on the outside. This is because, as described above, it is more convenient in molding processing to provide the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c on the outside of the molded product.
Then, when the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower cover 58, the pin positions of the main CPU 55 and the like of the main control board 50 are set so as not to be positioned in the vertical direction of the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. This is to make a hole in the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 so that the pins of the main CPU 55 and the like cannot be accessed.
When the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 has the shape shown in FIG. 10 (c), the protrusion 57e in FIG. 10 (c) faces the pin side of the main control board 50, but the main It goes without saying that the pin protruding from the lower surface side of the control board 50 and the protrusion 57e are formed so as not to interfere (contact) with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the upper cover 57 and the lower cover 58 are fitted, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are heavy in the vertical direction. It is preferable to arrange (shift) so that they do not become. In particular, when the gate marks 57b and 58b shown in FIG. 10B are used, the wall thickness of a part of the gate marks 57b and 58b (dented portion 57c) becomes thin, but the part where the wall thickness becomes thin is the upper cover. By arranging the 57 and the lower cover 58 at positions where they do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the easily targeted portions from overlapping.
Further, when the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 overlap in the vertical direction, the position of the gate mark of the other cover can be known only by looking at one cover. turn into. In order to prevent this, the gate mark 57b of the upper cover 57 and the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58 are prevented from overlapping in the vertical direction.

<Third Embodiment>
In the third embodiment, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is temporarily disabled (disconnection). After that, it relates to the processing when the communication is restored or when the communication fails due to the influence of noise.
As described above, the control command transmission means 71 of the main control board 50 transmits commands such as a push order instruction number and information on the operated stop switch 42 to the sub control board 80. Then, the sub control board 80 outputs the effect based on the command received from the main control board 50, and updates the effect according to the operation of the operation switch during the game.

Here, there is a possibility that the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are disconnected and communication becomes impossible. The causes include poor contact and radio wave goto. When the sub control board 80 no longer receives a command from the main control board 50, the effect is stopped in the current state. Further, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 determines whether or not there is a disconnection in communication between the two. Therefore, the main control board 50 operates the game progress (bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42) even when a disconnection occurs between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80. Etc.), and the command transmission process is continued to the sub control board 80. On the other hand, when the sub control board 80 does not receive a command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 maintains the effect state at that time.
Even when the connection between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected, for example, during AT, the main control board 50 is pushed to the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function. Display instruction information. As a result, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order by looking at the pressing order instruction information even when the sub control board 80 is not functioning normally.
Further, since the player can compare the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 with the effect content (correct answer push order) displayed as an image on the image display device 23, both information are inconsistent. When this is done, it is possible to know that a problem has occurred in the image display by the sub control board 80.

For example, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game, the command transmitted from the main control board 50 can be received by the sub control board 80. Sometimes, suddenly, the production cannot be switched to the "N + 1" game. Even when the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the "N + 1" game has been started when the command related to the operation of the start switch 41 (command for notifying the start of the game) has not been received. This is because it cannot be determined. Therefore, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player may be misunderstood depending on the content of the effect.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is disconnected and then restored, the player is not misunderstood as much as possible, and the production is given a sense of discomfort. Output a production that does not exist.

FIG. 11 shows the operation of the main control board 50 according to the third embodiment (referred to as “main operation” in FIG. 11) and the display of the effect by the sub control board 80 (referred to as “sub display” in FIG. 11). It is a figure which shows the relationship with (), and 5 examples which consisted of pattern 1 (example 1) to pattern 5 (example 5) are illustrated.
In each of Patterns 1 to 5, communication is disabled in the middle of the "N" game (disconnection occurs), and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game.
Further, in the main operation of FIG. 11, the “bet” means when the bet switch 40 is operated and a specified number is effectively bet. Further, "start" means that the game is started by operating the start switch 41 after the specified number has been bet. Furthermore, for example, "right stop" means that the right stop switch 42 has been operated (the right reel 31 has stopped).

Further, in the sub-display, the "push order effect" means an effect of displaying the correct push order as an image in, for example, a game in which the push order bell or the push order replay is won. Specifically, for example, "right / left middle display" means an effect of notifying that the correct answer pressing order is "right / left middle". For example, "left middle display" is an effect after the left stop switch 42 is operated, and the second stop switch is left and the third stop switch 42 is inside. It means a production to notify.
Furthermore, for example, the "right stop effect" is an effect that the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped) when a command indicating that the right stop switch 42 is operated is received. means.

In pattern 1, when the start switch 41 is operated in the "N" game, the main control board 50 draws a winning combination as described above. In this game, "right, left, and middle" is an example of winning the push order bell, which is the correct push order. In this case, if the main control board 50 is in AT, the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number (command) corresponding to the correct push order "right, left, middle" to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a push order effect for displaying the correct push order of "right, left, middle" to the image display device 23.
Although not shown, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information corresponding to the correct answer push order "right, left, middle" on the acquired number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function).

Next, it is assumed that the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the first stop by looking at the correct answer pressing order (right stop). As a result, the right reel 31 is stopped, and a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect (right stop effect) in which the right stop switch 42 is operated (the right reel 31 is stopped), and displays the right-left middle display and the left-middle display (note that others). As the display of, "-middle left", "x middle left", etc. can be mentioned.).
Then, pattern 1 shows an example in which a disconnection occurs after the right reel 31 is stopped, and communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (sub disconnection). That is, it is an example in which communication becomes impossible during the game.

The main control board 50 can proceed with the game even if communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 becomes impossible (even if the sub control board 80 is not functioning). In the example of pattern 1, in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the left and middle stop switches 42 are operated (the left and middle reels 31 are stopped) after the disconnection occurs (left middle stop). ).

Next, it is assumed that the betting operation for the "N + 1" game is performed and the start switch 41 is operated. In the "N + 1" game, as in the "N" game, an example is shown in which the "right, left, middle" is the correct push order, and the push order bell (or push order replay) is won. In the "N + 1" game, as in the "N" game, an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the right and left middle pressing order is shown, but when a winning combination having the correct answer pressing order in the right and left is won. The result of the lottery may be any combination.

When the push order bell (or push order replay) having the correct push order is won in the "N + 1" game, the main control board 50 displays the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. Therefore, even if the correct answer pressing order is not displayed as an image on the image display device 23, the player can operate the stop switch 42 in the correct answer pressing order by the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Become.

In the "N + 1" game, the player shows an example in which the right stop switch 42 is first operated. After that, before operating the second left stop switch 42, it is assumed that the communication between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is restored.
As a result, when the player operates the left stop switch 42, which is the second stop switch 42, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the image display so as to correspond to the received command. That is, an image indicating that the left stop has been performed is displayed (left stop effect). Here, the sub-control board 80 is updated as a continuation of the effect already displayed, that is, as an effect of the "N" game.

Therefore, in reality, the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N + 1" game is operated, but the sub-control board 80 has the second stop switch 42 (left) of the "N" game. Outputs the effect when operated. Since the second correct answer pressing order in the "N" game is on the left, in this example, the operation is performed in the correct answer pressing order. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) and outputs the final middle display effect.

Then, in the "N + 1" game, when the last middle stop switch 42 is operated, a command to that effect is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect corresponding to the third stop of the "N" game, that is, a middle stop effect.
Even if the winning combination has the correct answer pressing order in the "N + 1" game and the correct answer pressing order is other than right, left, and middle, the effect is output as described above under the situation of pattern 1. Will be done. That is, in the "N + 1" game, when the push order operated by the player is right or left, even if the push order corresponds to the incorrect push order, the push order failure as in pattern 2 described later No production is output.

Furthermore, in the "N + 1" game, if a winning combination that does not have a correct push order is won, or even if the winning combination is not won, if the pushing order operated by the player is in the middle right or left, the above The same effect as is output. That is, even when the "N + 1" game does not have the correct answer pressing order, the sub-control board 80 indicates that the left stop switch 42 was operated after the communication was restored (in the example of pattern 1). When a command is received, a left stop effect (push order correct answer effect) is output, and a middle display is output.

Next, when a bet is made for the "N + 2" game and the "N + 2" game is started by operating the start switch 41, the main control board 50 causes the sub control board 80 to " "N + 2" Sends a command corresponding to the start of the game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 outputs the effect at the start of the "N + 2" game. Specifically, when the start switch 41 is operated, commands of the effect group number and the push order instruction number are transmitted to the sub control board 80. Upon receiving these commands, the sub-control board 80 performs a push order effect and a display of the correct push order as in the start of the "N" game.

From the above, in pattern 1, until the third stop of the "N + 1" game, the sub control board 80 is based on the command (of the "N + 1" game) received from the main control board 50, and is the "N" game. The production of "N + 2" is continuously output, and when the "N + 2" game is started, the production is updated to the "N + 2" game.
Further, the main control board 50 may transmit a command for the number of acquired sheets to the sub control board 80 at the end of the game, and the sub control board 80 may also display an image of the acquired number of sheets during AT. In such a case, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command of the acquired number of sheets at the end of the "N" game, that is, during the disconnection. Therefore, at the end of the "N" game, "N-1" The number of cards acquired at the end of the game remains displayed. Then, when the communication is restored and the command of the acquired number of sheets is received at the end of the "N + 1" game, the sub control board 80 updates the image display so as to be the acquired number of sheets at the end of the "N + 1" game. ..

In pattern 2, the main operation is the same as in pattern 1. Further, the timing of disconnection is the same as that of pattern 1, but the timing of returning communication is different from that of pattern 2. Pattern 2 is an example in which communication is restored after the left stop, which is the second stop, in the "N + 1" game.
In the pattern 2, the main operation and the sub display in the "N" game are the same as those in the pattern 1, so the description thereof will be omitted.
Next, in the "N + 1" game, the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right, left, and middle, but communication is restored after the second left stop.

Immediately before the communication is restored, the sub-control board 80 is outputting the right stop effect of the "N" game and the left middle display. In this state, communication is restored, and when the player operates the stop switch 42 (third stop) in the "N + 1" game, the command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command to stop in the middle while displaying the middle left, it determines that the order is incorrect and outputs a push order failure effect. In the third embodiment, after the push order failure effect is output, the subsequent push order effect and the like are not output.

In the "N + 1" game, assuming that the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle left and right, the communication is restored after the middle left stop, and then the right stop command is sub-controlled by the right stop. When transmitted to the board 80, the push order failure effect is output in the same manner as described above. Since the sub-control board 80 is in the process of outputting the right stop effect and the left middle display, if the right stop command is received at this point, it means that the same stop command is received twice in one game. .. Even in such a case, it is processed as a push order failure and the effect is output without performing error notification or the like.
Then, when the "N + 2" game is started as in the pattern 1, the command at the start of the "N + 2" game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 starts the production of the "N + 2" game.

In pattern 3, the main operation and sub-display of the "N" game are the same as in pattern 1.
Pattern 3 shows an example in which communication is restored after the first stop right and the second stop in the "N + 1" game. Therefore, in the "N + 1" game, after the communication is restored, the command of the left stop, which is the third stop, is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Since the sub control board 80 outputs the "left middle display" of the "N" game, if the command to stop left is received in this state, it is determined that the correct answer is pressed. Therefore, the sub control board 80 outputs the left stop effect (push order correct answer effect), and then outputs the middle display.

However, on the main control board 50 side, the "N + 1" game ends at the third left stop. Next, when the command shifts to the "N + 2" game and the command at the start of the "N + 2" game is transmitted to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 receives the command and receives the "N + 2" game. Switch to the production at the start. Therefore, the left stop effect and the middle display that have been output up to that point are cancelled. Further, even if the command at the start of the "N + 2" game is received during the output of the middle display, no error notification or the like is performed, and the effect at the start of the "N + 2" game is output according to the received command. ..

Pattern 4 is an example of displaying the number of remaining games during AT in the sub display. Further, in the pattern 4, the main operation, the disconnection timing, and the communication return timing are the same as those in the pattern 3.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games of the AT to the sub control board 80 at each game and at the start of the game. When the sub control board 80 receives the command of the remaining number of games of AT from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 updates the display of the remaining number of games of AT. During AT, the display of the number of remaining games is not performed independently, but is output together with the push order effect of pattern 3.

In pattern 4, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), the main control board 50 transmits a command for the remaining number of games during AT to the sub control board 80. Here, in the "N" game, it is assumed that the number of remaining AT games is 10 games.
The sub-control board 80 displays the number of remaining games (10 games remaining) during AT based on the command received from the main control board 50 at the start of the "N" game.
Then, if the wire is disconnected in the middle of the "N" game and the disconnection state continues even at the start of the "N + 1" game, the main control board 50 is subordinated at the start (start) of the "N + 1" game. Although the process for transmitting the command for the remaining number of games (9 games) during AT is executed to the control board 80, the sub control board 80 cannot receive the command (due to disconnection). Therefore, in the "N + 1" game, the "remaining 10 games" of the "N" game remains displayed.

Then, when the communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game (after the left middle stop) and the game shifts to the "N + 2" game, the main control board 50 is transferred to the sub control board 80 at the start of the "N + 2" game. On the other hand, the command of the remaining number of games (8 games) during AT is transmitted. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 10 games to the display of the remaining 8 games.

Pattern 5 is an example in which the main operation, disconnection timing, and communication return timing are the same as those in pattern 4, but the “N” game is the remaining one game of AT.
The main control board 50 transmits a command for the number of remaining games during AT (1 game remaining) to the sub control board 80 at the start of the “N” game (when the start switch 41 is operated). Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the remaining 1 game (from the display of the remaining 2 games up to that point).
When a disconnection occurs after the right stop of the "N" game, the main control board 50 has 0 remaining games during AT at the start of the "N + 1" game (when the start switch 41 is operated). A command indicating that it is a game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, but the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command (same as pattern 4). Therefore, at the start of the "N + 1" game, the display indicating that there is only one remaining AT game is continued.

Further, when the sub control board 80 ends the AT, the sub control board 80 outputs an AT end effect. The AT end effect is executed at the end of the game based on receiving a command (at the start of the game) that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 games.
However, in the example of pattern 5, since the sub-control board 80 has not received the command that the number of remaining games during AT is 0 games, the AT end effect is not output. Therefore, even at the end of the "N + 1" game, the effect of the remaining one game of AT is output.

Then, when the "N + 1" game ends and the game shifts to the "N + 2" game, at the start of the "N + 2" game, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating a normal game (non-AT) to the sub control board 80. Send. Based on the reception of this command, the sub-control board 80 erases the display of "remaining 1 game" and outputs a normal (non-AT) effect.
At the end of AT, an image such as "Pachinko / Pachislot is a game machine that you can enjoy moderately" is displayed to prevent you from getting stuck. However, in the case of pattern 5, since the sub display has not returned to normal at the end of the "N + 1" game, the image cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a countermeasure, the game history is managed on the sub control board 80 side, and when the game shifts to the next game (“N + 2” game in the example of FIG. 11) across the end of AT, the game is played. The image may be displayed at the start of.

In the above patterns 1 to 5, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 continues to output the effect immediately before the disconnection in the "N" game until the communication is restored, and "N + 1". When the communication is restored in the middle of the game, the continuation of the effect output as the "N" game is output based on the command received in the "N + 1" game. Therefore, for example, in pattern 1, when a command to stop left is received after communication is restored in the "N + 1" game, the correct answer is irrespective of whether or not the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct pressing order. The push order effect will be output.

On the other hand, in pattern 1, for example, in the "N + 1" game, if a command to stop in the middle is received after the communication is restored, the push order of the effect output at that time, that is, the "N" game. Since the wrong answer pressing order is applied to the left middle display, the pressing order failure effect is output regardless of whether or not the stop switch 42 is actually operated in the correct answer pressing order. However, even if the push order failure effect is output in the "N + 1" game, if the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct push order of the "N + 1" game, the symbol is advantageous to the player. Since the combination is stopped and displayed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

As described above, when the communication is restored in the "N + 1" game, in the "N + 1" game, the effect that inherits the effect (of the "N" game) before the disconnection is output, and the effect of the "N + 2" game is output. Reset the effect at the start (return to the correct effect). As a result, it is possible to minimize the output of an unnatural effect in both the game in which the disconnection has occurred and the game in which the communication has been restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding as much as possible.

Further, in the example of FIG. 11, the example in which the communication is restored in the “N + 1” game after the disconnection occurs in the “N” game is shown, but the communication is restored when two or more games have passed after the disconnection occurred. However, it is the same as in FIG.
For example, when a disconnection occurs in the "N" game and communication is restored to the "N + a" game (a = "2" or more), the "N" game is disconnected up to the "N + a-1" game. The production just before and after is continuously output. Then, in the "N + a" game in which the communication is restored, the continuation of the production of the "N" game in which the output is continued is executed based on the command received after the communication is restored. Next, at the start of the "N + a + 1" game, the effect (correct effect) at the start of the "N + a + 1" game is updated.

<Fourth Embodiment>
When the reel 31 is rotated and stopped, the motor 32 performs acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, and stop processing, all of which are in an excited state. Then, when the rotation of the motor 32 is stopped, a state in which four phases are simultaneously excited for a predetermined time (time T11 described later) (hereinafter, referred to as "four-phase excitation state") is set.
A fourth embodiment relates to a time relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 and the four-phase excitation state when the motor 32 is stopped.
FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the detection sensor 42e in the fourth embodiment. Note that FIG. 12 omits hatching from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings. Further, FIG. 12 is a schematic view for explaining the fourth embodiment, and does not mean that the actual product has the structure as shown in FIG. In FIG. 12, the process from the push of the stop button 42a to the return to the original state is shown in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d). In the figure, the upper side is the player side, and the lower side is the inside of the slot machine 10. In the figure, the side above the front door 12 is visible to the player.
Furthermore, the line on which the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d is indicated by a dotted line. It is assumed that the moment when the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line is the moment when the detection sensor 42e detects the moving piece 42d.

In FIG. 12A, the stop button 42a is an operating body of the stop switch 42, which is operated (pushed inside the slot machine 10) when the player turns on the stop switch 42. The player side of the stop button 42a is arranged so as to project from the front door 12 provided on the front surface of the housing of the slot machine 10 by about several millimeters. When this part is viewed from the front of the player, it has a substantially cylindrical shape. In the no-load state, the stop button 42a is urged in the F3 direction (outward direction, player direction) in FIG. (A) by the spring force of the (compression) coil spring 42c, and the stop button 42a is urged by this urging force. The player-side end of 42a protrudes from the front door 12. In this state, the lower surface portion (hereinafter, referred to as “flange-shaped portion”) of the stop button 42a is in contact with the front door 12.
On the other hand, the stopper 42b is provided inside the front door 12 (inside the housing), and when the stop button 42a is pushed in, it comes into contact with the stop button 42a and prohibits further movement of the stop button 42a. Is.

In the drawing of the stop button 42a, a moving piece 42d that can move integrally with the stop button 42a is provided on the lower surface side. Further, a detection sensor 42e for detecting the movement of the moving piece 42d is arranged directly below the moving piece 42d. In the no-load state shown in (a) in the figure, when the stop button 42a is urged toward the front door 12 by the urging force of the coil spring 42c, the tip (lower end in the figure) of the moving piece 42d is It is arranged at a position away from the detection sensor 42e. Therefore, in the state (a) in the figure, the detection sensor 42e has not detected the moving piece 42d and is in the off state.

Next, as shown in (b) in the drawing, the player pushes the stop button 42a in the F4 direction when stopping the rotation of the reel 31. As a result, the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing against the urging force of the coil spring 42c. When the stop button 42a moves downward in the drawing, the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a also moves downward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d enters the detection sensor 42e. Then, when the tip of the moving piece 42d comes into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state. FIG. 12B shows the position of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned from the off state to the on state. At the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned on, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a is not yet in contact with the stopper 42b, and there is a gap between the stop button 42a and the stopper 42b.

When the stop button 42a is further pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 12B, the flange-shaped portion of the stop button 42a comes into contact with the stopper 42c as shown in FIG. 12C. This position is the deepest part when the stop button 42a is pushed. Further, in the state of FIG. 12C, since the state in which the tip of the moving piece 42d is detected by the detection sensor 42e is maintained, the detection sensor 42e is in the ON state.

When the player releases the push of the stop button 42a from the state of FIG. 12 (c) (excluding the force in the F4 direction in FIG. 12 (c)), the urging force F3 of the coil spring 42c presses the stop button 42a. The force to return to the initial position acts. As a result, the stop button 42a and the moving piece 42d integrated with the stop button 42a move upward in the drawing. As a result, the tip of the moving piece 42d does not come into contact with the dotted line of the detection sensor 42e, and the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state (FIG. 12 (d)).

FIG. 12D shows the arrangement of each member at the moment when the detection sensor 42e is turned from the on state to the off state. In the state of FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a has not returned to the final position. When the stop button 42a is further returned from the state shown in FIG. 12D, the stop button 42a comes into contact with the flange-shaped portion front door 12 of the stop button 42a, and the stop button 42a stops at this position. This state is the state shown in FIG. 12A, which is a no-load state of the stop button 42a.
In general, the state of FIG. 12B showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from the off state to the on state and the state of FIG. 12D showing the timing when the detection sensor 42e changes from the on state to the off state are shown. Although they are the same, there is no particular problem even if there is a slight deviation.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the stop button 42a and the excited state of the motor 32 in a time chart in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13A shows Example 1 and FIG. 13B shows Example 2. Shown.
In FIG. 13A, the time at the moment when the stop button 42a is in the initial position (FIG. 12A) in the no-load state and the push of the stop button 42a is started is defined as S41. The time when the stop button 42a is pushed and the detection sensor 42e is turned on from off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12B is reached is defined as S42. Further, the time when the stop button 42a is pushed from that position and the stop button 42a reaches the deepest part (when the state shown in FIG. 12C is reached) is set to S43. The above times S41, S42, and S43 depend on the pushing speed of the player and are not constant. If the stop button 42a is pushed slowly, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes long, and if the stop button 42a is pushed early, the time from time S41 to S43 becomes short.

Next, it is assumed that the push of the stop button 42a is released at the time S44. At the time of time S44, it is assumed that the stop button 42a is located at the deepest part.
When the push of the stop button 42a is released, as described above, the spring force of the coil spring 42c acts to force the stop button 42a to return to the initial position. It is assumed that the operator of the stop button 42a does not touch the stop button 42a from the moment when the push of the stop button 42a is released.
Then, the time when the detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off, that is, when the state shown in FIG. 12D is reached is defined as S45. Here, the time from the time S44 to the time S45 is T11.

The time T11 is a variable determined by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke (moving distance) of the stop button 42a from the deepest position to the position where the detection sensor 42e is turned off. In Example 1 of (a), the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a are designed so that the time T11 is 100 ms.

On the other hand, when the on (specifically, the detection sensor 42e) of the stop switch 42 is detected (in the state of FIG. 12B), the reel control means 65 uses the reel corresponding to the stop switch 42. The stop control of 31 is executed, and the reel 31 is stopped at a position corresponding to the winning combination lottery result (result determined by the internal drawing means) by the winning combination lottery means. As described above, the time from when the stop control of the reel 31 is started (after the detection sensor 42e is detected to be turned on) until the reel 31 is stopped is (except for the predetermined reel 31 during the MB game). It is set within 190 ms (when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is 21 symbols, the number of moving frames is 5 or less, and when the number of symbols is 20, the number of moving frames is 4 or less). Therefore, since it depends on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the start of deceleration of the reel 31 to the stop of the reel 31 is not constant.

Further, the reel control means 65 is in a state in which, after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position, the motor 32 is simultaneously excited (brake) in four phases for a predetermined time (the four-phase excitation state described above). ).
Here, the motor 32 in the present embodiment is a 4-phase stepping motor, and during the rotation of the motor 32 (reel 31), for example, 1.2-phase excitation is performed (note that the motor 32 is not limited to 1.2-phase excitation). Absent). Therefore, even during the rotation of the motor 32, there is one exciting state. Then, when the rotational drive of the motor 32 is stopped, a four-phase excitation state is set.
When performing a bound stop after moving the reel 31 to a predetermined position (when the reel 31 appears to vibrate at the stop position), for example, a three-phase excitation state should be set instead of the four-phase excitation state. Is also possible.

At the moment when the rotation drive of the motor 32 is stopped, there is a possibility that the motor 32 or the reel 31 may exceed the position to be stopped due to the inertia during rotation. Therefore, at the moment when the reel 31 is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor 32 is stopped. By setting it to a 4-phase excitation state and generating a static torque, it is prevented from moving due to inertia from the stop position. When the motor 32 is in the 4-phase excited state, the next operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is not permitted. At the time of the first or second stop, the operation acceptance of the next stop switch 42 is permitted when the detected sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 changes from the on state to the off state (returns to the state shown in FIG. 12D). ), And when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that has stopped the rotational drive is completed.

This control is for the following reasons.
In order to hold the stop position of the reel 31, the motor 32 is controlled to a 4-phase excited state, but when such control is performed, a larger load is applied than in the normal state, so that the load of the entire slot machine 10 is increased. It gets bigger. Therefore, in order to reduce this load, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button 42a after finishing the four-phase excitation state of one motor 32.

In Example 1 of FIG. 13A, when the winning combination lottery result (result determined by the internal drawing means) by the winning combination lottery means is a predetermined result (for example, when the push order bell is won), the four-phase excitation state is established. The excitation time T12 from the start to the end is set to 90 interrupts (2.235 × 90 = 201.15 ms). Here, when the winning combination lottery result is a predetermined result, the excitation time T12 in the 4-phase excitation state is set to "90 interrupts" because the exciting time T12 is always constant regardless of the winning combination lottery result. It means that it is not always.

Therefore, in Example 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is set so that "T11 <T12".
Here, when the stop control of the reel 31 is started from the time S42, the reel 31 is stopped within 190 ms. As described above, when the number of moving frames during stop control when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "21" is within 5 frames (minimum 1 frame), or when the number of symbols on the reel 31 is "20". Since the number of moving frames during the stop control is 4 frames or less (minimum 1 frame), the reel 31 stops within about "40" to "190" ms from the time S42.
On the other hand, the time from the time when the detection sensor 42e is changed from the off state to the on state until the stop button 42e reaches the deepest part and the pushing force of the stop button 42e is released (time from time S42 to S44) is , "40" to "180" ms. Therefore, the time when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 is started and the time S44 when the push of the stop button 42a is released are close times (almost the same time).

Therefore, in Example 1, it is assumed that the 4-phase excitation state is started at the timing (time S44) when the push of the stop button 42a is released, and after the detection sensor 42e is changed from the on state to the off state (time S45), It was designed so that the four-phase excited state of the motor 32 ends (time T12 elapses). Therefore, when the four-phase excited state of the motor 32 is finished, it can be set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.
In this way, if the detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off before the end of the 4-phase excitation state, it is possible to allow the operation acceptance of the next stop button 42a at the end of the 4-phase excitation state. .. This makes it possible to proceed with the game at high speed.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 13B, from the moment when the stop button 42a reaching the deepest part is released (time S44) until the detection sensor 42e is turned on to off (time S45). This is an example in which the time T11 (until it is reached) is set to 300 ms. Therefore, the return time of the stop button 42a is tripled as compared with Example 1. As described above, the return time of the stop button 42a can be set (adjusted) by the spring force (spring constant) of the coil spring 42c and the stroke of the stop button 42a.

On the other hand, in Example 2, the time T12 from the start to the end of the 4-phase excitation state is set to 45 interrupts (100.575 ms).
Then, in Example 2, as in Example 1, it is assumed that the 4-phase excitation state is started from the moment (time S44) when the push of the stop button 42a reaching the deepest portion is released, and the 4-phase of the motor 32 is started. The detection sensor 42e is designed to be turned off after the excitation state is completed. Therefore, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, it can be set so that the operation of the next stop button 42a can be accepted.

In this way, by designing so that the 4-phase excitation state ends when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, when the detection sensor 42e is turned off, the operation acceptance of the next stop button 42a is permitted. can do. This makes it possible to proceed with the game at high speed.
As described above, both Example 1 and Example 2 have control advantages.
In addition, in Example 1 and Example 2 of FIG. 13, an example in which the time T12 from the start to the end of the 4-phase excited state is different is shown. However, for example, when the 4-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, if "T11 <T12" is set, the next stop button 42a can be accepted when the 4-phase excitation state is finished. Therefore, when the 4-phase excitation time T12 is a constant value, the game can be digested at a higher speed in Example 1.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to the relationship between turning on / off the power supply and starting the program.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an outline of control in the fifth embodiment in a time chart.
In FIG. 14, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing a state when a power failure occurs after the main program (program of the main control board 50) is started. The power supply shall be turned on at time S51 and then turned off at time S55.
When the power is turned on at time S51 (when the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1), power supply to both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 is started, and the main control board 50 and The voltage level of the sub control board 80 gradually increases and reaches the supply level V0 (the level when the power is on). In FIG. 14, the voltage supply level V0, the power failure detection level V1, and the drive voltage limit V2 are the same as those in FIG. 3 (first embodiment (A)).

The time when the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 reach the supply level V0 after the power is turned on at the time S51 is defined as S52. After that, the subprogram by the sub control board 80 is started from the time S53 when the time T22 has elapsed from the time S52. After that, the main program by the main control board 50 is started from the time S54 when the time T23 (T23> T22) elapses from the time S52. In this way, the subprogram is started first, and then the main program is started when the main control board 50 sends the first command after the power is turned on to the sub control board 80. This is because the command can be received on the sub-control board 80 side.

Next, if a power failure (power switch 11 is turned off, a power failure, etc.) occurs at time S55, the voltage levels of the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 gradually decrease. Even if the voltage level drops, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 can execute the power off processing as long as the voltage is equal to or higher than the drive voltage limit V2.
When a power failure occurs at time S55, the voltage reaches the power failure detection level V1 at time T0 (20 interrupts) and the power failure is detected (time S56). Further, after the power cutoff is detected, the power cutoff process is executed, for example, after one interrupt, as in FIG. It is assumed that the power off processing ends at time S57.
After that, when the time S58 is reached, the voltage falls below the drive voltage limit V2, and the program (process) cannot be executed. Therefore, control is performed so that the power off processing is completed before the time S58 is reached.

When the main program starts at time S54, it executes the setting of the main CPU 55, the check of RWM53, the confirmation of whether or not the previous power off was normal, the confirmation of the state of the setting key switch, etc., and then activates the interrupt processing. .. When the setting key switch is off, the power supply cutoff / recovery process (initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM53, etc.) is executed after the interrupt process is activated. On the other hand, when the setting key switch is on, the setting change processing is started after the interrupt processing is started.
Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the power is cut off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is off, the power off processing is executed after the power off / returning process is completed. To do. As a result, the program can be terminated normally.
On the other hand, when the power is cut off after the main program is started and the setting key switch is on, the power off processing is executed without starting the setting change processing. This is because if the setting change process is executed after the power is cut off, a problem may occur.

Further, in order to execute the main program normally, even if a power failure is detected at the same time as the main program is started, the setting of the main CPU 55 and the check of the RWM 53 are always executed.
Furthermore, after the main program is started, even if the power is cut off after that, it is always executed until the interrupt is started. This is to detect a power failure in interrupt processing. As in the first embodiment (A), for example, at the "N" interrupt, a voltage drop (power cutoff detection level V1) determined to have caused a power failure is detected, and the next "N + 1" game However, when the voltage drop is detected, the power failure is detected at the "N + 1" interrupt (determined as the power failure). Then, the power cutoff process is executed from the "N + 2" interrupt.

In the example of FIG. 14A, the main program is activated at time S54, and the power is cut off at time S55 thereafter. However, even if the power supply is cut off at the same time as the time S54 (starting of the main program), the power supply cutoff process can be completed before the voltage reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
In FIG. 14A, the time T21 from the power-on (time S51) to the voltage reaching the supply level V0 (time S52) is the time T21 from the occurrence of the power failure (time S55) to the low level. It is set to be shorter than T24.
Further, the time T23 (the time from when the voltage reaches the supply level V0 to the start of the main program) is set to be shorter than the time T24.

FIG. 14B is an example when the power is cut off before the main program is started by the main control board 50. In the example of FIG. 14B, the power is turned on at time S51 and the power is turned off at time S59. Here, the time S59 is earlier than the time S54 in FIG. 14 (a). That is, after the power supply (supply level V0) required for starting the main program is supplied, the power supply is cut off before the predetermined time (time T23) elapses (before the time S54 is reached), and the voltage drops. This is an example. In such a case, the main program will not start. Therefore, after that, the voltage gradually decreases, and finally the power supply reaches the Low level.
In the example of FIG. 14B, when the power is turned on again, it can be started normally.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 14, it is conceivable that the power supply is cut off immediately after the subprogram is started (after the time S53) and before the time S54 (before the main program is started). Be done.
When the power off occurs at the above timing, the subprogram executes the power off processing of the subprogram. Then, it is possible to end the power cutoff process of the subprogram before the voltage supplied to the sub-control board 80 reaches the drive voltage limit V2.
Further, since the power off at the above timing is the power off before the main program is started, the main program is not started as described above.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the present embodiment, the passage sensor 46 is provided. This is because the passage sensor 46 further improves the accuracy of the medal insertion determination and is also effective as a countermeasure against fraud. However, the passage sensor 46 may not be provided, and only a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b may be provided.

(2) In FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are configured to detect the medal M moving in the substantially horizontal direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the medal M is falling substantially vertically downward, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b may detect the medal M.
(3) In FIG. 2, the blocker 45 is arranged on the lower surface side of the medal passage, but the blocker 45 is not limited to this. Any device may have a function of sending the medal M out of the medal passage before the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a.
Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are shown so as to detect a position slightly above the center position of the medal M when viewed from the front. Does not mean. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b may be arranged in any way as long as they are arranged so as to reliably detect the passing medal M.

(4) In FIG. 3, the time T2 is the time from the moment when the medal M is located at M2 to the moment when it is located at M4, but is not limited to this. For example, the medal M may be at the position of M1 in FIG. 2, and the time from the moment when the hand is released until the medal M4 is reached may be set to T2 and “T2> T1” may be set. Alternatively, the time required for the medal M to reach M4 from any predetermined position between M1 and M2 may be set to T2, and "T2> T1" may be set.

(5) In the first embodiment (A), when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process is executed until the medal M reaches M4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process may be executed before the medal M reaches M3. That is, in this case, the medal M is not detected by the closing sensor 44a due to the power off processing.
Alternatively, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the power cut process may be executed before the medal M reaches the closing sensor 44b. In this case, the medal M is detected by the closing sensor 44a, but is not detected by the closing sensor 44b, and the power off processing is executed.

(6) Furthermore, in the first embodiment (A), a power cut occurs at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, and the time T1 until the power cut is detected and the power cut process (blocker off) is executed. Is set shorter than the time from the position of the medal M to the position where the blocker 45 is installed (this time is referred to as "T2'"). With this setting, when the power is cut off at the moment when the medal M is located at M2, the blocker 45 is already turned off when the medal M reaches the position of the blocker 45 from the position of M2. Therefore, the medal can be prevented from passing through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
In the above, the position of the medal M2 may be the moment when the hand is released at the position of M1 or a predetermined position between M1 and M2.

(7) As shown in FIG. 3, in the first embodiment (A), the power cutoff process (blocker off) is executed in the interrupt process following the interrupt process in which the power failure is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the power off processing (blocker off) may be set to be executed after, for example, "2" to "5" interrupt processing, counting from the interrupt processing in which the power off is detected. Alternatively, the power off processing (blocker off) may be executed by the interrupt processing that detects the power off.
(8) In the first embodiment (A) of FIG. 3, when a power failure occurs, the time T0 from the supply level V0 to the maintenance level V1 is set to 20 interrupts, but the voltage is limited to this. It is possible to make various settings depending on the performance of the power supply.

(9) In the first embodiment (C) of FIG. 7, when the medal M is paid out by the medal payout device, the payout sensors 37a and 37b detect the movable piece 39a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b may detect the medal M itself to be paid out. For example, the payout sensors 37a and 37 may be arranged as in the throw-in sensors 44a and 44b shown in FIG. 4 to detect the passage of the (paid out) medal M.

Further, in the case where the payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged in this way, when the medal M passes through the payout sensors 37a and 37b,
Payout sensor 37a on, payout sensor 37b off (time S31')
Payout sensor 37a on, payout sensor 37b on (time S32')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b on (time S33')
Payout sensor 37a off, payout sensor 37b off (time S34')
Follow the course of.
Then, the time from the time S31'to the time S34'is set to be shorter than the time T1 (the time from the occurrence of the power off to the execution of the power off processing).

(10) In the second embodiment, the gate mark 57b is formed so that the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are on the outside, but conversely, the protrusion 57d and the recessed portion 57c are formed on the inside. It is also possible. The same applies to the gate mark 58b of the lower cover 58. In this case, if the gate mark 57b is shaped as shown in FIG. 10B, the outer surface of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58 becomes a smooth surface. On the other hand, if the shape is shown in FIG. 10 (c), the protrusion 57e is formed on the outer side of the upper cover 57 or the lower cover 58.

(11) In the second embodiment, as an example of the substrate case 56, an example in which the main control substrate 50 is housed is given. However, the second embodiment can be applied not only to the main control board 50 but also to other control boards for which fraud is to be prevented, for example, the board case of the sub control board 80. As shown in FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 also includes the RWM83, ROM54, subCPU85, and the like, but at least in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate mark on the upper surface of the upper cover of the board case of the sub control board 80. It is possible not to arrange the CPU 85, and further, not to arrange the RWM 83 and the ROM 54. Similarly, the model number display area of the sub-control board 80 should not overlap in the vertical direction (directly below) of the gate trace.

(12) In the third embodiment, the push order effect during AT, the display of the operated stop switch 42 (stopped reel 31), and the number of remaining games during AT are given as examples. For example, during AT or special The third embodiment can be applied even when the number of acquired games (BB games, etc.) and the remaining number of possible acquisitions are displayed.
For example, the number of cards acquired at the start of the "N" game is "200", the number of cards acquired at the start of the "N + 1" game is "209", and the number of cards acquired at the start of the "N + 2" game is "". It is assumed that there were 218 "sheets. Further, the main control board 50 shall transmit a command regarding the number of acquired sheets to the sub control board 80 at the start of each game.
Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11, it is assumed that a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game and communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game.

In this case, the sub-control board 80 displays "200" as the number of acquired sheets in the "N" game. Further, at the start of the "N + 1" game, the command regarding the number of acquired cards is not received (due to disconnection), so that the "N + 1" game also maintains the display of the number of acquired cards "200". Next, when the sub-control board 80 receives a command regarding the number of acquired cards at the start of the "N + 2" game, the sub-control board 80 updates the display of the number of acquired cards "218" based on the command.

(13) FIG. 11 of the third embodiment shows an example in which the image display is normally restored at the start of the “N + 2” game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display may be restored to normal after all the "N + 1" games are stopped or when a betting operation is performed thereafter. Alternatively, it is also possible to restore the image display to normal at a predetermined timing based on a command transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time of full stop or after full stop.

(14) In the third embodiment, for example, in the middle of a broken "N + 1" game, the number of cards that can be obtained during AT and the number of games may be added (added) to the lottery. In this case, since the "N + 1" game is disconnected, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the command based on winning the additional lottery. Therefore, in this case, for example, at the start of the "N + 2" game, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the result after the addition (addition) lottery, and at the start of the "N + 2" game, the sub control board 80 Is to display the game information (the number of cards that can be acquired and the number of games) after the addition.

(15) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), for example, when the wire is disconnected after the first right stop of the "N" game and the communication is restored before the first stop switch 42 of the "N + 1" game is operated. Can be considered. Then, in the "N + 1" game, it is assumed that the player makes the first right stop. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives the right first stop command in the "N + 1" game, it means that it has received the stop command of the stop switch 42 that has already been operated, so that the push order failure effect is produced. Output. Then, at the time of betting operation after all the stops of the "N + 1" game or at the start of the "N + 2" game, the image display may be returned to the normal one.

(16) In the third embodiment (FIG. 11), when the acquired number of images is displayed as an image during AT, as the image display update process of the acquired number of sheets before and after the disconnection, for example, the following method can be mentioned.
When the payout process is performed, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the number of acquired sheets to the sub control board 80. Here, when a disconnection occurs in the middle of the "N" game, the sub-control board 80 cannot receive the acquired number of "N" games. Immediately before the disconnection of the "N" game, it is assumed that the sub-control board 80 displays "100" as the number of acquired sheets during AT. In addition, 10 cards are acquired for both the "N" game and the "N + 1" game during AT.
In this case, the number of cards acquired during AT at the end of the "N" game should be "110", but it remains "100" (because the wire is broken). Then, it is assumed that the communication is restored in the middle of the "N + 1" game. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can return the acquired number of sheets during AT to a normal value based on the command of the acquired number of sheets received at the time of payout processing of the "N + 1" game. Here, the value may be returned to the normal value at the time of payout processing of the "N + 1" game, or may be returned to the normal value at the start of the "N + 2" game as in the example of FIG. Further, it may be updated to "110" at the time of payout processing of the "N + 1" game, and may be updated to "120" at the start of the "N + 2" game.

(17) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to, for example, a pachinko gaming machine. In pachinko gaming machines, the starting port (the winning opening that starts the symbol fluctuation by the symbol variation display device and triggers the acquisition of random numbers for the big hit lottery), the electric tulip winning opening (when the game ball wins, the next prize is awarded. For ease of use, there are various winning openings such as a winning opening that opens for a certain period of time and then closes. The electric chew is not limited to the tulip shape.), An attacker (a large winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit), etc. Provided. Then, it is possible to apply the first embodiment (B) to these winning openings.

Specifically, for example, a winning sensor (a sensor that first detects a game ball that has won a prize in the starting port) and an discharge sensor (a sensor that detects a game ball after being detected by the winning sensor) are located at the starting port. It is provided. Further, the attacker is provided with a V winning sensor (a sensor that first detects the game ball that has won the attacker) and an emission sensor (a sensor that detects the game ball after being detected by the V winning sensor). ..
For example, in the case of the start port, when a power cut occurs at the moment when the game ball is detected by the winning sensor, the discharge sensor is set so that the game ball can be detected before the power cut process is executed. As a result, even if the power is cut off at the moment when the game ball is detected by the prize sensor, the prize ball can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out even though the game ball has won the prize opening. The same applies to the attacker's V winning sensor and discharge sensor.

(18) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example as one of the game machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "rotary type game machine" installed in the No. 4 branch office to which the Fuei Law is applied. It is not limited to (so-called "pachislot game machine"), and can be applied to, for example, a casino machine and an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) in which a medal used for a game is not used as a game medium.

Here, the enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) can eliminate the medal payout device (unit including the hopper 35, the hopper motor 36, and the payout sensor 37) in FIG. 1, for example. Further, the medal insertion slot 47 and the medal selector can be eliminated. Then, all the electronic medals (electronic game media) given by winning the winning combination are stored in the credit number display LED 76. In this case, it is conceivable that the credit number display LED 76 is composed of, for example, five digits (a maximum of "99,999" electronic medals can be stored).
Even in such a casino machine or an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine), the present invention can be applied to all of the above-described embodiment and the following embodiment except for the first embodiment.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to the control of the medal payout device 15 by the main control board 50.
Here, FIGS. 15 to 17 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the position of the hopper disk 101, the position of the medal, and the drive control of the hopper motor 36 in the sixth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 15A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state before the last ejected medal comes into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is more advanced than that in (a) before coming into contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b.

Furthermore, FIG. 16A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state in which the last ejected medal is in contact with the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b, and FIG. 16B is a plan view of the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 which shows the state which was pushed and the movable shaft 38b moved.
Further, FIG. 17A is a plan view of the medal payout device 15 showing a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejection unit, and FIG. 17B is a hopper after ejecting the last ejected medal. It is a top view of the medal payout device 15 which shows the state which the rotation of a disk is stopped.

In the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. Further, the medal payout device 15 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 as in the first embodiment. Then, the main control board 50 controls the drive of the hopper motor 36.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, and the hopper disk 101 has a holding portion which is an opening capable of holding medals stored in the hopper. Eight 102s are provided along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101.
Furthermore, each holding portion 102 is formed in a circular hole shape penetrating from the upper surface to the lower surface of the hopper disk 101. The medals stored in the hopper 35 are formed so as to enter into each holding portion 102 through the upper opening of each holding portion 102 and be held by each holding portion 102.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when the hopper motor 36 is driven during the medal payout process, the hopper disc 101 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 rotates clockwise. Then, when the hopper disc 101 rotates clockwise, the medals held by the holding portions 102 move in a clockwise arc together with the hopper disc 101, and are sequentially discharged from the discharging unit 103.
When the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103, the holding portion 102 in which the medal is held becomes empty. Then, another medal stored in the hopper 35 newly enters the empty holding portion 102.

Further, as described in the first embodiment (C), the medal payout device 15 includes a fixed shaft 38a and a movable shaft 38b. Then, in the sixth embodiment, the space between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is the discharging unit 103 from which the medal is discharged.
As shown in FIG. 16B, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, and the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b becomes wider than the diameter of the medal, the medal becomes the fixed shaft 38a. Passes between the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b. At this time, the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103.
Further, the moment when the medal passed between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b and the movable shaft 38b returned to the original position (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 6), the medal was ejected from the ejection unit 103. It's a moment. When the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that the medal has been ejected from the ejection unit 103.

Further, in one payout process, the medal that is last discharged from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as the "last discharge medal", and in the next payout process, the medal that is first discharged from the discharge unit 103 is referred to as the "first It is called a "discharge medal".
In FIGS. 15 to 17, the medals are indicated by a two-dot chain line. The medal with the letter "A" is the last ejected medal in one payout process, and the medal with the letter "B" is the first ejected medal in the next payout process.

Further, the position of the holding unit 102 in which the last ejected medal is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected unit 103 in one payout process is referred to as a "first position", and one payout is performed. The position of the holding unit 102 in which the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected unit 103 in the process is referred to as a “second position”.
FIG. 17A shows a state at the moment when the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected portion 103 (hopper disk 101, each holding portion 102, each medal with the letters “A” to “D”, and the fixed shaft 38a. , And the positional relationship of the movable shaft 38b). Then, in FIG. 17A, the position of the holding portion 102 in which the medal with the letter “A” is held is the first position, and the medal with the letter “B” is held. The position of the holding portion 102 is the second position.

Then, in the sixth embodiment, when the main control board 50 finishes one payout process, the holding unit 102 holding the first discharge medal in the next payout process is in the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped while the hopper disk 101 is located between the two.
FIG. 17B shows a state in which the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped after the last ejection medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103. In FIG. 17B, the first position and the second position are indicated by broken lines, respectively. Further, in FIG. 17B, the medal with the letter “B” is the first ejected medal in the next payout process. Then, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hopper disk 101 is in a state where the holding portion 102 holding the medal with the letter "B" is located between the first position and the second position. The rotation of is stopped.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36.
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, the drive of the hopper motor 36 is suddenly stopped by passing a current in the direction opposite to that when the medal is ejected from the main control board 50 to the hopper motor 36, and the hopper disk 101 The rotation of the can be stopped suddenly.

Further, as described above, when the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, the payout sensor 37 detects that fact.
Therefore, when the payout sensor 37 detects that the last ejected medal has been ejected from the ejection unit 103, a current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medal is passed through the hopper motor 36 to rotate the hopper disk 101. When suddenly stopped, the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process can be stopped at the second position.

Further, by passing a current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting medals to the hopper motor 36, the hopper motor 36 can be driven in the opposite direction to rotate the hopper disk 101 in the reverse direction (rotate counterclockwise). ..
Therefore, at the end of the payout process, even if the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal in the next payout process passes through the second position, the hopper draws a current in the direction opposite to that when ejecting the medal. By flowing the electric current through the motor 36, the hopper disk 101 can be rotated in the reverse direction and returned to the second position.
Then, by returning the holding unit 102 holding the first ejected medal to the second position, the first ejected medal can be started to move from the same second position each time. As a result, the same operation can be performed for each payout process, so that the first ejected medal can be stably ejected.

Here, when a constant current is passed through the DC motor as the hopper motor 36, the drive shaft gradually accelerates from the stopped rotation state, and then reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a time chart showing the relationship between the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the discharge status of medals from the discharge unit 103 in the sixth embodiment.
In FIG. 18, the upper line shows the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, the middle line shows the drive state of the hopper motor 36, and the lower line shows the discharge status of medals from the discharge unit 103.

Further, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is a digital signal output from a predetermined output port included in the main control board 50, and when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from off to on, a constant current is applied to the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the current flowing through the hopper motor 36 becomes "0".
Furthermore, in FIG. 18, "stop" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 indicates a state in which the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, and "constant speed" in the drive state of the hopper motor 36 means that the rotation of the drive shaft is at a constant speed. Indicates the state where (constant speed) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is changed from off to on, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually increases from "stop" to "constant speed".
Further, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 rises diagonally to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually accelerates when the drive signal is changed from off to on.
Therefore, if the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal is stopped at the second position, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates by the time the holding portion 102 reaches the first position. Therefore, it takes a longer time than the medal ejection interval at the constant speed.
That is, when the holding unit 102 holding the first ejection medal is stopped at the second position, the time required from the start of driving of the hopper motor 36 to the ejection of the first ejection medal from the ejection unit 103 is the hopper motor. It is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shafts of 36 are rotating at a constant speed.
As a result, there is a possibility that the player feels that the ejection of the first (first) medal is delayed.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, at the end of one payout process, the main control board 50 has a holding unit 102 that holds the first discharge medal in the next payout process between the first position and the second position. The drive of the hopper motor 36 is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped in the positioned state.
When the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, the distance to reach the first position is shorter than when the holding portion 102 is stopped at the second position. .. As a result, the time required to reach the first position is shorter than when stopped at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 gradually accelerates, the first (first) medal It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the discharge of the medals has been delayed.

Further, when the holding portion 102 holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, as shown in FIG. 17B, two adjacent holding portions 102 in the hopper disk 101 The portion corresponding to the space between the two is located in front of the discharge unit 103.
As a result, a fraudulent act such as a wire is inserted from the medal payout port provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12, and the fraudulent act (goto act) of trying to access the holding portion 102 of the hopper disk 101 with this fraudulent instrument is performed. Even if it is broken, the portion of the hopper disk 101 corresponding to the two adjacent holding portions 102 becomes a barrier, and access to the holding portion 102 by an unauthorized device can be prevented.

Further, when the driving state of the hopper motor 36 is "constant speed", the hopper disk 101 rotates clockwise at a constant speed. At this time, the medals held by the holding units 102 are sequentially discharged from the discharging unit 103 at equal intervals.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the drive state of the hopper motor 36 gradually decreases from "constant speed", and then reaches "stop".
In FIG. 18, the portion where the line indicating the drive state of the hopper motor 36 is obliquely downward to the right indicates that the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated.

In this way, in the hopper motor 36 using the DC motor, when the drive signal is turned from on to off, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually decelerated.
Then, the last ejected medal passes between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103), and the movable shaft 38b returns to the original position, so that the last ejected medal is ejected from the ejected portion 103. When this is detected by the payout sensor 37, the main control board 50 turns the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 from on to off.
As a result, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor 36 is gradually decelerated, and the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejection medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. Then, the rotation of the hopper disk 101 is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from off to on, the main control board 50 subsequently transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80. This payout start command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has started the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout start command, the sub-control board 80 starts the process related to the output of the payout sound. After that, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned from on to off, the main control board 50 subsequently transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80. This payout end command is a command indicating that the main control board 50 has finished the payout process.
On the other hand, when the sub-control board 80 receives the payout end command, the sub-control board 80 ends the process related to the output of the payout sound. As a result, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 is completed.

Here, the “payout sound” means a sound output from the sub control board 80 side in accordance with the payout of medals. As the payout sound, for example, a sound such as "purururu" can be output from the speaker 22.
Further, the "process related to the output of the payout sound" is a series of processes such as a process of selecting a sound to be output, a process of selecting a channel to output the selected sound, and a process of outputting the selected sound from the speaker 22. It means. By executing this series of processes, the payout sound is actually output from the speaker 22.

Then, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the main control board 50 transmits a payout start command to the sub control board 80, and when the sub control board 80 receives the payout start command, the process relating to the output of the payout sound. By starting the above, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be started by the time the first ejection medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a payout end command to the sub control board 80 when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, and the sub control board 80 processes the output of the payout sound when the payout end command is received. When the ejection of medals from the ejection unit 103 is stopped, the output of the payout sound from the speaker 22 can be terminated.
As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the payout of medals and the payout sound are synchronized.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation of the main control board 50, the driving state of the hopper motor 36, the detection states of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and the ejection timing of medals from the ejection unit 103.
When a winning combination is won, the main control board 50 sets the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
For example, when a 10-card combination wins and 10 medals are paid out, "10" is set as the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM53.
That is, when paying out "N" medals (N ≧ 1), "N" is set as the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 "starts" (starts driving) from the "stopped" state, undergoes "acceleration", and reaches "constant speed".
At the end of one payout process, the holding unit 102 that holds the first ejected medal in the next payout process is stopped between the first position and the second position, but the next payout process At the start of, the hopper motor 36 is set to reach "constant speed" by the time the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal reaches the first position.
That is, the stop position of the holding unit 102 holding the first ejection medal is set so that the hopper motor 36 reaches the "constant speed" by the time the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal reaches the first position. doing.

Then, after the hopper motor 36 reaches "constant speed" from "stop" through "acceleration", the holding portion 102 holding the first ejection medal reaches the first position, whereby the first ejection is performed. The medals are surely ejected from the ejection unit 103.
Furthermore, at the timing (a) in FIG. 19, both the payout sensors 37a and 37b are off.
The timing of (a) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active unlike the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37a is set so that the state in which the movable piece 39a is detected is turned off and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned on.
On the other hand, the payout sensor 37b is set to be highly active as in the first embodiment (C). That is, the payout sensor 37b is set so that the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected is turned off, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is detected is turned on.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off at the timing (a) in FIG.
In the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to be low active and the payout sensor 37b is set to be high active. Therefore, FIG. 8 in the first embodiment (C) is a signal of the payout sensor 37a. The waveform of is reversed on and off.

Further, at the timing (b) in FIG. 19, when the medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state.
The state (b) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (b) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Furthermore, at the timing (c) in FIG. 19, the distance between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b is wider than the diameter of the medal, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is also on. Become. At this time, the medal is ejected from between the fixed shaft 38a and the movable shaft 38b (discharging portion 103).
The state (c) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (c) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

Further, at the timing (d) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is being urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, the payout sensor 37a is on, and the payout sensor 37b is off. It becomes.
The state of (d) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state of (d) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).
Further, at the timing (e) in FIG. 19, the movable shaft 38b is urged by the spring 39b to return to the original position, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 determines that one medal has been ejected, and updates the payout number data.
The state (e) in FIG. 19 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 7 in the first embodiment (C).

When paying out the "N" medals, (a) to (e) in FIG. 19 are repeated until it is determined that the "N" medals have been ejected.
Then, when it is determined that the "N" th medal has been ejected, the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36.
Further, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 goes through "deceleration" and reaches "stop".
As a result, the process of paying out "N" medals is completed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the flow of the payout process according to the sixth embodiment.
In the payout process by the main control board 50, first, in step S101, the payout number data is set. This process is a process of storing the payout number data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50. For example, when paying out "N" medals (N ≧ 1), "N" is stored as the payout number data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S102.

In step S102, the main control board 50 turns on the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the hopper motor 36 starts. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S103.
In step S103, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the payout sensor 37a is set to low active, and the state in which the movable piece 39a is not detected (the state in which the movable shaft 38b is pushed by the medal and moved) is turned on. It is set to be.

When "Yes" is set in step S103, the process proceeds to the next step S104, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Here, if "Yes" in step S104, the process proceeds to the next step S105. On the other hand, if "No" in step S104, an error occurs.
Here, when the payout sensor 37a is turned from off to on, if the payout sensor 37b is already on, the result is “No” in step S104. In this case, it is conceivable that the ejection unit 103 is clogged with medals (medal clogging error). If a medal jam error occurs, the error continues until the jammed medal is removed (the error factor is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, remove the jammed medal and operate the reset switch to clear the error.

Although not shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, if "No" continues for a predetermined time in step S103 (a predetermined time elapses while remaining "No"), an error occurs. In this case, it is conceivable that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty (hopper empty error). Further, when a hopper empty error occurs, the error continues until the hopper 35 is replenished with medals (the error factor is removed) and the reset switch is operated. Then, when the medals are replenished in the hopper 35 and the reset switch is operated, the error is cleared.
In step S105, the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S105, the process proceeds to the next step S106. On the other hand, when "No" is set in step S105, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104.

In step S106, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is on. Then, when “Yes” is set in step S106, the process proceeds to the next step S107, and the main control board 50 again determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is on. Here, if "Yes" in step S107, the process proceeds to the next step S108. On the other hand, when "No" in step S107, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104 or S105.

Proceeding to step S108, the main control board 50 in turn determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off. Then, when “Yes” is set in step S108, the process proceeds to the next step S109, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37a is off. If "Yes" is set in step S109, the process proceeds to step S110, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensor 37b is off.
If "Yes" in step S110, the process proceeds to the next step S111. On the other hand, when "No" is set in step S110, an error occurs as in the case of "No" in step S104, S105 or S107.

In step S111, the main control board 50 updates the payout number data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the payout number data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 and storing the subtracted data as new payout number data.
In the next step S112, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout number data is “0”. Here, when “Yes” in step S112, the process proceeds to the next step S113, and the main control board 50 turns off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. When the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the hopper motor 36 stops. Then, the payout process according to this flowchart is completed. On the other hand, when "No" in step S112, the process returns to step S103. As a result, the next medal will be paid out. Then, the process of returning from step S112 to S103 is repeated until the payout number data becomes "0".

Here, the medals discharged from the discharge unit 103 are usually guided to the medal tray through a passage called a medal chute.
However, in rare cases, the medal ejected from the ejection unit 103 may hit the inner wall of the medal chute and bounce off, and return to the ejection unit 103. At this time, the bounced medal may hit the medal that is about to be ejected from the ejection unit 103, and may push back the medal that is about to be ejected.

Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, as in steps S103 to S110 in the flowchart of the payout process of FIG. 20, on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is repeatedly determined in the order of “payout sensor 37a” → “payout sensor 37b”. To do.
This makes it possible to detect an error in which the medal that is about to be ejected from the ejection unit 103 is pushed back.

For example, suppose that one medal is about to be ejected, and when this medal pushes the movable shaft 38b, the movable shaft 38b moves, the payout sensor 37a is in the on state, and the payout sensor 37b is in the off state. (Timing of (b) in FIG. 19). At this time, it is assumed that the medal paid out in front of this medal bounces off and hits this medal, this medal is pushed back, and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is obtained in step S105 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.
Further, for example, it is assumed that the medal is pushed back at the timing (c) in FIG. 19 and the payout sensor 37a is turned off. In this case, "No" is obtained in step S107 of FIG. 20, and an error occurs.

<Modified example of the sixth embodiment>
Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with eight holding portions 102, but the number of holding portions is not limited to eight, and the size of the hopper disk 101 is, for example, five, six, or ten. It can be set as appropriate according to the situation.
(2) In the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is formed in a disk shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hopper disk 101 may be formed in a sprocket shape, for example. That is, the holding portion 102 is not limited to a circular hole shape as long as the medal can be held.

(3) In the sixth embodiment, the rotation direction of the hopper disc 101 during the medal payout process is clockwise, but the rotation direction is not limited to this. For example, the hopper disc 101 rotates counterclockwise and the holding portion 102. The medals held in the above may be sequentially ejected from the ejection unit 103.
(4) In the sixth embodiment, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as the hopper motor 36, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a stepping motor may be used as the hopper motor 36.

(5) The flow of the payout process in the sixth embodiment is not limited to the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, and may be, for example, the flow shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21. Even in this flow of payout processing, the discharge of medals can be detected. However, in such a payout process flow, it is not possible to detect an error in which the medal that is about to be ejected is pushed back by the medal that bounces off the inner wall of the medal shoot.
Note that, in FIGS. 20 and 21, the same step numbers are assigned to the processes having the same contents.
(6) The various modifications shown in the first to sixth embodiments and the first to sixth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<7th Embodiment>
The present invention relates to the arrangement of the main control board 50 mounted inside the cabinet 13 and the sub control board 80 mounted on the back surface of the front door 12.
FIG. 22 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed, and is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80.

The housing of the slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 having an opening on the front side, and a front door 12 attached so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
Further, the cabinet 13 is formed in a box shape in which the front side is opened by assembling the bottom plate 13a, the back plate 13b, the right side plate, the left side plate, the top plate and the like.
Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 is for paying out medals, and includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and a hopper motor 36 for rotating the hopper disk 101. I have.

Further, inside the cabinet 13, above the medal payout device 15, a plate-shaped reel base 110 supported by the back plate 13b, the right side plate, and the left side plate is provided, and a symbol is provided on the reel base 110. The display device 14 is arranged.
Further, the symbol display device 14 includes a square frame-shaped reel frame 14a, and three reels 31 are arranged side by side inside the reel frame 14a.

Furthermore, motors 32 are connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, each motor 32 is fixed to a reel bracket, and each reel bracket is supported by a reel frame 14a.
Further, a transparent reel substrate case 121 is arranged on the reel frame 14a, and the reel control substrate 120 is housed in the reel substrate case 121. The reel control board 120 controls the drive of the three motors 32.

Further, a transparent main board case 56 is arranged above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13. More specifically, the main board case 56 is fixed at a position on the front side (inner surface side of the housing) of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 above the symbol display device 14. The main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
Further, the main control board 50 controls the progress of the game, and includes an input port 51, an output port 52, an RWM53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, and the like. Further, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a symbol display device 14, a medal payout device 15, a reel control board 120, and a sub control board via an input port 51 or an output port 52. 80 etc. are electrically connected.

Further, the front door 12 is attached so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 so that the opening of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed. More specifically, the left side portion of the front door 12 is attached to the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13 via a hinge. Then, by rotating the front door 12 around this hinge, the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.

Further, a transparent display window is provided in the central portion of the front door 12. This display window is arranged at a position corresponding to the front of the symbol display device 14. Then, the player can visually recognize the three symbols attached to each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window.
Further, on the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a settlement switch 43, a medal insertion slot 47, etc. are arranged below the display window. ..

Furthermore, at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the front door 12, a medal payout port, which is an opening through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 15, pass, and medals paid out from the medal payout port are received. A medal tray is placed.
Further, an effect lamp 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are arranged on the upper portion of the front door 12 on the front side (player side).

Further, a transparent sub-board case 87 is arranged on the upper part of the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the sub-board case 87 is fixed at a position on the back surface side of the front door 12 (inner surface side of the housing), above the symbol display device 14, and corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. ing. The sub-control board 80 is housed in the sub-board case 87.
Further, the sub control board 80 controls the effect, and includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, an electrolytic capacitor 86, and the like. Further, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, the main control board 50, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. Then, the sub control board 80 determines what kind of effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the sub control board 80. The output of the image display device 23 is controlled.

As described above, the main board case 56 is arranged above the symbol display device 14 inside the cabinet 13, and the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 56.
Further, a sub-board case 87 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 12 above the symbol display device 14, and the sub-control board 80 is housed in the sub-board case 87.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, when the front door 12 is closed, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are arranged so as to face each other.
Further, the distance between the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 when the front door 12 is closed is set wider than the width in the depth direction of the reel control board 120.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor 86 for storing electricity is arranged on the sub-control board 80. Further, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is filled with an electrolytic solution. If the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 bursts due to a defect, the filled electrolytic solution may scatter. At this time, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect, the scattered electrolytic solution is discharged. There is a possibility that the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to adhesion to the main CPU 55. Further, there is a possibility that the main CPU 55 may be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, the electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the sub-control board 80.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and eventually the main CPU 55 is prevented from malfunctioning. be able to. Further, the main CPU 55 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
Further, if the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the main CPU 55 may malfunction due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86, but the sub By arranging the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the control board 80 at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, it is possible to prevent the main CPU 55 from malfunctioning due to noise from the electrolytic capacitor 86. Can be done.

FIG. 23A shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 1.
In FIG. 23A, the circle shown by the broken line is a projection of the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 onto the main control board 50.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23A, the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, which is arranged above the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the vertical direction and main in the horizontal direction. It is arranged on the left side of the main CPU 55 on the control board 50.
In this way, by arranging the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 at different positions in both the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50, the electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are placed on the sub control board 80. The position of the electrolytic capacitor 86 can be a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

<Modified example of the seventh embodiment>
Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is not limited to one, and may be two, for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (b).
FIG. 23B shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 2.

Also in FIG. 23 (b), similarly to FIG. 23 (a), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 projected onto the main control board 50 is shown by a broken line.
In FIG. 23B, the upper left electrolytic capacitor 86 and the lower right electrolytic capacitor 86 are both arranged at different positions in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.
As a result, also in Example 2 of FIG. 23 (b), the two electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are arranged at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(2) The number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 may be four, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (c).
FIG. 24C shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 3.
The fact that the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is projected onto the main control board 50 and shown by a broken line circle is the same as in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (b).

In FIG. 24C, the sub-control board 80 includes four electrolytic capacitors 86, three of which are located at different positions in the vertical and horizontal directions with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Have been placed. Further, the remaining one electrolytic capacitor 86 is arranged at the same position with respect to the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 in the horizontal direction but in the vertical direction.
Even in such an arrangement, the four electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub control board 80 are at positions other than the positions facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50.

(3) The electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position separated from the main control board 50, for example.
FIG. 24D shows the positional relationship between the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front with the front door 12 closed. It is a figure which shows Example 4.
The fact that the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub-control board 80 is projected and shown by a broken line circle is the same as in FIGS. 23 (a), 23 (b) and 24 (c).

In FIG. 24 (d), the number of electrolytic capacitors 86 on the sub-control board 80 is one, as in FIG. 23 (a), but unlike FIG. 23 (a), the electrolytic capacitors on the sub-control board 80 are The 86 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50.
In this way, even when the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is arranged at a position away from the main control board 50, it is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. Will be there.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a), 23 (b), 24 (c), and (d), the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 is placed at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50. By arranging it in the position of, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the main CPU 55, and eventually the main CPU 55 malfunctions. You can prevent it from happening.

(4) As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 of the second embodiment, a management information display LED 74 (also referred to as a “role ratio monitor”) is arranged on the main control board 50. The management information display LED 74 displays management information such as an advantageous section ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and an accessory ratio.
In addition, the "advantageous section ratio" means the ratio of the advantageous section to the total gaming section (normal section + waiting section + advantageous section), and the "continuous accessory ratio" is the first with respect to the total number of medals won. It means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the special character (RB) is activated, and the "role ratio" means the ratio of the number of medals acquired when the character is activated to the total number of medals acquired.

Then, the electrolytic capacitor 86 on the sub control board 80 may be arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU 55 on the main control board 50 and at a position other than the position facing the management information display LED 74. Good.
As a result, even if the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered, the scattered electrolytic solution can be prevented from adhering to the management information display LED 74, and eventually the management displayed on the management information display LED 74. Information can be prevented from becoming unverifiable.
Further, the management information display LED 74 can be prevented from being damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor 86 bursts.
(5) The various modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments and the first to seventh embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<8th Embodiment>
An eighth embodiment relates to a gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 in the lower part of the housing of the slot machine 10.
FIG. 25 is an enlarged side sectional view of a lower front portion (part A in FIG. 22) of the slot machine 10 in a state where the front door 12 is closed, and the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 will be described. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 25, a first closing portion 13c is provided at the lower part of the cabinet 13 so as to project toward the front door 12 when the front door 12 is closed.
That is, the first closed portion 13c is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the first closed portion 13c. However, the front door is in the 12 direction.
Further, the first closed portion 13c is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the first closing portion 13c is formed of sheet metal and is fixed to the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 by screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position below the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, the second closing portion 12a projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the second closing portion 12a is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is closed, the protruding direction of the second closing portion 12a is. The cabinet has 13 directions.

Further, the second closed portion 12a is arranged at a position below the first closed portion 13c.
Furthermore, the second closing portion 12a is formed in a horizontally long shape from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12.
Further, the second closing portion 12a is also formed of sheet metal like the first closing portion 13c, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 by screws.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, at a position above the first closing portion 13c in the lower part of the front door 12, a third closing portion 12b projecting toward the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed. Is provided.
That is, the third closing portion 12b is a plate-shaped protruding portion that protrudes rearward from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 like the second closing portion 12a, and when the front door 12 is closed, the third closing portion 12b is the third. 3 The protruding direction of the closing portion 12b is the direction of the cabinet 13.

Further, the third closing portion 12b is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12, similarly to the second closing portion 12a.
Furthermore, unlike the second closed portion 12a, the third closed portion 12b is arranged at a position above the first closed portion 13c.
Further, the third closed portion 12b is also formed of sheet metal like the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a, and is fixed to the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 by screws.

When the front door 12 is closed, the first closed portion 13c is arranged between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b.
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 at the lower part of the housing is bent as if the left and right sides of the "U" shape are inverted, as shown in FIG. The shape is changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (goto acts) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing a wire through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 inside the cabinet.

Further, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. This door sensor is configured by using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Furthermore, on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided. When the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12, and when the front door 12 is open, the detection piece is urged by a spring to pop out forward.

Further, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in the state of detecting the detection piece and is in the off state. That is, the door sensor is set to low active.
On the other hand, when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece pops out forward by being urged by the spring and goes out from the inside of the door sensor. At this time, the door sensor is in a state where the detection piece is not detected and is turned on.

Then, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the closed state when the door sensor is in the off state, and determines that the front door 12 is in the open state when the door sensor is in the on state.
In this way, the detection piece moves in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12, and the door sensor is turned on / off to detect the opening and closing of the front door 12.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the detection piece moves forward from the pushed state, goes out from the state where it has entered the door sensor, and the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.
The position of the front door 12 when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12 is referred to as a "detection start position".
Further, when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door 12, it means the moment when the door sensor changes from the off state to the on state.

Then, in the eighth embodiment, not only in the state where the front door 12 is closed, but also in the state where the front door 12 is in the detection start position, the first closed portion is between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b. It is formed so that 13c is arranged.
That is, even at the moment when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state and the door sensor is turned from the off state to the on state, the first closing portion 13c is arranged between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b. It is formed like this.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first changes from the off state to the on state, and then the first closed portion 13c comes out from between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b. It will be.
Then, when the door sensor is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the open state, transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 sends a door opening command. Is received, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 and the like notify that the front door 12 is open. As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the front door 12 is open.

Therefore, before the notification that the front door 12 is open is started, the first closed portion 13c does not come out from between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b, and the front door 12 opens. Even at the position where the notification of the fact is started, the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 has a bent shape, so that a wire is inserted into the housing through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (door acts) of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like by passing it through.

In the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejection medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, so that the holding portion 102 that holds the first ejection medal is stopped between the two adjacent holding portions 102 in the hopper disk 101. The corresponding portion can be positioned in front of the discharge unit 103, thereby preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a wire or the like from the medal payout port to access the holding unit 102 of the hopper disk 101. As described above, by providing the configurations of both the sixth and eighth embodiments, it is possible to more firmly prevent fraudulent acts of inserting a wire or the like to access the medal payout device 15.

Here, the distance between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a is set to "h1", the distance between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b is set to "h2", and the distance between the second closed portion 12a and the second closed portion 12a is defined as "h2". 3 The distance from the closed portion 12b is set to "h3", and the protruding width (depth) of the second closed portion 12a is set to "w".
Further, the diameter of the medal is "d" and the thickness of the medal is "t".
The size of a general medal is 24.5 to 25.5 mm in diameter and 1.5 to 2.0 mm in thickness.
Then, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b and the medal thickness "t" is set to satisfy "h2>t". ing.

Here, when the clerk in the hall opens the front door 12 and replenishes the hopper 35 with medals, the medals may be dropped on the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
In particular, in order to replenish the hopper 35 with medals from the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13, there is a case where the medals are dropped near the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, that is, near the first closing portion 13c.

At this time, if it is set to satisfy "h2> t", even if the front door 12 is closed while the medals have fallen near the first closed portion 13c, the medals that have fallen near the first closed portion 13c will remain. , It enters between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b. As a result, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, the medal is not caught between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the protruding width (depth) “w” of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal “d” is set so as to satisfy “w <(d / 2)”. Has been done.
By setting so as to satisfy "w <(d / 2)", it is possible to prevent the medal from being placed on the second closing portion 12a.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the front door 12 from being closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, and by extension, the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a causes the front door to be closed. It is possible to prevent the 12 and the cabinet 13 from being damaged.

<Modified example of the eighth embodiment>
Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is configured by using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, but the door sensor is not limited to this, and may be configured by using, for example, a proximity sensor.
Further, even when the door sensor is configured by using the proximity sensor, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are formed not only when the front door 12 is closed but also when the front door 12 is in the detection start position. The first closed portion 13c is arranged between the two.

(2) In the eighth embodiment, a detection piece that can be moved in the front-rear direction by opening and closing the front door 12 is provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13. Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece is pushed backward by the front door 12 and enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece is urged by the spring and pops out forward. I tried to get out of the door sensor. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, a door sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 12 may be provided on the front side of the left side plate of the cabinet 13, and a detection piece may be provided at a position corresponding to the door sensor on the front door 12. Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 enters the door sensor, and when the front door 12 is opened, the detection piece provided on the front door 12 goes out from the inside of the door sensor. You may do it.

(3) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is provided on the cabinet 13 side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the door sensor may be provided on the front door 12 side.
(4) In the eighth embodiment, the door sensor is turned off when the detection piece is being detected, and is turned on when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor was set to low active. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the door sensor may be turned on when the detection piece is being detected and turned off when the detection piece is not detected. That is, the door sensor may be set to be highly active.
In this case, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is in the closed state when the door sensor is on, and determines that the front door 12 is in the open state when the door sensor is in the off state. It is configured as follows.

(5) In the eighth embodiment, the first closed portion 13c is formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. Further, the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b are formed to be horizontally long from the right end to the left end of the lower back surface of the front door 12. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the first blocking portion 13c may be composed of two members, a first member extending from the right end to the center of the bottom plate 13a and a second member extending from the center to the left end of the bottom plate 13a, and may be divided into three parts. It may be composed of three members.
The second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b may also be composed of two members or three members in the same manner as the first closed portion 13c.
As described above, the first closed portion 13c, the second closed portion 12a, and the third closed portion 12b are not limited to being composed of one member, and may be composed of a plurality of members.

Further, the first closed portion 13c does not reach from the right end to the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, and for example, the first closed portion 13c is provided near the right end or the left end of the front end portion of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13. It may have a part that is not present.
Similarly, the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 may have a part where the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b are not provided.
As described above, even if a part of the first closed portion 13c, the second closed portion 12a, and the third closed portion 12b is not provided, the inside of the housing is formed through the gap between the cabinet 13 and the front door 12. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of accessing the medal payout device 15 or the like through a wire or the like.
Further, the first closing portion 13c may be a part of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13, or may be a separate member from the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13.
Similarly, the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be a part of the front door 12, or may be a separate member from the front door 12.

(6) In the eighth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the first closed portion 13c is arranged between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b.
At this time, a gap may be formed between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a, or the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a may be in contact with each other.
Similarly, a gap may be formed between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b, or the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b may be in contact with each other.
Further, the entire first closed portion 13c may be arranged between the second closed portion 12a and the third closed portion 12b, and a part of the first closed portion 13c may be arranged. May be good.

Furthermore, with the front door 12 closed, the first closing portion 13c may be brought into contact with a position corresponding to the space between the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b on the back surface of the front door 12. ..
Further, contrary to the eighth embodiment, the first closing portion 13c may be provided on the front door 12 side, and the second closing portion 12a and the third closing portion 12b may be provided on the cabinet 13 side.
That is, a first closing portion 13c that protrudes from the lower part of the back surface of the front door 12 toward the cabinet 13 is provided, and the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 is directed toward the front door 12 from a position below the first closing portion 13c. A second closing portion 12a that protrudes may be provided, and a third closing portion 12b that protrudes from a position above the first closing portion 13c at the front end of the bottom plate 13a of the cabinet 13 toward the front door 12 may be provided.

(7) In the eighth embodiment, the relationship between the distance "h2" between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b and the medal thickness "t" is set to satisfy "h2>t". ..
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be set so as to satisfy "h2 <t".
When set to satisfy "h2>t", when the front door 12 is closed with the medals dropped near the first closed portion 13c, the medals dropped near the first closed portion 13c are the third closed portion. It hits the rear end of 12b and is pushed into the cabinet 13. As a result, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, the medal is not caught between the first closed portion 13c and the third closed portion 12b, and the front door 12 does not close.

(8) In the eighth embodiment, the protrusion width (depth) "w" of the second closing portion 12a and the diameter of the medal are set so as to satisfy "w <(d / 2)" with respect to the relationship with "d". did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be set to satisfy "(d / 2) <w <d".
By satisfying "(d / 2) <w", the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "w <d", even if the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, the front door 12 is placed on the second closed portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the cabinet 13, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and by extension, the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a is given to the hall clerk. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(9) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closed portion 12a and the diameter of the medal is "d", and the distance "h1" between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a and the medal. Regarding the relationship with the thickness "t", it may be set so as to satisfy "(d / 2) <w" and "h1 <t".
As described above, by satisfying "(d / 2) <w", the medal can be placed on the second closing portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1 <t", even if the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, the front door 12 is placed on the second closed portion 12a before the front door 12 is closed. Since the placed medal hits the front end of the first closing portion 13c, the front door 12 does not close.
As a result, it is possible for the hall clerk to know that the medal is placed on the second closed portion 12a, and by extension, the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a is given to the hall clerk. It can be removed to close the front door 12.

(10) The relationship between the protruding width (depth) "w" of the second closed portion 12a and the diameter of the medal is "d", and the distance "h1" between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a and the medal. Regarding the relationship with the thickness "t", it may be set so as to satisfy "d <w" and "h1>t".
By satisfying "d <w", the entire medal can be placed on the second closed portion 12a. That is, the medal can be placed on the second closed portion 12a without a part of the medal protruding from the second closed portion 12a. Further, by satisfying "h1>t", a medal can be inserted between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a.

Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a, the front door 12 is closed with the medal fitted between the first closed portion 13c and the second closed portion 12a. It will be. As a result, the front door 12 can be closed without damaging the front door 12 and the cabinet 13. Further, the medal placed on the second closed portion 12a does not hit the first closed portion 13c or the front end portion of the cabinet 13, and the front door 12 does not close.
(11) The various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments and the first to eighth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<9th embodiment>
The ninth embodiment relates to the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side and the control of the output of the effect on the sub control board 80 side.
FIG. 26 (a) is a diagram showing the types of special roles (roles) and end conditions, and FIG. 26 (b) is a diagram showing the types of gaming states and the specified number of each gaming state. (C) is a figure which shows the number table of the internal lottery and advantageous section lottery in setting 1.

As shown in FIG. 26 (a), in the ninth embodiment, as special roles (roles), BB (first-class bonus continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) and RB (first-class special bonus) (Regular bonus) and MB (Type 2 accessory continuous operation device; Type 2 big bonus).
Here, the BB is a device capable of continuously operating the RB. That is, during the BB game, the RB game is continuously executed. Also, during the RB game, the probability of winning a small role is high. Furthermore, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends. Further, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends.

Further, the MB is a device capable of continuously operating the CB (Type 2 special accessory). That is, during the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the winning combination lottery means 61, all the small winning combinations are in a state of being duplicated, and the stop switch 42 operates on a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time from the moment when the reel 31 is stopped until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is one). Further, the CB game ends in one game, and when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, in the ninth embodiment, seven game states are provided: non-RT, RT, RB inside, BB inside, RB game, BB game, and MB game. There is. Then, the main control board 50 controls the transition of these gaming states.
Here, the "specified number" means the number of medals inserted in which the start switch 41 can be operated (the game can be started). In the ninth embodiment, the specified number in the MB is set to "1", and the specified number in the gaming state other than in the MB is set to "3".

Further, "RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (features, replays, small wins) to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are in a unique lottery state.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but means that the type of conditional device to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different from RT.
In any of the game states, if the start condition of RT is satisfied, the game shifts to RT from the next game, and if the end condition of RT is satisfied in RT, the game shifts to non-RT from the next game.

In addition, when a special role is won, the winning information of the special role is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role stops at the valid line.
A game that has not been won as a special role is called "non-internal", and when the special role is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role is not stopped at the valid line, that is, the special role is won. The game in which the information is carried over is called "inside".

Further, from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped (maximum number of moving frames), the probability that the desired symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effective line can be stopped on the effective line is "pulled in". It is called "rate (PB)".
Then, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate reel 31 position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped at the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped at the effective line (effective). The inability to pull in to the line) is called "PB ≠ 1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. It is referred to as "PB = 1".

If the BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops at the valid line (BB wins), the BB game will start from the next game, although no medals will be paid out in this game. During the BB game, the probability of winning a small winning combination is increased by continuously executing the RB game. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the BB game exceeds 250, the BB game ends, and the game returns to the game state before the transition to the BB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the BB does not stop at the effective line, the winning information of the BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the BB stops at the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the BB is carried over is called "inside the BB".
The timing of transition to the inside of the BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in the game in which the BB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the game may be transferred to the inside of the BB, and in the game in which the BB is won, the game is not transferred to the inside of the BB and is inside the BB in the next game. It may be moved inside.

If the RB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops at the effective line (RB wins), no medal will be paid out in this game, but the RB game will start from the next game. During the RB game, the probability of winning a small role is high. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the RB game exceeds 100, the RB game ends, and the game returns to the game state before the transition to the RB game from the next game.
Furthermore, if the RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop at the effective line, the winning information of the RB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops at the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the RB is carried over is called "inside the RB".
The transition timing to the inside of the RB can be appropriately set in the same manner as the transition timing to the inside of the BB. For example, in the game in which the RB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the game may be transferred to the inside of the RB. You may move to the inside.

In addition, if the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops at the valid line (MB wins), the MB game will start from the next game, although no medals will be paid out in this game. During the MB game, the CB game is continuously executed. Then, when the number of medals paid out during the MB game exceeds 14, the MB game ends, and the game returns to the game state before the transition to the MB game from the next game.

Furthermore, if the MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the MB does not stop at the effective line, the winning information of the MB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops at the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of the MB is carried over is called "inside the MB".
In the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is set to "PB = 1", so that if the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB will always stop at the effective line in this game. , It will not be inside the MB.

Further, the condition device (combination) of the ninth embodiment is roughly classified into a special combination (role), a replay (replay combination), and a small combination.
Furthermore, there are three types of special roles, BB, RB, and MB, and two types of replays, replay 1 and replay 2, as small roles: common bell, left correct answer bell, and middle correct answer bell. , Right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1, and cherry 2.
The left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell are collectively referred to as a "push order bell".
Further, the "condition device" operates in response to the winning number determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. When one winning number is determined, one or more conditional devices corresponding to the winning number are activated, and the winning flag corresponding to the activated conditional device is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, any one of "0" to "16" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the determined winning number corresponds to the determined winning number. Any condition device from non-winning to MB is activated.
Both types of replays are won individually and do not win in duplicate with other conditional devices (roles).
In addition, there are four types of bells: common bell, left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, and right correct answer bell, but all of them are won individually and do not win in duplicate with other roles.

Furthermore, the watermelon has a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with BB.
Further, the cherry 1 has a case of being single-winned and a case of being double-winned with the BB, and the cherry 2 has a case of being single-winning, a case of being double-winning with the RB, and a case of being double-winning with the BB. ..
In addition, BB has a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with watermelon, cherry 1 or cherry 2, but RB does not win alone, only wins duplicately with cherry 2, and MB. Will only win alone and will not win multiple roles with other roles.

Further, the “dividend” means the number of medals to be paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to each condition device is stopped (the winning combination is won).
In the ninth embodiment, for the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell, the payout differs between the specified number 3 (gaming state other than in MB) and the specified number 1 (in MB), but other than that, The dividend is the same for the specified number 3 and the specified number 1.

The left correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the left first stop is in the correct push order and the other than the left first stop is in the incorrect answer push order. In the specified number 3, eight medals are paid out in the correct push order. , One medal is paid out in the order of incorrect answering, and 14 medals are paid out in the order of correct answering, and 15 medals are paid out in the order of incorrect answering.
Similarly, the middle correct answer bell is a push order bell in which the middle first stop is in the correct push order, and the right first stop is in the correct answer push order except for the middle first stop. , It is a push order bell that is an incorrect push order except for the first stop on the right.
The common bell is a bell that pays out eight medals regardless of the pushing order.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61). The winning combination lottery means 61 draws a winning number. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.
Further, the lottery of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) may be referred to as "internal lottery".
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), in the ninth embodiment, any one of the winning numbers "0" to "15" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Further, the winning numbers "0" to "15" correspond to the conditional devices of "non-winning" to "MB", respectively. Then, when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined, the condition device of "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated. Further, when the winning number "8" is determined, the condition device of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8" operates.
As described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 is based on the random number generation means, the random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means. It is provided with a winning number determining means for determining a winning number, and when the winning number is determined, a condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.
Then, for example, the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means are the same in the non-internal and internal parts, and the operating condition device may be the same, or even if the random number values extracted by the random number extraction means are the same, the operation is performed. The condition device to be used may be different.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the winning flag control means 62. The winning flag control means 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the lottery result of the winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61.
In the ninth embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each combination for all the combinations. Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 turns on the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number (sets the winning flag). ..

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of "Replay 1" included in the condition device of "Replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" is set. It is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.
Similarly, in the non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10". The two winning flags of "" are turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off.

In addition, since the winning information of roles other than special roles (BB, RB, MB) is not carried over, even if the winning role is won in the game this time and the winning flag of that role is turned on, that role The winning flag is turned off at the end of this game, regardless of whether or not the player has won.
On the other hand, the winning information of the special role (BB, RB, MB) is carried over, so once the special role is won in the game this time and the winning flag of the winning special role is turned on, the special role will be The winning flag remains on until a prize is won, and when the special role wins, the winning flag is turned off.

For example, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, "cherry 1" and "BB" included in the condition device of "cherry 1 + BB" corresponding to the winning number "10". The two winning flags are turned on, but if "BB" does not win in this game, "Cherry" will be displayed at the end of this game regardless of whether or not "Cherry 1" has won in this game. The winning flag of "1" is turned off, and the winning flag of "BB" is kept on. In this case, from the next game, it shifts to the inside of the BB.

Further, for example, when the winning number "9" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, in addition to the winning flag of the "BB" carried over, the "cherry" corresponding to the winning number "9" is added. The winning flag of "cherry 1" included in the condition device of "1" is turned on. That is, the two winning flags of "cherry 1" and "BB" are turned on.
For this reason, in non-RT, when the winning number "10" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 (double winning of "cherry 1 + BB"), and when the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning number "9" The on / off state of the winning flag is the same as when it is decided (winning "Cherry 1" alone).

In addition, during the MB game, the winning flag control means 62 sets the winning flags of all the small roles (common bell, left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell, watermelon, cherry 1 and cherry 2). turn on. Therefore, although it is not won by the lottery by the role lottery means 61, it is in the same state as all the small wins are won.
For example, during the MB game, when the winning number "0" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the "non-winning" corresponding to the winning number "0" does not include any winning combination, but all of them. The winning flag of the small winning combination (the above 7 small winning combination) is turned on.
Further, for example, during the MB game, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the "replay 1" included in the condition device of the "replay 1" corresponding to the winning number "1" In addition to the winning flag, the winning flags of all the small wins (the above seven small wins) are turned on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a reel control means 65, and the reel control means 65 is a plurality of stop position determination tables corresponding to on / off of the winning flag. To be equipped with. Further, each stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
When the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the winning flag control means 62 controls the winning flag of the winning combination included in the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number, the reel control means 65 selects the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag.

Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is set based on the selected stop position determination table and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. It is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.
In addition, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of replay 1 is on and the winning flags other than replay 1 are off is such that the symbol combination corresponding to replay 1 stops at the valid line. The stop position of each reel 31 is determined so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the combinations other than the replay 1 do not stop at the effective line.

Furthermore, the stop position determination table selected when the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on and the winning flags other than the left correct answer bell are off is when the stop switch 42 is operated in the left first stop. , The symbol combination for paying out eight medals stops at the effective line, and when the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop, the symbol combination for paying out one medal stops at the effective line. As described above, the stop position of each reel 31 is determined.

Further, the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number in each game state. Dividing the number of internal lottery by "65536" gives the winning probability.
For example, since the number of winning numbers "4" in non-RT is "3000", the winning number "4" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT, and the "left" corresponding to the winning number "4". The probability that the condition device of "correct answer bell" is activated is "3000/65536".

Further, in the column of "internal lottery number" in FIG. 26C, the "*" mark indicates that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Here, the "advantageous section" means a game section having the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated).
Further, the "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the "advantageous operation mode" to the player.
Furthermore, the "operation of the instruction function" includes displaying the correct push order when the push order bell is won.

Further, the "advantageous section lottery" means a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.
Then, when the player wins the advantageous section lottery and shifts to the advantageous section, the instruction function can be activated, and the correct push order can be notified when the push order bell is won.
For example, the number "8000" of the winning number "3"("commonbell") in non-RT is marked with "*", which is the winning combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery means 61) in non-RT. When the winning number "3"("commonbell") is determined by the lottery by, it means that the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), in non-RT, when the winning number "0" (non-winning) is determined, and the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", " When it is determined to be "middle correct answer bell" or "right correct answer bell"), the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but in other cases, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.
Furthermore, in the RT, RB inside, and BB inside, when the winning numbers "4" to "6"("left correct answer bell", "middle correct answer bell", or "right correct answer bell") are determined. Except for this, when the winning number is determined to be the same as that of non-RT, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, since the winning information of the BB is carried over inside the BB, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined inside the BB and at the non-RT (non-internal) The on / off state of the winning flag is the same as when the winning number "10" (duplicate winning of "cherry 1 + BB") is determined.
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "10" (duplicate winning of "cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal) and the number of winning numbers "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") in BB Is set to the same "200".
Therefore, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined inside the RB, the winning flag of "cherry 1" and the winning flag of the carried-over "RB" are turned on. ..
Furthermore, "BB" and "RB" are the same in that they are both special roles (roles), and the winning numbers "10" (double winning of "cherry 1 + BB") in non-RT (non-internal). The number of units and the number of units of the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") in the RB are set to the same "200".
Therefore, even when the winning number "9" (single winning of "cherry 1") is determined in the RB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, when the winning number "12" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + RB") or winning number "13" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + BB") is determined in non-RT, and inside the RB or inside the BB, the winning number is won. When the number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") is decided, the winning flag of "cherry 2" and the winning flag of the special role (role) are turned on.
Furthermore, the number of winning numbers "12" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + RB") and winning number "13" (duplicate winning of "cherry 2 + BB") in non-RT is "300", which is "300" in the inside of RB and BB. It matches the number "300" of the winning number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") in the inside.
Therefore, even when the winning number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") is determined in the inside of the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed.

In addition, the column of "number of lottery lottery for advantageous section" in FIG. 26C shows the number of each winning number. Dividing the number of advantageous section lottery by "16384" gives the winning probability.
For example, in non-RT, inside RB, or inside BB, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 is It becomes "20/16384".
Further, for example, in non-RT or RT, when the winning number "8" (double winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the probability of winning in the advantageous section lottery is "10000/16384". ".

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to MB is set to "PB = 1".
Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the lottery of MB is performed in non-RT and RT, but when the MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB in this game always stops at the valid line, so that the MB From the next game, it will shift to the MB game without being inside.
Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), during the MB game, a lottery for replay 1 or replay 2 is performed, and all the small wins are duplicated regardless of the lottery result by the role lottery means 61. Become.

For this reason, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 1" and all the small roles (common bell, left correct answer bell, middle) The winning flags of the correct answer bell, the right correct answer bell, the watermelon, the cherry 1 and the cherry 2) are turned on.
Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the winning flag of "Replay 2" and the winning flag of all the small wins are turned on.

Then, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game, that is, when the winning flag of "Replay 1" and the winning flags of all the small wins are turned on. Selects the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the left correct answer bell is on. However, during the MB game, the specified number is 1 (1 card is inserted), and the payout is different from non-RT, etc., and 14 or 15 cards are paid out.
As a result, when the winning number "1" (single winning of "Replay 1") is determined during the MB game and the stop switch 42 is operated at the left first stop (when the push order is correct), 14 When the symbol combination for paying out 15 medals stops at the effective line and the stop switch 42 is operated other than the left first stop (when the push order is incorrect), the symbol combination for paying out 15 medals is Stop at the active line.

Similarly, when the winning number "2" (single winning of "Replay 2") is determined during the MB game, the same stop position determination table as when only the winning flag of the right correct answer bell is on is selected, and the right At the time of the first stop (when the push order is correct), 14 cards are paid out, and at the time other than the right first stop (when the push order is incorrect), 15 cards are paid out.
Then, in the first game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 14 cards is notified, and in the second game during the MB game, the push order for paying out 15 cards is notified.
As described above, the end condition of the MB game is set that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds 14, and therefore, by performing such notification, 29 medals are paid out during the MB game. Can be done. Further, since the specified number is set to "1" during the MB game, the player can obtain 27 medals obtained by subtracting the input number "2" from the payout number "29".

Further, in order to notify the player of the pushing order that is advantageous to the player during the MB game, it is necessary to shift to the advantageous section.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26C, the winning of the advantageous section lottery when the winning number "15" (single winning of "MB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 in non-RT or RT. The probability is set to "16384/16384", that is, "100%".

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the effect group number selection means 64. The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning number, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As shown in FIG. 26 (c), the production group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. Specifically, the production group numbers "0" to "3" are defined corresponding to the winning numbers "0" to "3", and the production group numbers "4" correspond to the winning numbers "4" to "6". , And the production group numbers "5" to "13" are defined corresponding to the winning numbers "7" to "15".
Then, when the winning number is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the determined winning number.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes a push order instruction number selection means 63. The push order instruction number selection means 63 is the winning number determined when the winning number corresponding to the push order bell (left correct answer bell, middle correct answer bell, right correct answer bell) is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61. This is for selecting the push order instruction number (the number corresponding to the correct push order) corresponding to.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the control command transmitting means 71. The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output by the sub control board 80 to the sub control board 80.
In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71, as a control command, provides information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a push order instruction number (during AT and correct push). In addition to the winning number corresponding to the conditional device having the order (only when the winning number is determined), the production group number, the information when the stop switch 42 is operated, the information of the winning combination, etc., the gaming state (non-RT, RT) , RB inside, BB inside, RB inside, BB inside, MB inside), and the effect group number and the like are transmitted to the sub control board 80.

As a result, the sub control board 80 side determines the game state on the main control board 50 side and the condition device (excluding the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, and the right correct answer bell) operating by the combination lottery means 61. be able to.
On the sub-control board 80 side, it can be determined from the effect group number that the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell has been won, but the left correct answer bell, the middle correct answer bell, or the right correct answer bell. It is not possible to judge which of the two was won (correct answer push order).
Further, during AT, the correct push order can be notified by the push order instruction number.

Further, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, and the like of the effect during the game and the game standby.
The main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected to each other, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80, and information (information necessary for output of the effect) is required. Control command) is sent.
Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
Further, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like are electrically connected to the sub control board 80 via the input port 81 or the output port 82.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control means 91 and the like, and the ROM 84 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect determination table and the like.
Further, the effect determination table defines the effect to be output, and a plurality of the effect is provided. The effect output control means 91 determines the effect to be output using any of the effect determination tables, and the determined effect. Is controlled to output.
That is, the effect output control means 91 determines what kind of effect is to be output at what timing based on the control command received from the main control board 50 and any of the effect determination tables, and the determination is made. According to this, the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 is controlled.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an effect determination table used in common for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal), and FIG. 28 is an effect determination table commonly used in RB and BB. It is a figure which shows.
As shown in FIG. 27, in the ninth embodiment, 18 types of effect patterns from "no effect" to "continuous effect" are provided. In addition, each production pattern from "character production (lively)" to "continuous production" defines different productions.
For example, the "fixed effect" is an effect that allows the player to know that he has won a special role, and the "notification effect after the first stop" is after the first stop (after the operation of the first stop switch 42). It is an effect that is output at the timing, the "left first stop effect" is an effect that instructs that the left stop switch 42 should be operated first, and the "continuous effect" is a continuous effect over a plurality of games. It is a production that is output.

Further, the column of "number of distribution of effect patterns" in FIG. 27 shows the number of distribution of each effect pattern when each effect group number is received. Dividing the number of effect pattern distributions by "256" gives the selection probability of each effect pattern. In FIG. 27, the name of the corresponding condition device is described below each effect group number.
For example, in non-RT, the winning number "1" (single winning of "replay 1") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, and the selection probability of "no production" when the production group number "1" is transmitted is It is "128/256", the selection probability of "character production (lively)" is "20/256", the selection probability of "conversation production (lively)" is also "20/256", and "cut-in production". The selection probability of "(strong production)" is "0/256".

As described above, the control command transmitting means 71 indicates the game state (non-RT, RT, inside the RB, inside the BB, inside the RB, during the BB, during the MB) with respect to the sub-control board 80, and information indicating the game state. Send the production group number.
Then, the effect output control means 91 of the sub control board 80 selects an effect determination table according to the game state based on the information indicating the game state received from the main control board 50, and the selected effect determination table and the main Based on the effect group number received from the control board 50, it is determined which effect pattern to output, and the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 is controlled according to the determination.

Here, in the non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the combination lottery means 61 and the production group number "12" is transmitted, the production output. The control means 91 selects an effect determination table used in common for non-RT and RT (non-AT) shown in FIG. 27, and places a column for the effect group number “12” (single winning of “BB”) in this effect determination table. The number is used to determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "BB" is won alone in non-RT, for example, "continuous production" is selected with a probability of "40/256".

On the other hand, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the effect group number "0" is transmitted inside the BB, the effect output control means 91 Select the effect determination table used in both the RB interior and the BB interior shown in FIG. 28, and use the number of columns of the effect group number “0” (“non-winning”) in this effect determination table to use any effect. Decide whether to output the effect of the pattern. As shown in FIG. 28, at the time of "non-winning" in the BB, for example, "fixed effect" is selected with a probability of "80/256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 is a game in which the winning combination lottery means 61 independently wins the "BB" in the non-RT (non-internal), and the winning combination lottery means 61 is "non-winning" in the BB inside. The effect to be output is determined by using a different effect determination table for the game. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Further, in the non-RT, when the winning number "14" (single winning of "BB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 is the winning number "14" on the main control board 50 side. The winning flag of "BB" included in the condition device of "BB" corresponding to "" is turned on, and the other winning flags are turned off. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as a "BB single stop position determination table".

In the "BB independent stop position determination table", each reel 31 is stopped so that the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops at the effective line and the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than BB does not stop at the effective line. The position is fixed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 is based on the "BB independent stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the above is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

Further, when the winning number "0"("non-winning") is obtained in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 is carried over to the "BB" on the main control board 50 side. Keep the winning flag on and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the winning flag of "BB" is on and the other winning flags are off. That is, in the non-RT, the same "BB independent stop position determination table" as when the "BB" is independently won by the winning combination lottery means 61 is selected.
Therefore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" inside the BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 as when the winning combination lottery means 61 independently wins the "BB" in the non-RT is performed. Further, "stop control of the same reel 31 is performed" means that when each stop switch 42 is operated in the same mode (pushing order and operation timing), each reel 31 stops at the same position and is the same. It means that a stop roll is displayed.

In this way, the main control board 50 side is the same when the winning combination lottery means 61 independently wins the "BB" in the non-RT and when the winning combination lottery means 61 becomes "non-winning" inside the BB. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined by using the stop position determination table of the above, but the sub-control board 80 side determines the effect to be output by using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, and the effects can be diversified.
Further, even if the same reel 31 is stopped and controlled on the main control board 50 side and the same stop result is displayed, different effects are output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the special role is won. It is possible to make it possible for the player to guess that it is (inside).

Furthermore, by selecting different production determination tables on the sub-control board 80 side between the non-RT "BB" single winning and the "non-winning" inside the BB, the non-RT "BB" alone is selected. At the time of winning, the production decision table with a low selection probability of the final production (the production that the player knows that the BB has been won) is selected, and at the time of "non-winning" inside the BB, the selection probability of the final production is high. The decision table can be selected.
As a result, in the game in which "BB" is won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "BB" has been won, and in the inside of the BB, it is a game that "BB" has been won. By making it easy for the player to understand, it is possible to make the player aim for the prize of "BB" and prevent the inside of the BB from continuing indefinitely so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the non-RT, when the winning number "8" (duplicate winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the effect group number "6" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 The effect determination table used in common for non-RT (non-internal) and RT (non-AT and non-internal) shown in FIG. 27 is selected, and the effect group number “6” (“watermelon + BB”) is duplicated in this effect determination table. ) Is used to determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 27, when "watermelon + BB" is won in duplicate in non-RT, for example, there is a probability of "50/256" of "character production (lively)", "conversation production (lively)", or "cut-in production (cut-in production). "Strong production" is selected, and "Continuous production" is selected with a probability of "30/256".

On the other hand, in the inside of the BB, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the effect group number "5" is transmitted, the effect output control means 91 Selects the effect determination table used in both the inside of the RB and the inside of the BB shown in FIG. 28, and uses the number of columns of the effect group number “5” (single winning of “watermelon”) in this effect determination table. , Determine which effect pattern to output. As shown in FIG. 28, when the "watermelon" in the BB is won alone, for example, "character production (lively)" or "conversation production (lively)" is selected with a probability of "73/256", and "20". Select continuous production with a probability of "/ 256".
In this way, the effect output control means 91 is a game in which the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon + BB" in the non-RT (non-internal), and the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon" independently in the BB. The output production is determined using a different production determination table depending on the game played. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, during non-internal, in order to keep the player's expectation for the "BB" winning for a long time by showing the player a continuous production over multiple games, the selection of the continuous production at the time of "watermelon + BB" duplicate winning The probability is set high.
On the other hand, inside the BB, if the player is shown to the continuous production over multiple games, the "BB" prize will be delayed by that amount and the player's medals will decrease, so the "watermelon" alone will be won. The selection probability of the continuous effect at the time is set low, and the selection probability of the definite effect at the time of "non-winning" is set high in order to make the player aim for the "BB" prize at an early stage.
In the inside of the BB, the winning probability of each winning combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning may be set so that the player's medals do not decrease, and then the selection probability of the continuous production may be set high.

Further, in the non-RT (non-internal), when the winning number "8" (duplicate winning of "watermelon + BB") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the winning flag control means 62 is on the main control board 50 side. , Turn on the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" included in the condition device of "watermelon + BB" corresponding to the winning number "8", and turn off the other winning flags. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. This stop position determination table is referred to as "watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table".

The "watermelon + BB duplication stop position determination table" is provided so that the symbol combinations corresponding to watermelon or BB can be stopped at the effective line, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the roles other than watermelon and BB do not stop at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 is based on the "watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table" and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

Further, when the winning number "7" (single winning of "watermelon") is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 inside the BB, the winning flag control means 62 is carried over on the main control board 50 side. While keeping the winning flag of "BB" on, in addition, turn on the winning flag of "watermelon" included in the condition device of "watermelon" corresponding to the winning number "7", and "watermelon" and "BB". The winning flags other than "" are turned off. As a result, the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are turned on. Further, the reel control means 65 selects the corresponding stop position determination table when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. That is, in the non-RT, the same "watermelon + BB overlapping stop position determination table" as when the "watermelon + BB" is duplicated by the winning combination lottery means 61 is selected.

Therefore, when the winning combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon" alone inside the BB, the same stop control of the reel 31 as when the winning combination lottery means 61 repeatedly wins the "watermelon + BB" is performed in the non-RT. ..
In this way, when the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon + BB" twice in the non-RT, and when the combination lottery means 61 wins the "watermelon" independently inside the BB, the main control board 50 side The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, but the sub-control board 80 side determines the effect to be output using different effect determination tables. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

In addition, when "Cherry 1 + BB" is won twice in non-RT, and when "Cherry 1" is won alone in BB, when "Watermelon + BB" is won twice in non-RT, and inside BB As in the case of winning the "watermelon" alone, the main control board 50 side determines the stop position of the reel 31 using the same stop position determination table, but the sub control board 80 side uses a different effect determination table. Use to determine the output effect. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.

Furthermore, when "Cherry 2 + BB" or "Cherry 2 + RB" is won twice in non-RT, and when "Cherry 2" is won alone in BB or RB, it becomes "Watermelon + BB" in non-RT. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table on the main control board 50 side, as in the case of duplicate winning and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB, but the sub control On the substrate 80 side, an effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is different.
As a result, even if the stop control of the reel 31 on the main control board 50 side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control board 80 side, so that the effects can be diversified.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the number of distributions of each effect pattern is the same when the "watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB. Therefore, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same.
However, when the "watermelon" is won alone in non-RT, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the winning flag of "watermelon" is on and the other winning flags are off. When a single "watermelon" is won inside the BB, the corresponding stop position determination table is selected when the two winning flags "watermelon" and "BB" are on and the other winning flags are off. To do. Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 is different between when the "watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB.
In this way, the selection probability of each effect pattern is the same on the sub-control board 80 side when the "watermelon" is independently won in the non-RT and when the "watermelon" is independently won in the BB. On the main control board 50 side, the stop control of the reel 31 is different.

As described above, in the plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same. Therefore, when the same condition device is operated, the stop control (selected stop position determination table) of the reel 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table). ) May be different.

Further, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are the same, and the same conditions are met. When the device is activated, the stop control (selected stop position determination table) of the reel 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may be different. ..

Furthermore, in a plurality of gaming states, the random number values extracted by the random number extracting means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means of the winning combination lottery means 61 are different, and the same condition device is used. When is activated, the stop control (selected stop position determination table) of the reel 31 for each gaming state is the same, but the selection probability of each effect pattern (selected effect determination table) may be different.

<Modified example of the ninth embodiment>
Although the ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) Type of combination shown in the ninth embodiment, type of conditional device, type of game state, specified number in each game state, payout at the time of winning each combination, allocation of internal lottery number, advantageous section lottery The allocation of numbers, the types of effect patterns, the allocation of the number of distributions for each effect pattern, etc. are merely examples, and can be appropriately set according to the content of the game.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, only the number table of the internal lottery and the advantageous section lottery in the setting 1 is shown, but six stages from the setting 1 to the setting 6 are provided as the setting values, and each set value has a different internal. A table of numbers for lottery and advantageous section lottery can be provided.
(3) In the ninth embodiment, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating the game state and the effect group number to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub control board 80 side determines the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side, and selects the effect pattern with a probability according to the game state and the condition device. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the control command transmitting means 71 may transmit the winning number determined by the internal lottery to the sub-control board 80, and transmits information indicating the condition device corresponding to the winning number determined by the internal lottery. May be good. Then, the sub-control board 80 side may determine the condition device on the main control board 50 side based on the received information indicating the winning number and the condition device.

Further, for example, the control command transmission means 71 transmits information indicating the condition device determined by the internal lottery and information on the winning combination to the sub control board 80. Then, on the sub control board 80 side, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the condition device and the information of the winning combination.
Furthermore, for example, the sub control board 80 receives the information indicating that the "BB" has been won, but if the information indicating that the "BB" has won the prize is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is changed. It can be determined that it is inside the BB.
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the information indicating the effect group number, the winning number, and the condition device received from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 side. The production pattern may be selected.

(4) For example, the control command transmitting means 71 transmits information indicating on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination and information on the winning combination to the sub-control board 80. Then, on the sub control board 80 side, the game state and the condition device on the main control board 50 side may be determined based on the information indicating the on / off of the winning flag and the information of the winning combination.
For example, if the information indicating that the winning flag of "BB" is on is received, but the information indicating that "BB" has won is not received, the gaming state on the main control board 50 side is inside the BB. Can be judged.

Further, since the lottery of "BB" is not performed inside the BB, when the information indicating that only the winning flag of "BB" is on is received inside the BB, the internal lottery on the main control board 50 side is performed. It can be determined that the winning number is "0"("non-winning").
Then, based on the game state on the main control board 50 side determined on the sub control board 80 side and the condition device on the main control board 50 side also determined on the sub control board 80 side, the effect pattern on the sub control board 80 side. May be selected.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, "single winning" is used to mean that only a role other than the special role is won, and the special role is not won at the same time, and "duplicate winning" is used. , It is used to mean that the special role and other roles other than the special role are elected at the same time.
For example, the winning of "watermelon + control role 1" in the BB is a duplicate winning in the sense that multiple types of roles are won at the same time, but only the roles other than the special role are won, and the special role is. Since they have not been elected at the same time, in the sense of the ninth embodiment, they are elected alone.

Further, when the "watermelon + control combination 1 + BB" is won (duplicate winning) inside the BB and when the "watermelon + control combination 1" is won (single winning) inside the BB, the main control board 50 side Since the on / off states of the winning flags are the same, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined using the same stop position determination table, but since the winning number and the effect group number are different, on the sub control board 80 side, The effect to be output is determined using a different effect determination table.
It should be noted that the "control combination" is a combination for making the stop position determination table to be selected different by making the on / off state of the winning flag different, and making the stop control of the reel 31 different, and winning a prize. Not a role for.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, when the winning number "11" (single winning of "cherry 2") is determined in the inside of the RB and inside the BB, the advantageous section lottery can be executed, but there are a plurality of types. It is also possible not to execute the advantageous section lottery when the winning combination with the special winning combination is won.
(7) The various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments and the first to ninth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<10th Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment relates to the control of the display of the management information display LED 74.
The main CPU 55 is in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress) and a setting confirmation state for 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on the power on (for example, when the power is turned on, when the first interrupt process is started, when a program is started, etc.). (Setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress), control is performed so that all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are lit in the RWM error error state.
As described in the second embodiment, since the management information display LED 74 is composed of a 4-digit LED, “8888” is displayed when all the LEDs are turned on. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the LED of the management information display LED 74.

If the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on, the setting changes to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed. Further, when the setting change state is entered, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on.
Then, 5 seconds from the predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to be longer than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state when the setting key switch is turned on at the time of power-on. There is.

Here, for example, it is assumed that the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to a time shorter than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state. In this case, first, all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on, then the management information is once displayed on the management information display LED 74, and then all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 are turned on again. Therefore, there is a possibility that the manager (the clerk in the hall) may suspect that there is something wrong with the game machine.

Therefore, the lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is set to 5 seconds.
The lighting period of all the LEDs of the management information display LED 74 from a predetermined timing based on the power-on is not limited to 5 seconds, and any time is longer than the time required from the power-on to the setting change state. May be set to.

Further, the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74 will be described below.
In the tenth embodiment, the four-digit LED included in the management information display LED 74 is referred to as "digit 6", "digit 7", "digit 8", and "digit 9" in order from the left side.
Of the four-digit LEDs of the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left side (digits 6 and 7) are called "identification segments", and the two LEDs on the right side (digits 8 and 9) are called "ratio Called "Seg".

Furthermore,
Digit 6: Upper digit of the identification segment Digit 7: Lower digit of the identification segment Digit 8: Upper digit of the ratio segment Digit 9: Lower digit of the ratio segment.
Further, in the tenth embodiment, each LED (digit) of the management information display LED 74 is an 8-segment LED composed of segments A to G and segment DP.

The test pattern of the management information display LED 74 is displayed in order to confirm whether all the segments (segments A to G and DP) are correctly turned on and off. Therefore, during the period (time) when the test pattern is displayed, all the segments are set to have a lit state and a lit state.
Further, when the test pattern is displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is displayed at any of the following timings.
(1) Within 5 seconds from the specified timing based on the power-on (2) Within 5 seconds from the setting change start process (3) Setting change (mode) in progress (4) Setting confirmation (mode) in progress (5) RWM error error

The first test pattern is to switch a predetermined display every second and display it for 5 seconds. The time for maintaining one display is not limited to 1 second, and the display time of the test pattern is not limited to 5 seconds (it may be other than 5 seconds).
Then, the test pattern is set so that all the segments of all the LEDs have a state of being lit and a state of being extinguished during the display time of the test pattern of 5 seconds.
Secondly, as a test pattern, all segments of all LEDs are blinked. Even with this setting, all segments of all LEDs can be turned on and off by blinking once (turning on and off).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example 1 of a test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In the test pattern display of FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 described later, the lit segment is indicated by a solid line, and the lit segment is indicated by a dotted line. Further, in the segment DP, the lighting state is indicated by a black circle, and the extinguishing response is indicated by a white circle.
Further, in the following description, "." Indicates that the segment DP is in the lit state, and "." Indicates that the segment DP is in the off state.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, two types of display of each LED of the test pattern are provided.
One of them is a pattern that displays "0.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which segments A to F and DP are lit and segment G is extinguished.
The other is a pattern that displays "-.". More specifically, it is a pattern in which the segment G is lit and the segments A to F and DP are extinguished.
Therefore, "0." and "-." Have the opposite relationship between the on and off segments, respectively.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29A, "0." is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and "-." Is displayed in the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment.
Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 29, the display state shown in FIG. 29 (a) is maintained for 1 second. The count for 1 second may be measured by the number of interrupt processes. For example, when the display of FIG. 29 (a) is started, "447 (D)" is set in the counter, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when it becomes "0", FIG. 29 (a) The display of a) may be terminated. As a result, the display of FIG. 29 (a) can be maintained for "2.235 x 447 = 999.045 ms".

After finishing the display of FIG. 29 (a) for about 1 second, the display shifts to the display of FIG. 29 (b).
Further, the display of FIG. 29 (b) is a replacement of the LED displaying "0." and the LED displaying "-." With respect to the display of FIG. 29 (a). That is, in the display of FIG. 29 (b), contrary to the display of FIG. 29 (a), "-." Is displayed in the upper digit of the identification segment and the upper digit of the ratio segment, and the lower digit of the identification segment and the lower digit of the ratio segment are displayed. Is displayed as "0."
Further, as in the case of FIG. 29 (a), the display state shown in FIG. 29 (b) is continued for 1 second (447 interrupts).

The display contents of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b) are switched and displayed every second, and this is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in FIG. 29, (c) and (e) have the same display contents as (a), and (d) has the same display contents as (b).
Then, when the display of the test pattern (5 seconds) is completed, the display shifts to the normal ratio display.
In FIG. 29, (f) shows an example in which the advantageous section ratio is displayed as “7. U. 5.0.”. Further, the accessory ratio may be displayed instead of the advantageous section ratio.

As described above, when "0." and "-." Are displayed on the LED, it is possible to create a lighting state and a lighting state for all segments (A to G and DP), so that the segment is defective (lights up). It is possible to easily visually determine (cannot be turned off or cannot be turned off).
Further, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment may be displayed as "0.-." Or "-. 0.". Therefore, there is no risk of confusing the test pattern with the original ratio display.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing Example 2 of the test pattern display of the management information display LED 74.
In Example 1 of FIG. 29, the display content was changed every second, and the test pattern was displayed for 5 seconds. As described above, such a test pattern is suitable for displaying within 5 seconds from a predetermined timing based on power-on or within 5 seconds from the setting change start process.
On the other hand, the test pattern display example 2 shown in FIG. 30 is suitable for displaying the test pattern until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, such as during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormality error. ..
Of course, the test pattern display of FIG. 29 may be used when displaying until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
Similarly, it goes without saying that the test pattern display of FIG. 30 may be used when displaying within a predetermined period from the time when the start condition of the test pattern display is satisfied.

In Example 2 of FIG. 30, "8.8.8.8." Is a state in which all the segments of all the LEDs are turned on, and "*" is a state in which all the segments of all the LEDs are turned off. *. *. *. "(" * "Indicates that the segments A to G are extinguished.) Is repeated alternately. In other words, it is a pattern in which "8.8.8.8." Is blinked and displayed.
In Example 2 of FIG. 30, the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30A is maintained for 0.3 seconds, and then the lighting state of all the segments shown in FIG. 30B is maintained for 0.3 seconds. Then, by repeating the lighting state shown in FIG. 30A and the extinguishing state shown in FIG. 30B, the blinking state is set.

In the tenth embodiment, the blinking interval is set to 0.3 seconds. For example, "134 (D)" is set as the initial value of the timer, the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing of 2.235 ms, and when the timer value becomes "0", the lighting time or the lighting time or It is judged that the light-off time has passed. As a result, "299.49" ms can be counted by counting the number of interrupts "134".

Also in Example 2 of the test pattern display of FIG. 30, it is possible to create a lighting state and an extinguishing state for all segments by "8." and "*.". Therefore, it is possible to easily visually determine a segment defect (cannot be turned on or turned off).
In addition, when displaying the ratio, neither the identification segment nor the ratio segment is displayed as "8.8.". For example, when the ratio reaches 88%, the blinking display is displayed regardless of the ratio, but in that case, "8.8." Is displayed and the segment DP is not lit. On the other hand, in the display of "8.8.", Since the segment DP is also lit, the two are not confused.

Each ratio displayed on the management information display LED 74 is updated (calculated) at the end of the game (after all reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is completed). Then, the ratio after the update is displayed in the subsequent interrupt processing. Here, when the power is cut off immediately before the ratio is updated and the test pattern is displayed for 5 seconds after the power is turned off and restored, the ratio is updated (calculated) during the 5 seconds when the test pattern is displayed. To execute. Then, when the display of the test pattern is finished and the ratio display is started, the updated ratio is displayed after the power is turned off.

<11th Embodiment>
FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display board 75 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a set value display LED 73 according to the eleventh embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 31 (A), the credit display LED 76 is composed of a digit 1a (upper digit) and a digit 2a (lower digit). Further, the acquired number display LED 78 is composed of a digit 3a (upper digit) and a digit 4a (lower digit).
Here, the "digit" means a display unit (display), and in particular, in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment).
Each of these digits 1a to 4a is a 7-segment display including a dot segment (segment P). In particular, the segment P of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) functions as the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is composed of six dot LEDs, and these six dot LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79. In FIG. 1, the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 are shown, but the status display LED 79 is not shown. However, in reality, as shown in FIG. 31A, a credit number display LED76, an acquisition number display LED78, and a status display LED79 are mounted on the display board 75.
In the status display LED 79, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs that display the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is bet, only the one-bet display LED 79a lights up. When two medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b are lit. When three medals are bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c are all lit.

Further, the game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light when the medal is not bet (or the replay is not automatically inserted).
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is completed and the medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. Even after the replay is activated, it lights up when betting is possible according to the number of credits. Then, when the number of bets is the maximum (when no more bets can be made), the input display LED 79e is turned off.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when the replay wins, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay winning, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player that the automatic bet state is in effect.
Examples of the state display LED 79 not shown in FIG. 31 (A) include a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during the settlement process), but the illustration is omitted in FIG. 31 (A).

Further, in FIG. 31B, the management information display LED 74 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 10, 29 and 30, and is composed of four digits 1b to 4b. These digits 1b to 4b are 7-segment displays including dot segments (segments P), similarly to the digits 1a to 4a described above. The digits 1b to 4b display the information type upper rank, the information type lower rank, the numerical value upper rank, and the numerical value lower rank, respectively.
Further, the segment P of the digit 2b (lower information type) functions as a digit grouping display LED. The digit delimiter display LED is used to clarify the delimiter between the information type and the numerical value.

Further, the segments P of the digits 1b to 4b can be lit when displaying the test pattern, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30.
Furthermore, in FIG. 31C, the set value display LED 73 is the same as that shown in FIG. 10, and is an LED that displays the current set value during setting change and setting confirmation, and is one (1 digit). ) Is composed of the digit 5b.
Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) are mounted on the main control board 50.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b and the segments A to G and P in the present embodiment.
The 7-segment digit is a 7-segment display composed of 7 rod-shaped segments A to G and 1 dot-shaped segment P. An LED composed of segments A to G having no segment P may be referred to as "7-segment", and an LED composed of eight segments including the segment P may be referred to as "8-segment". In the book, it is called "7-segment" including the LED composed of 8 segments.

As shown in FIG. 32, for example, in the digit 1a, the segments A to G constitute the upper digit 7-segment of the credit number display LED 76, and the segment P is unused. Similarly, each of the segments A to G of the digits 2a and 3a constitutes 7 segments of the lower digit of the credit number display LED and the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.
Further, the segments A to G of the digit 4a form the lower digit 7-segment of the acquired number display LED 78, and the segment P constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.

The digit 5a is an LED constituting the status display LED 79. As shown in FIG. 32, the segment A of the digit 5a corresponds to the 1-bet display LED 79a, the segment B corresponds to the 2-bet display LED 79b, ..., The segment F corresponds to the replay display LED 79f. Further, the segments G and P of the digit 5a are not provided.

The digits 1b to 4b constitute the management information display LED 74, and the segments 1b and 2b display the information type of the management information. Further, the segments 3b and 4b display numerical values corresponding to the information types displayed in the segments 1b and 2b among the management information. The segments P of the digits 1b, 3b, and 4b are normally turned off, but as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, they are turned on when the test pattern is displayed. Further, the segment P of the digit 2b functions as a digit grouping display LED for clarifying the boundary between the digits 1b and 2b indicating the information type and the digits 3b and 4b indicating the numerical value and facilitating the confirmation. During the display of the test pattern described above, the digit grouping display LED may be turned on and off repeatedly in the same manner as the segment P of the other digits, but may be turned on all the time.

Further, among the digits 5b, the segments A to G form the 7-segment of the set value display LED 73, and the segment P is an LED that lights up during the setting change. That is, among the setting value display LEDs 73, when the segment P is off, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segment P is lit, it indicates that the setting is being changed. The segment P of the set value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment P of the set value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the set value is confirmed during the setting change.

Further, FIG. 32 illustrates the structure of the segment data. The segment data is 1-byte data, the D0 bit corresponds to the segment A, the D1 bit corresponds to the segment B, ..., The D7 bit corresponds to the segment P.
For example, when "0" is displayed on the digit 1a, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and P are turned off, so that the segment data is "00111111 (B)".

Further, when "1" is displayed on the digit 4a and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the segments B, C, and P are turned on, so that the segment data is "10000110 (B)".
Furthermore, before the start of the game, when three medals are bet and the game can be started, the 1-bet display LED79a, the 2-bet display LED79b, the 3-bet display LED79c, and the game start display LED79d are turned on, so that the digit The segment data of 5a is "000011111 (B)".

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an output port 52 according to the eleventh embodiment. The type of output port is not limited to that shown in FIG. 33.
As the output port 52 of the eleventh embodiment, one output port for transmitting a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports for transmitting a segment signal (output ports 3 and 4) are provided. ..
The output port 3 is an output port for transmitting segment signals of the credit number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, and the status display LED79 (digits 1a to 5a).
Further, the output port 4 is an output port for transmitting the segment signals of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1b to 4b) and the set value display LED 73.

Digit 1 to 5 signals are assigned to the D0 to D4 bits of the output port 2, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1a signal and the digit 1b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from the D0 bit of the output port 2, both the digit 1a (credit number display LED76 (upper digit)) and the digit 1b (management information display LED74 (information type upper)) are displayed. A drive signal is supplied.

Further, in the output port 2, the D5 to D7 bits are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1a to 5a, and the segments A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segments A to P signals of the digits 1b to 5b, and the segments A to P signals are assigned to the D0 to D7 bits.
Furthermore, external signals 1 to 5, a data strobe signal, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output from the output port 5.

Here, the "external signal" is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as a hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external centralized terminal plate 100. Specifically, for example, an advantageous section, an AT, a specific RT, external signals 1 to 3 indicating that the accessory is operating, an external signal 4 indicating that an error or power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10. , An external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 is provided.

The data strobe signal is a signal transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the data strobe signal, it controls to acquire the sub-control data signal from the buffer provided in the sub-control board 80 based on the rising edge of the data strobe signal.
From output ports (not shown) other than the output ports 2 to 5 shown in FIG. 33, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, and a condition device signal (so-called winning number). , Sub-control data signal, test signal, etc. are output.

FIG. 34A is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt, the LED display counter value, the digit signal, and the segment signal in the eleventh embodiment. Further, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag.
In the present embodiment, as the processing of the main control board 50, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 41 described later) performed for each game and the interrupt processing (interrupt processing once every 2.235 ms) in parallel with this main process (FIG. 41 described later). I_INTR) (FIG. 53, which will be described later) is executed.

The LED display counter is 1-byte data and is a counter that is continuously updated for each interrupt. The LED display counter is a counter for determining which digit of digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) is to be turned on. As for each bit of the LED display counter, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is assigned to the digit 2 signal, ..., And the D4 bit is assigned to the digit 5 signal. Then, in the one-interrupt process, the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) are dynamically lit so as to illuminate the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in the LED display counter.

The LED display counter of the present embodiment takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter is updated so that the bit “1” of the LED display counter value is shifted to the right by one digit as the interrupt “1” → “2” → ... (for each interrupt). Further, in FIG. 34, in the interrupt next to the interrupt "5", the LED display counter becomes "00000000000 (B)" by shifting to the right by one digit. At the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized. Set the LED display counter to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter repeats the values of "5"-> "4"-> ...-> "1"-> "5"-> "4"-> ... for each interrupt process. That is, 5 interrupts make one cycle.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N + 1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N + 2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N + 3" interrupt: 000000010 (B)
"N + 4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N + 5" interrupt: 00000000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
Will be.

In the eleventh embodiment, the five interrupts form one cycle, and the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b are turned on. Specifically, in FIG. 34 (A), for example, when the interrupt is "1", that is, when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables the digits 5a and 5b to be lit. Therefore, the status display LED 79 and the set value display LED 73 can be turned on. At the time of the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LEDD78 and the numerical lower digit of the management information display LED74 can be lit. ..

Further, FIG. 34B is a diagram showing a data structure of the LED display request flag. The LED display request flag is data indicating a digit for which lighting is permitted. As shown in FIG. 34 (B), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data in which the D0th bit corresponds to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., And the D4 bit corresponds to the digit 5 signal. is there. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of the output port 2.
As shown in FIG. 34 (B), digits 1 to 5 can be lit during normal operation, digits 3 to 5 can be lit during setting change, and digits 1 to 5 can be lit during setting confirmation. is there. In addition. "Normal" refers to waiting for a game and during a game.

Then, in the interrupt processing, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that lights up in the current interrupt processing.
For example, if the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)" and the LED display request flag is "00011111 (B) (normal)", ANDing the two results in "00010000 (B)" and digit 5 Only the signal is "1". However, during normal operation (during game standby and during game), the segment signal is output from the output port 3 so that the status display LED 79 can be turned on, but the segment signal is not output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 is used. It is controlled so that (digit 5b) is not turned on.

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4 and the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b) is displayed. It can be lit.
Further, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 3 or 4 signal is turned on (the LED display counter is "00000100 (B)" or "00001000 (B)"), the digit 3 signal (acquisition number display LED78 The upper digit) and the digit 4 signal (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78) are output, and "88" (content indicating that the setting is being changed) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the segment signal of the output port 3 is generated at the interrupt timing (interrupt "2" in FIG. 34) when the LED display counter is "00001000 (B)", the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is referred to. Do it by. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is ON, the value obtained by ORing the generated segment signal and "10000000 (B)" is output as a segment signal from the output port 3. As a result, the segment P (advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be turned on.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an address, a label name, a number of bytes, and a name and contents of data stored in the RWM 53.
The data shown in FIG. 35 is for use in the description of the eleventh embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address "F000 (H)" is a storage area for set value data (_NB_RANK). When the set value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the set value data. In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

The address "F010 (H)" is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data for displaying on the credit number display LED 76. In the present embodiment, any value from "0" to "50 (D)" is stored as the credit number data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the number of credits into a decimal number is stored as the number of credits data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001 (B)" is stored in the address "F010 (H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F010 (H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are. , Data for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits (“2” in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50".
In the present embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 that stores the credit number data itself is not provided, and the credit number data is provided as the display data of the credit number display LED 76.

The address "F011 (H)" is a storage area for acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The acquired number data is data for displaying on the acquired number display LED 78. In the acquired number data, similarly to the credit number data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digit, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digit. It is data.
In the present embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning small winning combination is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, so that the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small winning combination is won and a medal is paid out, the acquired number data is added along with the payout of the medal, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data, "01" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" described later, for example, "8 (H)" is stored when the eight-card winning combination is won, and the payout number data is at the time of medal payout ( (Including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
On the other hand, the acquired number data stored in the address "F011 (H)" is, for example, "0"->"1"->"2"->...->"8" when eight cards win a prize. As described above, "1" is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 also counts up as “0” → “1” → “2” → ... → “8”.

Further, in the present embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during the setting change, the setting changing display data for displaying "88" is stored as the acquired number data. This is to make it possible to identify from the front side of the game machine that the setting is being changed by displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78. Further, by turning on "88" and all the segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (there is no segment that cannot be turned on). Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not the display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to bet in the game this time) is satisfied, the game is started (before the bet becomes possible or the start switch 41 is operated. Before this is done), a specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) to the acquired number display LED 78. In the present embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 in order to indicate the specified number "2". Therefore, when the specified number is specified, the specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data. Although the details will be described later, the instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is "0B (H)".

Further, when the push order bell or the like is won during AT, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The push order instruction information corresponding to the winning numbers "3" to "8" shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, is "= 1" to "= 6", respectively. Therefore, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. Although the details will be described later, the push order instruction numbers corresponding to the push order instruction information “= 1” to “= 6” are “A1 (H)” to “A6 (H)”, respectively. For example, in the game in which the winning number "3" is won, when the push order instruction information is displayed, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address "F030 (H)" is a storage area for the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION). The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining the presence / absence of replay and operation of the accessory. For example, when 1BB is operating, the D2 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".
This operating state flag is updated in the game start set process described later (step S317 in FIG. 42). For example, in step S313 of FIG. 42, when the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag described later is read and it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped and displayed, and the operation state is established. Set the D0 bit of the flag to "1".
The replay operation state flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S413 of FIG. 50 (game end check process) described later.
In addition, the operating state flag of the accessory is also cleared by the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 50).

The address "F031 (H)" is a storage area of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN). The symbol combination flag is a flag for determining the symbol combination that has been stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the D0 bit is replayed and the D2 bit is assigned 1BB. Therefore, the replay of the symbol combination display flag and the 1BB bit are assigned to the same bits as the replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operating state flag, respectively.
During the main process of FIG. 41, in step S291, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the symbol combination that has been stopped and displayed. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, specifically, during the main process of FIG. 41, in step S279 (start switch acceptance process).

The address "F040 (H)" is a storage area for the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when the small winning combination wins the game and the payout number is determined (step S293 in FIG. 40). When a small winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the winning small winning combination is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, the payout number data is deducted by "1" for each medal payout (addition of "1" to the credit number or payout of one actual medal (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is a storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination wins in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the next game medal payout number update process (step S293 in FIG. 41). For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and when the winning combination is not won in the next game, it is used as the payout number data buffer. "0" is overwritten.

The address "F042 (H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals automatically bet at the time of winning the replay, and "2" or "3" is stored in the present embodiment.
The automatic bet number data is set in step S325 during the game start set process of FIG. 42.
The address "F043 (H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the game this time, and in the present embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. The bet number data is performed in the medal management process (detecting the inserted medal and performing the bet process and the credit addition process) in step S276 during the main process of FIG. 41.

The address "F051 (H)" is a storage area of the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP). The LED display counter is shown in FIG. 34 (A), and is updated every time interrupt processing is performed, as described above.
The address "F052 (H)" is a storage area of the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag is shown in FIG. 34 (B), and takes a value according to normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.

The address "F061 (H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when it is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address "F062 (H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is set to "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the advantageous section display LED flag is set to "1".
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after the transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, it is not necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 even after shifting to the advantageous section.
Specifically, first, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but may be turned on after that (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied before the condition for turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on even once. You may end the advantageous section without turning it on.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct answer pressing order is notified) in the gaming state which is an advantageous section and the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section is displayed. The LED 77 is turned on.
Further, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
In addition, a process for turning off the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed at the time of the game end check process in the final game of the advantageous section. Specifically, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the initialization process of the advantageous section display LED flag storage area (clearing process of the advantageous section display LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game of activating the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the reel 31 is turned on. Until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, the lighting timing is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example.
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating
4) When all reels 31 are stopped
5) After all reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended), before the start of the next game, before the settlement switch 43 can be operated.

However, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the winning combination in the game must be determined, so that before the operation of the start switch 41 (before the combination lottery) is excluded. ..
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the game of activating the instruction function, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery of the winning combination is executed. Therefore, after the rotation of the reel 31 is started, the rotation of the reel 31 is performed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

The address "F063 (H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous section. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and "1500 (D)" is set as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Further, the advantageous section clear counter is set so that "1" is subtracted per game not only during the advantageous section but also during the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", even if "1" is subtracted, the value after subtraction is "0". Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Since the advantageous section clear counter stores the initial value "1500 (D)" at the maximum, it is composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

The address "F065 (H)" is a storage area of the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the number of differences in the advantageous section, and is also referred to as a “MY counter”.
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores the "corresponding value" to the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "cumulative value of difference number ≠ difference counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference counter only needs to count at least the cumulative value of the number of differences in the advantageous section, and does not have to count in the non-advantageous section (normal section).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is an advantageous section, it is necessary to perform each game and a process of determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference counter value is updated including the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated for each game without determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section, so that the processing can be simplified.

Further, even when the difference number becomes negative in this game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number becomes carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, if the difference counter is carry-down data as a result of the calculation, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
2nd game: bet number "3", payout number "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (without correction)
3rd game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (without correction)
4th game: bet number "3", payout number "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
Fifth game: bet number "3", payout number "0", difference counter "FFFE (H)" after calculation, difference counter "0 (H)" after correction
It is updated like.
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of this game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflecting the difference number of the game is changed again. Since it is the calculated result, even in such a case, it corresponds to "update" of the difference counter.

As described above, when the difference counter value after the calculation is a value in which a carry has occurred, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). The method of determining whether or not a carry has occurred will be described later.
Due to such an update of the difference counter value, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the number of bets, that is, when the number of differences is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference counter value increases by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on the winning of a small winning combination, but after that, the number of payouts If is less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

FIG. 36 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference counter value. FIG. 36A shows Example 1 and FIG. 36B shows Example 2. In FIG. 36, the horizontal axis is the number of games played, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
In Example 1, first, the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but from the middle, for example, when AT is started, the difference number starts to increase. Then, since the difference counter counts the time when the difference becomes the lowest value in the progress process of the game as "0", the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is counted by the difference counter as the amount of increase in the difference. Will be done. As described above, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (the next game is controlled so as to be a game in the normal section).

Since the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", for example, when the difference counter is exactly "2400 (D)" at the end of the game this time, the game this time. Then, the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied.
Then, assuming that the maximum difference number in the game machine is acquired in the next game, the number of bets is "1" and the payout number is "15". Therefore, the difference number in the next game is "+14". The difference counter value at the end of the next game is "2414 (D)". When the difference counter is "2414 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".

The determination of whether or not the difference counter has exceeded "2400 (D)" is not limited to reading the difference counter value stored in the RWM53 and determining whether or not it is temporarily stored in a register for updating or the like. It also includes determining the difference counter value that is being used (the same applies hereinafter).
Further, when it is determined whether or not the value exceeds "2400 (D)" based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, when it is determined that the value does not exceed "2400 (D)", The register difference counter value is stored (stored) in the RWM53. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value exceeds "2400 (D)", the difference counter value is not stored in the RWM53, and the difference counter value stored in the RWM53 is controlled to be cleared. It is also possible.

Further, Example 2 shows an example in which, as in Example 1, the difference number progresses in the negative direction as the game progresses, but the difference number starts to increase from the middle, for example, when AT is started. .. In Example 2, even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", the cumulative value of the difference is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section is terminated. That is, regardless of the cumulative value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game up to that point, if the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" counting from the time when the difference number becomes the lowest value, it is an advantageous section. (The next game is controlled so that it is a normal section game).

When updating the difference counter during the normal section, the difference counter may exceed "2400 (D)" even during the normal section. For example, if a special role is won many times and a special game is repeated, such a situation can occur. In such a case
1) How to update the difference counter value as it is until the advantageous section starts,
2) When it exceeds "2400 (D)", there is a method of temporarily resetting the difference counter value to "0" at that point.
For example, when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section, when the difference counter is cleared based on the end of the advantageous section, whether or not the processing is in the advantageous section. If the process is executed regardless of this, it is cleared even when the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference counter is a process peculiar to the advantageous section, the difference counter is not cleared even if the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the normal section.
When the advantageous section is started (the first game of the advantageous section), the difference counter is cleared (the initial value "0" is set. Step S354 in FIG. 45, which will be described later). Therefore, there is no problem regardless of the number of difference counters before the start of the advantageous section.
And
1) When the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)" during the advantageous section
2) When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games
Satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section.
When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference counter is cleared (initialized). The reason why the difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent the data (value) related to the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is started. The clearing of the difference counter is executed in step S435 in FIG. 51, which will be described later.

FIG. 37 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference counter value and the advantageous interval, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the difference number decreases as the game progresses, and the difference number further decreases from the time when the advantageous section starts (“A” in the figure) to the progress to “B” in the figure. An example is shown. It should be noted that AT is not started at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the beginning of the advantageous section is CZ, a precursor, and AT is being prepared (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is changed from the low probability state to the high probability state. In the case of a specification that starts from (while waiting for the winning of the replay to win), the difference may decrease even after starting the advantageous section. In addition, even when AT is started, the difference may decrease if the push order bell is not won in the middle.

Since the difference counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at the time of "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, the difference counter value is maintained at "0" under the situation where the difference number is decreasing. Therefore, in the figure, the difference counter value remains "0" from the point "A" to the point "B".
In addition, the difference number started to increase from the point "B". As a result, the difference counter value also increases. Then, when it is determined that the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)" (when the point "C" in the figure is reached), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended. (Transition to normal section).

In this way, the positive count by the difference counter starts from the time when the difference becomes the lowest value (“B”) after the start of the advantageous section, not the number of differences from the start of the advantageous section. It is no longer possible to give medals to the player beyond the range in which the number of balls is increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 37 (a)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from inciting the gambling spirit.

The above points will be described more concretely by taking numerical values as an example.
For example, if the specification is such that AT is started by lottery after starting an advantageous section, and if the section is advantageous and non-AT, the difference may decrease as the game progresses.
For example, it is assumed that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but the AT is not started and the game is stopped when the difference becomes "-200".

Next, it is assumed that when the player Y starts the game with the game machine, the AT is won and the AT is started when the difference becomes "-50 sheets". Then, after starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference exceeds "+2400 sheets", the player Y can obtain the medal of "2400 + 250 = 2650 sheets". ..
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting the end condition "from the time when the difference number becomes the minimum value until it exceeds" +2400 sheets "", for example, the fit of another player I try not to incite gambling spirit by preventing it from being acquired including.

In Example 2 shown in FIG. 37 (b), the difference number decreases in the normal section, turns positive from the “D” point in the middle, and further, the advantageous section is started from the “E” point. In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive at the time of "E" in the figure. However, the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, that is, updated to "0") at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure).
Therefore, the increase before the advantageous section (the increase from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference counter. Therefore, the difference counter continues to be positively counted from the "E" point, and when it exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section ends.

The description returns to FIG.
The address "F067 (H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and is executed in step S364 of FIG. 46, which will be described later. Further, the AT flag is turned off at the end of the game in the final game of the AT, and is executed, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 50) described later. Further, the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes the AT flag.

The address "F068 (H)" is a storage area of the AT game count counter (_CT_ART). The AT game count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). The AT game count counter is different from the advantageous section clear counter, and when it becomes "0", the counting (subtraction) after that is stopped.
The AT game count counter is updated (subtracted) during AT after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (step S281 in FIG. 41 to be described later).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the maximum number of AT games is "255 (D)" or less, the AT game count counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game count counter. The initial value may be a constant value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. Further, after the initial value is determined, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT games may be added when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, and the number of AT games may be increased when the player wins the additional lottery. In this case, the increase is added to the AT game count counter.
This AT game count counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the game number management type AT is illustrated, an AT game count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game count counter. Then, at the start of AT, the initial value of the difference number that can be acquired is set. In addition, when the addition is won, the addition difference number is added. Then, the difference number of the game is subtracted every time there is a payout, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.

Subsequently, each process during the game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50. When the power is turned on, the program start process of FIG. 38 is executed.
In FIG. 38, when the program is started in step S201, the main control board 50 initializes the registers in the next step S202. Specific processing includes, for example, setting the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, setting the type of interrupt (for example, setting it as a masqueradable interrupt), and the parity bit assigned to the control command to be transmitted. (For example, setting to even parity). In other words, the initial values required for the slot machine 10 to operate normally are set in various registers.

Next, the process proceeds to step S203, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power cutoff processed flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, the power off processed flag is stored (step S484 in FIG. 54, which will be described later). This power-off processing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. Then, when it is determined that the power cutoff processing completed flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S204, and when it is determined that the value is not normal, the process proceeds to step S206.

In step S204, the checksum of the RWM 53 is calculated. Specifically, the checksum calculation of the same range (for example, the work area used in the program, the unused area, and the stack area) as the checksum of the RWM 53 executed at the time of power off processing is executed.
In step S205, it is determined whether or not the range of RWM53 for calculating the checksum is completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM53 for which the checksum is calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for which the checksum is calculated. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S204 and the process is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of RWM53 for calculating the checksum is completed, the process proceeds to step S206.

Further, in the subsequent processing as well, when the data stored in the plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM53 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the designated RWM53 in the present embodiment.
When it is determined in step S203 that the power cutoff processing flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power cutoff recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of RWM53.

In step S206, the main control board 50 stores the power supply cutoff / recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, the B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM 53 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power off processing flag is an abnormal value (when "No" in step S203), or when it is determined that there is an abnormality during the checksum calculation (entire range) of the RWM53 in step S204, the power is turned off. An abnormal value is stored as return data.

In the next step S207, the level data of the predetermined input port 51 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the A register). Next, the process proceeds to step S208, and it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the level data of the predetermined input port 51. Here, the "designated switch" is a signal of a door switch (a switch that is turned on when the front door 12 (housing) is opened) and a setting door switch among the predetermined input ports 51 in the present embodiment. (Door provided on the setting key switch. The setting door does not have to be provided) signal, setting key switch (switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction) There are three.

Then, the signal of the door switch is on (the front door 12 is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the signal of the setting key switch is on. Allow setting changes only at certain times. When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process in step S212, but when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process in step S212. ..
That is, the signal of the setting key switch even when the signal of the door switch is off (the front door 12 is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch is off (the setting door is closed). Cannot be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, so the transition to the setting change process is not allowed.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S208 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that the switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S211.
In step S209, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data is abnormal. This power supply cutoff / recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S206.

Then, when it is determined that the power off / returning data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212, and when it is determined that the data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, it is determined whether or not the setting change impossibility flag is on. Here, the setting change impossible flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279) to the game end check process (step S301) of FIG. 41, which will be described later. It is a flag to be set. Then, when the setting change impossibility flag is on, the process proceeds to step S211. When the setting change impossible flag is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossible flag is provided, but if the setting can be changed at all times, the setting change impossible flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S210 becomes unnecessary.

In step S211 the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value. This process is the same as step S209. Then, when it is determined that the power supply cutoff / recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S213 to perform the power supply recovery process (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power supply cutoff / recovery data is not a normal value, an "E1" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S214 to perform recovery impossible error processing.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S212 of FIG. 38.
First, in step S221, a "predetermined range" is stored in a register as an initialization range in the used area of the RWM53. Here, "in the used area" refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data related to the progress of the game. The range shown in FIG. 35 is all within the used area. On the other hand, "outside the used area" described later refers to an area in the storage area of the RWM 53 for storing data not related to the progress of the game. Specifically, a storage area for storing data related to the display of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can be mentioned.

Further, the "predetermined range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off processing has been normally executed, and the set value data (address "F000 (H)"), the game state (for example, the RT state), and the winning. The initialization range in which the flag of the special role having the above is not initialized is defined as the "predetermined range".
Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment described later, when the power is inside the BB2 (when the winning flag of the BB2 is on) before the power is turned off, the setting change process is executed if the power is turned off normally. However, the winning flag of BB2 is maintained.
On the other hand, the "predetermined range" does not include data on advantageous sections or ATs. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the addresses "F061 (H)" to "F068 (H)" are the targets of initialization here.

Next, the process proceeds to step S222, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off / recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S224, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S221 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S222 that the power off / returning data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S223.
In step S223, the main control board 50 stores a "specific range" in the register as an initialization range within the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off is not normal, and is the entire range within the used area including the set value data (address "F000 (H)").

Then, the process proceeds to step S224, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S221 or the specific range set in step S223 (within the used area of RWM53) is started. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S224 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S226.

In step S226, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. Originally, the AF register is saved because the F (flag) register is to be saved here, but the AF register is saved for the convenience of the instruction. Then, the process proceeds to step S227, and a predetermined range outside the used area is stored as the initialization range of the RWM53. The "predetermined range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off processing has been normally executed.

In the next step S228, similarly to step S222, it is determined whether or not the power supply cutoff / recovery data (value stored in step S206) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off / recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S230, and the storage of the “predetermined range” in step S227 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S228 that the power off / returning data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S229.
In step S229, the main control board 50 stores a "specific range" in the register as an initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53. Here, the "specific range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power off is not normal, and is the entire range including a ring buffer that stores the number of games and the number of payouts for displaying the ratio.
Then, the process proceeds to step S230, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S227 or the specific range set in step S229 (outside the used area of RWM53) is started.

In the next step S231, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S230 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S232.
In step S232, the AF register saved in step S226 is restored. In the next step S233, the start setting of interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing specified in step S202 are set. Since the timer interrupt process is used as the interrupt process in the present embodiment, the process of setting the timer interrupt cycle (“2.235 ms” in the present embodiment) and the like are included. Then, interrupt processing is executed after the processing of step S233. In other words, it is configured so that interrupt processing is not executed before "interrupt activation".
In the next step S234, an output request set at the start of setting change is performed. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 side that the setting change process is to be started.

The "output request set" means a process of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. Further, the control command here does not mean only the command actually transmitted, but also means the command that is the source of the command actually transmitted.
Next, the process proceeds to step S235, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM53).

Next, the process proceeds to step S236, and the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for starting the setting change. In the present embodiment, it waits until the number of interrupts "224" is counted ("1" is subtracted for each number of interrupts and the set number of interrupts becomes "0"). This standby is also called delay processing or standby processing because the main processing is not advanced. During this waiting time (during 2-byte time waiting processing), the main processing is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt processing is executed.

In this way, the 2-byte time waiting process (wait process) is executed in step S236 because the initialization process of the RWM 53 on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the sub control board 80 side is executed. Since it takes time to initialize the RWM83, the main control board 50 is executing the waiting process for 2 bytes. In particular, on the main control board 50 side, it is not possible to know whether or not the initialization process has been completed on the sub control board 80 side.

Therefore, while the initialization process is still in progress on the sub-control board 80 side, the initialization has already been completed on the main control board 50 side, and the process is further advanced to advance the control process of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board. It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process of 80 from being out of synchronization.
Further, after the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change are executed, the sub-control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM83, but a sufficient time is set as the wait time for the initialization of the RWM83 to be completed. To do. As a result, after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is completed on the sub control board 80 side, the process proceeds to the process after step S238 on the main control board 50 side.

The control command at the start of setting change set in steps S234 and S235 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236. However, while the 2-byte time wait process is being executed in step S236, the process does not proceed to the processes after step S237 (the main process does not proceed).

After the completion of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S236, the process proceeds to step S237, and the setting changing display data is stored as the acquired number data. Next, the process proceeds to step S238, and the LED display request flag stores the corresponding value "00011100 (B)" during the setting change.

By the processing of steps S237 and S238, when the interrupt processing is executed after these processing, the digits 3a, 4a, and 5b (acquired number display LED78 and set value display LED73) can be lit.
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S238, "8" can be displayed on the digits 3a and 4a, respectively ("88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78), and the digit b5 (set value display). The current set value can be displayed on the LED73).
Since the acquired number data and the LED display request flag are initialized by the initialization process in the used area of the RWM53 in step S224, the values before step S237 are "0".

Next, the process proceeds to step S239 to execute interrupt waiting processing. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, after the lapse of one interrupt time, the process proceeds to step S240.
In step S240, it is determined whether or not the operation of the setting change switch (not shown in FIG. 1) is detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change switch is turned on by determining the rising data of the input port 51 including the setting change switch. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch has been detected, the process proceeds to step S241, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S242.
In step S241, the set value data (address “F000 (H)”) of the RWM 53 is stored (updated). When interrupt processing is executed after the set value data is updated, the set value display LED 73 displays the updated value.

In the next step S242, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 is detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is fixed.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S239.

In the above processing, step S239 (waiting for interrupt) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting change switch.
For example, if the process of step S239 is not provided, if it is determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on, the setting value data is updated in step S241, and the start switch 41 is turned on in the next step S242. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process proceeds to step S240, and it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting change switch is on.

If the interrupt processing is executed even once after it is determined to be ON in step S240, the rising data of the setting change switch is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it continues to be determined in step S240 that the rising data of the setting change switch is on. As a result, the set value data continues to rise by "2" or more just by operating the setting change switch once. Therefore, in step S239, interrupt waiting processing is executed.

In step S243, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch (not shown in FIG. 1) is turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S244, and the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). This is to erase the display of "88" indicating that the setting is being changed. Next, the process proceeds to step S245, and the LED display request flag stores the corresponding value “00011111 (B)” during normal operation.

Due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S244, the display of the digits 3a and 4a (acquired number display LED78) is changed from "88" to "00".
Further, by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S245, "0" is displayed in the digits 1a and 2a, respectively ("00" is displayed in the credit number display LED 76). Further, since the bit corresponding to the digit 5 of the LED display request flag is "1", the digit 5a (status display LED 79) can be lit. On the other hand, the digit 5b (setting value display LED73) does not light because the setting is not being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S246, and the output request set at the end of the setting change is performed in the same manner as in step S234. In this process, the setting change process is terminated, and the data corresponding to the determined set value (specifically, the set value data stored in the address "F000 (H)") is sent to the sub-control board 80 side. This is the process of setting the control command to inform. Next, the process proceeds to step S247, and the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 in the same manner as in step S235. Then, the process proceeds to step S248, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S213 in FIG. 38.
First, in step S251, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. Of these, it refers to the area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S252, the set value data is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether it is within the range of the set value 1 to the set value 6), in other words, of "F000 (H)". It is determined whether or not the set value data is within the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". When it is determined that the set value data is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S253. When it is determined that the set value data is not in the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, the process proceeds to step S264, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing. ..

Proceeding to step S253, the unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register as the initialization range. Then, in the next step S254, the initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S253 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that the value is stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in the unused area. In the unlikely event that a value is stored in the unused area, it may lead to fraudulent acts, so the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S255, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) has been completed, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S256.

In step S256, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as the process of step S226 described above. In the next step S257, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S258, the initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S257 is executed.
In the next step S259, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed, and if it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S260. In step S260, the AF register is restored. This process is the same as the process of step S232 described above.

In the next step S261, the predetermined input port 51 is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 51 before the power is turned off to the latest data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S262 to activate an interrupt. This process is, for example, a process for setting the timer interrupt cycle, and is the same process as in step S233 described above.
Next, the process proceeds to step S263, and the power off processing flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above program start processing, setting change processing, and power recovery processing,
1) In the program start process of FIG. 38, if it is determined as "No" in step S203 (when the power off processing completed flag is an abnormal value), or when there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation in step S204, step S. In S206, an abnormal value is stored as recovery data after the power is turned off. In this case, since it is determined as "Yes" in step S209, the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 39) in step S212.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 39, since it is determined as "No" in step S222 and step S228, the initialization of the entire range inside and outside the used area of the RWM53, that is, after "F000 (H)". All data in is initialized.

2) In the program start process, when the power off processing flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is also performed normally, when the setting change process proceeds, step S222 and step S222 in FIG. 39 Since it is determined as "Yes" in S228, the process proceeds to step S224 and step S230, respectively, and the designated range of RWM53 (inside the used area and outside the used area) is initialized.

3) In the program start process, if the power off processing flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum calculation is performed normally, and the setting change process is not performed, the power restore process in step S213 ( Shift to FIG. 40). In this case, if the set value is normal in step S252 in FIG. 40, the initialization of the RWM 53 (inside the used area and outside the used area) at the time of normal power-on is executed. As described above, this initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the present embodiment. The main process is the process of one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, the stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer refers to an area of RWM53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when power failure occurs. The stack pointer set is a process of setting a register value to an initial value in the area of the RWM53.

In the next step S272, the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 42, which will be described later, and is a process of generating, updating, saving, and the like of an operating state flag.
In the next step S273, the bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S276, and if it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform the medal insertion waiting process, and then the process proceeds to step S276. The medal insertion waiting process in step S275 determines whether or not the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, performs processing such as shifting to the setting confirmation mode.
In step S276, the inserted medals are managed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has been maintained, determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, the soft random number is updated. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" at a time) a random number for processing (calculation processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the winning combination lottery means 61. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) to the value before the update may be executed.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets does not reach the specified number of the game, it is determined as "No" in step S278.

In step S279, the process at the time of accepting the start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting non-changeable flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. ..
In the next step S280, the acquired number data is cleared. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, even if the indicated specified number display data and the payout number data are stored as the acquired number data before that, the data is cleared.
Here, although details will be described later, in the twelfth embodiment, a specified number may be instructed (displayed) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the start of the game. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the indicated specified number display data may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared, and a process of displaying (or turning off) "00" on the acquired number display LED 78 is executed.
Further, when the payout number data of the previous game is stored as the acquisition number data at the time of step S280, the payout number data is cleared in this step S280.

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes the update process of the number of AT games. This process is a process shown in FIG. 43, which will be described later, and is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, whether or not to add the number of AT games during AT is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery by the winning combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional games of AT is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the added amount is added to the number of AT games counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (not shown in FIG. 41).
After receiving the start switch (step S279), the AT game count counter is updated in step S281. Not limited to this, after the winning combination lottery process in step S282 or after stopping all reels 31 (step S290 or later). The AT game count counter may be updated.
In the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is used after all reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process by winning is completed (after step S300). To update.

In step S282, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes a winning combination lottery (corresponding to the above-mentioned "internal lottery") at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number value at the time of the winning combination lottery is acquired in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning combinations is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes the advantageous section transition lottery process. This process is the process of FIG. 44, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the AT lottery is also executed at the time of the advantageous section transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 44, which will be described later, when the advantageous section is in the non-AT state (for example, when the main game state is CZ), the AT lottery process is executed in step S348 in FIG. 44.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, and the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 48, and when the instruction function is activated in the game (displays the push order instruction number on the acquired number display LED 78) during AT, the push order instruction number is generated. This is a process for displaying push order instruction information.

In the next step S285, the reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S286.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time (not shown in FIG. 35), and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms × 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)". Is. If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process. When the process proceeds to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. ..

In step S290, the acquired number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
The acquired number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display determination of the symbol is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the effective line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and if it is determined that no display error has occurred, step S293 is performed. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position defined in the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the symbol display determination, when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the effective line, it is determined that it is abnormal (“E5” error), and the process proceeds to step S304. Executes non-recoverable error processing.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number update process is executed. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the above-mentioned payout number data and payout number data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals (M_WIN_PAY) corresponding to the winning combination. This process is the process shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S295 to perform interrupt wait processing. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is disabled. By the processing of these steps S295 and S296, the interrupt is disabled immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. This process is the same as step S256 of FIG. 40. Next, the process proceeds to step S298 to execute the ratio setting process. This "ratio set process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating the ratio, and the like in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and interrupt is enabled (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio set processing is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt processing is prohibited before the execution.

Note that interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the ratio set processing when the ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the used area and a program outside the used area is executed in the main processing. This is because when interrupt processing is inserted in, the programs in the used area and the programs outside the used area are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, and the game end check process (_M_GAME_CHK) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 50, which will be described later, and performs a process of clearing the condition device (winning combination) flag and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, and the output request set at the end of the game and the control command set 1 are performed in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
Then, when the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248) again.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game start set process (M_GAME_SET) in step S272 in FIG. 41.
First, in step S311, the game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53). Since the game standby display time of the present embodiment is set to the "26846" interrupt (≈60,000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)), "26846" is set in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. When the game standby display time is set in step S301, the value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process from this point.

When the game waiting display time becomes "0", the acquired number data is cleared in step S275 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out to the game last time is "8" and the player pays by operating the settlement switch 43 and finishes the game, "00" is displayed after about 1 minute. Will be done. This has the effect that the vacant table can be reduced because the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize it as a vacant table.
The acquisition number display LED 78 is not limited to displaying "00", and the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) may be turned off, or the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off to turn off the lower digit. May display "0". In any case, it is sufficient that the display is executed so that the clerk in the hall or another player can recognize it as an empty table.

Next, the process proceeds to step S312, and the push order instruction number initialization process is executed. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
In the next step S313, the data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. In the next step S314, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol is displayed. In this process, among the data of the symbol combination display flag, when the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S315, and when it is determined that the 1BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S316.

In step S315, the number of sheets that can be acquired when 1BB is operated (during 1BB game) is saved. This process is a process of storing the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired in the 1BB game in a predetermined storage area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S316.
In step S316, an operating state flag is generated. This process is a process of generating the value of the operating state flag based on the symbol combination display flag.
Further, in the next step S317, the operating state flag is updated, and in the next step S318, the operating state flag is stored. This process is a process of storing the generated operating state flag (at this time, for example, stored in the A register) at the address "F030 (H)" of the RWM53. As a result, the information on the operating state flag up to that point is replaced with the information on the operating state flag updated in step S317.
For example, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of winning 1BB), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operating state flag changes from "0" to "1".

In the next step S319, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the two games (or when winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied ( (When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1") is set to "1" in this game start set processing. If it is determined in step S319 that the RB operation has started, the process proceeds to step S320, and if it is determined that the RB operation has not started, the process proceeds to step S321.

In step S320, the number of games played and the number of winnings when the RB is activated are saved. In this process, "2 (H)" is stored (stored) in the game count counter (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 when the RB is activated, and the RB is provided in the RWM 53 when the RB is activated. This is a process of storing (memorizing) "2 (H)" in the winning count counter (not shown in FIG. 35). Then, the process proceeds to step S321.

In addition, "2 (H)" is set as an initial value for both the game count counter during RB operation and the winning count counter during RB operation, and each time the number of games or the number of winnings increases by "1", respectively. It is a counter that is decremented by "1". However, not limited to this, the initial values of these counter values are set to "0", and each time the number of games or winnings increases by "1", the counter values are incremented by "1", and these counter values become "2 ( It may be determined whether or not "H)" has been reached.

In the next step S321, it is determined whether or not the condition for indicating the specified number is satisfied. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the specified number is not specified. However, in the twelfth embodiment described later, since a specified number may be instructed at the start of the game, this process is included in this flowchart. When it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and when it is determined that the condition for instructing the specified number is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S323.
In step S322, the indicated specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data. In the twelfth embodiment, there is a case where the specified number "2" is instructed, and when the specified number "2" is instructed, "0A" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is defined as "0B (H)" (details will be described later), and in this step S322, "0B (H)" is used as the acquired number data. Remember.
Further, when the specified number "2" is displayed, "0A" is displayed instead of "02" so as not to be confused with the payout number, the error number, and the push order instruction information.
The display of the number of payouts is any of "01" to "15", and "A" is not displayed in the lower digit. Also, the error number is not displayed as "A" in the lower digit.

Here, the error number (the number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when an error occurs) in the present embodiment is as follows.
HP: Medal jam error HE: Medal empty error (No medals for Hopper 35)
H0: Abnormality of payout sensor 37 CE: Medal retention error CP: Illegal passage error of medal CH: Abnormality of passage sensor 46 C0: Abnormality of insertion sensor 44 C1: Abnormality of medal insertion error FE: Sub tank (not shown in FIG. 1) Full dE: Front door open E1: Power off / return error E5: Display judgment error E6: Set value error E7: Random error

The type of error is not limited to the above. An error in which the upper digit of the error number is "E" means an unrecoverable error.
As described above, since "A" is not displayed in the lower digit of the error number, the error number and the specified number of instructions are not confused.
Further, the push order instruction information displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function is "= 1" to "= 6". Therefore, the push order instruction information and the specified number of instructions are not confused.

Further, in step S322, before storing the instruction specified number display data as the acquired number data, the payout number data in the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data (when a small winning combination is won in the previous game). ). The payout number data is stored in step S399 of the medal payout process (FIG. 49 described later) by winning a prize. Therefore, when storing the instruction specified number display data, the payout number data up to that point may be overwritten. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a process for clearing the acquired number data may be provided before step S322 (for example, immediately before step S311).

In the next step S323, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed based on the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S313. When it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the stop display is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S324, the main control board 50 reads the bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals (bet number data) bet in the previous game. Next, the process proceeds to step S325, and the automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of storing the number of bets read in step S324 in the automatic bet number data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S326 to set the output request of the operating state. In the next step S327, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated, that 1BB has been activated, and the like is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the past (meaning before the filing of the present application, not "known"; the same applies hereinafter), in step S276 during the addition processing of the number of bets, specifically during the main processing of FIG. 41. In the medal management process, the process of clearing the acquired number data was executed. As a result, even if the small winning combination was won in the previous game and the payout number data at the time of winning the small winning combination is stored as the winning number data, the winning number data is cleared at the time of the bet number addition processing.
However, in the present embodiment, before the medal management process is executed, if the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data.
Then, when the specified number is specified, it is necessary to prevent the specified number display data from being cleared at the time of betting processing. In the present embodiment, when the specified number is specified, the state in which the specified number is specified is maintained at least until the start switch 41 is operated.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the medal management process does not execute the clearing process of the acquired number data, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the acquired number data is cleared by the process of step S280 in FIG. 41.

However, not limited to this, when the specified number is specified, the specified specified number display data is cleared after the operation of the start switch 41, but when the specified number is not specified, the bet number is added during the process as before. You may clear the acquired number data (in the medal management process). In this case, for example, in the bet number addition process, it is determined whether or not the specified number has been specified in the game this time before the clearing process of the acquired number data is executed, and it is determined that the specified number has been specified. Does not clear the acquired number data, and clears the acquired number data when it is judged that the specified number is not specified.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the AT game count counter update process in step S281 in FIG. 41.
First, in step S331, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is on (“1”). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S332, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, the AT game count counter is not updated unless it is in AT.

In step S332, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3". This process reads the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM53 and determines whether or not the bet number of the game is "3". When the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S333, and when the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. In the present embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated (the process related to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with the bet number (specified number) "3" during AT. In other words, even during AT, when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) "2", the AT game count counter is not updated.
On the other hand, as will be described later, the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter are updated regardless of the number of bets.

Proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 subtracts the value of the AT game count counter by "1". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
In the case of the difference number management type AT, similarly, when the AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is not subtracted (updated) even during AT when the number of bets is not "3".

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition lottery process in step S283 in FIG. 41.
In the present embodiment, the AT lottery process (step S348) is provided in the advantageous section transition lottery process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section transition lottery process and the AT lottery process are executed independently. You may. For example, in FIG. 41, step S283 may be limited to the advantageous section transition lottery process, and the AT lottery process may be executed after step S283.
First, in step S341, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) of the game this time is "3". When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S342, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery in step S345 and the advantageous section transition process (process related to the advantageous section) in step S347, which will be described later, and step S348. AT lottery process (process related to the instruction function) can be executed. However, when the number of bets (specified number) is not "3", these processes are not executed.

In step S342, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0”. When it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "0" (non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section), step S348 is performed. Proceed to. When the advantageous section type flag is "1" (when the advantageous section is already in progress), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, but the AT lottery is performed.

In step S343, it is determined whether or not the winning combination lottery result in this game is the target lottery result, that is, whether or not the winning combination that is the target of the lottery in the advantageous section is won. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, when a special role is won alone, when a special role and a small role are won twice, or when a small role (rare small role) is won, it is a target lottery result. to decide. In addition, the target lottery results do not include non-winning. This is because the process related to the advantageous section is not executed in the non-winning game of the winning combination (the game in which the condition device is not activated).
If it is determined in step S343 that it is the target lottery result, the process proceeds to step S344, and if it is determined that it is not the target lottery result, the process according to this flowchart is terminated (that is, the advantageous section lottery is not performed or the advantageous section is not selected. Win).

In step S344, it is determined whether or not the target lottery result is a specific lottery result. Here, although detailed explanation is omitted, for example, among the winning combinations, the middle cherry (single winning or overlapping winning with the special winning combination) is set as the final winning combination (the winning combination in the advantageous section transition lottery). When the middle cherry is won, it can be judged that it is a specific lottery result.
If it is determined in step S344 that the result is the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S347, and if it is determined that the result is not the specific lottery result, the process proceeds to step S345. In other words, if it is not the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and if it is the specific lottery result, the advantageous section transition process (step S347) is executed without performing the advantageous section transition lottery (always shift to the advantageous section). To do). Even if it is a specific lottery result, it is possible to execute the advantageous section transition lottery and set to win the advantageous section transition lottery with a 100% probability.

In step S345, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed. As the advantageous section transition lottery, for example, a lottery may be performed in the same manner as the combination lottery by using a lottery table in which the number of positions according to the combination lottery result is predetermined. For example, if the winning number is "A", there is a 35% chance of winning the advantageous section, and if the winning number is "B", there is a 60% chance of winning the advantageous section, and so on. Can be mentioned.
If the winning combination lottery result is not the target of the advantageous section lottery, the result is "No" in step S343. Therefore, in the case of "Yes" in step S343, that is, the winning combination lottery result that is the target of the advantageous section transition lottery. At that time, in the advantageous section transition lottery, the lottery is performed by a lottery table having at least a number of "1" or more. However, the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery is set to "1/17500" or more.

Next, the process proceeds to step S346, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has been won in the lottery of step S345. When it is determined that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S347, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not been won, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S347, the advantageous section transition process is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 45, and is a process for setting flags and counters based on winning of an advantageous section.
In the next step S348, an AT lottery is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
Not limited to the example of this embodiment, AT may be started at any time (without performing an AT lottery) when shifting to an advantageous section. Alternatively, when shifting to the advantageous section, it may be set to non-AT, and after shifting to the advantageous section (for example, after the predetermined number of games has been exhausted), whether or not to execute AT may be drawn.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section transition process in step S347 of FIG. 44.
First, in step S351, the main control board 50 turns on the advantageous section type flag (“1”). Next, the process proceeds to step S352, and the main control board 50 sets the advantageous section clear counter with the initial value “1500 (D)” of the number of games played in the advantageous section.

In the next step S353, "0" is set in the difference counter. The process of step S353 is not necessary when the difference counter is continuously updated even during the normal section (non-advantageous section), and when it is not an advantageous section and is always set to "0" at the end of the game. However, the initial value "0" may be set to prevent noise or the like.
Since the initialization process including the difference counter is executed at the end of the advantageous section, the difference counter is set to "0" at the start of the normal section. Therefore, in the case of the specification in which the difference counter is updated only during the advantageous section, the difference counter at the start of the advantageous section is "0", so that the process of step S353 can be omitted. ..
On the other hand, when the difference counter is continuously updated even during the non-advantageous section as in the present embodiment, the difference counter may be positive even immediately before the transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, in step S353, the difference counter is set to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in step S348 of FIG. 44.
First, in step S361, the AT lottery is executed based on the combination lottery result. Similar to step S345, this lottery may include an AT lottery using a lottery table in which the number of winnings is determined for each combination lottery result.
The AT lottery does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, a winning combination lottery result that is not determined by the AT and a winning combination lottery result that is always determined by the AT may be provided.
In the next step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the AT has been won in the AT lottery in step S361. When it is determined that the AT has been won, the process proceeds to step S363, and when it is determined that the AT has not been won, the process proceeds to step S365.

In step S363, the main control board 50 executes the AT initial game number determination process. This process is the process shown in FIG. 47, which will be described later. Next, the process proceeds to step S364, and the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to AT and turns on the AT flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
Here, the main gaming state of the present embodiment includes normal (non-advantageous section), CZ (advantageous section and non-AT), AT, and 1BB operation. It is possible to set a precursor as the main game state after the AT is won and before the AT starts, but in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplification of the explanation, when the AT is won, the AT is started immediately. And. Further, the information on the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S362 that the AT has not been won and the process proceeds to step S365, the main control board 50 sets the main gaming state to CZ. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the AT initial game number determination process in step S363 in FIG. 46.
In FIG. 47, in step S371, it is determined whether or not the winning combination lottery result in this game is a winning combination. As the definite role, as described above, a rare role such as a middle cherry is set. When it is determined that the final winning combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S372, and when it is determined that the fixed winning combination has not been won, the process proceeds to step S373.
In step S372, the initial number of AT games is set to "100 (D)" and stored in the AT game counter. On the other hand, in step S373, the initial number of AT games is set to "30 (D)" and stored in the AT game counter. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is completed.

In the example of FIG. 47, the initial number of AT games is distributed according to whether or not the winning combination is won, but the specification is not limited to this, and the number of games is determined using the lottery table based on the combination lottery result. You may run a lottery. In other words, even if it is the result of one winning combination lottery, one of a plurality of games may be selected.
Further, even during AT, the AT game count determination process shown in FIG. 47 may be executed as an additional lottery for the AT game count. When the additional lottery for the number of AT games is won, the determined number of additional games is added to the AT game count counter.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the push order instruction number set process (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 of FIG. 41.
First, in step S381, it is determined whether or not the instruction condition (condition for operating the instruction function) is satisfied. When the game is AT and a winning combination having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won, it is determined that the instruction condition is satisfied.
If the player wins the advantageous section in the game this time (“Yes” in step S346 in FIG. 44) and wins the AT (in FIG. 46, “Yes” in step S362), the advantageous section from the next game. This time the game is not an advantageous section because it shifts to. Therefore, since the instruction function cannot be activated in this game, the result is "No" in step S381.
When it is determined in step S381 that the instruction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the instruction condition is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S382, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the game this time is "3". In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is "3" by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the RWM53.
When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S383, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the condition for operating the instruction function (execution of the process related to the instruction function) is set to be the number of bets "3" (a specified number of one). Therefore, for example, even when the game is started with the number of bets "2" during AT and a winning combination having an advantageous push order (for example, push order bell) is won, the instruction function does not operate (the correct push order is). Not notified).

In the next step S383, the winning number (conditional device number) is set. The winning number (conditional device number) determined in the winning combination lottery process is stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of the RWM 53. Then, in step S383, the value stored in this storage area is stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S384, and the push order instruction number table (not shown) is set. Here, the start address of the push order instruction number table is stored in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S385.

In step S385, the designated address data is set. This process is a process in which the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning number (conditional device number) is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the start address of the push order instruction number table is acquired. As a result, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S386, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (area for storing the push order instruction number, which is not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S387, the A register value (pushing order instruction number) is stored as the acquired number data.

In the eleventh embodiment, the winning combination to be drawn is the same as that of FIG. 58 (12th embodiment) described later. Then, when the winning numbers "3" to "8" are won during AT, the push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is set. The relationship between the winning number and the push order instruction number stored in the acquired number data is as follows.
Winning number "3": Push order instruction number "A1 (H)"
Winning number "4": Pushing order instruction number "A2 (H)"
Winning number "5": Push order instruction number "A3 (H)"
Winning number "6": Pushing order instruction number "A4 (H)"
Winning number "7": Push order instruction number "A5 (H)"
Winning number "8": Pushing order instruction number "A6 (H)"

For example, when the winning number "3" is won during AT, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the acquired number data by the push order instruction number set process of FIG. 48. As a result, the push order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55, which will be described later.

After step S387, the process proceeds to step S388 to determine whether or not the advantageous section display LED flag is on (lit). When it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S389.
In step S389, it is determined whether or not the gaming state (RT or main gaming state) of the current game is a gaming state in which the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that whether or not the section Sim ball output rate is in a gaming state exceeding "1" is preset, and here, it is determined whether or not the section Sim is in a preset gaming state. Specifically, the data of the current RT and the main game state is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM53, and by reading this data, the game state of the game this time exceeds the section Sim ball output rate "1". Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the section Sim ball ejection rate is in the gaming state exceeding "1", the process proceeds to step S390, and when it is determined that the section Sim ball ejection rate is not in the gaming state exceeding "1", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. To do. In step S390, the advantageous section display LED flag is turned on. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by the interrupt process executed after step S390. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As described above, in the game in which the instruction function is activated, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is not yet lit and the section Sim ball output rate exceeds "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Since the condition that must be turned on is satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the player wins the advantageous section transition lottery, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on before the start of the next game. Alternatively, after shifting to the advantageous section, before activating the instruction function, or even if the section Sim ball ejection rate is not in the gaming state exceeding "1", at an arbitrary timing (when the lighting condition set arbitrarily is satisfied). ), The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S294 in FIG. 41.
First, in step S391, the main control board 50 acquires the payout number data. This process is a process of storing the value of the payout number data in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S392, and it is determined whether or not the medal is paid out. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the payout number data (A register value) is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value is "0", that is, when it is determined that the medal is not paid out, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", that is, when it is determined that the medal is paid out, the process proceeds to step S393.

In step S393, the value of the credit number data is acquired.
Next, the process proceeds to step S394, and it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the limit value. Specifically, when the credit number data acquired in step S393 is "50 (D)", it is determined that the credit number has reached the limit value, the process proceeds to step S398, and the acquired credit number data is "50". If it is less than "(D)", it is determined that the number of credits has not reached the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S395.

In step S395, the waiting time at the time of credit addition is set. In the present embodiment, in order to set the standby time to be about 100 ms, the interrupt processing number “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set. Specifically, "00000000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S396, and the 2-byte time wait process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S396 is completed, the process proceeds to step S397, and "1" is added to the value of the credit number data. As a result, the display of the credit number display LED 76 becomes "+1" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S397. For example, the display of the credit number display LED 76 changes from "08" to "09". After the process of step S397, the process proceeds to step S399.

When the process proceeds from step S394 to step S398, one medal payout process (process of paying out the actual medal from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. In this process, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b is detected at a predetermined timing as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, one medal is correctly paid out. to decide.
By the above processing, the number of credits is added until the number of credits reaches the limit value, and when the number of credits is the limit, the actual medal is paid out from the hopper 35.

In step S399, "1" is added to the acquired number data. As a result, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "+1". For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".
In the next step S400, "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. In this step S400, only the payout number data is updated, and the value of the payout number data buffer is not updated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S401, and it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the updated payout number data is "0". When it is determined that the payout number data is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S393 and the process is continued.

In the above payout process, when the payout process of adding "1" to the number of credits is performed, the waiting time of about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S395 and S396. As a result, it is possible to show the player that the display of the credit number display LED 76 counts up. For example, when the display of the credit number display LED76 before credit addition is "08" and eight medals are added to this, "display" 08 "-> 100 ms standby processing->display" 09 "-> 100 ms. Standby process → ... → 100 ms standby process → display “16”. On the other hand, if the waiting time is not provided when the number of credits is "1", it looks as if the display "08" is changed to the display "16" instantly.
Then, as in the present embodiment, when the number of credits is added, the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side by executing the 2-byte time waiting process for each "1" addition ("Purururu ..."") And the count-up of the number of credits can be synchronized.

On the other hand, when the number of credits exceeds the maximum number "50 (D)" and the medal is actually paid out in the process of step S398, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S395 and S396 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal. Therefore, when actually paying out medals, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub-control board 80 side without providing a 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S301 of FIG. 41.
First, in step S411, a process of clearing a flag of the condition device (also referred to as winning information; stored in a predetermined area (not shown in FIG. 35) of RWM53) is performed. This process is a process of clearing other than the special combination condition device, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination has stopped at the effective line, the process of clearing the special combination condition device is also executed. In the next step S412, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. This process is a process of setting the bit corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag (not shown in FIG. 35) provided in the RWM 53 to “0”. Next, the process proceeds to step S413 to clear the replay operation flag. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operating state flag to “0”.

In the next step S414, it is determined whether or not the AT game count counter has become "0". Here, as described above, the AT game count counter is updated in step S281 (FIG. 43) during the main process of FIG. 41. As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT game count counter is updated after the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in FIG. 41), but is not limited to this, and for example, in FIG. 41, step S301 (game end). It may be executed before the check process) or within the process of step S301 (for example, before step S414 in FIG. 50).
Further, in the present embodiment, an example of the game number management type AT for updating the AT game count counter is shown, but in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is set to "0" in step S414. Determine if it has become. The AT difference number counter is updated after the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 41) by winning a prize.
When it is determined that the AT game count counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S415, and when it is determined that the AT game count counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S416. In step S415, the AT flag is turned off.
Next, the process proceeds to step S416 to execute advantageous section counter management. This process is a process for updating the advantageous section clear counter and the difference number counter, and is a process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, which will be described later. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. 50. FIG. 51 shows Example 1 and FIG. 52 shows Example 2.
In the advantageous interval counter management, the following processing is executed.
1) Update of advantageous section clear counter 2) Update of difference counter 3) Judgment of whether or not the end condition of advantageous section is satisfied 4) Initialization of data related to advantageous section (clear) when the end condition of advantageous section is satisfied )
In addition, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of the number of bets (specified number).
In this embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (normal section). However, it may be configured to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section and execute the advantageous section counter management only in the advantageous section.

In Example 1 of FIG. 51, in step S421, the address value of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register. Therefore, "F063 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
In the next step S422, "1" is subtracted from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register. The subtraction here is, for example, as follows.
"0010 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "000F (H)"
"0001 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (zero flag = 1)
"0000 (H)" → "1" subtraction → "0000 (H)" (carry flag = 1)

As described above, even if "1" is subtracted from "0000 (H)", no carry occurs, and the value remains "0000 (H)". In this way, no matter what the value before subtraction is, it is only one instruction (1 step) to subtract "1", so it is judged whether or not the count value before update is "0". Is unnecessary, and the process of adding the carry flag value after subtraction is also unnecessary. Therefore, the time required to update the count value can be significantly reduced. Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to judge whether or not the player is in the advantageous section from the value of the advantageous section clear counter, and whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, 1500 games in the advantageous section). It is not necessary to judge whether or not the game has been executed, whether or not an arbitrary end condition is satisfied, etc.).

In the next step S423, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section clear counter value before subtraction is “0”. This process is determined by whether or not the carry flag is set to "1" in the subtraction process in step S422.
When the carry flag becomes "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the process proceeds to step S436, and when the carry flag is not "1" (when the value before subtraction is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S436. The process proceeds to step S424. When the carry flag is "1" (when the value before subtraction is "0"), the game is not in the advantageous section (this time the game is in the non-advantageous section (normal section)). It means).

In step S424, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the subtraction result (after subtraction) in step S422 is “0”. This process is determined by whether or not the zero flag is set to "1" in the subtraction process in step S422. That is, it is determined whether or not the value before subtraction was "1".
When the zero flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S435, and when the zero flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S425. When the zero flag becomes "1" (when the subtraction result is "0"), the game of the advantageous section ends in this game (the next game is the game of the non-advantageous section (normal section)). ) Means that.

In step S425, the value of the difference counter is acquired. This process is a process of reading the value of the difference counter and storing it in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S426, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation symbol is displayed in this game (whether or not the replay has won a prize). This process determines whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the replay operation symbol is displayed. When it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S434, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S427.

In step S427, the payout number data buffer is acquired. This process is a process of reading the payout number data buffer and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S428, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter is executed. This process is a process of adding the A register value (payout number data buffer value) to the HL register value (difference counter) and storing the added value in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S429, and the value of the bet number data is acquired. This process is a process of reading the bet number data and storing the value in the A register.
In the next step S430, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the subtraction result in the HL register. Here, when the HL register value is less than "0", the carry flag becomes "1".

In the next step S431, it is determined whether or not the subtraction result in step S430 is less than "0". In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" by the subtraction in step S430, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the subtraction result is less than "0", and the process proceeds to step S432. move on. On the other hand, when the carry flag is not "1" (when the subtraction result is not less than "0"), the process proceeds to step S433.

In step S432, a process of clearing the HL register value (setting it to “0”) is executed. Then, in the next step S433, the difference counter value is saved. This process is a process of storing the HL register value in the difference counter. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S433 via step S432, the difference counter becomes “0”.
In the next step S434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference counter exceeds the upper limit value. The upper limit of the difference counter is set to "2400 (D)". The processing here is a comparison operation between the HL register value and "2401 (D)". In this comparison operation, when the HL register value is larger, the carry flag is "0", and when the HL register value is smaller, the carry flag is "1". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1" (when the HL register value is smaller), it is determined that the upper limit value is not exceeded, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the upper limit value has been exceeded (when the carry flag is "0"), the process proceeds to step S435. When the difference counter exceeds the upper limit, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
In step S435, in RWM53, the storage area related to the advantageous section is initialized (data related to the advantageous section is cleared). Examples of the data regarding the advantageous section include an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section type flag, a difference number counter, an advantageous section display LED flag, an AT flag, and an AT game count counter. Further, information on the main game state can be mentioned. The information regarding the advantageous section does not include the RT status number, the LED display counter, and the like. Specifically, in FIG. 35, "F000 (H)" to "F052 (H)" are not included.

For example, the data cleared in step S435 does not include the LED display counter.
Here, it is assumed that the LED display counter is cleared. In that case, the LED display counter becomes "0" when the advantageous section ends. Specifically, if the LED display counter is initialized when it is "00000010 (B)", the LED display counter is normally updated to "00000001 (B)" in the next interrupt process, and the LED. Although it is possible to turn on the LED corresponding to the display counter (specifically, the upper digit of the credit number display LED 76), the LED display counter becomes "00010000 (B)". Therefore, the display of the LED corresponding to "00000001 (B)" of the LED display counter is delayed, so that the LED display counter may appear to be turned off for a moment.

Further, the data cleared in step S435 does not include, for example, the following data.
1) Excitation information of the motor 32 2) Error information when an error occurs 3) Management information display Data for displaying the LED74 (role ratio monitor) (total number of games counter, total payout counter, etc.)
4) Timer value of minimum game time (4.1 seconds) (set in step S285 in FIG. 41)
5) Input port 51 information 6) Control command buffer data 7) Stack area data 8) External signal information The above is just an example of typical data, and the data that cannot be cleared is limited to the above data. It does not mean that it will be done.

Next, the process proceeds to step S436, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the advantageous section type flag is “0” (normal section). When the advantageous section type flag is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the advantageous section type flag is not "0", especially when it is determined that the advantageous section type flag is "1" (advantageous section) in the present embodiment, the process proceeds to step S437. At this point, the advantageous section type flag is set to "1" because the advantageous section transition lottery was won in this game, and the advantageous section type flag was set to "1" in step S351 in FIG. 45. In this case, a case where "Yes" is determined in step S423 and the process proceeds to step S436 can be mentioned. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S436 via step S435, the advantageous section type flag is cleared in step S435, so that the result is not determined as "No" in step S436.

In step S437, the initial value is set in the advantageous section clear counter. This process is a process of setting "1500 (D)" in the advantageous section clear counter. Here, "1500 (D)" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. In step S421, "F063 (H)" is set in the HL register. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the above advantageous section counter management, when updating the difference counter, the number of payouts is first added (step S428), and then the number of bets is subtracted (step S430). The reason for processing in this way is as follows.
For example, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", it is assumed that the number of bets is "3 (D)" and the number of payouts is "9 (D)".
Here, when the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, it becomes "-1 (D) (actually," FFFF (H) ")" and the carry flag becomes "1". Then, when the number of payouts is added, "9 (D)" is added to "-1 (D)", so that it becomes "8 (D)" and the carry flag is "1" (carry-up is (Indicates that it will occur).

Since the difference number of games this time is "+6", the carry flag becomes "1" just by adding the difference number "+6" to the difference counter "2 (D)" before the update, which is irregular. The situation arises. In other words, the process of step S431 (whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0") cannot be determined by whether or not the carry flag is "1". If it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes" in step S431 even though the carry flag has not occurred, and the difference counter is initially set in step S432. You will set the value. The carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" in any case when carry or carry occurs as a result of subtraction.

On the other hand, when the difference counter is "2 (D)", if the payout number "9 (D)" is added first, the difference counter becomes "11 (D)" at that point, and then bets. Subtracting the number gives "8 (D)". In this case, the carry flag is "0" because no carry occurs.
For the above reason, when updating the difference counter, if the number of payouts is first added and then the number of bets is subtracted, the determination process of step S431 can be executed by a simple process using the carry flag.

Further, in the advantageous section counter management of the present embodiment, the subtraction process (step S422) of the advantageous section counter is first executed, and when the value before subtraction is "0" (when "Yes" in step S423, that is, In the non-advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S436 without executing the difference counter update process (steps S425 to S430). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section counter management is executed regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or a non-advantageous section, but when it is a non-advantageous section, the difference counter is updated. The processing efficiency is improved by not executing. Therefore, the processing order is such that the subtraction process of the advantageous section clear counter is executed first, and then the update process of the difference counter is performed. Of course, if it is a specification that determines whether or not it is in the advantageous section and executes the subtraction process of the advantageous section clear counter and the update process of the difference counter if it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. It is also possible to execute the update processing of the difference counter before the processing.

Further, even when the determination in step S426 is "Yes" (at the time of winning the replay), the process of step S434 is executed. By doing so, even if an abnormal value (a value exceeding 2400 (D)) is stored in the difference counter due to noise or the like at the end of the game, it becomes "Yes" in step S434. , The advantageous section can be terminated. On the other hand, when such confirmation is unnecessary, the process of this flowchart may be terminated when "Yes" is obtained in step S426.

Further, in the example of FIG. 51, it is determined in step S426 whether or not the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, and when it is determined that the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the difference counter update process (steps S427 to S427). By skipping S430), the processing speed is increased.
In particular, in a game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed, it is conceivable that the difference counter is updated by regarding the number of payouts of the game as "0" (deemed payout number) and the number of bets of the next game as "0". .. However, for example, an SB (single bonus) is provided as a winning combination during an advantageous section, and when the SB is won, one SB game in which the number of bets is "1" is executed in the next game, but this SB game In some cases, the replay is won and the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed. In this case, since the next game is not an SB game, the number of bets is "3" (other than the SB game, the game cannot be played with the number of bets "1"). However, in this case, since the number of deemed payouts in the SB game and the number of bets in the next game do not match, the problem is how to count the difference counter.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above problem can be solved by not updating the difference counter in the game in which the re-game operation symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of advantageous section counter management in step S416 of FIG. In FIG. 52, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 51.
In Example 1 of FIG. 51, the number of payouts is first added to the difference counter, and then the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is first subtracted from the difference counter, and then the payout number is added to the difference counter.

In the example of FIG. 51, if the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter and then the number of payouts is added, the carry flag may be set to "1" even if the carry flag does not finally occur, and the calculation result is It was explained that it becomes impossible to judge whether or not it is "0" depending on whether or not the carry flag is "1".
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 52, the number of bets is subtracted from the difference counter (step S430) and then the number of payouts is added (step S428), and in step S441, the carry flag value is not referred to. It is determined whether or not the calculation result is less than "0".
Specifically, in step S441 of FIG. 52, among the HL register values, step S441 depends on whether or not the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register (register that stores the upper digit) value is "1". It is determined whether or not the calculation result of is less than "0".

For example
Difference counter value (HL register value) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
Suppose it was.
In this case, the difference counter value after calculation is
0000 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111 / 1111 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (11111 / 1101 (B))
Will be.
Note that "/" indicates a 4-bit delimiter in binary notation.

The above example is the case where the HL register value before the calculation is "0000 (H)", but the HL register value before the calculation is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference number of this game> HL register". If "value", for example
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0001 (H) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = FFFE (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = FF (H) (1111 / 1111 (B))
L register value = FE (H) (1111/1110 (B))
Will be.

Furthermore, when the HL register value is not "0000 (H)" and "the difference number of games this time <HL register value", for example, first,
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0100 (H) (256 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 00FD (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FD (H) (11111 / 1101 (B))
Will be.

Secondly,
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 00FF (H) (255 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 00FC (H)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = 00 (H) (0000/0000 (B))
L register value = FC (H) (1111/1100 (B))
Will be.

Furthermore, thirdly,
Difference in number of games this time = 03 (H)
HL register value = 0960 (H) (2400 (D)) (before calculation)
When, the HL register value after calculation is
HL register value = 095D (H) (after calculation)
Will be.
Therefore,
H register value = 09 (H) (0000/1001 (B))
L register value = 5D (H) (0101/1101 (B))
Will be.

On the other hand, the upper limit of the difference counter is "2400 (D)". Here, if "2400 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/0000 (B)"
Will be.
Since the upper limit of the difference counter is "2400 (D)", when a value exceeding "2400 (D)" is stored in the difference counter, it is judged that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the difference number. The counter is cleared (step S435 in FIGS. 51 and 52).
At the end of this game, the difference counter value was "2400 (D)", but since it did not exceed "2400 (D)", it was judged that the end condition of the advantageous section was not satisfied, and the next game Suppose you have migrated. Then, in the next game, the difference number increases most when the bet number is "1" and the payout number is "15 (D)", so the difference number in the game is "14 (D)". It becomes.
Therefore, the difference counter value in this case is "2414 (D)".
Here, when "2414 (D)" is expressed in binary,
"0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)"
Will be.

Further, when the difference counter value becomes "2414 (D)", it exceeds "2400 (D)", so that the difference counter is cleared in the game and becomes "0 (D)".
From the above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take during the game is "2414 (D)", that is, "0000/1001/0110/1110 (B)".

Therefore, when the HL register value is "2414 (D)",
H register value = 0000/1001 (B)
L register value = 0110/1110 (B)
The D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is "0".
Therefore, in the range where the HL register value, that is, the difference counter value is in the range of "0 (D)" to "2414 (D)", the D7 bit of the H register value is always "0".

From the above, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value is always "0" and never becomes "1" except when the carry is carried down.
In order for the D7 bit of the H register value to be "1", the difference counter value must be "32768 (D)", and the difference reaches such a value except for carry. The advantageous section will not be continued until.

On the other hand, as mentioned above
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0000 (H) (before calculation)
When is, the HL register value after the calculation becomes "FFFD (H)".
Here, "FFFD (H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1101 (B)"
Is.

Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1101 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
Similarly, before the calculation,
Bet number data = 3 (H)
Number of payout data = 0 (H)
HL register value (difference counter) = 0002 (H)
When, the HL register value becomes "FFFF (H)" when the difference counter is updated.

Here, "FFFF (H)" is
"1111/1111/1111/1111 (B)"
Is.
Therefore,
H register value = 1111/1111 (B)
L register value = 1111/1111 (B)
The D7 bit of the H register value is "1".
In this way, when a carry occurs, the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value becomes "1".

From the above, as a result of updating the difference counter, the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when no carry has occurred, and the D7 bit of the H register value is "0" when the carry has occurred. 1 ".
Therefore, in step S441 of FIG. 52, when determining whether or not the calculation result is less than "0", it is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1". Then, when the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it is determined that the calculation result is less than "0".
In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the calculation result is "0" without determining whether or not the carry flag is "1" as a result of the calculation.
Then, since it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0" without using the carry flag, there is no problem even if the number of payouts is added after subtracting the number of bets with respect to the difference counter value.

Further, as is clear from the above, even if the maximum value "2414 (D)" that the difference counter can take is not limited to the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value, the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the like. The D4 bit is also "0".
On the other hand, when the carry of the difference counter value occurs, not only the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the H register value but also the D6 bit, the D5 bit, and the D4 bit become "1".

Therefore, in step S441 in FIG. 52, instead of determining whether or not the D7 bit of the H register value is "1", it may be determined whether or not the D6 bit is "1". , It may be determined whether or not the D5 bit is "1", and whether or not the D4 bit is "1" may be determined. In any case, when the bit is "1", the calculation result is less than "0", and when the bit is not "1", the calculation result is not less than "0".
As is clear from the above, also in Example 1 (step S431) of FIG. 51, the calculation result is less than "0" with reference to the D7 bit (or D6, D5, or D4 bit) of the H register value. It is also possible to determine if there is.

Further, as is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the update of the advantageous section clear counter (step S422), the update of the difference counter (steps S428 and S430), and whether or not the advantageous section clear counter is "0". The determination (step S424), the determination of whether or not the difference counter has exceeded the upper limit (step S434), and the initialization of the information regarding the advantageous section (step S435) are performed regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in this game. , Will be executed. Therefore, even if the game is played with the number of bets (specified number) "2" and the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" or the difference counter exceeds the upper limit, the advantageous section ends. To do.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 53 in parallel with the main processing in a period of 2.235 ms (however, the period is not limited to this time period).
When the process shifts to the interrupt processing in step S451, in step S452, register value saving and duplicate interrupt prohibition processing are performed as initial processing. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing is used in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, the interrupt disable flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is because, for example, an interrupt processing execution request may be made during the execution of the power off processing.

In the next step S453, the power cutoff process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, and is a process of detecting whether or not a signal of a power failure detection signal has been input.
In the next step S454, the interrupt counter value is updated. The interrupt counter value is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35).
In the next step S455, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed can be mentioned.

Next, the process proceeds to step S456, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and is a process of turning on the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) according to the state of the slot machine 10.
The errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include a non-recoverable error and a recoverable error. In the non-recoverable error, an error display is output by the main process (for example, step S304 in FIG. 41), but the error can be recovered. The error is displayed by this LED display control for each interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S457 to read the input port 51. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, the switch signal, and the input signals of various sensors are read, and the data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising data, Fall-down data) is generated and stored in a predetermined area of RWM53 (not shown in FIG. 35).

In the next step S458, it is determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range. Here, the set value data stored in the address "F000 (H)" is read, and whether the range of the set value data is within the normal range (whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). ) Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the set value data is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and when it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in the present embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

In step S459, the built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that turns on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of a random number for a winning combination lottery (when the random number update is slow, etc.) is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, the process proceeds to step S460 to determine whether or not an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether or not the error flag is on), and if it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S461 and an error occurs. When it is determined that the occurrence has occurred, the process proceeds to step S470, and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error processing. The error display content at this time is "E7".

In step S461, the drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in 31 reel units (left, middle, right), and includes stopping, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby depending on the operating state. When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S462 to perform port output processing. In this process, the exciting output of the motor 32 (for reels) and the hopper motor 36 and the exciting output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S463, the input error check process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S464, a control command transmission process is performed. This process is a process of transmitting the set control command (the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 53 (not shown in FIG. 35)) to the sub-control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, in the interrupt processing after that point (in principle, if the command buffer is empty, the interrupt processing that comes next after that point in time), this step S464 The control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

In the next step S465, the data for the external signal stored in the RWM 53 is stored in the register. Then, in the next step S466, the output of the external signal (transmission of the signal to the external centralized terminal plate 100) is performed from the output port 52 (output port 5 in FIG. 33).
Next, the process proceeds to step S467 to perform the ratio display preparation process. This process is a process of updating the timer related to the ratio display of the management information display LED 74, outputting the segment data, and the like.

In the next step S468, the random number update process is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S469, the register value saved in step S452 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As shown in the above processing, the credit number display LED76, the acquired number display LED78, the status display LED79 (79a to 79f), the set value display LED73, and the management information display LED74 are turned on / off by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. Be controlled.
Further, for each interrupt process, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer, the transmission process is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during unrecoverable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal recovery).
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of RWM53 based on data from an input port, transmission of a control command to the sub control board 80, etc.) is executed. The interrupt itself is prohibited to prevent it from happening.
If an untransmitted command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control commands stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a power cutoff process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S453 of FIG. 53.
In step S481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal was turned on in the previous interrupt process. Here, when the voltage drops below a predetermined value (V1 or less in the example of FIG. 3) by the voltage monitoring device (power supply disconnection detection circuit; not shown) provided on the main control board 50, a predetermined input is obtained. Since the power failure detection signal is input to the predetermined bit of the port 51, it is detected whether or not the signal is input. Further, when the power failure detection signal is turned on, it is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM53.
If it is determined in the previous interrupt process that the power cutoff detection signal is on, the process proceeds to step S482, and if it is determined that the signal is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S482, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is on in the current interrupt process. When it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S483.
When it is determined as "Yes" in both steps S481 and S482 (when a power failure detection signal is input for two consecutive interrupts), it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to steps S483 and subsequent steps.
In step S483, the outputs of all output ports 52 are turned off. By this process, for example, when the motor 32 is being driven (during the rotation of the reel 31) or when the hopper motor 36 is being driven (during the payout of medals), the drive is stopped.
Next, the process proceeds to step S484, and the power off processing flag is stored in the RWM53. This process is a process of storing data indicating that a normal power off process has been executed in the RWM 53.

In the next step S485, the checksum data of RWM53 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including a work area (RWM53) used in the program, and examples of the target program use area include a program work area, an unused area, and a stack area.
Then, in the next step S486, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum is completed, and if it is determined that the calculation is not completed, the process returns to step S485 to continue the calculation of the checksum. On the other hand, when it is determined that the checksum calculation is completed, the process proceeds to step S487.

In step S487, the calculated checksum is stored in the predetermined address of the RWM53. Here, the data stored in the RWM 53 is 1-byte data (also referred to as complement data) that becomes "0" when all the data in the program used area and the value stored in the predetermined address are added at the checksum of the RWM 53. ).
Then, when the checksum of the RWM53 is executed at the start of the program, all the data of the program use area of the RWM53 in the same range as above and the checksum data are added. If the checksum data calculated by this is "0", it is determined to be a normal value, and if it is not "0", it is determined to be an abnormal value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S488 to enter the reset waiting state. When the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power supply disconnection detection circuit) provided on the main control board 50. Therefore, in step S488, the state waits for the output of the reset signal.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S456 in FIG. 53.
First, in step S491, output ports 2 and 3 (see FIG. 33) are turned off. This process is a process of outputting "00000000000 (B)" from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S492, the output port 4 (see FIG. 33) is turned off. Similar to the above process, this process is also a process of outputting "00000000000 (B)" from the output port 4.

In step S493, the LED display counter is updated. This process updates the LED display counter bit "1" by shifting it to the right by one digit.
In the next step S494, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0", and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S495, and if it is determined that the LED display counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S496. ..
In step S495, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the process of changing the LED display counter "00000000000 (B)" to "00010000 (B)" is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S496.
In step S496, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag stored in the RWM 53 are acquired. Here, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the D register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the E register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S497 to acquire error number display data, LED display data, and bet display data. Here, in the storage area of the RWM 53, a storage area for storing error number display data when an error occurs and LED display data indicating on / off of the game start display LED 79d to the replay display LED 79f among the status display LEDs 79 are stored. A storage area and a storage area for storing bet display data indicating on / off of (1 to 3) bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are provided.
Specifically, the LED display data is configured as follows.
D0: Unused D1: Unused D2: Unused D3: "1" when the game can be started, "0" when the game cannot be started
D4: "1" when medals can be inserted, "0" when medals cannot be inserted
D5: "1" when replay wins, "0" when replay does not win
D6: Unused D7: Unused It should be noted that the D3 to D5 bits of the LED display data correspond to the segments D to F of the status display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.

The bet display data is configured as follows.
When betting 0 cards: 00000000
At the time of one bet: 00000001
When betting two cards: 000000111
When betting 3 cards: 00000111
It should be noted that the D0 to D2 bits of the bet display data correspond to the segments A to C of the state display LED 79 shown in FIG. 32.
Then, in step S497, the error number display data is read and stored in the B register. Further, the LED display data is read and stored in the A register, and the bet display data is read and stored in the C register.

In the next step S498, the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are OR-calculated (combined), and the calculation result is set as segment data for the output port 3. When the A register value (LED display data) and the C register value (bet display data) are ORed, the data indicating whether the status display LED 79 is turned on or off is obtained. Then, when there is a display request for digit 5 (when "Yes" in step S516), this segment data is output from the output port 3.
Next, the process proceeds to step S499, and the register for setting the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared.

In the next step S500, the value obtained by AND-calculating the LED display counter value (D register value) and the LED display request flag value (E register value) is stored in the D register, and whether or not the value is "0". To judge. When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S516. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S501.

In step S501, the LED segment table 2 is set. Here, the LED segment table of the present embodiment includes the LED segment table 1 that defines the segment data when displaying the error number, and other than the error number (number of credits, number of payouts, set value, display during setting change, push order). An LED segment table 2 that defines segment data for displaying instruction information and the specified number of instructions) is provided and stored in the used area of the ROM 54. Then, in step S501, the start address of the LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Here, in the LED segment table 2 set in step S501, the offset and the segment data are defined as follows.
Offset "0": Display segment data "0" Offset "1": Display segment data "1" Offset "2": Display "2" Segment data Offset "3": Display "3" Segment data Offset "4": Display "4" Segment data Offset "5": Display "5" Segment data Offset "6": Display "6" Segment data Offset "7": "7" Segment data to be displayed Offset "8": Display "8" Segment data Offset "9": Display "9" Segment data Offset "A": Display "=" Segment data Offset "B": "A" Segment data to display

For example, first, when the payout number data "10 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the payout number data is "1" and the offset of the lower digit is "0". It becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "1" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "0" is acquired.
Secondly, for example, when the setting changing display data "88 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the setting changing display data is "8", which is the lower digit. The offset of is "8". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "8" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "8" is acquired.

Furthermore, for example, thirdly, when the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit of the push order instruction number becomes "A", which is the lower digit. The offset is "1". As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "=" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "1" is acquired.
Further, for example, fourth, when the indicated specified number display data "0B (H)" is stored in the acquired number data, the offset of the upper digit is "0" and the offset of the lower digit is "B". It becomes. As a result, when the digit 3a is lit, the segment data for displaying "0" is acquired, and when the digit 4a is lit, the segment data for displaying "A" is acquired.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and first, the set value data is acquired. Here, the set value data stored in the address "F000 (H)" is read and stored in the A register. Next, "1" is added to the A register value to generate set value display data, which is stored in the A register. This set value display data becomes an offset value when the set value is displayed.
As will be described later, the segment data stored in the address (of the LED segment table 1 or 2) obtained by adding the offset value to the start address value of the LED segment table 1 or 2 is acquired.
Next, the process proceeds to step S503, and it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the set value. Here, when the D register value is "00010000 (B)" and the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, it is determined that there is a display request for the set value. Then, when it is determined that there is a display request for the set value, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S504.

In step S504, the credit number data is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S505, the offset for the upper digit is acquired. In this process, the calculation of dividing the credit number data (A register value) acquired in step S504 by "10 (D)" is executed, the quotient value is stored in the A register, and the remainder value is stored in the E register. It is a process.
In the next step S506, it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the upper digit of the number of credits. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 1a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S514, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S507.

In step S507, it is determined whether or not there is a request for displaying the lower digit of the number of credits. This process determines whether or not the D1 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 2a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", determines "Yes" and proceeds to step S513. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digit of the number of credits, the process proceeds to step S508.

In step S508, the acquired number data is read and stored in the A register. Here, in the acquired number data, the payout number data is stored at the timing when the medal is paid out based on the winning of the small winning combination. Further, at the timing when the setting is being changed, the setting changing display data "88 (H)" is stored. Furthermore, when it is time to instruct the specified number, the specified number display data "0B (H)" is stored. Further, the push order instruction number "= x (any of x = 1 to 6)" is stored at the timing when the instruction function is activated (notifying the push order). Then, any one of these data is acquired and stored in the A register.

In the next step S509, it is determined whether or not the error is displayed. In this process, the B register value (error number display data stored in step S497) is read, it is determined whether or not it is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that an error is displayed and step S510. If it is "0", it is determined that the error is not displayed, and the process proceeds to step S511.
In step S510, the LED segment table 1 for displaying an error is set. The specific configuration of the LED segment table 1 will not be described. In step S510, a process of storing the start address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register is executed. Therefore, in this case, the start address of the LED segment table 1 is set (stored in the HL register) instead of the start address of the LED segment table 2 set in step S501.

In the next step S511, the offset for the upper digit is acquired. In this process, when an error is displayed (when the B register value is not "0"), the operation of dividing the B register value by "10 (D)" is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is obtained. Is stored in the E register. On the other hand, when the error is not displayed (when the B register value is "0"), the A register value (payout number data, setting changing display data, instruction specified number display data, or push order instruction number) is set to "10 (" The operation of dividing by "D)" is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the E register.

In the next step S512, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 3a) of the D register value is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S514, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S513.

Proceeding to step S513, the offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the E register in the A register. That is, the upper digit value and the lower digit value are exchanged in the A register and the E register. Then, the process proceeds to step S514.
In step S514, segment data is acquired. In this process, the data stored in the HL register (the start address of the LED segment table 1 or 2) and the data stored in the A register (offset value) are added, and the address corresponds to the added address (LED segment). This is a process of storing the segment data (of Table 1 or 2) in the C register.

In the next step S515, the segment data for the output port 4 is set. The data set here is the segment data for displaying the set value (digit 5b). Since the digits 1b to 4b are lit in the ratio display process (step S522) described later, the segment data of the digits 1b to 4b are not set here.
Therefore, in step S515, “Yes” (with a setting value display request) is set in step S503, and when the segment data for displaying the set value is acquired in step S514 and stored in the C register, the C register value is output. Set as segment data for port 4.

Next, the process proceeds to step S516, and it is determined whether or not there is a display request for digit 5. Here, the display request for digit 5 is made when the D register value is "00010000 (B)". If it is determined that there is a display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that there is no display request for digit 5, the process proceeds to step S517.

In step S517, the segment data for the output port 3 is set. Here, the C register value stored in step S514 is set as the segment data for the output port 3. When “Yes” in step S516 (when there is a display request for digit 5), the data set in step S498 becomes the segment data for the output port 3.

In the next step S518, the data of the advantageous section display LED 77 is set. Here, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the value is “0”. When the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the digit lit by the interrupt processing this time is the digit 4a. When the D3 bit of the D register value is "1", it is determined that the digit 4a is lit. In this case, the segment data set in step S517 and the data obtained by ORing "10000000" are set as the segment data for the output port 3. As a result, data that can turn on the segment P (advantageous section display LED77) of the digit 4a is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S519, and the segment data for the output port 4 set in step S515 is cleared. This is to prevent the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) from being turned on when there is no display request for the digit 5 (when "No" is set in step S516).
Then, the process proceeds to step S520, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment signal is output from the output port 3. Here, the D register value is set as the digit data of the output port 2 and output from the output port 2.
The segment signal data output from the output port 3 is the data set in step S498 (when the digits 5 are lit) or the data set in step S517 (when the digits 1 to 4 are lit).

Next, the process proceeds to step S521, and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. The segment signal data output from the output port 4 is the segment data set in step S515 (when there is a set value display request) or the data cleared in step S519 (when there is no set value display request). In other words, when the segment data for the output port 4 is cleared in step S519, "0000000000 (B)" is output from the output port 4.
Next, the process proceeds to step S522, and the process proceeds to the ratio display process (process for turning on the management information display LED 74). In this embodiment, the description of the ratio display process will be omitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Next, the relationship between the advantageous section display LED 77 and the power failure (when a power failure occurs while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit) will be described.
In the interrupt process, if a power failure is detected in FIG. 54, the process proceeds to the process of step S483 and subsequent steps. In this case, the data stored in the RWM 53 is retained even after the power is turned off.
Then, after the power is turned on, in the program start process (M_PRG_START) of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is off, it is determined as "No" in step S208. Proceed to the power supply cutoff / recovery process (M_POWER_ON; FIG. 40) of S213.

In the power supply cutoff / recovery process of FIG. 40, the initialization range of the RWM53 is set in step S253, and this range is an unused area of the RWM53 as described above. Therefore, in FIG. 35, the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062 (H)” is not subject to initialization. The same applies to the LED display counter at the address "F051 (H)".

In the power supply cutoff / recovery process of FIG. 40, when the initialization of the RWM53 is completed, an interrupt is activated in step S262. Therefore, after step S262, the interrupt processing of FIG. 53 is executed at intervals of 2.235 ms. When the interrupt process is executed, the LED display counter value is read in step S496 during the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55. Further, when "No" in step S512, there is a display request for digit 4a. In this case, when the error is not displayed (“No” in step S509) and the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the D7 bit of the segment data is set to “1” in step S518, and the segment is set to “1”. Data is output (step S520). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
As described above, when the power is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again when the interrupt process is executed in the power off / return process.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on after the power is turned off, the result is as follows.
In the program start process of FIG. 38, when the setting key switch is on, it becomes “Yes” in step S208, and the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET; FIG. 39) of step S212.
In FIG. 39, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is specified in step S221, and this initialization range also includes the advantageous section display LED flag of the address “F062 (H)”. When it is determined that the power supply / disconnection / recovery is not normal and the process proceeds to step S223, the entire range of the RWM53 (including the address “F062 (H)”) is initialized.

Therefore, by initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, even if "1" indicating lighting is stored up to that point, it becomes "0" indicating turning off.
After that, in step S233 of FIG. 39, an interrupt is activated. When the interrupt is activated, in the LED display control (FIG. 55), the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 when the lighting timing of the set value display LED 73 comes. Then, in FIG. 39, when the process proceeds to step S240, the set value can be changed (the set value is changed when the setting change switch is turned on).

Further, in FIG. 39, when the interrupt process is activated in step S233 and the LED display control (FIG. 55) is executed, the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is already "" even when the lighting timing of the digit 4a is reached. Since it is "0", the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.
As described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on and the process shifts to the setting change process, the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light up. Further, even if the setting change process is completed and the process shifts to the main process, the advantageous section display LED 77 remains off.

Further, in the main process of FIG. 41, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and the power is cut off during the loop from step S286 to step S289, that is, during the rotation of the reel 31, the following occurs. ..
When a power failure is detected in the interrupt process, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so that the drive signal of the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the rotating reel 31 (motor 32) also stops when the power is cut off.

Next, when the power is supplied, the state before the power is turned off is restored through the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the same drive signal of the motor 32 as before the power was cut off is output from the output port 52. Here, the drive signal of the motor 32 before the power is turned off is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state. In the present embodiment, in the constant speed state of the motor 32 (reel 31), one interrupt (2.235 ms) is used for one-step drive. However, even if a drive signal in a constant speed state is output to the motor 32 after the drive is stopped, the rotation torque is weak and the motor 32 cannot be driven.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the index sensor 33 does not detect the index of the reel 31 (does not cut the index). When it is determined that the index is not detected for a certain period of time, it is determined that the reel 31 is not rotating, and the motor 32 is re-accelerated (restarted). The acceleration of the motor 32 is, for example, first 20 interrupts (20 × 2.235 = 44.7 ms) for 1 step drive, then 16 interrupts for 1 step drive, then 12 interrupts for 1 step drive, and so on. It is a method of gradually driving one step in a short time. The accelerated state requires, for example, about 100 steps. As a result, the rotation of the reel 31 can be started.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on and the interrupt is activated in step S262 in FIG. 40, the digits 1a to 5a are dynamically lit based on the value of the LED display counter, but the first LED display counter after the interrupt is activated is the digit. When the value for lighting 3a (“00000100 (B)” in FIG. 34), the LED display counter becomes “00001000 (B)” after 4 interrupts from that point, and the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED77) is lit. The timing is coming.

On the other hand, the power is turned off before the index of the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33 (for example, when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 in the remaining "1" to several steps), and after the power is turned on. Even if it is determined that the index of the reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33 and re-acceleration is performed, as described above, at least several tens of interruptions are required before the reel 31 (motor 32) reaches the constant speed state. It takes.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, the reel 31 is in the constant speed state after the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. That is, when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.

Further, when the reel 31 is stopped at a position where the index of the reel 31 is relatively far from the reel sensor 33, several to several tens of interrupts are interrupted after the interrupt is activated until the reel sensor 33 determines that the index of the reel 31 is not detected. Needs. Therefore, in this case, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the motor 32 is reaccelerated.
As described above, the advantageous section display LED 77 is set to light up after the reel 31 rerotates and returns to the constant speed state after returning from the power failure.

Further, in the main process of FIG. 41, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, and when the power is cut off while the hopper motor 36 is being driven in the medal payout process by winning in step S294, the following occurs. .. As described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor.
In the medal payout process by winning a prize shown in FIG. 49, in step S398, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and each of the payout sensors 37a and 37b normally detects the movable piece 39a as shown in FIG. 7 (in FIG. 8). , S31 to S34), it is determined that one medal has been normally paid out. Then, the hopper motor 36 continues to drive until it is determined that medals corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out have been paid out.
If a power failure is detected in the interrupt process before all medals are paid out during the payout of medals, all the output ports 52 are turned off in step S483 in FIG. 54, so that the hopper motor 36 The drive signal is also turned off. As a result, the medal payout process is interrupted.

Next, when the power is supplied, the process returns to step S294 (medal payout process by winning a prize) of the main process (FIG. 41) through the power return process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 40 described above. As a result, the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is output from the output port 52 in the same manner as before the power was cut off. As shown in FIG. 41, the main process does not proceed until the payout process by winning in step S294 is completed.
On the other hand, when the power is restored from the power failure, the lighting timing of the digit 4a (advantageous section display LED77) arrives within 4 interrupts as described above.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8, the time required to pay out one medal cannot be unconditionally stated, but it takes about 100 ms. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before returning to the medal payout process by winning a prize from the power failure and before paying out the remaining medals. In other words, when the medal payout process for winning a prize is completed after returning from the power failure, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit at that time.

Further, as a method of preventing the advantageous section display LED 77 from being turned off for a moment when the power supply is momentarily interrupted, the following method can be mentioned.
As shown in FIG. 54, when a power failure is detected, the outputs of all the ports 52 are turned off in step S483. Therefore, after this process, the digit signal from the output port 2 and the segment signal from the output port 3 are turned off. Is not output. As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77, which is the segment P of the digit 4a, is turned off.

Therefore, after proceeding to step S488 of FIG. 54 and waiting for reset, when the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, an on signal of D3 bit (digit 4a) is output from the output port 2 and the ON signal is output. It is possible to output a D7 bit (segment P) on signal from the output port 3. In FIG. 54, the interrupt processing does not occur in the loop processing after proceeding to step S488 and waiting for the reset, so that the advantageous section display LED 77 in this case is always lit (static lighting). As a result, even if a momentary interruption occurs, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be apparently prevented from turning off.
Alternatively, in FIG. 54, in the process of step S483, the output ports 2 and 3 may not be turned off, but the other output ports may be turned off. Even with this control, the advantageous section display LED 77 can be prevented from turning off due to a momentary interruption.

In the present embodiment, the segment P of the digit 4a is set to the advantageous section display LED 77, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit by dynamic lighting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section display LED 77 may be composed of separate and independent LEDs. Then, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is statically turned on and the output port corresponding to the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned off even when a power failure is detected, the advantageous section display LED 77 is prevented from being turned off at the time of a momentary interruption. can do.

Next, the difference number display on the sub control board 80 side will be described. The sub-control board 80 displays the difference number of images on the image display device 23 during AT. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 is provided with the following storage area.
Provides the following:
1) AT flag 2) Sub difference number counter 3) Pullback flag 4) Pullback game count counter

The main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to each game and AT flag on / off to the sub control board 80. The command may be transmitted only when the AT flag on the main control board 50 side is changed from off to on and when the AT flag is changed from on to off.
The sub-control board 80 receives information on turning on / off the AT flag from the main control board 50, and turns on / off the AT flag provided on the sub-control board 80 side. Further, the sub-control board 80 stores that the AT flag on the sub-control board 80 side is turned from off to on (AT flag rising data) and that it is turned off from on (AT flag falling data). ..

Further, as described above, the main control board 50 updates the AT game count counter every game during AT, and ends AT when the AT game count counter becomes “0”. Further, when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", AT (and the advantageous section) is terminated.
Since the main control board 50 executes the initialization process of the difference counter when the AT and the advantageous section are ended, the difference counter becomes "0" when the next game shifts to the normal section.

On the other hand, the sub control board 80 includes a sub difference number counter that counts the difference number during AT. The sub-difference number counter is "0" at the start of the AT (except when the AT is won and the AT is started during the pullback period described later), and after that, the difference number is updated every game. When a carry is generated, unlike the difference counter of the main control board 50, the carry is not corrected to "0", and the carry is left as it is.

For example, when AT is started
1st game: Non-winning role (difference number "-3")
2nd game: No role won (difference number "-3")
3rd game: Winning the push order bell (difference number "+5")
4th game: No role won (difference number "-3")
5th game: Winning of push order bell (difference number "+5")
Suppose it was.
In this case, the sub-difference number counter (2-byte counter) is
1st game: 0 (H) -3 (H) = FFFD (H)
2nd game: FFFD (H) -3 (H) = FFFA (H)
Third game: FFFA (H) +5 (H) = FFFF (H)
4th game: FFFF (H) -3 (H) = FFFC (H)
5th game: FFFC (H) + 5 (H) = 0001 (H)
Will be updated.

When the replay is won, the sub-difference number counter is not updated like the difference counter. Not limited to this, in the game at the time of winning the replay, the number of payouts may be set to "0", and the number of bets in the next game (at the time of replay) may be set to "0" to calculate the sub-difference number.
Further, as described above, the difference counter of the main control board 50 executes the initialization process when the advantageous section ends, but the sub difference number counter of the sub control means 80 sets AT (advantageous section). Even if it ends, there is a case where the initialization process is not executed immediately and the count does not stop. The sub control board 80 turns on the pullback flag (“1”) when the AT is terminated and the count of the sub difference number counter is continued.

The sub control board 80 determines the sub difference number counter value at the end of AT, and when the sub difference number counter value is less than (or less than) a predetermined value (for example, "2000 (D)"), the sub difference number counter. Continue counting. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds (or is greater than or equal to) the predetermined value, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. When the sub-difference number counter approaches the upper limit and the AT ends, when the AT is pulled back, the sub-difference counter value may reach the upper limit immediately. In such a case, , Do not take over the difference number to the next AT.

The pullback flag is a flag for determining whether the AT has been pulled back (whether or not it has been re-winned) within a predetermined number of games (“50” games in this embodiment) after the end of the AT.
At the end of AT, the pullback flag is turned on and "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game counter. The pullback game count counter is for counting the number of games (during the pullback period) after the end of AT. At the end of the AT, "50 (D)" is set in the pullback game count counter, and after that, if the AT is not won, "1" is continuously subtracted for each game. Then, when the pullback game count counter becomes "0", the AT pullback fails, the pullback flag is turned off, and the sub difference number counter is cleared (initialized).
Then, the sub control board 80 updates the sub difference number counter when the pullback flag is on after the end of AT.

In addition, when a special role such as BB is won and a special game such as a BB game is executed during the pullback period (when the pullback flag is on), the pullback game count counter is subtracted (updated) during the special game. )do not do.
On the other hand, if the AT is won before the pullback game count counter becomes "0", the AT is successfully pulled back, and in the subsequent AT, the number of sheets inheriting the difference number of the previous AT is displayed as an image.
For example
Difference number of sheets in the first AT: +1000 sheets Difference number of sheets from the end of the first AT to winning the second AT: -100 sheets, the difference number of sheets at the start of the second AT is "+900 sheets" The image is displayed.

In addition, an upper limit value that can be counted by the sub-difference number counter is set. In this embodiment, it is set as follows.
1) Upper limit during AT: 2414 (D)
2) The upper limit value when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is stopped during AT and the number of sheets (expected difference number) that can be acquired in the special game related to the special role is "250 (D)": "2414 (D) ) -250 (D) = 2164 (D) "
3) Upper limit during the withdrawal period: 2000 (D)

As shown in 1) above, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2414 (D)" during AT, the counting of more sub-difference sheets is stopped and the sub-difference number counter is cleared.
In the present embodiment, the sub-difference number counter value and the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 are linked (matched). For example, when the sub-difference number counter becomes "1000 (D)" during AT, an image is displayed on the image display device 23 as "Number acquired during AT: 1000".

As described above, when the difference counter of the main control board 50 exceeds "2400 (D)", AT (and the advantageous section) is terminated. Therefore, as described above, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2414 (D)".
Therefore, with respect to the sub-difference number counter on the sub-control board 80 side, the maximum value that can be counted is set to "2414 (D)" according to the difference counter of the main control board 50.
Since the maximum value of the sub-difference number counter is "2414 (D)", the maximum difference number displayed on the image display device 23 is "2414". As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive difference in the number of images from being displayed, and to prevent an image display that significantly arouses gambling.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), when the number of cards that can be acquired in the BB game is 250, the BB is won during AT and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is used. When is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter value at that time is determined. Then, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds the above-mentioned "2164 (D)", it exceeds "2414 (D)" at the end of the BB game, so that the sub-difference occurs when the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed. Clear the number counter (2 above)).

In this case, the image display device 23 displays images such as "Congratulations" and "Congratulations" as image displays corresponding to the difference in the number of images. In this way, instead of displaying "Congratulations" or the like from the start of the BB game, the sub difference number counter is not cleared at the start of the BB game, and the sub difference number is exceeded until "2414 (D)" is exceeded. The counter may be continuously counted, and when "2414 (D)" is exceeded, the sub-difference number counter may be cleared and an image such as "Congratulations" may be displayed.

Furthermore, the difference may increase during the pullback period. For example, the difference counter value may increase as a result of winning a special role during the pullback period and digesting the special game.
In particular, if the specification is such that the AT is won when a specific BB is won, the AT shifts to the AT after the end of the BB game. On the other hand, when the sub-difference number counter is close to the upper limit value at the end of the BB game, the upper limit value is reached immediately even if the difference number is taken over by the AT after the end of the BB game. Therefore, when the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" during the pullback period, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. For example, if the BB with AT is won during the AT pullback period and the BB game is digested, and the sub-difference number counter value exceeds "2000 (D)" at the end of the final game of the BB game, Clear the sub-difference number counter. As a result, in the AT after the end of BB, the display of the difference number starts from "0".

As described above, even if the game shifts to the special game during the pullback period, the pullback game number counter is not subtracted during the special game. Then, when the special combination is won during the pullback period, the update of the sub-difference number counter may be continued or interrupted during the special game. As an example of interrupting the update, for example, when the BB with AT is won when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter value is set to "1000 (D)". Stop at. Then, even if "250" cards are acquired in the subsequent BB game, these "250" cards are not added to the sub-difference number counter. Therefore, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number starts from "1000".

On the other hand, as an example of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1000 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, " When "250" is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "1250 (D)". Then, when the game shifts to AT after the end of the BB game, the difference number starts from "1250".
Further, in the case of continuing to update the sub-difference number counter, for example, when the sub-difference number counter value during the pullback period is "1800 (D)", the BB with AT is won, and in the subsequent BB game, "250". When the number of cards is acquired, the sub-difference number counter at the end of the BB game becomes "2050 (D)", which exceeds "2000 (D)". Therefore, the sub-difference number counter is cleared by the end of the BB game, and the display of the difference number starts from "0" at the AT after the end of the BB game.

Further, the sub-difference number counter may update the difference number of the game regardless of the number of bets, but in the present embodiment, the difference of the game is limited to when the game is started with a predetermined number. Update the number of sheets.
Here, the difference counter of the main control board 50 is updated regardless of the number of bets in the game.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition for updating the sub-difference number counter is determined to be when the number of bets (specified number) is "3", and when the game is started with the number of bets (specified number) "2". Does not update the difference number in that game.

Next, the sub-difference number counter management process will be described with reference to a flowchart.
56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the sub-difference number counter management process according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart following FIG. 56.
In step S531 of FIG. 56, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (whether or not it is currently in AT). When it is determined that the AT flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S532.

In step S532, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S533, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when non-AT is in progress and the pullback flag is off, the sub-difference number counter is not updated.

In the next step S533, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not a bet command has been received from the main control board 50. When the start switch 41 is operated and the bet number of the game is determined, the main control board 50 transmits a bet command capable of determining the bet number of the game to the sub control board 80. When it is determined that this bet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S534.

In step S534, it is determined whether or not the number of bets (specified number) is "3" based on the received bet command. When it is determined that the number of bets is "3", the process proceeds to step S535, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "3", the process according to this flowchart ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-difference number counter is updated only when the number of bets is "3". Therefore, even during the AT or the withdrawal period, when the number of bets is other than "3", the sub-difference number counter is not updated in the game. As is clear from FIGS. 51 and 52, the difference counter on the main control board 50 side is updated regardless of the number of bets (specified number) in the game.

When the process proceeds from step S534 to step S535, the sub control board 80 subtracts the number of bets (“3”) from the sub difference number counter. Next, the process proceeds to step S536, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the payout command has been received. During the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, after the display determination is performed in step S291, the main control board 50 transmits a payout command capable of determining the number of payouts to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S536 that the payout command has been received, the process proceeds to step S537, and the sub control board 80 adds the payout number to the sub difference number counter.
In the next step S538, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is on. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S539, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S547 in FIG. 57.

In step S539, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is turned on in this game (whether or not the rise of the AT flag is turned on). When it is determined that the AT flag is turned on in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S540, and when it is determined that the AT flag is not turned on (the rise of the AT flag is off) in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S543. Therefore, the process from step S539 to step S543 is performed at the time of AT from before the previous game.

In step S540, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S541, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. For example, when the AT flag is turned on (“Yes” in step S539) and the pullback flag is off (“No” in step S540, that is, when the pullback period is not in progress) in this game, the number of sub-differences is at this point. Since the counter is "0", it is not necessary to update the sub-difference number counter, so the process according to this flowchart ends.

Proceeding from step S540 to step S541, the sub-control board 80 turns off the pullback flag. In the next step S542, the sub control board 80 clears the pullback game count counter. Here, when "Yes" in step S539 and "Yes" in step S540, it corresponds to the case where the AT is won during the pullback period. Therefore, in this case, the pullback flag is turned off and the pullback game count counter is cleared.
Next, the process proceeds to step S543, and the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value “2414 (D)”. When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546. Then, in step S546, the sub-difference number counter is cleared. This may occur when the difference number increases during the pullback period after the end of AT and the sub difference number counter exceeds "2414 (D)".

On the other hand, in step S543, when it is determined that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2414 (D)", the process proceeds to step S544, and the sub-control board 80 stops and displays the symbol combination corresponding to BB in this game. Judge whether or not. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the command is transmitted from the main control board 50.
"Yes" in step S544 is when the BB with AT is won during the pullback period. In this flowchart, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed in the game in which the BB is won.
When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is stopped and displayed, the process proceeds to step S545, and when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the BB is not stopped and displayed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S545, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)", the process proceeds to step S546, the sub-difference number counter is cleared as described above, and the process according to this flowchart is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S545 that the sub-difference number counter does not exceed "2164 (D)", the process according to this flowchart ends (maintaining the sub-difference number counter value).

As described above, when the BB game of the present embodiment ends with a payout of more than 250 cards as shown in FIG. 26 (9th embodiment), the sub-difference number counter is set to "2164 (D)" at the start of the BB game. If it exceeds, it will exceed "2414 (D)" (upper limit value) by the final game of the BB game. Therefore, in the example of this flowchart, at the start of the BB game (before the start), it is determined whether or not the sub-difference number counter exceeds the upper limit value during the BB game, and when it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded, the BB game is played. The sub-difference number counter is cleared before the start. Since the difference number of images displayed on the image display device 23 is based on the sub-difference number counter, the difference number itself is not displayed or the difference is displayed in the BB game after the sub-difference number counter is cleared. Instead of displaying the number of sheets, for example, "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" is displayed.

When it is determined in step S538 that the AT flag is not on and the process proceeds to step S547 of FIG. 57, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the AT flag is turned off in this game (whether or not the fall of the AT flag is on). That is, whether or not the AT has ended in this game) is determined. If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned off in the game this time, the process proceeds to step S548, and if it is determined that the AT flag has not been turned off in the game this time (the fall of the AT flag is off), the process proceeds to step S551. ..

In step S548, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S557.

In step S549, the sub-control board 80 turns on the pullback flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S550, and the sub-control board 80 sets the initial value “50 (D)” in the pullback game number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
When the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" at the end of AT by the above steps S548 to S550, the pullback flag is turned on and the initial value of the number of pullback games is "50 (D)". To set. The reason why "50 (D)" is set as the initial value of the number of pullback games is that the AT pullback within 50 games is set as the continuous AT (condition for passing the sub-difference number to the next AT). Therefore, the number of pullback games is not limited to "50 (D)" but can be set variously such as "30 (D)" and "100 (D)" according to the specifications.
Further, if the sub-difference number counter is "2000 (D)" or more at the end of AT, even if the AT is pulled back after that, the sub-difference number counter may exceed the upper limit value during the AT after pulling back. Is high, so in such a case, the pullback flag is not set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S548 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)" and the process proceeds to step S557, the sub-control board 80 clears the sub-difference number counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. In other words, when the sub-difference number counter is "2000 (D)" or more at the end of AT, the sub-difference number counter starts from the initial value "0" even if the AT is subsequently transferred.

Further, when proceeding from step S547 to step S551, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the game is operating BB (during BB game) this time. The information on the operating state flag shown in FIG. 35 is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is not operating, the process proceeds to step S552, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S553, the pullback game count counter is subtracted by "1". In other words, during the pullback period, when the BB is operating (BB game is in progress), the pullback game count counter is not updated (subtracted). Not limited to this, the pullback game count counter may be subtracted even during the BB game during the pullback period.
In the next step S554, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback game count counter has become “0”. When it is determined that the pullback game count counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback game count counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S555.

In step S555, the pullback flag is turned off. In the next step S556, the pullback game count counter is cleared. When "Yes" in step S554, the pullback game count counter is "0", so the process of clearing the pullback game count counter in step S556 may be omitted. However, when the result is "No" in step S560, which will be described later, the pullback game count counter is cleared via step S556.
Next, the process proceeds to step S557, and the sub control board 80 clears the sub difference number counter. In this way, when the pullback flag is off and the pullback game count counter is "0" (clear), the sub difference number counter is cleared (set to "0"), and then "0" is set until AT starts. maintain.

When it is determined in step S551 that the BB is operating and the process proceeds to step S558, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the game this time is the final game during the BB operation (BB game). Whether or not it is the final game of the BB game may be determined by calculating the number of payouts from the start of the BB game on the sub control board 80 side, or is transmitted from the main control board 50. You may make a judgment based on the command that comes.
When it is determined that it is the final game of the BB game, the process proceeds to step S559, and when it is determined that it is not the final game, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S559, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the pullback flag is on. When it is determined that the pullback flag is on, the process proceeds to step S560, and when it is determined that the pullback flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S560, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the sub difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)". When it is determined that the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S561 and the pullback game number counter is reset to "50 (D)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. As a result, the BB game is executed when the pullback flag is on, and when the sub-difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game, the pullback period (50 games) from the next game is performed again. ) Will be newly set. That is, when the number of pullback games is set to the initial value "50" after the end of AT, the BB game is executed during the pullback period, and the difference number counter is less than "2000 (D)" in the final game of the BB game. , The number of pullback games is reset to "50".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S560 that the sub-difference number counter is not less than "2000 (D)", the process proceeds to step S555. In step S555 and later, the pullback flag is turned off, the pullback game count counter is cleared, and the sub difference number counter is cleared. This ends the withdrawal period. In this way, in the final game of the BB game, when the pullback period is in progress, the number of sub differences at that time is determined, and when the number of sub differences is "2000 (D)" or more, the pullback period ends. ..

In the above sub-difference number counter management, the sub-difference number counter is updated at the timing when the bet command is received. That is, the number of sub-differences is updated before all reels 31 are stopped. On the other hand, since the difference counter is executed by the advantageous section counter management of the game end check process, the subtraction of the number of bets is also executed after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, as for the sub-difference number counter, the subtraction of the bet number and the addition of the payout number may be executed after all the reels 31 are stopped, as in the difference counter.

Further, the sub-difference number counter stores the value (decreased value) even if the difference number at the end of the game becomes negative (even if a carry occurs). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the difference number counter, when the sub difference number counter is negative at the end of the game (when a carry occurs), it may be corrected to "0".
Furthermore, even if the specifications are such that the sub-difference number counter may be negative, the difference number "0" is displayed on the image display device 23.

In this case, processing can be described as follows.
As described above, the sub-difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, and its upper limit is "2414 (D)", that is, "096E (H)". Therefore, the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not a carry has occurred by determining whether or not the value of the most significant digit is "0 (H)". Then, when it is determined that a carry has occurred (the value of the most significant digit is not "0 (H)"), the difference number displayed on the image display device 23 may be set to "0".

Further, in the examples of FIGS. 56 and 57, BB is taken as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus (AT that looks like a bonus (BB)) can be similarly applied. The sub-bonus sets the number of games, the number of payouts, or the difference number as the end condition. In this case, in step S544, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus symbol has been stopped and displayed. Further, in step S551, it is determined whether or not the sub-bonus game is in progress. Furthermore, in step S558, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the sub-bonus game.

<12th Embodiment>
Subsequently, the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined number (number of bets) is instructed before the start of the game.
The display of the push order instruction information is the operation of the instruction function (process related to the instruction function). Here, the "instruction function" is a device that facilitates winning a prize. Therefore, the specified number of instructions is not the operation of the instruction function (process related to the instruction function). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specified number of instructions may be defined as one of the processes related to the instruction function.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a bonus condition device, a specified number for each RT, and a winning number in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58 (A), BB1 and BB2 are provided as accessory condition devices (special combinations). When the BB1 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB1 is stopped, the game shifts to the BB1 game. The BB1 game ends with a payout of more than 100 cards. After the end of the BB1 game, it shifts to non-RT.
Further, when the BB2 is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 is stopped, the game shifts to the BB2 game. The BB2 game ends with a payout of more than 30 cards. After the end of the BB2 game, it shifts to non-RT.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the RT includes non-RT, inside BB1, inside BB2, during BB1 operation, and during BB2 operation.
Non-RT continues until either BB1 or BB2 is elected. If you win BB1 in non-RT, you will move to the inside of BB1, and if you win BB2, you will move to inside BB2.
Inside the BB1, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB1 continues until the stop display is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is stopped inside the BB1, the game shifts to the BB1 operation, that is, the BB1 game. Similarly, inside the BB2, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 continues until the stop display is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is stopped inside the BB2, the game shifts to the BB2 operation, that is, the BB2 game.
In addition, the special role that can carry over the winning is limited to one. Therefore, BB2 is not won when it is inside BB1. Similarly, when inside BB2, BB1 is not won.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), the specified number is limited to "3" during BB1 operation and BB2 operation (when the accessory is operating). The game cannot be started with the number of bets "1" or "2".
On the other hand, the specified number in the non-RT, the inside of the BB1 and the inside of the BB2 when the accessory is not operating is "2" or "3". As a result, the game can be started if the specified number is either "2" or "3".
In FIG. 58 (C), the internal lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "65536". For example, the winning probability of winning number "1" (normal replay) in non-RT is "9000/65536". In addition, the advantageous section lottery number indicates the number when the denominator is "16384". Therefore, when the number of advantageous section lottery is "16384", it means that the advantageous section is won with a probability of "16384/16384".
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the non-RT, BB2 is drawn by the specified number "2", but BB1 is not drawn. On the contrary, when the specified number is "3", BB1 is drawn but BB2 is not drawn.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the non-RT specified number "3" or the specified number "3" inside the BB2, the lottery of the advantageous section is possible. Then, in the lottery of the advantageous section, it is set so that the advantageous section is always won except when the winning combination is not won. Therefore, in the twelfth embodiment, it is possible to make the game section a substantially advantageous section. In other words, the twelfth embodiment is the above-mentioned "7P" type specification.

In the twelfth embodiment, it is assumed that the game proceeds inside the BB2 and in the specified number "3". Then, the AT is drawn inside the BB2, and when the AT is won, the AT is executed. Furthermore, it is assumed that BB2, which has carried over the winning, will not be awarded.
For example, if it is non-RT at the present time, it is necessary to move from non-RT to inside BB2 (winning BB2 in non-RT). In order to win BB2 in non-RT, it is necessary to play a game with a specified number "2".
Therefore, in the case of non-RT at the present time, the game is played with the specified number "2" to win the BB2, and the game is transferred to the inside of the BB2 from the next game. Further, since the lottery for the advantageous section inside the BB2 is received when the specified number is "3", the game proceeds with the specified number "3" inside the BB2.

Further, the BB2 won by the specified number "2" cannot stop and display the symbol combination unless the specified number is "2". Similarly, the BB1 won by the specified number "3" cannot stop and display the symbol combination on the valid line unless the specified number is "3".
Therefore, when the player wins BB2 with the specified number "2" in non-RT, shifts to the inside of BB2, and proceeds with the game with the specified number "3", BB2 even when the winning combination is not won. The symbol combination corresponding to is not stopped and displayed on the effective line.
As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the special combination is not a specification for stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special combination and shifting to the special game and increasing the medals in the special game, but the special combination is for carrying over the winning. In other words, it is for creating the inside of the BB.

As shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the non-RT, since the BB2 can be won with a probability of about "1/5", it is possible to move from the non-RT to the inside of the BB2 at an early stage.
Also, inside BB2, when a small role or replay is won, there is a 100% chance that the advantageous section will be won. Therefore, in BB2, most of the game period is an advantageous section. Of course, it is also possible to set the winning probability of the advantageous section to less than 100%.

Further, the instruction function can be activated (the process related to the instruction function is executed) only when the game is played with one specified number, particularly the specified number "3" in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the AT is won during the advantageous section inside the BB2 and the AT is executed, when the game is started with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won, the instruction function is activated. , The push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. On the other hand, when the game is started with the specified number (number of bets) "2" during AT, the instruction function is not activated even when the push order bell is won.

Further, as in the eleventh embodiment, even when the game is played with the specified number "2" during AT, the difference counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the game, and the difference counter is updated. Update the advantageous section clear counter. However, the AT game count counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) is not updated. On the other hand, when the game is played with the specified number "3" during AT, the difference counter, the advantageous section clear counter, and the AT game count counter (in the case of the difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter) Update about everything.
In addition, regardless of the specified number, RT is always transferred when the transition condition is satisfied (when the symbol combination satisfying the transition condition is stopped and displayed). On the other hand, regarding the main game state (usually, CZ, AT, etc.), any specified number may be set so that the game can be transferred, or the game is played with one specified number (for example, "3"). It may be set so that it can be migrated only when it is used.

Inside the BB2, if the player starts the game with the specified number "2" due to an operation error and the winning combination is not won in the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 carrying over the winning can be stopped and displayed. It becomes. On the other hand, if a player starts a game with a specified number of "2" due to an operation error and wins one of the winning combinations in the game, the winning combination in the game is prioritized. The symbol combination corresponding to BB2 that has won is not stopped and displayed. However, when the replay is won in the game, the next game will also be played with the number of bets "2", so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning BB2 will be stopped and displayed in the next game as well. there is a possibility.

If the game is started inside the BB2 and at the AT with the specified number "2" and the symbol combination corresponding to the BB2 is stopped and displayed, the BB2 game is started. Then, when the BB2 game is completed, the process shifts to non-RT (AT). Then, in this non-RT, the information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the player is notified that the game should be performed with the specified number "2" (instruction of the specified number). .. This is because the game is played with the specified number "2", the BB2 is won, and the game is transferred to the inside of the BB2. Therefore, in AT and non-RT, the specified number "2" is instructed until BB2 is won.

As described above, when the information corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, "0A" is displayed. The instruction of the specified number "2" is not limited to "0A", and is not confused with any of the number of payouts, the setting changing display "88", the error number, and the push order instruction information. It may be. For example, since the maximum number of medals displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is "15", for example, "22" may be displayed as information corresponding to the specified number "2".

Further, in the present embodiment, the specified number is specified only during AT, and the specified number is not specified during non-AT. For example, in the case of shifting to non-RT after the end of the BB2 game, if it is not AT at that time, the specified number is not specified. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary for the player to play the game by himself / herself with the specified number "2" and transfer the game to the inside of the BB2.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the case of non-RT and non-advantageous section, if the game is played with the specified number "3" and the small winning combination or replay is won, the advantageous section is also won. Then, when it becomes a non-RT and advantageous section, the specified number "2" may be instructed (even if it is non-AT).
Further, not limited to the above, when shifting to non-RT, the specified number "2" may be instructed regardless of AT / non-AT and advantageous section / non-advantageous section.

Further, in the non-RT, when the player sets the bet number to "2", the specified number may not be specified, and when the player sets the bet number to "3", the specified number may be specified. In the main process of FIG. 41, the number of bets is determined in the medal management process of step S276, but when it is determined that the current number of bets is "2", the specified number "2" is not specified. (Perform the clearing process of the acquired number data), and when the current bet number is "3", the specified number "2" can be instructed (the specified specified number display data is stored as the acquired number data). Can be mentioned.

Further, when the BB2 game is ended and the transition to the non-RT is performed, the wait process may be executed at the end of the final game of the BB2 game. During this wait process, the game cannot proceed (the main process shown in FIG. 41). Therefore, after the wait processing is completed, the process proceeds to the game start set processing of the next game (non-RT), and the specified number is instructed there.

In non-RT during AT, the instruction of the specified number "2" continues until BB2 is won. Therefore, it may be completed in one game, or it may be performed in a plurality of games.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), when the game is played with the specified number "2" in the non-RT, the replay (normal replay, watermelon play, cherry replay) may be won. When the replay is won as a result of playing the game with the specified number "2", it is optional whether or not to instruct the specified number "2" in the next game. In non-RT and AT, the specified number "2" may be instructed before the start of the game, regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped, until the BB2 is won. Alternatively, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, in the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets), so do not specify the specified number in that game. It may be.

This also applies when, for example, in non-RT and AT, as a result of playing a game with a specified number of "3", the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed. In the next game (re-game), the player cannot arbitrarily select the specified number (number of bets), so that the specified number may not be specified in this case as well. Alternatively, even if the number of bets in the game cannot be selected, the specified number "2" may be instructed for the purpose of calling attention.
In non-RT and AT, when the game is played with the specified number "2", BB2 is won, and the game shifts to the inside of BB2 from the next game, after that, unless it shifts to non-RT again, the specified number of instructions Do not do.

Further, the timing for instructing the specified number is after all the reels 31 are stopped, and after the payout process is completed when there is a payout based on the winning of a small winning combination, and the start switch 41 of the next game is operated. Before (for example, before the medal can be bet (before the bet is accepted)). Therefore, after the final game of the BB2 game is paid out based on the winning of a small winning combination, the specified number "2" is instructed before the start of the next game (non-RT) game. As shown in FIG. 42 (11th embodiment), in step S321 of the game start set process (MS_GAME_SET), the main control board 50 sets a specified number of instruction conditions when the game is non-RT and AT. Judge to meet.

Then, when it is determined in step S321 of FIG. 42 that the specified number of instruction conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S322, and "0B" is displayed in the acquired number data as the instruction specified number display data corresponding to the instruction specified number "2". (H) ”is memorized.
As a result, in the subsequent LED display control (FIG. 55), at the timing of turning on the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the upper digit in step S511 of the indicated specified number display data “0B (H)”. The offset “0 (H)” is acquired, and the segment data for displaying “0” is acquired based on the LED segment table 2 in step S514. When this segment data is output from the output port 3 in step S520, “0” is displayed in the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

Further, at the timing of turning on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78), the lower digit offset “B (H)” is acquired in step S513 of the indicated specified number display data “0B (H)”. In step S514, segment data for displaying "A" is acquired based on the LED segment table 2. When this segment data is output from the output port 3 in step S520, “A” is displayed on the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

In the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the game start set process in step S272 is a process before the bet is possible and before the start switch 41 is operated, so that the bet is possible and the start is started. Before the switch 41 is operated, the specified number of instructions is displayed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 42, after storing the indicated specified number display data as the acquired number data in step S322, the automatic bet number data is set in step S325. Therefore, when the specified number is specified in the next game at the time of winning the replay, the specified number is specified before the automatic bet is made. As a result, the player can be instructed to the specified number as soon as possible.
Further, in FIG. 41, when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S278, the acquired number data (instruction specified number display data) is cleared in step S280. As a result, in the interrupt processing after step S280, "00" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and when the game is played with the specified number "2", the instruction function is activated even during AT. It doesn't work. That is, even when the push order bell is won in the game, the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This is because, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the instruction function is limited to the specified number "3". Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated after the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 is at least until all reels 31 are stopped. The display of is "00".

On the other hand, in AT and non-RT, the information "0A" corresponding to the specified number "2" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but the game is played with the specified number "3" and the push order bell is won. When this is done, the push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This process is executed in step S284 in FIG. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in this case displays the information "0A" corresponding to the specified specified number "2" before the start of the game, and when the start switch 41 is operated (with the specified number "3"), " After displaying "00", if the push order bell is won, push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed.

Further, when the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is cleared in step S290 (after all reels are stopped) in FIG. 41. Since the acquired number data is cleared in step S280 after the operation of the start switch 41, the process of step S290 may be skipped in the game in which the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Then, when the small winning combination wins and the medal payout process by winning is executed in step S294, the winning number data is added by "1", so that the winning number display LED 78 displays the payout number accordingly. To.

Then, when proceeding to the game start set process in step S272 of the next game, as described above, when the condition for instructing the specified number is satisfied, the information corresponding to the specified number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions, the specified number of instructions display data is stored as the acquired number data, but at this point, the payout number data of the previous game may be stored as the acquired number data. Therefore, the process of clearing the acquired number data may be executed before storing the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions. For example, in FIG. 42, a process of clearing the acquired number data may be executed before step S311.

In addition, in AT and non-RT, even though the specified number "2" was instructed, the game was executed with the specified number "3", the BB1 was elected, and the game was transferred to the inside of the BB1. Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute the BB1 game.
In order to suppress such an action, for example, it is possible not to execute the process related to the instruction function inside the BB1. In addition, the BB1 game may be set so that the payout rate is less than "1" so that the number of medals cannot be increased in the BB1 game.
Since it is up to the player to decide which specified number to play, even if the specified number "3" is used in the game in which the specified number "2" is specified in AT and non-RT, the game is played. No penalty is imposed on the person.

In the above example, when the specified number is specified, the specified number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (on the main control board 50 side), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified number is acquired. In addition to displaying on the number display LED 78, the specified number of indications may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like (on the sub control board 80 side).
Here, it is mentioned that the display start timing when displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is set to be substantially the same as the display start timing (before the start of the game) for displaying the specified number of instructions on the acquired number display LED 78. Be done.
Further, the display end timing after displaying the indicated specified number on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like may be the same as or different from the display end timing after displaying the indicated specified number on the acquired number display LED 78.
The display end timing after displaying the specified number of instructions on the liquid crystal display device 23 or the like is
(1) When the start switch 41 is operated (2) When all reels 31 are stopped (3) When the start switch 41 is operated in the game of the specified number "2" (4) All reels in the game of the specified number "2" When 31 is stopped (5) After winning BB2 in a game with a specified number of "2" (6) When all reels 31 are stopped in a game with a specified number of "2" and winning in BB2.
Further, when the specified number of instructions is displayed on the dedicated display, it is possible to continue displaying the specified number of instructions on the image display device 23 or the like over a plurality of games.

<13th Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three.
On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are four each.
FIG. 59 is a front view, a plan view, and a right side view showing an outline of the configuration including the reels 31 (31A to 31D) and the stop switches 42 (42A to 42D) in the thirteenth embodiment. In the front view, the reels 31A to 31D are shown so as to be visible without being blocked by the front surface of the front door 12. Further, in the plan view, the reel 31 located behind the front surface of the front door 12 is shown so as to be visible. Further, in the right side view, the medal insertion slot 47 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 59, a control panel 12c is provided on the front surface of the front door 12, and an operation button 24 and a medal insertion slot 47 are arranged on the control panel 12c. The medal slot 47 is the same as that shown in FIG. Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the operation button 24 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80, and bidirectional communication with the sub-control board 80 is possible. For example, at least a part of the operation button 24 is formed so as to be lit, and the lighting mode of the operation button 24 can be controlled by controlling the sub-control board 80. When the operation button 24 is operated, the signal is input to the sub control board 80.
A start switch 41 and four stop switches 42A to 42D are arranged below the control panel 12c of the front door 12.

In the front view of FIG. 59, the vertical line passing through the intermediate points of the four reels 31A to 31D is defined as the line L1 (center line). The line L1 is at an intermediate position between the reels 31B and 31C. The space between the reels 31A and 31B, the space between the reels 31B and 31C, and the space between the reels 31C and 31D are all W1 (uniform). Therefore, the reels 31A and 31B and the reels 31C and 31D are arranged symmetrically with respect to the line L1.
Also, regarding the four stop switches 42A to 42D, W2 (uniform) is provided between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D. Then, the line L1 is arranged so as to pass through the intermediate position between the stop switches 42B and 42C.

Further, the gap W2 between the stop switches 42 may be the same as the gap W1 (W2 = W1), may be larger than the gap W1 (W2> W1), or may be smaller than the gap W1 (W2 <W1).
Furthermore, in the front view, the vertical line passing through the left end of the leftmost reel 31A is referred to as line L2, and the vertical line passing through the right end of the rightmost reel 31D is referred to as line L3. In this case, the leftmost stop switch 42A is arranged on the right side (closer to the center) than the line L2, and the rightmost stop switch 42D is arranged on the left side (closer to the center) than the line L3.

Further, in the front view, assuming that the distance between the reels 31 (distance between centers) is W3, the distance between the reels 31A and 31B, the space between the reels 31B and 31C, and the space between the reels 31C and 31D are all W3 (constant). Is.
If the distance between the stop switches 42 (distance between centers) is W4, the distance between the stop switches 42A and 42B, between the stop switches 42B and 42C, and between the stop switches 42C and 42D are all W4 (constant). ).

Further, as shown in the front view of FIG. 59, a part of the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged so as to intersect the line L2. However, not limited to this, the spherical body (operating portion) at the tip of the start switch 41 is arranged on the left side (outer side) of the line L2 without intersecting the line L2, or the line L2 does not intersect with the line L2. It may be placed on the right side (closer to the center) of.
Further, in the front view, the medal insertion slot 47 is arranged so that the medal insertion slot 47 and the line L4 intersect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the right side (outer side) of the line L4 so as not to intersect the line L4, for example. Alternatively, the medal insertion slot 47 may be arranged on the left side (closer to the center) of the line L4.

The operation button 24 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and the line in contact with the left end of the operation button 24 is referred to as a line L4, and the line in contact with the right end of the operation button 24 is referred to as a line L5.
In this case, in the front view, the stop switch 42A is arranged so that a part of the leftmost stop switch 42A intersects the line L4. Further, the stop switch 42D is arranged so that a part of the rightmost stop switch 42D intersects the line L5.

Further, as shown in the plan view, the index 12d is formed on the control panel 12c. The index 12d is formed by engraving, printing, or the like, and in the example of FIG. 59, it has the shape of an arrow pointing toward the stop switch 42 side. Further, the index 12d on the left side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42A (it does not matter if it deviates slightly from the center line). Further, the index 12d on the right side is arranged on the center line of the stop switch 42D (it does not matter if it deviates slightly from the center line).

With the above arrangement, the player can operate the leftmost stop switch 42A with the left end of the operation button 24 as a guide. Similarly, the rightmost stop switch 42D can be operated with the right end of the operation button 24 as a guide.
Alternatively, the player can operate the stop switch 42A with the index 12d on the left side as a guide. Similarly, the stop switch 42D can be operated with the index 12d on the right side as a guide.

When the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 are three, as shown in FIG. 58 (12th embodiment), a maximum push order of "3! = 6" can be provided. On the other hand, when there are four reels 31 and four stop switches 42, it is possible to provide a push order of "4! = 24" at the maximum.
The greater the number of push orders of the stop switch 42, the more the base during non-AT (when the accessory is not operating and during non-AT, it means the number of outs per 100 ins. For example, for 100 ins. If the number of outs is 50, the base is 50.) Can be lowered.

When the number of reels 31 and the stop switch 42 is 4, the push order bells to be drawn are 1234 bells (stop switches 42A → 42B → 42C → 42D indicate the correct push order), 1243 bells, and so on. There are 24 types of bells, 4312 bells and 4321 bells. Then, as shown in FIG. 58, if the number of winnings of each push order bell is the same, the number of winnings of each push order bell may be set to "1500". In this way, the number of winnings of each push order bell can be set to "1/4", so that the probability that the push order operated by the player matches the correct push order at the time of winning the push order bell is low. can do.

Here, when the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 is 3, the image can be displayed as "123" or "left middle right" during AT. Therefore, it is easy to intuitively understand the correct answer pressing order.
On the other hand, when the number of reels 31 and the number of stop switches 42 is 4, the following method can be mentioned as to how to notify the correct answer pressing order during AT.

For example, as the first method, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "1", "2", "3", and "4", respectively, and the order of the stop switches 42 to be operated is notified. Be done. For example, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is the order of the stop switches 42C, 42D, 42A, 42B, "3412" is notified (at least one of image display, voice display, and lamp color notification). ). Alternatively, the stop switches 42A, 42B, 42C, and 42D are set to "A", "B", "C", and "D", respectively, and in the above example, they are notified as "CDAB".

Further, as a second method, the base of the reel 31 and / or the stop switch 42 may be colored for identification.
For example, the color of the base and / or stop switch 42A of the reel 31A is white, the color of the base and / or stop switch 42B of the reel 31B is blue, and the color of the base and / or stop switch 42C of the reel 31C is yellow. The base color of the reel 31D and / or the color of the stop switch 42D is red (they are different colors). Then, in the above example, instead of the notification of "3412", the notification of "yellow, red, white, and blue" may be performed (at least one of the image display, the voice display, and the lamp color notification).

Furthermore, as a third method, among the stop switches 42 to be operated from the first to the fourth, the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated at the fourth (last) is darkened (or concealed). Can be mentioned. In this case, "brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated first> brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated second ≥ corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third. Image brightness ≧ Image brightness corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated fourth ”.
Then, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is darkened (or hidden), and the image corresponding to the fourth stop switch 42 is to be operated. The brightness of the image to be operated may be set to be about the same as the brightness of the image corresponding to the stop switch 42 to be operated third.
For example, when the pressing order of "3412" is notified as an image as in the above example, the image is first displayed as "3 ● 12". Note that "●" is an image corresponding to the "4" th pressing order, and the character "4" may be darkened (hidden) so that it cannot be seen at all, or "4". The characters may be dim enough to be identified.

When the image is displayed as "3 ● 12", the image is displayed in the same manner as in the case of 6 selections, so that the player can intuitively understand the pressing order. Then, when the first stop switch 42C is operated, one of the following 1) to 3) may be executed.
1) Change the "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to the display of "●", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34 ● 2".
2) Change the "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to a display such as "-" or "○", and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34-2" or "34 ○ 2".
3) Change "1" corresponding to the operated stop switch 42C to blank (no image), and change the previous "●" to "4". Specifically, the image is displayed as "34 * 2"("*" means a blank).

Further, even after the second stop, the images may be displayed as "34 ●●", "34 ---", "34 ○○", and "34 **" in the same manner as described above.
Further, after the third stop, images such as "● 4 ●●", "-4--", "○ 4 ○○", and "* 4 **" can be displayed.
Alternatively, after the third stop, the image itself in the push order may be erased.
Even when all the pressing orders are displayed as "4312" as in the first method described above, after the stop switch 42 is operated, the image corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is displayed. Is erased as in 1) to 3) above, the operated stop switch 42 becomes easy to understand, which is preferable. Specifically, after displaying the image as "4312", "43 ● 2" (after operating the stop switch 42C) → "43 ●●" (after operating the stop switch 42D) → "4 ●●●" (stop switch 42B) After the operation), the image is displayed (“●” may be “○”, “-”, or “*” as described above).

Furthermore, as a fourth method, the push order is notified by using a four-character compound word. For example, when "spring, summer, autumn, and winter" is used as one of the four-character idioms to notify the pressing order, the correct pressing order is "spring->summer->autumn->winter".
Then, when the pressing order is "3412" as described above, the notification (image display, voice display) of "autumn / winter / spring / summer" may be performed as in the first method.
Alternatively, as in the third method, the image is displayed as "autumn ● spring / summer" before the first stop, and the image is displayed as “autumn / winter ● summer” after the first stop.
In any of the first to fourth methods, if a push order error occurs in the middle, the image of the push order may be displayed as it is, or when the push order error occurs. The image may be erased.

In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 24 selection push order bells are provided as described above, 24 types of push order instruction numbers and push order instruction information are provided. For example, if the push order instruction information is "A1" to "A9", "AA", "AC", "AF", "F1" to "F9", "FA", "FC", "FF", Twenty-four types can be provided.

Although the 11th to 13th embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
A. Eleventh Embodiment (1) In the non-advantageous section, the lottery of the advantageous section was performed only when the combination lottery result became the target lottery result. As described above, when the winning combination lottery result is not won (when the condition device does not operate as a result of the internal lottery), the advantageous section transition lottery, which is the process related to the advantageous section, is set in this way. This is because it was considered preferable not to do so. Therefore, it is not always necessary to set in this way, and the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed when the winning combination is not won.

(2) In the eleventh embodiment, the AT lottery process is executed after the advantageous section transition lottery. Here, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined in the advantageous section is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition process (FIG. 45) is executed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery. You may. Similarly, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined by the AT is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the AT set processing (steps S363 and S364 in FIG. 46) is performed without executing the AT lottery. May be executed.
Furthermore, a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that is always determined to be an advantageous section and AT is provided, and when the winning combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section transition processing and the advantageous section transition processing are performed without executing the advantageous section transition lottery or the AT lottery processing. AT set processing may be executed.
In addition, when a winning combination lottery result (winning number) that does not win the advantageous section transition lottery is provided, the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed even when the winning combination lottery result is obtained. In this case, the number of winnings in the advantageous section may be set to "0".

(3) When the AT is won, the initial number of games of the AT is determined, the number of games is stored in the AT game count counter, and when the AT game count counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated. However, the AT is not limited to such a game number management type AT, and may be a difference number management type AT. In the case of the difference number management type AT, when the AT is won, the initial value of the difference number that can be acquired is determined and stored in the AT difference number counter (different from the difference counter). Then, the difference number is subtracted from the AT difference number counter every time there is a payout, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", AT is terminated.
Even in the case of such a difference number management type AT, the AT difference number counter is subtracted when the number is one specified number (for example, "3"), but when the number is another specified number (for example, "2"), the AT is subtracted. Do not subtract the difference number counter.

(4) In the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 39, the setting can be changed after the initialization process is executed. Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit before the power is turned off and the setting change process is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off before the setting can be changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous section is displayed before the state in which the setting can be changed is terminated (after the setting is changed to “Yes” in step S242 in FIG. 39) and before the main processing is started (before step S248). The LED flag clearing (initialization) process may be executed. In this way, it is possible to control so that the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the set value is determined.

(5) One advantageous section clear counter and one difference counter were provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two advantageous section clear counters and two difference counters (important counters) may be provided to check the consistency.
For example, as the advantageous section clear counter, a first advantageous section clear counter and a second advantageous section clear counter are provided. During the advantageous section, both the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are updated each time the game is exhausted. Further, for example, in the determination in step S424 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first advantageous section clear counter is determined. When it is determined that the first advantageous section clear counter is "0", whether or not the value of the second advantageous section clear counter is "0", or whether the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter are cleared. Determine if the counter has the same value. When it is determined that the values are "0" or the same value, the process proceeds to step S435.

The same applies to the difference counter.
As the difference counter, a first difference counter and a second difference counter are provided. Then, both the first difference counter and the second difference counter are updated for each game digestion. Further, for example, in the determination in step S434 in FIGS. 51 and 52, the first difference counter is determined. When it is determined that the first difference counter exceeds the upper limit, whether the second difference counter exceeds the upper limit, or whether the first difference counter and the second difference counter have the same value. To judge. When it is determined that the upper limit value is exceeded or the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S435.

By determining the advantageous section clear counter value and / or the difference counter value as described above, even if the counter value becomes an abnormal value (invalid value) due to the influence of noise or the like, the advantageous section clear counter value Can be more accurately determined whether or not is "0" and / or whether or not the difference counter value exceeds the upper limit value.
If the first advantageous section clear counter and the second advantageous section clear counter do not match, or if the first difference counter and the second difference counter do not match, for example, an error is displayed and the game progresses. (Main processing) may be stopped.

(6) In the sub-difference number management process of FIG. 56, it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed in step S544, the process proceeds to step S545, and it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2164 (D)". When the sub-difference number counter is cleared, the BB game may output a special effect different from the normal BB game. It is possible to suggest to the player that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared by the special effect during the BB game.

Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed, the sub-difference number counter is not determined, and in the BB game, the sub-difference number counter is, for example, "2000 (D)" (an example of the threshold value, and this value). It may be determined whether or not the value exceeds (). Then, when it is determined that the sub-difference number counter exceeds "2000 (D)", the sub-difference number counter is cleared, and a special effect (an effect suggesting that the sub-difference number counter has been cleared) is performed from the next game. It may be output.

Furthermore, in the above case, when the power is cut off in the game in which the sub-difference number counter during the BB game exceeds "2000 (D)" (the special effect has not been output yet), the power is restored from the power off. The special effect may be output from the game. In this case, when returning from the power off, it is sufficient to read the sub-difference number counter value and the fact that the BB game is in progress, and determine whether or not to output the special effect.

Further, if a power failure occurs during rotation of the reel 31 of the game in which the sub-difference number counter during the BB game exceeds "2000 (D)", the special effect may be output from the game recovered from the power failure. Good. Therefore, in this case, if the power is not cut off, the special effect is output from the next game, but if the power is cut off while the reel 31 is rotating, the special effect is output from that game. Become.

(7) The game is played with the specified number "2" during AT (the instruction function does not operate when the specified number is "2"), the push order bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is accidentally operated in the correct push order. , When there is a small winning combination and the difference counter exceeds "2400 (D)", at the end of the game, it is possible to output an effect notifying the end of AT, such as displaying an image such as "END". preferable. This is to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct answer pressing order is not notified, which gives the player a sense of discomfort.

(8) On the other hand, as described above, in order to prevent the AT from ending in a game in which the correct push order is not notified, for example, when the game is played with the specified number "2", the push order bell is won. , Even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the correct answer, the payout number of the game is set to "2" or less (the difference number of the games is "0" or less) so that the AT does not end in the game. You may.

(9) As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the sub-difference number counter continued counting even during the BB game. However, not limited to this, when the BB is won during the AT and the game shifts to the BB game, the sub difference number counter may not be updated (the update of the sub difference number counter may be interrupted during the BB game). ..
In this case, for example, in FIG. 56, before step S531, it is determined whether or not the BB is operating (determined by the operating state flag). Then, when the BB is in operation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Further, when the sub-difference number counter is not updated during the BB game, the processes of steps S551 and S558 to S561 in FIG. 57 become unnecessary. Then, when the result is "No" in step S547, the process proceeds to step S552.

B. 12th Embodiment (1) Similar to the 11th embodiment, in FIG. 58, when the winning combination is not won, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is not executed. As mentioned above, the rules are taken into consideration. Therefore, if the rules are not taken into consideration, the transition lottery of the advantageous section may be executed when the winning combination is not won.
Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is performed by only one specified number (in the example of FIG. 58, the specified number “3”) in one gaming state (RT). I tried to do it. This is done in consideration of the fact that, according to the rules, the transition lottery for the advantageous section (processing related to the advantageous section) is defined as only one specified number in one gaming state (RT). Therefore, if this point is not taken into consideration, the transition lottery of the advantageous section may be executed with a plurality of specified numbers in one gaming state (RT).

(2) In the twelfth embodiment, the specified number "2" is indicated for non-RT and AT. However, when the game is the final game of the AT game, it is not necessary to specify the specified number.
(3) In the twelfth embodiment, the game is played inside the BB2, and it is irregular that the BB2 wins a prize and shifts to the BB2 game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specification may be made in which the BB2 is awarded and the BB2 game is executed when the end condition of the AT is satisfied after the AT is executed inside the BB2. In this case, when the end condition of AT is satisfied inside BB2, after the end of the game satisfying the end condition of AT (after all reels 31 are stopped and the payout process is executed at the time of winning a small winning combination). Before the start of the next game (non-AT) (before betting becomes possible), the specified number "2" is instructed to encourage BB2 to win a prize. In the twelfth embodiment, since the BB2 is won with the specified number "2", the specified number for winning the BB2 is "2", but for example, when the specified number "1" is used to win the BB. In, when the BB is awarded, the specified number "1" is instructed.
Further, the BB game having such specifications may be a BB game in which medals increase, or a BB game in which medals decrease.

(4) When instructing the specified number, it was executed in the game start set process (step S322 in FIG. 42). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed in the game end check process (FIG. 50). For example, in the BB2 game, it is determined whether or not it is the final game of the BB2 game, and if it is the final game, the specified number of the next game is instructed at the time of the game end check process. However, in the final game of the BB2 game, when a small winning combination is won and there is a payout and the number of payouts is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the specified number is instructed after the number of payouts is displayed. If the LED that indicates the specified number is a dedicated LED, the specified number of the next game can be instructed to the dedicated LED while the number of payouts is being displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the freeze is executed in the final game of the BB2 game, when the specified number of the next game is instructed at the end of the game, any timing before executing the freeze, during the execution of the freeze, or after the end of the freeze. It may be.

(5) The function of the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b can be changed when the game can be executed with any of a plurality of specified numbers as in the twelfth embodiment. For example, in a game in an advantageous section, in a situation where it is advantageous to play a game with a specified number "3" (for example, in the case of being inside BB2 in FIG. 58), the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40b is dedicated to 3 bets. It may be set to a button. That is, when the number of credits is "3" and it is advantageous to play the game in the advantageous section and with the specified number "3", when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "3" is set to bet. To do. On the other hand, when the number of credits is "2" and it is advantageous to play the game in the advantageous section and with the specified number "3", even if the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, "2" is not bet. To set.

Alternatively, even in a situation where the game can be played with the specified number "3", when the number of credits is "2", the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b is set so that "2" is bet. May be good. In particular, in FIG. 58, in non-RT and AT, it is preferable to set so that when the number of credits is "2", the 3-bet switch 40b is operated to bet "2".

(6) When most of the game sections are set as advantageous sections as in the twelfth embodiment, the instruction function can be activated at any timing. For example, a difference number counter (different from the difference counter) that can count the minus of the difference number is provided, and the payout rate for a predetermined period is calculated. When the payout rate for a predetermined period reaches a predetermined lower limit value (the predetermined lower limit value is set higher than the lower limit value in the rules, for example), the instruction function is activated to increase the payout rate. May be good. Then, when the ball output rate increases and recovers to the reference value, the operation of the instruction function is terminated.
The operation of the instruction function when the predetermined lower limit value is reached may or may not be included in the "AT". However, since the instruction function is still activated, it corresponds to the process related to the instruction function.

(7) In the twelfth embodiment, the LED for displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is the acquired number display LED 78. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other existing LEDs may be set, or a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions may be separately provided.
When a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is separately provided, the specified number of instructions is displayed even if the start switch 41 is operated after displaying the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions in the game start set process. It is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to. Further, even if all reels 31 are stopped, a small winning combination is won, and medals are paid out, it is not necessary to delete the information corresponding to the specified number of instructions.
In addition, when a dedicated LED for displaying information corresponding to the specified number of instructions is provided, the specified number of instructions is not confused with the number of payouts, error numbers, etc., so specify the specified number in any display mode. Can be done. For example, if the specified number of instructions is "2", it can be displayed as "2".

(8) In the twelfth embodiment, an example of instructing the specified number "2" is given, but depending on the specifications of the game machine, the specified number "1" or the specified number "3" may be instructed. Conceivable. If the specifications have the possibility of instructing any of the specified numbers "1" to "3", the display of the acquired number display LED78 when instructing the specified number "1" is set to "A1" and the specified number. The display instructing "2" is set to "A2", and the display instructing the specified number "3" is set to "A3".

C. 13th Embodiment (1) In the front view of FIG. 59, the line L1 is set to pass through the center of the four reels 31 and pass through the center of the four stop switches 42. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged to the right of the position shown in FIG. 58 so that, for example, a part of the stop switches 42B intersects the line L1. On the contrary, the entire four stop switches 42 may be arranged to the left of the position shown in FIG. 58 so that, for example, a part of the stop switches 42C intersects the line L1.

(2) As shown in the front view of FIG. 59, the Roman numerals from "1" to "4" are written below the four reels 31, but the Roman numeral portion may be used as a lamp. In this case, for example, when the stop switch to be operated next is 42C, the lamp of the Roman numeral "3" may be turned on.
In addition, different colors may be added to the range of Roman numerals from "1" to "4", and the stop switches 42A to 42D may also be colored according to the Roman numerals "1" to "4". Can be mentioned. In the above example, the color of the stop switch 42A is white, the color of the stop switch 42B is blue, the color of the stop switch 42C is yellow, and the color of the stop switch 42D is red. In this case, the range of the Roman numeral "1" is white, the range of the Roman numeral "2" is blue, the range of the Roman numeral "3" is yellow, and the range of the Roman numeral "4" is red. Be done.

(3) Further, the portion including the periphery of the reel 31 may be configured by the image display device 23. Then, as described above, each stop switch 42 is colored differently. In this case, for example, when the stop switch 42B (blue) is specified at the time of notifying the pressing order, the periphery of the reel 31B may be made to emit blue light.

(4) In the front view of FIG. 59, the distance W3 between the reels 31 is set longer than the distance W4 between the stop switches 42.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval W3 between the reels 31 and the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set to be substantially the same. Alternatively, the interval W4 between the stop switches 42 may be set longer than the interval W3 between the reels 31.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, a maximum of 24 push orders can be provided as the push order bell. However, not limited to this, it is also possible to provide a first stop push order bell. Here, in the prior art, the first stop push order bell has three choices. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to set four options. When the correct answer pressing order is displayed as an image when the first stop pressing order bell is won, for example, if the correct answer stop switch 42 is the stop switch 42C, the image is displayed as "XX1x".

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a first stop and a second stop push order bell (a push order bell in which the correct push order is set for the first stop and the second stop). For example, the first stop is set to the stop switch 42C, the second stop is set to the stop switch 42A, and the third stop and the fourth stop are arbitrary (any of the stop switches 42B and 42D is acceptable). In this case, the correct answer pressing order can be set to 12 choices. Further, when displaying the correct answer pressing order as an image, in the above example, the image may be displayed as "2 × 1 ×". Then, after the operation of the stop switch 42C, an image such as "2XX" may be displayed.

D. Others All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<14th Embodiment>
The fourteenth embodiment relates to the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information.
Hereinafter, the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (G) in which the timing of the display start or the display end of the push order instruction information is different will be described.

<14th Embodiment (A)>
60 and 61 are time charts for explaining the 14th embodiment (A).
FIG. 60 shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, and FIG. 61 shows the start switch before the lapse of the minimum game time. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated).

Here, the hardware configuration in the 14th embodiment (A) is the same as the hardware configuration shown in FIGS. 31 to 35 of the 11th embodiment.
In addition, the main process (M_MAIN), push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), medal payout by winning (M_WIN_PAY), interrupt process (I_INTR), and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the 14th embodiment (A) are the eleventh. The main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 41, the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) of FIG. 48, the medal payout by winning a prize in FIG. 49, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 53, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 55 of the embodiment. ) Is the same.
Then, in the 14th embodiment (A), similarly to the 11th embodiment, when the push order bell is won during AT, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

If the input port read process is executed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then “Yes” in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. It becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when “Yes” is obtained in step S278, then, the combination lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283), and the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284). ) Is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, in the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF), when the condition for activating the instruction function is satisfied, that is, when a winning combination having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during AT. , The push order instruction number corresponding to the winning number is generated, and this is stored as the acquired number data. Then, the push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (A), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed every 2.235 ms as in the 11th embodiment. Furthermore, the digits 1 (1a and 1b) to 5 (5a and 5b) are dynamically lit so as to have one cycle with five interrupts.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the lapse of the minimum game time, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time. More specifically, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating regardless of whether or not is turned on (operated). Within 5 interrupts (2.235 × 5 = 11.175 ms), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.

After the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, the push order instruction information may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the first interrupt, or the push order instruction may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 at the fifth interrupt. Information may also be displayed.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S284 and the reel rotation start preparation in step S285. In the control command set 1 between the push order instruction number set and the reel rotation start preparation, the effect group number or the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (A), the control command is composed of a first control command and a second control command. Both the first control command and the second control command are 1-byte data. The first control command is data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating parameters (variables). Then, one control command is composed of two bytes of data of the first control command and the second control command.
Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, the first control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 on one parallel communication line, and the other parallel communication line is the first. 2 The control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, a control command composed of 2 bytes of data can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 by one interrupt process.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (A), a storage area of 64 bytes is secured in the RWM 53 as a control command buffer. As described above, since one control command is composed of two bytes of data of the first control command and the second control command, 32 control commands can be stored in the control command buffer. Then, by transmitting the control command during interrupt processing, the untransmitted control commands stored in the control command buffer are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the order of storage.
If the control command is stored when the control command buffer is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission during the interrupt processing that arrives next at that time.

From the above, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the lapse of the minimum game time, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time. More specifically, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the start of rotation of the reel 31 regardless of whether is turned on (operated). The push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in about one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Further, in the 14th embodiment (A), the sub control board 80 is composed of a first sub control board (sub main control board) and a second sub control board (sub sub control board). The first sub-control board and the second sub-control board are control boards that belong to the lower level of the main control board 50, and control the selection and output of effects during the game and the game standby. The second sub control board is a control board that belongs to a lower level of the first sub control board. Then, the main control board 50 transmits a control command to the first sub control board in one direction, and the first sub control board and the second sub control board communicate with each other in both directions.

Further, the first sub control board determines what kind of effect is output at what timing based on the control command transmitted from the main control board 50. Then, the first sub-control board transmits a control command related to the determined effect to the second sub-control board.
Furthermore, peripheral devices for effect such as the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are electrically connected to the second sub control board. Then, the second sub control board selects an effect based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control board, and controls so as to output various effects from the peripheral device for the effect.

Specifically, when the first sub control board receives the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub control board stores (stores) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Further, the first sub-control board executes the sub-main process every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop process during the sub-main process, and as a result, determines that the control command is related to the image. Stores the image command according to the analysis result in the command buffer.
Further, the first sub-control board transmits the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process (executed before the loop process) during the next sub-main process.

Therefore, from the time when the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board receives the image command, 32 ms (= sub-main processing cycle). It takes about 16 ms x 2).
Then, the second sub-control board executes the drawing process based on the received image command, and displays the image on the image display device 23.
Further, in the 14th embodiment (A), the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second). Therefore, it takes about 33.33 ms to display one image on the image display device 23.

From the above, after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as a control command to the first sub control board, the image display device displays an image (push order instruction image) in which the second sub control board instructs the push order. It takes about 65.33 ms (= 32 ms + 33.33 ms) to display on 23.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 60, the reel 31 can be stopped after the rotation of the reel 31 is started. That is, before the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 becomes acceptable, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 1 second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about 1 second from the on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.
Further, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the lapse of the minimum game time, or the start switch 41 is turned on after the lapse of the minimum game time. Regardless of whether it is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 41, the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288. In the control command set 1 between the reel stop acceptance check and the all reel stop check, the control command related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and the control command related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, the control command stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmission (step S464) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed after this processing.

Furthermore, the first sub-control board analyzes the received control command, and as a result, determines that it is a control command related to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops first). When this is done, an image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is transmitted to the second sub control board.
Similarly, when it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops second), the image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is given. 2 When it is transmitted to the sub control board and it is determined that the control command is related to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last), the operation of the third stop switch 42 is performed. The image command is transmitted to the second sub control board.

Then, when the second sub control board receives the image command corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42, the second sub control board prompts the operation of the image corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 (for example, the operation of the second stop switch 42). The push order instruction image) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Similarly, when an image command corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is received, an image corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42 (for example, a push order instruction image prompting the operation of the third stop switch 42) is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 23.

When an image command corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is received, for example, the display of the push order instruction image is finished, and the image corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42 (for example, all reels 31 are stopped). The image according to the state) is displayed on the image display device 23.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 ends after the third stop switch 42 is turned on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, when all the reels 31 are stopped (“Yes” is set in step S289), the acquired number data is cleared (step S290). For example, it is assumed that the push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 when the push order bell is won during AT. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is set to "00" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S290.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends.
Further, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is completed first, and then the push order instruction on the acquired number display LED 78 is performed. The information display ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, in step S294, the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, "1" is added to the acquired number data in step S399 during the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning. As a result, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is "+1" by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S399. For example, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 changes from "00" to "01".
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (A), as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the number of medals acquired is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 when the medals are paid out.

In the 14th embodiment (A), when the push order bell is won during AT and the push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, all reels 31 are stopped. Then, the acquired number data is cleared, and the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00". After that, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 remains "00" until the medal is paid out. Then, for example, when 10 medals are paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED78 is "00"-> "01"-> "02"-> ...-> "09"-> "10" at the time of paying out the medals. Count up.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment (A), when the winning combination lottery process (step S282) and the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283) are executed, the push order instruction number set (step S284) is executed next. To do.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. After that, and before the start of rotation of the reel 31, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be started. That is, after the start switch 41 is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be started immediately.

<14th Embodiment (B)>
In the 14th embodiment (B), the timing of starting the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that in the 14th embodiment (A), and the push order instruction information is displayed when the rotation of the reel 31 starts. Is to start.
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 14th embodiment (B), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the 11th embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 14th embodiment (B) shown in FIG. 62, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined in step numbers, and steps same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. ..

In FIG. 41, processing is executed in the order of push order instruction number set, reel rotation start preparation, and reel rotation start, but in the 14th embodiment (B), as shown in FIG. 62, reel rotation start preparation and push order instruction are performed. Processes are executed in the order of number set and reel rotation start.
That is, in the 14th embodiment (B), the order of step S284 and step S285 is different from that of FIG. 41, and the push order instruction number set is executed after the reel rotation start preparation is executed.

If the input port read process is performed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then “Yes” in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. It becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, when “Yes” is obtained in step S278, after that, the winning combination lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283), the control command set 1 (step S601), and the reel rotation start. The preparation (step S285) and the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284) are executed.

In step S601, the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the effect group number or the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, following step S601, the process proceeds to step S285.
Further, in step S285, preparation for starting reel rotation is executed. In this reel rotation start preparation, first, it is determined whether or not the timer value of the minimum game time (the minimum time from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the start of rotation of the reel 31 in the next game) is "0".

The RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time. The initial value of the timer value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms × 1834 ≈ 4099 ms)". Furthermore, the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process (2.235 ms). Then, when it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined again whether or not the timer value is "0", and when it is determined that the timer value is "0", the initial value of the timer value is set. Set and proceed to step S284.
As described above, in the reel rotation start preparation in step S285, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the 14th embodiment (B), when the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 is executed, the process proceeds to step S602.
In step S602, the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, control commands related to the operation of the stop switch 42 and control commands related to the stop position of the reel 31 are stored in the control command buffer. Then, following step S602, the process proceeds to step S288.
It should be noted that the control command set 1 is executed between the reel stop acceptance check in step S287 and the all reel stop check in step S288 as described in the 14th embodiment (A).
Other than the above, it is the same as the flowchart of FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment.

63 and 64 are time charts for explaining the 14th embodiment (B).
FIG. 63 shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is operated after the minimum game time has elapsed, and FIG. 64 shows the start switch 41 operated before the minimum game time has elapsed. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the button is displayed.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment (B), when the advantageous section transition lottery process of step S283 is executed, the process proceeds to step S601 and the control command set 1 is executed. In this control command set 1, the effect group number or the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer as a control command. Then, the effect group number or the push order instruction number stored in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time, or the start switch 41 is operated after the lapse of the minimum game time. Regardless of whether or not the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the start of rotation of the reel 31, more specifically, one interrupt (2.) after the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer. The push order instruction number will be transmitted to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board) in about 235 ms).

Further, in the 14th embodiment (B), when the control command set 1 in step S601 is executed, the reel rotation start preparation in step S285 is executed next, and then the push order instruction number set in step S284 is executed.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (B), as shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the lapse of the minimum game time, or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time. Regardless of whether is turned on (operated), when the rotation of the reel 31 starts, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.

Further, as described in the 14th embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board, the second sub control board gives the push order instruction to the image display device 23. It takes about 65.33 ms to display the image. Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (B), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 63, after the rotation of the reel 31 starts and the reel 31 stops. Before it becomes possible, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 1 second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about 1 second from the on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 63, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started first, and then the image. The display of the push order instruction image on the display device 23 is started.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 64, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started first, and then the display of the push order instruction image is started. The display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
That is, depending on whether the start switch 41 is operated before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 and the push order instruction on the image display device 23 are started. The order with the start of displaying the image is changed.

Here, in the 14th embodiment (A), regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the lapse of the minimum game time or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time. After the start switch 41 was turned on (operated) and before the start of rotation of the reel 31, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 was started. That is, after the start switch 41 was turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 was started immediately.

However, if the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is too early, the start switch 41 is turned on because the winning combination has a favorable push order such as a push order bell in the combination lottery (internal lottery). After (operation), the player immediately understands.
This does not have an advantageous push order, but may discourage the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role, which is a condition for determining the additional number of AT games.

Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, so that the push on the acquisition number display LED 78 is performed at the start of rotation of the reel 31. Start displaying the order instruction information.
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. , It is possible to prevent the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role from being discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.

When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the minimum game time has elapsed, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, and the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, and then 5 interrupts (2.235). Within × 5 = 11.175 ms), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 will be started.
Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (B), before the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data, the push order instruction number is stored in the control command buffer and stored in the sub control board 80 (first sub control board). The data is transmitted, but it takes about 65.33 ms from the time when the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the first sub control board until the second sub control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. It takes time.

In this way, the time required from storing the push order instruction number as the acquisition number data to displaying the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is set to "X", and the main control board 50 sets the push order instruction number. When the time required for the second sub-control board to display the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 after being transmitted to the first sub-control board is set to "Y", "X <Y" is satisfied. Is set to.
Further, when the interrupt processing cycle is set to "T" and the number of digits to be dynamically lit by the interrupt processing is set to "N", the push order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data and then pressed on the acquired number display LED 78. It takes a maximum of "T × N" time to display the forward instruction information. Therefore, it is set to satisfy "T × N <Y".
As a result, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started first, and then the push order on the image display device 23. The display of the instruction image is started.

<14th Embodiment (C)>
In the 14th embodiment (C), the timing of the display end of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that in the 14th embodiment (A) and (B), and the push order instruction information is displayed when the medal is paid out. Is to end the display of.
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 14th embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the 11th embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 14th embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 65, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. ..

In FIG. 41, when it is determined in step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290 and the acquired number data is cleared. However, in the 14th embodiment (C), as shown in FIG. 65, in step S289. When it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291, and the display determination of the symbol is performed without clearing the acquired number data.
Further, in the 14th embodiment (C), the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) (step S603) by winning is different from that of FIGS. 41 and 49 of the 11th embodiment.

If the input port read process is performed in step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 53 and the start switch 41 is turned on at this time, then “Yes” in step S278 of the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. It becomes.
Further, as shown in FIG. 65, when “Yes” is obtained in step S278, after that, the winning combination lottery process (step S282), the advantageous section transition lottery process (step S283), and the push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) (step S284). , Control command set 1 (step S601), and reel rotation start preparation (step S285) are executed.
Note that step S601 is the same as that of the 14th embodiment (B).

Further, in FIG. 65, the control command set 1 (step S602) is executed after the reel stop acceptance check (step S287), and then the all reel stop check (step S288) is executed. It is the same as FIG. 62 of (B).
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when it is determined in step S289 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S291 to determine the display of the symbol. That is, in the 14th embodiment (C), after all reels 31 are stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in the 14th embodiment (C), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 49 of the 11th embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 14th embodiment (C) shown in FIG. 66, steps different from those in FIG. 49 are underlined in step numbers, and steps same as those in FIG. 49 are given the same step numbers. ..

As shown in FIG. 66, in the 14th embodiment (C), when the payout number data is acquired in step S391, the process proceeds to step S611, the payout number data is stored as the acquired number data, and then the process proceeds to step S392. That is, in the 14th embodiment (C), the payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data between the step S391 and the step S392.
Further, as shown in FIG. 66, in the 14th embodiment (C), when the one medal payout process is executed in step S398, the process proceeds to step S400, and "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (C), unlike FIG. 49 of the 11th embodiment, "1" is not added to the acquired number data between the steps S398 and the step S400.

67 and 68 are time charts for explaining the 14th embodiment (C).
FIG. 67 shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, and FIG. 68 shows the start switch before the lapse of the minimum game time. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated).
As described above, in the 14th embodiment (C), the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared even after all the reels 31 are stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the push order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) continues to be displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 even after all the reels 31 are stopped.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (C), when the payout number data is stored as the acquired number data in step S611 of FIG. 66, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process is performed. As a result, the number of medals acquired (for example, "10" when paying out 10 medals) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (C), as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the push order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out. Subsequently, when the medal is paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED78 is switched from the push order instruction information to the acquired number (for example, "= 1" to "10").
Regarding the timing of starting the display of the number of medals acquired, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the 14th embodiment ( Same as A).

Further, in the 14th embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared, and the number of medals paid out as the acquired number data in step S611 of the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning in FIG. Store data.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the push order instruction information can be continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 even after all the reels 31 are stopped.
Furthermore, the push order instruction information is continuously displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out, and the acquisition number display LED 78 is switched from the push order instruction information to the number of acquisitions when the medal is paid out. Although the LED 78 is used as a display for both the push order instruction information and the acquired number of sheets, it is possible not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of sheets.

<14th Embodiment (D)>
In the 14th embodiment (D), the timing of starting the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is different from that in the 14th embodiment (A) to (D), and the reel 31 can be stopped. Occasionally, the display of push order instruction information is started.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 14th embodiment (D), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 41 of the 11th embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 14th embodiment (D) shown in FIG. 69, steps different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined in step numbers, and steps same as those in FIG. 41 are given the same step numbers. ..

As shown in FIG. 69, in the 14th embodiment (D), when the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286, the process proceeds to step S604, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 can be stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reel 31 has reached a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 is acceptable. Then, when it is determined that the reel 31 can be stopped, the process proceeds to step S284, and the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) is executed.
The contents of the processing in the push order instruction number set (M_ORG_INF) in step S284 are the same as those in the eleventh embodiment and the fourteenth embodiments (A) to (C).
The contents of the processing in the control command set 1 in steps S601 and S602 are the same as those in the 14th embodiments (B) and (C).

70 and 71 are time charts for explaining the 14th embodiment (D).
FIG. 70 shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, and FIG. 71 shows the start switch before the lapse of the minimum game time. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated).
As described above, in the 14th embodiment (D), when the reel 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction number set is executed, so that the start is started before the lapse of the minimum game time as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71. Regardless of whether the switch 41 is turned on (operated) or the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, when the reel 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Is started.

Further, also in the 14th embodiment (D), as in the 14th embodiments (A) to (C), when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, it is shown in FIG. 70. As described above, after the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the reel 31 can be stopped, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and the start switch 41 is turned on (operation) before the lapse of the minimum game time. ), As shown in FIG. 71, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the rotation of the reel 31 is started.
Therefore, also in the 14th embodiment (D), as in the 14th embodiments (A) to (C), the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. Regardless of this, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (D), when the reel 31 can be stopped regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. , The display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (D), as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. First, the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is started, and then the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (D), the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the reel 31 can be stopped, so that the same as in the 14th embodiment (B). , It is possible to prevent the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role from being discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.
Furthermore, in the 14th embodiment (D), although the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is delayed, when the reel 31 can be stopped, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Is started, so that the player can be notified of the push order instruction information before the player operates the stop switch 42.

<14th Embodiment (E)>
In the 14th embodiment (E), as in the 14th embodiment (B), the display of the push order instruction information is started at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and the medal is paid out as in the 14th embodiment (C). Occasionally, the display of push order instruction information is terminated.
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 14th embodiment (E), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 62 of the 14th embodiment (B) and FIG. 65 of the 14th embodiment (C). ..
In FIG. 72, steps S271 to S286 are the same as those in FIG. 62 of the 14th embodiment (B), and steps S287 to S303 are the same as those of FIG. 65 of the 14th embodiment (C).

73 and 74 are time charts for explaining the 14th embodiment (E).
FIG. 73 shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, and FIG. 74 shows the start switch before the lapse of the minimum game time. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated).
As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the 14th embodiment (E), similarly to FIGS. 63 and 64 of the 14th embodiment (B), when the reel 31 starts rotating, the push order on the acquired number display LED 78 The display of the instruction information is started, and the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is terminated at the time of paying out the medals, as in FIGS. 67 and 68 of the 14th embodiment (C).

Regarding the timing of starting the display of the number of medals acquired, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, and the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, the 14th embodiment (B). ) Is the same.
Further, in the 14th embodiment (E), as in the 14th embodiment (B), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data, so that the reel 31 At the start of rotation of, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. , It is possible to prevent the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role from being discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (E), as in the 14th embodiment (C), even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the acquired number data is maintained without being cleared, and the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) by winning the prize in FIG. ), The payout number data is stored as the acquisition number data in step S611.
Therefore, even after all the reels 31 are stopped, the push order instruction information can be continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 until the medal is paid out, and further, the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed when the medal is paid out. Since the push order instruction information is switched to the acquired number of sheets, although the acquired number display LED 78 is used as a display for both the push order instruction information and the acquired number of sheets, it is possible not to interfere with the display of the acquired number of sheets.

<14th Embodiment (F)>
FIG. 75 is a front view showing an outline of the configuration including the reel 31, the stop switch 42, and the operation instruction lamp 25 in the 14th embodiment (F).
As shown in FIG. 75, in the 14th embodiment (F), a stop instruction lamp 25 is provided below each reel 31. The stop instruction lamp 25 indicates a reel 31 to be stopped, and is composed of an LED lamp.

The stop instruction lamp 25, which is provided below the left reel 31 and lights up when instructing the stop of the left reel 31, is the left stop instruction lamp 25.
Similarly, the stop instruction lamp 25, which is provided below the middle reel 31 and lights up when instructing the stop of the middle reel 31, is the middle stop instruction lamp 25.
Further, the stop instruction lamp 25 provided below the right reel 31 and lit when instructing the stop of the right reel 31 is the right stop instruction lamp 25.
Then, the sub control board 80 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25.

Here, the sub control board 80 is composed of a first sub control board and a second sub control board, and the stop instruction lamp 25 is electrically connected to the second sub control board.
Then, the second sub-control board controls the lighting / extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control board, and displays an image on the image display device 23.

Specifically, when the condition for operating the instruction function is satisfied, that is, when a combination having an advantageous push order such as a push order bell is won during AT, the main control board 50 controls during the main process (M_MAIN). In command set 1, the push order instruction number as a control command is stored in the control command buffer.
Then, the main control board 50 sets the push order instruction number as the control command stored in the control command buffer as the first sub by transmitting the control command (step S464) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after this process. Send to the control board.

Further, when the first sub control board receives the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, the first sub control board stores (saves) the received control command in a predetermined storage area.
Furthermore, the first sub-control board executes the sub-main process every 16 ms, analyzes the control command in the loop process during the sub-main process, and as a result, determines that it is the push order instruction number. , The lamp control command and the image command according to the analysis result are stored in the command buffer.

Further, the first sub-control board transmits the lamp control command and the image command stored in the command buffer to the second sub-control board in the command transmission process during the next sub-main process.
Therefore, as in the 14th embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number as the control command to the first sub control board, the second sub control board sends the lamp control command and the image. It takes about 32 ms (= sub-main processing cycle 16 ms × 2) to receive the command.

Then, the second sub-control board executes the on / off control of the stop instruction lamp 25 (left, middle, right) based on the received lamp control command, and draws the drawing process based on the received image command. This is executed and the image is displayed on the image display device 23.
For example, when the lamp control command and the image command indicating the left first stop are received, the second sub control board turns on the left stop instruction lamp 25 and turns off the middle stop instruction lamp 25 and the right stop instruction lamp 25. At the same time, an image prompting the operation of the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (F), the second sub-control board executes interrupt processing every 1 ms, and in this interrupt processing, controls the lighting / extinguishing of each stop instruction lamp 25.
Therefore, the second sub-control board takes about 1 ms from receiving the lamp control command transmitted from the first sub-control board to turning on the stop instruction lamp 25 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped. It takes.

Further, as described above, it takes about 32 ms from the time when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board receives the lamp control command.
Therefore, it takes about 33 ms (= 32 ms + 1 ms) from the time when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board lights the stop instruction lamp 25.

Further, also in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (A), since the second sub-control board executes the drawing process at 30 fps (frames per second), one image is displayed as an image. It takes about 33.33 ms to display on the device 23.
Therefore, also in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (A), after the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board, the second sub control board has an image. It takes about 65.33 ms (= 32 ms + 33.33 ms) to display the push order instruction image on the display device 23.
From the above, in the 14th embodiment (F), the stop instruction lamp 25 is turned on first, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

76 and 77 are time charts for explaining the 14th embodiment (F).
FIG. 76 shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, and FIG. 77 shows the start switch before the lapse of the minimum game time. It shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated).

Although not shown, also in the 14th embodiment (F), similarly to the 14th embodiment (B), the push order instruction number set is executed after the reel rotation start preparation is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, also in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (B), is the time when the start switch 41 is operated before the lapse of the minimum game time? Or, regardless of whether it has passed or not, when the rotation of the reel 31 starts, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.

Further, although not shown, in the 14th embodiment (F), when the on of the third stop switch 42 is detected, the acquired number data is cleared. Then, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after this process.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (F), as shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated), the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 ends.
The timing of starting the display of the number of medals won and the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command are the same as those in the 14th embodiments (A) to (E).

Further, as described above, it takes about 33 ms from the time when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board lights the stop instruction lamp 25. It takes about 65.33 ms from the time when the main control board 50 transmits the control command to the first sub control board until the second sub control board displays the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.

Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 76, the start switch 41 is first stopped after the rotation of the reel 31 is started and before the reel 31 can be stopped. The instruction lamp 25 lights up, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, for example, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 1 second before the minimum game time elapses, it takes about 1 second from the on (operation) of the start switch 41 to the start of rotation of the reel 31. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, the stop instruction lamp 25 is first lit before the start of rotation of the reel 31, and then the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 76, first, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and then the stop instruction lamp 25 Lights up, and finally, the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the lapse of the minimum game time, as shown in FIG. 77, the stop instruction lamp 25 first lights up, and then the image display device 23 is pressed. The order instruction image is displayed, and finally, the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (F), as in the 14th embodiment (B) and (E), when it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the push order instruction number is stored as the acquisition number data. As a result, when the rotation of the reel 31 starts, the display of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 is started.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before the minimum game time elapses, the display start timing of the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78 can be delayed until the minimum game time elapses. , It is possible to prevent the player who has been waiting for the winning of the rare role from being discouraged immediately after operating the start switch 41.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the stop instruction lamp 25 is lit first regardless of whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed. After that, the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Both the stop instruction lamp 25 and the image display device 23 are controlled by the second sub-control board, but since it is necessary to execute a drawing process in order to display an image on the image display device 23, the stop instruction lamp 25 is correspondingly controlled. 25 lights up earlier.

<14th Embodiment (G)>
The 14th embodiment (G) is provided with a dedicated 7-segment display (7-segment) for displaying the push order instruction information, and the timing of the display end of the push order instruction information is the 14th embodiment (F). Other than that, it is the same as that of the 14th embodiment (F).
A dedicated 7-segment display for displaying push order instruction information is referred to as a push order instruction LED.
Further, in the 14th embodiment (G), the RWM 53 secures a storage area for push order instruction data. The push order instruction data is data for displaying the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED.

78 and 79 are time charts for explaining the 14th embodiment (G).
FIG. 78 shows the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) after the lapse of the minimum game time, and FIG. 79 shows the start switch before the lapse of the minimum game time. Indicates the timing of the display start and display end of the push order instruction information when 41 is turned on (operated).

In the 14th embodiment (G) as well, similarly to the 14th embodiments (B) and (F), the push order instruction number set is executed after the reel rotation start preparation is executed.
Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the 14th embodiment (G) as well as in the 14th embodiment (B) and (F), the minimum game is when the start switch 41 is turned on (operated). Regardless of whether it is before or after the lapse of time, the display of the push order instruction information is started at the start of rotation of the reel 31.
In the 14th embodiment (G), the push order instruction number is set in the storage area of the push order instruction data of the RWM 53. As a result, the push order instruction information is displayed on the push order instruction LED in the interrupt process executed after this process.

Further, in the 14th embodiments (A) to (F), since the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the acquired number display LED 78 can be displayed by clearing the acquired number data by the time the medal is paid out. It was possible to display the number of medals won.
On the other hand, in the 14th embodiment (G), in order to maintain the push order instruction data without clearing even when the medals are paid out, as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the medals are pushed even when the medals are paid out. The push order instruction information (for example, "= 1") continues to be displayed on the order instruction LED.

Further, in the 14th embodiment (G), when the payout of medals is completed, the push order instruction data is cleared. Then, the display of the push order instruction LED becomes "00" by the interrupt process executed after this process.
Therefore, in the 14th embodiment (G), as shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the display of the push order instruction information on the push order instruction LED ends after the medal is paid out.

As described above, in the 14th embodiment (G), the push order instruction information is not displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, but is displayed on the dedicated push order instruction LED. Therefore, the push order instruction information is displayed when the medal is paid out. Even if it continues, it is possible to prevent the display of the number of medals won.
The timing of starting the display of the number of medals won, the timing of transmitting the push order instruction number as a control command, the timing of the display start and display end of the operation instruction lamp 25, and the start of displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. The timing of the display end is the same as that of the 14th embodiment (F).

<Summary of the 14th embodiment>
Push order instruction information is provided from the time the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) until the reel 31 can be stopped (the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted). If shown, the player can be notified of the correct answer pressing order before the player turns on (operates) the stop switch 42.
Therefore, as the timing to start displaying the push order instruction information,
1) When the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) 2) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the reel 31 starts rotating 3) When the reel 31 starts rotating 4) After the reel 31 starts rotating 5) Before the reel 31 can be stopped 5) The time when the reel 31 can be stopped can be mentioned.

In addition, when displaying the push order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78, if the display of the push order instruction information is completed from the time when the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) to the time when the medal is paid out, the medal It is possible not to interfere with the display of the number of acquired medals.
Therefore, the timing of the end of displaying the push order instruction information is
1) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated) 2) When the third stop switch 42 is turned on and then turned off (when the player releases his hand from the third stop switch 42)
3) When all reels 31 are stopped 4) When medals are paid out.
When the push order instruction information is displayed on the dedicated push order display LED, the push order instruction information may be continuously displayed when the medal is paid out, and the push order instruction information may be displayed after the medal is paid out. ..

Further, by the time the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23 on the sub control board 80 (second sub control board), the control command is generated on the main control board 50, and the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 are displayed. It takes a certain amount of time to transmit the control command to the sub control board 80, receive and analyze the control command on the sub control board 80, and draw and display the control command on the sub control board 80 (second sub control board).
Therefore, even if the main control board 50 simultaneously displays the acquired number display LED 78 of the push order instruction information and transmits the control command to the sub control board 80, the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23. Will be delayed.

Further, depending on whether the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) before or after the minimum game time has elapsed, the rotation of the reel 31 is started and the push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23. The order of may be changed.
Therefore, the timing of starting the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is set.
1) After the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) and before the start of rotation of the reel 31 2) After the start of rotation of the reel 31 and before the reel 31 can be stopped.

Further, after the main control board 50 transmits a control command to the sub control board 80, until the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) finishes displaying the push order instruction image on the image display device 23. , It takes a certain amount of time.
Therefore, the timing of ending the display of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23 is after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated).
Then, the display start timing on the acquisition number display LED 78 of the push order instruction information, the display end timing on the acquisition number display LED 78 of the push order instruction information, the display start timing of the push order instruction image on the image display device 23, and the push order. The display end timing of the instruction image on the image display device 23 is not limited to the combinations shown in the 14th embodiments (A) to (G), and can be set by appropriately combining them.

In the game in which the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, even if a push order error occurs in the middle, the push order instruction information is displayed until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). May continue to be displayed as it is, or the display of the push order instruction information may be terminated when a push order error occurs.
Similarly, in a game in which a push order instruction image is displayed on the image display device 23, even if a push order error occurs in the middle, the push order instruction is given until a predetermined time after the third stop switch 42 is turned on (operated). The image may be continuously displayed as it is, or the display of the push order instruction image may be terminated when a push order error occurs.

In addition, at the time of replay winning when three medals are inserted, three medals are automatically bet and the game can be started. Therefore, the 1-bet display LED79a, the 2-bet display LED79b, the 3-bet display LED79c, the game start display LED79d, and the replay display are displayed. The LED 79f lights up.
At this time, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the 1-bet display LED 79a is first lit, and the 2-bet display LED 79b, the 3-bet display LED 79c, and the game start display are displayed. The LED 79d and the replay display LED 79f are turned off.

After that, the 2-bet display LED79b and the 3-bet display LED79c are sequentially lit, and finally, the 1-bet display LED79a, the 2-bet display LED79b, the 3-bet display LED79c, the game start display LED79d, and the replay display LED79f are lit.
Then, when the 1-bet display LED79a is lit and the 2-bet display LED79b, the 3-bet display LED79c, the game start display LED79d, and the replay display LED79f are turned off at the time of winning the replay when three cards are inserted, the pressing order is reached. The display on the acquired number display LED 78 of the instruction information may be terminated.

In addition, when a small winning combination is won, when the third stop switch 42 is turned on, when the third stop switch is turned off, when all reels 31 are stopped, or when medals are paid out, the display of the push order instruction information on the winning number display LED 78 ends. Then, at the time of winning the replay, when the 1-bet display LED79a is lit and the 2-bet display LED79b, the 3-bet display LED79c, the game start display LED79d, and the replay display LED79f are turned off, the push order in the acquisition number display LED78. The display of the instruction information may be terminated.
That is, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be different between the small winning combination winning and the replay winning.
Of course, the display end timing of the push order instruction information may be the same at the time of winning the small role and at the time of winning the replay.

Although the 14th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and for example, the following modifications can be made.
(1) In the 14th embodiment (A), two sets of 8-bit parallel communication lines are used, the first control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by one parallel communication line, and the other parallel communication line is the first. By transmitting the two control commands to the sub control board 80, it is possible to transmit the control command consisting of two bytes of data to the sub control board 80 with one interrupt process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a control command composed of 2-byte data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by using only one set of 8-bit parallel communication lines.
In this case, the first control command and the second control command may be sequentially transmitted by transmitting the control command during one interrupt process. As a result, a control command composed of 2 bytes of data can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 by one interrupt process.

Further, the first control command may be transmitted by the control command transmission during one interrupt process, and the second control command may be transmitted by the control command transmission during the next interrupt process. As a result, a control command composed of 2 bytes of data may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by two interrupt processes.
Furthermore, the control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 by serial communication, not limited to parallel communication.
Further, a control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 by electrical connection, or a control command may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 by connection using optical communication means. May be good.

(2) In the 14th embodiment (A), the main control board 50 transmits a push order instruction number as a control command to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board), and the sub control board 80 (second sub control). The substrate) executed the drawing process based on the received push order instruction number, and displayed the push order instruction image on the image display device 23.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the main control board 50 transmits the condition device number to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board) as a control command, and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) is The drawing process may be executed based on the received condition device number, and the push order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23.

Further, for example, the main control board 50 transmits the effect group number to the sub control board 80 (first sub control board) as a control command, and the sub control board 80 (second sub control board) receives the effect group number. The drawing process may be executed based on the above, and the push order instruction number may be displayed on the image display device 23.
(3) The various modifications shown in the first to 14th embodiments and the first to 14th embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<15th Embodiment>
The fifteenth embodiment relates to the timing of addition processing of medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 47.
Hereinafter, the fifteenth embodiments (A) to (C) in which the timing of the medal addition processing is different will be described.

<15th Embodiment (A)>
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (A) is the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.
That is, when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, the medal flows down the medal passage in the medal selector. On the medal passage in the medal selector, a passage sensor 46, a insertion sensor 44a, and an insertion sensor 44b are provided from the upstream side. A blocker 45 is provided between the passage sensor 46 and the closing sensor 44a.

The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 first passes through the passage sensor 46, and then reaches the position of the blocker 45. When the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the medals flowing down the medal passage pass through the blocker 45 and then reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The input sensors 44a and 44b are installed at a predetermined distance.
Then, before the medal reaches the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are off.
Further, when the medal flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is first turned on from off, and the insertion sensor 44b remains off.

Further, when the medal flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a remains on and the insertion sensor 44b is turned from off to on.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a is turned from on to off, and the insertion sensor 44b remains on.
After that, when the medal further flows down the medal passage, the insertion sensor 44a remains off and the insertion sensor 44b is turned from on to off.
Then, the medals that have passed through the input sensors 44a and 44b reach the hopper 35.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
At the timing (a) in FIG. 80, both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are off.
At the timing (b) in FIG. 80, the closing sensor 44a is on and the closing sensor 44b is off.
The state (b) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (a) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
If the state (b) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred, and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (c) in FIG. 80, both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are on.
The state (c) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (b) or (c) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, if the state (c) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error occurs and an error occurs in the sub control board 80, as in the case of (b) in FIG. Send a command. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 80, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, when the state of (d) in FIG. 80 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error occurs and sub-controls, as in the case of (b) and (c) in FIG. 80. An error command is sent to the board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 80, both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are off.
The state (e) in FIG. 80 corresponds to the state (e) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 determines that the medal has been inserted and executes the medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process).
Here, when the number of bets is less than the specified number at the time of the state (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 executes the "1" addition process of the number of bets. For example, when the specified number in the game is "3" and the number of bets at that time is "1", the number of bets is changed from "1" to "2" by the "1" addition process of the number of bets. Update to.

Further, when the number of bets has already reached the specified number at the time of the state (e) in FIG. 80 and the number of credits has not reached the maximum number "50", the main control is performed. The board 50 executes a credit number "1" addition process. For example, when the number of credits at that time is "20", the number of credits is updated to "21".
Further, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the input command, the sub control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22.
If a medal passing error occurs before the state (e) in FIG. 80 is reached, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition process and does not transmit the insertion command.

Further, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 80 are repeated.
Then, in the state of (e) in FIG. 80, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the "1" addition process of the number of bets, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41. The game is ready to be accepted (the game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d is turned on.

<15th Embodiment (B)>
In the fifteenth embodiment (B), the execution timing of the medal "1" addition process is different from that in the fifteenth embodiment (A).
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (B) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (B).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 81 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIG. 80, description thereof will be omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. 81 will be described. Since it is different from (d) and (e) in FIG. 80, it will be described below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 81, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 81 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and performs a medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process). ) Is executed. At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number "1" addition process is executed, and when the bet number has already reached the specified number, the number of credits reaches the maximum number "50". When it has not been reached, executing the “1” addition process of the number of credits is the same as in the fifteenth embodiment (A).

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the state (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the input command, the sub control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22.
However, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), if the state (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error occurs and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. .. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the error command, the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.

Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), there is a case where the medal "1" addition process is executed, the input sound is output, and then the medal passing error is determined and the error sound is output.
In this way, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is reached, the medal "1" addition process is executed and the input sound is output, and then the state of (d) in FIG. 81 is in the state of (d) for a predetermined time or longer. If the error sound is continuously output, the input sound is output and then the error sound is output. Therefore, even if an error occurs, the player can be notified by the input sound that the medal has been inserted. ..
When a medal passing error occurs in the state of (b) or (c) in FIG. 81, the main control board 50 does not execute the medal "1" addition process and does not transmit the insertion command.

At the timing (e) in FIG. 81, both the closing sensors 44a and 44b are off.
Further, when a plurality of medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, (a) to (e) in FIG. 81 are repeated.
Then, when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the "1" addition process of the number of bets, the main control board 50 operates the start switch 41 in the state of (e) in FIG. 81. The game start display LED 79d is turned on so that the game can be accepted.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the medal "1" addition process is executed so that the timing for outputting the input sound and the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted, and the game start display LED 79d is turned on. The timing is different.

Here, as described in the fifteenth embodiment (A), the medal "1" addition process is performed at the timing (e) in FIG. 80 (when both the insertion sensors 44a and 44b are turned off). It is common to do it.
However, if the medal flows down the medal passage to the position shown in (d) in FIG. 81, the medal has already passed through the blocker 45 and enters the hopper 35.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), at the timing (d) in FIG. 81 (when the insertion sensor 44b remains on and the insertion sensor 44a is turned from on to off), the medal "1" Execute the addition process. This makes it possible to prevent so-called medal swallowing, in which medals enter the hopper 35 even though the medal addition process is not executed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), as described above, when the state of (d) in FIG. 81 continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error is made and the sub control board 80 is used. An error command is transmitted, and the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22. In this case, when the error sound is output, the medal addition process has already been executed and the input sound has been output. Therefore, the error may be cleared and the medals packed in the medal selector may be inserted into the hopper 35. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, when medals are continuously inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 and the maximum number of credits reaches "50", the 51st medal is removed from the medal passage at the position of the blocker 45. It will be returned from the medal payout port 16.
At this time, the credit number "1" addition process is executed at the timing when the 50th medal is in the state (d) in FIG. 81 (the insertion sensor 44a is off and the insertion sensor 44b is on), and the blocker is used. Turn off 45. As a result, the 51st medal can be reliably returned from the medal payout port 16 without being swallowed.

Further, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), when the number of bets reaches the specified number by executing the "1" addition process of the number of bets in the state of (d) in FIG. 81, the start switch 41 is operated. Is ready to be accepted. At this time, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 transmits a start command to the sub control board 80. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the start command, the sub control board 80 outputs a sound effect from the speaker 22.

Here, as in the fifteenth embodiment (A), at the timing of (e) in FIG. 80, the operation of the start switch 41 is made ready to be accepted, and the input command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. There is a possibility that the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 overlap.
Therefore, in the fifteenth embodiment (B), the input command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of (d) in FIG. 81, and the start switch 41 is operated at the timing of (e) in FIG. Make it acceptable. As a result, the input sound and the sound effect based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be prevented from overlapping.

<15th Embodiment (C)>
The fifteenth embodiment (C) is the same as the fifteenth embodiment (B) in the execution timing of the medal "1" addition process, but the output timing of the input sound is the same as that of the fifteenth embodiment (B). It's different.
The configuration of the medal selector in the fifteenth embodiment (C) is also the same as the configuration of the medal selector shown in FIG. 2 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing the execution timing of the medal addition process in the fifteenth embodiment (C).
Since (a) to (c) in FIG. 82 are the same as (a) to (c) in FIGS. 80 and 81, description thereof will be omitted, and (d) and (e) in FIG. 82 will be omitted. Is different from (d) and (e) in FIGS. 80 and 81, and will be described below.

At the timing (d) in FIG. 82, the closing sensor 44a is off and the closing sensor 44b is on.
The state (d) in FIG. 82 corresponds to the state (d) in FIG. 4 in the first embodiment (B).
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), when the state (d) in FIG. 82 is reached, the main control board 50 determines that a medal has been inserted, and performs a medal "1" addition process (bet process or credit process). ) Is executed. At this time, if the number of bets is less than the specified number, the bet number "1" addition process is executed, and when the bet number has already reached the specified number, the number of credits reaches the maximum number "50". When it has not been reached, executing the “1” addition process of the number of credits is the same as in the fifteenth embodiments (A) and (B).

However, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), unlike the fifteenth embodiment (B), the main control board 50 does not send an input command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of (d) in FIG. 82.
Then, in the fifteenth embodiment (C), the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80 at the timing of (e) in FIG. 82. Then, when the sub control board 80 receives the input command, the sub control board 80 outputs the input sound from the speaker 22.

Here, it is assumed that the state (d) in FIG. 82 continues for a predetermined time or longer, and the main control board 50 determines that a medal passing error has occurred and transmits an error command to the sub control board 80. Then, it is assumed that the sub control board 80 outputs an error sound from the speaker 22.
In this case, the medal "1" addition process is executed, but the input sound is not output and the error sound is output. As a result, error notification can be prioritized.

Then, when the error is cleared, the main control board 50 transmits an input command to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 outputs an input sound from the speaker 22 based on the received input command. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the medal has been inserted, so that the player can be relieved.
Further, by executing the "1" addition process of the number of bets in the state (e) in FIG. 82, when the number of bets reaches the specified number, the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted. Lighting the game start display LED 79d is the same as in the fifteenth embodiments (A) and (B).

<16th Embodiment>
The 16th embodiment relates to a chute passage 48 for guiding medals that have passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and a chute sensor 49 provided in the middle of the chute passage 48.
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a medal selector, a chute passage 48, and a chute sensor 49, in which a medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the insertion sensor 44a, the insertion sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49 and is a hopper. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which reaches 35.

The chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medal M that has passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b of the medal selector to the hopper 35, and is connected to the downstream side of the medal passage of the medal selector. Then, the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage and the shoot passage 35 of the medal selector.

The shoot sensor 49 is a sensor provided for determining the presence or absence of medal clogging or goggling, and is configured by using an optical sensor having a light emitting / receiving unit, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the middle of the shoot passage 48. It is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
Since the chute passage 48 is a passage that guides the medal M that has passed through the throwing sensors 44a and 44b to the hopper 35, the chute sensor 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the throwing sensors 44a and 44b.

In the 16th embodiment, the throwing monitoring counter adds "1" when the throwing sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (when both the throwing sensors 44a and 44b are turned off → on → off). It is a counter that is "+1") and is subtracted by "1"("-1") when the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M. Therefore, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" when it is normal.
The timing of adding "1" to the closing monitoring counter is the timing when the closing sensor 44b is turned from on to off (the timing of (e) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82).
Further, the timing of adding "1" to the closing monitoring counter is not limited to the timing when the closing sensor 44b is turned from on to off, and for example, the timing when the closing sensor 44a is turned from off to on (FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82). (B) may be used, or the closing sensor 44a may be turned from on to off (timing of (c) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82), and the closing sensor 44b may be turned from off to on. (The timing of (d) in FIGS. 4 and 80 to 82) may be used. This is because if the medal M reaches these timings, the medal M is considered to enter the hopper 35.
Further, when the medal M passes through the shoot sensor 49, the shoot sensor 49 turns off → on → off, but the timing of subtracting “1” from the input monitoring counter is the timing when the shoot sensor 49 turns from on to off. is there.

Further, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M (insertion monitoring counter = "+1") and the shoot sensor 49 does not detect the passage of the medal M, the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M. When the passage of the above is further detected, the input monitoring counter becomes “+2”, and the main control board 50 determines that the medal passage error occurs.
Furthermore, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M and only the shoot sensor 49 detects the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1" and the main control board 50 sets the medal. Judge as a passing error.

It should be noted that the main control board 50 determines that the medal passing error is not limited to when the input monitoring counter becomes "+2" or "-1". For example, when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "+2" or more and a predetermined value of "-1" or less, the main control board 50 may determine that a medal passing error occurs.
Further, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error occurs when the shoot sensor 49 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed after detecting the medal M. Then, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal retention error is determined, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.

As shown in FIG. 83, the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 reaches the hopper 35 through the medal passage and the chute passage 48. At this time, it passes through the closing sensor 44a, the closing sensor 44b, and the shoot sensor 49.
Here, it is assumed that the medal M is clogged at the tip of the shoot passage 48. In FIG. 83, the position of M1 indicates the position of the medal M placed in the medal insertion slot 47, the position of M2 indicates the position of the medal M clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48, and the position of M3 indicates the chute. The position of the second medal M from the tip of the passage 48 is shown, and the position of M4 indicates the position of the third medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the 16th embodiment, when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 is shot at a position where it can be detected. The sensor 49 is arranged.
Therefore, when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48, the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 is detected by the chute sensor 49, and when this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board. 50 determines that it is a medal retention error, and stops the progress of the game until the error is cleared.

For example, suppose that when the specified number is "3" and the number of bets and the number of credits are both "0", three medals M are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47. In this case, when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the third medal M, the main control board 50 is in a state where the operation of the start switch 41 can be accepted (the game can be started), and the game start display LED 79d Turn on. At this time, if the first medal M (M2) is clogged at the tip of the shoot passage 48, the third medal M (M4) is detected by the shoot sensor 49. Then, if this state continues for a predetermined time or longer, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error occurs and stops the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game when the medal M is clogged in the shooting passage 48.

The position of the shoot sensor 49 is not limited to a position where the third medal M (M4) from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48. Assuming that the specified number is "N", the chute sensor 49 may be arranged at a position where the Nth medal M from the tip of the chute passage 48 can be detected when the medal M is clogged at the tip of the chute passage 48. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game when the medal M is clogged in the shooting passage 48.

<17th Embodiment>
The seventeenth embodiment relates to a payout medal passage 134 that guides medals ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
84 is a front view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 85 is a rear view of the passage forming member 130, FIG. 86 is a left side view of the passage forming member 130, and FIG. 87 is a view of FIG. 85. It is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA.

The slot machine 10 includes a box-shaped cabinet 13 having a front opening and a front door 12 closing the opening of the cabinet 13.
A medal payout device 15 is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, a medal insertion slot 47, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, etc. are arranged in the center of the front surface of the front door 12, and a medal selector is located on the back surface of the front door 12 corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47. Is placed.
Further, a medal payout port 16 is provided in the lower part of the front door 12, and a medal tray for receiving medals paid out from the medal payout port 16 is provided in the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12, and the back surface of the front door 12 is provided. A passage forming member 130 is attached to the lower part.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the passage forming member 130 is formed in a bent shape, and is attached to a predetermined position on the lower back surface of the front door 12 to form a return medal passage 132 and a payout medal passage. It is a member forming 134.
Furthermore, the return medal passage 132 is a passage that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 of the medal selector to the medal payout port 16.
Further, the payout medal passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout port 16.
The return medal passage 132 and the payout medal passage 134 merge in the middle to form one passage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, an upper medal receiving port 131 is provided above the passage forming member 130. The upper medal receiving port 131 is an opening for receiving medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45, and is an opening that is an upstream end of the return medal passage 132, and closes the front door 12. In this state, it is formed so as to be located below the blocker 45 of the medal selector.
Then, the medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the blocker 45 pass through the upper medal receiving port 131, are guided by the return medal passage 132, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal tray.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving port 133 is provided at a position below the center of the passage forming member 130 and to the left when viewed from the front (to the right when viewed from the back). ing. The lower medal receiving port 133 is an opening for receiving medals ejected from the discharging portion 103 of the medal payout device 15, and is an opening serving as an upstream end of the payout medal passage 134, and is a front door. It is formed so as to be located in front of the ejection portion 103 of the medal payout device 15 with the 12 closed.
Then, the medals ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 pass through the lower medal receiving port 133, are guided by the payout medal passage 134, pass through the medal payout port 16, and are stored in the medal tray. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the lower medal receiving port 133 is formed on the back surface side of the passage forming member 130, and the front surface side of the passage forming member 130 constitutes the back surface of the front door 12. The plate material is arranged. As described above, there is a distance corresponding to the depth of the passage forming member 130 from the lower medal receiving entrance 133 to the back surface of the front door 12.
Here, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 passes through the lower medal receiving entrance 133, passes through the payout medal passage 134, and faces the lower medal receiving entrance 133 on the back surface of the front door 12. It hits and bounces off. At this time, if the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is short, the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off, and the medal M is ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M. There is a possibility that the medal M will collide with the medal M.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is "L1" and the diameter of the medal M is "D", "L1" is set. ≧ 2D ”is set to be satisfied.
That is, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off is less likely to collide with the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M.

That is, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 moves downward toward the back surface of the front door 12 (to the right in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity. Therefore, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position. Further, the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off is directed downward in the direction of the lower medal entrance 133 (to the left in FIG. 87) while falling downward due to gravity.
Then, if the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to be at least twice the diameter "D" of the medal M, the medal is ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15. The height difference between the medal M heading toward the back surface of the front door 12 and the medal M bouncing off against the back surface of the front door 12 and heading toward the lower medal entrance 133 can be sufficiently secured, and both medals M collide. It can be made difficult.

Further, when medals M are ejected one after another from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 at short intervals, the distance "L1" from the lower medal receiving entrance 133 to the back surface of the front door 12 is set to the diameter "D" of the medal M. Even if it is set to twice or more, there is a possibility that the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 collides with the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off.

Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, after the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off, the next medal M is ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15. It is set.
That is, the interval at which the medal M is ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15, the ejection speed of the medal M from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15, and the distance from the lower medal receiving port 133 to the back surface of the front door 12. And are set to satisfy the above relationship.

In this way, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 at a position lower than the ejected position and bounces off, and after falling to a lower position, the next medal M is ejected to the medal payout device. If the injection is performed from the ejection unit 103 of 15, the distance between the medals and the height difference can be sufficiently secured, and the medals M can be prevented from colliding with each other.
Here, when the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off and the medal M ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to this medal M collides, the vicinity of the lower medal receiving entrance 133 or the payout medal There is a possibility that the medal M will be clogged in the passage 134.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the medals M are set so as to be less likely to collide with each other so that the medals M are not clogged in the vicinity of the lower medal receiving entrance 133 or in the payout medal passage 134. ..
In the present embodiment, the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off is set so that the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 next to the medal M is less likely to collide. However, when a large number of medals M are continuously ejected from the discharging unit 103, it does not mean that all the front and rear medals M do not collide, and at least the first medal M and the second medal M are It is enough if there is no collision. When winning a small role, two medals are most often paid out, so if the first medal M and the second medal M are set so that they do not collide easily, the vicinity of the lower medal entrance 133 This is because the medal M can be prevented from being clogged in the payout medal passage 134.

Further, as described in the sixth embodiment, the hopper disk 101 is provided with a plurality of holding portions 102 capable of holding the medals M stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disk 101. There is.
Then, when the following conditions (a) and (b) are satisfied, or when the conditions (a) and (c) are satisfied, two or more medals M are continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15. It will be ejected.
(A) The medals M are held by two adjacent holding portions 102 on the hopper disc 101, respectively.
(B) When the number of remaining medals until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "N" and the number of medals M to be paid out by winning is "M", "(MN) ≥ 2" is satisfied.
(C) The settlement switch 43 was operated when the number of credits was "2" or more.

For example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is held by the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter “B” and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter “C”, respectively. If so, the condition (a) above is satisfied even if the medal M is not held by the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter “D”.
Further, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held by the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter “B”, but the holding portion at the position of the letter “C”. When the medal M is held by the 102 and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D", the condition of (a) above is satisfied.

Furthermore, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B", the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C", and the position of the letter "D". When the medals M are held by the holding portions 102 in the above, the condition of the above (a) is satisfied.
Of course, the condition (a) is satisfied even when the medals M are held by all the holding portions 102 of the hopper disk 101.

Further, for example, when the upper limit of the number of credits is "50" and the number of credits is "47", the remaining number of cards until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "3". If a small winning combination of "5" or more wins a prize, the condition of (b) above is satisfied.
Furthermore, for example, when the number of credits has already reached the upper limit of "50", the remaining number of cards until the upper limit of the number of credits is reached is "0", and at this time, the number of payouts is "2". If the above small winning combination wins, the condition of (b) above is satisfied.

From the above, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, at least the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "B" and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "C" are medals. If the above conditions (b) or (c) are satisfied under the condition that M is held, two or more medals M will be continuously ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15.
Further, for example, in FIG. 17B of the sixth embodiment, the medal M is not held in the holding portion 102 at the position of the character "B", but at least at the position of the character "C". Even when the above conditions (b) or (c) are satisfied under the condition that the holding portion 102 and the holding portion 102 at the position of the letter "D" hold the medals M, respectively, the medals are paid out. Two or more medals M will be continuously ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the device 15.

In addition, the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 may hit the back surface of the front door 12 and bounce back to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving port 133. If the returned medal M passes through the lower medal receiving entrance 133, it will fall inside the cabinet 13 and cannot be paid out to the player.
Therefore, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving port 133 is “L2” and the thickness of the medal M is “T”, “L2 ≧ T”. Is set to satisfy.

That is, the height "L2" of the peripheral edge of the lower medal receiving port 133 is set to be equal to or higher than the thickness "T" of the medal M.
As a result, even if the medal M ejected from the ejection unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off and returns to the vicinity of the lower medal receiving entrance 133, the returned medal M is still the lower medal receiving entrance. It can be made to hit the peripheral edge of 133 so as not to pass through the lower medal receiving entrance 133.

Further, since the hopper disk 101 of the medal payout device 15 is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, the medal M is ejected from the discharge unit 103 of the medal payout device 15 in a state of being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the lower medal receiving entrance 133 and the payout medal passage 134 are also inclined according to the inclination of the ejected medal M.

Here, the height direction is the direction perpendicular to the front surface and the back surface of the medal M ejected in an inclined state. Then, in the 17th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, when the height of the payout medal passage 134 is “L2” and the diameter of the medal M is “D”, “L2 <D” is satisfied. It is set. That is, the height "L2" of the payout medal passage 134 is set to be less than the diameter "D" of the medal M.

As a result, even if the medal M that hits the back surface of the front door 12 and bounces off rotates in the payout medal passage 134, the front surface and the back surface of the medal M can be prevented from being parallel to the vertical surface in the payout medal passage 134. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal M from blocking the payout medal passage 134.
It should be noted that all the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<18th Embodiment>
The eighteenth embodiment relates to a transmission process of an external signal.
In the eighteenth embodiment, it is possible to output a signal indicating on / off as the external signal 4 and the external signal 5.
In the eighteenth embodiment, the external signal 4 is an ON signal of the setting key switch (setting key switch signal), a signal indicating that an error has been detected, a signal indicating that an error is being displayed, or a power switch 11 being ON. It is a signal indicating that the power has been turned on (the power has been turned on).
The external signal 5 is a signal (door switch on signal) indicating that the front door 12 of the slot machine 10 has been opened.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the main storage areas of the RWM 53 described in the 18th embodiment.
The input port 0 level data of the address “F00A (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating on / off of the input port 0. Each bit of input port 0 is configured as follows.
D0: Setting switch signal ("1" when on, "0" when off)
D1: Reset switch signal ("1" when on, "0" when off)
D2: Setting key switch signal ("1" when on, "0" when off)
D3: Door switch signal ("1" when on, "0" when off)
D4: Unused D5: Unused D6: Power failure detection signal D7: Full detection signal

Here, the D6 bit "power failure detection signal" is input when a power failure occurs (for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S482 in FIG. 54 (11th embodiment)). It is a signal.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sub tank for accommodating medals overflowing from the hopper 35. Further, it is provided with a full sensor that is turned on by contact with a medal when the sub tank is full. Then, when the full sensor is turned on, the full detection signal is input to the D7 bit of the input port 0.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 88, in addition to the storage area of the input port 0 level data, each bit of the input port 0 is turned on (during the current interrupt processing) from off (during the previous interrupt processing). Input port rise data storage area for storing data indicating that, and data indicating that each bit of input port 0 has been turned off (during the current interrupt processing) from on (during the previous interrupt processing). It is also possible to provide a storage area for data falling on the input port for storage.

Further, the input port 51 shown in FIG. 1 is not limited to the input port 0, for example.
(1) Input port 1 to which operation switch signals such as bet switch 40 (40a and 40b), start switch 41, stop switch 42, and settlement switch 43 are input,
(2) Input port 2 to which signals such as a passage sensor 46, an input sensor 44, a payout sensor 37, and a reel sensor 33 are input.
Etc.
An input port level data storage area corresponding to each input port is provided. Further, as described above, it is also possible to provide a storage area for input port rising data and input port falling data for each input port.
Further, when only the input port level data storage area is provided (when the input port rising data and input port falling data storage areas are not provided), the input port level data storage area in the current interrupt processing is provided. Not only that, a storage area for input port level data in the previous interrupt processing may be provided.

The external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure / recovery of the address “F013 (H)” is a storage area of a timer value for counting the time for outputting the external signal 4 at the time of power failure / recovery. In the present embodiment, when the power switch 11 is turned on and the main control board 50 detects a return from the power failure in FIG. 1, the address "F013 (H)" is set to "136 (D)" as an initial value. Is performed, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Further, in the eighteenth embodiment, the interrupt cycle is "2.235 ms" as in the other embodiments. Therefore, the "136" interrupt corresponds to "303.96 ms". As a result, when returning from the power failure, the external signal 4 is turned on for about "300" ms (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 4 management time of the address “F014 (H)” is a timer value storage area for managing the output time of the external signal 4. In the present embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when the output of the external signal 4 is started (excluding the recovery from the power failure described above), and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. .. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) until this value becomes "0".
Further, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms". As a result, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

The external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” is a timer value storage area for managing the output time of the external signal 5. In the present embodiment, the initial value "24 (D)" is set when the output of the external signal 5 is started, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 5 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) until this value becomes "0".
Similar to the above, the "24" interrupt corresponds to "53.64 ms". As a result, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5).

Further, the external signal 4 output time, the external signal 4 management time, and the external signal 5 management time at the time of power failure / recovery of the present embodiment are all 1-byte timers for measuring "255 (D)" or less. Then, these timer values are subtracted by the timer measurement in step S455 during the interrupt processing of FIG. 53.
Here, in the eighteenth embodiment, the above three timers are arranged at the addresses "F013 (H)" to "F015 (H)". Therefore, in the timer measurement, "F013 (H)" is set as the measurement start timer address in the first step. Also, "3" is set as the number of 1-byte timers. As a result, all timers including the addresses "F013 (H)" to "F015 (H)" are subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement process.
Further, when the subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", in other words, when "0" is subtracted from "00 (H)", it becomes "00 (H)". ..

The error number of the address "F051 (H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the detected error when the error is detected. As shown in FIG. 88, when no error is detected, the value of the address “F051 (H)” is “0 (D)”. Then, for example, when an "E5" error is detected, the value "105 (D)" corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051 (H)".
In FIG. 88, "E0" to "E7" are illustrated as error numbers.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment described above, "E1", "E5", "E6", and "E7" errors are exemplified as unrecoverable errors. On the other hand, the "E0" to "E7" errors in the 18th embodiment (FIG. 88) correspond to recoverable errors.

When these recoverable errors occur, in principle, the progress of the game is stopped. Further, even during the rotation of at least one reel 31, error detection is executed for at least a part of the errors (in the example of the 18th embodiment, "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors). When an error is detected during the rotation of at least one reel 31, the game continues until all reels 31 stop, and when all reels 31 stop, an error state (when all reels 31 stop) before executing the payout process ( (Error display) and stop the progress of the game. Then, when the error is removed by the hall clerk, the progress of the game is restarted. Of course, if any of the errors "E7", "E6", and "E5" occurs during the rotation of the reel 31, the progress of the game is stopped (stop control is not performed by operating the stop switch 42). ) Can also be configured.

In FIG. 88, the “E0” error is an error when the insertion sensor 44 determines that medals have accumulated.
The "E1" error is an error when it is determined that the medals have not passed in the order of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.
The "E2" error is an error when it is determined that the sub tank is full.
The "E3" error is an error when it is determined that the medal in the hopper 35 is empty.
The "E4" error is an error when the payout sensor 37 determines that the medals are retained (clogging) in a situation where the medal payout signal is being output.
The "E5" error is an error when the payout sensor 37 is turned on in a situation where the medal payout signal is not output.
The "E6" error is an error when the insertion sensor 44b detects a medal in a situation where the blocker 45 does not form a medal flow path.
The "E7" error is an error when it is determined that medals have accumulated in the selector passage.

When any of the above errors is detected, the number corresponding to the detected error is stored in the address "F051 (H)". When an error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)", it is possible to display an error corresponding to the stored error number. For example, the segment data corresponding to the number stored in the address “F051 (H)” may be output to the acquired number display LED 78 to display the error number. Specifically, when the error field number "101 (D)" is stored in the address "F051 (H)", the digit is used in the LED display control in the interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 55 of the eleventh embodiment). At the lighting timing of 3, the lighting data of the digit 3 and the segment data for displaying “E” are output. Further, at the lighting timing of the digit 4, the lighting data of the digit 4 and the segment data for displaying “1” are output.

Further, when any error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)" (when it is not "0"), the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ).
The hall clerk turns on the reset switch after removing the error that occurred. When it detects that the reset switch has been turned on, it determines whether the error that occurred has been eliminated. If it is determined that the error that has occurred has not been eliminated, the current status (error display) is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined that the generated error has been removed (no error has occurred), the error number stored in the address "F051 (H)" is cleared. When the error number of the address "F051 (H)" is cleared, the error display (display of the error number by digits 3 and 4) is terminated.
The above is an example of displaying the error number on the acquired number display LED 78 based on the other embodiment described above, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the error number may be displayed on the credit number display LED 76 or an error display. A dedicated LED may be provided and displayed on the LED.

The error detection flag of the address "F294 (H)" is a storage area for storing that an error has been detected in consideration of a case where the error state cannot be immediately changed when an error is detected. Is. In the example of FIG. 88, the D0 to D2 bits in the storage area of the address “F294 (H)” are set as the detection flags for the “E7”, “E6”, and “E5” errors, respectively. The "E7", "E6", and "E5" errors are all errors that can be detected even in a situation where at least one reel 31 is rotating.

Here, for example, even in a situation where the reel 31 is rotating, it is determined whether or not an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error has occurred by interrupt processing. When the occurrence of these errors is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the bit corresponding to the error of the error detection flag is set to "1". When the error detection flag is "1", the external signal 4 is output.
However, even when these errors are detected under the condition that the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) does not immediately occur at that time, and after all the reels 31 have stopped. And shifts to an error state before the payout process is executed.

If any bit of the error detection flag is "1" when all reels 31 are stopped, the corresponding error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)". When the error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)", the stored error number is displayed. When the error detection flag is stored in the address "F294 (H)" and then the error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)", when should the error detection flag of the address "F291 (H)" be cleared? Is optional. For example, first, the error detection flag is not cleared until the error is cleared. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored and after all the reels 31 are stopped, the external signal 4 is turned on based on either the error detection flag or the error number (indicating on as the external signal 4). The signal can be output). Then, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared. When the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even when both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (off as the external signal 4). Does not output a signal indicating).

Secondly, when the error detection flag is stored in the address "F294 (H)" and then the error number is stored in the address "F051 (H)", the error detection flag of the address "F291 (H)" is cleared. To do. In this case, after the error detection flag is stored, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error detection flag until the error number is stored (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). ). Further, when the error number is stored and the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 is turned on based on the error number (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). After that, when it is determined that the error has been eliminated, the error number is cleared. As a result, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). However, even when both the error detection flag and the error number are cleared, for example, when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is not turned off (off as the external signal 4). Does not output a signal indicating).

When an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, the error state (error display) cannot be immediately entered (the error state cannot be entered until after all reels 31 are stopped), but when an error is detected, the error state cannot be immediately entered. Since it is necessary to turn on the external signal 4 (it is possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4), an error detection flag is provided.
Therefore, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs in a situation where the error state can be immediately entered, such as when the reel 31 is stopped, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. Whether or not to do so is optional. For simplification of processing, even when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs in a situation where it is possible to shift to an error state, "1" is stored in the error detection flag. May be good. Alternatively, when an "E5", "E6", or "E7" error occurs and the error state cannot be immediately entered (for example, at least one reel 31 is rotating), the error detection flag is set to "1". ", And in a situation where it is possible to immediately shift to an error state (for example, waiting for a game), the error number may be stored but" 1 "may not be stored in the error detection flag.

In the above storage area of RWM53, the storage areas of the addresses "F00A (H)", "F013 (H)" to "F015 (H)", and "F051 (H)" are the storage areas in the used area. .. On the other hand, the storage area of the address "F294 (H)" is a storage area outside the used area. Further, the program for detecting the error is stored in the control area outside the used area of the ROM 54.

89 and 90 are time charts showing the output timings of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5, FIG. 89 shows Example 1, and FIG. 90 shows Example 2.
In Example 1 of FIG. 89, (a) shows the relationship between the on / off of the setting key switch and the output of the external signal 4. When the on of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from detecting the on of the setting key switch to turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is "0" ms. Therefore, when the on of the setting key switch is detected, the external signal 4 is immediately turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).
Further, whether or not the setting key switch is on is detected in the interrupt processing. For example, during the interrupt process shown in FIG. 53 (11th embodiment), when the level data of the input port 0 is read and the level data of the setting key switch is "1" in the input port read process of step S457, it is external. Turn on the signal 4 (make it possible to output a signal indicating on as an external signal 4).

Further, once the setting key switch is turned on, the external signal 4 is turned on for "50" ms or more (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) (t3 in the figure). Therefore, even if the setting key switch is turned on immediately (for example, after "10" ms), the external signal 4 is turned on (external) until at least "50" ms has passed. It is possible to output a signal indicating ON as signal 4).
Then, when the setting key switch is turned off, it is a condition that "50" ms or more has passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). , The external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). If "50" ms or more has passed since the external signal 4 was turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), the external signal 4 is turned off when the setting key switch is detected to be off. (It is possible to output a signal indicating off as an external signal 4) (t2 in the figure).

Therefore, after detecting the on of the setting key switch and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4), the setting key switch is turned off before "50" ms elapses. When detected, the external signal 4 is turned off after a minimum of "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, after detecting the on of the setting key switch and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4), the setting key switch is turned off after "50" ms or more have passed. When detected, the external signal 4 can be turned off immediately (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(B) shows the relationship between the detection / non-detection of an error and the output of the external signal 4. Here, "error detection" corresponds to any bit being "1" in the error detection flag of the address "F294 (H)", and "error not detected" means the error. This corresponds to the detection flag being "0".
As soon as "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 from when "1" is stored in the error detection flag until the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) is "0" ms.
Further, once "1" is stored in the error detection flag, the external signal is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) (time t3). Further, when the error detection flag is cleared, the external signal 4 can be turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2). The error detection flag is cleared when the error is removed or when the error number is stored although the error is not removed, as described above.

Therefore, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4), before "50" ms elapses. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 is turned off after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). Can be output).
On the other hand, after detecting that the error detection flag has become "1" and turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4), after "50" ms or more have passed. When it is detected that the error detection flag has become "0", the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(C) shows the relationship between the display / non-display of the error and the output of the external signal 4. The "error display" here means any value other than "0" in the error number of the address "F051 (H)" (in the example of FIG. 88, any of "100 (D)" to "107 (D)". ) Is stored, and "non-display of error" corresponds to the value of the error number being "0". Although a storage area for storing a flag indicating error display / non-display may be provided, it is based on the data stored in the storage area for displaying the error number as in the present embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage area used by determining the display / non-display of the error.

When a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 can be turned on immediately (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output after the value other than the error number “0” is stored is “0” ms.
Further, once a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) (time). t3). Further, after a value other than "0" is stored in the error number, the external signal 4 is turned on for at least "50" ms or more (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), and then the error number. When is cleared, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4) (time t2).

Therefore, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared before "50" ms elapses after the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), After at least "50" ms have elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, when the error number is stored and the error number is cleared after "50" ms or more has passed after the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), It is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 4 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(D) shows the relationship between the on / off of the power supply and the output of the external signal 4. Here, various detection methods can be mentioned as to whether or not the power is turned on (whether or not the power switch 11 is turned on in FIG. 1). In this example, "power on" means the address "F013". It is assumed that it corresponds to the case where the initial value "136 (D)" of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure / recovery is stored in "(H)".
When the power on is detected (when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is turned off and restored), the external signal 4 can be turned on immediately (indicated as the external signal 4 to be turned on). It is possible to output a signal). The minimum value of the time t1 until the external signal 4 is output after the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time when the power is turned off and restored is "0" ms.
Further, when the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power failure / recovery, the external signal 4 is turned on for "300" ms (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) (. Time t3). Here, "300" ms corresponds to the number of interrupts "136". Further, when the output time of the external signal 4 becomes "0" when the power is turned off and restored, the external signal 4 can be immediately turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). (Time t2).

Therefore, the initial value is stored in the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is turned off and restored, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), the power switch 11 is turned off. When this is detected (when the D7 bit of the input port 0 level data becomes "1"), the external signal 4 is turned off after "300" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 4 (external). It is possible to output a signal indicating off as signal 4).
On the other hand, when the power is turned off and restored, the initial value is stored in the external signal 4 output time, and after the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), the output time of the external signal 4 is ". When 300 "ms has elapsed, the external signal 4 is turned off even when the power switch 11 is maintained in the ON state (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

(E) shows the relationship between the opening / closing of the front door 12 and the output of the external signal 5. Here, "the front door 12 is opened" corresponds to the time when the on of the door switch is detected. In particular, in the eighteenth embodiment, it corresponds to the case where the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data (or the input port 0 rising data) becomes “1”.
When the on of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 can be turned on immediately (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5). The minimum value of the time t1 from detecting the on of the door switch to outputting the external signal 5 is "0" ms.
When the on of the door switch is detected, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) (time t3). As a result, even if the front door 12 is closed immediately after the front door 12 is opened, the external signal 5 is turned on for at least "50" ms (indicating that the external signal 5 is on). The signal can be output).

Therefore, after detecting the on of the door switch and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5), the off of the door switch was detected before the elapse of "50" ms. At this time, the external signal 5 is turned off after at least "50" ms has elapsed as the output time of the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
On the other hand, after detecting the on of the door switch and turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5), the off of the door switch was detected after "50" ms or more passed. At that time, it is possible to immediately turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

The output destination of the external signal 4 or the external signal 5 is a hall computer or the like, but the external signal 4 or 5 is turned on for "50" ms or more (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4 or 5). ) Therefore, the hall computer (data lamp) or the like can reliably receive the external signals 4 and 5. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act such as turning on the setting key switch for a moment (for example, about "5" to "10" ms) or a fraudulent act including opening the front door 12 for a moment is performed, the hall The external signal 4 or 5 can be received by a computer or the like.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 90 is a modification of Example 1 shown in FIG. 89.
In FIG. 90
Time t1 from the time when the on of the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected to the time when the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4),
Time t1 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) becomes "1" until the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4),
Time t1 from the time when the error number shown in (c) is stored until the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4),
Time t1 from the time when the on of the door switch shown in (e) is detected until the external signal 5 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5).
Are all set to "0" ms.

In FIG. 90, the interval of the time t1 is shown to exceed "0", but in reality, for example, in (a), the timing at which the setting key switch is turned from off to on and the external signal 4 The timing when the output turns from off to on is almost the same (from the timing when the setting key switch turns from off to on, the timing when the output of the external signal 4 turns from off to on is within the "2" division). ..
Further, the time t3 for turning on the external signal 4 in (a) to (c) in the figure and the external signal 5 shown in (e) in the figure (making it possible to output the signal indicating on as the external signals 4 and 5). Is a minimum of 50 ms. This point is similar to the example of FIG. 89.
Furthermore, the time t3 for turning on the external signal 4 in the figure (d) (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is “300” ms, as in the example of FIG. 89.

Furthermore,
Time t2 from when the off of the setting key switch shown in (a) is detected until the external signal 4 is turned off (the signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
Time t2 from when the error detection flag shown in (b) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (the signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
Time t2 from when the error number shown in (c) is cleared until the external signal 4 is turned off (the signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
Time t2 from when the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is turned off and restored as shown in (d) becomes "0" until the external signal 4 is turned off (the signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
Time t2 from when the off of the door switch shown in (e) is detected until the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
Are all "50" ms.

To do so, for example, a timer for managing the output time of the external signal 4 when the setting key switch is detected to be off, the error detection flag is cleared, or the error number is cleared. The value "24 (D)" is set, the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process, and when the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 4 is turned off (off as the external signal 4). It is possible to output a signal indicating).
Similarly, when the off of the door switch is detected, the timer value "24 (D)" for managing the output time of the external signal 5 is set, and the timer value is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process. When the timer value becomes "0", the external signal 5 may be turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

Subsequently, the outputs of the external signal 4 and the external signal 5 will be described with reference to the flowchart. 91 to 94 are flowcharts showing external signal output processing.
91 and 92 are flowcharts showing Example 1 of external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 92 is a flowchart following FIG. 91. Furthermore, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the external signal output processing. Further, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the external signal output processing.
The external signal output process (step S3221) is, for example, a process in FIG. 53 between step S455 (timer measurement) and step S456 (LED display control).

First, Example 1 of the external signal output processing will be described.
In FIG. 91, in step S3231, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on. This process determines whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch is on. When it is determined that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3237, and when it is determined that the setting key switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3232.

In step S3232, it is determined whether or not an error has been detected. This process determines whether or not any bit of the error detection flag is "1". If it is determined that any bit of the error detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3237, and if it is determined that none of the bits is "1" (no error is detected), the process proceeds to step S3233.
In step S3233, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. This process reads the error number and determines whether or not it is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that no error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3234. If the value is other than "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed and the process proceeds to step S3237.

In step S3234, it is determined whether or not "300" ms have elapsed since the power was turned on. As described above, when the recovery from the power off is detected, the initial value "136 (D)" is set to the external signal 4 output time at the time of power off and recovery at the address "F013 (H)", and each interrupt process is performed. It is subtracted by "1". Then, in step S3234, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure / recovery is "0", and if it is "0", "300" ms has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on. It is determined that the process proceeds to step S3235. On the other hand, if the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is turned off and restored is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed a predetermined time. Here, “24 (D)” is set for the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014 (H)” in step S3240 described later. Then, in step S3235, it is determined whether or not the external signal 4 management time is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0" (when it is determined that the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed), The process proceeds to step S3236, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3236, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). Then, the process proceeds to step S3242 (FIG. 92).

On the other hand, if "Yes" is determined in step S3231, S3232, or S3233 and the process proceeds to step S3237, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has been turned from off to on in this interrupt processing. Whether or not the D2 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on in this interrupt processing is determined, for example, first, if the input port 0 rise data is provided, the input port 0 rise data. It is determined whether or not the D2 bit of is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0", and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing. When the D2 bit of is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned from off to on in this interrupt processing. When it is determined that the setting key switch is turned from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the setting key switch is not turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3238.

In step S3238, it is determined whether or not the error detection flag has changed from off to on. Here, for example, by saving the error detection flag in the previous interrupt processing and performing a comparison operation with the error detection flag in the current interrupt processing, the error detection flag is turned from off to on in the current interrupt processing. Judge whether or not. Then, when it is determined that the error detection flag has changed from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error detection flag has not been turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3239.

In step S3239, it is determined whether or not the error number has changed from being hidden (“0”) to being displayed (other than “0”). Here, for example, by saving the error number in the previous interrupt processing and performing a contrast operation with the error number in the current interrupt processing, the error number is other than "0" to "0" in the current interrupt processing. Judge whether or not it became. Then, when it is determined that the error number has changed from "0" to something other than "0", the process proceeds to step S3240, and when it is determined that the error number remains "0", the process proceeds to step S3241.

When the process proceeds from step S3237, S3238, or S3239 to step S3240, "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms is set as the initial value in the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014 (H)". .. Then, the process proceeds to step S3241.
In step S3241, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). Then, the process proceeds to step S3242 (FIG. 92).
In step S3242, it is determined whether or not the door switch is on. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3245, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, “24 (D)” is set for the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” in step S3246 described later. Then, in step S3243, it is determined whether or not the external signal 5 management time is "0", and if it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S3244, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the step is taken. Proceed to S3247.
In step S3244, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on and the process proceeds to step S3245, it is determined whether or not the door switch is turned on from off in the interrupt processing this time. Whether or not the D3 bit (door switch signal) of the input port 0 level data is turned on in this interrupt processing is determined by, for example, first, if the input port 0 rising data is provided, the input port 0 rising data. It is determined whether or not the D3 bit is "1". Secondly, the input port 0 level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is saved, the D3 bit of the input port 0 level data at the previous interrupt processing is "0", and the input port 0 level data at the current interrupt processing. When the D3 bit of is "1", it is determined that the door switch has been turned from off to on by this interrupt processing. When it is determined that the door switch is turned from off to on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch is not turned on from off, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3246, “24 (D)” corresponding to the output time “50” ms is set as the initial value in the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)”. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.
In step S3247, the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing Example 2 of the external signal output processing.
In the example of FIG. 92,
(1) As shown in step S3237, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on.
(2) As shown in step S3238, when the error detection flag changes from off to on.
(3) As shown in step S3239, when the error number is newly stored, the output time of the external signal 4 is set.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 93, in this interrupt processing, it is based on whether or not the setting key switch is on, whether or not the error detection flag is on, and whether or not the error number is stored. The output of the external signal 4 is controlled.

In FIG. 93, the same process as in FIGS. 91 and 92 is assigned the same step number. In the example of FIG. 93, the steps different from those of FIGS. 91 and 92 are not provided.
In the example of FIG. 93,
(1) When it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on (when the D2 bit of the input port 0 level data of the address "F00A (H)" is "1"),
(2) In step S3234, when "300" ms has not passed since the power was turned on (the output time of the external signal 4 when the power is turned off and restored at the address "F013 (H)" is not "0").
(3) When it is determined in step S3233 that an error is being displayed (when the error number stored in the address "F051 (H)" is other than "0"),
(4) In step S3232, when an error is being detected (when any bit of the error detection flag of the address "F294 (H)" is "1").
Each proceeds to step S3240 and stores the number of interrupts "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms of the external signal 4 at the address "F014 (H)".

Therefore, in the previous interrupt processing, for example, in step S3231, it is determined that the setting key switch is on, and in step S3240, "24 (D)" is set in the external signal 4 management time of the address "F014 (H)". Later, even in this interrupt processing, if it is determined in step S3231 that the setting key switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the external signal 4 management time "24 (D)" is reset. When it is determined in step S3234 that "300" ms has not passed since the power was turned on, when it is determined that an error is being displayed in step S3233, and when it is determined that an error is being detected in step S3233. The same is true. Then, after step S3240, the process proceeds to step S3241.

If it is determined in step S3232 that error detection is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S3235. In step S3235, it is determined whether or not the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014 (H)” is “0”, it is determined that the output time “50” ms of the external signal 4 has elapsed. Then, if the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4), and the output time of the external signal 4 has elapsed. If not, the process proceeds to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

Next, the process proceeds to step S3242, and it is determined whether or not the door switch is on. When it is determined that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and when it is determined that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3243.
In step S3246, "24 (D)" is set to the external signal 5 management time of the address "F015 (H)". In this case as well, similarly to the above, it is determined that the door switch is on in the previous interrupt processing, and after "24 (D)" is set as the external signal 5 management time in step S3246, the step is also performed in this interrupt processing. If it is determined in S3242 that the door switch is on, the external signal 5 management time "24 (D)" is reset in step S3246. Then, the process proceeds to step S3247.

In step S3243, it is determined whether or not the output time “50” ms of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Here, as described above, when the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” is “0”, it is determined that the output time “50” ms of the external signal 5 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the output time of the external signal 5 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (it is possible to output a signal indicating off as the external signal 5), and the output time of the external signal 5 is increased. When it is determined that the elapse has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is completed.

As described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 91, whether or not the setting key switch is turned from off to on, whether or not the error detection flag is turned from off to on, and the error number is other than "0" to "0". In each determination as to whether or not, the external signal 4 management time is set by the interrupt processing determined to be "Yes", and then the external signal 4 management time is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt processing to "0". When it becomes, the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 93, when the setting key switch is on, the error detection flag is "1", and an error number other than "0" is stored, the external signal 4 Keeps on (makes it possible to output a signal indicating ON as an external signal 4). When the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number, the external signal 4 is external when the management time becomes "0". The signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as an external signal 4).

In other words, the external signal 4 is turned on until "50" ms elapses after the setting key switch is off, the error detection flag is "0", and "0" is stored as the error number. (It is possible to output a signal indicating ON as an external signal 4). Therefore, for example, when an error is detected or the setting key switch is detected for a moment (for example, only a "3" interrupt), the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off is used as the external signal 4). Even when the condition (which enables output) is satisfied, the external signal 4 can be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) for at least "50" ms.

Further, in the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 93, when the timer value “24 (D)” is set for the external signal 4 in step S3240 and then the next interrupt processing is executed, the said. The timer value is subtracted from "24 (D)" to "23 (D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240, and again. The timer value "24 (D)" is set.

After that, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process, but if the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) is not satisfied, the process in step S3240 is performed. Does not pass through, so the timer value will eventually become "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3235, so the process proceeds to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (output a signal indicating off as the external signal 4). It is possible).

By doing so, when the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (turning on as the external signal 4). The indicated signal can be output). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on is output as the external signal 4). It is possible). Next, when the condition for turning on the external signal 4 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 4) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt process. It is subtracted by "1 (D)". The external signal 4 is turned on until the timer value becomes "0 (D)" (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 4 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4).

The above is the same for the external signal 5.
In the external signal output processing (interrupt processing) shown in FIG. 93, when the timer value “24 (D)” related to the external signal 5 is set in step S3246 and then the next interrupt processing is executed, the timer value is changed. It is subtracted from "24 (D)" to "23 (D)". After that, in the external signal output processing of the next interrupt processing, when the door switch is on (when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is satisfied) , Step S3246, the timer value "24 (D)" is set again.

After that, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process, but the condition that the door switch is turned off (the external signal 5 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied). ), Since the process of step S3246 is not performed, the timer value is finally set to "0 (D)". When the timer value becomes "0 (D)", it is determined as "Yes" in step S3243, so the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (output a signal indicating off as the external signal 5). It is possible).

By doing so, the external signal 5 is turned on from the time when the door switch is turned on (the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5) is satisfied). (It is possible to output a signal indicating ON as an external signal 5). Then, while the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating on as the external signal 5) is satisfied, the external signal 5 is turned on (the signal indicating on is output as the external signal 5). It is possible). Next, when the condition for turning on the external signal 5 (making it possible to output a signal indicating ON as the external signal 5) is no longer satisfied, the timer value is set to "0 (D)" for each interrupt process. It is subtracted by "1". The external signal 5 is turned on until the timer value becomes "0 (D)" (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5). Then, when the timer value becomes "0 (D)", the external signal 5 is turned off (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).
In Example 2 of FIG. 93 above, since it is not necessary to generate the rising data and check the level data and the like at the time of the previous interrupt processing, the hall computer is external while simplifying the external signal output processing. It is possible to secure the time during which the signal indicating that the signal 4 or 5 is on can be received.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the external signal output processing. In FIG. 94, the steps that perform the same processing as in FIG. 93 are assigned the same number, and the steps that perform different processing are underlined in the step numbers.
In Example 3 of FIG. 94, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 4, first, in step S3251, whether or not the external signal 4 management time of the address “F014 (H)” is “0”. To judge. If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3241 to turn on the external signal 4 (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). On the other hand, when the external signal 4 management time is “0”, in the determination of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, if the output condition of the external signal 4 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3240 and the address “F014 (H”) ) ”, Set“ 24 (D) ”corresponding to the output time“ 50 ”ms to the external signal 4 management time, and proceed to step S3241. On the other hand, in the determination of steps S3231, S3234, S3233, and S3232, if it is determined that the output condition of the external signal 4 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3236 to turn off the external signal 4 (as the external signal 4). It is possible to output a signal indicating off).

Similarly to the above, when determining whether or not to output the external signal 5 for the external signal 5, first, in step S3252, the external signal 5 management time of the address “F015 (H)” is “0”. Determine if it exists. If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S3247 to turn on the external signal 5 (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 5). On the other hand, when the external signal 5 management time is "0", if it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is on, the process proceeds to step S3246, and the external signal 5 management time at the address "F015 (H)" is reached. Is set to "24 (D)" corresponding to the output time "50" ms, and the process proceeds to step S3247. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3242 that the door switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S3244 to turn off the external signal 5 (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 5).

As described above, in Example 3 of FIG. 94, when the set timer value (external signal 4 management time or external signal 5 management time) is "0" and the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer is used. Set the value. Even if the set timer value becomes "0", if the output condition of the external signal 4 or 5 is satisfied, the timer value is set again.
Also in the method of Example 3 of FIG. 94, as in Example 2 of FIG. 93, it is not necessary to generate the rising data and to check the level data and the like at the time of the previous interrupt processing. While simplifying, it is possible to ensure the time during which the hall computer can receive the signal indicating that the external signal 4 or 5 is on.

Although the 18th embodiment has been described above, the 18th embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) When the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, or when any of the displayed errors is satisfied, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not limited to this, and each individual external signal (for example, external signals 4, 6 and 7) is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as external signals 4, 6 and 7). You may. In addition, a specific external signal (for example, external signal 5 or 6) may be turned on when either or both of the setting key switch is on and the door switch is on are satisfied (for example, the external signal 5 or 6). It may be possible to output a signal indicating ON as an external signal 5 or 6).

(2) Various timer values of addresses "F013 (H)" to "F015 (H)" are subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "N (N ≧ 2)". You may subtract "N" for each "N" interrupt, or "1" for each "N" interrupt. For example, after setting "12 (D)" as the external signal 4 management time or the external signal 5 management time, "1" may be subtracted every two interrupts.
(3) Various modifications and numerical values described in the 18th embodiment are examples, and can be appropriately designed. For example, in FIG. 89, the times t1 and t2 have a minimum of "0" ms, so that various settings such as "5" ms and "10" ms can be made.

Further, in FIG. 89, the time t3 (in the figure, (a), (b), (c), and (e)) is the minimum "50" ms, so that, for example, "75" ms or "100" ms. Etc., various settings are possible.
In particular, at the time t3 of FIGS. 89 and 90 (in FIGS. 89 and 90, (a), (b), (c), and (e)), the hall computer or the like reliably receives the external signals 4 and 5. It may be as long as possible, and may be less than "50" ms depending on the performance of the hall computer or the like.
Furthermore, the time t2 in FIG. 90 is not limited to “50” ms, and can be variously set according to the specifications and the like.

(4) When the setting key switch is turned from off to on, or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4), but the setting is made. The external signal 4 may be turned on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) when the change mode is entered or the setting confirmation mode is entered.
Here, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the setting key switch is turned from off to on, or when the setting key switch is on, the external signal 4 is turned on (a signal indicating on is used as the external signal 4). When configured to enable output), the external signal 4 is turned on (outputs a signal indicating on as the external signal 4) even when the setting key switch is turned from off to on while the reel 31 is rotating. It is possible).
On the other hand, when the external signal 4 is turned on (the signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4) when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, the reel Even if the setting key switch is turned from off to on during the rotation of 31, the external signal 4 is turned off based on the status of the setting key switch (a signal indicating off can be output as the external signal 4). To do). However, there may be a case where the external signal 4 is turned on based on an error (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4).

(5) In the eighteenth embodiment, any one of the following: when the setting key switch is on, when an error is detected, when an error is being displayed, or when "300" ms has not passed since the power was turned on. When one of the conditions was satisfied, the external signal 4 was turned on (a signal indicating on could be output as the external signal 4). However, it is not necessary to set all of these conditions, and the external signal 4 is turned on only when one or a part of the conditions, for example, the setting key switch is on (a signal indicating on can be output as the external signal 4). It may be configured. In other words, the external signal 4 is not turned on (the signal indicating on is not output as the external signal 4) even when other conditions such as "300" ms have not passed since the power was turned on. May be.
(6) All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification including the 18th embodiment are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<19th Embodiment>
The nineteenth embodiment relates to a setting change end sound.
Hereinafter, the setting change end sound will be described when the gaming machine is a slot machine (19th embodiment (A)) and when the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine (19th embodiment (B)). To do.
In the following description, the "setting change state (also referred to as" setting change mode "or" setting change processing ")" is a state in which the set value can be changed and the game is started (progress). ) It is a game state that cannot be done. In the setting change state, it is possible to end without changing the setting value.
Further, the "setting confirmation state (also referred to as" setting confirmation mode "or" setting confirmation processing ")" is a state in which the setting value cannot be changed but the current setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be started (progressed) as in the setting change state.
On the other hand, the "normal state (also referred to as" normal mode ")" refers to a state other than the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. In the normal state, the game can be started (progressed) except for special circumstances such as an error occurring.

<19th Embodiment (A): When the game machine is a slot machine>
FIG. 95 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the 19th embodiment (A), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 1 of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 95, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided as configurations not shown in FIG. Although the above configuration is not shown in FIG. 1, it does not mean that the above configuration is not provided in the first embodiment.
The setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 do not necessarily have to be provided on the main control board 50, and may be provided as separate devices.

The door switch 17 is attached to either the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 in FIG. 22.
Then, as shown in FIG. 22, the cabinet 13 and the front door 12 are normally closed, but the front door 12 is opened when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The door switch 17 is a switch that turns on when the front door 12 is opened and detects the opening of the front door 12. When the door switch 17 detects that the front door 12 is open, a door open error is notified.
Further, the setting key insertion port 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are mounted on the main control board 50.
The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is turned on by inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion port 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, and when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. It is a switch used.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that also serves as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when the setting value is changed in the setting change state. Further, the reset switch is a switch that is operated when the state before the error occurs is restored after the error that has occurred is removed.
In the following description, there are a case where it is called a "setting change (reset) switch 153", a case where it is called a "setting change switch 153", and a case where it is called a "reset switch 153".
In the present embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

When shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 while the power is turned on, and the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, for example. As a result, the setting key switch 152 is turned on. When the door switch 17 is turned on and the setting key switch 151 is turned on while the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered. In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed (although the set value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current set value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. It is possible to shift to the setting change state (setting change process of FIG. 39).

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on as described above, as shown in FIG. 38, a checksum is executed (step S204), the designated switch is on (step S208), and the power off / return is abnormal (step S208). When step S209) or setting change is possible (step S210), it is possible to shift to the setting change process (setting change state).

In the 19th embodiment, the "designated switch" in step S208 is two switches, a door switch 17 and a setting key switch 152.
Alternatively, in addition to the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152, a setting door switch (a switch that turns on when the cover provided so as to cover the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 is opened) If provided, there are three switches, including a setting door switch.
In the following description, it is assumed that the setting door switch is not provided, and the designated switches are the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152.

Then, in FIG. 38, in step S208, only when the door switch 17 is on and the setting key switch 152 is on, it is determined as “Yes” in step S208, and the setting change state can be entered. On the other hand, when only one of the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 is on, or when both switches are off, it is determined as "No" in step S208, and the setting is changed. Does not migrate.
As a result, the setting change state is not performed when the front door 12 is not opened or when the setting key is not inserted and there is a high possibility of a goto action.

Further, in FIG. 38, the "start of the setting change state" is firstly defined when it is determined as "Yes" in step S209 or when it is determined as "No" in step S210. .. In this case, the "setting change state" includes the processes of steps S221 to S233 in FIG. 39 as the processes in the setting change state.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request at the start of setting change is set in step S234 and the control command set 1 in step S235 is executed (command to start setting change to the sub control board 80). (When) is set in "Start of setting change state".

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in FIG. 39, immediately before step S221 may be defined as "start of setting change state". Further, immediately after step S231 (at the end of initialization) may be defined as "start of setting change state". Furthermore, when the interrupt in step S233 is activated, or immediately after step S233 (immediately before step S234), "start of setting change state" may be defined.

Furthermore, in FIG. 39, the “end of the setting change state” may be defined when the setting key switch 152 is turned off in step S243.
Alternatively, secondly, in FIG. 39, when the output request at the end of the setting change is set in step S246 and the control command set 1 in step S247 is executed (command to end the setting change to the sub control board 80). (When) is set in "End of setting change state".
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is determined as "Yes" in step S242 (when the start switch 41 is operated and the set value is determined), it may be defined as "the end of the setting change state".

Further, as will be described later, the setting change state may be terminated on the condition that the front door 12 is closed, in other words, on the condition that the door switch 17 is turned from on to off. In this case, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state does not end when the front door 12 is open (when the door switch 17 is on).
Further, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is off) when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is not terminated. This is to prevent goto acts.
In the following description, in the 19th embodiment (A), when “Yes” is determined in step S243 in FIG. 39, that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, “at the end of the setting change state”. ".

When a command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in steps S246 and S247 of FIG. 39, the sub-control board 80 receives the command. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 executes an output (output by the effect lamp 21) that visually displays the setting change end sound and the end of the setting change.
Here, the setting change end sound corresponds to outputting the voice "The setting change is completed" from the speaker 22 in the present embodiment.

Here, there are various ideas about the speed of speaking words (Japanese), but if you follow the idea that a speed of about 300 characters per minute is appropriate, for example, you will say "The setting change will end". For "T01", the time from the start of audio output to the end of output may be set to about "2000" ms.
FIG. 96 is a time chart showing the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound, the lamp effect, and one game time described later in the 19th embodiment.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a command indicating that the setting change has been completed, the sub-control board 80 immediately outputs a setting change end sound. Here, in FIG. 39, if “Yes” is determined in step S243, it means that the setting change is completed in step S464 in the first interrupt processing (FIG. 53) after the determination in step S243 is “Yes”. Command is sent.

Then, in the sub-control board 80, interrupt processing is independently executed on the sub-control board 80 side, and it is determined for each interrupt processing whether or not a control command (command indicating that the setting change has been completed) has been received. ing. Then, when it is determined that the command indicating that the setting change has been completed has been received, the output of the setting change end sound is started.
In order to go through the above process, at least one interrupt (indicating an interrupt by the main control board 50. One interrupt time is "2.235" ms) from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S243 in FIG. 39. Later, the output processing of the setting change end sound or the output of the setting change end sound by the sub control board 80 is started. In other words, in FIG. 39, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed after the determination of “Yes” in step S243.

In FIG. 96, the timing at which the setting change state is changed from on to off is when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, as described above. However, after the setting key switch 152 is turned off, a command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, the sub control board 80 receives the command, and the output of the setting change end sound is started. Since the time is extremely short, in FIG. 96, the end timing of the setting change state and the output start timing of the setting change end sound are matched.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in addition to the above-mentioned setting change end sound, the effect lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode (“lighting” is a concept including blinking. Further, “lighting mode”. Is a concept that includes a lighting color.) Executes a lighting effect.
Here, when the effect lamp 21 is used for lighting, at least the lighting mode is not the same as when the effect lamp 21 is used for lighting when the special combination (accessory) is won. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A is lit in the lighting mode a among the effect lamps 21 as an effect indicating that the special role has been won, the effect lamp 21 is used as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed. When it is lit, a lamp other than the lamp A may be lit. In this case, as long as the lamp different from the lamp A is lit, the lighting mode may be the same as that for indicating that the special combination has been won.

Further, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lamp A may be turned on. However, the lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating that the special combination has been won.
As described above, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, the special role has been won (the special role has been won in the game, or the special role has been won. The lighting mode of the effect lamp 21 in the effect of notifying that the winning is carried over) is not the same. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is completed, even if the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the player wins the special role. It is possible to prevent confusion with the presence.

Further, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the special combination has been won are different so that the two are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used for other effects, and the lighting pattern is an effect that means the end of the setting change. It is preferable to be able to understand.
Further, for the effect lamp 21, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination has been won are made the same, and the settings of the other lamps other than the effect lamp 21 are changed. The lighting pattern indicating that the special combination has been completed may be different from the lighting pattern indicating that the special combination has been won.
Specifically, for example, when indicating that the setting change has been completed, the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps are all turned on, and when notifying that the special combination has been won, the effect lamp 21 is turned on. It is possible to turn on the lamp but not to turn on the other lamp. In this way, the administrator can grasp which state the effect lamp 21 and the other lamps (lamps of the game machine in general) are in by checking the lighting patterns.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 21 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in principle, it may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started before the setting change end sound is output. Alternatively, after starting the output of the setting change end sound and before ending the output of the setting change end sound, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started. Further, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 21 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
As shown in FIG. 96, in the following embodiment, the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.
Further, assuming that the lighting time of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is "T02",
T01> T02
T01 = T02
T01 <T02
However, as shown in FIG. 96, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that “T01 <T02”. For example, when the time T01 is set to about "2000" ms as described above, the time T02 may be set to, for example, about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, consider the case where the setting change state is terminated, the state shifts to the normal state (the state in which the game can be started), and the game is started immediately.
In the following, as shown in FIG. 96, the time (preparation time until the start of the game) required from the moment when the setting change state is finished until the game is started (until the game start condition is satisfied) is referred to as "T11". To do. Further, the time (1 game time) from the start of the game to the end of the game (after satisfying the start condition of the game) is defined as "T12".
In the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 39, the data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared. Therefore, for example, even if the bet data or the credit data is held before the setting change is started, the data including these is cleared. .. Therefore, immediately after the end of the setting change state, the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0". Therefore, after the setting change state is completed, as shown in FIG. 2, it is necessary to insert the medals M from the medal insertion slot 47 and bet a specified number before starting the game.

Here, in the normal game (when the accessory is not activated), the number of bets "3" is a specified number that is generally used, but in the 19th embodiment (A), the minimum number of bets "1" is set as the specified number. , It is assumed that the game can be started with the number of bets "1". When the specified number is "1", the game can be started earlier than when the specified number is "2" or "3".
In FIG. 2, when the medal M is at the position M1 and the medal M is released into the medal selector, it passes through the passage in the medal selector and reaches the insertion sensors 44a and 44b as described in the first embodiment. Detected. When the insertion sensors 44a and 44b determine that the medal has passed normally, a "1" bet is placed.

In FIG. 2, the time until the medal M is inserted from the position M1, detected by the insertion sensors 44a and 44b, and the specified number is bet corresponds to the preparation time “T11” for starting the game (note that the time until the game is started). The preparation time "T11" in this case does not consider the operation time for closing the front door 12 or canceling the door open error.)
Here, when the specified number is "1", one medal is required to be inserted, when the specified number is "2", two medals are required to be inserted, and when the specified number is "3", one medal is required to be inserted. Requires 3 medals to be inserted. In FIG. 2, the time from the state of the medal M1 until one medal is inserted and "1" is bet is defined as "T11a", and the time until two medals are inserted and "2" is bet is set. Assuming that "T11b" is set and the time from inserting three medals to betting "3" is set to "T11c".
T11a <T11b <T11c
Will be.
However, since two or three medals can be continuously inserted, T11b (in the case of the specified number "2") is shorter than twice the time of T11a (in the case of the specified number "1"). It is believed that there is. Similarly, T11c (in the case of the specified number "3") is considered to be shorter than three times the time of T11a (in the case of the specified number "1").

When the specified number is bet, the game can be started by operating the start switch 41. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the start switch 41 is operated at the moment when "1" is bet. Therefore, the time from the bet of the specified number to the operation of the start switch 41 is set to "0".
In FIG. 41, when the start switch 41 is operated (“Yes” in step S278), the rotation of the reel 31 is started in step S286.
Here, the motor 32 accelerates the reel 31 to reach a speed of 80 rotations per minute. When the speed reaches 80 rotations per minute, the speed is set to a constant speed. The operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is prohibited until the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, and after the constant speed state is reached, the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 becomes possible.
The time from the operation of the start switch 41 (after the rotation of the reel 31 starts) until the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted is defined as "T12a".

Next, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted until the first stop switch 42 is operated is set to "0".
When the stop switch 42 is operated, as shown in FIG. 13, a reel stop control time (time until the reel 31 stops) and a time in the 4-phase excited state are required (note that the 4-phase excited state is in the 4-phase excited state). Before the end, it may be possible to accept the operation of the next stop switch 42. An example thereof will be described later). Let these total times be "T12b".
When the 4-phase excitation state is completed, the operation of the next (second) stop switch 42 can be accepted. Here, it is assumed that the second stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first is completed and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops first to the operation of the second stop switch 42 is set to "0".

When the second stop switch 42 is operated, the operation of the third stop switch 42 can be accepted after the reel stop control time and the time "T12b", which is the time of the 4-phase excitation state, have elapsed in the same manner as described above. It becomes. Here, it is assumed that the third stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the four-phase excitation state of the second motor 32 is completed and the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted. In other words, the time from the end of the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 that stops second to the operation of the third stop switch 42 is set to "0".
When the third stop switch 42 is operated, the reel stop control time and the time “T12b”, which is the time of the four-phase excitation state, are required as described above.

The moment when the last reel 31 is stopped may be defined as the end of one game, but in the 19th embodiment (A), when the time of the four-phase excitation state with respect to the last reel 31 is finished, 1 It is determined that the game has been completed (when there is no payout).
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations is stopped in the game, it is determined that the game is finished when the payout process is finished, specifically, when the process shown in FIG. 49 is finished.
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 42, the automatic betting process is executed at the start of the next game. Therefore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the end of the game is not the end of the automatic bet processing but the end of the 4-phase excitation state with respect to the third reel 31.

For example, first, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the credit addition process is executed, the end of the credit addition process is defined as the end of the game.
Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the actual medal payout process is executed, the final medal payout (driving the hopper 36) is finished, and in FIG. 49, “Yes” in step S401. "(When it is determined that the payout number data is" 0 ") is defined as the end of the game. However, even if it is assumed that the number of credits is "0" immediately after the setting change is completed, the game is started immediately after the setting change state is completed, and the small winning combination having the maximum payout number "15" is won. All medals paid out will be credited. Therefore, medals may not actually be paid out in one game immediately after the setting change is completed.
"T12c" is the time from when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 with respect to the third reel 31 is completed until the medal payout (addition to the credit) is completed. And.
However, when the winning combination is not won (when no medal is paid out), "T12c = 0".

Further, when an effect (such as a notification effect of a winning combination) is output when all reels 31 are stopped, the effect time is not included in one game time. For example, even if an effect of several seconds is output from the time when all reels 31 are stopped, at the end of the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 when the last reel 31 is stopped (at that time, all reels 31 are stopped). It is assumed that one game ends (even if the effect that started the output sometimes continues). That is, the end of one game is based on the control by the main control board 50.

From the above, when the operation for starting the game is performed immediately after the end of the setting change state and the game is started, the preparation time "T11" until the game is started is required.
Further, one game time "T12" is, as described above,
(1) The time "T12a" from the operation of the start switch 41 (after the rotation of the reel 31 starts) until the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted.
(2) The time from when the first stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the 4-phase excited state "T12b"
(3) The time from when the second stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the 4-phase excited state "T12b"
(4) The time from when the third stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops and the time in the 4-phase excited state "T12b"
(5) Time until the end of medal payout (addition to credit) when winning a small role "T12c"
Needs.
Therefore,
T12 = T12a + 3 × T12b + T12c
Will be.
It is assumed that the times of the three "T12b" are the same.

Further, a lottery of the winning combination is performed when the start switch 41 is operated (step S282 in FIG. 41), and when, for example, a special winning combination (role) is won in this lottery, it is also referred to as a freeze (also referred to as "freeze effect"). ) May be selected.
The "freeze" in this case refers to a state in which the progress of the game is stopped for a certain period of time. Therefore, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery of the winning combination is executed, the special winning combination is won, and it is decided to execute the freeze as an effect corresponding to the winning of the special winning combination, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. do not do. Then, after the freeze is completed, the rotation of the reel 31 starts. When the progress of the game is stopped due to the freeze, the sub-control means 80 outputs the effect by using the image display device 23 or the like.
Assuming that the freeze time in this case is "T12d", one game time "T12" when the freeze is executed is "T12a + T12b x 3 + T12c + T12d".

Next, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is examined. In order for one game time to be the shortest, the freeze is not executed and the winning combination is not won.
Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T12" is "T12a + 3 × T12b".
First, the specified number is set to "1", and in FIG. 2, the time from when the medal M is inserted (dropped) into the medal selector from the position of M1 until it is bet (the time required to start the game). It is assumed that "T11" is about "800" ms at the shortest.
Further, it is assumed that the time "T12a" from the operation of the start switch 41 until the reel 31 becomes a constant speed and the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted is about "1200" ms.

Furthermore, since the stop switch 42 is operated, the time "T12b" until the reel 31 is stopped and controlled and the 4-phase excitation state of the motor 32 ends (the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted) is As illustrated in FIG. 13, the shortest is about "140" ms (the shortest reel stop control time is about "40" ms, and the shortest is about "100" ms in the 4-phase excited state). Suppose.
In this case, "T11 + T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time), is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 140 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2420" ms. It becomes a degree.
When the medals are paid out after all the reels 31 are stopped, or when the freeze is executed when the start switch 41 is operated, one game time "T12" is longer than the above time.

On the other hand, as described above, when the setting change state is finished, the setting change end sound is output for the time "T01" (about "2000" ms), and the effect lamp 21 notifies the end of the setting change. The lighting is output for the time "T02" (for example, about "2500" to "4000" ms).
Therefore, when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is finished, the setting change end sound “T01” output immediately after the setting change state is finished, the preparation time “T11” for starting the game, and one game The relationship with the time "T12 (shortest time)" is
T01 <T11 + T12
Will be.
As a result, even if the operation (preparation) for starting the game is performed from the moment when the setting change state is finished and the game is started at the moment when the preparation for starting the game is completed, the game is ended. Before, the output of the setting change end sound has been completed.
FIG. 96 shows the relationship between the above times “T01”, “T11”, and “T12”.

Here, the above example is an example in which the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted after the stop switch 42 is operated and the four-phase excitation state is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the next stop switch 42 may be accepted after the stop switch 42 is operated and before the four-phase excitation state is terminated. If controlled in this way, the game can be digested faster. For example, after the stop switch 42 is operated (the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted), the operation of the next stop switch 42 can be accepted at the time of the next interrupt processing.
In this case, of the time of "T12b" described above, the time in the four-phase excited state can be considered to be substantially "0", so that "T12b (minimum time) = 40 (ms)".
Therefore, "T11 + T12", which is the time required to start one game and one game time (shortest time) in this case, is "800 (T11) + 1200 (T12a) + 40 x 3 (T12b x 3)" = "2120 It will be about ms.
Therefore, even when controlled in this way, "T01 <T11 + T12" is obtained.

The production timing of the slot machine 10 is as follows: when the start switch 41 is operated (when the reel 31 starts rotating), when the first stop switch 42 is operated (when the first reel 31 is stopped), and when the second stop switch 42 is operated (first). When the 2 reels 31 are stopped) and when the 3rd stop switch 42 is operated (when all reels 31 are stopped), an effect (the most important effect in the game) that finally announces the winning combination of the game is output. Most of the timing is when all reels 31 are stopped.
Therefore, when an effect of notifying the winning combination of the game is output when all reels 31 are stopped, the effect is output after the output of the setting change end sound is completed. Therefore, when all reels 31 are stopped. The production in and the setting change end sound do not overlap (do not overlap). Therefore, even when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is finished, it is possible to accurately understand the effect when all the reels 31 are stopped.

However, when there is an effect to be output when the start switch 41 is operated or when the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the output time of the effect and the output time of the setting change end sound may overlap.
Here, the speaker 22 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of channels. Then, the channel for outputting the setting change end sound and the channel for outputting the notification effect of the winning combination are set to be different. As a result, even when the notification effect of the winning combination is output from the speaker 22 after the output of the setting change end sound is started, the setting change end sound is not deleted in the middle. However, it is possible that the setting change end sound and the winning combination notification sound may overlap.

Further, the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set.
T02 <T11 + T12
T02 = T11 + T12
T02> T11 + T12
Any of these cases can be considered. However, as described above, if the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is not confused with the lighting of the effect lamp 21 as the notification effect of the winning combination, no problem occurs.

In addition, the preparation time "T11" until the game starts eliminates the time to close the front door 12 and the door open error (error indicating that the front door 12 is open) after the setting change state is completed. Does not consider the time to do.
When the setting change state is finished, at least the front door 12 should be in the open state. Therefore, even after the setting change state is terminated, the slot machine 10 side detects the door open error and notifies the error. The game cannot proceed (start) when a door open error occurs. When a door open error occurs, the blocker 45 is controlled to be off (a state in which medals are returned), so that even if medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 47, no bet is made. Even if the bet is placed, the game is not started even if the start switch 41 is operated.

In order to clear the door open error, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. It is possible to configure the door open error to be eliminated the moment the door switch 17 is turned off, but in general, the key is inserted into the key insertion slot for opening the front door 12 provided on the front door 12. The door open error is eliminated (error notification is terminated) by rotating the key in the opposite direction (for example, counterclockwise) to the case of inserting and opening the front door 12. Therefore, the preparation time "T11" for starting the game after the end of the setting change state includes the operation time for closing the front door 12 and inserting the key to release the door open error. This is because the game cannot be started with the door open error occurring.

When the setting change state is terminated on the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state can be terminated even if the front door 12 is open. Therefore, in this case, the output of the setting change end sound is started with the front door 12 open, and the lighting of the effect lamp 21 indicating that the setting change is completed is also started.

On the other hand, it is possible to make the specification so that the setting change state is not terminated unless the front door 12 is closed. In this case, simply turning off the setting key switch 152 does not end the setting change state, but closing the front door 12 (turning off the door switch 17) is set as one of the end conditions of the setting change state. The setting change state may be terminated only by closing the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed (when the door switch 17 is turned off), the output of the setting change end sound is started. Alternatively, the setting change state may be terminated when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cleared. In this case, when the door open error is cleared, the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cleared, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game "T11 + T12". Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than that of "", the output of the setting change end sound is completed before the end of one game immediately after the setting change is completed.
Further, if the setting key switch 152 is turned off, even if the front door 12 is open, when the setting change state is terminated, the output of the setting change end sound is started while the front door 12 is open. Therefore, even if one game is ended after the time "T11 + T12" has passed after the front door 12 is closed and the door open error is cleared, the output of the setting change end sound is finished before the end of the game. ..
Assuming that the (operation) time from the end of the setting change state to the closing of the front door 12 and the cancellation of the door open error is "T10", one game is started after the end of the setting change state. The preparation time is "T10 + T11". Therefore, it goes without saying that "T01 <T10 + T11 + T12".

The above is the case where the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set to be shorter than the time "T11 + T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T11 + T12" from the end of the setting change state to the end of one game can be variously set as follows.
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the average time "T11 + T12" when the winning combination is not won.
(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the average time "T11 + T12" when the special combination is won in the combination lottery result. When a special combination is won as a result of the combination lottery, the above-mentioned freeze may or may not be executed, so the average time is "T12". For example, when a special role is won, if the freeze is executed with a probability of "p"% and the freeze is not executed with a probability of "100-p"%, the average value of one game time "T12" is
"Average 1-game time T12 x (100-p) / 100 without freeze" + "Average 1-game time T12 x p / 100 with freeze"
Will be.

<19th Embodiment (B): When the game machine is a pachinko game machine>
Next, the relationship between the setting change state, the setting change end sound, and one game time in the pachinko game machine will be described.
First, the outline of the pachinko game machine will be described.
FIG. 97 is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the front side (player side). Further, FIG. 98 is an external perspective view of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 as viewed from the back surface side. In FIG. 98, the unit including the image display device 543 and the game board 504 is not shown, and the glass door 505 can be seen from the back surface side. Further, in FIG. 98, the illustration of the substrate cases other than the main substrate case 550 is omitted as appropriate.
Furthermore, FIG. 99 is a block diagram of the Pachinko gaming machine 500.

In the hall, the Pachinko game machine 500 is generally installed on an island. The pachinko gaming machine 500 first includes an outer frame 501 and a front frame 502. The outer frame 501 is a frame body formed so as to surround the outer circumference of the pachinko game machine 500. Further, the front frame 502 is attached to the front side (player side) of the outer frame 501 in FIG. 97. The front frame 502 is attached to the outer frame 501 so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 501 by a hinge mechanism 503 provided at the upper left end portion in FIG. 97 of the outer frame 501. Therefore, when the Pachinko game machine 500 is installed on an island, the outer frame 501 is fixed to the island, but the front frame 502 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 501, and is on the back side of the front frame 502. It will be accessible.

The front frame 502 is provided with a game board 504. Although not shown, the game board 504 is provided with an image display device 543, nails, accessories, a windmill, various winning openings (including a starting opening 532 described later), and the like. Further, a portion of the front frame 502 other than the game board 504 is provided with an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, an upper plate 506, a lower plate 507, a firing handle 508, and the like.

In FIG. 97 of the front frame 502, a key insertion port 521 is formed at the right edge portion.
In a state where the front frame 502 is closed with respect to the outer frame 501 (the state shown in FIG. 97), the key is inserted from the key insertion slot 521 and the outer frame 501 and the front frame 502 are unlocked. The front frame 502 can be opened forward (on the player side) with respect to the outer frame 501 with the hinge mechanism 503 as the central axis. When the front frame 502 is opened with respect to the outer frame 501, the game board 504, the glass door 505, the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, the upper plate 506, the lower plate 507, and the firing handle attached to the front frame 502 side. The whole including 508 will move forward with respect to the outer frame 501.
When the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523, which will be described later, is turned on. When the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, a frame opening error is notified.

The glass door 505 is attached so as to cover the game area on the front surface of the game board 504 so as to be openable and closable. For example, this is to eliminate the clogging of the game ball in the game area. By inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and unlocking the glass door 505, the lock between the glass door 505 and the game board 504 is released, and the glass door 505 can be opened. When the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522, which will be described later, is turned on. When the door opening switch 522 is turned on, a door opening error is notified.

In the block diagram of FIG. 99, in the pachinko game machine 500, the main control board (main board, main control board) 530 corresponding to the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 and the sub corresponding to the sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10 A control board (effect control board, effect board) 540 is provided.
The main control board 530, the payout control board 520, and the sub control board 540 include a CPU, RWM, ROM, and the like, respectively, like the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 of the slot machine 10. In FIG. 99, the CPU, RWM, ROM, and the like are not shown.

Based on the power switch 511 being turned on, the power supply board 510 controls the power supply.
The power supply board 510 and the payout control board (also referred to as "prize ball control board") 520 are connected to a harness (consisting of one or more lead wires (also referred to as "signal lines")). .. It is assumed that the substrates shown in FIG. 99 are all connected to each other by a harness. Further, although the relay board is not shown in FIG. 99, in reality, the boards shown in FIG. 99 are connected via the relay board in addition to the case where they are directly connected. There is.
A launch board 512 is connected to the power supply board 510. The launch board 512 is a board for driving and controlling the launch device 513. The launching device 513 is a device for launching a game ball onto the game board 504 (game area). When the launch handle 508 is operated, the operation is detected and the launch device 513 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched into the game area.

A payout control board 520 is connected to the power supply board 510. A payout device 524 is connected to the payout control board 520. The payout device 524 is a device that lends out the game balls corresponding to the requested number when there is a request for ball lending from the CR unit, and further pays out the prize balls corresponding to the prize when the game ball is won. is there. The payout control board 520 and the CR unit are connected via an external terminal board 525.

A door opening switch 522 and a frame opening switch 523 are electrically connected to the payout control board 520. The door opening switch 522 and the frame opening switch 523 may be connected to the main control board 530.
As described above, when the glass door 505 is opened, the door opening switch 522 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the door opening switch 522 is turned on, the sub control board 540 executes, for example, notification of a door opening error.
When the front frame 502 is opened, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, and the signal is input to the payout control board 520 and further transmitted to the main control board 530. When the main control board 530 detects that the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the sub control board 540 executes, for example, notification of a frame opening error.

A start port switch 533 for detecting a prize in the start port 532, which is one of the prize openings provided in the game area of the game board 504, is connected to the main control board 530. When the game ball wins the start port 532 and the main control board 530 detects that the start port switch 533 is on, a random number value is acquired and a winning / failing determination is executed (lottery process). Then, the variation time and the stop symbol of the special symbol of the special symbol display device 531 are determined based on the hit / fail determination result, and the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the special symbol display device 531 are controlled so as to correspond to the determination result.

In addition, on the game board 504, as the winning openings other than the starting opening 532, there are general winning openings, large winning openings (winning openings that become big hits and are opened during the special game), and the like. Is omitted in the 19th embodiment (B).
Further, the special symbol display device 531 is a device provided on the game board 504 and displaying a hit / fail determination result based on the start port switch 533 being turned on by a special symbol. In other words, the "special symbol" is a symbol that indicates whether the result of the winning / failing determination is winning or not, depending on the stopped symbol after the change. The special symbol display device 531 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
The flow from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol will be described later.

The main control board 530 is provided with a setting key switch 535 having a setting key insertion port 534 and a setting change (reset) switch 536. The setting key insertion port 534, the setting key switch 535, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 do not necessarily have to be provided on the main control board 530, and these may be provided as separate devices.
The setting key switch 535 is a switch in which a predetermined setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion port 534 and is turned on by, for example, rotating it 90 degrees clockwise.

The setting change (reset) switch 536 is a switch that also serves as a setting change switch and a reset switch. The setting change switch is a switch that is operated when the setting value is changed during the setting change state. The reset switch is a switch that is operated when the state before the error occurs is restored after the error that has occurred is removed. In the following description, there are a case where it is called a "setting change (reset) switch 536", a case where it is called a "setting change switch 536", and a case where it is called a "reset switch 536".
In the present embodiment, the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 are provided integrally, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 536 and the reset switch 536 may be provided separately.
In the Pachinko game machine 500, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated to turn on the setting key switch 535, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. By turning on the power switch 511, it is possible to shift to the setting change state.

When the state shifts to the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 537. The set value display LED 537 is equivalent to the set value display LED 73 in the slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and is composed of, for example, a 7-segment display.
Then, when changing the set value, the setting change switch 536 is operated. Each time the setting change switch 536 is operated (pressed), the set value is "+1". For example, when the setting value is in 6 steps, each time the setting change switch 536 is pressed, "1" → "2" → ... -→ "5"->"6"->"1"-> ... The set value changes cyclically. Then, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise, for example, and when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, the set value is fixed and the setting change state ends. When the setting change state is completed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also turned off.

In addition, when the power is off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated, and the reset switch 536 is turned off and the power switch 511 is turned on to shift to the setting confirmation state. Become. In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed, but the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 537. Then, when the setting key is rotated to turn off the setting key switch 535, the setting confirmation state ends. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 537 is also turned off.
In the Pachinko game machine 500, unlike the slot machine 10, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is not entered and the setting value is not displayed.

The management information display LED 538 corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the slot machine 10, and in the case of the Pachinko game machine 500, it is called a performance display monitor as described above. Like the management information display LED 74, the management information display LED 538 is composed of four 7-segments.

The sub-control board 540 is a board that is connected to the main control board 530, determines the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control board 530, and controls to output the determined effect. Although one sub-control board 540 is shown in FIG. 99, in reality, for example, the sub-control board 540 is a sub-main board (a board for controlling the entire effect) and a sub-sub board (for example, an image display). It is divided into a substrate for controlling the image display of the device 23).

Similar to the slot machine 10, the peripheral device for effect includes an effect lamp 541, a speaker 542, and an image (liquid crystal) display device 543, and their outputs are controlled by a sub-control board 540.
As shown in FIG. 97, at least a part of the effect lamp 541 is attached so as to cover the outer peripheral edge of the front frame 502. Further, the speaker 542 is attached to the upper side of the front frame 502. Furthermore, the image display device 543 is attached so that an image is displayed in a substantially central portion within the game area of the game board 504.

Next, the control process of the Pachinko gaming machine 500 will be described.
FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of starting the Pachinko gaming machine 500 after the power is turned on.
When the power switch 511 is turned on and the power is turned on, in step S701, whether or not the main control board (specifically, corresponding to the main CPU) 530 satisfies the transition condition to the setting change state. To judge. As the transition condition of the setting change state, in the present embodiment, the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the setting change key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on. When it is determined that all of these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S702, and when it is determined that all three switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S702, the process proceeds to the setting change process (setting change state). Then, when the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to step S709.

In step S703, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting confirmation state is satisfied. As the transition condition of the setting confirmation state, in the present embodiment, the frame opening switch 523 is on, the setting change key switch 535 is on, and the reset switch 536 is off. When it is determined that these conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S704, and when it is determined that these conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S706.

When the process proceeds to step S704, the setting confirmation state is set, the main control board 530 reads the set value data stored in the RWM, and displays the current set value on the set value display LED 537. Next, the process proceeds to step S705, and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 535 has been turned off. When it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is turned off, it is determined that the end condition of the setting confirmation state is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is not off, the process returns to step S704 and the setting confirmation state (display of the set value) is continued.

When "No" is determined in step S703 and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the reset switch 536 is on. When it is determined that the reset switch 536 is on, the process proceeds to step S709, and when it is determined that the reset switch 536 is not on, the process proceeds to step S707.
In step S707, it is determined whether or not the RWM of the main control board 530 is normal. When the power is turned off, the RWM of the main control board 530 stores the information when the power is turned off, and when the power is turned on next time, it is determined whether or not the information when the power is turned on matches the information when the power is turned off. To do. Then, when they match, it is determined that the RWM is normal, and when they do not match, it is determined that the RWM is abnormal. When it is determined that the RWM is normal, the process proceeds to step S708, and when it is determined that the RWM is not normal, the process proceeds to step S709.
In step S708, the state return process is executed. This process is a process of returning the solenoid state, the state of the special symbol display device 531, and the like to the state when the power is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

When the setting change process (setting change state) in step S702 is completed, when it is determined in step S706 that the reset switch 536 is on, or when it is determined in step S707 that the RWM is not normal, step S709 is performed. Proceed and execute the RWM clearing process. This process is a process of clearing the data stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM (a process of initializing the predetermined storage area). The data to be cleared does not include the set value data. Then, the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, the timer interrupt is enabled. This process is a process that enables interrupt processing. Therefore, when the interrupt processing timing arrives after the interrupt processing is permitted in step S710, the interrupt processing is executed.
In the next step S711, a random number update process (random number counter increment process) is executed. This random number is used for various lottery (selection of stop symbol, selection of effect, etc.).

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a setting change process in step S702 of FIG. 100. In the present embodiment, the time when the process of step S721 is started is the start time of the setting change process (setting change state).
In step S721, the main control board (main CPU) 530 reads the set value written in the RWM and determines whether or not the set value is within the normal range. In the present embodiment, the values stored in the RWM corresponding to the set values "1" to "6" are set to "0" to "5".

For example, if the value stored in the RWM is "0", the set value is "1". Therefore, in step S722, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the RWM is within the range of "0" to "5", and if it is determined that the value is within the range, the process proceeds to step S724. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value stored in the RWM is not within the range of "0" to "5", "0" is stored in the RWM. When the RWM value is "0", the set value is "1". The set value "1" is a basic set value as described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S724.

In step S724, the main control board 530 displays the set value corresponding to the value stored in the RWM on the set value display LED 537. For example, when the value of RWM is "0", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537.
Next, the process proceeds to step S725, and the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting change switch 536 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S729. In step S726, the set value is added by "1". For example, if "1" has been displayed on the set value display LED 537 until then, the display is updated from "1" to "2" by the process of step S726, and the set value data stored in the RWM is changed to "0". To "1". In the example of FIG. 101, when the setting value “6” is displayed in step S724 and it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated in step S725, the process of step S726 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S727. It shall be muted.

In step S727, it is determined whether or not the set value exceeds the upper limit. For example, the set value "6" is displayed in step S724, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 535 has been operated in step S725, it is determined that the upper limit value has been exceeded in step S727. On the other hand, when the set values "1" to "5" are displayed in step S724 and it is determined that the setting change switch 536 has been operated in step S725, it is said that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded in step S727. Is not judged.
If it is determined in step S727 that the upper limit of the set value has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S728, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S729.

In step S728, the basic setting value is set. That is, "0" is stored as the set value data of the RWM, and "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 537. Then, the process proceeds to step S729.
In step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the condition for ending the setting change process (setting change state) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the condition for terminating the setting change process is satisfied when the setting key switch 535 is turned off. Therefore, in step S729, the main control board 530 determines whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 535 is on, returns to step S724 and determines that the setting key switch 535 is off. If so, the process proceeds to step S730.

In step S730, the set value display of the set value display LED 537 is hidden.
Next, the process proceeds to step S731, and the main control board 530 transmits a setting change end command to the sub control board 540. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
When the sub-control board 540 receives the setting change end command, it outputs the setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and executes the lighting process of the effect lamp 541 to indicate that the setting change is completed.

In addition, the end timing of the setting change state in the Pachinko game machine 500 is
(1) When it is determined as "Yes" in step S729 (when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off).
(2) In step S730, when the display of the set value by the set value display LED 537 is hidden.
(3) When the end command for setting change is transmitted in step S731.
However, the end timing of the setting change state in the 19th embodiment (B) is "when it is detected that the setting key switch 535 is turned off" in the above (1). To be determined.
Not limited to this, the above (2) and (3) may be set as the end timing of the setting change state.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the flow of one game in the Pachinko game machine 500.
In the pachinko game 500, the start timing of one game may be one of the following.
(1) When the game ball is launched by the launching device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504. In this case, even if the game ball has not reached the game area, one game will start.
(2) When the game ball is launched by the launching device 513 toward the game area of the game board 504, and the game ball enters the game area. Although not shown in FIG. 97, a rail is provided in the range from the lower side to the upper left of the game area to guide the game ball launched by the launching device 513 into the game area. ing. Then, the moment when the game ball deviates from the rail (the moment when the game ball enters the game area) is defined as the start of one game.

(3) When the game ball wins a prize at the start opening 532 provided in the game area. Or, when the game ball wins a prize in the start port 532 provided in the game area and the start port switch 533 is turned on.
As described above, various points can be mentioned as the start time of one game in the Pachinko game machine 500, but in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned (3) "game ball is the start opening 532". "When entering" is set as the start timing of one game.
Further, the timing of the end of one game is the time when the change of the special symbol display device 531 is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In step S741, the main control board (main CPU) 530 continues to determine whether or not the game ball has won the start port 532, that is, whether or not the start port switch 533 has been turned on. When it is determined that the start port switch 533 is turned on, the process proceeds to step S742.
In step S742, various lottery processes are executed at the timing when the start port switch 533 is turned on. A random number value is extracted at the timing when the start port switch 533 is turned on, and based on the extracted random number value, a big hit lottery (whether it is a big hit or a miss), a special symbol lottery (a special symbol stop symbol) Lottery for which symbol is to be used) and variable pattern lottery (lottery for variable time of special symbols) are executed.

In the next step S743, the prize ball processing (prize ball payout processing) based on the winning of the starting port 532 is executed. Here, the payout control board 520 drives and controls the payout device 524 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
Of the various lottery processes executed in step S742, at least a part of the lottery results including the variable time is transmitted to the sub control board 540. Upon receiving the lottery result of the game this time, the sub control board 540 controls the effect lamp 541, the speaker 542, and the image display device 543 so as to correspond to the lottery result.

Next, the process proceeds to step S744, and the main control board 530 starts changing the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 based on the lottery result in step S742. The change of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 531 is conditional on the change of the previous special symbol being completed at that time, and when the special symbol is changing, the next special symbol is changed. The change is suspended, and after the change of the special symbol currently being changed is completed, the change of the next special symbol is started.

Further, in step S745, the sub-control board 540 executes the variation of the decorative symbol by the image display device 543. The variation of the decorative pattern corresponds to a part of the production in this game.
Here, the device that directly indicates the result of the jackpot lottery in step S742 is the special symbol display device 531, and the stop symbol after the change by the special symbol display device 531 is a special symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, "7". ") And a special symbol (for example,"-") corresponding to the deviation are provided.

Further, the decorative symbol is changed by the image display device 543 so as to be linked (synchronized) with the change of the special symbol. Then, when stopping at the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot, the decorative symbol is also stopped at the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot such as "777". On the other hand, when stopping at a special symbol corresponding to a loss (non-winning), the decorative symbol is also stopped at a decorative symbol corresponding to the loss (a symbol other than the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot). The special symbol display device 531 is composed of a small 7-segment display, but the image display area of the image display device 543 that displays an image of a decorative symbol is larger than the image display area of the special symbol display device 531 (for example, a game). It is formed (to a size that occupies more than half of the area). As a result, the player can confirm whether or not the game is a big hit this time by looking at the stop mode of the decorative symbol.

The variation of the decorative symbol in step S745 is controlled so as to be within the variation time determined by the lottery in step S742. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol is completed, the process proceeds to step S746, and the main control board 530 changes the special symbol by the fluctuation time determined by the lottery, and then changes the special symbol so as to become the stop symbol determined by the lottery. finish.
Next, the process proceeds to step S747, and the post-stop processing of the special symbol is executed. Examples of the post-stop processing include processing for shifting to a special game when the game is a big hit this time.

In the 19th embodiment (B) of the pachinko game machine, as in the 19th embodiment (A) of the slot machine, after the setting change state ends, the setting change end sound and the lamp indicating the end of the setting change are turned on. Run. Further, when it is assumed that the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting change state, the output of the setting change end sound is terminated before the end of the game.
As described above, assuming that the setting change state is terminated when "Yes" is determined in step S729 in FIG. 101, the setting change end command is then transmitted to the sub control board 540 in step S731, and the sub is Upon receiving the command, the control board 540 starts outputting the setting change end sound from the speaker 542 and the like.

The time from when "Yes" is determined in step S729 until the output of the setting change end sound (and the predetermined lighting by the effect lamp 541) is started is longer than "0" ms, for example, in step S729. The timing is about when one interrupt time (for example, "4" ms in the case of the Pachinko game machine 500) has elapsed from the time when "Yes" is determined. In other words, the setting change end sound is not output until at least one interrupt has elapsed after the determination of "Yes" in step S729.
Then, the setting change end sound outputs a voice "The setting change is completed" as in the 19th embodiment (A). Further, assuming that the time from the start of output of the voice "End the setting change" to the end of output is "T01" as in the 19th embodiment (A), the time "T01" is the 19th embodiment (A). ), It can be set to about "2000" ms.

Further, as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in addition to the above-mentioned setting change end sound, an effect of lighting the effect lamp 541 in a predetermined lighting mode is executed.
Here, when the effect lamp 541 is used for lighting, at least the lighting mode is not the same as when the effect lamp 541 is used for lighting at the time of a big hit. For example, if it is determined that the lamp A is lit in the lighting mode a among the effect lamps 541 as an effect indicating that the jackpot has been achieved, the effect lamp 541 is lit as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed. In that case, lighting a lamp other than the lamp A may be mentioned. In this case, as long as the lamp different from the lamp A is lit, the lighting mode may be the same as that for indicating that the jackpot has been achieved.

Further, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lamp A may be turned on. The lighting mode in this case is different from the lighting mode when indicating that the jackpot has been achieved.
As described above, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the lighting mode of the effect lamp 541 when a big hit is obtained is not the same. As a result, when the game is started immediately after the setting change is completed, even if the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change is completed, the player misunderstands that it is a big hit. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed and the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 at the time of a big hit are different so that the two are not confused. In other words, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is set to a lighting pattern that is not used (or is used very infrequently) for other effects, and the setting is changed by looking at the lighting pattern. It is preferable to be able to understand that it is a production that means the end of.
Further, with respect to the effect lamp 541, the lighting pattern indicating that the setting change has been completed and the lighting pattern at the time of a big hit may be the same, but for the lamps other than the effect lamp 541, the setting change may be made. The lighting pattern indicating that the game has ended may be different from the lighting pattern when a big hit occurs.
Specifically, for example, when the setting change is completed, the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps are all turned on, and when a big hit occurs, the effect lamp 541 is turned on, but the other lamps are turned on. It is possible to prevent the lamp from lighting. In this way, the administrator can grasp which state the effect lamp 541 and the other lamps (lamps of the entire game machine) are in by checking the lighting patterns.

Further, when the effect lamp 541 is turned on as an effect indicating that the setting change has been completed, in principle, it may be output at the same time as the setting change end sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started before the setting change end sound is output. Alternatively, after starting the output of the setting change end sound and before ending the output of the setting change end sound, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started. Further, the lighting effect of the effect lamp 541 may be started after the output of the setting change end sound is finished.
In the 19th embodiment (B), the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change has been completed is turned on at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started.

Further, assuming that the lighting time of the effect lamp 541 indicating that the setting change is completed is "T02" as in the 19th embodiment (A),
T01> T02
T01 = T02
T01 <T02
However, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that "T01 <T02". For example, when the time "T01" is set to about "2000" ms as described above, the time "T02" may be set to, for example, about "2500" ms to about "4000" ms.

Next, a case where the game is started as soon as possible after the setting change state is finished will be described.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the launching device 513 cannot be operated to launch the game ball into the game area during the setting change state. Therefore, at least, the game ball cannot be launched into the game area unless the setting key switch 535 is turned off.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the launching device 513 may be operated to launch the game ball into the game area even during the setting change state. In this case, even when a game ball wins in any of the winning openings during the setting change state, it is possible to control so that the winning ball is not paid out. Further, even if a game ball wins a prize at the starting port 532, the jackpot lottery is not executed, and the special symbol display device 531 is not changed or the decorative symbol is not changed by the image display device 543. Be done.

In the setting change state, at least the front frame 502 is open as described above, but first, a case where it is assumed that the game is possible even when the front frame 502 is open will be described.
Then, the timing of starting the game is, as described above, when the game ball wins the start opening 532.
First, assuming that the preparation time until the start of the game is "T21", the game ball is guided to the launchable position in the launching device 513, the game ball is launched from the launchable position, and the game is won in the starting port 532. The total time of is the time "T21".
In this case, the time "T21" is considered to be about "2000" ms.
In the above assumption, it is assumed that the first first ball of the game ball launched from the launching device 513 wins the starting port 532.

When the game ball wins the start opening 532, it is determined as "Yes" in step S741 in FIG. 102, and then the special symbol change is started (step S744), and after the special symbol changes for the determined fluctuation time. , Stop the fluctuation of the special symbol (step S746). Here, in FIG. 102, the time from the time when "Yes" is determined in step S741 to the end of the process of step S746 is one game time, and this one game time is set to "T22".
First, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port 532 in a state where there is no holding ball, one game time "T22" is determined from, for example, a range of about "10000" to "30000" ms. And. Therefore, the shortest time of one game time "T22" is "10000" ms.

It should be noted that, for example, when the number of reserved balls exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 3), a shortening function for improving time efficiency by shortening the fluctuation time of a special symbol is known, but in the present embodiment, it is set. Since it is the state after the end of the changed state, there is no reserved ball. Therefore, in one game time "T22", the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is not considered.

From the above, the time required when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is finished is "T21 + T22".
The shortest time of "T21 + T22" is about "12000" ms.
Therefore,
T01 (time when output of setting change end sound) <T21 + T22 (preparation time to start game + shortest time of game)
Will be.

Furthermore, when the effect lamp 541 lights up to indicate that the setting change has been completed immediately after the end of the setting change state (at the same time as the output of the setting change end sound is started), the lighting time T02 of the effect lamp 541 and "T21 + T22" The relationship with "
T02 (about "2500" to "4000" ms) <T21 + T22
Will be.
As a result, even when the game is started immediately after the setting change state is finished, the output of the setting change end sound is finished and the effect lamp indicating the end of the setting change is finished before one game is finished. It means that the lighting of 541 has been completed.
FIG. 96 shows the time relationship at this time.

Further, the above-mentioned one game does not consider the time for closing the front frame 502 after the end of the setting change state and the operation time for eliminating the frame open error after closing the front frame 502.
Similar to the slot machine 10, at least the front frame 502 should be in the open state when the setting change state is finished. Therefore, even after the setting change state is terminated, the pachinko game machine 500 detects the frame opening error and notifies the error. The game cannot be started when the frame opening error is notified. When a frame opening error occurs, firstly, the launching device 513 is not operated. Secondly, although the launching device 513 is in an operable state, the game is not started even if the game ball wins in the start port 532 (even if the game ball is detected by the start port switch 533) (lottery process). Do not execute, do not start the fluctuation of the special symbol display device 531, do not pay out the prize ball).

In order to clear the frame opening error, the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening switch 523 is turned off. Further, the frame opening error is eliminated (the error notification is terminated) by inserting the key into the key insertion slot 521 and performing a predetermined operation. Therefore, the preparation time "T21" from the end of the setting change state to the start of the game includes the operation time for closing the front frame 502 and inserting the key to cancel the frame opening error. When the time until the frame opening error is resolved by closing the front frame 502 and turning off the frame opening switch 523 after the setting change state is completed is set to "T20".
T01 (output time of setting change end sound) <T20 + T21 + T22
T02 (lighting time of production lamp 541) <T20 + T21 + T22
Will be.

In the above example, the setting change state is terminated when the setting key switch 535 is turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front frame 502 is closed (the frame opening switch 523 is turned off). It is also possible to end the setting change state on condition that the frame opening error is released (the key is inserted into the key insertion slot 521 and rotated in a predetermined direction). In this case, the front frame 502 is closed, and when the frame opening error release operation is completed, the setting change state ends and the output of the setting change end sound is started. By closing the front frame 502, the setting change state may be terminated on condition that the frame opening switch 523 is turned off (without performing the frame opening error canceling operation). In this case, when the frame opening switch 523 is turned off, the setting change state is terminated and the setting change end sound is output.

Therefore, even in the case of the specification that the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is closed and the frame opening error is cleared, as described above, the time from the end of the setting change to the end of one game is ". Since the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than "T21 + T22", it means that the output of the setting change end sound is completed before the end of one game immediately after the setting change is completed.

The above is the case where one game time "T22" is completed in the shortest time.
On the other hand, not limited to this, the relationship between the output time "T01" of the setting change end sound and the time "T21 + T22" from the end of the setting change to the end of one game can be variously set as follows. ..
(1) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" and the preparation time "T21" when the jackpot lottery is missed (non-winning). Set.
For example, assuming that the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 when it is out of alignment is in the range of "T22 (min1)" to "T22 (max1)" and the average time is "T22 (avg1)".
T01 <T21 + T22 (avg1)
Can be set to.

(2) The output time "T01" of the setting change end sound is set shorter than the total time of the average one game time "T22" and the preparation time "T21" when a big hit is made in the big hit lottery.
For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol display device 531 at the time of a big hit is in the range of "T22 (min2)" to "T22 (max2)" and the average time is "T22 (avg2)".
T01 <T21 + T22 (avg2)
Can be set to.

<20th Embodiment>
A twentieth embodiment relates to a substrate case of a control substrate.
As the substrate case for accommodating the control substrate, a double door type and a slide type are known, and the twentieth embodiment is a slide type substrate case.
In the slide method, the exposed area of the control board is smaller than that in the double door method, so that the number of unauthorized access points can be reduced accordingly.
Further, in the 20th embodiment, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are slidably moved while the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. Therefore, the surface of the main control board 530 exposed when the slide is moved is a solder surface.
In the control board, the surface on which the CPU, connector and other electronic components are mounted is referred to as a "component surface", and the surface on which the legs of the electronic components are soldered is referred to as a "solder surface".

In the twentieth embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 500, a substrate case 550 for accommodating the main control substrate 530 will be given as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the substrate case 550 of the twentieth embodiment is not limited to the main control substrate 530, but is a control substrate on which a payout control substrate 520, a sub control substrate 540, and other CPUs are mounted in the Pachinko gaming machine 500. It can be applied to a case that houses a control board that requires security.

Further, the board case 550 of the 20th embodiment is not limited to the control board of the pachinko game machine 500, but is a control board on which the main control board 50, the sub control board 80, and other CPUs of the slot machine 10 are mounted, and has security characteristics. It can be applied to a case that houses a control board that requires.
Specifically, the main control board 50 of the slot machine 10 is formed in the same or similar shape as the main control board 530 of the pachinko game machine 500, and the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) of the twentieth embodiment is formed. ) Can be accommodated.
The board case 56 shown in the second embodiment (FIGS. 9 and 10) can also be applied to the main control board 530 and other control boards of the Pachinko gaming machine 500. Further, the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment may be implemented independently, but it is also possible to implement the second embodiment and the twentieth embodiment at the same time.

FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and the main control substrate 530 as viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) and the main control substrate 530 as viewed from the rear side.
Furthermore, FIG. 105 is an external perspective view of a state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550 as viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 106 is a front view of a state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550 as viewed from the front side. Further, FIG. 107 is a front view of the state in which the main control board 530 is housed in the board case 550 as viewed from the rear (back) side.

Here, the "front side" refers to the component surface side of the main control board 530, and the "rear (back) side" refers to the solder surface of the main control board 530.
Further, the "upper" in the "upper case 560" refers to the component side of the main control board 530, and may be referred to as a "front case (or cover)" or a "component surface side case (or cover)". ..
Furthermore, the "lower" in the "lower case 570" refers to the solder side of the main control board 530, and is a "rear (back) side case (or cover)" or a "solder side case (or cover)". It may be called.
Further, FIGS. 103 and 106 show a state in which the cover 561 is attached to the upper case 560, and FIG. 105 shows the upper case 560 excluding the cover 561.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main control board 530 includes the setting change (reset) switch 536 described above and the setting key insertion port 534. Further, the connector 539a to 539h for connecting the harness to another substrate, electronic component, or electronic device is provided. The various parts shown in the 20th embodiment such as FIG. 103 are examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto.
Further, holes 530a for screwing the main control board 530 when it is attached (fixed) to the upper case 560 are formed at the four corners of the main control board 530.

On the other hand, in the upper case 560, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, the connectors 539a to 539h of the main control board 530, the setting change (reset) switch 536, and the setting key insertion port 534 each have appropriate gaps. Openings 563a to 563i that can pass through (pass through) are formed.
Further, in the upper case 560, a cover 561 is rotatably attached to a portion where the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 are exposed when the main control board 530 is attached. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing of the cover 561 is not detected by the sensor or the like, but the opening / closing of the cover 561 can be detected by the sensor. Then, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is in the open state), or set on condition that the sensor is on (cover 561 is in the open state). The changed state may be terminated.

Caulking portions 562 and 572 are provided on one end side of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, specifically, on the left edge portion when viewed from the front side in FIG. 103, respectively. The caulking portions 562 and 572 are used for sealing (caulking) the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, respectively, in a state of being fitted to each other. After sealing (caulking), the mating between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 cannot be released unless the caulked portion 562 on the upper case 560 side is broken.
Furthermore, in FIG. 103, side walls 565 and 571 are provided at the ends opposite to the one end side (the side where the caulking portions 562 and 572 are provided, respectively) of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 when viewed from the front side. Has been done. These side walls 565 and 571 come into contact with each other when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.

In FIG. 104, bosses 564 (4 pieces) are provided on the back side of the upper case 560. In FIG. 104, two bosses 564 are visible. The arrangement interval of the four bosses 564 is the same as the arrangement interval of the four holes 530a of the main control board 530. Further, a screw hole is formed in the boss 564.
When the main control board 530 is applied to the back side of the upper case 560 in the state shown in FIG. 104, the four holes 530a of the main control board 530 and the screw holes of the four bosses 564 of the upper case 560 overlap.

Further, in this state, the connector 539a of the main control board 530 penetrates the opening 563a of the upper case 560, and its connector surface is exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
Similarly, the connectors 539b and 539c of the main control board 530 penetrate the opening 563b of the upper case 560, and the connector surface thereof is exposed to the front side of the upper case 550.
Further, the connectors 539d, 339e, and 538f of the main control board 530 penetrate the openings 563c, 563d, and 563e of the upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.

Furthermore, the connectors 539g and 539h of the main control board 530 penetrate the openings 563f and 563g of the upper case 560, respectively, and their connector surfaces are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560.
In this way, all the connectors provided on the main control board 530 penetrate the opening formed in the upper case 560 and are exposed to the front side of the upper case 560. 105 and 106 show the state at this time.
Further, in this case, the gaps between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g are all set to be appropriate gaps, and the connectors 539a to 539h are the openings 563a to 563a to 539h. 563g can be penetrated without resistance, and after penetration, there is no needless gap between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g (for example, a gap between the connector and the opening). Is configured as a design value (about "0.5" mm). As a result, it is difficult to perform a goto action by utilizing the gap between the connector and the opening.

Furthermore, the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion port 534 of the main control board 530 penetrate the openings 563h and 563i formed in the upper case 560, respectively, and come into contact (access) from the front side of the upper case 560. ) Can be arranged (see FIG. 105), however, since the cover 561 is attached on the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion slot 534 as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the front side. Is not exposed. However, the board case 550 (upper case 560 and lower case 570) including the cover 561 is made of transparent resin, and the setting change (reset) switch 536 and the setting key insertion slot 534 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover 561. It has become.
In the above state, if screws are inserted into the holes 530a (4 places) from the solder surface side of the main control board 530 and screwed to the boss 564 of the upper case 560, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560. Will be done.

As a result, the main control board 530 moves integrally with the upper case 560 even when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted together.
In this way, the main control board 530 is fixed to the upper case 560 before the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are fitted. Therefore, when the upper case and the lower case 570 are fitted, the upper case is fitted. There is no relative movement between the case 560 and the main control board 530. Therefore, on the upper case 560 side, each opening 563a to 563g slightly larger than the outer shape of each connector 539a to 539h of the main control board 530 is formed, and each connector 539a to 539h penetrates the respective openings 563a to 563g. By adopting the structure, it is possible to form a structure in which an unnecessary gap is not generated between the connectors 539a to 539h and the openings 563a to 563g. For example, even if the upper case 560 and the lower case 5670 are fitted to each other and then the positional relationship between the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 is shifted by a goto action, the upper case 560 and the main control board 530 Therefore, for example, it is not possible to increase the gap between each connector 539a to 539h and each opening 563a to 563g. As a result, it is possible to suppress the goto action.

Next, a method of fitting the upper case 560 to which the main control board 530 is attached and the lower case 570 will be described.
FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of a side surface showing the fitted state of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570, (a) shows a temporary fitting state (before sliding movement), and (b) shows a main fitting state (b). After moving the slide) is shown.
In FIG. 108, the cross-sectional area is not hatched in consideration of the legibility of the drawing. Further, in the figure, the upper case 560 is shown by a solid line, and the lower case 570 is shown by a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, and FIG. 108, the upper case 560 is provided with a side wall 565, and the lower case 570 is provided with a side wall 571.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, and 108, the lower end edge (lower case 570 side) in the longitudinal direction of the upper case 560 is referred to as a lower edge 560a. Further, in the lower case 570, the edge in the longitudinal direction is referred to as an outer edge 570a.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped with each other, the shapes of the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are formed so as to overlap each other in the positional relationship shown in FIG. 108 (a). When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped with each other, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are formed to be in contact with each other. This position is referred to as a "temporary fitting state". In the temporary fitting state, the gap L between the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 is formed to be about several tens of mm (for example, about "10" to "30" mm). ing.
Further, in the temporary fitting state, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated at any time. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 108 (a), the upper case 560 can be moved in the direction away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570 without interference of parts and the like.

FIG. 109 is a plan view of the side wall 565 and the vicinity of the side wall 571 as viewed from the lower case 570 side in the temporarily fitted state.
In the temporary fitting state, as shown in FIG. 109, since the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 have a gap L, one end of the solder surface of the main control board 530 can be seen from this gap L. There is. Here, in the connector of the main control board 530, assuming that the foot of the connector 539 g is the connector foot 539 g'and the foot of the connector 539 h is the connector foot 539 h', these connector feet 539 g'and 539 h'are in the longitudinal direction, respectively. It has two rows of legs (see FIG. 104).
Then, in the temporary fitting state, as shown in FIG. 109, only the outer row of the connector legs 539g'and 539h' is exposed. In other words, even in the temporarily fitted state, all of the connector legs 539g'and 539h' are not exposed, and only a part of them is exposed.

Then, from the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108 (a), the lower case 570 can be slidably moved with respect to the upper case 560. The direction of slide movement is the longitudinal direction of the substrate case 550, and is the left direction in FIG. 108 (a).
When the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the upper case 560, the main control board 530, and the lower case 570 can be slid to the end point of the slide movement without interfering with each other. Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 can be slid and moved to a contact position. The state shown in FIG. 108 (b) is the main fitting state. Note that FIG. 107 shows a state in which the side wall 565 of the upper case 560 and the side wall 571 of the lower case 570 are in contact with each other (this fitting state).

In this mating state, the engaging members (not shown) formed in the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are engaged with each other. As a result, the upper case 560 cannot be moved in the direction away from the lower case 570 with respect to the lower case 570. However, in this state, the lower case 570 can be slid with respect to the upper case 560 in the opposite direction to the above, and the sliding movement in the reverse direction always returns the lower case from the main fitting state to the temporary fitting state. be able to.

In the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108 (a), the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 are displaced in the vertical direction, but the book shown in FIG. 108 (b). In the fitted state, the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 and the crimped portion 572 of the lower case 570 overlap each other, and caulking can be performed using both of them. When the crimped portion 562 and the crimped portion 572 are crimped at this position, the present case 560 and the lower case 570 can be separated or the upper case 560 can be separated unless the crimped portion 562 of the upper case 560 is cut (broken) thereafter. On the other hand, the lower case 570 cannot be slid and returned to the temporary fitting state shown in FIG. 108 (a).

However, it is conceivable that the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 to return to the temporary fitting state, and the solder surface of the main control board 530 is exposed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, if not all of the connector legs are exposed and only a part of the connector legs is exposed, it is possible to make the goto action difficult.
Further, not all the connector legs are exposed even in the temporarily fitted state, and in the example of the twentieth embodiment, the exposed connector legs are the connector legs 539 g'and 539 h', and other connectors. The feet of 539a, 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e and 539g are not exposed.

When the slide method is adopted for the board case 550, the slide direction is usually the longitudinal direction of the board case. In this case, the amount of slide movement is related to the number of exposed connector legs.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connector is arranged near the outer peripheral edge of the main control board 530. For example, if the connector is provided in the central portion of the main control board 530, the opening of the upper case 560 corresponding to the connector must have a substantially "R" shape with four sides surrounded by side walls. However, if the connector is arranged inside a substantially square shape surrounded by side walls on four sides, it becomes difficult to insert and remove the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, the connectors 539a to 539h are arranged near the outer peripheral edge of the main control board 530.

Specifically, in FIG. 103, the connector 539a is arranged near the left edge of the main control board 530, the connectors 539b, 539c, 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged near the upper edge, and the connectors 539g and 539h are arranged near the right edge. Was placed.
The opening 563 for the connector of the upper case 560 has a structure having at least no wall on the outside. For example, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563a through which the connector 539a penetrates has a substantially concave shape having no side wall on the left side (outside) in the drawing.
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the opening 563b through which the connectors 539b and 539c are penetrated has a substantially concave shape having no side wall on the upper side (outside) in the drawing.

Furthermore, the periphery of the openings 563c, 563d and 563e through which the connectors 539d, 539e and 539f are penetrated has a substantially L-shape having no side wall on the upper side and the right side (outer side) in FIG. 105. ..
Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the periphery of the openings 563f and 563g that penetrate the connectors 539g and 539h, respectively, has a shape having a side wall only on the left side (inside) in the drawing. This makes it easy to insert and remove the connector.

Further, in the case where the connector is arranged with respect to the main control board 530 as described above, when the lower case 570 is slid and moved as in the present embodiment, the legs of the connector exposed first are the connectors 539 g and 539 h. Feet (539 g'and 539 h').
Further, when the slide movement amount is larger than that of the present embodiment, the legs of the connector 539f are exposed next.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the connectors of the main control board 530, for the connectors 530a to 539f, even if the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 506, the legs of the connectors are not exposed. For example, in FIG. 105, if the connector groups of the connectors 539d, 539e, and 539f are arranged closer to the left side (closer to the connectors 539b and 539c) in the drawing, the slide movement amount is larger than that of the present embodiment. Even if it is provided, it can be configured so that the legs of the connector 539f are not exposed.

Further, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560 as in the present embodiment, the legs of the connectors 539 g and 539 h arranged near the right edge of the main control board 530 in FIG. 105 are easily exposed. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lower case 570 is slid with respect to the upper case 560, the legs of the connectors 539 g and 539 h (connector legs 539 g'and 539 h') are exposed, but the legs It is designed so that not all of it is exposed, but only a part of the foot is exposed, making the goto action even a little difficult.

It is preferable that the number of connectors that exposes at least a part of the legs by sliding movement is as small as possible.
Further, when the number of rows of legs of one connector is "N (N is an integer of 2 or more)", the number of exposed legs is "N-1" or less (that is, not all are exposed). Is preferable. Furthermore, when the number of rows of the legs of the connector is "1", it is preferable that the legs of the connector are not exposed.
Alternatively, when the number of pins of the connector is "N", that is, the number of legs of the connector is "N", the "n"("n" ≤ "N-1") of the "N" pins The pin up to the "n + 1" th pin is exposed, but the pins after the "n + 1" th pin are not exposed (that is, all the pins are not exposed).
Further, among the pins of the connector, at least one reference pin may be configured so as not to be exposed. If at least one pin is not exposed, it can be more difficult to goto than if all the pins are exposed.

Further, when the main control board is the main control board 530 in the pachinko game machine 500, as shown in FIG. 99, the main control board 530 includes a payout control board 520, a special symbol display device 531 and a start port switch 533, and a sub. Since it is electrically connected to the control board 540 and the like, it is connected to these boards and electronic components. The connection is made using lead wires. Further, a plurality of lead wires are combined into one to form a harness, a connector terminal is attached to the end of the harness, and the connector terminal is connected to the connector on the main control board 530.
Here, among the lead wires connected to the main control board 530, the lead wires whose security should be particularly ensured are the lead wires to which the signal of the start port switch 533 (the signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, the connector to which the signal of the start port switch 533 is input is configured so that the connector foot is not exposed even if the connector foot is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). Is preferable.

Further, regarding the connector connected to the payout control board 520, from the viewpoint of preventing payout goto, the connector foot is not exposed even if the connector foot is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed, or at least one pin is exposed. It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed).
Further, a lead wire for supplying power to the main control board 530 (a lead wire connected to the power supply board 510 when the power supply board 510 and the main control board 530 are directly connected), a sub control board 540, and the like. Make sure that at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed for each connector to which the connected lead wire and the lead wire connected to the board for outputting an external signal are connected. It is preferable to configure the above.

On the other hand, when the main control board is the main control board 50 in the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes a medal selector, various operation switches, a power switch 11, a medal number display device, and a symbol. It is electrically connected to a display device, a medal payout device, etc.
Among the lead wires connected to the main control board 50, the lead wire for which security should be particularly ensured is the lead wire into which the signal of the start switch 41 (the signal related to the lottery) is input. Therefore, for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the start switch 41 is input is connected, the connector foot is not exposed even if it is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed, or at least one pin is not exposed). It is preferable to configure it as follows.

Furthermore, the lead wire to which the signal of the input sensor 44 is input also requires security from the viewpoint of preventing credit goat. Therefore, for the connector to which the lead wire to which the signal of the input sensor 44 is input is connected, the connector foot is not exposed even if it is slid (at least one foot row is not exposed, or at least one pin is exposed. It is preferable to configure it so that it is not exposed).

Further, each connector to which the lead wire connected to the medal payout device, specifically the lead wire for outputting the drive signal of the hopper motor 36, and the lead wire to which the signal from the payout sensor 37 is input is connected. Also, from the viewpoint of preventing payout, it is preferable to configure the connector so that the connector legs are not exposed (at least one leg row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed) even if the connector is slid. ..
In addition, as in the case of the Pachinko game machine 500, a connector having a lead wire related to a power supply, a connector having a lead wire connected to the sub control board 80, and a lead connected to a board for transmitting an external signal. It is preferable that each connector to which the wires are connected is also configured so that at least one foot row is not exposed or at least one pin is not exposed.

<21st Embodiment>
The 21st embodiment relates to a thickness (diameter) of a lead wire (also referred to as a “signal wire”).
In the 21st embodiment, the lead wire for starting is made the thinnest, and at least one other lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire for starting is provided in one connector terminal having the lead wire for starting. In addition, by providing at least one lead wire that is thicker than the lead wire for starting, it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting, and it is possible to suppress the goto behavior (incorrect starting or starting at an intentional timing). Is what you do.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 500, the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start port switch 533 and the main control board 530.
Further, in the slot machine 10, the lead wire for starting corresponds to the lead wire connecting the start switch 41 and the main control board 50.
The "lead wire for starting" is actually composed of two lines, one of which is a starting signal line and the other one is a GND line. Then, in the present embodiment, the start signal line is referred to as a "lead line for starting" and does not include a GND line. However, the GND wire may be included in the lead wire other than the lead wire for starting.

FIG. 110 is a plan view showing a state in which the harnesses B to H are connected to the connectors 539b to 539h of the main control board 530, respectively.
In FIG. 110, the substrate case 550 is not shown. Further, although the main control board 530 is illustrated in FIG. 110, it can be applied not only to the main control board 530 but also to the main control board 50. In other words, the 21st embodiment can be applied to both the slot machine 10 and the pachinko game machine 500.
Further, the connector terminals attached to the tips of the harnesses B to H are referred to as "harness B connector terminals" to "harness H connector terminals", respectively.

The connector 539a is usually a connector to which a cable or the like is not connected. The connector 539a is a connector connected to the collating device when the regulatory authority of the gaming machine confirms the data stored in the CPU, ROM, and RWM by using the collating device.
Further, the connectors 539b to 539h are concave connectors mounted on the main control board 530, and the harness B connector terminal to the harness H connector terminal (convex connector) are connected to each of them.
Further, FIG. 111 is a front view showing each harness B to H and the harness B to H connector terminals in detail.
Each of the harnesses B to H is composed of a plurality of lead wires, and in FIG. 111, each lead wire is numbered. For example, the harness B is composed of nine lead wires 1 to 9 in the first row (upper row in the figure) and nine lead wires 10 to 18 in the second row (lower row in the figure) in the drawing. Harness.

The connector terminals of the harnesses B, C, D, G, and H are composed of two rows. On the other hand, each connector terminal of the harnesses E and F is composed of one row.
Note that each harness and connector terminal shown in FIG. 111 is merely an example, and the connector terminals may be composed of, for example, three or more rows. Further, the number of lead wires in one row is determined according to the application (the number of signal lines), and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 111, and may be one or 10 or more. ..
Even if it is composed of one lead wire, it will be referred to as a "harness".
Furthermore, in addition to harnesses in which each lead wire is separated (with or without binding), specifically, such as a discrete wire cable, for example, a flat cable or a ribbon cable. Also includes those in which all lead wires are integrally connected (whether or not they are separable).

Further, in FIG. 111, two types of thicknesses are shown as lead wires. In the figure, the lead wire indicated by a single circle indicates a thin lead wire, and the lead wire indicated by a double circle indicates a thick lead wire. Here, the "thickness of the lead wire" refers to the diameter of the lead wire. Therefore, for example, if the thickness of the lead wire represented by a single circle is the diameter D1 and the thickness of the lead wire represented by the double circle is the diameter D2, then “D1 <D2”.
In the example of FIG. 111, two types of lead wires are shown, but the harness is not limited to this, and the harness may be configured from lead wires having three or more types of thickness.

In FIG. 111, a lead wire related to starting (a lead wire connecting the start port switch 533 and the main control board 530 in the case of the pachinko game machine 500. In the case of the slot machine 10, the start switch 41 and the main control board 50 The lead wire connecting with and is assumed to be the seventh lead wire of the harness D. The lead wire for starting is the thin lead wire of the two types of thickness. This is to make the lead wire for starting as inconspicuous as possible by using a thin lead wire. In addition, by using a thin lead wire, it is easy to break the wire when cheating (modification, etc.) is performed, so that an abnormality can be easily found. In other words, a thick lead wire is less likely to break even when cheating than a thin lead wire, and if it is a bundle of thick lead wires, it will be found even if a part of the lead wire breaks. This is because it is difficult.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lead wire for starting may be a thick lead wire. Alternatively, when three types of lead wires are used, a lead wire having an intermediate thickness may be used as the lead wire for starting.
In some cases, only two lead wires for starting and the GND wire thereof are connected to one connector terminal.
On the other hand, the harness D shown in FIG. 111 has a plurality of other lead wires in addition to the lead wire (No. 7) for starting.

Further, in the harness D including the lead wire (No. 7) for starting, at least one lead wire having the same thickness as the lead wire (No. 7) for starting is provided. Even if it is known that the lead wire for starting is included in the connector D, it is difficult to identify which lead wire it is (it is difficult to make a goto action). In this example, the 2nd, 4th, and 8th lead wires have the same thickness as the 7th lead wire (lead wire for starting).

Furthermore, the 8th lead wire having the same thickness is arranged adjacent to the 7th lead wire of the harness D. This is because it is difficult to identify the lead wire for starting by arranging the lead wire having the same thickness adjacent to the lead wire for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the lead wire No. 8 located on the right side of the lead wire No. 7 in the harness D has the same thickness as the lead wire No. 7, but the lead wire No. 6 is not limited to this. The thickness of the wire may be the same as the thickness of the lead wire No. 7. Alternatively, the thickness of the lead wire No. 3 may be the thickness of the lead wire No. 7. In the harness D, the lead wire "adjacent" to the lead wire No. 7 corresponds to the lead wires No. 3, 6, and 8 in the example of FIG. 111. Of these lead wires, at least one lead wire is set to have the same thickness as the 7th lead wire.

Further, the harness D is provided with one or more lead wires having a thickness different from that of the lead wire (No. 7) for starting. In the example of FIG. 111, the lead wires of Nos. 1, 3, 5, and 6 have a thickness different from that of the lead wire (No. 7) for starting. By including a lead wire having a thickness different from that of the lead wire related to starting in one connector terminal (harness D connector terminal), it is possible to make it more difficult to identify the lead wire related to starting.

In addition to the lead wires related to starting, important signal lines, specifically, lead wires related to loading of game media, lead wires related to payout, lead wires for transmitting external signals, etc. are also prevented from going crazy. From the viewpoint of starting, one or more other signal wires having the same thickness are provided in one connector terminal, and one or more other signal wires having the other thickness are provided in one connector terminal. Is preferable.
Furthermore, it is preferable to arrange the lead wire for starting and the lead wire for power supply so as not to be adjacent to each other. This is to make the lead wire for starting less susceptible to noise.
Here, "not adjacent" means that, for example, when the lead wire of harness D is the lead wire for starting, the lead wires of harness D, numbers 3, 6, and 8 are not set as the lead wires for power supply. Can be mentioned.

Further, as in the present embodiment, for example, when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are aligned linearly on the main control board 530 and the distance between the two connector terminals is short, the harness G No. 5 is used. When setting the lead wire of No. 1 as the lead wire for starting, it is preferable not to set the first lead wire of the harness H as the lead wire for the power supply.
On the other hand, even when the harness G connector terminal and the harness H connector terminal are linearly arranged on the main control board 530, if there is a certain distance between the two connector terminals, the lead No. 5 of the harness G is used. It is also possible to set the wire as the lead wire for starting and set the first lead wire of the harness H as the lead wire for the power supply.

Furthermore, when the connector terminal of the harness including the lead wire for starting and the connector terminal of the other harness are adjacent to each other, the harness including the lead wire for starting is arranged under the other harness and started. It is preferable to wire the lead wire so as to hide it from the outside as much as possible.
FIG. 112 is a perspective view showing an example of hiding the lead wire for starting. In FIG. 112, for simplification of the drawings, the harness D and the harness E are both composed of one row of lead wires, the harness D is composed of three lead wires, and the harness E is composed of five lead wires. It is shown in the figure. Then, it is assumed that the lead wire closest to the harness E among the harness D is set as the lead wire for starting.
In this case, the direction in which the harness D extends is set to the harness E side, and the wiring is performed so that the harness E passes above the harness D. As a result, the lead wire for starting the harness D is hidden from the outside as much as possible, and security can be improved.

<22nd Embodiment>
The 22nd embodiment relates to a setting change state. The description of the 22nd embodiment partially overlaps with that of the 19th embodiment, but will be described again.
First, in the case of the slot machine 10, whether or not the door switch 17 is on, whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 153 is on before shifting to the setting change state. Is determined, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that all these switches are on. If only some of the above three switches are on, or if any of the switches is off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, even if the front door 12 is illegally drilled with a drill or the like to access the setting key switch 152, the setting change state is not entered unless the door switch 17 is turned on.

Further, even if all of the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the reset switch 153 are turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. When the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state can be entered. In the setting confirmation state, the current setting value can be confirmed, but the setting value cannot be changed. In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, it may be a condition that the door switch 17 is on. Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, it may be a condition that the reset switch 153 is off.

Further, the end condition of the setting change state is set that the setting key switch 152 is turned from on to off and the door switch 17 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the setting change state ends (a state in which there is a high possibility of a goto action) when the door switch 17 is off, that is, the front door 12 is not opened.
Here, in the present embodiment, the setting change state can be entered on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and the setting change state can be terminated on the condition that the door switch 17 is on.
However, not limited to this, first, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the door switch 17 is on, and when the setting change state ends, the on / off state of the door switch 17 is not determined. You may.

Secondly, the on / off of the door switch 17 is not determined when shifting to the setting change state, but the on / off of the door switch 17 is determined at the end of the setting change state, and the door switch 17 must be on. The setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, the on / off of the door switch 17 is not determined when shifting to the setting change state, but if the door switch 17 is not on, the setting value is not changed even if the setting change switch 153 is operated. May be set to.
Fourth, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 153 without determining the on / off of the door switch 17 when shifting to the setting change state and operating the setting change switch 153 during the setting change state. If the door switch 17 is not turned on when the start switch 41, which is an operation for fixing the value, is operated, the set value may not be fixed (the new set value is not stored in the RWM 53). ..

Further, in order to shift to the setting change state in the slot machine 10, since the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on, before shifting to the setting change state (setting change processing) or the setting change state. The current set value stored in the RWM 53 is cleared before the set value can be changed after shifting to (setting change process). In this case, the set value data is "0". Therefore, the set value at the start of the setting change state is "1".

When the reset switch 153 is turned on and the power switch 11 is turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 (role ratio monitor) in the storage area of the RWM 53 is displayed. Such data will not be cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 73 is a game count counter, a payout counter (including a ring buffer), each ratio data, and the like.

Further, in the case of the Pachinko game machine 500, whether or not the frame release switch 523 is on, whether or not the setting key switch 535 is on, and whether or not the reset switch 536 is on when the power is turned on. Is determined, and it is possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that these three switches are on. If only some of the above three switches are on, or if any of the switches is off, the setting change state is not entered. As a result, in an invalid state in which the front frame 502 is not opened, even if the setting key switch 535 is turned on, the setting change state is not entered.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 98, the back surface side of the pachinko game machine 500 is not configured in a closed state (see FIG. 22) like the slot machine 10, but is in an open state.
Therefore, depending on the condition of the island installed in the hall, it is assumed that the pachinko game machine 500 wraps around to the back side and is accessed to the main control board 530 without opening the front frame 502. However, if the frame release switch 523 is not turned on, it is determined that the state is not normal, and the state is not changed to the setting change state (the setting value cannot be changed).

Further, even if the frame opening switch 523 is turned on, the setting key switch 535 is turned on, and the reset switch 536 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered. Furthermore, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on, the setting change state is not entered and the setting confirmation state is also entered. do not do.
In the case of the Pachinko game machine 500, as described above, when the power is turned on with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting key switch 535 turned on (the reset switch 536 is off). , It is possible to shift to the setting confirmation state.

Further, in the case where the opening of the front frame 502 and the opening of the glass door 505 can be detected individually as in the present embodiment, when both the front frame 502 and the glass door 505 are opened at the same time (that is, the door). The specification may be such that when the release switch 522 is on and the frame release switch 523 is on), the transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is permitted.
By setting in this way, it becomes possible to inspect the function of the set value without performing an extra procedure in the manufacturing process of the Pachinko gaming machine 500. Further, after the pachinko game machine 500 is installed in the hall, even if the glass door 505 is removed from the pachinko game machine 500 during the board maintenance work in the hall, the setting change and setting confirmation can be performed in parallel with the board maintenance. Since it can be done, convenience can be improved.

Further, the door opening switch 522 (a switch that turns on when the glass door 505 is opened) is not detected when shifting to the setting changing state or the setting confirmation state. Therefore, when shifting to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the glass door 505 may be open or closed. However, it is determined that the glass door 505 is closed when shifting to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and the door open switch 522 is judged to be on / off when shifting to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and must be off. It may be possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state on condition of.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are covered with a cover 561. Then, in order to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion port 534, it is necessary to open the cover 561.
Therefore, a sensor for detecting the opening / closing of the cover 561 (hereinafter referred to as a “cover sensor”) may be provided so that the setting can be changed or the setting can be confirmed on condition that the cover sensor is on.

In the pachinko game machine 500, in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed every time the setting change switch 536 is operated, which is common to the slot machine 10.
Further, in the slot machine 10, the operation of the start switch 41 is an operation of fixing the set value, but in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, turning off the setting key switch 535 confirms the set value and , It is an operation to end the setting change state.
Further, in the case of the pachinko game machine 500, the setting change state can be terminated on condition that the setting key switch 535 is turned from on to off and the frame opening switch 523 is turned on. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a state in which the frame opening switch 523 is off, that is, the setting change state ends when the front frame 502 is not opened (a state in which there is a high possibility of a goto action).

In this embodiment, the setting change state can be entered on the condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on, and the setting change state can be terminated on the condition that the frame opening switch 523 is on.
However, not limited to this, first, it is possible to shift to the setting change state on the condition that the frame release switch 523 is on, and when the setting change state ends, the on / off state of the frame release switch 523 is not determined. It may be.

Secondly, the on / off of the frame opening switch 523 is not determined when shifting to the setting change state, but the on / off of the frame opening switch 523 is determined at the end of the setting change state, and the frame opening switch 523 is turned on. Otherwise, the setting change state may not be terminated.
Thirdly, the on / off of the frame opening switch 523 is not determined when shifting to the setting change state, but if the frame opening switch 523 is not on, the set value is changed even if the setting change switch 536 is operated. It may be set so that it is not done.

Fourthly, the setting value can be changed by operating the setting change switch 536 while the frame opening switch 523 is not determined to be on / off when the setting change state is entered. , When the setting key switch 535, which is an operation for confirming the set value, is turned off, the set value is not confirmed unless the frame opening switch 523 is turned on (the new set value is not stored in the RWM). You may set it.

Further, in the case of the Pachinko game machine 500, even if the power is turned on with the reset switch 536 turned on in order to shift to the setting change state, the management information display LED (performance) in the storage area of the RWM. The data related to the information displayed on the display monitor) 538 is not cleared. The data related to the information displayed on the management information display LED 538 is a base value.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are provided on the back surface side of the front frame 502, closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In this way, it is possible to prevent the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 from being easily accessible by opening the front frame 502 a little.
For example, in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are arranged inside the cover 561, but when the main control board 530 is viewed from the front, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting are set. The change (reset) switch 536 is arranged to the right in the area of the main control board 530. As a result, the setting key insertion slot 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 can be arranged closer to the hinge mechanism 503. In FIG. 98, the left side in the figure is the open side, so if it is formed as shown in FIG. 98, the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 are located far from the open side (left side in the figure). Can be placed.

As for the slot machine 10, similarly to the above, when the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are opened on the main control board 50, the rotation shaft of the front door 12 is opened. It is preferable to arrange them so that they are closer to each other. For example, when the main control board 50 is arranged as shown in FIG. 22 and the front door 12 is viewed from the front side (player) side, the left side is the rotation axis side of the front door 12 and the right side is the open side. When the door 12 is opened and the main control board 50 is viewed, it looks like FIG. 10 (a). Therefore, if the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are arranged on the left side in FIG. 10A, the setting key insertion port 151 and the setting change (reset) are located far from the open side of the front door 12. The switch 153 can be arranged.

Furthermore, as a measure to make it difficult to shift to the setting change state due to a goto action, for example, in the Pachinko game machine 500, after inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 534, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise. Then, the setting key switch 535 may be configured to be turned on. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise and the setting key is not changed to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, it is difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state. be able to.
In particular, when a key is inserted into the key insertion slot 521 to open the front frame 502, if the structure is such that the front frame 502 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the front frame 502 can be opened. The rotation direction of the key and the rotation direction of the setting key are opposite to each other, which makes it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

The same applies to the slot machine 10.
After inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key switch 152 may be turned on by rotating the setting key counterclockwise. In this case, if the setting key is configured to be rotatable clockwise and the setting key is not changed to the setting change state when the setting key is rotated clockwise, it is difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state. be able to.
In particular, when the front door 12 is opened, if the structure is such that the front door 12 is opened by rotating the key clockwise, the rotation direction of the key and the rotation direction of the setting key when the front door 12 is opened Is in the opposite direction, making it difficult to understand the transition to the setting change state.

FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of a side surface showing the positional relationship between the upper case 560 of the board case 550, the cover 561, the setting key insertion slot 534, and the setting change (reset) switch 536. Note that, in FIG. 113, as in FIG. 108, the cross section is not hatched from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing.
As shown in FIGS. 105 and 113, the highest surface of the surface of the upper case 560 is the surface S1, and the opening surface of the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536 is the surface S2. In this case, the surface S2 is formed lower than the surface S1. By forming in this way, for example, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536 by inserting a wire-like object from the outside, the surface is more than the surface S1. It becomes more difficult to access S2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting goto action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 103 and 113, when the cover 561 is attached to the upper surface of the setting key insertion port 534 and the setting change (reset) switch 536, the surface S3 (FIG. 113) which is the upper surface of the cover 561 , It is arranged at a position lower than the surface S1 of the upper cover 560.
By forming in this way, when an attempt is made to access the setting key insertion slot 534 or the setting change (reset) switch 536, an attempt is made to insert a wire-like object between the upper cover 560 and the cover 561, or a cover. Even when trying to open 561, those actions can be made difficult, so that the setting goto action can be suppressed.

Although the 19th to 22nd embodiments have been described above, these embodiments are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
A. 19th Embodiment (1) In the 19th embodiment, the setting confirmation end sound when the setting confirmation state is finished may be output. For example, it is possible to output a voice saying "The setting confirmation is completed."
Furthermore, if the game is started at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends,
a) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is completed in the shortest time.
b) The output of the setting confirmation end sound is terminated before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game in the game in which the special role is won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot is won (in the case of the Pachinko game machine 500). , Ends the output of the setting confirmation end sound.
Can be mentioned.

(2) Further, at the same time as the setting confirmation state ends, the effect lamp 21 (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the effect lamp 541 (in the case of the pachinko game machine 500) outputs an effect indicating that the setting confirmation state has ended. You may. In this case as well, as in the 19th embodiment, the effect time by the lamp is
a) The lamp effect is finished before the game is finished when the game is finished in the shortest time.
b) The lamp effect is finished before the end of the game when the game is finished in the average time of one game.
c) Before the end of the game when the game is completed in the average time of one game in the game in which the special role is won (in the case of the slot machine 10) or the game in which the jackpot is won (in the case of the Pachinko game machine 500). , End the lamp production.
That can be mentioned.

(3) When the setting change state is finished (or when the setting confirmation state is finished as in the above example), the setting change (or confirmation) end sound and the lamp effect are output, but these setting changes (Or confirmation) The end sound and the lamp effect are controlled by the sub control board 80 or 540.
However, not limited to this, when the setting change (or confirmation) state is terminated, the output device controlled by the main control board 50 or 530 executes an output indicating that the setting change (or confirmation) state is terminated. You may.

(4) In the slot machine 10, the setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152) and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this and is separate from the main control board 50. A setting change board may be provided, and a setting key insertion port 151 (setting key switch 152), a setting change (reset) switch 153, and a setting value display LED 73 may be provided on the setting change board.
The same applies to the Pachinko gaming machine 500. A setting change board is provided separately from the main control board 530, and a setting key insertion port 534 (setting key switch 535), a setting change (reset) switch 536, and a setting value display LED 537 are provided on the setting change board. May be good.

(5) An example of outputting the voice "End the setting change" as the setting change end sound is shown, but it is not necessarily limited to this wording, for example, "The setting value has been updated". There may be.
(6) In the 19th embodiment, an example in which the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state is shown, but it is assumed that the game is started immediately after the end of the setting change state during the actual hall business. Not done. For example, it is assumed that the hall manager changes the settings and then tries to digest one game. In such a case, while confirming that the setting change state has been correctly completed by the setting change end sound and the output of the effect lamp, do not confuse the notification by the setting change end sound and the effect lamp with the effect output in the game. It is one of the purposes to make it.

B. 20th Embodiment (1) In the 20th embodiment, the lower edge 560a of the upper case 560 and the outer edge 570a of the lower case 570 are brought into contact with each other so that they can be slidably moved. However, various methods of engaging the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 before the slide movement can be mentioned, and the method is not limited to that shown in FIG. 108. Further, when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are overlapped with each other, the shape may be such that they can be overlapped with a certain degree of freedom. Alternatively, the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 may have a shape in which they overlap only at a specific position.

(2) How to arrange each connector 539a to 539h on the main control board 530, and which connector's legs are set to be exposed when the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 are temporarily fitted. , Various methods can be mentioned.
When the upper case 560 and the lower case 570 slide to move as in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the first exposed connector legs are the connector legs 539 g'and 539 h'. Therefore, in the case of the connector 539a provided on the main control board 530 at a position symmetrical with the connectors 539g and 539h, the connector legs are not exposed even if the slide movement amount increases.

Therefore, for example, on the main control board 530, from the connector 539a side (left side in the drawing) in FIG. 103, a connector important in terms of security (a connector having a signal line for starting, a signal for accepting and paying out a game medium) A connector having a wire, a connector having a signal line related to the output of an external signal, and a connector having a signal line related to the effect) are sequentially arranged, and the connector of the signal line which is not so important in terms of security is adopted for the connectors 539g and 539h. Can be mentioned.

(3) Although the substrate case 550 has examples having caulking portions 562 and 572, the present embodiment can be applied even to a substrate case 550 having no caulking portion. For example, the substrate case accommodating the sub-control substrate 540 of the pachinko gaming machine 500 may not have a caulking portion, but the twentieth embodiment can be applied even to such a substrate case.

C. 21st Embodiment (1) The type and number of connectors and the type and number of harnesses (connector terminals) shown in the above embodiment are examples, and are not limited thereto.
For example, in FIG. 111, the harnesses B and C may all be composed of thick lead wires, or all may be composed of thin lead wires.
Further, although the harness E shows an example in which only the thin lead wires are in a single row, the harness E may be a harness and a connector terminal in which two or more rows of thin lead wires are formed.
Furthermore, the harness and the connector terminals may be in any number of rows, and the number of lead wires (terminals) in one row may be any number.
Further, in a harness in which thick lead wires and thin lead wires are mixed in a row, the number of thick lead wires in the row may be one or more, and the number of thin lead wires may be one or more.

(2) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, a set of lead wires connected to one connector of the main control board 530 is defined as "one harness".
For example, the harness G connected to the connector 539g is one harness, and the harness H connected to the connector 539h is one harness. When the harness G and the harness H are tied together at the end, it is referred to as a "harness group" and not as a "one harness".

(3) When the main control board 530 and another board are connected to each other by a harness, a specific connector is mounted on the main control board 530, and the harness consisting of N lead wires is attached to the specific connector. Assume that the connector terminals are connected.
On the other hand, on the other end side of the harness, N lead wires are divided into Nx (Nx ≧ 1) and Ny (Ny ≧ 1), and a connector terminal X is attached to the tip of the Nx lead wires. The connector terminal X is connected to another board, and a connector terminal Y (≠ connector terminal X) is attached to the tip of Ny lead wires, and the connector terminal Y is another board (Nx leads). It is assumed that the wire is connected to the same board or a different board to which the wire is connected.
In this case, the "one harness" in the present embodiment refers to a set of N lead wires connected to the main control board 530 side.

D. 22nd Embodiment (1) In the pachinko game machine 500, it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, but like the slot machine 10, the setting key switch 535 is turned on after the power is turned on. It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation state with. Also in this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the frame opening switch 523 is on, and to shift to the setting confirmation state on condition that the frame release switch 523 is on.

(2) As described above, it is conceivable that a setting change board is provided as a board separate from the main control board 50 or 530. In this case, in the case of the slot machine 10, the setting is changed to the open shaft side of the front door 12 (closer to the open shaft) inside the housing, in other words, to the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. It is preferable to arrange the substrate. Similarly, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 500, the back side of the front frame 502 is set to the hinge mechanism 503 side (closer to the hinge mechanism 503), in other words, to the side away from the open end when viewed from the player side. It is preferable to arrange the modified substrate. With this arrangement, the setting key insertion ports 151 and 534 and the setting change (reset) switches 153 and 536 can be arranged at positions far from the open end. Even in this case, it is preferable that the main control board 50 or 530 is arranged at a position far from the open end.

In particular, although the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted on the main control board 50 or 530, it is preferable that the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily visible. Therefore, it is preferable that the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 is arranged at a position away from the open side, and the main control board 50 or 530 is also arranged at a position away from the open end.
However, the information displayed by the management information display LED 74 or 538 is not easily visible only by arranging the management information display LED 74 or 538 on the main control board 50 or 530 at a position away from the open side, respectively. Is also possible. Similarly, even when the management information display LED 74 or 538 is mounted at a substantially central position of the main control board 50 or 530, the management information can be obtained simply by arranging the main control board 50 or 530 away from the open end. It is also possible to obscure the information displayed by the display LED 74 or 538.

E. All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification including the 19th to 22nd embodiments are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<23rd Embodiment>
Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described.
The meanings of the terms in the 23rd embodiment are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of roles to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are in a unique lottery state, and "RT transition" means that one RT shifts to another RT. By doing so, it means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be drawn changes. Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values peculiar to that RT, and the type of replay and its winning probability are all the same in one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, it is permissible that the total value of the winning probabilities of the replay is the same for one RT and the other RT.

In this embodiment, the RT includes a non-RT and an RT1 as shown in FIG. 131 described later.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.
Further, in the present embodiment, 1BB game (1BB operating state) and RB game (RB operating state) are provided as special games (accessory operating state). Strictly speaking, 1BB game (1BB operating state) and RB game (RB operating state) are not included in RT, but may be one of RT.

The RB of the present embodiment is a role to be drawn during a general game of 1BB game (meaning a game other than RB game), and when the RB is won during the general game of 1BB game and the RB wins a prize. 1. Shift from a general game to an RB game during a 1BB game. Therefore, the RB drawn by the general game of the 1BB game is also referred to as "SRB (shift RB)".

Further, it is a concept different from RT, and has a main gaming state in which the transition is controlled by the main control board 50 as in RT. The main gaming state of the present embodiment includes main gaming states 0 to 5 as shown in FIG. 132, which will be described later.
The RT and the main game state have a case where they are linked and a case where they are not linked. For example, when the transition conditions of both the RT and the main game state are satisfied, both the RT and the main game state shift. On the other hand, when the transition condition of RT is satisfied but the transition condition of the main game state is not satisfied, only RT shifts while the main game state remains as it is. On the contrary, when the transition condition of the main game state is satisfied but the transition condition of the RT is not satisfied, only the main game state shifts while the RT remains as it is.

In the 23rd embodiment, the lottery of the "winning number" is executed by the winning combination lottery means 61. Therefore, the winning combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as a "winning number lottery (decision, selection) means". The winning numbers of the present embodiment include winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126 and the like described later.
Then, when the winning number is determined, the "conditional device number" corresponding to the winning number is generated. For example, in FIG. 126, when the winning number “1” is determined, the winning and replay condition device number “1” is generated.

The "condition device number" (also referred to as "winning information") includes a "feature condition device number" and a "winning and replay condition device number". In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122, which will be described later, "1" to "17" are provided as accessory condition device numbers. Further, as shown in FIGS. 123 to 125 described later, "1" to "24" are provided as the winning and replay condition device numbers.
Then, when the winning number is determined and the condition device number is generated, the condition device corresponding to the condition device number is activated, so that the symbol combination of the winning combination corresponding to the operated condition device can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. It becomes.
In addition, since 1BB and RB of this embodiment may not win a prize in the winning game, they may be inside 1BB and RB, respectively.

In the 23rd embodiment, the left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.
In particular, in the name of RWM53 described later, it is referred to as a first reel 31, a second reel 31, and a third reel 31.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the 23rd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 114, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is composed of 20 frames.
In FIG. 114, the symbol numbers are also shown. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number 0 is "replay". Further, in FIG. 114, the symbol number at the time of reverse rotation of the reel 31 is also displayed. The symbol number at the time of reverse rotation of the reel 31 will be described later.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to "4". For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the 1st "watermelon" of the left reel 31 passes the effective line, the maximum number of symbols is moved from the symbol to the 5th "replay". It becomes possible to stop at the effective line.
Therefore, for example, if four specific symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols on one reel 31, the specific symbols can always be stopped at the effective line regardless of the position where the stop switch 42 is operated. For example, on the left reel 31, "replays" are arranged at numbers 5, 10, 15, and 0. That is, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with four 5 symbol intervals. Therefore, with respect to the left reel 31, "replay" can always be stopped at the effective line regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 42 is operated. In addition, such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as "" PB = 1 "arrangement".

Then, on the left reel 31, "bell A" and "watermelon" are arranged at "PB = 1", respectively.
Further, in the middle reel 31, "replay", "bell A", and "cherry" are arranged in "PB = 1" respectively.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "replay", "bell A", and "bell B" are arranged at "PB = 1", respectively.
Furthermore, in the left reel 31, the 3rd "black BAR", the 8th "special figure", the 13th "red 7", and the 18th "blue BAR" are "PB = 1" in total of these 4 symbols. "Arrangement. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any one of "black BAR", "special drawing", "red 7", and "blue BAR" can be stopped at the effective line.
Similar to the left reel 31, the middle reel 31 also has the “black BAR”, “blue BAR”, “red 7” or “special figure” arranged “PB = 1” in the sum of these four symbols.
Further, in the right reel 31, "blue BAR" or "special figure bottom" is arranged as "PB = 1" by adding these two symbols.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window (transparent window) 18 and each reel 31, and the effective line (display line for displaying the symbol combination).
The reel 31 arranged inside can be seen through from the display window 18.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31). Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols can be seen from the display window 18. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (frames) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10.

Further, FIG. 115 illustrates the designation of the symbol position in the present specification. In the present specification, the symbol positions at the time of stop that can be seen from the display window 18 for each reel 31 are referred to as "upper", "middle", and "lower" in order from the top. , "Left middle row", "Left lower row".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 115, effective lines are set for the nine symbols that can be seen from the display window 18.
Here, the "effective line" is a symbol combination line (display line) that is a line for arranging symbols when the reel 31 is stopped and forms a symbol combination, and a symbol combination corresponding to any combination is used. It is the line that wins the role when it stops at that line. In the present embodiment, the specified number is three in any game state, and the effective lines are set to be the same in any game state.
The effective line of the 23rd embodiment is a so-called downward-sloping straight line (“upper left row”-“middle middle row”-“lower right row”). Other than this, it is an invalid line.
The specified number may be different for each game state (for example, the specified number during 1BB operation may be set to "2"). Further, the position and number of effective lines may be different for each game state or for each specified number (for example, a plurality of effective lines may be set for a specific specified number).

FIGS. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing types, symbol combinations, payout numbers, and the like of combinations (combinations corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the combination lottery means 61) in the 23rd embodiment.
The roles are roughly divided into special roles, replays (replaying roles), and small roles.
Then, the symbol combination corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all reels 31 are stopped, if the symbol combination corresponding to any combination stops at the valid line (the combination wins. The same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to that combination is paid out (dividend (profit). ) Is given).
However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special role is set to 0. In the replay, medals are automatically inserted and the replay can be executed.

In FIGS. 116 to 121, the “three sheets (1)” correspond to when the accessory is not operating, and in particular, in the 23rd embodiment, a game other than the 1BB game (for example, a 1BB game in a state where the 1BB is not won). It corresponds to the state of not being inside, the state of carrying over the winning information (conditional device number) of 1BB, etc.). In the 23rd embodiment, since the AT is executed during the 1BB game, the games other than the 1BB game are non-AT. Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, a game other than the 1BB game may be referred to as a "normal game (character non-operating, non-AT)". However, even in a normal game, there are cases of advantageous sections and cases of non-advantageous sections.
Further, "3 sheets (2)" corresponds to when RB is not operating while 1BB is operating (during 1BB game). Furthermore, "3 sheets (3)" corresponds to 1BB operation (1BB game) and RB operation (RB game).
For example, in FIG. 116, 1BB of the winning combination number "001" is subject to lottery when the specified number is 3 (1) (when the winning combination is not operating), but the specified number of 3 (2) and the specified number of 3 are 3. In the case of (3), it means that the lottery is not applicable.

The combination numbers "001" to "017" shown in FIG. 116 correspond to special combinations (roles). In this embodiment, one type of 1BB and 16 types of RBs (RBA to RBP) are provided as special roles.
In the 23rd embodiment, only 1BB is drawn when the accessory is not activated, and the RB is not drawn. Therefore, there is no transition from the accessory non-operation to the RB operation.
If 1BB is won when the accessory is not operating and 1BB wins, the medal will not be paid out in this game, but from the next game, it will shift to 1BB operation (1BB game) corresponding to the special game.

Also, during 1BB operation (1BB game), RB is drawn. If the RB is won during the 1BB operation and the RB wins a prize, the medal will not be paid out in this game, but the next game will shift to the RB operation (RB game) during the 1BB operation (1BB game).
In the 23rd embodiment, when 1BB is operating and RB is not operating, it may be referred to as "general game of 1BB game".
When the end condition of the RB operation is satisfied and the end condition of the 1BB operation is satisfied, the 1BB operation is ended and the game shifts to the non-operation of the accessory (normal game). On the other hand, when the end condition of the RB operation is satisfied and the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied, the process shifts to the 1BB operation (and when the RB is not operated).

The combination numbers "018" to "047" shown in FIG. 117 all correspond to replays (replaying combinations). In the 23rd embodiment, replays 01 to 10 are provided as the type of replay. As shown in FIG. 117, when the accessory is not operating (three sheets (1)), all of the replays 01 to 10 are subject to the lottery. On the other hand, when the RB is not operating while the 1BB is operating (3 sheets (2)), only the replay 01 is subject to the lottery. Further, the replay is not drawn when the RB is activated during the 1BB operation (3 sheets (3)).

118 to 121 show a small combination of the 23rd embodiment. As the small winning combination of the 23rd embodiment, small winning combination 01 to 34 are provided.
Of the small wins 01 to 34, the number of payouts for the small wins 01 to 12 is set to 15 at the time of winning, and when the so-called push order bell is won (small wins A group (small wins A1 to A6) described later). And the role that becomes the high bell of the small role B group (when the small role B1 to B6) is won).
In addition, the number of payouts for the small wins 13 to 24 is set to three at the time of winning, which is the lower bell when the so-called push order bell is won (when the small win A group (small wins A1 to A6) is won). It is a role.
Furthermore, for the small wins 25 to 33, the number of payouts at the time of winning is set to one, which is the lower bell at the time of winning the so-called push order bell (when the small win B group (small wins B1 to B6) is won). It is a role to become.
Further, the small winning combination 34 is a winning combination that is subject to lottery when the RB is operating during the 1BB operation (at the time of three (3)).

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, when the symbol combination corresponding to the combination does not stop at the effective line in the winning game, the combination to be carried over to the next game and the combination not to be carried over are defined.
The roles carried over are 1BB and RB in this embodiment. Since both the symbol combinations of 1BB and RB are set to "PB ≠ 1", there is a case where a prize is not won in the game in which 1BB or RB is won. Then, when 1BB or RB is won, the winning information of the 1BB or RB is controlled to be carried over to the next game or later in the game until the 1BB or RB wins, respectively.

On the other hand, when a small role or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in this game, and the winning is not carried over to the next game or later. That is, in the game in which these winning combinations are won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won, at the end of the game, The right to the winning combination is extinguished.
In the 23rd embodiment, when a winning number including a small winning combination or a small winning combination is won, any of the replays or the small winning combination is set to win a prize, and there is no case of being missed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it goes without saying that a small winning combination (“PB ≠ 1”) that may be missed may be provided.

122 to 125 are diagrams showing a condition device number, a condition device, a winning combination, and the like.
First, in the combination lottery means 61, the winning number is drawn. The winning numbers include, for example, winning numbers "1" to "41" as shown in FIG. 126 described later. Then, as shown in FIG. 126, for example, when the winning number "1" is won, the condition device "Replay A" corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "1" can be operated.
Further, for example, when the winning number "25" is won, the condition device "1BB" corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" can be operated.

Here, as shown in FIG. 138 described later, the RWM 53 has a storage area (address “F0A9 (H)”) capable of storing the winning and replay condition device numbers and a storage area capable of storing the accessory condition device number. (Address "F0AA (H)"). For example, it is assumed that the winning number "11" is won when the accessory is not operating. In this case, by storing the value of the winning number (“11”) in the address “F0A9 (H)”, the winning and replay condition device number can be updated. Further, for example, it is assumed that the winning number "25" is won when the accessory is not operating. In this case, the value obtained by performing a predetermined calculation on the value of the winning number (in the 23rd embodiment, "1" which is the value obtained by subtracting "24" from the winning number) is stored in the address "F0AA (H)". As a result, the accessory condition device number can be updated.

In the 23rd embodiment, the winning number won in the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 is compared with "25", and if it is determined that the number is less than "25", the winning number is assigned to the address "F0A9 (H)". Make it memorable. Further, when it is determined that the value is not less than "25", the accessory condition device number can be derived from the winning number by a predetermined operation (as described above, "24" is subtracted in the 23rd embodiment), and the derived value is derived. A control process is performed so that the added accessory condition device number can be stored in the address "F0AA (H)". In particular, as in the 23rd embodiment, when the total number of accessory condition device numbers "17" is smaller than the total number of winning and replay condition device numbers "24", this is an effective derivation method. ..

FIG. 122 shows an accessory (particularly 1BB or RB in the 23rd embodiment) condition device.
For example, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the accessory condition device number "1" is a bonus condition device that can be operated when 1BB is won. When this 1BB condition device is activated, the winning combination 1BB can win a prize.
Further, in the remarks column of FIG. 122, the operation end condition of the accessory condition device is shown. The 1BB condition device continues until the number of medals acquired exceeds 170, and when the number of medals acquired exceeds 170, the operation end condition of the 1BB condition device is satisfied, and the operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated.
Similarly, each of the RBA condition device to the RBP condition device ends based on 12 games or 8 prizes, or the end of operation of the 1BB condition device.

FIGS. 123 to 125 show a winning and replay condition device. Of the winning and replay condition device numbers, "1" to "9" are condition device numbers related to replay, and "10" to "24" are condition device numbers related to small wins.
For example, when the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number "2" is activated, the winning combination includes the replays 01 and 02, so that the replays 01 and 02 can be won. When the condition device is activated, not all the winning combinations corresponding to the condition device can win a prize. For example, when the replay B condition device is activated, the replay 02 can be won in the 23rd embodiment. It becomes.
Therefore, in the 23rd embodiment, even if a plurality of types of replays are won in duplicate, only one of the replays wins the prize. Similarly, as will be described later, there are cases where a plurality of types of small wins are won in duplicate, but in this case as well, only one of the small wins can be won (no duplicate wins).

Winning and Replay Condition When the Replay A Condition Device corresponding to the device number "1" is activated, only Replay 01 can win a prize. The symbol combinations of the replay 01 are the combination numbers "018" to "021" in FIG. 117. Therefore, "Replay"-"Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / On special map"-"Bell A" stops at the effective line. If "blue BAR / black BAR / red 7 / special figure top" stops at the effective line (middle middle stage) when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "replay" stops at the middle upper stage. If "Bell A" stops at the effective line (lower right) when the right reel 31 is stopped, "replay" stops at the upper right. Therefore, when the symbol combination of replay 01 stops at the valid line (replay 01 wins), "replay"-"replay"-"replay" (upper replay) stops at the upper line (invalid line).

When the replay B condition device is activated, the replay 02 can win a prize. The symbol combination of the replay 02 is the combination number "022" in FIG. 117. Therefore, "replay"-"replay"-"replay" (downward right replay) stops at the effective line.
When the replay C condition device is activated, the replay 03 or 10 can be won. Here, the reason why "weak cherry" is mentioned in the remarks column is that it can be a so-called square cherry ("cherry" stops in the lower left row). The lower left is not an effective line. The design of the left reel 31 of the replay 03 is "Bell A", but in FIG. 114, when the 4th "Bell A" of the left reel 31 is stopped at the effective line (upper left), the 2nd "cherry" Stops at the lower left (invalid line).

In the replay D1 condition device, "strong cherry 1" is mentioned in the remarks column because it can be a so-called middle cherry ("cherry" stops in the left middle). The middle left is not an effective line. The same applies to the "strong cherry 2" of the replay D2 condition device and the "strong cherry 3" of the replay D3 condition device.
When the replay D1 condition device is activated, the winning combination, replay 03, 04 or 10, can be won. Of these, the symbol combination of the replay 04 is "black BAR"-"red 7 / cherry"-"replay / bell B" as shown in the role numbers "027" to "030" in FIG. 117. Then, when the 3rd "black BAR" is stopped at the effective line (upper left) when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 2nd "cherry" is stopped at the middle left.

Further, when the replay D2 conditional device is activated, the winning combination replay 02, 03, 04, or 10 can be won, and when the replay D3 conditional device is activated, the replay 03, 04, 05, or 10 can be won.
Then, when the replay D2 condition device or the replay D3 condition device is activated and the replay 04 wins a prize, the second "cherry" stops in the left middle stage when the left reel 31 is stopped, as in the case of the replay D1 condition device operating.

When the replay E condition device is activated, the winning combination, replay 06, can win a prize. As shown in FIG. 117, the symbol combination of the replay 06 is "watermelon"-"replay / watermelon"-"red 7 / watermelon / special drawing / black BAR". Here, since the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is "PB = 1", the "watermelon" always stops at the effective line. Further, the "watermelon" of the middle and right reels 31 is "PB ≠ 1", but if the "watermelon" is pressed, the "watermelon" can be stopped at the effective line.
When the replay F condition device is activated, the winning combination, replay 07, can win a prize.

When the replay G condition device is activated, the winning combination, replay 08 or 09, can win a prize. Here, in order to win the replay 08, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the 8th "special figure" is pressed so that it stops at the upper left, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, the 16th "" When the "replay" is pressed so as to stop at the lower right, the replay 08 wins and the "upper" and "lower" stop at the upper left and middle left. Furthermore, "upper special map" and "lower special map" also stop in the upper right and middle right rows. This stop type is referred to as the "strongest cherry" in the 23rd embodiment.

In FIG. 124, when the small winning combination A1 conditional device to the small winning combination A6 conditional device are activated, either the small winning combination 01 to 06 or the small winning combination 13 to 24 included in the winning combination can be awarded.
Here, when the small winning combination A1 condition device to the small winning combination A6 condition device are activated during the 1BB game (1BB operation) and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order, the 15-card combination (included in the winning combination). When the small winning combination (any of 01 to 06) wins and the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order (pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order), the three-card winning combination (small winning combination 13 to included in the winning combination) Any of 24) wins.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not operating, there is no correct push order when the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are activated. When the accessory is not operating and the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are activated, the three-card combination wins even if they are all in the pushing order.

The small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device can be operated only when the RB is not operating while the 1BB is operating. Therefore, the small combination A1 condition device to the small combination A6 condition device are operated during the general game of the 1BB game (other than the RB game).
Here, the relationship between the small winning combination A1 to A6 condition devices and the correct answer pressing order during 1BB operation is as follows.
Small role A1 condition device: 123 (left middle right)
Small role A2 condition device: 132 (middle left and right)
Small role A3 condition device: 213 (middle left and right)
Small role A4 condition device: 231 (middle right left)
Small role A5 condition device: 312 (right, left, middle)
Small role A6 condition device: 321 (right middle left)

For example, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during a 1BB game and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "123", in order to win the small winning combination 01, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-""Cherry"-"BellA" is stopped. As a result, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" stops at the lower line (invalid line).
Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order "132", the correct answer is pressed at this point when the left first stop is performed. Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the effective line is "watermelon" (small combination). The symbols that make up 01) are stopped. Next, at the time of the second right stop, the order of incorrect release is set at this point, so among the winning combinations 13 to 17, the small winning combination 17 whose left reel 31 is a "watermelon" is stopped at the effective line. That is, when the second stop is on the right, the "replay" is stopped on the lower right. Furthermore, at the time of the middle third stop, "Red 7 / Replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order "213" or "231", the incorrect release order is set at this point at the time of the first middle stop, so for example, the small winning combination 14 is stopped at the effective line. Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle middle stage. Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "replay" is stopped in the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, the "bell A / bell B" is stopped in the lower right stage.
Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order "312" or "321", the incorrect release order is set at this point at the time of the first right stop, so for example, the small winning combination 17 is stopped at the effective line. Therefore, at the first stop on the right, "replay" is stopped at the lower right. Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" is stopped in the upper left stage, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the "red 7 / replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage.

As described above, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "123", the 15-card winning combination is won. On the other hand, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, in the 23rd embodiment, when the accessory is not operating (inside the 1BB non-inside and inside the 1BB), the correct answer is obtained even when the small combination A1 condition device is activated. There is no push order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123" when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, the three-card combination is won (without winning the 15-card combination). Examples of the three-card winning combination include a small winning combination 14 or 17 with "PB = 1".

The above is the same for the small combination A2 to small combination A6 conditional devices (condition device numbers "11" to "15").
When the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "132", the small winning combination 02, which is a 15-card combination, is won, and the pressing order is other than "132". When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three winning combinations included in the winning combination are won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A2 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any of the three winning combinations included in the winning combination can be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let me win a prize.

When the small winning combination A3 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "213", the small winning combination 03, which is a 15-card combination, is won, and the pressing order is other than "213". When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three winning combinations included in the winning combination are won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A3 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any of the three winning combinations included in the winning combination can be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let me win a prize.

When the small winning combination A4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "231", the small winning combination 04, which is a 15-card combination, is won, and the pressing order is other than "231". When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three winning combinations included in the winning combination are won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A4 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any of the three winning combinations included in the winning combination can be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Make a prize.

When the small winning combination A5 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "312", the small winning combination 05, which is a 15-card combination, is won, and the pressing order is other than "312". When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three winning combinations included in the winning combination are won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A5 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any of the three winning combinations included in the winning combination can be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let me win a prize.

When the small winning combination A6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "321", the small winning combination 06, which is a 15-card combination, is won, and the pressing order is other than "321". When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, any three winning combinations included in the winning combination are won.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination A6 condition device is activated when the accessory is not activated, any of the three winning combinations included in the winning combination can be played regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Let me win a prize.

Further, in the SRB during 1BB operation, the small combination B1 condition device to the small combination B6 condition device (condition device numbers "16" to "21") were operated, and the stop switch 42 was operated in the order of pressing the correct answer. When the 15-card combination (any of the small combinations 07 to 12 included in the winning combination) wins and the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order (pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order), 1 The winning combination (any of the small winning combination 25 to 33 included in the winning combination) wins the prize.
On the other hand, there is no correct push order when the small combination B1 condition device to the small combination B6 condition device are operated in the non-internal SRB during the operation of the accessory and the operation of 1BB. When the accessory B1 condition device to the small combination B6 condition device are activated while the accessory is not operating and the SRB is not operating while the 1BB is operating, one winning combination is won even if the push order is used.
The winning and replay condition device numbers "16" to "21" are drawn only when the RB is not operating while the 1BB is operating.

When the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated during 1BB game and inside the SRB, and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "123", "watermelon" is placed on the effective line in order to win the small winning combination 07. -"Cherry"-"Bell B" is stopped. As a result, "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" stops at the lower line (invalid line).
Further, when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order "132", the correct answer press order at this point at the time of the first left stop. Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "watermelon" (the symbol constituting the small winning combination 07) is stopped at the effective line. Next, at the time of the second right stop, the order of incorrect release is set at this point, so among the winning combinations 25, 26, and 28, for example, the small winning combination 28 whose left reel 31 is a "watermelon" is stopped at the effective line. That is, at the time of the second right stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the lower right. Further, at the time of the middle third stop, the "bell B / watermelon" is stopped in the middle middle stage.

On the other hand, when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order "213" or "231", this time point is reached at the time of the first stop. In order to stop the small winning combination 25 at the effective line, for example, "blue BAR / black BAR / red 7 / on the special map" is stopped in the middle middle stage at the time of the first middle stop. Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "replay" is stopped in the upper left stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "black BAR / red 7 / watermelon / on the special drawing" is stopped in the lower right stage.
Further, when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect release order "312" or "321", at this time point at the time of the first right stop. Since the order is incorrect, for example, the small winning combination 25 is stopped at the effective line in the same manner as above.

Further, in the game in which the small winning combination B1 to B6 condition devices are activated during the 1BB game and during the non-internal SRB game, there is no correct answer pressing order. Therefore, for example, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123" when the small winning combination B1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and the SRB is not inside, (the small winning combination 07, which is a 15-card combination, is not won. ) Win a prize for one piece. As the one-card winning combination, for example, a small winning combination 25 or 28 with “PB = 1” can be mentioned.
Similarly, when the 1BB game is not in progress, that is, when the accessory is not operating (inside the 1BB non-internal and in the 1BB internal), the game in which the small combination B1 condition device is activated does not have the correct answer pressing order. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order "123" when the small winning combination B1 condition device is operating when the accessory is not operating, the small winning combination 07 (as in the case of 1BB game and non-internal SRB). Instead of winning a 15-card combination, a 1-card combination (for example, a small combination 25 or 28 with "PB = 1") is won.

The above is the same when the small combination B2 condition device to the small combination B6 condition device are operated.
When the small winning combination B2 condition device is activated during 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "132", the small winning combination 08, which is a 15-card combination, is won and the correct answer pressing order is given. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "132", one of the winning combinations is won without winning the small winning combination 08.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination B2 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, during the SRB non-internal, or when the accessory is not activated, the small winning combination 08 is in any pushing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Do not win a prize, but win one of the winning combinations.

When the small winning combination B3 condition device is activated during 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "213", the small winning combination 09, which is a 15-card combination, is won and the correct answer pressing order. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "213", any one of the winning combinations is won without winning the small winning combination 09.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination B3 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, during the SRB non-internal, or when the accessory is not activated, the small winning combination 09 (because there is no correct pressing order) Do not win a prize, but win one of the winning combinations.

When the small winning combination B4 condition device is activated during 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "231", the small winning combination 10 which is a 15-card combination is won and the correct answer pressing order is given. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "231", the small winning combination 10 is not won, but any one of the winning combinations is won.
Further, when the small winning combination B4 condition device is activated during the 1BB game, during the SRB non-internal operation, or when the accessory is not activated, the small winning combination 10 is performed regardless of the pressing order (because there is no correct pressing order). Do not win a prize, but win one of the winning combinations.

When the small winning combination B5 condition device is activated during 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "312", the small winning combination 11 which is a 15-card combination is won and the correct answer pressing order is given. When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "312", the small winning combination 11 is not won, but any one of the winning combinations is won.
Further, when the small winning combination B5 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and during the non-internal SRB or when the accessory is not activated, the small winning combination 11 (because there is no correct pressing order) regardless of the pressing order. Do not win a prize, but win one of the winning combinations.

When the small winning combination B6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and inside the SRB, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order "321", the small winning combination 12 which is the 15-card combination is won, and the correct answer pressing order When the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than "321", the small winning combination 12 is not won, but any one of the winning combinations is won.
Further, when the small winning combination B6 condition device is activated during the 1BB game and during the non-internal SRB or when the accessory is not activated, the small winning combination 12 (because there is no correct pressing order) regardless of the pressing order. Do not win a prize, but win one of the winning combinations.

The small winning combination C condition device is a condition device that can be operated when the winning number "22" is won during the RB operation (game). When the small winning combination C condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combination 01 to 12 (15-card combination) included in the winning combination is won. In this case, which 15-card winning combination is to be won is arbitrary, but for example, the small winning combination to be won may be different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
The small winning combination D condition device is a condition device that can be operated when the winning number "23" is won during the RB operation. When the small winning combination D condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combination 13 to 24 (three-card combination) included in the winning combination is won. In this case, it is arbitrary which three-card winning combination is to be won, but for example, the small winning combination to be won may be different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
The small winning combination E condition device is a condition device that can be operated when the winning number "24" is won during the operation of the RB. When the small winning combination E condition device is activated, any one of the small winning combination 25 to 34 (one piece combination) included in the winning combination is won. In this case, which one winning combination is to be won is arbitrary, but for example, the small winning combination to be won may be different depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42.

FIGS. 126 to 130 are winning probabilities determined by the lottery table when the winning number is drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61, and show the number of winning numbers for each RT (game state) and each set value. It is a figure (number table). The winning probability is obtained by dividing the numerical values shown in FIGS. 126 to 130 by "65536". For example, in FIG. 126, since the number of winning numbers “1” is “4338” common to all settings, the winning probability is “4338/65536”.
In FIGS. 126 to 130, for example, when the winning number “1” is won in FIG. 126, the winning and replay condition device number “1”, that is, the replay A condition device becomes operable, and the replay 01 can win the prize.

The set value refers to a value displayed on the set value display LED 73 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and is different from the information stored in the RWM 53 as the setting value information. Specifically, the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is in the range of "0" to "5" in the 23rd embodiment. For example, when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "0", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "1", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "1". The value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "2", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "2", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "3", and the value displayed on the RWM 53 is "3". When the stored set value information is "3", the value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is "4", and when the set value information stored in the RWM 53 is "5", the set value display LED 73 The value displayed in is "6".

Further, the winning combination lottery means 61 executes the winning combination lottery using the winning combination lottery table. For example, in FIG. 126, the winning number 1 (replay A) indicates that the number “4338” is common from the setting 1 to the setting 6, but in such a case, the winning number 1 (replay A) is used. ) Is won or not, one number "4338" is stored in the winning combination lottery table. On the other hand, when at least a part of the number is different between the setting 1 to the setting 6 as in the winning number 3 (replay C), the number corresponding to the set value is stored in the winning combination lottery table.
Specifically, in the combination lottery table, for example, "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of the addresses "XXX0 (H)" and "XXX1 (H)" corresponding to the setting 1, and the setting 2 stores the "940 (D)". "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of the corresponding addresses "XXX2 (H)" and "XXX3 (H)", and the addresses "XXX4 (H)" and "XXX5 (H)" corresponding to the setting 3 are stored. "940 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte address of "". Further, "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of the addresses "XXX6 (H)" and "XXX7 (H)" corresponding to the setting 4, and the addresses "XXX8 (H)" and the addresses corresponding to the setting 5 are stored. "950 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte address of "XXX9 (H)". Furthermore, "960 (D)" is stored in the 2-byte addresses of the addresses "XXXA (H)" and "XXXB (H)" corresponding to the setting 6. The above-mentioned "XXX0 (H)" to "XXXB (H)" indicate consecutive arbitrary addresses in the ROM 54.

Then, for example, when the set value information is "1" (that is, setting 2), the address "XXX0 (H)" is used as the reference address, and the value obtained by doubling the set value information is used as the offset value, and the address "XXX2 (H)" is used. And "940 (D)" stored in "XXX3 (H)" is acquired, the random value and the offset "940 (D)" are compared and calculated, and whether the winning number 3 (replay C) is won. Judge whether or not. In the above example, since the number of digits is 2 bytes, the value obtained by doubling the set value information is used as the offset value, but when the number of digits is 1 byte, the set value information is doubled. It can be an offset value without doing so. In this way, by using a specific address as a reference address and setting value information or a value obtained by doubling the set value information as an offset value, it is possible to acquire a number corresponding to the set value information. ..

In a game in which the special role (1BB) has not been won, if the winning number "25" is won in this game and the 1BB condition device can be operated, the winning combination 1BB does not win. The winning will be carried over to the next game. Then, after the next game (inside 1BB), the winning numbers "25" are not drawn, and the winning numbers "1" to "21" are subject to the lottery. When any of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won in 1BB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the game this time becomes operable, and the accessory condition device does not operate. On the other hand, when none of the winning numbers "1" to "21" is won in the inside of 1BB, the 1BB condition device related to the 1BB carrying over the winning becomes operable, and 1BB can be won. ..

The same applies to RB, which is another special role.
In the game when the RB of the 1BB game is not won, in the game in which the winning number "26" to "41" is won in this game and the RBA to RBP condition device can be operated, the winning combination is RBA to. If the RBP does not win, the winning will be carried over to the next game or later. Then, after the next game (inside the SRB), the winning numbers "26" to "41" are not drawn, and the winning numbers "10" to "21" are subject to the lottery. When any of the winning numbers "10" to "21" is won in the SRB, the condition device corresponding to the winning number won in the game this time becomes operable, and the RBA to RBP condition devices do not operate. On the other hand, when none of the winning numbers "10" to "21" is won inside the SRB, the RBA to RBP condition device related to the RBA to RBP carrying over the winning becomes operable and the winning is won. RBA to RBP can win a prize.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a number table in non-RT. In non-RT, 1BB is drawn for the character (winning number "25"), but RB is not drawn. The RB is drawn when 1BB is activated (during 1BB game), which will be described later.
Further, in non-RT, the winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to the winning of the replay are all subject to the lottery. In addition, the winning numbers "10" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination are subject to the lottery. The winning numbers "10" to "27" are subject to lottery in any RT (game state) except when the RB is activated.
Winning numbers "22" to "24" are subject to lottery only when the RB is operating during 1BB game, which will be described later, and are not subject to lottery at other RTs (game states).

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a table of numbers in RT1. The difference between RT1 and non-RT is that the winning number "9" (replay G) is not drawn. Other than that, it is the same as non-RT.
In both non-RT and RT1, during 1BB non-internal, 1BB (winning number "25") is drawn according to the number shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, respectively, and after winning the winning number "25". In non-RT and RT1 (inside 1BB), 1BB (winning number "25") is not drawn. That is, the number "19930" shown in FIGS. 126 and 127 becomes "0" after winning 1BB.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a number table in the non-internal RB (SRB) during 1BB operation. The inside of the RB while the 1BB is operating corresponds to the general game of the 1BB game.
In this gaming state, the winning numbers "25" (1BB) are not drawn, but all RBs (winning numbers "26" to "41") are drawn. In this embodiment, all RBs are set to the same number "1807" in all the set values.
In addition, the replay is not drawn in the non-inside of the RB during the 1BB operation. Therefore, the number of winning numbers "1" to "9" is set to "0".
As for the small winning combination, the winning numbers "10" to "21" are subject to the lottery as in the case of the non-RT and RT1 described above. In addition, the winning numbers "22" to "24" corresponding to the small winning combination during the RB game are not drawn.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing a numerical table inside the RB (SRB) during 1BB operation. The inside of the RB during the 1BB operation corresponds to the general game of the 1BB game as well as the inside of the RB not during the 1BB operation.
Since the RB is not drawn in addition to the 1BB inside the RB while the 1BB is operating, the number of winning numbers "25" to "41" is "0".
Further, the winning number "1" (replay A) is drawn in the inside of the RB during the operation of 1BB, unlike the inside of the RB during the operation of 1BB.
FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a number table during 1BB operation and RB operation. During 1BB operation and RB operation, only the winning numbers "22" to "24" are drawn.

The ball output rate in each of the above game states will be described.
There are various definitions of the payout rate, but in the 23rd embodiment, the payout rate is defined as "the number of outs / the number of ins".
Here, the "in number of sheets" refers to the number of bets, and in the 23rd embodiment, the number of bets is "3" in any gaming state.
Further, the “out number” means the number of payouts, and in design, it means the expected value of the number of payouts. For example, in a game in which the instruction function is activated (a game that notifies the correct push order), when the winning numbers "10" to "21" are won (when the push order bell is won), the high bell (in the 23rd embodiment) is always used. 15 bells) shall win the prize.
Specifically, when the number of ins is "3" and the number of outs is "1", the payout rate is about "0.33".
When the number of ins is "3" and the number of outs is "3", the payout rate is "1".
Furthermore, when the number of ins is "3" and the number of outs is "9", the payout rate is "3".

In addition, when the winning numbers "10" to "15" are won when the character (1BB) is not operating, three cards are always won, and the winning numbers "16" to "21" when the character is not operating are won. At times, one piece of the winning combination shall always win.
Furthermore, in the RB non-internal and non-AT (game in which the instruction function does not operate) during the 1BB game, when the winning numbers "10" to "15" are won, there is a high probability of "1/6" (higher bell (game). It is assumed that (15 bells) wins and the low bell (3 bells) wins with a probability of "5/6". It should be noted that the reason why it is set to "1/6" is that since the pressing order is 6 choices, it is used as the winning probability when the stop switch 42 is randomly operated. In addition, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one bell is always won in the RB non-internal and non-AT during the 1BB game.

Furthermore, when the winning numbers "10" to "15" are won, there is a probability of "1/6" of high bells (15 sheets) inside the RB during the 1BB game and during non-AT (game in which the instruction function does not operate). Bell) wins, and there is a probability of "5/6" that Yasume Bell (3 bells) wins. In addition, when the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won inside the RB during the 1BB game and at the time of non-AT, the higher bell (15 bells) wins with a probability of "1/6", and "5" It is assumed that the cheap bell (1 bell) wins with a probability of "/ 6".

Further, when the symbol combination of the replay is stopped and displayed, the first method is to set the number of outs in the current game to "0" and the number of ins in the next game to "0". Secondly, there is a method in which the number of outs in this game is "3" and the number of ins in the next game is "3". In the following example, it is calculated by the latter.
Furthermore, although the ball output rate differs depending on the settings 1 to 6, in the following, the ball output rate will be calculated using setting 1 as an example.

In non-RT, the total number of winning numbers "1" to "9" corresponding to the winning of the replay is "8882".
In addition, the total number of winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A group is "16800".
Furthermore, the total number of winning numbers "16" to "21" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination B group is "19824".
Then, in the non-RT game state, the three-card combination always wins in the games with the winning numbers "10" to "15", and the one-card combination always wins in the games with the winning numbers "16" to "21".
Therefore, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is
3x (8882/65536) + 3x (16800/65536) + 1x (19824/65536)
≒ 1.483 (sheets)
Will be.
In addition, the ball output rate is
1.483 / 3 ≒ 0.494
Will be.

Next, while 1BB is operating and RB is not inside, the ball output rate is calculated separately for AT and non-AT.
First, at the time of AT, 15 cards will be paid out for the games in which the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small role A group are paid out, and in the games in which the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, One piece will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is
15x (16800/65536) + 1x (19824/65536)
≒ 4.148 (sheets)
Will be.
In addition, the ball output rate is
4.148 / 3 ≒ 1.383
Will be.

In addition, when 1BB is operating and RB is not inside, at the time of non-AT, in the game in which the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A group are won, the probability of "1/6" is 15. With a probability of "5/6", 3 cards will be paid out. In addition, in the games in which the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, one card is paid out.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) + 1 x (19824/65536)
≒ 1.584 (sheets)
Will be.
In addition, the ball output rate is
1.584 / 3 = 0.528
Will be.

Next, during 1BB operation and inside the RB, the ball output rate is calculated separately for AT and non-AT.
First, at the time of AT, 15 cards will be paid out for the games in which the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small role A group are paid out, and even in the games in which the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won. 15 cards will be paid out.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is
15 × (16800/65536) + 15 × (19824/65536)
≒ 8.383 (sheets)
Will be.
In addition, the ball output rate is
8.383 / 3 ≒ 2.794
Will be.

In addition, during 1BB operation and inside the RB, during non-AT, in the game in which the winning numbers "10" to "15" corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination A group are won, there is a probability of "1/6" of 15 cards. With a probability of "5/6", 3 cards will be paid out. In addition, in the games in which the winning numbers "16" to "21" are won, 15 cards are paid out with a probability of "1/6" and 1 card is paid out with a probability of "5/6".
Therefore, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is
15 x (16800/65536) x (1/6) + 3 x (16800/65536) x (5/6) +15 x (19824/65536) x (1/6) + 1 x (19824/65536) x (5 / 6)
≒ 2.290 (sheets)
Will be.
In addition, the ball output rate is
2.290 / 3 ≒ 0.763
Will be.

Further, during 1BB operation and RB operation, the ball output rate is the same between non-AT and AT.
As shown in FIG. 130, during 1BB operation and RB operation, the number of winning numbers "22" is "3310" and the number of payouts is 15, and the number of winning numbers "23" is "16230" and the number of payouts. The number of winning numbers "24" is "19825" and the number of payouts is one.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of payouts per game is
15 x (3310/65536) + 3 x (16230/65536) + 1 x (19825/65536)
≒ 1.803 (sheets)
Will be.
In addition, the ball output rate is
1.803 / 3 ≒ 0.601
Will be.

In the above, when the payout rate exceeds "1", the number of medals increases, and when the payout rate falls below "1", the number of medals decreases.
Therefore, the ball output rate exceeds "1" (the number of medals increases) at the time of AT during 1BB operation and inside the RB, and at the time of AT during the 1BB operation and inside the RB.
On the other hand, when 1BB is not operating, when 1BB is operating and non-AT inside the RB, when 1BB is operating and the inside of the RB is non-AT, and when 1BB is operating and the RB is operating, the balls are ejected. The rate is below "1" (the number of medals decreases).
Therefore, the magnitude relationship of the ball output rate is in order from the smallest.
(1) When 1BB is not operating (ball output rate "0.494")
(2) During non-AT while 1BB is operating and RB is not inside (ball output rate "0.528")
(3) When 1BB is operating and RB is operating (ball ejection rate "0.601")
(4) During non-AT during 1BB operation and inside RB (ball ejection rate "0.763")
(5) At AT while 1BB is operating and RB is not inside (ball output rate "1.383")
(6) At AT during 1BB operation and inside the RB (ball output rate "2.794")
Will be.

From the above
(1) The ball ejection rate exceeds "1" when the RB is not operating during AT, but the ball ejection rate does not exceed "1" during non-AT.
(2) Even during AT, if the RB is awarded and the RB is activated, the ball output rate will be less than "1".
(3) When 1BB is operating during non-AT, the ball ejection rate is higher than when 1BB is not operating during non-AT.
Therefore, for example, even if 1BB is won and the game shifts to the 1BB game without having the right to execute the AT, the ball output rate is lower than "1" during both the general game and the RB game of the 1BB game. Cannot be increased.
In addition, during non-AT, the ball ejection rate is higher when 1BB is operating than when 1BB is not operating. However, since the AT lottery is executed only inside 1BB (when 1BB is not operating), the AT lottery cannot be received when 1BB is operating. Therefore, when 1BB is operated during non-AT, it is disadvantageous to the player.
Further, during AT (when 1BB is operating), when the inside of the RB is inside, 15 winning combinations can be won when the small winning combination B1 to B6 condition devices are activated. Therefore, during AT (when 1BB is operating), the inside of the RB is more advantageous to the player than the inside of the non-RB.
Although the above-mentioned payout rate was calculated in setting 1, the magnitude relationship of the payout rate is the same for other set values (settings 2 to 6).

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an RT transition in the 23rd embodiment.
Non-RT and RT1 correspond to when 1BB is not activated. Non-RT and RT1 continue until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. In the 23rd embodiment, the RT shift timing is set when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, that is, when all reels 31 are stopped.
In non-RT and RT1, 1BB (winning number "25" mentioned above) is drawn, but if 1BB is won and it is inside 1BB, RT does not shift and non-RT or RT1 is maintained respectively. .. Then, when the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in non-RT or RT1, the process shifts to 1BB operation and non-internal RB (general game of 1BB game).

When 1BB is operating and RT is not inside, RBA (winning number "26") to RBP (winning number "41") are drawn by lottery as shown in FIG. 123 described above. Then, when any of RBA to RBP is won and the winning RBA to RBP does not win, the process shifts to 1BB operation and inside the RB. While 1BB is operating and inside the RB, it continues until the symbol combination of the RB carrying over the winning is stopped and displayed. Then, when the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to 1BB operation and RB operation (RB game).
When the RB is won while the RB is operating and the RB is not inside, and the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the game, the RB symbol combination is stopped and displayed during the 1BB operation and inside the RB without shifting to the 1BB operation and the RB operation. Transition.

As shown in FIG. 122, the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB game) ends with the acquisition of more than 170 medals. In addition, if the RB condition device is activated while the 1BB condition device is operating (shifting to the RB game), it will continue until 12 games or 8 prizes are won, provided that the number of medals won does not exceed 170. To do. When the RB condition device is activated, if 12 games or 8 wins are won, and if more than 170 medals have not been obtained by the operation of the 1BB condition device, the 1BB condition device is again used. It shifts when it is operating and when the RB condition device is not operating. In addition, when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is not activated, or when the 1BB condition device is activated and the RB condition device is activated, when more than 170 medals are obtained by operating the 1BB condition device, The operation of the 1BB condition device is terminated (even if the 12 games or 8 winnings have not been reached after the operation of the RB condition device) (the 1BB game is terminated).

After the operation of the 1BB condition device is completed, the process shifts to RT1. RT1 continues until 1400 games are exhausted, or until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. When shifting to RT1, each game and the number of games are counted and stored in the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) of the address "F00A (H)" described later. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in RT1, as described above, it shifts to 1BB operation and non-internal RB. On the other hand, when 1400 games are digested in RT1, the game shifts to non-RT. Once it shifts to non-RT, 1BB wins again, and when 1BB operation is completed, it shifts to RT1.
In the 23rd embodiment, the non-RT is set to be easier to win the AT than the RT1. Therefore, when the "1400" game is digested in RT1, the so-called ceiling is reached, and it becomes easy to win the AT in non-RT.

Further, the advantageous section may be terminated during RT1, but at the end of the advantageous section, the section type number, the advantageous section clear counter, the difference counter (MY counter), and the data related to AT are cleared. On the other hand, the number of games of RT1 (“_CT_RT_GAME” described above) is not cleared. For example, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the 1200th game of RT1, the next game is the 1201th game of RT1 and the non-advantageous section.
Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, even when the transition from RT1 to non-RT is performed based on the digestion of 1400 games, the main gaming state described later does not shift. For example, in the 1400th game of RT1, when staying in the main game state 1, the next game is in the non-RT and main game state 1.

However, when the condition for shifting the main gaming state is satisfied in the 1400th game of RT1, it goes without saying that the main gaming state shifts.
For example, first, in the main game state 1, when the number of RT games is 1400 and the number of RT games reaches 1500 games, the advantageous section ends in this game and the next game is started. , Non-RT and main game state 0.
Secondly, when the AT is won in the main game state 1 and the RT1 and the number of RT games is the 1400th game, the next game is the non-RT and the main game state 2 (AT precursor).

Here, the transition determination of the advantageous section of the 23rd embodiment is executed in the non-RT or the non-advantageous section of RT1. In particular, in the decision to shift to the advantageous section in the 23rd embodiment, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section. ing. Therefore, in the non-RT or RT1 non-advantageous section, most of the non-advantageous sections shift to the advantageous section if several games are digested. Once the advantageous section is won, the transition decision of the advantageous section is not made unless the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied and the transition to the non-advantageous section is made. The transition of the advantageous section may be determined by a lottery based on the winning number.

Further, the AT lottery of the 23rd embodiment is executed in a non-RT or RT1 advantageous section. Further, in the 23rd embodiment, it is a condition for executing the AT lottery that the winning of 1BB is carried over. In other words, the AT lottery is not executed when 1BB is not won and while 1BB is operating. The AT lottery is executed when the winning numbers "3" to "9" corresponding to the winning of Rare Replay are won.
In FIG. 127 (RT1), the winning probability of AT is, for example,
It is set as follows: when the replay F condition device is activated <when the replay C condition device is activated <when the replay E condition device is activated <when the replay D (D1 to D3) condition device is activated <when the replay G condition device is activated.

Specifically, for example, when the replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 10 to 30%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 15 to 30%
When the replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 20-35%
When the replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 30 to 50%
When the replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 40 to 50%
When the replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 35-80%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
It is set as. The reason why each winning probability has a range is that, for example, the winning probability is different depending on the production stage (low probability, normal probability, high probability, etc.) when the condition device is operated.

Further, when 1400 games are digested in non-AT and RT1, the so-called ceiling is reached, and the game shifts to non-RT, the AT is drawn with the following winning probability, for example.
When the replay F condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay C condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay E condition device is activated: AT winning probability 90%
When the replay D1 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 75%
When the replay D2 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 80%
When the replay D3 condition device is activated: AT winning probability 85%
When the replay G condition device is activated: AT winning probability 100%
Therefore, the non-RT is set to be easier to win the AT than the RT1.

When the AT is won in non-RT or RT1 and the AT start condition is satisfied (for example, after the AT standby counter becomes "0"), the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, and 1BB is in operation (for example). After shifting to the 1BB game), AT can be started. Then, the AT continues until the 1BB operation is completed.
In non-RT or RT1, even if the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed without having the right to execute AT (without winning AT) and the transition is made during 1BB operation, when the push order bell is won (winning number " The push order (push order for winning the 15-card combination) that is advantageous (when "10" to "21" is won) is not displayed (the instruction function does not operate).
On the other hand, in non-RT or RT1, when the player has the right to execute the AT (wins the AT), stops the 1BB symbol combination after satisfying the AT start condition, and shifts to the 1BB operation. , AT is executed, and when the winning number having the correct answer pressing order is won, the correct answer pressing order for winning the 15-card combination (higher bell) is displayed (the instruction function is activated).
Even if the user has the right to execute the AT, the AT start condition is not satisfied (for example, when the AT precursor counter is larger than "0" or the AT standby counter is larger than "0". ) Stops and displays the symbol combination of 1BB, and even if the transition is made while the 1BB is in operation, AT is not executed. That is, the advantageous push order is not displayed when the push order bell is won (the instruction function does not operate).

Here, when the AT is in progress and the RB is not inside while the 1BB is operating, the winning numbers "10" to "15" (small winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6) are displayed in the correct pressing order. (Activation of instruction function).
On the other hand, during AT, when 1BB is operating and inside the RB, even if the winning numbers "16" to "21" (small winning combination B1 to B6) are won, the instruction function does not operate. As described above, when 1BB is operating and RB is not inside, when the small combination B1 to B6 condition devices are operating, there is no correct pressing order, and no matter which pressing order the stop switch 42 is operated, one sheet This is because the role wins (the 15-card role does not win).
On the other hand, when AT is in progress and 1BB is in operation inside the RB, the winning numbers "10" to "15" (small winning combination A1 to small winning combination A6) are displayed in the correct pressing order. (The instruction function is activated).
Similarly, when AT is in progress and 1BB is in operation inside the RB, winning numbers "16" to "21" (small winning combination B1 to B6) are displayed in the correct pressing order (instruction). Function works).

Further, the winning probability number of RBs during 1BB operation is "28912" in total, and the winning probability is about 44%. Therefore, when 1BB is in operation, the RB is won at an early stage. However, during AT, it is a premise of the 23rd embodiment that the game is digested without winning the winning RB. When the inside of the RB is inside during the operation of 1BB, as shown in FIG. 129, the total number of winning numbers "1" and "10" to "21" is, for example, "50424" in setting 1. Therefore, there is a probability of non-winning with a probability of about 23%, and there is a possibility of winning an RB in the non-winning game. In the game that is not won and has the possibility of winning the RB, an effect suggesting to the player that the game has the possibility of winning the RB is output. When this effect is output, the player performs a stop operation of the stop switch 42 so that the RB does not win a prize. In addition, in the game having the possibility of winning the RB, the display on the main control board 50 side (for example, the acquired number display LED78) does not notify the push position or the like (the instruction function does not operate).
If the RB wins while the 1BB is operating, the game shifts to the RB game. As described above, the RB game has a lower ball output rate than the general game of the 1BB game. In the RB game, if the game ends with 12 games or 8 wins, and the end condition of the 1BB game (acquisition of more than 170 medals) is not satisfied at that time, the general game of the 1BB game is resumed. Return.

FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a transition of the main gaming state in the 23rd embodiment.
The main gaming state of the 23rd embodiment includes the main gaming state 0 to the main gaming state 5.
The main gaming state 0 is a non-advantageous section, and the main gaming states 1 to 5 are advantageous sections.
Further, the main gaming states 2 and 3 are AT-winning but non-AT gaming states. Further, the main game state 4 is a game state during AT. Furthermore, the main gaming states 0, 1 and 5 are non-AT gaming states that have not won the AT.

The main game state 0 is a non-advantageous section and a non-AT state. In the main game state 0, the advantageous section lottery and the AT lottery are executed. In the main game state 0, when the advantageous section is won and the AT is not won, the process shifts to the main game state 1. On the other hand, in the main game state 0, when the advantageous section is won and the AT is won, the process shifts to the main game state 2.

In the main game state 1, the advantageous section lottery is not executed, but the AT lottery is executed. Then, when the AT is won, the game shifts to the main game state 2. At the time of winning the AT, the number of AT sets is also drawn, and the number of AT sets determined by the lottery is stored in the AT set number counter. The "AT set number" is a counter that determines how many times the main game state 4 (AT and 1BB operation) is executed.
On the other hand, in the main game state 1, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied without winning the AT (for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 games, or when the fall lottery of the advantageous section is won. When), the game shifts to the main game state 0.

Even if the transition condition to the main game state 0 is satisfied in the main game state 1, RT does not shift. For example, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in RT1 and main game state 1, the next game will be RT1 and main game state 0 unless 1400 games are reached in RT1.
The main game state 2 is the game state of the AT precursor. When the AT is won, the number of AT precursor games is determined by, for example, a lottery, and is set in the AT precursor counter. Then, the main game state 2 is executed until the AT precursor counter becomes "0". When the AT precursor counter becomes "0", the process shifts to the main game state 3.

The main game state 3 is a game state in which AT is being prepared. The main game state 3 continues until the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 23rd embodiment, when the AT has a plurality of sets, when the main game state 4 (1BB operation and AT) described later is ended and the main game state 3 is returned, the symbol combination of 1BB is quickly performed. Instead of displaying a stop and shifting to the main game state 4, in order to prevent the ball output from increasing too much, to adjust (reduce) the ball output to some extent, and then shift to the main game state 4, A certain number of games is secured in the main game state 3. For example, when shifting from the main game state 4 to the main game state 3, one of "1" to "8" is set in the AT standby counter (determined by lottery), and the game that wins 1BB, or a small winning combination or Subtract "1" for games that have not won the replay. Then, when the AT standby counter becomes "0" and the inside of 1BB is inside, a notification for stopping and displaying the symbol combination of 1BB is performed.
The reason for adjusting (reducing) the ball output in the main game state 3 is that if a plurality of sets of ATs are continuously executed, nonconformity is likely to occur in the test firing test. In the test firing test, for example, the ball output rate needs to be less than "220"% during any "400" number of games. Therefore, when executing a plurality of sets of ATs, after one set of ATs is completed, after a game section in which ATs are not executed (a period during which ball ejection adjustment (reduction) is performed), the next set of ATs is executed. I'm trying to do it.

Further, in the main game state 3, the addition lottery of the AT set number counter is executed. For example, when a rare combination (winning numbers "2" to "9") is won in the main game state 3, an additional lottery for the number of AT sets is executed. Then, when the lottery for adding the number of AT sets is won, the number of winning AT sets is added to the AT set number counter.
When the AT standby counter becomes "0" in the main game state 3, the subsequent winning and replay conditions In the game where the device number is "0", aim for "blue BAR"! Image is displayed. In addition, "Aim for" Blue BAR "! The image is displayed on condition that the winning of 1BB has been carried over or the winning of 1BB has been won. As a result, the player is urged to stop and display the symbol combination of 1BB.

In addition, "Aim for" Blue BAR "! In the game in which "" is displayed as an image, if the player cannot stop and display the symbol combination of 1BB, then in the game in which the winning and replay condition device number is "0", aim for "blue BAR" again. !! Image is displayed. Also, first aim for "Blue BAR"! After displaying the image, the lottery for adding the number of AT sets may not be executed, but in the 23rd embodiment, first aim for "blue BAR"! Even after the image is displayed, the lottery for adding the number of AT sets is executed until the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. However, the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of AT sets is set so that the player does not have any merit even if the symbol combination of 1BB is intentionally extended (AT waits for the winning probability of the additional lottery for the number of AT sets). The counter is set lower than before it became "0").

When the AT standby counter becomes "0" in the main game state 3 and the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the main game state 4. The main game state 4 corresponds to 1BB operation (1BB game) and AT. Therefore, the main game state 4 is executed until the number of medals acquired exceeds 170 (see FIG. 122). When the number of medals acquired exceeds 170 in the main game state 4, it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 4 is satisfied, and the main game state is based on the values of the AT set number counter and the ending counter at that time. It shifts to any of 3 (AT preparation), main game state 5 (AT pullback), and main game state 0 (non-advantageous section).
The AT set number counter is decremented by "1" at each end of the main game state 4. Then, when the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that the user does not have the right to execute the AT, and when it is "1" or more, it is determined that the user has the right to execute the AT.

The ending counter is set based on the values of the difference counter (also referred to as “MY counter”) and the advantageous section clear counter described in other embodiments. The advantageous section needs to be terminated when the difference counter becomes "2400 (D)" or when the number of games in the advantageous section becomes "1500". Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" or the advantageous section clear counter value becomes less than "200 (D)", "2" is set in the ending counter. To do.
Then, at the end of the main game state 4, if the ending counter is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section (and AT) is satisfied, and the game shifts to the main game state 0. With this setting, the advantageous section can be terminated before the difference counter value reaches "2400 (D)" and before the advantageous section clear counter reaches "0".

On the other hand, unless the AT set number counter is "1" or more and the ending counter changes from "1" to "0" at the end of the main game state 4, the state shifts to the main game state 3. When the game shifts to the main game state 3, the AT standby counter value is determined by lottery from "0" to "8" and set.
If the AT set number counter is "0" at the end of the main game state 4, the state shifts to the main game state 5 (AT pullback). The main game state 5 is non-AT, but when the AT is won in the main game state 5, the data of the number of acquired sheets and the number of sets in the previous AT are inherited and the image is displayed on the image display device 23.

When the state shifts to the main game state 5, a predetermined value, for example, "50 (D)" is set in the AT pullback counter, and each game "1" is subtracted. The end condition of the main game state 5 is that the AT pullback counter becomes "0" or that the AT is won.
When the AT pullback counter becomes "0", the advantageous section clear counter value is determined, and when the advantageous section clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", the advantageous section ends and the main game state Move to 0. If the advantageous section clear counter value is less than "600 (D)", the AT may not be able to continue because the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small when the AT is subsequently transferred. , End the advantageous section. As described above, if the player shifts to the main game state 0, the player wins the advantageous section again if several games are exhausted, and at least shifts to the main game state 1.

On the other hand, when the AT pullback counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, and the advantageous section clear counter value is "600 (D)" or more, the main game is performed without ending the advantageous section. Transition to state 1. Then, the AT lottery is continued.
Further, if the AT is won before the AT pullback counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, the state shifts to the main game state 3. When the AT is won in the main game state 5, it may shift to the main game state 2 (AT precursor), but in the present embodiment, it shifts to the main game state 3 (AT preparation). When the state shifts to the main game state 3, the lottery of the AT standby counter value is executed in the same manner as described above, and the value determined by the lottery is stored in the AT standby counter.

It should be noted that, in the main game state 4 or 5, it is advantageous when shifting to the main game state 0 before the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0", and before the advantageous section clear counter becomes "0" in the main game state 1. When shifting to the main game state 0 based on winning the section fall lottery, the advantageous section clear counter is set to the advantageous section clear counter (regardless of the value up to that point) before the advantageous section clear counter management of FIG. 51 is executed. The process of storing "1" is executed (preparation for ending the advantageous section shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later). As a result, when the advantageous section clear counter management of FIG. 51 is subsequently executed, the advantageous section clear counter value is "1" before subtraction of "1" and "0" after subtraction of "1". Therefore, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process proceeds from step S424 to step S435, and the RWM clear process based on the end of the advantageous section is executed.

Even if the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in the main game state 0 or 1, the transition to the main game state 4 (AT) does not occur. Therefore, in this case, the main game state is 0 or 1, 1BB operation, and the non-AT is set.

FIGS. 133 to 138 are diagrams showing the main data related to the 23rd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 23rd embodiment. The data shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 are some data, and various data other than the illustrated data are stored in the RWM 53. Further, in the following description (particularly the RWM name), "#" refers to all of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31), and "1" to "3". It has a case of pointing to any one of.
The numerical value shown in parentheses in the "address" column indicates the number of bytes in the storage area.

In FIG. 133, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) of the address “F009 (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the current RT, and when it is non-RT, “0” is stored and is RT1. When, "1" is memorized. As shown in FIG. 131, in the 23rd embodiment, there is a case of transition from RT1 to non-RT, but "0" is stored as the RT state number at the end of, for example, the game that has reached "1400" in RT1. Will be done.
Further, when the end condition of the 1BB operation is satisfied and the transition to RT1 is performed, "1" is stored as the RT status number at the end of the game satisfying the end condition of the 1BB operation.

The number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) at the address "F00A (H)" is a storage area of a counter for counting the number of games of RT1. When the 1BB operation is completed and the game shifts to RT1, "1400 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted each time one game is digested. When the number of RT games becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for transition to non-RT is satisfied.
The accessory condition device number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address "F00D (H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of accessory that is currently operating. The value stored here corresponds to the accessory condition device number shown in FIG. 122. For example, "0" is stored when the accessory is not activated, "1" is stored when 1BB is activated, and "2" is stored when RBA is activated.

The number of sheets that can be acquired (_CT_BIG_PAT) at the time of 1BB operation of the address "F00E (H)" is a storage area that stores the remaining number of sheets that can be acquired at the time of 1BB operation (1BB game). When the 1BB operation is performed, "170 (D)" is stored in this storage area. Then, during 1BB operation (during 1BB game), the value of this storage area is subtracted each time a medal is paid out. When the value of this storage area becomes "0" during the 1BB operation, it is determined that the end condition of the 1BB operation is satisfied.

The number of games played (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) during RB operation at the address "F00F (H)" is a storage area for storing a counter that counts the number of games played during RB operation. When the RB is activated, "12 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted for each "1" game when the RB is activated. Then, when the number of games played during RB operation becomes "0", the end condition of RB operation is satisfied.
The number of winnings (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at the time of RB operation of the address "F010 (H)" is a storage area for storing a counter that counts the number of winnings of the winning combination at the time of RB operation. When the RB is activated, "8 (D)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted each time the winning combination at the time of the RB is activated. Then, when the number of winnings during the RB operation becomes "0", the end condition of the RB operation is satisfied.

The input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) of the address "F012 (H)" is a storage area for storing the on / off of the signals of the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. In the interrupt processing this time, the signals of the start switch 41 and the (left, middle, right) stop switch 42 are determined, and "1" is stored when it is on and "0" is stored when it is off. The input port level data A (previous) (_PT_IN_A_BK) of the address "F015 (H)" is a storage area for storing the value of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) in the previous interrupt processing.

The input port rising data A at the address “F017 (H)” is a storage area for storing the presence / absence of rising signals of the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. When the level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the level data at the time of the current interrupt processing is "1", "1" is stored as the rising data. On the other hand, when the level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is "1" and the level data at the time of the current interrupt processing is "1", the rising data is "0". Similarly, when the level data at the time of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the level data at the time of the current interrupt processing is "0", the rising data is "0". Further, when the level data of the previous interrupt processing is "1" and the level data of the current interrupt processing is "0", the rising data is "0" (in this case, the falling data is "0". 1 ”.)

In FIG. 134, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) at the address “F019 (H)” is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 related to the first reel is excited. In the first reel motor signal data, "1" corresponds to on (excitation is applied) and "0" corresponds to off (excitation is not applied). Based on the data stored in this storage area, the motor 32 is excited in the port output process (step S462 in FIG. 151 described later) at the time of interrupt processing.
In the present embodiment, the first reel corresponds to the left reel 31, the second reel corresponds to the middle reel 31, and the third reel corresponds to the right reel 31.

Further, in the first reel motor signal data, the D0 bit corresponds to φ1, the D1 bit corresponds to φ2, the D2 bit corresponds to φ3, and the D3 bit corresponds to φ4. One pulse data selected from the reel drive pulse table shown in FIG. 158, which will be described later, is stored in the first reel motor signal data. For example, as shown in FIG. 158, in the interrupt processing this time, when the excitation to turn on φ0 and φ3 is applied, the pulse data “000001001 (B)” of the address “1100 (H)” is changed to the address “F019 (. It is stored in "H)".

The second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2) of the address “F01A (H)” is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 related to the second reel (middle reel 31) is excited. The contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) of the address "F019 (H)".
Similarly, the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) at the address “F01B (H)” is a storage area for storing which phase of the motor 32 related to the third reel (right reel 31) is excited. The contents are the same as the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) of the address "F019 (H)".

The first reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TARPIC_WAIT) of the address "F039 (H)" is a timer value for measuring the waiting time for starting deceleration of the first reel 31 when executing the standby effect. Storage area. A predetermined value is stored in this storage area at the start of execution of the standby effect, and is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process. Then, on condition that the value of this storage area becomes "0", the stop of the first reel 31 is permitted. In other words, when the value of this storage area is not "0", the first reel 31 is maintained in rotation without being stopped.

Specifically, from the reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 145, which will be described later, the reel effect execution timer table corresponding to the stop symbol is selected. For example, in FIG. 144, which will be described later, when a stop symbol is determined in the "middle stage" black BAR "alignment" corresponding to the standby effect number 1 o'clock, FIG. 145 is used as a reel effect execution timer table corresponding to the standby effect number 1. Among them, the reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected. Then, in the reel effect execution timer table 1, the designated symbol position search standby time of the first (left) reel 31 is "14112 (D)", so this value is stored in the address "F039 (H)". ..
When a predetermined value is stored in the first reel designated symbol position search waiting time of the address "F039 (H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when the value becomes "0", the waiting time Is judged to have passed. It should be noted that the specification may be such that "1" is subtracted every plurality of interrupt processes instead of subtracting "1" for each interrupt process.

Here, in the 23rd embodiment, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 at a constant speed corresponds to the "336" step of the motor 32. Since the motor 32 is driven by one step every two interrupts, one rotation (360-degree rotation) of the reel 31 at a constant speed corresponds to a "672" interrupt.
Therefore, in FIG. 145, for example, when the reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) (standby effect 1) is selected, the left reel 31 is stopped first, and then the middle reel 31 makes approximately one rotation (““ Stops after 670 "interruption). Further, after the middle reel 31 is stopped, the right reel 31 is stopped after approximately two rotations (after the "1340" interrupt). Similarly, when another reel effect execution timer table is selected, after the first reel 31 is stopped, the second reel 31 is stopped after approximately one rotation or one or more rotations. Further, after the second reel 31 is stopped, the third reel 31 is stopped after approximately two rotations or two or more rotations.
Further, the time from the stop of the second reel 31 to the stop of the third reel 31 is longer than the time from the stop of the first reel 31 to the stop of the second reel 31. It has been set long. This gives the player a sense of expectation as to which symbol the third reel 31 will stop at, and gives the player time (a sense of accomplishment) to enjoy watching the symbols of the first and second stopped reels 31. Is possible.

The above address "F039 (H)" is a storage area for the first (left) reel designated symbol position search waiting time, but the second (middle) reel designated symbol position search waiting time and the third (right) reel. The address "F03B (H)" and the address "F03D (H)" are provided as storage areas for the designated symbol position search waiting time, respectively.
For example, when the reel effect execution timer table 1 (_TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is selected in FIG. 145 described above, the address “F03B (H)” is set to “14112 + 670” as the second (middle) reel designated symbol position search standby time. = 14782 (D) ”is stored. Similarly, at the address "F03D (H)", "14112 + 2010 = 16122 (D)" is stored as the third (right) reel designated symbol position search standby time.

The waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of the address "F041 (H)" carries over the winning information of 1BB, and if the 1BB symbol combination can be stopped and displayed at the second stop, in other words, the 1BB symbol combination is tempai. In the case of (when the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are stopped at the effective line at the time of the second stop and the third stop is not yet performed), in the storage area of the waiting time until the operation acceptance of the third stop is permitted. is there.
Here, "Tempai" is, for example, 1BB, when one reel 31 is rotating and the remaining two reels 31 are stopped, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of 1BB are (on the effective line). When the stop display is displayed and the symbols constituting the 1BB symbol combination are stopped and displayed when the one reel is stopped, the 1BB symbol combination is stopped and displayed (1BB has won a prize). For example, when the one reel 31 is the right reel 31, it corresponds to the case where "blue BAR (upper left stage)"-"blue BAR (middle middle stage)"-"rotating" is formed on the effective line.

This waiting time is not set when the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is permitted (when the main game state 3 and the AT standby counter is "0"), but in other cases, the 1BB symbol combination is not set. The waiting time is set at the timing when the tempai is tempted (at the time of the second stop). The initial value is "896 (D)". Then, the waiting time is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when it becomes "0", the third stop operation is accepted.
The interrupt cycle of the 23rd embodiment is "1.117" ms.
Further, in the 23rd embodiment, 1BB is set not to be tempted unless the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is a game in which stop display is possible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, 1BB may be tempted. For example, 1BB can be tenpai in the game when a small role is won. Then, in a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB cannot be stopped and displayed, it is possible not to set the waiting time even if 1BB is tempted.

Since "896 (D)" is set as the standby time and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt, the standby time is about 1 second (1.117 x 896 = about 1000 ms) from the timing when the 1BB symbol combination is tempered. A process (a process that does not stop the third reel 31 even if the third stop switch 42 is operated. In other words, a process that does not accept the stop operation of the third stop switch 42) is executed.
As described above, one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the reel 31 corresponds to the "336" step of the motor 32 in the 23rd embodiment. Further, in the 23rd embodiment, one step of the motor 32 corresponds to two interrupts (2.23 ms), and the time for the motor 32 to drive only the "336" step, in other words, the time for the reel 31 to rotate once. It is "2.234 x 336 = 750.624 ms".
Therefore, the waiting time from the timing when the symbol combination of 1BB is tempered (about 1000 ms)> the one rotation time of the reel 31 (about 751 ms).
It has become.
With such a setting, it is possible to prevent 1BB from winning a prize due to an unexpected stop operation of the player while minimizing the waiting time.

On the other hand, the standby time is preferably set to, for example, the time (about 3 seconds) for the reel 31 to rotate four times or less. For example, when the third reel 31 does not stop because the standby time has not elapsed when the third stop switch 42 is operated, the player pays attention again to stop the third stop switch 42. The operation is attempted, but it is desirable that the waiting time has elapsed at that time.

In FIGS. 135 to 137, FIG. 135 shows the data of the first reel 31, FIG. 136 shows the data of the second reel 31, and FIG. 137 shows the data of the third reel 31.
In FIG. 135, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at the address “F04D (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31. In the present embodiment, the excitation update timing is set to be reached once every two interrupt processes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the excitation may be updated for each interrupt process. When the excitation can be updated for each interrupt process, the interrupt process cycle may be set to every "2.235" ms. When the excitation is performed once by the interrupt processing a plurality of times as in the present embodiment, the D7 bit is assigned as a flag for determining whether or not it is the excitation update timing. In the present embodiment, when the D7 bit is "1", it indicates a non-excitation update timing, and when it is "0", it indicates an excitation update timing.
The D7 bit of this data is determined for each interrupt process, and when it is "0", it is updated to "1", and when it is "1", it is updated to "0".

Further, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 represent the reel drive state number. As shown in FIG. 135, "0" indicates a stop, "1" indicates a deceleration, "2" indicates an acceleration, "3" indicates an acceleration start, "4" indicates a deceleration start, and "5" indicates a constant speed. For example, when the interrupt process is the non-excitation update timing and the reel drive state is the constant speed (“5”), “1000101 (B)” is stored.

The first reel drive state of the above address "F04D (H)" is for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but stores data indicating the drive state for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31. As a storage area, a drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) of the second reel at the address “F058 (H)” (FIG. 136) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) of the third reel at the address “F063 (H)” (FIG. 137) is provided. ..

The first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) of the address "F04E (H)" is a storage area for storing the on / off of the motor index signal of the first reel 31, and the signal acquired in the previous interrupt processing is converted to D4 bit. It is stored, and the signal acquired in the interrupt processing this time is stored in the D0 bit.
Here, the motor index 1 signal is turned on when the index of the first reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33, and turned off when the index of the first reel 31 is not detected by the reel sensor 33. Is.
Therefore, for example, when the first reel motor index is "00000000000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal is off in both the previous interrupt processing and the current interrupt processing (the reel sensor 33 detects the index). Does not mean). When the first reel motor index is "00000001 (B)", the motor index 1 signal is off in the previous interrupt processing, and the motor index 1 signal is on in the current interrupt processing (reel sensor 33). Detected the index) (rise).

Furthermore, when the first reel motor index is "00010001 (B)", it means that the motor index 1 signal is on in both the previous interrupt processing and the current interrupt processing.
Further, when the first reel motor index is "00010000 (B)", the motor index 1 signal is on in the previous interrupt processing, and the motor index 1 signal is off in the current interrupt processing (falling down). Means.

The first reel motor index of the above address "F04E (H)" is a storage area for the left reel 31, but the address "F059 (H)" is used as a storage area for the reel motor index of the second reel 31 (FIG. The second reel motor index (_FL_RL2_MT_IDX) of 136) is provided.
Further, as a storage area indicating the reel motor index of the third reel 31, the third reel motor index (_FL_RL3_MT_IDX) of the address “F064 (H)” (FIG. 137) is provided.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at the address “F04F (H)” is a storage area that stores a value corresponding to the number of interrupts for switching the excitation of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31. Specifically, in the acceleration / deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) shown in FIG. 156, which will be described later, the value corresponding to the current step is stored in this storage area. For example, in the case of the first step at the time of acceleration, the value "25 (D)" corresponding to the address "1058 (H)" is stored in this storage area. Then, "1" is subtracted for each two interrupt processing, and when it becomes "0", the value "25 (D)" of the next second step is stored in this storage area, and "for every two interrupt processing". Subtract by 1 ". Furthermore, at the time of deceleration, the value "90 (D)" corresponding to the address "1050 (H)" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is subtracted every two interrupt processes. However, when the reel 31 is stopped, at a constant speed, or when deceleration starts, "1" is stored in this storage area, and "1" is not subtracted during interrupt processing.

The first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) at the above address "F04F (H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but the drive pulse for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31. A second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT) is provided at the address “F05A (H)” (FIG. 136) as a storage area of the output counter.
Further, a third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) is provided at the address “F065 (H)” (FIG. 137) as a storage area of the drive pulse output counter for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31.

The first reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the address “F050 (H)” is a storage area for storing the number of times the drive pulse is switched during acceleration of the motor 32 related to the first reel 31. As shown in FIG. 156 (acceleration / deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP)) described later, when accelerating the reel 31, the pulse is switched eight times from the first step to the eighth step. Therefore, the initial value of the number of times of switching the first reel drive pulse is set to "9", and when "1" is first subtracted to "8", the above-mentioned first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT) is displayed. The value "25 (D)" corresponding to the first step is stored. As described above, the first reel drive pulse output counter is decremented by "1" every two interrupt processes during acceleration or deceleration. Then, when the first reel drive pulse output counter becomes "0", "1" is subtracted from the number of times the first reel drive pulse is switched. In this way, until the number of times of switching the first reel drive pulse becomes "0", each time the first reel drive pulse output counter becomes "0", "1" is subtracted.

The first reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL1_PLSCHG) of the above address "F050 (H)" is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the first reel 31, but is a storage area for the motor 32 related to the second reel 31. The second reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL2_PLSCHG) is provided at the address “F05B (H)” (FIG. 136).
Further, as a storage area for the motor 32 related to the third reel 31, the third reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL3_PLSCHG) is provided at the address “F066 (H)” (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) at the address “F051 (H)” is a storage area of the counter for determining whether the rotation of the first reel 31 is normal or abnormal (step-out). The first reel rotation failure detection counter stores "0" as an initial value when the first reel 31 reaches a constant speed. Then, when the first reel 31 is in constant speed, "1" is added, and when the value after adding "1" becomes "0" (that is, the value before addition is "255 (D)"). Yes, as a result of adding "1", the digit is carried up and the zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the rotation of the first reel 31 is not normal.
When it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed after the first reel 31 has reached a constant speed, the first reel rotation failure detection counter is cleared.

The first reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL1_BAD) of the above address "F051 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but the address "F05C (H)" is a storage area for the second reel 31. (FIG. 136), a second reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL2_BAD) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL3_BAD) is provided at the address “F067 (H)” (FIG. 137).

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol of the first reel of the address “F052 (H)” is a storage area for storing the step number when the first reel drive state is the constant speed or the start of deceleration.
When the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX_) rises, "3" is stored as an initial value (design value).
Further, when the first reel drive state is constant speed or deceleration start, "1" is subtracted at the excitation update timing, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that one symbol has moved.
When it is determined that one symbol has been moved and the symbol numbers are "2", "7", "12", and "17", "16 (D)" is stored as the initial value, and other than that. When it is the symbol number of, "17 (D)" is stored as an initial value.
Since the number of steps in one rotation of the motor 32 of the 23rd embodiment is "336" and the number of symbols of the reel 31 is "20", the number of steps of one symbol is set to "16" for four symbols. For 16 symbols, the number of steps for one symbol is "17" (4 x 16 + 16 x 17 = 336). That is, since one symbol is assigned to have 16 steps at substantially equal intervals, it is configured to stop at the center of the symbol as much as possible when the reel 31 is stopped.

The step number (_NB_RL1_STEP) of one symbol of the first reel of the above address "F052 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F05D (" H) ”(FIG. 136) is provided with a step number (_NB_RL2_STEP) of one symbol of the second reel.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a step number (_NB_RL3_STEP) of one symbol of the third reel is provided at the address “F068 (H)” (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the address “F053 (H)” is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the first reel 31 currently passing. As an initial value, "255 (D) (FF (H))" is stored. Then, when it is determined that the first reel motor index (_FL_RL1_MT_IDX) has changed, "10 (D)" is stored when the rising edge (D0 bit is "1" and D4 bit is "0"). At the time of falling (D0 bit is "0", D4 bit is "1"), "0" is stored.

In this way, "255 (D)" is stored as an initial value until the value of the first reel motor index changes. Then, when it is determined that the value of the first reel motor index has changed, "10 (D)" is stored at the time of rising and "0" is stored at the time of falling.
Further, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) is added by "1" every time it is determined that one symbol has moved after "10 (D)" or "0" is stored. ..

The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the above address "F053 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but the address "F05E" is a storage area for the second reel 31. (H) ”(FIG. 136), a second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) is provided at the address “F069 (H)” (FIG. 137).

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the address "F054 (H)" is a storage area for storing the symbol number (for applying 4-phase excitation) at the stop position. As an initial value, "255 (D) (FF (H))" is stored. Then, when the first stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined, the determined symbol number is stored in this storage area.

The first reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_PL1_STPPIC) of the above address "F054 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but the address "F05F" is a storage area for the second reel 31. (H) ”(FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC).
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL3_STPPIC) is provided at the address “F06A (H)” (FIG. 137).

The first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) at the address “F055 (H)” is a storage area of the counter for determining the excitation phase of the first reel 31. The first reel drive pulse data search counter is incremented by "1" at each excitation update timing. Further, when the first reel 31 rotates in the forward direction, "0" is added, and when the first reel 31 rotates in the reverse direction, "254 (D) (FE (H))" is added. For example, when the counter value stored up to that point is "100 (D)", it becomes "101 (D)" by adding "1". Further, when the first reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, "254 (D)" is added to obtain "99 (D)". In other words, adding "254 (D)" is the same as subtracting "1". In this way, the first reel drive pulse data search counter takes a value in the range of "0" to "255 (D)".

Further, when the logical product (AND) of the counter value for searching the first reel drive pulse data and "00000011 (B)" is executed, the values of "0" to "255 (D)" are changed from "0" to "7". Is converted to the value of. Then, the drive pulse data corresponding to the values of "0" to "7" is set. For example, when the converted value is "7", the drive pulse stored in the address "1107 (H)" corresponding to the offset value "7" of the reel drive pulse data table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in FIG. 158. The data "00001000 (B)" is set and the excitation to turn on φ3 is executed.

The first reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL1_PLUS) of the above address "F055 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F060 (" H) ”(FIG. 136) is provided with a second reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL2_PLUS).
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL3_PLUS) is provided at the address “F06B (H)” (FIG. 137).

The first reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the address “F056 (H)” is a counter for random delay of the first reel 31 after the standby effect.
Here, "random delay" will be described.
When the standby effect is executed and the reels 31 are automatically stopped without the operation of the player's stop switch 42, after the reels 31 are automatically stopped, if all the reels 31 are rotated at the same time (simultaneously), the push assist May lead to. Therefore, when the reel 31 is automatically stopped by the standby effect and then the reel 31 is restarted, the delay time at the start of rotation is set for each reel 31, and the rotation start timing of each reel 31 is random (disjoint). Set to be. Such control is referred to as "random delay".

When the standby effect is not executed, "0" is stored in this storage area. When the standby effect is executed, the value is determined by lottery or the like from the values of "0" to "335 (D)", and the determined value is stored. Then, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when it becomes "0", the restart of the first reel 31 is permitted.

The first reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) of the above address "F056 (H)" is a storage area for the first reel 31, but as a storage area for the second reel 31, the address "F061 (H)) (FIG. 136), a second reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) is provided.
Further, as a storage area for the third reel 31, a third reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT) is provided at the address “F06C (H)” (FIG. 137).

In FIG. 138, the section type number (_NB_ADV_KND) of the address “F070 (H)” is a storage area for storing a number indicating whether or not it is an advantageous section. When it is an advantageous section, "1" is stored, and when it is a non-advantageous section, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section type flag of the address “F061 (H)” shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.
The AT flag (_FL_AT) of the address "F078 (H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the AT has been won. When the AT is won, "1" is stored, and when the AT is not won, "0" is stored. This storage area is the same storage area as the AT flag of the address “F067 (H)” shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) of the address “F07A (H)” is a storage area of a counter (decrement counter) for the number of games played in the advantageous section. When shifting to the advantageous section, the initial value "1500 (D)" is set, and "1" is subtracted for each game during the advantageous section. Then, when it becomes "0", the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. This storage area is the same storage area as the advantageous section clear counter at the address “F063 (H)” shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The difference counter (also referred to as “MY counter”) (_CT_MY) at the address “F07C (H)” is a counter (increment counter) that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number in the advantageous section.
The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number itself, but stores the "corresponding value" to the cumulative value of the difference number. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "cumulative value of difference number ≠ difference counter value". In other words, the difference counter stores a value in which the time point at which the cumulative value of the difference number is most reduced in the advantageous section is set to "0".

Further, when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the maximum value that the difference counter can take is "2399 (D)" in this game, and "2414 (D)" when 15 cards are paid out in the next game.
It should be noted that the difference counter only needs to count at least the cumulative value of the difference number in the advantageous section, and does not have to count in the non-advantageous section (normal section), but continues to count including the non-advantageous section. It may be a counter.
This storage area is the same storage area as the difference counter at the address “F065 (H)” shown in FIG. 35 in the eleventh embodiment.

The main game state number (_NB_GAM_STS) of the address "F07E (H)" is a storage area for storing the number of the main game state. As shown in FIG. 132, in the 23rd embodiment, the main game states 0 to 5 are provided, and the number of the main game state currently staying is stored in this storage area. When there is a transition of the main game state, the value of this storage area is updated.
The AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN) at the address “F080 (H)” is a storage area of the counter for the number of precursor games of AT. When the AT is won, the number of AT precursor games is determined from, for example, the range of "0" to "33", and the determined number of games is stored in this storage area. Then, in the AT precursor, that is, the main game state 2, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter for each game, and when it becomes "0", it is determined that the end condition of the AT precursor (main game state 2) is satisfied. To do.

The ending counter (_CT_ENDING) of the address "F097 (H)" is advantageous when the difference counter value exceeds "1951 (D)" when the AT set number counter value described later is "1" or more. This is the storage area of the counter that sets the initial value “2” when the interval clear counter value becomes less than “200 (D)”.
Then, at the end of the main game state 4, if the ending counter is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted. When the ending counter changes from "1" to "0", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section (and AT) is satisfied, and the game shifts to the main game state 0. Therefore, after "2" is set in the ending counter, AT can be executed up to two sets including the set AT in the ending counter.

The AT standby counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at the address “F098 (H)” is a storage area of the counter for managing AT activation. When the AT set number counter is "1" or more, after the end of the main game state 4 (AT), the process shifts to the main game state 3 (AT is being prepared). Then, in the main game state 3, the value that manages whether or not to allow the stop display of the symbol combination of 1BB becomes the AT standby counter value. In other words, it is a counter for cutting a certain number of balls in the main game state 3. The AT standby counter is determined and stored in the range of "0" to "8" when, for example, the transition from the main game state 4 to the main game state 3 is made.

In the main game state 3, the AT standby counter value is subtracted by "1" in the game in which 1BB is won, or in the game in which 1BB is not won in a small role or replay (a game in which 1BB can be won). .. Then, after the AT standby counter becomes "0", in a game in which the symbol combination of 1BB can be stopped and displayed (a game that has not won a small role or a replay), a production that encourages a prize of 1BB (for example, "Aim for" Blue BAR "!" Etc.) is output. When the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to the main game state 4.

If 1BB is won before the AT standby counter becomes "0" in the main game state 3, the main game state 3 remains and the game does not shift to the main game state 4 (AT). Therefore, 1BB is in operation and non-AT (AT is being prepared). In this case, the AT standby counter is reset after the 1BB operation is completed. The AT standby counter stored up to that point may be taken over without resetting. By doing so, even if the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is accidentally stopped and displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being further disadvantaged.

The AT set number counter (_CT_AT_SET) at the address “F09C (H)” is a storage area for storing the number of AT sets. At the time of winning the AT, the number of AT sets is determined by lottery, and the determined number of AT sets is stored in this storage area. Further, in the main game state 3 (AT is being prepared), an additional lottery for the number of AT sets is executed according to the winning combination, and when the additional lottery is won, the winning additional number is added to the AT set number counter.

Further, at the end of the main game state 4, it is determined whether or not the AT set number counter is "1" or more, and if the AT set number counter is "1" or more, it is determined that the AT continuation condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts to the main game state 3, and when the AT set number counter is "0", it is determined that the AT continuation condition is not satisfied, and the game shifts to the main game state 5. When shifting from the main game state 4 to the main game state 3, the AT set number counter is subtracted by "1".
Further, even if the number of AT sets is "1" or more, when the ending counter changes from "1" to "0" at the end of the main game state 4, the end condition of the advantageous section (AT) is satisfied. The determination is made, the game shifts to the main game state 0, and the AT set number counter is cleared. Here, as an example of the method of shifting to the main game state 0 and the method of clearing the AT set number counter, the RWM initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous section by the advantageous section clear counter management (step S435 in FIG. 51). Can be mentioned.

The AT pullback counter (_CT_AT_BACK) at the address "F09D (H)" is a storage area of the counter for the number of remaining games to be AT pullback. When shifting from the main game state 4 to the main game state 5, the initial value "50 (D)" is set, and in the main game state 5, each game, "1" is subtracted. Then, when the AT pullback counter becomes "0" without winning the AT, it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 5 is satisfied, and the game shifts to the main game state 0 or 1.
Further, when the AT is won in the main game state 5 and the state shifts to the main game state 3, the AT pullback counter is cleared.

The standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E (H)" is a storage area for storing the type of the standby effect number.
Here, the "standby effect" in the 23rd embodiment means that when the start switch 41 is operated, the reel 31 is rotated in the reverse direction, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "for example,"" It is a reel effect (also called a freeze effect) that stops and displays the black BAR "matching". As a standby effect, when the start switch 41 is operated, the reel 31 is rotated in the forward direction, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stopped and displayed without the player operating the stop switch 42. Things may be included. Alternatively, as a standby effect, the reel 31 is rotated forward when the start switch 41 is operated, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stopped and displayed without the player operating the stop switch 42. It may consist of only things.

The standby effect is when it is executed as an effect indicating that the AT winning is confirmed (for example, to stop and display the "black BAR" alignment or the "red 7" alignment), or when it is executed as an effect that arouses the AT winning expectation (for example). , "Stop displaying the" watermelon "match, etc.).
When it is decided to execute the standby effect, when any of the standby effect numbers "1" to "4" (address "F0A0 (H)" described later) is determined, "2" is stored. , "3" is stored when any of the three role numbers "5" to "8" (address "F0A1 (H)" described later) is determined. Further, at the start of the standby effect (M_TARPIC_EXE) of FIG. 143, which will be described later, the process is cleared in step S835.

The search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) of the address "F09F (H)" is a storage area for storing data that determines whether the rotation is forward rotation or reverse rotation in the standby effect. When the standby effect is forward rotation, "0" is stored, and when the standby effect is reverse rotation, "FE (H)" is stored.
When starting the standby effect, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the above-mentioned standby effect type (_WK_PRD) is "0", and when it is not "0", that is, the standby effect (in the 23rd embodiment, in the 23rd embodiment). When the reverse rotation) is executed, "FE (H)" is stored in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV).
Further, at the end of the standby effect, this storage area is cleared (“0” is stored).

The standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) of the address "F0A0 (H)" is a storage area of a number that manages the standby effect indicating that the AT has been won. As shown in FIG. 138, "1" to "4" are stored according to the stop symbol. The standby effect number "4" corresponds to a number for temporarily stopping and displaying the "red 7" alignment and then re-variating to stop and display the "black BAR" alignment. The number of winning AT sets and the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed by the standby effect are set to be related.

The three-role number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1 (H)" is a storage area of a number that manages a standby effect indicating an AT winning expectation degree. For example, when Rare Replay (winning numbers "3" to "9" in FIG. 126) is won in the main game state 1, the three role numbers are determined by lottery and set at the end of the game. For example, when the three-role number "5" is determined, the middle-stage "watermelon" lineup is stopped and displayed by the standby effect, triggered by the operation of the start switch 41 for starting the next game. The AT winning expectation is set so as to be related to the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed by the standby effect.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of the address "F0A9 (H)" is a memory that stores the winning number when the winning number is determined in this game and the replay and winning condition device that operates in this game is determined. The area. As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning numbers "1" to "24" are won, "1" to "24" are stored as the winning and replay condition device numbers of the game, respectively.
The accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) of the address "F0AA (H)" is a storage area for storing the accessory condition device number when the accessory is won. As shown in FIG. 126, when the winning numbers "25" to "41" are won, "1" to "17" are stored as the character condition device numbers of the game, respectively.

The minimum game time (_TM2_GAME) of the address "F0AB (H)" is a timer that monitors one minimum game time, and when it is determined that the minimum game time has passed, the number of interrupts "3762 (D)" is set. An initial value is set in order to count (step S767 in FIG. 140 described later). The minimum game time of this embodiment is set to about "4.1" seconds (1.117 ms x 3672 ≈ 4100 ms).
When the minimum game time is set in this game, the rotation of the reel 31 starts in the next game on the condition that the minimum game time is "0".

Of the above RWM53 data, when the advantageous section ends, the data related to the advantageous section and AT are cleared.
In the 23rd embodiment as well, similarly to the 11th embodiment, the game end check process (FIG. 148) is executed at the end of the game, and the advantageous section clear counter management in step S945 is executed. The advantageous section clear counter management is the same as the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG.

Therefore, when the advantageous section clear counter (“_CT_ADV_CLR” of the address “F07A (H)”) becomes “0” (in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52, when “Yes” in step S424), the process proceeds to step S435. Then, the data of RWM53 regarding the advantageous section and AT is cleared.
In the 23rd embodiment, the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section includes a section type number (_NB_ADV_KND), an AT flag (_FL_AT), a difference counter (MY counter) (_CT_MY), an AT precursor counter (_CT_AT_ZN), and an ending counter. (_CT_ENDING), AT standby counter (__CT_AT_WAIT), AT set number counter (__CT_AT_SET), AT pullback counter (_CT_AT_BACK), standby effect type (_WK_PRD), standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO), and three-role number (_NB_TRIO).
On the other hand, examples of data that are not cleared at the end of the advantageous section include the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS), the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME), and the main game status number (_NB_GAM_STS).
Therefore, as described above, this game is the 1000th game of RT1, and when the advantageous section is completed in this game, the next game is the non-advantageous section and the 1001th game of RT1.

In addition, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized even by turning the power on / off or changing the setting.
Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off in the 1000th game of RT1 and the setting change process is executed and then returned, the first game after the return is started from the 1001th game of RT1. However, not limited to this, when the setting change process is executed, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) may not be initialized, but the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized. Alternatively, when the setting change process is executed, both the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) may be initialized.

Furthermore, the RT status number (_NB_RT_STS) and the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) are not initialized just by turning the power on / off, but when the setting change process is executed, at least the number of RT games (_CT_RT_GAME) is initialized. May be good.
When the power is turned on / off, the number of (non-AT) games displayed on the image display device 23 is set to "0". This point will be described later.

Subsequently, in the 23rd embodiment, each process during the game will be described using a flowchart.
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50. This flowchart corresponds to FIG. 41 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 139, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 41. Further, in FIG. 139, the step numbers different from those in FIG. 41 are underlined.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 41 will be mainly described.
In FIG. 139, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated in step S278, the process proceeds to step S751 and the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) is executed. It is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated when the D6 bit of the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)" becomes "1" in FIG. 133.

Then, when the process proceeds to the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 140, which will be described later.
Next, the process proceeds to step S752, and the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 146, which will be described later. Then, the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) is executed for each reel 31 until it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped in the next step S289.
Further, in FIG. 139, the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (step S753) in the 23rd embodiment executes the process shown in FIG. 148, which will be described later.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the start switch reception process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 of FIG. 139.
In step S761, the winning combination lottery process is executed. This process is a process of drawing a winning number by the winning combination lottery means 61. For example, when the game is non-RT this time, the winning number is determined according to the table of numbers shown in FIG. 126. When the winning number is determined, the winning and replay condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored in the storage area of the address "F0A9 (H)", and the accessory condition device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored. , Stored in the storage area of the address "F0AA (H)".

In the next step S762, the main control board 50 determines the transition of the advantageous section. As described above, when the winning numbers "1" to "4" and "6" to "21" are won, it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section.
Here, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, "1" is set in the section type number (address "F070 (H)").

In the next step S763, the game start processing in the main game state is executed. In this process, a lottery, a counter update, and the like are executed according to the main game state of the game this time.
For example, when the main game state is 0, 1, or 5, the AT lottery is executed. As described above, when a rare replay (any of the winning numbers "3" to "9") is reached, an AT lottery having a number of "1" or more can be executed. Then, when the AT is won, the AT flag (address "F078 (H)") is set to "1", and the number of AT sets determined by the lottery is stored in the address "F09C (H)".

Further, when the main game state is 2, "1" is subtracted from the AT precursor counter (address "F080 (H)").
Furthermore, when the main game state is 3, "1" is subtracted from the AT standby counter (address "F098 (H)").
Further, when the main game state is 5, "1" is subtracted from the AT pullback counter (address "F09D (H)").

In the next step S764, the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 141, which will be described later, and is a process for outputting a test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of the stop switch 42 to the testing machine side. When the game machine is actually installed in the hall (store), the test signal is not actually received by the test machine because the game machine is not connected to the test machine. However, since the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) exists in the main processing program, even after the game machine is installed in the hall, the test signal regarding the operation timing and pressing order of each game and the stop switch 42 is displayed. The process itself for output is executed.
In the next step S765, the standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 143, which will be described later, and corresponds to the process of executing the standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated.

In the next step S766, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the address "F0AB (H)" is "0". When it is determined that the minimum game time has reached "0", the process proceeds to step S767. In step S767, the initial value “3672 (D)” of the minimum game time is stored in the address “F0AB (H)”. From this point, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and it is determined in step S766 of the next game whether or not the minimum game time has reached "0". In the next step S768, the main control board 50 sets the acceleration start state. In this process, "3" (00000011 (B)) indicating the start of acceleration is stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS). Is. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) in step S764 in FIG. 140.
Here, prior to the explanation of FIG. 141, the stop reception designation tables 1 and 2 will be described.
FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a symbol stop signal table, (A) shows a symbol stop signal table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1), and (B) shows a symbol stop signal table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2).

As shown in FIG. 141 (A), two types of symbol stop signal data are stored in the stop reception designation table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1). Further, each symbol stop signal data is composed of four data.
First, the symbol stop signal data at the time of (1) "Character condition device number = 1, main game state number 3 and AT standby counter = 0" is data of "0,16,7,2". .. Here, "the accessory condition device number = 1, the main game state number 3 and the AT standby counter = 0" are inside 1BB, the main game state 3 (AT is being prepared), and the AT standby counter. Is "0", that is, when 1BB can be won.
This data is for aiming at the "blue BAR" alignment as an effective line.
The four data of the symbol stop signal data are data of "pushing order, stop operation position of the left reel 31, stop operation position of the middle reel 31, and stop operation position of the right reel 31".

First, the push order data has "0" to "5". "0" indicates the push order 123, "1" indicates the push order 132, ..., And "5" indicates the push order 321. Here, each symbol stop signal data in the stop reception designation table 1 (TBL_ORD_INF1) of (A) is symbol stop signal data at the time of a game in which the instruction function is not actually activated, but the push order is the push order. It is set to 123. In addition, instead of the push order 123, the push order data indicating another push order may be used.
Further, the stop operation position of the left reel 31, the stop operation position of the middle reel 31, and the stop operation position of the right reel 31 all indicate the symbol numbers aimed at in the lower row.
For example, among the symbol stop signal data in (1) of the stop reception designation table 1, the data indicating the stop operation position of the left reel 31 is “16”. Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if the 16th "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower left stage, the 18th "blue BAR" can be stopped at the effective line (upper left stage). Become.
In the above example, the data indicating the stop operation position centered on the lower stage is stored, but the data indicating the stop operation position centered on the middle stage or the upper stage may be stored. In any case, the effective line of the present embodiment is an irregular line that descends to the right, whereas the data indicating the stop operation position is set in a horizontal straight line (set along the effective line). However, when the testing machine performs the test according to the test signal, the stop operation can be performed at a predetermined timing regardless of the effective line. As a result, the processing load on the testing machine side and the processing load on the game machine side can be reduced.

Further, among the symbol stop signal data, the data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 is “7”. If the 7th "watermelon" of the middle reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower middle stage, the 8th "blue BAR" can be stopped at the effective line (middle middle stage).
Furthermore, among the symbol stop signal data, the data indicating the stop operation position of the right reel 31 is “2”. If the second "blue BAR" of the right reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower right stage, this "blue BAR" can be stopped at the effective line (lower right stage).
Therefore, the above-mentioned symbol stop signal data is data for aiming at "blue BAR" alignment in the push order 123.

If the game is inside 1BB and the small winning combination and replay have not been won in this game, if each reel 31 is stopped based on the above symbol stop signal data, the "blue BAR" will be aligned. Stop display. On the other hand, even if it is inside 1BB, in the game in which either the small role or the replay is won in this game, even if each reel 31 is stopped based on the above symbol stop signal data, "blue BAR" is displayed. The alignment is not displayed as stopped.

Further, the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127" in (2) is symbol stop signal data under conditions other than the above (1). This symbol stop signal data is symbol stop signal data in which "blue BAR" is not aligned.
In the symbol stop signal data "0, 6, 127, 127", "0" is data indicating the push order 123 as described above. The data indicating the stop position of the left reel 31 is "6". Here, as shown in FIG. 114, if the 6th "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is aimed to stop at the lower left stage, the 18th "blue BAR" does not stop at the effective line.
Furthermore, the data "127" indicating the stop operation position of the middle and right reels 31 means that the operation timing does not matter (arbitrary operation position). Therefore, since the "blue BAR" is set so as not to stop at the effective line for the left reel 31, it means that the operation timing of the stop switch 42 of the middle and right reels 31 is arbitrary. Although the data indicating the stop operation position of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is set to "127", it is also possible to store data indicating a predetermined stop operation position instead of an arbitrary operation position. Is.

As described above, the symbol stop signal is a signal including the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the stop operation position of each reel 31, and is a test signal transmitted to the testing machine. When the tester receives the symbol stop signal (test signal), it executes a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 according to the symbol stop signal. Then, when a simulation of operating the stop switch 42 is executed according to the symbol stop signal, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the reel 31 stops at the correct position, and whether or not the ball ejection rate is within an appropriate range. Judgment (confirmation). Further, by outputting the symbol stop signal before determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, the testing machine side can perform the stop operation immediately after the minimum game time has elapsed.

Further, in the stop reception designation table 2 (TBL_ORD_INF2) of FIG. 142 (B), six types of symbol stop signal data are stored, and the push order 123, the push order 132, ..., The push order 321 are stored, respectively. It corresponds.
When the winning number "10" is won during AT, or when the winning number "16" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "0,127,127,127 corresponding to the push order 123" Is selected.
Further, when the winning number "11" is won during AT, or when the winning number "17" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "1,127,127" corresponding to the push order 132 is obtained. , 127 ”is selected.
Furthermore, when the winning number "12" is won during AT, or when the winning number "18" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "2,127," corresponding to the push order 213 is obtained. 127,127 ”is selected.

Furthermore, when the winning number "13" is won during AT, or when the winning number "19" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "3,127,127" corresponding to the push order 231 is obtained. , 127 ”is selected.
Similarly, when the winning number "14" is won during AT, or when the winning number "20" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "4,127," corresponding to the push order 312, 127,127 ”is selected.
Similarly, when the winning number "15" is won during AT, or when the winning number "21" is won during AT and inside the SRB, the symbol stop signal data "5,127" corresponding to the push order 312 is obtained. , 127, 127 ”is selected.

In this way, in the game when the push order is notified during AT, the process for outputting the push order data corresponding to the push order and the stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary is performed. Will be executed. Then, by outputting the stop operation position data indicating that the stop operation position is arbitrary, the discrepancy between the test on the testing machine side and the game method performed by the player after the game machine is actually installed in the hall can be determined. It is possible to reduce it.

The explanation is returned to FIG. 141, and the symbol stop signal set (S_IF_SET) will be described.
First, in step S771, the stop reception designation table 2 shown in FIG. 141 (B) is set.
In the next step S772, it is determined whether or not the push order instruction is given. Here, when the small winning combination A group is won during AT, or when the small winning combination B group is won during AT and inside the SRB, the push order instruction number (in FIGS. 133 to 138) is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. (Not shown) is stored, so this push order instruction number is stored in the A register. Then, when the A register value is not "0", it is determined as "Yes" (with push order instruction), and when it is "0", it is determined as "No" (without push order instruction).
If it is determined that there is a push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S773, and if it is determined that there is no push order instruction, the process proceeds to step S775.

In step S773, the offset value is set. Here, it is assumed that the push order instruction numbers are defined as "1", "2", ..., "6" for each of the six push orders 123, 132, ..., 321. .. In this case, the offset values are "0", "1", ..., "5". Therefore, "1" is subtracted from the A register to set the offset value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S774, and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value is acquired. For example, the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value “0” is “0,127,127,127” in FIG. 142 (B), and the symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value “1” is “1”. , 127,127,127 ”, and ..., The symbol stop signal data corresponding to the offset value“ 5 ”is“ 5,127,127,127 ”. Then, the process proceeds to step S781.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S772 to step S775, the stop reception designation table 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the stop reception designation table 1 in place of the stop reception designation table 2 set in step S771 first.
Next, the process proceeds to step S776, and it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number is “0”. This process determines whether or not the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) stored in the address "F0A9 (H)" is "0". When it is determined that there is "0" (that is, when the small role or replay is not won in the game this time), the process proceeds to step S7777, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S780.

In step S777, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" (whether or not 1BB has been won). This process determines whether or not the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) stored in the address "F0AA (H)" is "1". If it is determined to be "1", the process proceeds to step S778, and if it is determined that the value is not "1", the process proceeds to step S780.

In step S778, it is determined whether or not 1BB winning is permitted in this game. Here, "1BB winning is permitted" corresponds to the main game state 3 (AT is being prepared) and the AT standby counter is "0". Therefore, whether or not the value of the address "F07E (H)" (main game state number) is "3" and whether or not the value of the address "F098 (H)" (AT standby counter) is "0". To judge. When it is determined that the main game state number 3 and the AT standby counter is "0", the process proceeds to step S779, and when it is determined that the main game state number 3 and the AT standby counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S780.
In step S779, the symbol stop signal data “0,16,7,2” is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S781. On the other hand, in step S780, the symbol stop signal data “0,6,127,127” is acquired. Then, the process proceeds to step S781.

In the next step S781, the serial communication circuit data register is set. Here, the process of storing the address of the transmission register in the serial communication circuit of the chip built in the main CPU 55 in a predetermined register is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S782 to execute a process for outputting the push order among the test signals. The process here is, for example, a process of writing the push order data "0" to the address of the transmission register when the symbol stop signal data is "0,16,7,2".
Next, the process proceeds to step S783, and a process for outputting the stop operation position of the first reel 31 (left reel 31 in this embodiment) among the test signals is executed. The process here is, for example, a process of writing the stop operation position "16 (D)" of the left reel 31 to the address of the transmission register when the symbol stop signal data is "0,16,7,2". is there.

Next, the process proceeds to step S784 to execute a process for outputting the stop operation position of the second reel 31 (middle reel 31 in this embodiment). The process here is, for example, a process of writing the stop operation position "7" of the middle reel 31 to the address of the transmission register when the symbol stop signal data is "0,16,7,2".
Next, the process proceeds to step S785 to execute a process for outputting the stop operation position of the third reel 31 (right reel 31 in this embodiment). The process here is, for example, a process of writing the stop operation position "2" of the right reel 31 to the address of the transmission register when the symbol stop signal data is "0,16,7,2".
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
In steps S782 to S785, the push order and the stop operation position of the reel 31 are written to the transmission register, so that the process for transmitting these data to the testing machine is executed. In the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 151, which will be described later, the test signal output in step S842 may execute a process for transmitting these data to the tester.

As described above, in the situation where the winning of 1BB is permitted, the symbol stop signal data for winning the 1BB is transmitted, and in the situation where the winning of 1BB is not permitted, the 1BB is not allowed to win. The symbol stop signal data is transmitted. As a result, it is possible to transmit a test signal according to the player's striking method in the market. Therefore, it is possible to bring the ball output from the testing machine closer to the ball output from the market.

Since the process of FIG. 141 is one process during the main process, it is performed every game. Then, when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are electrically connected, the processing of FIG. 141 outputs each game and symbol stop signal (test signal) to the testing machine.
On the other hand, even when the slot machine 10 and the testing machine are not connected, for example, even when the slot machine 10 is installed in the hall, the process of each game, FIG. 141, is executed. However, since the slot machine 10 and the test machine are not connected, the symbol stop signal (test signal) is not output to the outside.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE) in step S765 in FIG. 140.
First, in step S821, the standby effect type is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data of the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E (H)" in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S822, and it is determined whether or not the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0". Then, when it is determined that the A register value is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S823. When the standby effect type is "0", it means that there is no standby effect when the start switch 41 is operated, and when it is not "0", it means that there is a standby effect.

In step S823, "-2" is saved in the search counter update correction data. This process is a process of storing "FE (H)" in the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) of the address "F09F (H)". "FE (H)" is data for reverse rotation.
The “control command set 1” of the next step S824 is a process for transmitting a command to the sub-control board 80, as in step S303 of FIG. 41 (11th embodiment), for example. Here, the information of the standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) of the address "F0A0 (H)" or the three-role number (_NB_TRIO) of the address "F0A1 (H)" is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In the next step S825, "0" is stored in the three-role number (_NB_TRIO) of "F0A1 (H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S826, and based on the reel production data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT), the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) of the addresses "F054 (H)", "F05F (H)" and "F06A (H)". Save the specified position (reel 31 stop position) in (_NB_RL # _STPPIC).
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT) stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. 144, a designated position (stop position) corresponding to the standby effect number is stored in the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT). And this "designated position (stop position)" corresponds to the symbol number.
For example, in the figure, the addresses "1000 (H)" to "1002 (H)" are the stop symbol designated positions of each reel 31 when the standby effect number (_NB_PRD_NO) is "1"("blackBAR" is aligned). Is shown. The value "8 (H)" stored in the address "1000 (H)" indicates the stop symbol designated position of the left reel 31, and the value "8 (H)" of the address "1001 (H)" is the middle reel 31. Indicates the stop symbol designated position of, and "3 (H)" of the address "1002 (H)" indicates the stop symbol designated position of the right reel 31.

Further, the symbol number at the time of forward rotation and the symbol number at the time of reverse rotation are different. In the 23rd embodiment, the index (also referred to as “initial” or “detection piece”) provided on each reel 31 is in the range of about half of the entire circumference (360 degrees) of the reel 31 (about 180 degrees). Is formed in. Then, by detecting / not detecting the index, if the reel 31 rotates about half a turn, the current position of the reel 31 can be grasped.
Although the details will be described later, in steps S897 and S899 of FIG. 155 (reel drive control), the reference symbol number when the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected (when the index is detected) is set to "10". ing. Similarly, the reference symbol number when the falling edge of the #th reel motor index is detected is set to "0".

Therefore, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, at the moment when the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected, the symbol with the symbol number "10" (for example, "replay" on the left reel 31 in FIG. 114) is displayed. Judge that it has passed the middle stage.
Similarly, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, at the moment when the falling edge of the #th reel motor index is detected, the symbol with the symbol number "0" (for example, "replay" on the left reel 31 in FIG. 114). ) Is judged to have passed the middle stage.

On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction and it is determined that the symbol of the symbol number "10" has passed at the moment when the rise of the #th reel motor index is detected, the actual situation is as follows. As shown in FIG. 114, the symbol of symbol number "1" at the time of forward rotation has passed. Similarly, when it is determined that the symbol with symbol number "0" has passed at the moment when the falling of the #th reel motor index is detected, the symbol number "11" at the time of forward rotation is actually set. It will pass through the middle stage.
As described above, as shown in FIG. 114, the symbol numbers passing through the middle stage are different between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the reel 31 when the # reel motor index rises and falls (9 symbols). There is a gap). Therefore, in the reel effect data table of FIG. 144, the stop position is stored in consideration of the deviation. For example, if it is determined to stop at the symbol number "8" when the reel 31 rotates in the reverse direction, it can actually be stopped at the symbol number "3" as shown in FIG. 114.

The reel effect data table of FIG. 144 determines the stop symbol position during the standby effect, that is, during the reverse rotation of the reel 31. For example, in FIG. 144, if the stop symbol position at the standby effect number "1" is set to "8,8,3", the actual "black BAR (" 3 "number at the time of forward rotation)"-"black" BAR ("3" number during normal rotation) "-" Black BAR ("8" number during forward rotation) "stops.
The same applies to "2" to "8" other than the standby effect number "1".
For example, when the standby effect number is "2", the stop symbol position is "18, 18, 8", but the symbol number "18" at the time of reverse rotation is the symbol number "13" (red 7) at the time of forward rotation. The symbol number "8" at the time of reverse rotation corresponds to the symbol number "3" (red 7) at the time of forward rotation.
As described above, in step S826 in FIG. 143, the reel symbol number (for the stop position) is stored based on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT).

The description returns to FIG. 143.
After step S826, the process proceeds to step S827 to save the designated symbol position search waiting time. As described above, the "designated symbol position search standby time" is the waiting time (waiting time) from when the standby effect is started (the reel 31 is rotated) to when the designated symbol position (stop position) of the reel 31 is searched. In other words, it is approximately the rotation time of the reel 31).
FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to the reel effect execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) stored in the ROM 54. The data values shown in FIG. 145 are decimal numbers. The reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) to the reel effect execution timer table 8 (TBL_TARPIC_TM8) correspond to the standby effect numbers "1" to "8", respectively. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", the reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) is used.
Further, in FIG. 145, for example, the addresses "1018 (H)" and "1019 (H)", "101A (H)" and "101B (H)", and "101C (H)" and "101D (H)". Indicates the timer values of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, respectively. Note that FIG. 145 shows how large the timer value is with respect to the timer value of the left reel 31 with reference to the timer value of the left reel 31, but in reality, the address is "1018 (H)". The timer values of "1019 (H)", "101A (H)" and "101B (H)", "101C (H)" and "101D (H)" are "14112 (D), 14782 (D)". , 16122 (D) ”.

This timer value specifies the waiting time until the deceleration of the reel 31 is started. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", the left reel 31 indicates that deceleration can be started after "14112 (D)" has elapsed from the start of the standby effect, that is, after "1.117 × 14112 = about 15763 ms" has elapsed. ing.
The timer value is also subtracted during the acceleration of the reel 31 in the standby effect. As shown in FIG. 156, which will be described later, the acceleration process of the reel 31 requires a total of "62 times x 2 interrupts = about 139 ms" in the first to eighth steps. The timer value of each reel 31 is set to at least a time longer than the time required for this acceleration process.
Further, in the reel effect execution timer tables 1 to 4, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the left reel 31. Further, the standby time of the right reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31. As a result, when the reel 31 is stopped, it is stopped in the order of "left->middle->right". Further, in the reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 8, the standby time of the middle reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the right reel 31. Further, the standby time of the left reel 31 is set longer than the standby time of the middle reel 31. As a result, when the reel 31 is stopped, it is stopped in the order of "right->middle->left".
In this way, by setting the standby time of each reel 31 in the reel effect execution timer table, the stop order of the reels 31 can be determined, and the stop order and stop timing of the reels 31 can be given regularity. ..
On the other hand, if the standby time of each reel 31 is not set, it is not possible to secure a sufficient constant speed time after starting the reel 31, and it is not possible to output the required effect during the rotation of the reel 31. .. Further, if the reels 31 are stopped in the order in which the designated symbol positions come to the stop positions, the reels 31 may be stopped in pieces, for example, "right->left->middle".

Further, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops first and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second is "670" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 1 and "670" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer tables 2 to 4. The "1008" interrupt is set to the "1176" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 8. The number of interrupts per rotation of the reel 31 is "672" as described above. Therefore, after the first reel 31 has stopped, the second reel 31 is set to stop after approximately one or more rotations.
Further, the difference between the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops second and the waiting time of the reel 31 that stops third is "1340" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 1 and "1340" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer tables 2-4. It is set to "1008" interrupt, "1176" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer tables 5 to 7, and "1848" interrupt in the reel effect execution timer table 8. Therefore, after the second reel 31 has stopped, the third reel 31 is set to stop after approximately two or more rotations.

Even if, for example, the middle reel 31 is stepped out after the left reel 31 is stopped (it is determined by the second reel rotation failure detection counter that an abnormality has occurred), the set timer value remains unchanged during this period. It will be subtracted. Then, after step-out, when the constant speed cannot be easily reached and the middle reel 31 cannot be stopped even if the timer value becomes "0", the timer value of the right reel 31 becomes "0". When it becomes, the right reel 31 is stopped before the middle reel 31 as an irregular condition. Therefore, the stop order of the reels 31 in this case is “left → right → middle”. By dealing with irregularities such as step-out in this way, it is possible to prevent the time required for the standby effect from being inadvertently extended due to step-out. As a result, the time until the game can be started can be shortened.

Furthermore, in the fourth timer value of each reel effect execution timer table, for example, in the reel effect execution timer table 1, the values stored by the addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" are after all stops. Indicates the waiting time of. For example, when the standby effect number is "1", the system can be restarted after "1.117 x 5371 = about 5999 ms" has elapsed after all stops.
Then, in step S827 of FIG. 143, for example, when the standby effect number is "1", the first reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR1_WAIT) of the addresses "F039 (H)" and "F03A (H)" is set to ". "14112 (D)" is stored, "14782 (D)" is stored in the second reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR2_WAIT) of the addresses "F03B (H)" and "F03C (H)", and the address "F03D" is stored. "16122 (D)" is stored in the third reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR3_WAIT) of "(H)" and "F03E (H)".

In the next step S828, the acceleration start is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Disable interrupts.
(2) “10000011 (B)” is stored in the A register.
(3) The A register value is stored in the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) of the address "F04D (H)".
(4) The A register value is stored in the second reel drive number (_WK_RL2_STS) of the address "F058 (H)".
(5) The A register value is stored in the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) of the address "F063 (H)".
(6) Allow interrupts.
Here, if interrupt processing is inserted between the above (3) to (5), the reels 31 do not start rotating all at once. Therefore, interrupt processing is not performed during the update of the reel drive number.
By the above processing, the first reel drive number (_WK_RL1_STS) to the third reel drive number (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "10000011 (B)", and when it becomes "00000011 (B)" in the next interrupt processing, Acceleration of each reel 31 is actually executed.

At the start of acceleration, the lower four digits of the reel drive number are "0011 (B)", but the next acceleration is "0010 (B)" and the constant speed is "0101 (B)".
After the reel 31 reaches a constant speed, the constant speed state is maintained until the reel designated symbol position search standby time set in step S827 is reached, and when the reel designated symbol position search standby time becomes "0", Start decelerating the reel. At the start of deceleration of the reel 31, the reel drive number becomes "0100 (B)", and when the deceleration state shifts, it becomes "0001 (B)". Then, when the reel 31 is stopped, the reel drive number becomes "0000 (B)".

In the next step S829, the end check of all reels 31 is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "0" in the A register.
(2) Perform a logical sum (OR) operation between the A register value and the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS). Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(3) OR the A register value and the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) are performed. Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(4) The A register value and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are ORed. Then, the result of the logical sum is stored in the A register.
(5) The logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "01111111 (B)" is performed.

Here, when all reels 31 are stopped, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "10000000 (B)" or "10000000 (B)" or " It becomes "0000000 (B)". Therefore, in the calculation of (5) above, the calculation result becomes "0" only when all the reels 31 are stopped.
In the calculation of (5) above, the number of units for calculating the logical product for determining whether or not all reels 31 have stopped is not limited to "01111111 (B)" but "000011111 (B)". Even so, the same calculation result as above can be obtained. In other words, by determining whether or not the lower 4 bits are "0", it is possible to determine whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the actual reel drive control is executed once every two interrupts, the most significant bit of the reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is set to "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Become. Therefore, not limited to such specifications, for example, when the most significant bit is always "0", "11111111 (11111111) is used as a number for calculating the logical product for determining whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. B) ”can also be used.

In the next step S830, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped. In this process, when the calculation result of the above (5) is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped.
When it is determined in step S830 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S831, and when it is determined in step S830 that all reels 31 have not stopped, the above process of step S829 is executed again.
In step S831, the production end waiting time is set. This process is a process of acquiring the effect end waiting time corresponding to the standby effect number in the current standby effect from the reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM1 to 8) and storing it in the BC register. For example, when the standby effect number in the standby effect this time is "1", it is stored by the addresses "101E (H)" and "101F (H)" of the reel effect execution timer table 1 (TBL_TARPIC_TM1) in FIG. 145. The value "5371 (D)" (waiting time at the end of the production) is stored in the BC register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S832, and a 2-byte time wait is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value by "1" for each interrupt process until the BC register value becomes "0".
Then, when the BC register value becomes "0", the 2-byte time wait is ended and the process proceeds to step S833.
In step S833, the standby effect type RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing "F0A0 (H)" which is the address of the standby effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) in the HL register.
In the next step S834, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (that is, the standby effect number (_NB_PRO_NO)) is “4”. When it is determined to be "4", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "4", the process proceeds to step S835.
Here, when the standby effect number "4" is selected as the standby effect, as shown in FIG. 144, it is a standby effect in which "red 7" is aligned and then "black BAR" is aligned. Therefore, when the standby effect number is "4", the process proceeds to the next process without clearing the data related to the standby effect start process or initializing the symbol number.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S835, the search for the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E (H)", the standby effect number (_NB_PRO_NO) of the address "F0A0 (H)", and the address "F09F (H)". Clear the counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV). Specifically, the process of storing "0" in each of the above addresses is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S836, and the data of the symbol number (for the passing position) and the symbol number (for the stop position) are initialized.
In particular,
1st reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of address "F053 (H)",
1st reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) of address "F054 (H)",
2nd reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) of address "F05E (H)",
2nd reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL2_STPPIC) of address "F05F (H)",
3rd reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) of address "F069 (H)",
Third reel symbol number (for stop position) of address "F06A (H)" (_NB_RL3_STPPIC)
The initial value "11111111 (B)" (FF (H)) is stored in all of the above.

Next, the process proceeds to step S837, and the random delay time is set. This process is performed on the first reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL1_WAIT) at the address "F056 (H)", the second reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL2_WAIT) at the address "F061 (H)", and the address "F06C (H)". The values determined by lottery are set in the third reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL3_WAIT). Specifically, any one value is determined from "0" to "335 (D)", and the value is stored in each of the above three addresses. When the value is stored in the above address, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process, and when it becomes "0", the reel 31 can be restarted.

As shown in FIG. 140, the standby effect start process shown in FIG. 143 is executed before the determination of whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (step S766). In other words, the standby effect start process is executed even when the minimum game time has not elapsed. Then, after the end of the standby effect, it is determined in step S766 whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. In the 23rd embodiment, since the standby effect is executed according to the timer value shown in FIG. 145, the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) always elapses at the end of the standby effect.
In this way, when the standby effect is executed, it is started without waiting for the minimum game time, so that the player feels uncomfortable even when the standby effect is executed at a time close to the closing of the hall, for example. It is possible to reduce the possibility of causing

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752 of FIG. 139.
First, in step S791, whether or not the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by the addresses "F041 (H)" and "F042 (H)" is "0" (whether or not the zero flag is "1") is determined. to decide. If it is "0", the process proceeds to step S792, and if it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, unless the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) stored by the addresses "F041 (H)" and "F042 (H)" is "0", the reel 31 is stopped even if the stop switch 42 is operated. Do not execute.

This control is for the following reasons.
In the 23rd embodiment, 1BB non-internal in non-RT or RT1 has a relatively high probability of winning 1BB (at "19930/65536"), as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127. When 1BB is won and the game is inside 1BB, the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed in the game (game in which the winning and replay condition device number is "0") that has not won a small role or replay in the game. It will be possible.
On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, the AT is executed in the 1BB game. Therefore, when not AT, I do not want to win 1BB even if it is inside 1BB. Even if 1BB wins a prize during non-AT, the 1BB game itself is executed, but AT is not executed. Further, since the lottery of AT is not executed during 1BB operation, it is disadvantageous for the player to be in 1BB operation during non-AT. When 1BB is activated, the ball output rate is slightly higher as described above when 1BB is not activated, but since it is a game period in which the AT lottery is not executed, it is substantially disadvantageous to the player.

Therefore, when the stop display of the 1BB symbol combination is not permitted, specifically, when the main game state is not "3" (AT is being prepared), or even if the main game state is "3", the AT waits. When the flag is not "0", the symbol combination of 1BB is tempered in order to avoid the stop display of the symbol combination of 1BB as much as possible (when the two reels 31 are stopped, the symbol "blue BAR" related to 1BB is displayed. When the third stop switch 42 is operated (stopped at the effective line), there is a period during which the stop operation is not effective.

When the standby time is determined to be "0" in step S791 and the process proceeds to step S792, the index passage check of all the motors is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) is stored in the A register.
(2) Perform a logical sum (OR) calculation between the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) Perform a logical sum (OR) calculation between the A register value and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are , Before the change in the #th reel motor index, it is "FF (H)", that is, "11111111 (B)".
Therefore, if at least one piece of data is "11111111 (B)", the calculation result up to (3) above is "111111111 (B)", and when "1" is added as shown in (4), it becomes "0". become. Therefore, for at least one reel 31, the above calculation result becomes "0" before the #th reel motor index changes, and after the #th reel motor index changes for all reels 31, the above The calculation result is a value other than "0".

As described above, when the # reel motor index is changed, the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) is set to "10 (D)" (at the time of rising) or "0" (falling). Time) is remembered. Then, every time it is determined that one symbol has moved, the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) is subtracted by "1". In this way, after the change of the #th reel motor index, the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position) is set to "0" (0000000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). It will circulate. Therefore, after the change of the #th reel motor index, the logical sum operation of (1) to (3) above does not result in "11111111 (B)".

In addition, as another method of the operation (4) above, there is a method of performing a logical product (AND) operation with "1110000 (B)". With this method, if the calculation result is not "0", it can be determined as "No" in step S793 described later. Furthermore, as another method of the operation (4) above, there is a method of performing an operation of shifting the bit to the left by "1". With this method, if the calculation result is not "0", it can be determined as "No" in step S793 described later. That is, before the # reel motor index changes, the upper 3 bits of the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) are "111", so that the upper 3 bits are calculated in (4) above. It is determined whether or not at least one bit is "1". Then, if there is a "1" in the upper 3 bits, it is not possible to accept the stop switch 42 in step S793, which will be described later, and if there is no "1" in the upper 3 bits, it can be determined that the stop acceptance is possible. It becomes.

Next, the process proceeds to step S793, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 can be stopped. This determination determines whether or not it is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1") in the operation (4) of step S792. In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, stop acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted.
In step S793, when it is determined that the stop reception of the stop switch 42 is possible, the process proceeds to step S794, and when it is determined that the stop reception of the stop switch 42 is not possible, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S794, the stop switch 42 (corresponding to the reel 31 that has not yet been stopped and controlled) is operated based on the values of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at the address "F017 (H)". Determine if it was done. When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S795, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S795, the stop position is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery of this game (addresses "F0A9 (H)" and "F0AA (H)") and the reel position at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.
Next, the process proceeds to step S796, and the process proceeds to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET).

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S796 of FIG. 146.
As described above, this flowchart limits that the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed when the symbol combination of 1BB is tempted and the symbol combination of 1BB may be stopped and displayed. However, in a situation where it is not desired to stop and display the symbol combination of 1BB, the waiting time until the third stop switch 42 becomes effective is set. If the waiting time is set here and the third stop switch 42 is operated before the waiting time elapses, the result is "No" in step S791 of FIG. 146, and the stop control of the third reel 31 is not executed.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the stop operation of the second stop switch 42 has been performed. Here, in step S794 of FIG. 146, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 determined to have a rising edge is the second stop switch 42 (the second operated stop switch 42). If it is determined in step S801 that it is after the second stop, the process proceeds to step S802, and if it is determined that it is not after the second stop, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not 1BB can win a prize. Specifically, at the time of the second stop, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of 1BB is tempered to the effective line or whether or not it is tempered. For example, when determining whether or not a tempai has been performed, after the second reel 31 is stopped, the "blue BAR" (the symbol constituting the symbol combination of 1BB) of the first reel 31 and the second reel 31 becomes an effective line. When it is stopped, it is judged that 1BB has been tempted (1BB can win a prize). On the other hand, even before the second reel 31 is stopped (regardless of whether or not it is stopped), it may be determined whether or not to temper. For example, when the first reel 31 is stopped, the "blue BAR" is stopped at the effective line, and the second stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing at which the "blue BAR" of the second reel 31 can be stopped at the effective line. When it is done, it is judged that 1BB is tempted (1BB can win a prize).
When it is determined that 1BB can win a prize, the process proceeds to step S803, and when it is determined that 1BB cannot win a prize, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S803, it is determined whether or not the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) of this game is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the address "F0A9 (H)" is "0". Winning and Replay Conditions When it is determined that the device number is "0", the process proceeds to step S804, and when it is determined that the device number is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Therefore, even if it is determined in step S802 that 1BB is tempered, the waiting time is not set in step S810 because the game becomes "No" in step S803 in the game at the time of winning the small winning combination. In the 23rd embodiment, in the game in which the small winning combination is won, the small winning combination priority control (in the game in which the winning of 1BB is carried over, in the game in which the small winning combination is won, the winning of the small winning combination is prioritized and 1BB is not won). Is executed, 1BB will not win a prize. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a waiting time in the game in which the small role is won.
In step S804, the accessory condition device number (_NB_CRRT_BNS) is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the address "F0AA (H)" and storing it in the A register.
In the next step S805, it is determined whether or not the acquired accessory condition device number is less than "2", in other words, whether or not it is "1". Here, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "2", and when it is determined that the A register is smaller, it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S806. When it is determined as "No", the present End the process according to the flowchart.

In the 23rd embodiment, the symbol combination of 1BB is configured so as not to be tempted unless the accessory condition device number is "1". Therefore, when the accessory condition device number is "0" in this game, it is configured to be determined as "No" in step S802. Therefore, in step S805, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" without determining whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1" (of course, in step S805, it is determined whether or not the accessory condition device number is "1". It is also good), and it is judged whether or not it is less than "2".

In step S806, the main game state number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value of the main game state (_NB_GAM_STS) of the address "F07E (H)" in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to step S807, and it is determined whether or not the A register value is “3” (AT is being prepared). Here, the comparison operation between the A register value and "3" is performed, and when the A register value and "3" are the same value, it is determined as "Yes". When it is determined that the main game state number is "3", the process proceeds to step S808, and when it is determined that the main game status number is not "3", the process proceeds to step S809.

In step S808, the value of the AT wait counter (_CT_AT_WAIT) at the address “F098 (H)” is acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the AT standby counter value is "0". When the AT standby counter value is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the AT standby counter is not "0", the process proceeds to step S809.
In step S809, "896 (D)" is stored in the HL register. Next, the process proceeds to step S810, and the HL register value (896 (D)) is stored in the waiting time (_TM2_WAIT) of the addresses "F041 (H)" and "F042 (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
When the waiting time is stored in the addresses "F041 (H)" and "F042 (H)", "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process. Further, it is determined whether or not the time set here becomes "0" in step S791 of FIG. 146.
In the above processing, when the main game state is "3" and the AT standby counter is "0", the waiting time is not stored. That is, in this case, 1BB winning is permitted.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S753 of FIG. 139.
First, in step S941, the main game state game end processing is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and is a process shown in FIG. 149 described later.
Next, the process proceeds to step S942 to execute 1BB operation management. The 1BB operation management is a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied when the game is a 1BB game this time. Specifically, based on whether or not the D2 bit of the operating state flag (in the 23rd embodiment, the same as in the 11th embodiment, "FL_ACTION" shown in FIG. 35 is provided) is "1". 1 Determine whether or not BB is in operation.
When it is determined that 1BB is in operation, the number of sheets that can be acquired during 1BB operation (“_CT_BIG_PAY” of the address “F00E (H)”) is read, and it is determined whether or not it becomes “0”.
Then, when it is determined that the number of sheets that can be acquired has reached "0" (when the number of sheets that can be acquired satisfies the 1BB operation end condition), the process of clearing the D2 bit of the operation state flag is executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S943, and it is determined whether or not the RB is operating. Here, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation by determining whether or not the D3 bit of the operating state flag (FIG. 35) is “0”. When it is determined that the RB is not in operation (the RB operation state flag is “0”), the process proceeds to step S945, and when it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S944.

In step S944, RB operation management is executed. This process determines whether or not the number of games played when the RB of the address "F00F (H)" is activated has reached "12" or the number of winnings when the RB of the address "F010 (H)" has been activated has reached "8". Then, when it is determined that the number of RB games is less than "12" and the number of winning small wins is less than "8", the process of step S944 is terminated and the process proceeds to step S945. On the other hand, in step S944, when it is determined that the number of RB games has reached "12" or the number of winning small wins has reached "8", the D3 bit of the operating state flag is set to "0". , Step S945.
Step S945 executes the advantageous section clear counter management. This process is the process shown in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52 shown in the eleventh embodiment, and includes updating the advantageous section clear counter and difference counter, initialization processing when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the like. Run. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the processing at the end of the main game state game in step S941 of FIG. 148.
First, in step S951, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) of the addresses "F07A (H)" and "F07B (H)" is less than "600". If it is determined that the value is less than "600", the process proceeds to step S952, and if it is determined that the value is not less than "600", the process proceeds to step S955.
In step S952, it is determined whether or not the main game state is 1 (advantageous section normal (non-AT)). This process is a process of determining whether or not the main game state number of the address "F07E (H)" is "1". When it is determined that the main game state is 1, the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that the main game state is not 1, the process proceeds to step S953.

In step S953, it is determined whether or not the main game state is 5 (AT pullback). This process is a process of determining whether or not the main game state number of the address "F07E (H)" is "5". When it is determined that the main game state is 5, the process proceeds to step S954, and when it is determined that the main game state is not 5, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S954, it is determined whether or not the AT pullback counter is "0". This process is a process of determining whether or not the value of the address "F09D (H)" is "0". When the AT pullback counter is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that the AT pullback counter is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S951 to step S955, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the main game state 4 is satisfied. This process determines whether or not the number of sheets that can be acquired at the time of 1BB operation of the address "F00E (H)" is "0", and if it is "0", the end condition of the main game state 4 (1BB operation). Judge to meet. When it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 4 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S956, and when it is determined that the end condition of the main game state 4 is not satisfied, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S956, it is determined whether or not the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0". This process determines whether or not the ending counter of the address "F097 (H)" has been updated from "1" to "0" in this game. When it is determined that the ending counter has changed from "1" to "0", the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that the ending counter has not changed from "1" to "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S957, preparation for the end of the advantageous section (M_ADVEND_STBY) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 150, which will be described later. Then, after executing the preparation for the end of the advantageous section, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section end preparation (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S957 of FIG. 149.
In step S961, "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This process executes the following process.
(1) “1 (H)” is stored in the HL register. As a result, the H register value becomes "0 (H)" and the L register value becomes "1 (H)".
(2) Next, the L register value "1 (H)" is stored in the lower address (F07B (H)) of the advantageous section clear counter, and the H register value "0 (H)" is stored in the upper address (F07A (H)). Remember.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed. From the above, the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter is "00000000000 (B)", and the lower byte is "00000001 (B)".

By storing "1" in the advantageous section clear counter by the above preparation for the end of the advantageous section, it is not necessary to store the data indicating whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at the predetermined address of the RWM 53.
If data indicating whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied is stored in the predetermined address of the RWM53, the capacity of the RWM53 will be compressed accordingly.
Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is necessary to store the data indicating that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. Further, it is necessary to read the data stored in the predetermined address for each game and determine whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, the program capacity is required accordingly, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is squeezed.

On the other hand, in the 23rd embodiment, only "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter in the preparation for the end of the advantageous section, and "1" is subtracted in step S422 in the advantageous section counter management of FIG. When the process is executed, the value before subtraction becomes "1" and the value after subtraction becomes "0". Therefore, the value becomes "No" in step S423 and "Yes" in step S424, and the process proceeds to step S435. , The clear processing of RWM53 at the end of the advantageous section can be executed.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the 23rd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 53 in the 11th embodiment. In FIG. 151, the same processes as those in FIG. 53 are assigned the same step numbers.
In FIG. 151, the reel drive control in step S461 of FIG. 53 is defined as the reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841, and the specific processing will be described in detail.
Further, in FIG. 151, a test signal output is provided in step S842. Note that the process is omitted in FIG. 53 of the eleventh embodiment, and it is not that the test signal output is not provided in the eleventh embodiment.
The test signal output in step S842 may include output of data on the push order and the indicated position of the reel 31 in this game. Further, for example, the output of the condition device information and the like may be included, but the description thereof will be omitted in the 23rd embodiment.

Furthermore, in the 23rd embodiment, the interrupt period is "1.117" ms, which is different from other embodiments (2.235 ms).
Here, when the interrupt cycle is "2.235" ms, the drive control of the reel 31 is executed for each interrupt (for example, in the eleventh embodiment, step S461 in FIG. 53), but in the 23rd embodiment. As described above, when the interrupt cycle is "1.117" ms, the drive control of the reel 31 (processes after step S872 in FIG. 154, which will be described later) is executed once every two interrupts.

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) in step S841 of FIG. 151.
Here, the program shown in FIG. 152 (including FIGS. 153, 154 to 155, 157, and 159, which will be described later) is used not only for reel control during standby effect but also for normal reel control. Therefore, it is possible to execute the normal reel control and the standby effect (reverse rotation of the reel 31) with the program shown in FIG. 152 without providing a program dedicated to the standby effect.
In FIG. 152, the number of reels is set in step S851. The number of reels is "3". Here, the process of storing "00000100 (B)" in the C register is performed.
In the next step S852, the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 153, which will be described later, and is a process of storing the value of the reel drive state to be controlled or its address in each register. By the processing of step S852, each register value becomes as follows.
A register value: Reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) value of the reel 31 to be controlled DE register value: Reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) address of the reel 31 to be controlled HL register value: Control target Address of reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) of reel 31

In the next step S853, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed. This process is a process of actually accelerating, accelerating, decelerating, stopping, and the like of the reel, and is a process shown in FIGS. 154 to 155, which will be described later.
In the next step S854, it is determined whether or not the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all reels 31. In this process, first, the process of shifting the C register value to the right by "1" is executed. For example, since the initial value is "00000100 (B)" as described above, in the first step S854, the shift to the right by "1" results in "00000010 (B)". Next, it is determined whether or not the value after shifting to the right by "1" becomes "0". When it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that the processes of steps S852 and S853 have been executed for all reels 31, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process returns to step S852.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) in step S852 of FIG. 152.
First, in step S861, the head RWM address request set is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D (H)" is stored in the HL register.
(2) The C register value is stored in the A register. The initial value of the C register value is "00000100 (B)" as described above.
(3) The A register value is shifted to the right by "1", and the result is stored in the A register. As a result, in the first operation, the A register value becomes "00000010 (B)".
(4) Multiply the A register value by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, when "00000010 (B)", that is, "2 (D)" is multiplied by "11 (D)", it becomes "22 (D)", that is, "16 (H)".

Note that this "11 (D)" is based on the address interval stored in the RWM 53. Specifically, the address for storing the first reel drive state is "F04D (H)", and various information regarding the first reel is stored up to "F057 (H)". Further, the address for storing the second reel drive state is "F058 (H)", and various information regarding the second reel is stored up to "F062 (H)". Furthermore, the address for storing the third reel drive state is "F063 (H)", and various information regarding the third reel is stored up to "F06D (H)".
In this way, the interval between the address "F04D (H)" that stores the first reel drive state and the address "F058 (H)" that stores the second reel drive state is the "11" address, and the second This is because the interval between the address "F058 (H)" for storing the reel driving state and the address "F063 (H)" for storing the third reel driving state is "11". As a result, it is possible to acquire, for example, reel drive state information for the reel to be controlled by repeatedly executing the same process in the subsequent processes.

Further, various information for each reel 31 is also arranged at the same interval. For example, the address of the first reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F04E (H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F04D (H)" in the first reel drive state. Similarly, the address of the second reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F05A (H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F058 (H)" in the second reel drive state. Similarly, the address of the third reel drive pulse output counter is the address "F065 (H)" obtained by adding "2" to the address "F063 (H)" in the third reel drive state. The same applies to other information.
As a result, for example, in step S881 (FIG. 154) described later, an operation of adding "6" to the address of the # reel driven state to obtain the address of the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC). For example, for the first reel 31, the address "F053 (H)" of the first reel symbol number (for the passing position) is added by adding "6" to the address "F04D (H)" in the first reel driven state. ) ”Can be obtained. Similarly, for the second reel 31, the address “F05E (H)” of the second reel symbol number (for the passing position) by adding “6” to the address “F058 (H)” in the second reel driven state. Can be sought.
By repeatedly executing the same module in this way, processing for three reels can be executed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S862, and the designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is stored in the HL register. In the first calculation, the A register value is "16 (H)", so when "16 (H)" is added to the HL register value "F04D (H)", it becomes "F063 (H)".
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) The H register value is stored in the D register.
(4) Store the L register value in the E register.
By this process
A register value: 3rd reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) value HL register value: 3rd reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) address value (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F063 (H) ) ”
DE register value: "F063 (H)" which is the address value (D register value is the upper address and E register value is the lower address) in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS).
Will be.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

The reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET) of FIG. 153 is executed a total of three times in FIG. 152 until it is determined as “Yes” in step S854.
In the second calculation by the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET), it becomes as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) The address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D (H)" is stored in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The second time, the C register value is "00000010 (B)".
c) The A register value is shifted to the right by "1", and the result is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000001 (B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, when "00000001 (B)", that is, "1 (D)" is multiplied by "11 (D)", it becomes "11 (D)", that is, "0B (H)".

(2) Step S862
a) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is stored in the HL register. Here, in the second operation, the A register value is "0B (H)", so when "0B (H)" is added to the HL register value "F04D (H)", it becomes "F058 (H)". Become.
b) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
By this process
A register value: 2nd reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) value HL register value: 2nd reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) address value (H register value is the upper address, L register value is the lower address) "F058 (H) ) ”
DE register value: "F058 (H)" which is the address value (D register value is the upper address and E register value is the lower address) in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS).
Will be.

In the third operation of the reel control data address set (C_RLDAT_SET), it becomes as follows.
(1) Step S861
a) The address of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), that is, "F04D (H)" is stored in the HL register.
b) Store the C register value in the A register. The third time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".
c) The A register value is shifted to the right by "1", and the result is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000000000 (B)".
d) Multiply the A register value by "11 (D)" and store the multiplication result in the A register. Here, when "000000 (B)" is multiplied by "11 (D)", it becomes "0".

(2) Step S862
a) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is stored in the HL register. Here, in the third operation, the A register value is "0", so when "0" is added to the HL register value "F04D (H)", it becomes "F04D (H)".
b) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
c) Store the H register value in the D register.
d) Store the L register value in the E register.
By this process
A register value: 1st reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) value HL register value: 1st reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) address value (H register value is upper address, L register value is lower address) "F04D (H) ) ”
DE register value: "F04D (H)" which is the address value (D register value is the upper address and E register value is the lower address) in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).
Will be.

154 and 155 are flowcharts showing the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) in step S853 of FIG. 152. FIG. 155 is a flowchart following FIG. 154.
In FIG. 154, in step S871, it is determined whether or not the interrupt processing this time is the excitation update timing. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) An exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed between the A register value (value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS)) and "10000000 (B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register.
As a result, when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "0", the operation becomes "1", and when the D7 bit of the A register value before the operation is "1", the operation causes "0". ". Further, the D0 to D6 bits do not change before and after the calculation.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (the address indicated by the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS)).
(3) It is determined whether or not the D7 (most significant) bit stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is the excitation update timing. ..

From the above, the D7 bit in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) takes a value of "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. Therefore, once every two interrupts, the D7 bit becomes "0", and the excitation update timing comes.
Then, when it is determined that it is the excitation update timing, the process proceeds to step S872, and when it is determined that it is not the excitation update timing, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In other words, the processing after step S872 of the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed once every two interrupts. Therefore, the counters and data updated in the processing after step S872 can be updated every two interrupts. The control for driving the motor 32 (output processing from the output port) is executed for each interrupt.

In the next step S872, the reel rotation start standby counter is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Save the HL register value in the stack area.
(2) Add "9" to the HL register value to make the HL register value the address value of the #th reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL # _WAIT).
Next, the process proceeds to step S873, and the countdown (subtraction of "1") of the counter value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is executed.
The # reel rotation start standby counter (_CT_RL # _WAIT) stores "0" when there is no standby effect, and when there is a standby effect, it is for random delay of the # reel 31 after the standby effect. The counter value is stored.
Then, the process proceeds to step S874, and it is determined whether or not there is a standby at the start of reel rotation. Here, when the value before subtraction of "1" in step S873 is not "0" (when the carry flag does not become "1"), it is determined that there is no waiting at the start of reel rotation, and the process proceeds to step S875. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a standby at the start of reel rotation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S875, it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is stopped. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value saved in the stack area (the address value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS)) is returned to the HL register.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that the reel 31 is stopped.
When the process proceeds to step S875, the D7 bit in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is “0”.
When it is determined in step S875 that the reel 31 is not stopped, the process proceeds to step S876, and when it is determined that the reel 31 is stopped, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S876, it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating. Here, when the A register value (value of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS)) is less than "3", it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating.
When it is determined that the reel 31 is accelerating or decelerating, the process proceeds to step S882, and when it is determined that the reel 31 is not accelerating or decelerating, the process proceeds to step S877.

In step S877, it is determined whether the reel 31 is in constant speed or starts deceleration. Here, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that the reel 31 is in constant speed or the deceleration is started, and if it is "0", the reel It is determined that 31 is not in constant speed or the start of deceleration.
When it is determined that the reel 31 is in constant speed or the deceleration is started, the process proceeds to step S892, and when it is determined that the reel 31 is not in constant speed or the deceleration is started, the process proceeds to step S878.
In step S878, the acceleration set process is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register. Since the E register value is a lower address value of the reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS), the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is stored in the HL register by this processing.
(2) “2 (D)” is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the value indicating the reel-driven state becomes "2" (value corresponding to acceleration).

In the next step S879, the reel drive pulse output counter and the reel drive pulse switching number of times are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) "1" is stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT).
(2) "9" is stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value. Here, the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "3" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL # _PLSCHG).

Next, the process proceeds to step S880, and it is determined whether or not the standby effect is in progress. This process determines whether or not the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E (H)" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the standby effect is not in progress. When it is determined that the standby effect is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S881, and when it is determined that the standby effect is in progress, the process proceeds to step S882.
In step S881, the symbol number (for the passing position) and the symbol number (for the stop position) are initialized. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "6" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC).
(2) The initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value. Here, the address obtained by adding "7" to the HL register value is the address of the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC).

In the next step S882, the reel drive pulse output counter is subtracted by "1". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT).
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is subtracted by "1".
Next, the process proceeds to step S883, and it is determined whether or not the reel drive pulse output counter is “0”. This process determines whether or not the result of subtracting "1" in the above (2) is "0". When it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S884, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the next step S884, it is determined whether or not the number of reel drive pulse switchings is "0". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set the HL register value to the address value of the #th reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL # _PLSCHG).
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) The A register value is stored in the B register.
(4) When it is determined that the A register value is "0", it is determined that the number of reel drive pulse switchings is "0".
When it is determined that the number of reel drive pulse switchings is "0", the process proceeds to step S914 (FIG. 155), and when it is determined that the number is not "0", the process proceeds to step S885.

In step S885, the number of reel drive pulse switchings is subtracted by "1". This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (the address of the #th reel drive pulse switching number (_CT_RL # _PLSCHG)). In addition, the value subtracted by "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S886, the acceleration / deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is set.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an acceleration / deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP).
In FIG. 156, the numerical value "90 (D)" of the address "1050 (H)" indicates the pulse output counter value at the time of deceleration. Further, each numerical value of the addresses "1058 (H)" to "1051 (H)" indicates a pulse output counter value from the 1st to 8th steps at the time of acceleration.
Then, in step S886, the start address "1050 (H)" of the acceleration / deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S887, the designated data is acquired from the acceleration / deceleration pulse output counter table (TBL_PULSE_UP). In this process, the data (pulse output counter value) stored in the address obtained by adding the A register value (# reel drive pulse switching count) to the HL register value (1050 (H)) is stored in the B register. It is a process to do.
Next, the process proceeds to step S888, and the reel drive pulse output counter is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) Store the D register value in the H register.
By this processing, the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is stored in the HL register.
(3) The B register value (pulse output counter value) is stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value.
Here, the address indicated by the HL register value is the address of the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS), and the address obtained by adding "2" to this is the address of the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT). It becomes an address.

In the next step S889, it is determined whether or not the acceleration is completed. This process determines whether or not the A register value (number of times the #th reel drive pulse is switched) is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the acceleration has been completed. When it is determined that the acceleration has been completed, the process proceeds to step S890, and when it is determined that the acceleration has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S892.
In step S890, the constant speed is set. This process stores "5" in the address indicated by the HL register value (# reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS)).
In the next step S891, the reel rotation failure detection counter is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the address of the value obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value (address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL # _BAD)).
In the next step S892, the reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 157, which will be described later.

Next, the process proceeds to step S893, and it is determined whether or not the reel 31 is in constant speed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the L register.
(2) The data stored in the address (# reel motor index (_FL_RL # _MT_IDX)) indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) Add "4" to the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL # _BAD).
(4) When the data stored in the address indicated by the DE register value is "5", it is determined that the speed is constant.
Here, the address indicated by the DE register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) in step S888.
When it is determined that the speed is constant, the process proceeds to step S894, and when it is determined that the speed is not constant, the process proceeds to step S903.

In step S894, "1" is added to the reel rotation failure detection counter. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S895 of FIG. 155, and it is determined whether or not the reel rotation failure is detected. This process determines whether or not the result of adding "1" to the reel rotation failure detection counter in step S894 is "0", and when it is "0" (when the zero flag is "1"). , It is judged that the reel rotation failure is detected.
When it is determined that the reel rotation is unnecessary, the process proceeds to step S878, and the acceleration process is executed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reel rotation failure is not detected, the process proceeds to step S896.

In step S896, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the #th reel motor index (motor index # signal). In this process, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the motor index # signal based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL # _MT_IDX)), and when it is determined that there is a change, step S897 is performed. When it is determined that there is no change, the process proceeds to step S903.
In step S897, the reference symbol number “10” and the number of reference steps “3” when passing through the index are set. This process is a process of storing "10 (D)" in the D register and storing "3 (D)" in the E register.
Here, "10 (D)" stored in the D register is a value stored in the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) thereafter. Further, "3 (D)" stored in the E register is a value stored in the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of the first symbol of the #th reel after that, and all of them are design values.

In the next step S898, it is determined whether or not it is the rising edge of the #th reel motor index. This process is based on the A register value (value of the #th reel motor index (_FL_RL # _MT_IDX)), and when the D0 bit is "1" and the D4 bit is "0", the rise of the #th reel motor index Judge that it is time. When it is determined that the #th reel motor index is rising, the process proceeds to step S900, and when it is determined that it is not the rising time of the #th reel motor index, the process proceeds to step S899.

In step S899, the reference drawing number “0” and the number of reference steps “3” when passing through the index are set. This process is a process of storing "0" in the D register and storing "3 (D)" in the E register. That is, "0" is stored in the value that becomes the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC), and "3 (D)" becomes the value that becomes the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of the first symbol of the #th reel. ) ”Is remembered.
In the next step S900, the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL # _BAD) is cleared. This process is a process of storing "0" in the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (address of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL # _BAD)).

In the next step S901, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL # _PLUS) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the address of the value obtained by adding "4" to the HL register value in the A register.
Here, the HL register value is the address value of the #th reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL # _BAD) as described above, and when "4" is added to this address value, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter. It is the address value of (_CT_RL # _PLUS).

In the next step S902, the reference symbol number and the number of reference steps at the time of passing the index are saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The E register value is stored in the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel. The E register value "3" is stored in this address.
(2) The D register value is stored in the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value. Here, the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC). The D register value (“10 (D)” set in step S897 when the #th reel motor index rises and “0” set in step S899 when falling) is stored in this address. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
As described above, when steps S896 to S902 are executed, the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel and the #th reel are each at the start and fall of the #reel motor index. A reference value (design value) is set in each of the symbol numbers (for passing positions) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC).

As described above, in the 23rd embodiment, both the rising edge and the falling edge of the reel motor index are detected, and the step number of one symbol and the symbol number for the passing position are updated respectively, so that only when the reel motor index rises. In some cases, the reel 31 can be stopped before one rotation, as compared with the case where the above is detected. Further, even if there is a problem in the rotation of the reel 31, it can be corrected immediately.
As described above, the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed regardless of whether it is the normal time (normal rotation time) or the standby effect time (reverse rotation time). Therefore, in step S898, it is determined whether or not it is at the rising time regardless of whether it is at the normal time (forward rotation) or at the standby effect (reverse rotation), and at step S902, it is at the rising time or rising. A predetermined value is set depending on the time.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S893 that the speed is not constant, and when it is determined in step S896 that there is no change in the # reel motor index, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not the index has passed (whether or not the reel sensor 33 has detected the index). Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored in the address of the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value is stored in the A register.
The HL register value is the address value of the # reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL # _BAD), and when "2" is added to this address value, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) It becomes the address value.
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the A register.
(3) When the result of the addition of "1" in (2) above is "0", it is determined that the index has not passed because the #th reel motor index has not changed from the initial value.

Here, as described above, the initial value "255 (D)" (FF (H)) is stored in the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC), and the #th reel motor index When the value changes, "0" or "10 (D)" is stored in step S902, and thereafter, "0" to "19 (D)" are circulated. In other words, after the value of the #th reel motor index changes, if the reel 31 is rotating normally, the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) is "255". (D) "will not be obtained (when the acceleration process is executed again due to step-out," 255 (D) "is stored again as an initial value).
Therefore, if it becomes "0" when "1" is added to the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC), it can be judged that the #th reel motor index has not changed yet. Will be.

In step S903, when it is determined that the index has passed, the process proceeds to step S904, and when it is determined that the index has not passed yet, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S904, the number of one symbol step is subtracted by "1". Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) "1" is added to the HL register value, and the added result is stored in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before addition of "1" is the address value of the # reel rotation failure detection counter (_CT_RL # _BAD), so when "1" is added, the number of steps (_NB_RL) of one symbol of the # reel # _STEP) address value.
(2) The value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is subtracted by "1".

In the next step S905, it is determined whether or not one symbol has moved. Here, when the value of the number of steps (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol on the # 1 reel becomes "0" (when the zero flag becomes "1") as a result of subtracting "1" in step S904, It is judged that one symbol has moved. When it is determined that one symbol has moved, the process proceeds to step S906, and when it is determined that one symbol has not moved (the subtraction result is not "0"), the process proceeds to step S909.
In step S906, the number of one symbol step "16 (D)" is saved. This process is a process of storing "16 (D)" in the address indicated by the HL register value (the number of steps of one symbol of the #th reel (_NB_RL # _STEP)).

In the next step S907, the symbol number is updated. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) "1" is added to the HL register value, and the added value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address indicated by the HL register value becomes the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC).
(2) A special addition process of adding "1" to the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is executed. Here, the "special addition process" means that in this example, the upper limit value is set to "19 (D)" (corresponding to the maximum value of the symbol number), and "19 (D)" is set to "1 (D)". Is an operation that becomes "0" when is added. Specifically, the calculation is performed as follows.
Example 1) 0 + 1 = 1
Example 2) 10 + 1 = 11
Example 3) 19 + 1 = 0
As a result, it is possible to circulate between "0" and "19 (D)" without determining whether or not it is the maximum value of the symbol number.

Next, the process proceeds to step S908, and the number of one symbol steps is corrected. In step S906, "16 (D)" is stored in the number of steps (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel.
Here, in the 23rd embodiment, the number of steps of one symbol is set to "16" for the four symbols whose symbol numbers are "2", "7", "12", and "17", and the other 16 symbols. The number of steps of one symbol is set to "17".
Therefore, in step S908, the updated symbol number in step S907 is determined, and when the symbol numbers are "2", "7", "12", and "17", the # 1 of the # reel in step S906 is set. The "16 (D)" stored in the number of steps (_NB_RL # _STEP) of the symbol is maintained. On the other hand, when the symbol numbers are other than the above four symbol numbers, "17 (D)" is stored in the number of steps (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol on the #th reel.
The number of steps for one round of the reel 31 is set to "336" according to the number of steps of the motor 32. The number of symbols is "20". Therefore, by setting the number of steps to "16" for 4 symbols and "17" for 16 symbols,
16 × 4 + 17 × 16 = 336
It is set to be.

In the next step S909, it is determined whether or not the deceleration start symbol position has been reached. Here, in order to compare the passing symbol number with the deceleration start symbol, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value (# reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC)), and use the subtraction result as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the number of steps (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel.
Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. The reason why the number of steps of one symbol of the #th reel is stored in the B register here is that it is used in the deceleration start inspection (I_REDUCE_CHK) process in step S910 described later.
(2) "1" is added to the HL register value, and the result of the addition is taken as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes the address of the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC).
(3) The value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(4) "1" is added to the HL register value, and the result of the addition is taken as the HL register value.
(5) Compare the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (# reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC)) with the A register value, and if they are the same, judge "Yes". To do.

In the next step S910, the deceleration start inspection (I_REDUCE_CHK) is executed. This process is an inspection as to whether or not the condition for starting deceleration is satisfied, and is the process shown in FIG. 159, which will be described later.
Then, in the next step S911, it is determined whether or not it is the start of deceleration. In this process, when the zero flag is "1" as a result of the deceleration start inspection in step S910, it is determined that the deceleration start time.
Although the details will be described later, when the standby effect type is "0", the zero flag is "1". Further, when the standby effect type is not "0" (during the standby effect of reverse rotation), the # reel designated symbol position search standby time (TM2_TAR # _WAIT) is "0", and the current number of steps is "13" (). When it is (design value), the zero flag becomes "1".

When it is determined that the deceleration has started, the process proceeds to step S912, and when it is determined that the deceleration has not started, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S912, deceleration is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the A register.
In the next step S913, pulse data during deceleration is set (four-phase on). This process is a process of storing "000011111 (B)" in the B register.
In the next step S914, the reel drive state is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the DE register value. Here, the DE register value is the address of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS). As a result, the #th reel drive state becomes "1" (a value indicating deceleration).

Next, the process proceeds to step S915, and the reel drive pulse is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #).
In the next step S916, it is determined whether or not the deceleration start state has changed to the deceleration deceleration state. This process determines whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that deceleration has started from the start of deceleration. When it is determined that deceleration is in progress from the start of deceleration, the process proceeds to step S917, and when it is determined that deceleration is not in progress, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, in step S913, "00001111 (B)" is stored in the B register. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S916 via step S913, it is determined that the value is not "0" and deceleration is in progress from the start of deceleration. It is judged that it became. On the other hand, when it is determined as "Yes" in step S884 and the process proceeds to step S914, the B register value is "0" in step S884, so that it is determined as "No" in step S916.
In step S917, the output request when the reel rotation is stopped is set. This process is a process for transmitting the symbol number of the reel 31 to be stopped to the sub-control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the reel drive pulse update (I_PULSE_INC) in step S892 of FIG. 154.
First, in step S921, "1" is added to the reel-driven pulse data search counter. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) "8" is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is stored in the HL register. Here, the HL register value before adding "8" is the address value of the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS), and when "8" is added, the HL register value is for searching the # reel drive pulse data. It is the address value of the counter (_CT_RL # _PULS).
(2) Add "1" to the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
Here, for example, when the value stored in the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL # _PULS) is "255 (D)", the result of adding "1" is "0". It becomes.

Next, the process proceeds to step S922, and the search counter update correction data is added. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) of the address "F09F (H)" is stored in the A register. Here, when the value of the search counter update correction data (_WK_PLS_REV) is "0", it means that it is forward rotation data, and when it is "FE (H)", it is reverse rotation data. Means that.
(2) The A register value is added to the value (# reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL # _PULS)) stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and the addition result is stored in the A register.

Here, when the reel 31 is rotating in the forward direction, the A register value is "0", so that the A register value is the same as the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value before addition.
On the other hand, when the reel 31 is rotating in the reverse direction, the A register value is "FE (H)", so that the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value before addition is substantially "2". Is subtracted.
For example
Value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value: 100 (D)
A register value: FE (H), that is, 254 (D)
When
The A register value is "98 (D)".

In the next step S923, the # reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL # _PULS) is updated. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
By the process of the above steps S921 to S923, the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL # _PULS) is added by "1" at the time of forward rotation, and is subtracted by "1" at the time of reverse rotation.
Next, the process proceeds to step S924 to generate an offset for searching reel-driven pulse data. This process is a process of executing the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)". Then, the result of the logical product operation is stored in the A register.
The A register value is a value of the #th reel drive pulse data search counter (_CT_RL # _PULS), and is a value in the range of "0" to "255 (D)". When this value and "000000111 (B)" are logically producted (AND), the calculation result becomes a value of "0" to "7".

Specifically, for example, it is as follows.
Example 1) When the A register value is "00000000000 (B)", the logical product (AND) operation with "000000111 (B)" results in "00000000000 (B)".
Example 2) When the A register value is "00000010 (B)", the logical product (AND) operation with "000000111 (B)" gives "00000010 (B)".
Example 3) When the A register value is "0000100001 (B)", the logical product (AND) operation with "000000111 (B)" gives "00000001 (B)".
Example 4) When the A register value is "111111111 (B)", the logical product (AND) operation with "000000111 (B)" results in "000000111 (B)".
That is, the maximum value of the value after the logical product (AND) operation is "00000011 (B)" (7 (D)).

Next, the process proceeds to step S925, and the reel drive pulse table is set. This process is a process of storing the address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE) in the HL register.
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). As shown in FIG. 158, eight types of reel drive pulse data are stored in the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE). Of the reel drive pulse data, the upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) are unused bits. Further, the D0 bit corresponds to the data of φ0, the D1 bit corresponds to the data of φ1, the D2 bit corresponds to the data of φ2, and the D3 bit corresponds to the data of φ3. Then, "1" indicates on and "0" indicates off.
For example, "000001001 (B)" stored in the address "1100 (H)" means that φ0 and φ3 are on. Note that φ0 to φ3 correspond to the exciting phase of the 4-phase stepping motor.
Then, in step S925, "1100 (H)", which is the start address of the reel drive pulse table (TBL_REEL_PULSE), is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S926, reel drive pulse data is acquired. This process is a process in which the result of adding the A register to the HL register value is used as the HL register value, and the value of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
Here, the A register value is an offset value (a value obtained by converting the reel drive pulse in the range of "0" to "255 (D)" into "0" to "7") generated in step S924.
For example, when the A register value is "1", the value "00000001 (B)" of "1101 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to the HL register value "1100 (H)" is set to the B register. Remember.
Next, the process proceeds to step S927, and the reel drive pulse data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing a deceleration start inspection (I_REDUCE_CHK) in step S910 of FIG. 155.
First, in step S931, it is determined whether or not the standby effect type is "0". Here, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the standby effect type (_WK_PRD) of the address "F09E (H)" is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined as "Yes". The process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S932.
In step S932, it is determined whether or not the search waiting interval is "0". This process determines whether or not the #th reel designated symbol position search waiting time (_TM2_TAR # _WAIT) is "0", and if it is "0", determines "Yes" and proceeds to step S933. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S933, the number of deceleration start steps "13 (D)" is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Set "13 (D)" in the A register.
(2) Perform a comparison operation with the B register value.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
The B register value is the number of steps (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel stored in step S909 of FIG. 155. Then, when the result of the comparison operation is "0", the zero flag becomes "1". When the zero flag becomes "1", it is determined as "Yes" in step S911 in FIG. 155. In other words, it is set to start deceleration when the current number of steps reaches "13 (D)" (design value).

Subsequently, the control specific to the 23rd embodiment of the sub control board 80 will be described.
(1) Output to prevent entanglement In the 23rd embodiment, an output to prevent entanglement may be output after the end of one set of ATs and before the start of the next set. Here, "output to prevent immersiveness" is equivalent to displaying an image on the image display device 23, such as "Pachinko / pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately. Be careful of immersiveness." To do. In addition to displaying images, you may output audio such as "Pachinko / Pachislot is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful not to get into it." It may be any of image display only, sound only, image display and sound, etc., but it is understood that it is preferable to execute at least image display.
Since the output for preventing entanglement is generally executed when a certain number or more of medals are paid out, one set of ATs (main game states 4, 1BB operation) is completed in the 23rd embodiment. At that time, if the output condition for entanglement prevention is satisfied, the entanglement prevention output is executed.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart for controlling the entanglement prevention output during AT by the sub control board 80.
First, in step S971, it is determined whether or not AT is in progress. When it is determined that AT is in progress, the process proceeds to step S972, and when it is determined that AT is not in progress, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
The sub control board 80 receives a command related to the main game state from the main control board 50. When a command indicating that the main game state is "4" is received, it is determined that AT is in progress.

In step S972, it is determined whether or not a notification to the effect that AT is continued is output. In the 23rd embodiment, when the next AT is fixed, in other words, when the AT set number counter is "1" or more, a notification indicating that the AT will be executed again during the AT is sent. There are cases where it is output (when AT continuation is notified) and cases where it is not output.
The sub control board 80 receives a command of the AT set number counter from the main control board 50. Then, in the situation where the next AT is not confirmed (when the AT set number counter is "0"), the AT continuation notification is not output, but in the situation where the next AT is confirmed (the number of AT sets). When the counter is "1" or more), it is determined whether or not to output the AT continuation notification by, for example, a lottery. When it is decided to output the AT continuation notification, an effect for outputting the AT continuation notification is selected, and the effect is output.

An example of outputting the AT continuation notification is, for example, an effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other and the main character wins. When the main character and the enemy character confront each other and the effect that the main character wins is output, the next AT will be confirmed, and the AT will not end at this AT (however, according to the notified push order). If the player does not operate the stop switch 42, the advantageous section itself may end in the middle of the current AT due to the advantageous section clear counter management.) Further, when the main character and the enemy character confront each other and the effect that the main character loses is output, there are cases where the AT ends at the current AT and cases where the AT continues.

In step S972, if it is determined that the AT continuation notification has been output, the process proceeds to step S973, and if it is determined that the AT continuation notification has not been output, the process proceeds to step S974.
In step S973, the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. The AT continuation notification flag is provided in the storage area of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, and is a flag for determining whether or not the AT continuation notification has been notified.

In step S974, it is determined whether or not one set of AT has been completed. This determination is based on a command transmitted from the main control board 50, and when the end condition of the main game state "4" is satisfied (at the end of the operation of the 1BB game (at the end of the game)), one set of ATs Judges that is finished. When it is determined that one set of AT has been completed, the process proceeds to step S975, and when it is determined that the AT has not been completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S975, it is determined whether or not the AT continuation notification flag is on. If it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S976, and if it is determined that the AT continuation notification flag is on, the process proceeds to step S977.

In step S976, the AT end effect is output. Here, the "AT end effect" is an effect that suggests that the AT is terminated and the process shifts to the non-AT. Therefore, even if the AT set number counter is "1" or more at this point, when the AT continuation notification flag is not on, in other words, when the AT continuation notification is not output during the AT of this set, Output the AT end effect. It should be noted that just because the AT end effect is output does not mean that the AT always ends.

Next, the process proceeds to step S978, and the above-mentioned entanglement prevention effect is output.
In the next step S979, it is determined whether or not the AT set number is possessed (whether or not the AT set number counter is "1" or more). When it is determined that the number of AT sets does not exist, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of AT sets is possessed, the process proceeds to step S980.
In step S980, the AT revival effect is output. That is, in step S976, the AT end effect is output, but the reverse effect for denying the AT end effect is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S975 that the AT continuation notification flag is on, the process proceeds to step S977 to clear the AT continuation notification flag and end the process according to this flowchart. Since the AT continuation notification has already been output when passing through step S977, it is not necessary to output the AT revival effect as in step S980. However, at the end of one set of ATs, it goes without saying that the effect indicating that the ATs will continue may be output again.

Further, the AT end effect in step S976, the entanglement prevention effect in step S978, and the AT revival effect in step S980 may be sequentially output at predetermined time intervals without any operation by the player. Alternatively, after the AT end effect and the immersive prevention effect are output, the player waits for the operation of the operation switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, settlement switch 43), and when the operation switch is operated, the operation switch is set to step S979. You may proceed.
Further, the squeeze prevention output of step S978 is secured for a certain period of time. For example, when the process proceeds to step S978, a predetermined timer value is set, the predetermined timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process, and the process of step S978 is performed on condition that the predetermined timer value becomes "0". It can be said to end.
Specifically, it is preferable that the output for preventing entanglement is continued for at least 3 seconds.
Further, if the power is turned off while the squeeze prevention is being output, the squeeze prevention is not output when the power is restored. If the power is turned off while the entanglement prevention is being output and then the power is restored, the above-mentioned predetermined timer value is cleared (cleared).

Therefore, even if the specification shifts from step S978 to S979 when the operation switch is operated, if the predetermined timer value is not "0" at the time when the operation switch is operated, the step Continue to output the squeeze prevention of S978. Then, when the predetermined timer value becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S979.
Further, even if the predetermined timer value becomes "0" after the output of the entanglement prevention in step S978 is started, if the operation switch is not operated, the entanglement prevention output may be maintained, or , You may switch to the demo screen such as displaying the logo mark of the game machine maker.

Further, when the 1BB game is completed, the main control board 50 executes a wait process (also referred to as “freeze process” or “standby process”) for about 1 second. During the period during which this wait process is being executed, no matter which operation switch is operated, control based on that operation is not executed. Further, the blocker 45 is controlled so that the medals are returned even if the medals are inserted during the period during which the weight processing is being executed. The control of the main control board 50 is different from the control of the sub control board 80 because the power is cut off during the execution of the wait process (for example, "0.3" seconds after the start of the wait process). If the power is restored after that (when the power is restored without shifting to the setting change mode), the wait process is continuously executed. The timer managed on the main control board 50 side is not cleared when the power is turned off during the wait process and then the power is restored (power restoration without shifting to the setting change mode). On the other hand, when the power is restored to shift to the setting change mode, the timer value for wait processing is cleared.

By controlling as described above, the output for preventing entanglement is secured for a certain period of time, so that the player can be surely shown the image display for preventing entanglement.
The weight processing by the main control board 50 is about 1 second, and when the output for preventing entanglement is about 3 seconds, the operation of the operation switch is effective when the weight processing is completed even during the output for preventing entanglement. become. Therefore, when the operation switch is operated immediately after the end of the wait process, the next effect may be executed while continuing the output of the entanglement prevention. For example, after starting the output of the entanglement prevention in step S978, the wait processing by the main control board 50 ends, the operation switch becomes effective, and for example, the AT revival effect of step S980 is output based on the operation of the bet switch 40. In such a case, the AT revival effect is output while the immersive prevention is output.

In the 23rd embodiment, the output for preventing entanglement is conditional on the output of the AT end effect. Therefore, in the case of "Yes" in step S975, since the AT end effect is not output (since step S976 is not executed), the immersive prevention display is not output either.

As described above, when the player is notified of the continuation of the next AT at the end of one set of ATs (when the player knows the continuation of the AT), the immersive prevention output is not executed. In other cases, the entanglement prevention is output on condition that the AT end screen is output, so that the continuation of the AT cannot be determined from the presence or absence of the entanglement prevention output.
In other words, if the AT is terminated when the entanglement prevention is output and the AT is not terminated unless the entanglement prevention is output, the continuation of the AT can be known depending on the presence or absence of the entanglement prevention output.
Further, when the player knows the continuation of the AT, even if the output for preventing the entanglement is output, the effect is small, so that there is an effect that unnecessary output is not required.

(2) Output of confrontation production (variation of output timing at the end of production)
In the 23rd embodiment, a confrontation effect may be output during the AT as an effect indicating whether or not the AT will continue next time.
The confrontation effect of the 23rd embodiment is an effect indicating that the main character and the enemy character confront each other, and if the main character wins, the AT will continue next time. Here, when the main character outputs a winning effect, it means that the above-mentioned AT continuation notification is output, and the AT continuation notification flag is turned on. On the other hand, if the enemy character wins, it is not certain that the AT will continue next time. However, even if the enemy character wins, it does not mean that the AT will end in this set. If the enemy character wins, the AT continuation notification flag is not turned on at that time.

In the game of outputting the confrontation effect (the effect indicating whether or not the main character wins) in the case of outputting the confrontation effect, the output timing of the effect is controlled as follows.
First, in a game that outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character wins, the timer measurement is started when the start switch 41 is operated. The timer is measured by the timer on the sub-main board of the sub-control board 80. In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 includes a sub-main board and an image control board (sub-sub-board) that is a lower level of the sub-main board and is specialized for controlling the image display device 23. Be prepared.

Next, the sub-main board of the sub-control board 80 receives a command from the main control board 50 indicating that all reels 31 have stopped. The sub-main board determines whether or not the timer value has passed 10 seconds, and when it determines that 10 seconds have passed, the sub-sub board is given a command to allow image progress (whether or not the main character wins). Or, in other words, a command that allows the output of the ending of the confrontation effect) is sent. When the sub-sub board receives the command, the sub-sub board outputs an effect indicating whether or not the main character wins.
On the other hand, when a command indicating that all reels 31 have stopped is received and the timer value does not elapse 10 seconds, the process waits until the timer value elapses 10 seconds. Then, when the timer value elapses for 10 seconds, the sub-main board transmits the above command to the sub-sub board.
Note that "10 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as 5 seconds and 15 seconds can be set.

FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the control of the confrontation effect output.
First, in step S991, it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When the start switch 41 is operated, a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (sub-main board). Therefore, when the command is received, the command is transmitted. , It is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S992.
Here, when the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the start switch 41 has been operated, it selects the effect to be output in the game this time, and transmits the command corresponding to the selected effect to the sub-sub board. The sub-sub board controls the output of the effect based on the received command (command corresponding to the effect). When the sub-main board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated from the main control board 50, the sub-main board transmits a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated to the sub-sub board. When the sub-sub board receives a command indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the sub-sub board switches the effect as necessary (it may not switch depending on the content of the effect).

In step S992, it is determined whether or not the game is a game that outputs the ending of the confrontation effect. This process has already output the confrontation effect before the previous game, and determines whether or not this game corresponds to a game that outputs an effect indicating the end of the confrontation effect. When it is determined that the game outputs the end of the confrontation effect, the process proceeds to step S993, and when it is determined that the game does not output the end of the confrontation effect, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S993, the sub-main board sets the timer value. Then, the timer value is subtracted for each interrupt process. For example, assuming that the interrupt period of the sub-main board is 1 ms, "10000 (D)" is set as the timer value, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt process. Then, the process proceeds to step S994.
In step S994, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. When all reels 31 are stopped, a command (hereinafter, referred to as "all reel stop command") indicating that all reels 31 are stopped is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (sub-main board). Therefore, when the command to stop all reels is received, it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that the all reel stop command has been received, the process proceeds to step S995.

The determination of whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped in the main process is executed in step S289 of FIG. 139.
Here, the following patterns can be mentioned as determining that all reels 31 have stopped.
(1) When the level data of the stop switch 42 that has been finally stopped is off.
(2) When the level data of all stop switches 42 is off.
(3) When the level data of all the stop switches 42 is off and the level data of the other switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, and settlement switch 43) are off.
(4) In addition to any of the above (1) to (3), when the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is information (“0”) indicating a stop for all reels 31.
Then, in the 23rd embodiment, when the above conditions (2) + (4) are satisfied, the main control board 50 determines that all reels 31 have stopped, and transmits a command to stop all reels to the sub-main board. ..

In step S995, it is determined whether or not the timer value has become "0". When it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it waits until it is determined that the timer value is "0". Then, when it is determined that the timer value has reached "0", the process proceeds to step S996. In step S996, the sub-main board transmits a command to the sub-sub board to allow the output of the ending of the confrontation effect. When the sub-sub board receives the command, it outputs the end of the confrontation effect. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As described above, when the timer value is "0" when the all reel stop command is received (when 10 seconds or more have passed since the start switch 41 was operated), the confrontation occurs after receiving the all reel stop command. The ending of the production is output. On the other hand, if the timer value is not "0" when the all reel stop command is received, wait for the timer value to become "0" even after receiving the all reel stop command. The ending of the confrontation production is output.
In the 23rd embodiment, even after the timer value becomes "0", the end of the confrontation effect is not output until the command to stop all reels is received, but the timer value is not limited to "0". When becomes, the ending of the confrontation effect may be output even before the command to stop all reels is received.

As described above, the all reel stop command is main when the level data of all stop switches 42 is off and the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) for all reels 31 is information indicating stop. It is configured to be transmitted from the control board 50 to the sub-main board.
As a result, in the game that outputs the ending of the confrontation effect, the player presses and holds the last stop switch 42 (meaning the last operated (operated) stop switch 42; the same applies hereinafter) and releases the timing. (However, it is a condition that 10 seconds have passed since the start switch 41 was operated), and it is possible to output the ending of the confrontation effect.
Therefore, if the player who does not want to see the ending of the confrontation effect immediately keeps pressing the last stop switch 42 (unless he releases his hand), the end of the confrontation effect is not output. Then, at the timing when the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, the ending of the confrontation effect can be output.
On the other hand, the present invention is not limited to this, and the all reel stop command may be transmitted when the last stop switch 42 is turned on (when the rising data of the last stop switch 42 is turned on). In this way, it is possible to output the ending of the confrontation effect at the timing when the last stop switch 42 is turned on.

(3) Volume Setting In the 23rd embodiment, the volume from the speaker 22 can be set. The tone setting includes a manager (store manager) mode in which the installation manager (hall manager) of the slot machine 10 sets the tone, and a player mode in which the player playing the game in the slot machine 10 sets the tone. ..
In FIG. 162, (A) shows an image display by the image display device 23 indicating the administrator mode related to the tone setting, and (B) shows the image display by the image display device 23 indicating the player mode related to the tone setting. It is a figure which shows.

In the figure, in (A), when the power is turned on / off, the tone setting in the administrator mode can be executed by turning on the setting key switch and turning the power on / off, or the setting key. It is one of the system menus that can be executed under at least one of the setting confirmation states that can be executed by turning on the switch.
The volume that can be selected as the administrator mode is "loud", "standard", and "low" (of course, it is not limited to these three levels).
The administrator is configured to select a volume using the cross key of the slot machine 10 and press the chance button to confirm the volume.
Here, although not shown in FIG. 1, on the sub-control board 80, a cross key (also referred to as a “selection button”) and a chance button (also referred to as an “effect button” and a “decision button”) are electrically connected. Is connected. The cross key is a switch that is operated when moving the cursor position on the menu screen or the like. Further, the chance button is a switch that is operated when developing the effect, and is also used as a switch that is operated when determining the target selected on the menu screen or the like.

In the administrator mode, when the volume is changed by using the cross key, the test sound is output at the changed volume. The type of test sound may be, for example, a cursor movement sound, or a predetermined sound (pattern) may be output. For example, if the currently selected volume is "normal" and the cursor position is changed from "volume" to "loud" by operating the cross key, test with the volume corresponding to "loud". Output sound. This allows the administrator to know what the "loud" volume is. Similarly, when the cursor position is changed from "normal" to "small", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to "small". In this way, the administrator can check how much the set volume is.

The volume of the test sound is based on the volume of the predetermined effect sound. Here, the "predetermined effect sound" is, for example, a game start sound output when the start switch 41 is operated, a stop sound output when the stop switch 42 is operated, a tempai sound of a symbol combination, and a winning sound of a role ( Or payout sound), BGM sound during AT, and the like.
Therefore, for example, when the volume is set to "standard" in the administrator mode and the volume is set to "volume 3" in the player mode described later, assuming that the volume of the test sound is 80 decibels during the game, The volume of the predetermined production sound is also set to approximately 80 decibels. On the other hand, the error sound will be described later.

Further, when "large" is selected in the administrator mode, the cursor position is maintained at "large" even if the cursor position is further moved upward by the operation of the cross key. However, when "loud" is selected and the operation of moving the cursor upward is performed by operating the cross key, the test sound is output again at the volume corresponding to "loud".
Then, when any one of "loud", "standard", and "low" is selected, the chance button may be operated to confirm the volume. When any of "loud", "standard", and "low" volume is selected, "close" can be selected by moving the cursor position to the right with the cross key. If you set the cursor position to "close" and operate the chance button, you may confirm with that volume. In this case, the volume setting in the administrator mode is finished, and the system menu (not shown) is returned. Also, if the cursor position can be moved to the setting of another item (for example, energy saving mode) instead of "Close", move the cursor position to "Setting other item" and operate the chance button. Then, the volume indicated by the cursor position at that time may be confirmed. In this case, the volume setting in the administrator mode is terminated, and the setting shifts to the setting of other items (not shown).

The volume selected by the administrator mode is configured to be memorable in a predetermined area of the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. This predetermined area is configured so that it will not be erased when the setting is changed or the power is turned off. With this configuration, the hall side can omit the work of resetting the volume once the volume is set. Further, on the main control board 50 side, an unrecoverable error occurs, and even when the storage area including the set value is initialized by the clear process of the RWM 53 accompanying the setting change, the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 The predetermined region may not be initialized. In addition, when selecting the volume in the administrator mode, for example, when the cross key is set to "loud" among "loud", "standard", and "small", the predetermined area corresponds to "loud". The data to be stored may be storable, or the data corresponding to "large" may be storable in the predetermined area when the volume is determined.

After the volume is set by the administrator mode as described above, the player can set the volume during the game standby. FIG. 162 (B) illustrates the display screen (player mode) at this time.
When the cross key is operated during the game standby, for example, a menu screen is displayed (not shown in FIG. 162), and by selecting "tone setting" from the menu screen, it is possible to shift to the volume setting screen.
In the volume setting of the player mode, it can be set in five stages of "volume 1" to "volume 5". Moving the cursor with the cross key to select the volume and confirming the volume with the chance button is the same as in the administrator mode. In the administrator mode, a test sound corresponding to the selected volume is output each time the cursor is moved, but this is not performed in the player mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the test sound corresponding to the selected volume may be output in the player mode as well as in the administrator mode.

FIG. 162 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the volume setting value in the administrator mode and the volume setting value in the player mode. In the figure, for example, the volume when the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and the volume is set to "volume 5" in the player mode is set to "100" (reference value). Each numerical value shown in FIG. 162 (C) indicates a value corresponding to the volume, and is not a value indicating the decibel (dB) itself.
In the example of FIG. 162 (C), the maximum volume is "100" and the minimum volume is "20". The volume and the range between the maximum value and the minimum value in each mode are not limited to this, and can be set in various ways.
As shown in FIG. 162 (C), one of the characteristic points of the 23rd embodiment is that when the player selects "volume 1", the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode. Even if it is, the point is that the minimum volume is set to "20". In this way, when the lowest volume (volume 1) is selected in the volume setting of the player mode, the minimum volume is set regardless of the volume setting value in the administrator mode.

In other words,
a) When the volume is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and set to "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern A),
b) When the volume is set to "Standard" in the administrator mode and set to "Volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern B),
c) When the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode and set to "volume 1 (minimum volume)" in the player mode (setting pattern C), the volume of the predetermined production sound to be output. Are the same at "20".
However, not limited to this, the volume at the setting pattern A is set to "22", the volume at the setting pattern B is set to "21", the volume at the setting pattern C is set to "20", and so on. You may.
In any case, the volume of the predetermined effect sound output in the case of the setting patterns A to C is substantially the same (“substantially the same” is a concept including “same”). For example, when the maximum volume is "100", the minimum volume is set to be within the range of "± 3" based on "20".

Therefore, if the player wants to play the game at the lowest possible volume, he / she can select "Volume 1" to play the game at the minimum volume without being affected by the difference in the volume settings between the halls. Can be done.
The minimum volume "20" is set so that a player with normal hearing can hear voices such as character lines, correct answer pressing order, and "aim!" In a general hall environment (a somewhat noisy environment). The volume is audible.

As shown in FIG. 162 (C), one of the characteristic points of the 23rd embodiment is the degree of change in the volume. For example, if the volume is set to "Standard" in the administrator mode and the volume is changed from "Volume 1" to "Volume 2" in the player mode, the volume changes from "20" to "50" (increase amount "50"). 30 "). On the other hand, when the player mode is changed from "volume 4" to "volume 5", the volume changes from "80" to "90" (increase amount "10"). In this way, when the minimum volume "Volume 1" is changed to "Volume 2", the amount of increase is larger than when the volume other than "Volume 1" is changed to a volume one step higher. It is set. Therefore, by changing from the minimum volume to another volume, it is possible to immediately change to a louder volume.
In the example of FIG. 162 (C), when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, the volume is changed from "volume 1" to "volume 2" in the player mode, and "volume 2". In both cases where the volume other than "1" is changed to a volume one step higher, the amount of increase in volume is set to "5". As described above, depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode, the amount of increase is not always the largest when the player mode is changed from "volume 1" to "volume 2".
On the other hand, when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, the volume in the player mode is set to, for example,
Volume 1:20
Volume 2:30
Volume 3:35
Volume 4:40
Volume 5:45
It is also possible to set as follows so that the amount of increase is the largest when the value is changed from "volume 1" to "volume 2".

In the 23rd embodiment, if the volume is set in the administrator mode and then the volume is not set in the player mode, the volume in the player mode is set to "volume 5" by default.
Further, when the non-game time (game standby state) continues for 10 minutes, the volume setting up to that point in the player mode is cleared, and the default "volume 5" is restored. This is to return the volume to the default when the players are replaced. Therefore, the default player mode may be "volume 3" or the like.
Further, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on / off, the volume of the player mode is set to the default "volume 5".
On the other hand, the volume in the administrator mode is maintained at the previous value unless it is reset. For example, when the volume is set to "low" in the administrator mode, the volume is maintained "low" even after the power is turned on / off, the setting is changed, and the setting is confirmed.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing control of the volume setting in the administrator mode.
First, in step S1001, the current volume is read. For example, "0" for "small", "1" for "standard", and "2" for "large" are stored in a predetermined area of the RWM83, and this volume setting data is read. Next, the process proceeds to step S1002, and the current volume is displayed as an image. For example, when the volume data stored in the RWM 83 is "1", an image is displayed indicating that the current set value is "standard" as in the example of FIG. 162 (A).
Next, the process proceeds to step S1003, and it is determined whether or not the cross key has been operated. When it is determined that the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1004, and when it is determined that the operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the volume setting can be changed. For example, when the current volume setting is "standard" and the cross key selects a higher level, it is determined that the volume setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the current volume setting is "loud" and a higher value is selected by the cross key, it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed. When it is determined that the volume setting can be changed, the process proceeds to step S1005, and when it is determined that the volume setting cannot be changed, the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1005, the volume setting value is updated. As described above, when the current volume setting is "standard" and the cross key selects further up, the volume setting is updated to "loud". Then, the process proceeds to step S1006.

In step S1006, a test sound is output at the volume of the current setting. As described above, for example, when the volume is changed from "standard" to "loud", the test sound is output at the volume corresponding to the changed "loud". On the other hand, for example, when the current volume is set to "loud" and a higher volume is selected with the cross key (when "No" in step S1004), the current volume is "loud". Output the test sound at the volume corresponding to.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether or not the chance button has been operated. When it is determined that the chance button has been operated, the process according to this flowchart (volume setting by the administrator mode) is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance button has not been operated, the process returns to step S1003.

The above volume setting is for a predetermined effect sound. On the other hand, the volume of the error (recoverable error and non-recoverable error) sound is fixed and is configured not to change depending on the volume setting in the administrator mode or the player mode described above. For example, a person who performs a goto act may set the volume to the minimum volume in the player mode described above before performing the goto act.
For example, the error sound may be uniformly set to a volume corresponding to "100" when it is set to "loud" in the administrator mode and set to "volume 5" in the player mode (). For example, the error sound is uniformly set to "90" decibels, etc.).
However, not limited to this, the volume of the error sound cannot be changed in the player mode, but the volume of the error sound may be set in the administrator mode. However, even if the error sound is set to the lowest volume in the administrator mode, the error sound is set to a volume sufficient to reach the surroundings.
Further, when the volume (“loud”, “standard”, “low”) is set in the administrator mode shown in FIG. 162 (A), the volume of the error sound also changes (“loud”, “standard”, “low”) at the same time. The volume may be changed according to the above. Alternatively, in the administrator mode, a dedicated menu screen for setting the volume of the error sound may be provided.

(4) Effect when 1BB symbol combination is tempted When 1BB is tempted, the sub-control board 80 outputs a flash (light emission by the effect lamp 21) and a tempai sound (sound from the speaker 22). The flash and tempai sounds are executed regardless of whether or not the transition condition to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB operation) is satisfied. As a result, the player can know the fact that 1BB is tempted even when 1BB is tempted by chance when the game is casually progressing.

Further, as described above, in the case where 1BB is tempered, when the transition condition to the main gaming state 4 is satisfied, the standby operation of the third reel 31 is not accepted even if the third stop switch 42 is operated. Although the time is not set, when the transition condition to the main game state 4 is not satisfied, the waiting time is set (steps S809 to S810 in FIG. 147). As a result, it is possible to prevent 1BB from winning a prize due to an unexpected stop operation of the player.

Also, if you meet the conditions for transition to AT, aim for "Blue BAR" as described above! Is displayed as an image, and the voice "Aim" is also output.
Here, since there are many cases where the transition condition to the main game state 4 is not satisfied during the game, when the flash and the tempai sound described above are output every time 1BB is tempted, the player is asked. It is also possible to recognize that the flash and tempai sounds are effects for avoiding winning 1BB.
However, if the conditions for transition to the main game state 4 are met, aim for "Blue BAR"! Since the image display of "" and the voice of "aim" are output, the player may recognize that 1BB may be won in this game even if the flash and the tempai sound are output at the same time. it can.

When 1BB is tempted, a flash and tempai sound are output when the transition condition to the main game state 4 is not satisfied, and these flashes and tempai are output when the transition condition to the main game state 4 is satisfied. It is conceivable that no sound is output. However, since the effect of not stopping the symbol combination is not permitted by the rules, in the 23rd embodiment, when 1BB is tempered, it does not matter whether or not the transition condition to the main game state 4 is satisfied. Instead, the flash and tempai sounds are output uniformly.

(5) Effect during 1BB game (when the AT start condition is satisfied / not satisfied) When the sub-control board 80 satisfies the transition condition to the main game state 4, the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed. At that time, AT (1BB game) is started from the next game.
In the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), before winning the SRB, when the small winning combination A group (winning numbers "10" to "15") is won, the correct answer pressing order is notified. Examples of the notification method include displaying an image of the correct pressing order and outputting by voice which stop switch 42 is to be operated next.
On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), even if the small winning combination B group (winning numbers "16" to "21") is won before winning the SRB, the correct answer is pushed. Do not notify the order. This is because there is no correct push order (push order for winning a higher bell) even if the small winning combination B group is won in a game that has not won the SRB (see FIG. 125).

Then, in the case of shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game), when the SRB is won and the inside of the SRB is inside, both when the small role A group is won and when the small role B group is won. , Notify the correct answer pressing order. The SRB win will be carried over to the next game, so when you first win the SRB. After the next game of the game that won the SRB, the correct answer push order will be notified when the small role B group is won.

On the other hand, even when the condition for shifting to the main game state 4 (AT, 1BB game) is not satisfied, when the symbol combination of 1BB is stopped and displayed, the 1BB game is started. However, even if 1BB wins, the main gaming state does not shift. Therefore, for example, when 1BB wins in RT1 and main gaming state 1, 1BB operates and main gaming state 1 occurs.

When the game shifts to the 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the main control board 50 does not activate the instruction function, and the sub control board 80 does not execute AT. Therefore, even when a small winning combination having a correct answer pressing order (small winning combination A group in non-internal SRB, small winning combination A group and small winning combination B group in SRB internal) is won, the pressing order is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The instruction number is not displayed, and the correct answer pressing order is not notified by the effect output device such as the image display device 23.
Further, when the game shifts to the 1BB game without shifting to the main game state 4, the sub control board 80 maintains the normal effect content (the effect content up to that point) during non-AT. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it feels like the normal game (non-AT, non-special game) is continuing even during the 1BB game.

(6) Display of the number of games played in RT1 (non-AT) As described above, the number of games played in RT1 is counted, and when the number of games played in RT1 reaches "1400", it is determined that the end condition of RT1 is satisfied. Move to non-RT.
RT1 starts at the end of 1BB operation (end of AT). Therefore, the number of games played by RT1 is substantially the number of non-AT games played.
Then, in the 23rd embodiment, the number of non-AT games is displayed as an image by the image display device 23. As a result, the player can easily know how many games have passed since the non-AT. In addition, it is possible to easily know how many games are left until the so-called ceiling "1400" game (game until the transition to non-RT) is reached.

In addition, although the advantageous section may be terminated during RT1 and the transition to the non-advantageous section may occur, the number of games of RT1 (“_CT_RT_GAME” of the address “F00A (H)”) is not cleared at the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, even when the section shifts from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section during RT1, the number of games of RT1 is maintained and is continuously counted even after the transition to the non-advantageous section. The same applies when shifting from this non-advantageous section to an advantageous section.

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 is the RWM83 of the sub-control board 80 without using the data of the number of RT games "_CT_RT_GAME" of the address "F00A (H)". I remember in. At the end of 1BB operation, the initial value "0" is set as the number of non-AT games (increment counter) in the RWM 83, the number of games is updated according to the digestion of the game, and the number of non-AT games is stored in the image display device 23. To do.
However, when the power is turned on / off, the sub-control board 80 initializes a predetermined area of the RWM 83 when returning from the power off, regardless of whether the setting change process is executed or not. The data of the number of AT games is also initialized (cleared). Therefore, when returning from the power failure, the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 becomes "0".
Further, on the menu screen capable of displaying the specifications of the game machine, the game history, etc., the number of non-AT games can be displayed as one of the game histories, and the number of games is the number of games displayed as an image on the image display device 23. (Displayed based on the data of the number of non-AT games stored in RWM83). Therefore, when the power is turned on / off, the number of non-AT games displayed on the menu screen is also "0".

Therefore, for example, when the number of RT1 games "_CT_RT_GAME" on the RWM53 (main control board 50 side) is "100" and the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 is "100", the power is turned on. When / is turned off, the number of games "_CT_RT_GAME" of RT1 is maintained at "100", but becomes "0" displayed on the image display device 23. Next, when the first first game is executed, the number of games of RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" is updated to "101", and the number of games displayed on the image display device 23 is updated to "1". In this way, when the power is turned on / off, the number of RT1 games "_CT_RT_GAME" in the RWM 53 and the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 (the number of games stored in the RWM 83) are displayed. It will be different. With this configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp how many games are left to the ceiling in the morning (when the hall is opened).

Further, in the 23rd embodiment, the RT status number "_NB_RT_STS" and the number of games of RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" are not cleared even when the setting change process is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the setting change process is executed, the number of games of RT1 "_CT_RT_GAME" may be cleared. If the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" is cleared when the setting change process is executed, the data of the RT1 game count "_CT_RT_GAME" after the setting change process and the number of non-AT games displayed on the image display device 23 will be displayed. Will match. With this configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the number of games played from the number of games played in the morning (when the hall is opened) to the number of games played until reaching the ceiling, so whether or not the player plays the game on the platform in the morning. It can be motivated (used as a judgment material).

Although the 23rd embodiment has been described above, the 23rd embodiment is not limited to the above contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) When the small winning combination A group was elected, the winning combination had the correct answer pushing order during 1BB operation, and the small winning combination B group had the correct answer pushing order during 1BB operation and inside the SRB. However, not limited to this, the small winning combination B group may also have a correct answer pressing order (regardless of whether or not it is inside the SRB) during 1BB operation, as in the small winning combination A group.
On the contrary, the small winning combination A group may also have a correct answer pushing order only during 1BB operation and inside the SRB, as in the small winning combination B group.

(2) The ball output rates when 1BB is not operated, when non-AT and 1BB are operated, and when AT and 1BB are operated are examples, and are not limited to the above embodiment. However, in order to prevent the transition to 1BB operation (1BB game) even though the AT has not been won, the ball output rate during non-AT and 1BB operation is preferably less than "1". ..
On the other hand, when 1BB is activated, even if it is not AT, by setting the ball ejection rate higher than when 1BB is not operating, a gaming machine that "1BB is activated, which is advantageous to the player". Will meet the principle of.

(3) In the above embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed during non-AT and 1BB operation, or during AT and 1BB operation, but the AT lottery is not limited to this, and the AT lottery is performed even during non-AT and 1BB operation. You may do it. However, in order to prevent the 1BB operation from being easily performed during non-AT, it is preferable to set the AT winning probability during non-AT and 1BB operation to be lower than the AT winning probability when 1BB is not operated.
Further, during AT and 1BB operation, it is possible to execute an additional lottery for the number of AT sets.

(4) In the 23rd embodiment, it is premised that the game is digested without winning the SRB, even if the inside of the SRB is inside the AT and 1BB is in operation. This is because if the SRB is won and the game shifts to the RB game, the ball output rate will decrease.
Here, when the AT and 1BB are operated and the SRB is tempered inside the SRB, the waiting time may be set by using the process shown in FIG. 147 in order to avoid winning the SRB.
On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the 1BB game without having the right to execute AT, when the SRB is won, the process (setting of the waiting time) for avoiding the winning of the SRB even if the SRB is tempted. ) Does not have to be executed.
Further, when the AT and 1BB are activated and the SRB is tempered inside the SRB, the player may be alerted by flash or sound output in the same manner as when the 1BB is tempered.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied, the waiting time when 1BB is tempered is set to "896 (D)" (about 1000 ms). The reason is that the time for one rotation of the reel 31 at a constant speed is "1.117 × 2 × 336 = about 750 ms", so that the standby time is set longer than the one rotation time of the reel 31. .. With this setting, after operating the second stop switch 42, when the symbol of "blue BAR" on the third reel 31 first reaches the effective line, the waiting time has not yet elapsed. Even if the third stop switch 42 is operated at the timing, it is possible to avoid winning 1BB.
However, not limited to this, the waiting time can be set arbitrarily. For example, in order to secure a sufficient time to avoid winning 1BB, it may be set to about 3 seconds.

(6) In the example of the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) of FIG. 147, the standby time was stored in step S810 on condition that it was determined that the stop operation of the second stop switch 42 was performed in step S801. In this case, the determination in step S802 is that when the second stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when 1BB is tempered, it is determined as "Yes", and when the second reel 31 is actually stopped and 1BB is actually tempered. There are two methods of determining "Yes" when the result is obtained, but any of the methods may be used.
For example, in step S802, when the second reel 31 is determined to be "Yes" before actually stopping, the second reel 31 has not yet stopped at the time of step S810, and the second reel 31 has not stopped yet. This may be the case when it has already stopped.

(7) The fact that the standby time is set at the time of tempai of 1BB and the third reel 31 is not stopped during the standby time can also be used in the specifications inside 1BB.
Here, the "1BB internal medium spec" means that the game is executed while carrying over the 1BB winning, and both the non-AT and the AT are executed while being inside the 1BB. In the case of 1BB internal medium spec, it is premised that the game proceeds without winning 1BB. In such a case, the waiting time is set as shown in step S810 of FIG. 147, and if the waiting time has not elapsed as shown in step S791 of FIG. 146, the process does not shift to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET). For example, it is possible to effectively suppress the transition from the inside of the 1BB to the 1BB operating state.

(8) The standby effect was performed by rotating the reel 31 in the reverse direction. However, the rotation direction of the reel 31 in the standby effect is not limited to this, and may be a forward rotation. When the standby effect is executed in the forward rotation (when the specification is such that the reel 31 is not rotated in the reverse direction), the storage area of the search counter update correction data of the address "F09F (H)" in FIG. The process of step S823 (storage of the search counter update correction data) and the process of step S933 (correction of the number of deceleration start steps) in FIG. 159 become unnecessary.
However, if the standby effect is performed in the reverse rotation, the player can easily recognize the standby effect. Further, even if the standby effect is performed in the forward rotation, the player can easily recognize that the standby effect is a standby effect if the standby effect is executed at a rotation speed different from the rotation speed of the normal game.
Further, in the standby effect, the reel effect data table shown in FIG. 144 is used to set in advance which symbol number to stop for each reel 31, so that the stop position of the reel 31 before the standby effect does not matter. is there. In other words, even if the stop rolls before the execution of the standby effect (previous game) are different, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "black BAR" alignment) is stopped and displayed by the standby effect. That is, it is not necessary to stop the preparation eyes in the previous game of the game in which the standby effect is executed.

The entanglement prevention output of (9) is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and may be executed even when, for example, an AT continuous notification is output. Alternatively, the immersive prevention output may be executed even when the AT end effect is not output.

(10) In the confrontation effect output control shown in FIG. 161, in this example, the timer value is set based on the operation of the start switch 41 (steps S991 and S993). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer value may be set (the timer may be counted) based on the operation of another operation switch, for example, the bet switch 40 or the first or second stop switch 42.
Also, instead of setting the timer value (starting the timer count) when any of the operation switches is operated, even if the timer count is started from a predetermined timing after the operation switch is operated. Good.

For example, first, when the operation switch is the bet switch 40, the timer may start counting one second after the bet switch 40 is operated.
Secondly, when the operation switch is the start switch 41, the timer may be started counting at the timing when the output of the effect of the game is started this time after the start switch 41 is operated.
Thirdly, when the operation switch is the first or second stop switch 42, the reel 31 corresponding to the first or second stop switch 42 is stopped, or the first or second stop switch 42 is operated. The timer count may be started at the timing when the effect based on is started.

(11) Further, as the timing to output the end of the confrontation effect, in the 23rd embodiment, when the timer value is "0", when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off (hands are released). When it was done). However, not limited to this, when another (operated) stop switch 42 is operated before the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, even if the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off. The ending of the confrontation production may not be output. For example, while the player himself keeps pressing the third stop switch 42 so as not to output the ending of the confrontation effect, the next player (friend) mischievously operates another stop switch 42. It is possible to provide a new game in which the production ending is not output.

(12) Furthermore, in a game that outputs the ending of the confrontation effect, when the payout process is executed based on the fact that the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off and a hopper error (no medal) occurs, The output of the production ending is interrupted, and the continuation of the production ending is output after the hopper error is cleared, or the production ending is output again from the beginning after the hopper error is cleared.
Further, when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off immediately before the timer value becomes "0" and the payout process is executed, the timer is measured even during the payout process. Therefore, when the timer value becomes "0" during the payout process, the effect ending is output based on the timer value becoming "0" (regardless of whether the payout process is completed). Will be done.

(13) Further, in the game of outputting the ending of the confrontation effect, the output of the effect ending is started based on the fact that the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, but the output is not limited to this, and the third stop switch 42 is not limited to this. When is turned on, or when the third stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, for example, a push button (sub button) icon is displayed as an image (at this point, the production ending is not output), and the push button is displayed. The production ending may be output when is operated.

(14) In the example of FIG. 132, in the main game state 5 (AT pullback), when the AT pullback counter is "0" and the advantageous section clear counter is less than "600", the game shifts to the main game state 0. I made it. However, not limited to this, when the AT pullback counter becomes "0" in the main game state 5, the advantageous section clear counter is cleared and the main game state shifts to 0 regardless of the value of the advantageous section clear counter. You may. Further, in the case of high accuracy in the main game state 1, even if the advantageous section clear counter becomes less than "600", the main game state 1 may not be ended (it does not shift to the main game state 0).
(15) In the 23rd embodiment, since the number of reels 31 is 3, in step S801 of FIG. 147, it is determined whether or not the reels are after the second stop. However, not limited to this, when the reels 31 are composed of four reels 31 as shown in FIG. 59 (13th embodiment), in step S801 of FIG. 147, it is determined whether or not it is after the third stop. It will be.

(16) In the 23rd embodiment, the volume setting in the administrator mode is set to 3 steps, but the volume setting is not limited to this, and may be any number of steps (for example, 5 steps, 10 steps, etc.). Further, although the volume setting in the player mode is set to 5 steps, the volume setting is not limited to this, and any number of steps (for example, 3 steps, 10 steps, etc.) may be set.
(17) The numerical values (set values, timer values, etc.) given in the 23rd embodiment are all examples and do not mean that they are limited to these values.
(18) The 23rd embodiment can be implemented alone or in combination with other 1st to 22nd embodiments.

<24th Embodiment>
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a hardware configuration of the main CPU 55 in the slot machine 10 of FIG.
Further, FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the structures of ROM 54 and RWM 53 in FIG. 164 in more detail.
In the 24th embodiment, when the address of the built-in memory or the data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 is expressed in hexadecimal, "(H)" (an acronym for "hexadecimal") indicating the hexadecimal number is added. ..

In FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 includes a one-chip microprocessor (MPU) (hereinafter, if necessary, simply referred to as a “chip”), and inside the main CPU 55, an ALU (arithmetic logic unit) 55d and an internal memory. (Not limited to these). Unless otherwise specified, the term "internal memory" refers to user memory.
The main CPU 55 executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, and the like. Specifically, control processing of inserted medals, lottery processing of winning combinations, drive control processing of reels 31, payout processing at the time of winning, and the like are executed.

The ALU55d is an arithmetic unit that executes logical operations, four arithmetic operations, and the like among the main CPU 55. Further, as shown in FIG. 164, the internal bus (including the address bus, the data bus, and the control bus) 55a in the main CPU 55 is connected to the ALU55d, and the internal bus 55a and a predetermined storage area in the internal memory are connected to each other. linked. Here, "connecting" means forming a route through which information can be communicated (the same applies hereinafter). The entire storage area of the internal memory may be connected to the internal bus 55a, or a part of the storage area of the internal memory (excluding the storage area having confidentiality) may be connected to the internal bus 55a. You may be.

When a predetermined storage area in the internal memory is connected to the internal bus 55a and ALU55d, the information stored in the predetermined storage area is output (transmitted) to the outside by a program executed by the main CPU 55. It is possible.
The above-mentioned "program executed by the main CPU 55" is a program stored in the built-in memory (for example, ROM 54) in the main CPU 55 or stored outside the main CPU 55 (slot machine 10), but is stored by the main CPU 55. Includes both cases where the program is configured to run.

Although not shown in FIG. 164, the memory area of the main CPU 55 is divided into a boot area and a user area. The boot area is a storage area used by the manufacturer of the chip, and may include a boot ROM, a boot RWM, and the like.
For example, the boot ROM may contain a program for checking security, a program for diagnosing a failure, a program for executing authentication and verification, and the like. Further, the boot RWM may be used as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.) of the boot program.

The user area is a storage area used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 (however, not all of the user area is used by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10), and the (built-in) ROM 54 and the (built-in) RWM 53. , Built-in register area 56, decoding area 57, and the like. The ROM, RWM, and other storage means may be provided outside the 1-chip microprocessor (on the main control board 50) in addition to those provided inside the 1-chip microprocessor.

As shown in FIG. 164, the user area of the built-in memory is composed of the storage areas of the addresses "0000 (H)" to "FFFF (H)". Here, the "1" address in the user area has a storage capacity of "1" bytes. Therefore, the entire user area is "65536" bytes.
The addresses of the ROM 54 of the user area and the unused area following it, the RWM53 and the unused area following it, the built-in register area 56 and the unused area following it, the decode area 57 and the unused area following it are in the user area. Is continuous.
In the user area, the storage capacity of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 164 and 165 and the storage capacity of each area are examples, and the storage capacity is not limited thereto.

The ROM 54 is a storage area for storing a program (user program) created by the user, that is, the manufacturer of the slot machine 10.
The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to about "12 Kbytes" in this embodiment, and has a continuous storage area of addresses "0000 (H)" to "2FFF (H)".
As shown in FIG. 165, the storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and an outside used area. Further, both the used area and the outside of the used area have a control area and a data area. The control area of the used area may be referred to as a first control area, and the control area outside the used area may be referred to as a second control area.

The “used area” refers to a storage area in which information other than the information necessary for preventing unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or will be stored (the same applies to the ROM 54 and RWM 53).
The "control area" refers to a storage area other than the data area in the used area, and is an area in which various programs executed by the main control board 50 are stored. The control area may be referred to as a "program area". Specifically, a program related to the progress and production of the game (a program for executing the main process (for example, FIG. 41) and the interrupt process (for example, FIG. 53)) is stored. Therefore, the program instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 to be described later are stored in the control area in the used area of the ROM 54.
Furthermore, the "data area" refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored or is to be stored, and is an area in which data used when the program is executed is stored. is there.

Further, in the control area (second control area) outside the use area, a program not related to the progress of the game, for example, a program for lighting and controlling the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), a program used at the time of the test, and a program used at the time of the test, and Programs for fraud prevention are stored.
The program management area of the ROM 54 is an area for storing information and the like necessary for the main CPU 55 to execute the user program. The header, maker code, product code, program code end address, etc. are stored in the program management area.

The RWM 53 is used as a work area of the user program. The RWM 53 has a backup function, and can retain the information stored in the RWM 53 even after the power of the chip (slot machine 10) is turned off.
As shown in FIG. 165, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and an outside of the used area, similarly to the ROM 54. Further, both the used area and the outside of the used area have a work area and a stack area, respectively.
The work area in the used area of the RWM 53 is a storage area for storing data necessary for the game, as shown in, for example, FIG. 35 (11th embodiment) and FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment). (Note that in FIG. 35, a part of the data storage area relating to the advantageous section overlaps with that of FIG. 138).

Further, of the used area of the RWM53, the stack area is used when saving the value of the register and then returning the value to the register again, or when executing a predetermined instruction after executing the instruction. This area is used to store the caller's address (which may also be called the return address or return address) to be returned.
Furthermore, in the work area outside the use area of the RWM53, data for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), specifically, a ring buffer, a game count counter, a payout counter, and a ratio data. Etc. have a storage area.
The storage capacity of the RWM 53 is set to about "1 Kbyte" in the 24th embodiment, and has a storage area of addresses "F000 (H)" to "F3FF (H)".

Here, as shown in FIG. 165, in the used area of RWM53, the working area has a range of addresses “F00 (H)” to “F1CF (H)”, but is shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment) and FIG. As shown in FIGS. 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), most of the storage areas for storing the data necessary for the progress of the game are the storage areas having the upper address "F0 (H)".
On the other hand, the data storage area for displaying the ratio on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is a storage area whose upper address is "F2 (H)".

In FIG. 164, the built-in register area 56 continuous from the RWM 53 across an unused area has a storage area of addresses “FE00 (H)” to “FEBF (H)” in the present embodiment, and in the 24th embodiment, it has a storage area. It has a storage capacity of "192 bytes".
Further, the decoding area 57 continuous from the built-in register area 56 with an unused area separated from the built-in register area 56 is a storage area composed of "46 bytes" of the addresses "FED0 (H)" to "FEFD (H)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 55 is provided with a general-purpose register area (storage area). The general-purpose register area may be provided outside the built-in memory, or may be provided in the built-in memory, for example, in the built-in register area 56.
The registers provided in the general-purpose register area are composed of A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, F register, H register, L register, and Q register (1 byte each) (however, 1 byte each). The types of registers are not limited to this). Examples of other general-purpose registers include SP (stack pointer), but the description thereof will be omitted in the 24th embodiment.

The ROM 54, RWM 53, built-in register area 56, decode area 57, and general-purpose register described above are connected to the internal bus 55a and can be accessed by a program (main program) executed by the main CPU 55. Therefore, the information stored in the ROM 54 can be read by the main program. In addition, the main program can read the information stored in the RWM 53 and write the information to the RWM 53. Furthermore, the information in the built-in register area 56 can be read by the main program (however, it is limited to a part of the area). Further, the main program can read the information in the decoding area 57 and write the information to the decoding area 57. Similarly, the main program can read register information and write information to the register.

Further, even if data is stored in the registers when the power switch 11 is turned off, these register values are initialized to "0" when the power switch 11 is turned on.
In the 24th embodiment, when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the Q register value at the time of turning on the power is "0 (H)", but from immediately after the power is turned on until the user program is started. The initial value "F0 (H)" is stored in the Q register at a predetermined timing between.

Furthermore, when the power switch 11 is turned on after the power is turned off, the unused area of the user area is initialized. Here, it is conceivable that data may be stored due to noise or the like even in an unused area. In the unlikely event that the value is stored in the unused area, it may lead to fraud. For these reasons, the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day).

FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the register in detail. In the figure, (A) shows A to F, H, L, and Q registers.
In the main CPU 55 of the present embodiment, A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (7 registers) can be used as registers for temporarily storing data at the time of calculation. The F register is a flag register having a carry flag and a zero flag. Furthermore, as described above, the Q register is a register in which the upper address "F0 (H)" of the work area is stored in the used area of the RWM53 and used at the time of instruction.
Here, the A register and the F register, the B register and the C register, the D register and the E register, and the H register and the L register are referred to as pair registers, respectively. The F register is a register for storing the value of a specific flag, and the 2-byte value is not stored in the AF register together with the A register.

The A register is used to store a 1-byte value. For example, the A register is used in the process shown in step S772 of FIG. 141 (23rd embodiment).
On the other hand, the BC register, the DE register, and the HL register may store 2-byte data as a pair register. Here, when 2-byte data is stored in the BC register, the B register is higher and the C register is lower. Similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the DE register, the D register is higher and the E register is lower. Similarly, when 2-byte data is stored in the HL register, the H register is higher and the L register is lower.

For example, as an example of storing 2-byte data in the BC register, in step S831 of FIG. 143 (23rd embodiment), when the 2-byte waiting process of the effect end waiting time is executed, the effect end waiting time (2 bytes) An example is given in which data) is stored in a BC register.
Even when storing 1-byte data, a pair register may be used. For example, in step S395 of FIG. 49 (11th embodiment), in order to store the interrupt processing number “46”, “0000000 (B)” is stored in the B register and “00101110 (B)” (46 (D)) is stored in the C register. ) Corresponds to). Even if it is 1-byte data, the data is stored in the pair register consisting of 2 bytes in order to divert the 2-byte wait processing program.

On the other hand, the BC register is not always used as a pair register, but may be used alone. For example, as shown in step S497 of FIG. 55 (11th embodiment), there is an example in which the error number display data is stored in the B register and the bet display data is stored in the C register.
The same applies to the DE register and the HL register.

The F register is called a flag register. FIG. 166 (B) is a diagram showing the structure of the F register.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the “D0” bit (least significant bit) of the F register is set in the carry flag (C). Here, the "carry flag (C)" is a flag that becomes "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also referred to as a digit overflow) occurs due to an operation.
In this embodiment, the carry flag may be abbreviated as "C". In the present embodiment, the term "C" means a carry flag and does not mean a C register. When referring to the C register, it is called "C register". However, in the instructions described later, the BC register may be referred to as "BC".
Further, in the instruction described later, "C" means "when the carry flag becomes" 1 "(when carry occurs)". On the other hand, "NC" means "when the carry flag is not" 1 "(when carry does not occur)".

For example, in step S434 of FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), the carry flag changes according to the comparison operation between the HL register value (difference counter value) and “2401 (D)”. In step S434 of FIG. 51, in the comparison operation between the HL register value and “2401 (D)”, a process of subtracting “2401 (D)” from the HL register value is executed. Therefore, when the HL register value is "2400 (D)" or less, the carry flag becomes "1", and when the HL register value becomes "2401 (D)" or more, the carry flag becomes "0".
For example, when the HL register value is "2400 (D)",
"2400 (D)"-"2401 (D)" = "-1 (D)", carry flag = "1"
Will be.
When the HL register value is "2402 (D)",
"2402 (D)"-"2401 (D)" = "1 (D)", carry flag = "0"
Will be.

Therefore, since the operation result is "1", no carry occurs and the carry flag is "0" (the D0 bit of the F register is "0").
On the other hand, when the HL register value is "2402 (D)",
"2401 (D)"-"2402 (D)" = "-1 (D)" (actually, "FFFF (H)"
Then, a carry occurs, and the carry flag becomes "1" (the D0 bit of the F register becomes "1").

Further, the carry flag may be set to "1" even when the calculation result does not carry down or carry.
For example, in the process of step S422 of FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), even if "1" is subtracted from "0000 (H)", no carry occurs and the special calculation is maintained at "0000 (H)". To execute. However, in the process of step S422, when "1" is subtracted from "0000 (H)", the carry flag becomes "1".
Once the carry flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next and is maintained until the carry flag becomes "0" (the process of clearing the carry flag is not executed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), the “D7” bit (most significant bit) of the F register is set to the zero flag (Z). Here, the "zero flag (Z)" is a flag that becomes "1" when the calculation result becomes "0".
Further, in the instruction described later, "Z" means a condition "when the zero flag becomes" 1 "(when the calculation result is" 0 ")". On the other hand, "NZ" means the condition "when the zero flag is not" 1 "(when the calculation result is not" 0 ")".
For example, in the process of step S422 of FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), when the value before the calculation is "0001 (H)" and "1" is subtracted to become "0000 (H)", the zero flag is set. It becomes "1".

Similar to the carry flag, once the zero flag becomes "1", another operation is executed next, and the zero flag is maintained until it becomes "0" (the process of clearing the zero flag is not executed).
In this embodiment, only the D0 bit (carry flag) and the D7 bit (zero flag) are used as the F register, and the D1 to D6 bits are unused. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other bits of the F register can be used for other flags.

Further, as described above, the Q register is a register in which "F0 (H)" (in RWM53, the upper address of the work area of the used area) is stored, and in the 24th embodiment, of the storage area of RWM53. , Used in the instruction to read the data whose upper address is "F0 (H)". In particular, in the 24th embodiment, most of the upper addresses of the work area in the used area of the RWM 53 are set to "F0 (H)". For example, the first "F000 (H)" is set in the set value data (_NB_RANK) as shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 35 and 133 to 138 (23rd embodiment), the upper address of the storage area in which each data is stored is "F0 ## (H)"("#" is " Any value from "0" to "F".). When "F0 (H)" is once stored in the Q register and the higher address "F0 (H)" is specified in the storage area of the RWM53 by the instruction, the Q register is specified.
In the area used by RWM53, if the main upper address of the work area is not "F0 (H)", for example, "E1 (H)", the Q register is set to "E1". (H) ”is stored.

Further, when "F0 (H)" is stored in the Q register, for example, in the used area of the RWM53, predetermined data related to the progress of the game is stored in a storage area other than the upper address "F0 (H)". If it is necessary to access the data, the following methods can be mentioned.
For example, first, the address where the data to be read is stored can be stored in the HL register, for example, and the HL register value can be specified in the program instruction (the instruction to read the contents stored in the HL register). Can be mentioned.

Secondly, when the upper address accesses the data in the storage area other than "F0 (H)", the Q register value is temporarily changed from "F0 (H)" to another value (the data to be accessed is stored). By changing to the higher address of the given address) and then specifying the Q register with an instruction, the data in the storage area of the higher address can be accessed. Then, after the end of this instruction, for example, the Q register value may be returned to "F0 (H)".

FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the instruction “LDQ A, (20 (H))”.
This command corresponds to a command to save (store) the contents (also referred to as "contents" and "data"; the same applies hereinafter) stored (stored) in the address "F020 (H)" in the A address. To do.
Here, the entire description "LDQ A, (20 (H))" is referred to as an "instruction".
Further, when the instruction is actually stored in the ROM 54, it is coded (binarized data of "0" or "1") and stored. The binarized data in which the instruction is stored in the ROM 54 is referred to as an "instruction code".

In addition, the instruction includes instruction information and identification information. In this example, "LDQ A," corresponds to the command information, and "(20 (H))" corresponds to the identification information.
In the command "LDQ A, (20 (H))", "LD" means forwarding, "Q" refers to a higher address, and "(20 (H))" refers to a lower address to access. .. The operand of the instruction (variable to be operated on) is specified in the parentheses of the identification information, and it becomes the lower address to be accessed. Further, "A" indicates a register of the storage destination (A register in this example).
Therefore, the data stored in the A register is the content of the address "F020 (H)".

In the above case, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), it is assumed that the data "n" is stored in the address "F020 (H)". In this case, "n" is stored in the A register by the instruction "LDQ A, (20 (H))". If some data is stored in the A register before the "n" is saved, the "n" is overwritten in the A register.

Subsequently, a specific example of the instruction in the 24th embodiment will be described.
168 to 171 are diagrams showing the types of instructions in the 24th embodiment, and show 37 types from No. 1 to No. 37. It should be noted that these instructions are examples, and are not limited to the 37 types shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, and more instructions are provided.
First, the first and second instructions indicate "JTQ" instructions.
The first "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is the content stored in the address where the content of the Q register is higher and k is lower (hereinafter, the content stored in the address to be calculated). , Abbreviated as "target address value") is determined whether or not it is "0", and if it is not "0" (NZ), it is an instruction to execute processing to be transferred to e (address). is there.

The final "e" indicates the migration destination address. For example, when the migration destination address is "0010 (H)", "e" is described as "0010 (H)" (2 bytes).
Furthermore, "NZ" is a conditional symbol in the branch instruction. Examples of the condition symbol of the branch instruction described below include the following.
NZ: When the operation result is not "0", in other words, when the zero flag is not "1" Z: When the operation result is "0", in other words, when the zero flag is "1" NC: The operation result is a digit If it does not go down, in other words, if the carry flag is not "1" C: If the operation result is carried down, in other words, if the carry flag is "1"

In the above command, to determine whether the target address value is "0", subtract "0" from the target address value (target address value- "0"), and when the zero flag is not "1", , Judges that the target address value is not "0", and shifts to e (address).
For example, when it is determined whether or not the content stored in the address "F001 (H)" is "0", and if it is not "0", it is transferred to the address "0010 (H)". The command is "JTQ NZ, (01 (H)), 0010 (H)".
In this case, whether or not the address stored in the address "F0 (H)" with the Q register value "F0 (H)" at the top and "01 (H)" at the bottom, that is, the address "F001 (H)" is "0". To judge.
And here,
"Contents of address" F001 (H) ""-"0"
Is calculated.

For example, when "1 (H)" is stored in "F001 (H)", "1-0 ≠ 0" and the zero flag is "0". Therefore, it is determined that the content stored in the address "F001 (H)" is not "0", and the process is transferred to the address "0010 (H)".
On the other hand, when, for example, "0 (H)" is stored in the address "F001 (H)", it becomes "0-0 = 0" and the zero flag becomes "1". Therefore, it is determined that the content stored in the address "F001 (H)" is "0", and the processing is terminated (the processing is not transferred to the address "0010 (H)", and the next instruction (specifically). Is an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction).

As a method of determining whether or not the target address value is "0", "0" is subtracted from the content stored in the target address, and when the zero flag is "1", it is stored in the target address. The method of determining that the content is "0" (or the content stored in the target address is not "0" when the zero flag is not "1") is described by "NZ" or "NZ" in the following command. When it has the condition symbol of "Z", the same operation is performed.

Further, the contents stored in the RWM 53 do not change before and after the execution of the above command. When the instruction "JTQ NZ, (k), e" is executed, the contents stored in the addresses where the contents of the Q register are higher and k are lower are unchanged before and after the instruction.
Furthermore, even if the interrupt processing cycle arrives during the execution of the instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed until the instruction is completed. When the interrupt processing cycle arrives during the execution of an instruction, the interrupt processing is waited until the instruction is completed, and the interrupt processing is executed after the instruction is completed.

Depending on the operation executed by the instruction, the zero flag and carry flag will be the values corresponding to the operation result of the instruction, but the values of the zero flag and carry flag corresponding to the operation result of the instruction will not change until the instruction is completed. Need to be. In other words, after the zero flag or carry flag changes due to the execution of the instruction, interrupt processing is executed before the instruction ends, and the interrupt processing changes the zero flag or carry flag (in the operation result of the instruction). The corresponding zero flag and carry flag are corrupted by operations based on interrupt processing). To prevent this, interrupt processing is not executed during instruction execution.

In the 24th embodiment, not only the first instruction but also all the instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 are not executed during the execution of the instruction even when the interrupt processing cycle is reached. , Executes interrupt processing after the end of the instruction.
For example, when at least the "N" th instruction and the "N + 1" th instruction are not interrupt-disabled, and the "N" th instruction and the "N + 1" th instruction are executed consecutively, " If the interrupt processing cycle arrives during the execution of the N "th instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed until the end of the" N "th instruction, and the interrupt processing is executed after the end of the" N "th instruction. To do. Further, the "N + 1" th instruction is not executed during the execution of this interrupt processing. After the interrupt processing is completed, the "N + 1" th instruction is executed.
On the other hand, when at least the "N" th instruction and the "N + 1" th instruction are set in the interrupt prohibition period, and the "N" th instruction and the "N + 1" th instruction are executed consecutively. In, when the interrupt processing cycle arrives during the execution of the "N" th instruction, the interrupt processing is not executed after the end of the "N" th instruction, and the interrupt processing is performed after the interrupt prohibition period ends. To execute. Here, the interrupt disabled period described above corresponds to, for example, the period from the DI instruction to the EI instruction.
The instructions shown in FIGS. 168 to 171 may be executed not only in the main process but also in the interrupt process.

The second instruction "JTQ Z, (k), e" is the same as the first instruction except that the condition symbol "NZ" in the first instruction is "Z". is there. In this instruction, contrary to the first instruction, when it is determined that the content stored in the address where the content of the Q register is higher and k is lower is "0", that is, the zero flag is "1". In some cases, the process shifts to e (address). On the other hand, when it is determined that the target address value is not "0", the process ends.

As an example of the second instruction, for example, step S803 of FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment) can be mentioned. Step S803 determines whether or not the value (winning and replay condition device number) stored in the address “F0A9 (H)” is “0”. Then, when it is determined that the value is "0", the process proceeds to step S804. Therefore, for example, when the instruction of step S804 is stored in the address "0011 (H)", the instruction of step S803 becomes "JTQ Z, (A9 (H)), 0011 (H)".

The third and fourth instructions indicate "RTQ" instructions.
These instructions are the same as the first and second instructions in that they determine whether or not the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower is "0". However, when the conditions specified in the instruction are satisfied, the instruction is transferred to the caller, which is different from the first and second instructions.
First, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)" determines whether or not the content stored in the address where the content of the Q register is high and k is low is "0", and is "0". If not (NZ), the process ends and the caller is transferred.
Here, when the instruction is transferred to the caller after the end of the instruction as in the third instruction, the address (caller; 2 bytes) returned after the end of the instruction is stored in the stack area at the start of the instruction. To do.

Further, the method of determining whether or not it is "0" is the same as the above-mentioned "JTQ" instruction, and "target address value-" 0 "" is calculated.
Then, the third "RTQ NZ, (k)" is paraphrased when it is determined that the target address value (contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower) is not "0". If the zero flag is not "1", the process ends and the caller is transferred. If the zero flag is "1", the next instruction (specifically, it is stored in the address consecutive to the instruction). Execute the command).
The fourth "RTQ Z, (k)" ends processing and shifts to the caller when the zero flag is "1", and when the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction (specifically). Is an instruction to execute an instruction (instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction).

An example of the fourth instruction is step S808 of FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S808, it is determined whether or not the value of the address “F098 (H)” (AT standby counter) is “0”, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S289 of FIG. 139, which is the caller. To do. Therefore, for example, when the instruction in step S289 is stored in the address “0021 (H)”, the instruction in step S808 in FIG. 147 becomes “RTQ Z, (98 (H))” and is stored in the stack area. , The caller's address "0021 (H)" is stored.

The fifth to eighth indicate the "RCP" instruction.
The fifth instruction "RCP NZ, A, n" compares the A register value (indicating the contents stored in the A register; the same applies hereinafter) with "n", and when the zero flag is not "1", it compares. This is an instruction that ends processing and shifts to the caller. The point of comparing the A register value with "n" is the same for the sixth to eighth instructions.
"Comparison" in this RCP instruction calculates "A register value-" n "".
Example 1)
A register value = 6
n = 5
When is, the command is "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, the operation of subtracting "5" from the A register value is executed.
Therefore,
6-5 = 1 (≠ 0)
And the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", it shifts to the caller, that is, the address (2 bytes) stored in the stack area.
Example 2)
A register value = 4
n = 5
When is, the command is "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, the operation of subtracting "5" from the A register value is executed.
Therefore,
4-5 = -1 (FF (H)) (≠ 0)
And the zero flag is "0".
Since the zero flag is "0", it shifts to the caller, that is, the address (2 bytes) stored in the stack area.
Example 3)
A register value = 5
n = 5
When is, the command is "RCP NZ, A, 5".
In this case, the operation of subtracting "5" from the A register value is executed.
Therefore,
5-5 = 0
And the zero flag is "1".
Since the zero flag is "1", it does not move to the caller, that is, the address (2 bytes) stored in the stack area, and the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction). ) Is executed.

Further, in the above instruction (the same applies to the sixth to eighth instructions below), the operation of subtracting "n" from the A register value is executed, but the A register value does not change even after the operation. .. For example, in Example 1 above, the A register value remains "4" even when the operation of subtracting n "5" from the A register value "4" is executed.
As described above, since the A register value is not changed by the RCP instruction, the A register value can be continuously used after the RCP instruction.

The sixth instruction, "RCP Z, A, n", differs from the fifth instruction in that it is an instruction that shifts to the caller when the zero flag is "1". The comparison between the A register value and "n" is the same as that of the fifth instruction.
The seventh instruction, "RCP NC, A, n", is an instruction that compares the A register value with "n" and shifts to the caller when the carry flag is not "1".

An example of this instruction is step S805 of FIG. 147 (23rd embodiment). In step S805, the accessory condition device number is stored in the A register value, and “n” is “2”. Therefore, step S805 is an instruction "RCP NC, A, 2".
here,
Example 1)
When the A register value (accessory condition device number) is, for example, "2" (when the RBA is won or when the RBA winning information is carried over),
2-2 = 0
And the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", the caller is transferred. In this case, the caller is the address where the instruction of step S289 is stored after the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146), that is, in FIG. 139.
Example 2)
When the A register value (accessory condition device number) is, for example, "0",
0-2 = -2 (FE (H))
And the carry flag is "1".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "1", the next instruction (instruction in step S806) is executed without shifting to the caller.
Example 3)
When the A register value (accessory condition device number) is, for example, "3",
3-2 = 1
And the carry flag is "0".
Therefore, since the carry flag is "0", the caller is transferred. In this case, the caller is the address where the instruction of step S289 is stored after the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 146), that is, in FIG. 139.
Furthermore, the 8th "RCP C, A, n" is an instruction in which "NC" in the 7th instruction is "C", and when the carry flag is "1", it shifts to the caller. However, when the carry flag is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction).

The 9th and 10th "LDWQ" instructions are instructions for storing predetermined values at two consecutive addresses. In this instruction, "LD" means forwarding as described above, and "W" indicates that the target address is two addresses.
This instruction can be executed even when the register is full (the value is stored in the register). It can also be used, for example, when the temporarily stored data is actually adopted and stored.
The ninth instruction, "LDWQ (k), (k')", is an address in which the contents of the Q register are higher and "k'" is lower, and an address in which "1" is added to the address, in other words. For example, the contents stored in the addresses where the contents of the Q register are higher and "k'+ 1" is lower are the addresses where the contents of the Q register are higher and "k" is lower, and the address is "1". In other words, it is an instruction to save the contents of the Q register in the upper address and "k + 1" in the lower address.

For example
Contents stored in the upper address "Q" and the lower address "k'": x
Contents stored in the upper address "Q" and the lower address "k'+ 1": y
If so
Save "x" in the storage area of the upper address "Q" and the lower address "k",
It is an instruction to save "y" in the storage area of the upper address "Q" and the lower address "k + 1".

The tenth instruction, "LDWQ (k), mn", is an address in which the contents of the Q register are higher and "k" is lower, and an address in which "1" is added to the address, in other words, the Q register. This is an instruction to store "mn" (2-byte value) at an address in which the content of is higher and "k + 1" is lower.
This instruction is used, for example, when storing a 2-byte timer value in a 2-byte storage area.

As an example of this command, for example, in step S767 of FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), the initial value "3762 (D)" of the minimum game time is set to the addresses "F0AB (H)" and "F0AC (H)". The process of memorizing is mentioned.
Here, since "3672 (D)" = "0E58 (H)", the instruction in the above example becomes "LDWQ (AB (H)), 0E58 (H)" and becomes the address "F0AB (H)". "0E (H)" is stored, and "58 (H)" is stored in "F0AC (H)".

Further, for example, this command is also used when setting the initial value of the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation. For example, in FIG. 133 (23rd embodiment), since the number of 1BBs that can be acquired in the 23rd embodiment is 170, the storage area for storing the number of 1BBs acquired is the 1-byte storage of the address “F00E (H)”. It is an area. However, not limited to this, when the number of 1BB that can be acquired is 256 or more, the storage area for storing the number of 1BB that can be acquired is 2 bytes. Then, at the start of the 1BB game, the initial value of the number of sheets (2-byte value) that can be acquired when the 1BB is operated is stored in the storage area.

The eleventh and twelfth indicate the "JTWQ" instruction. This instruction is an instruction that determines whether or not the content stored in two consecutive addresses is "0", and shifts the processing to the "e" address according to the determination result. This instruction may be used, for example, to determine whether or not the 2-byte timer has elapsed.
First, the eleventh instruction "JTWQ NZ, (k), e" has the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and "k" is lower, and "1" is added to the address. It is determined whether or not the content of the added address, in other words, the content stored in the address where the content of the Q register is higher and "k + 1" is lower (that is, 2-byte data) is "0". If it is not "0", the process is transferred to e (address), and if it is "0", the process is not transferred to e (address), and the next instruction (specifically, the instruction is concerned). It is an instruction to execute (instruction stored in consecutive addresses).

Here, to determine whether or not it is "0", "" 2-byte data value "-" 0 "is calculated, and when the zero flag is" 1 ", the 2-byte data value is" 0 ". Judge that there is. The same applies to the following 12th to 14th instructions.
The twelfth instruction "JTWQ Z, (k), e" differs from the eleventh instruction in that when the 2-byte data is "0", the processing is transferred to e (address). ..
An example of this instruction is step S766 of FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment). Step S766 is a process of determining whether or not the 2-byte data stored in the addresses “F0AB (H)” and “F0AC (H)” is “0”. Then, when it is determined to be "0", it shifts to e (address), in this example, the address where the instruction of the next step S767 is stored. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the process is not transferred to e (address), but in this example, the process is transferred to the address where the instruction of the next step S766 is stored.

The thirteenth and fourteenth are "RTWQ" instructions. This instruction is an instruction that determines whether or not the content (2-byte data) stored in two consecutive addresses is "0", and shifts to the caller according to the determination result. That is, the 11th and 12th instructions described above shift to e (address) when the conditions specified in the instruction are satisfied, but the 13th and 14th instructions are specified in the instruction. It differs from the 11th and 12th instructions in that it shifts to the caller when the above conditions are met. Like the 11th and 12th instructions, this instruction is also used, for example, for waiting for a 2-byte timer.

The thirteenth instruction, "RTWQ NZ, (k)", is the content stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and "k" is lower, and the address obtained by adding "1" to the address. It is determined whether or not the stored contents, in other words, the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and "k + 1" is lower (that is, 2-byte data) are "0". If it is not "0", it shifts to the caller, and if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction). is there.
An example of this instruction is step S791 of FIG. 146 (23rd embodiment). In step S791, it is determined whether or not the content (waiting time) of the addresses "F041 (H)" and "F042 (H)" is "0" (whether or not the zero flag is "1"), and "0". If not, the process according to the flowchart of FIG. 146 is terminated, and the caller shifts to the address in which the instruction of step S289 is stored in FIG. 139 in this example. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the content (waiting time) of the addresses "F041 (H)" and "F042 (H)" is "0" (whether or not the zero flag is "1"), and it is "0". In this case, the instruction in step S792 in FIG. 146 (the instruction following step S791) is executed.
Further, the 14th instruction "RTWQ Z, (k)" shifts to the caller when the 2-byte data value is "0", and when it is not "0", the next instruction ( Specifically, it differs from the eleventh instruction in that it executes an instruction (instruction stored at addresses consecutive to the instruction). Other than that, it is the same as the 13th instruction.

In FIG. 169, the 15th and 16th "ICPLDS" instructions are instructions that compare the target register value with "n" (1 byte value) and execute a predetermined process according to the calculation result.
First, the fifteenth instruction "ICPLDS A, n" compares the contents stored in the A register with "n". Examples of the fifteenth instruction include patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, the instruction is not limited to these three patterns).

<Pattern 1>
The value obtained by adding "1" to the contents stored in the A register is compared with "n", and if "A register value + 1" exceeds "n", "n" is stored in the A register. Set the value.
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the A register value is subtracted from "n"("n"-"A register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", the A register is set. If the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set in the A register.
This command, for example, adds "1" to some counter every time a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, for each game), and maintains that state when the value exceeds "n" (upper limit value). There are cases where it continues. Specifically, when the parameter (for example, the number of games) reaches the ceiling, the ceiling state is maintained, and when the parameter (for example, the number of games) is in the ceiling state, each game or a specific lottery is executed.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the A register (A register value = A register value + 1) and end the process. To do.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "1" or more, the A register is set to "n" (1 byte value) (A register value = "n") and the process is terminated.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value- "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the contents stored in the A register are "1". It is judged that it is less than. Alternatively, "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value- "0"), and when the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the A register are less than "1". Judge that.
Further, "1" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value- "1"), and when the carry flag is "0", the contents stored in the A register is "1". Judge that it is the above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the A register is less than "n" (1 byte value), "1" is added to the content stored in the A register to end the process.
b) If the content stored in the A register is "n", the process ends as it is.
c) If the content stored in the A register exceeds "n", it is set to "n" (1 byte value) in the A register and the process ends.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value- "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the contents stored in the A register are "n". It is judged that it is less than.
Further, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value- "n"), and when the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the A register are "n". Judge that there is.
Furthermore, when "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the A register (A register value- "n") and the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the A register is used. It can be determined that the content stored in is exceeding "n".

In the 16th instruction "ICPLDS (HL), n", the "A" (A register value (1 byte data)) in the 15th instruction is "(HL)" (HL register value (2-byte data)). ) Is the command. Other than that, it is the same as the 15th instruction.
The HL register is often used when storing 2-byte data (for example, an address value), and as an example thereof, it is "HL" in the above instruction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an instruction that specifies another pair register (BC register, DE register). In this case, they are "ICPLDS (BC), n" and "ICPLDS (DE), n", respectively.
This also applies to the instructions (26th, 29th, 30th) that specify the "HL" register described below.

Hereinafter, although the explanation partially overlaps with the 15th instruction, the 16th instruction will be described again.
“ICPLDS (HL), n” compares the content stored in the HL register with “n”. Examples of this instruction include patterns 1 to 3 shown below (however, the instruction is not limited to these three patterns).

<Pattern 1>
The value obtained by adding "1" to the contents stored in the HL register is compared with "n" (1 byte value), and if "HL register value + 1" exceeds "n", the HL register Is set to the value of "n". When "n" is set in the HL register, the H register value becomes "0" and the L register value becomes "n".
Here, the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is subtracted from "n"("n"-"HL register value + 1"), and when the carry flag becomes "1", the HL register is set. If the value of "n" is set and the carry flag does not become "1", the value of "n" is not set in the HL register.

<Pattern 2>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "1", add "1" to the content stored in the HL register (HL register value = HL register value + 1) and end the process. To do.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "1" or more, the HL register is set to "n" (1 byte value) (HL register value = "n") and the process is terminated.
Here, "1" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value- "1"), and when the carry flag is "1", the contents stored in the HL register are "1". It is judged that it is less than. Alternatively, "0" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value- "0"), and when the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the HL register are less than "1". Judge that.
Further, "1" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value- "1"), and when the carry flag is "0", the contents stored in the HL register is "1". Judge that it is the above.

<Pattern 3>
a) If the content stored in the HL register is less than "n" (1 byte value), "1" is added to the content stored in the HL register to end the process.
b) If the content stored in the HL register is "n", the process ends as it is.
c) If the content stored in the HL register exceeds "n", the HL register is set to "n" (1 byte value) and the process ends.

Here, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value- "n"), and when the carry flag is "1", the contents stored in the HL register are "n". It is judged that it is less than.
Further, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value- "n"), and when the zero flag is "1", the contents stored in the HL register are "n". Judge that there is.
Furthermore, "n" is subtracted from the contents stored in the HL register (HL register value- "n"), and when the carry flag is "0" and the zero flag is "0", the HL register It can be determined that the content stored in is exceeding "n".

The 17th to 20th instructions, the "JCPQR" instruction, subtract "n" (1 byte value) from the contents of the address with the contents of the Q register as the upper order and k as the lower order, and depending on the result, e This is an instruction to transfer processing to (address).
Since this "JCPQR" instruction can perform conditional branching without using the A register or the HL register, it can be executed even in a situation where there are not enough registers.

First, the 17th instruction "JCPQR NZ, (k), n, e" is "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. If the result of subtracting is not "0", it is an instruction to shift the process to e (address).
In this instruction, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, when the zero flag is not "1", the process shifts to e (address), and when the zero flag is "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.
Further, the 18th instruction "JCPQR Z, (k), n, e" is "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. If the result of subtracting is "0", it is an instruction to shift the process to e (address).
In this instruction, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, when the zero flag is "1", the process shifts to e (address), and when the zero flag is not "1", the next instruction ( Specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.

Furthermore, the 19th instruction "JCPQR NC, (k), n, e" is "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the addresses where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. ) Is not generated as a result of subtracting) (when the carry flag is “0”), this is an instruction to shift the process to e (address).
In this instruction, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, when the carry flag is "0", the process shifts to e (address), and when the carry flag is "1", the next (Specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.
Further, the 20th instruction "JCPQRC, (k), n, e" is "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are upper and k are lower. When a carry occurs as a result of subtracting (when the carry flag is "1"), it is an instruction to shift the process to e (address).
Here, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, when the carry flag is "1", the process shifts to e (address), and when the carry flag is not "1", the next instruction. (Specifically, the instruction stored in the address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.

In FIG. 170, the 21st to 24th instructions are "RCPQ" instructions.
The "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that subtracts "n" from the target address value and terminates processing according to the subtraction result.
Therefore, the "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction that shifts to e (address) like the "JCPQR" instruction, which is the 17th to 20th instructions, in that processing is terminated when the conditions specified in the instruction are satisfied. Is different from.

Since the "RCPQ" instruction is an instruction for directly comparing the target address values, it can be executed even when there is no free register, like the above-mentioned "JCPQR" instruction.
The 21st instruction, "RCPQ NZ, (k), n", is the result of subtracting "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. , If it is not "0", it is an instruction to end the process (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, processing is terminated when the zero flag is not "1", and the next instruction (stored in the stack area) when the zero flag is "1". An instruction that is not an instruction corresponding to the return address, specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.
Further, the 22nd instruction "RCPQ Z, (k), n" subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. If the result is "0", it is an instruction to end the process.
Here, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, processing ends when the zero flag is "1", and the next instruction (stored in the stack area) when the zero flag is not "1". An instruction that is not an instruction corresponding to the return address, specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.

Furthermore, the 23rd instruction "RCPQ NC, (k), n" sets "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. If no carry has occurred as a result of subtraction (when the carry flag is "0"), the instruction to end the process (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area). is there.
Here, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, processing is terminated when the carry flag is not "1", and the next instruction (stored in the stack area) when the carry flag is "1". An instruction that is not an instruction corresponding to the returned address, specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.
Further, the 24th instruction "RCPQ C, (k), n" subtracts "n" (1 byte value) from the contents stored in the address where the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower. If the result is less than "n", the processing is terminated (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area).
Here, "target address value-" n "" is calculated, processing is terminated when the carry flag is "1", and the next instruction (stored in the stack area) when the carry flag is not "1". An instruction that is not an instruction corresponding to the returned address, specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction) is executed.

The 25th instruction, "LDQ (k), (k')", sets the contents of the Q register to the upper level and k'to the lower level, and sets the contents of the Q register to the upper level and k. This is an instruction to save to a lower address.
For example
Contents stored in the upper address "Q" and the lower address "k'": x
If so
This is an instruction to save "x" in the storage area of the upper address "Q" and the lower address "k".
This instruction is used when it is desired to move the value of a predetermined address (copy source) of the RWM to another address (copy destination) in a situation where the register is not free.

The 26th "CLRHL (HL), n" sets (clears) the contents of each address from the address indicated by the HL register to the "n" address, in other words, to the "HL + n" address. It is an order. In this case, the content before saving "0" is not viewed, and "0" is saved regardless of whether the content of the address where "0" is saved is "0".

In such a process, for example, as in step S435 of FIG. 51 (11th embodiment), the contents of a series of addresses of the RWM 53 (addresses for storing data relating to the advantageous section and AT) are sequentially changed to ". It is used when setting to "0".
It can also be used when executing RWM clear of addresses in a predetermined range at the start of a game.
Furthermore, although "n" in this instruction is a 1-byte value, for example, when "n" is also applicable to a 2-byte value, the RWM clear of the address in a predetermined range at the time of setting change (for example, It can also be used in step S224) of FIG. 39 (11th embodiment).

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the address of the RWM 53 for storing data regarding the advantageous section and AT in the 24th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the addresses for storing the data related to the advantageous section and the AT, in other words, the addresses to be initialized in the RWM initialization process in step S435 of FIG. 51 are continuous. To do. Then, in the process of step S435, a process of storing "0" in the storage area from the addresses "F070 (H)" to "F07B (H)" is executed. For example, in the example of FIG. 172, it is "CLRHL (F070 (H)), B (H)".

Further, in the instruction "CLRHL (F070 (H)), B (H)", the HL register value at the start of the instruction is "F070 (H)", but the value of the HL register after the end of this instruction. Is also "F070 (H)". That is, this instruction does not change the HL register value. As a result, when the HL register value is used in the next instruction, it can be used as it is.

On the other hand, in the prior art, when the reference address is stored in the HL register and the data of the addresses from the reference address to the "n" address destination is sequentially cleared, the processing is performed as follows.
For example, when the HL register value is "F070 (H)" as described above and the data of the address up to the "B (H)" address destination, that is, the address up to "F07B (H)" is cleared,
Save "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value (F070 (H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value (F071 (H)) ↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1
Save "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value (F072 (H)) ↓
:
↓
HL register value = HL register value + 1 (F07B (H))
"0" is saved at the address indicated by the HL register value (F07B (H)).

Therefore, when "0" is stored in the storage area from the addresses "F070 (H)" to "F07B (H)", the HL register value at the end of the instruction is "F07B (H)".
Therefore, when executing some instruction again with "F070 (H)" as the reference address in the next instruction, it is necessary to save "F070 (H)" again in the HL register.
On the other hand, in the instruction of "CLRHL (HL), n", the HL register value set first is maintained even after the instruction ends, so that the process of returning the HL register value to the reference address value is unnecessary. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced and the processing time can be shortened.

In FIG. 170, the 27th instruction "DCPLDQ (k), 0" is "1" when the content stored in the address where the content of the Q register is higher and k is lower is not "0". Is an instruction to subtract.
Here, whether or not the content stored in the address where the content of the Q register is higher and k is lower is "0" is calculated by calculating "target address value-" 0 "" and the zero flag is "1". If it is, it is determined that the content stored in the target address is "0". Then, if it is not "0", "1" is subtracted.

The following two patterns can be considered for this instruction.
<Pattern 1>
If the content stored in the address with the contents of the Q register as the upper order and k as the lower order is "0", the "1" subtraction is not performed.
<Pattern 2>
If the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtracting "1", "0" is saved in the target address. In this case, it means that the content before subtraction is "0".
Any of these may be adopted.

The 28th instruction, "DCPWLDQ (k), 0", is an address in which the contents of the Q register are higher and k is lower, and the address +1 (the contents of the Q register is higher and "k + 1" is lower. ) Is an instruction to subtract "1" when the content stored in is not "0".
This 28th instruction differs from the 27th instruction in which "1" is subtracted from the 1-byte data in that "1" is subtracted from the 2-byte data. Other points, such as pattern 1 and pattern 2, also apply to this instruction.

The 29th and 30th instructions indicate "LDWQ" instructions.
The 29th instruction "LDWQ (k), (HL + d)" saves the contents of the address of "HL + d (1 byte value)" in the address where the Q register is the upper order and k is the lower order, and "HL + d (1 byte value)". It is an instruction to save the contents of the address of "1 byte value) +1" in the address +1 (the address where the Q register is high and "k + 1" is low) with the Q register as the upper order and "k" as the lower order.
This instruction may be used, for example, when a value is fetched from the input port 51 and stored in the target address.

For example
HL = 51 (H)
d = 1
Contents of F052 (H) (HL + d) = 1 (H)
Contents of F053 (H) (HL + d + 1) = 2 (H)
k = 60 (H)
In the case of, the value "1 (H)" stored in the address "F052 (H)" is stored in the address "F060 (H)" and stored in the address "F053 (H)". The value "2 (H)" is stored in the address "F061 (H)".

The 30th instruction "LDWQ (HL + d), (k)" is an instruction in which "k" and "HL + d" are reversed with respect to the 29th instruction above, and the Q register is higher. The contents of the address with k as the lower order are saved in the address of "HL + d (1 byte value)", the Q register is the upper address, the k is the lower address + 1 (the Q register is the upper order, and "k + 1" is the lower address. ) Is an instruction to save the contents of) at the address of "HL + d (1 byte value) + 1".
This instruction may be used, for example, when writing data directly from the target address when outputting to the output port 52.
For example
k = 60 (H)
Contents of F060 (H) = 1 (H)
Contents of F061 (H) = 2 (H)
HL = 51 (H)
d = 1
If, the value "1 (H)" stored in the address "F060 (H)" is stored in the address "F052 (H)", and the content "2 (2)" of the address "F061 (H)" is stored. "H)" is stored in the address "F053 (H)".

In FIG. 171, “cc” in the 31st to 36th instructions indicates either “NZ” or “Z”.
In the 31st instruction, "JT NZ, (DE), e" is an instruction that calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is not "0", shifts the processing to e (address), and is "0". In the case of, it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address next to the instruction) without shifting the processing to e (address).
Here, "calculate the contents of the DE register" is an operation for determining whether or not the DE register value is "0". In the present embodiment, "DE register value-" 0 "" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the content of the DE register is not "0".

On the other hand, "JT Z, (DE), e" is an instruction opposite to the above, and the contents of the DE register are calculated, and when it is "0", in other words, when the zero flag is "1". Is an instruction that shifts processing to e (address), and if the zero flag is not "1", the processing is not transferred to e (address) and the next instruction (specifically, the next instruction (specifically, the next instruction) It is an instruction to execute the instruction stored in the address).
In the 31st instruction, since a register storing 2-byte data is specified, "DE" is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a BC register or an HL register may be specified. In this case, they are "JT cc, (BC), e" and "JT cc, (HL), e", respectively.
The same applies to the 32nd instruction below.

The 32nd instruction is different from the 31st instruction in that the processing is terminated when the conditions of the instruction are satisfied, and the processing is transferred to e (address). Others are the same as the 31st instruction.
In the 32nd instruction, "RT NZ, (DE), e" calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is not "0", the processing ends (the next instruction is stored in the stack area). It is an instruction (starting from the return address), and when it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address next to the instruction).
Here, "calculate the contents of the DE register" is the same as above.
Further, "RT Z, (DE), e" calculates the contents of the DE register, and if it is "0", the processing ends (the next instruction is the return address stored in the stack area). It is an instruction (starting from), and if it is not "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored in the address next to the instruction).

In the 33rd instruction, "JTQ NZ, (k), e" calculates the contents stored in the address with the Q register as the upper order and k as the lower order, and if it is not "0", e (address). ), And if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction).
Here, "calculate the contents stored in the address where the Q register is higher and k is lower" means "the content of the address indicated by the target register-" 0 "" is calculated and the zero flag is "1". If not, it is determined that the content stored in the address with the Q register as the upper rank and k as the lower rank is not "0".

On the other hand, in the 33rd instruction, "JTQ Z, (k), e" calculates the contents stored in the addresses where the Q register is the upper order and k is the lower order, and when it is "0", it is calculated. The process shifts to e (address), and if it is not "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction). Here, in the same manner as above, "content of the address indicated by the target register-" 0 "" is calculated, and when the zero flag is "1", it is saved in the address where the Q register is higher and k is lower. It is determined that the content is "0".

The 34th instruction is different from the 33rd instruction in that the processing is terminated when the conditions of the instruction are satisfied, and the processing is transferred to e (address). Others are the same as the 33rd instruction.
In the 34th instruction, "RTQ NZ, (k)" calculates the content stored in the address where the Q register is the upper order and k is the lower order, and if it is not "0", the process ends ( The next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if it is "0", the next instruction (specifically, the instruction stored at the address consecutive to the instruction). Is an instruction to execute.
Further, "RTQ Z, (k)" calculates the contents stored in the addresses where the Q register is higher and k is lower, and when it is "0", the processing is terminated (next instruction). Starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and if it is not "0", an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored at an address consecutive to the instruction). Is.
In these instructions, "content of address indicated by target register-" 0 "" is calculated, and processing is terminated according to the value of the zero flag.

The 35th "RTW" instruction is an instruction that determines whether or not the content stored in the target register is "0" and terminates processing according to the determination result.
Examples of this instruction include storing the timer value in a register and using it when determining whether or not the timer value has elapsed.
In the 35th instruction, "ss" indicates either a BC register, a DE register, or an HL register.
For example, the "RTW NZ, (BC)" instruction calculates the contents of the BC register, and if it is not "0", the processing ends (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area. (Start), if it is "0", it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction).

Here, "calculate the contents of the BC register" is an operation for determining whether or not the BC register value is "0". In the present embodiment, "BC register value-" 0 "" is calculated, and if the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that the content of the BC register is not "0". The same applies to "RTW NZ, (DE)" for calculating the contents of the DE register and "RTW NZ, (HL)" for calculating the contents of the HL register.

Further, "RTW Z, (BC)" is an instruction to calculate the contents of the BC register, and if it is "0", terminate the processing. The operation of the contents of the BC register is performed by calculating "BC register value-" 0 "", and when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the contents of the BC register are "0". The same applies to "RTW Z, (DE)" for calculating the contents of the DE register and "RTW Z, (HL)" for calculating the contents of the HL register.

The 36th "RBITQ" instruction is an instruction that determines whether or not the predetermined bit of the content stored in the target address is "0" and terminates the process according to the determination result. Since this instruction does not directly judge (see) the register value, it can be used even when the register is full.
In the 36th instruction, "RBITQ NZ, b, (k)" is "b" (any of 0 to 7 bits) among the contents stored in the address where the Q register is the upper order and k is the lower order. If is not "0", the process ends (the next instruction starts from the return address stored in the stack area), and "b" (any of 0 to 7 bits) is "0". In some cases, it is an instruction to execute the next instruction (specifically, an instruction stored in an address consecutive to the instruction).
For example, the instruction for determining whether or not the D1 bit is "0" is "PBITQ NZ, 1, (k)". Here, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and when the zero flag is "0", it is determined that the target bit value is not "0".

On the contrary, "RBITQ Z, b, (k)" is "b" (any of 0 to 7 bits) among the contents stored in the address where the Q register is the upper order and k is the lower order. When is "0", it is an instruction to end the process. Also in this case, "0" is subtracted from the target bit value, and when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that the target bit value is "0".

In the 37th "BITQ" instruction, which bit of the content stored in the target address is set ("1") or how many bits are set (the bit that is "1" is set). It is a command to check (how many).
"BITQ A, (k)" is an instruction to inspect the position of the content of "A" among the contents stored in the addresses where the Q register is the upper order and k is the lower order.
In this instruction, the following two patterns are mainly considered.

<Pattern 1>
As the pattern 1, it is inspected whether or not the specified bit is "1" in the contents stored in the target address.
For example, in the case of the instruction "BITQ 3, (k)", the instruction is to check whether the D3 bit of the content stored in the address where the Q register is the upper order and k is the lower order is "1". Become.
<Pattern 2>
Further, as the pattern 2, the number of bits of "1" is searched from the contents stored in the target address, and the number of bits of "1" is stored in the A register.

The instructions Nos. 1 to 37 described above are binarized (coded) and stored in the ROM 54 as an instruction code. Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (A), the instruction is composed of instruction information and identification information. Therefore, when the instruction is coded, it is composed of an instruction information code and an identification information code.
Here, in the 24th embodiment, when the instruction is coded, the code including the most significant bit of the instruction code is defined as the instruction information code.
If the code including the most significant bit of the instruction code is the instruction information code, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction should be executed when the instruction code is read from the most significant bit. It becomes.
Examples of the sequence of instruction codes include "(instruction information code) (identification information code) (instruction information code)" or "(instruction information code) (identification information code)".

However, not limited to the above, when the instruction is coded, the least significant bit of the instruction code may be defined to include the instruction information code.
Examples of the instruction code array in this case include "(identification information code) (instruction information code)" and "(instruction information code) (identification information code) (instruction information code)". In this case, when reading the instruction code, by reading the code including the least significant bit first, the main CPU 55 can quickly determine which instruction should be executed by the instruction code. Become.

Although the 24th embodiment has been described above, the 24th embodiment is not limited to the above contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) The initial value of the Q register is "F0 (H)", but the present invention is not limited to this, and it differs depending on the upper address value of the work area in the area used by the RWM53. For example, when the upper address of the work area in the used area of the RWM53 is set to "E1 (H)", the initial value of the Q register is "E1 (H)".
(2) The bits corresponding to the carry flag (C) and the zero flag (Z) in the F register shown in FIG. 166 (B) are examples and are not limited thereto. For example, the D3 bit may be the carry flag (C) and the D4 bit may be the zero flag (Z).
(3) The 24th embodiment is not limited to the instructions illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, and more instructions are provided for executing the program of the slot machine 10.
Further, the instructions illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171 are not limited to the illustrated descriptions.
(4) In the 24th embodiment, the slot machine 10 (FIG. 1) is illustrated as the gaming machine, but it can also be implemented with the pachinko gaming machine 500 (FIG. 99).

<25th Embodiment>
Subsequently, the 25th embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The 25th embodiment is, first, an invention of a method for determining a winning combination (a symbol combination that stops at an effective line). Secondly, it is an invention of a method for determining the number of payouts at the time of winning a small winning combination.
In the 25th embodiment, the 23rd embodiment is diverted from the basic configuration of the slot machine 10. Therefore, the 25th embodiment includes FIGS. 114 to 163.
In addition, in this specification (including all embodiments) and claims, "at the time of stop" of a reel 31 or a symbol is a stop switch 42 when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel is stopped operation. When the stop operation of the symbol is detected (when the level data or the rise data is turned on), when the stop position of the symbol is determined based on the stop operation of the stop switch 42, after the stop position of the symbol is determined. When the symbol (reel 31) has not stopped yet (when it is stopped, for example, when decelerating), the output state to the motor 32 is the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 (for example, the 4-phase excitation state (fourth)). (Refer to the embodiment). The same shall apply hereinafter in this paragraph), when the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 is terminated, when the reel 31 is actually stopped, or when the symbol is stopped and displayed (see the embodiment). It is assumed that the meaning (any meaning) includes all after the excitation state for stopping the reel 31 is completed (when the excitation output to the motor 32 is not performed).
Therefore, when the reel 31 or the symbol is referred to as "stopped", the reel 31 or the symbol is not necessarily stopped.

In addition, although it partially overlaps with the matter described at the beginning of the first embodiment, it will be explained again. In all of the scope of the present specification and claims, "payout" means actually hopper the medal. Not only paying out from 35, but also adding credits. Furthermore, if the game machine is a managed game machine that does not use medals (sometimes referred to as an enclosed game machine, a medalless game machine, or an ECO game machine; the same shall apply hereinafter), an electronic game medium shall be added. Is also included.
Therefore, in the present specification (including all embodiments) and in the claims, "payment" can also be referred to as "grant". Therefore, for example, the "payout number table" can also be referred to as the "granting number table".

173 to 175 are diagrams showing the contents of the RWM 53 in the 25th embodiment. It should be noted that FIGS. 173 to 175 include some of the contents already explained in the other embodiments described above.
In FIGS. 173 to 175, the numerical value shown in parentheses below the address indicates the number of bytes in the storage area of the address (same as in FIGS. 133 to 138).
In FIG. 173, the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F00C (H)” is a storage area of the flag for determining whether or not the accessory is activated, and is the operation shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment). Corresponds to the status flag.
In the 25th embodiment, the D3 bit corresponds to 1BB and the D4 bit corresponds to RB (RBA to RBP). Similar to the eleventh embodiment, the operation state flag is updated in the game start set process (step S272 in FIG. 139). In addition, it is cleared by the game end check process (not shown in FIG. 148).

The number of games played (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) at the time of RB operation at the address "F00F (H)" and the number of winnings (_CT_BONUS_WIN) at the time of RB operation at the address "F010 (H)" are shown in FIG. 133 (25th embodiment), respectively. It is the same storage area as the one. In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202 described later, the method of updating the number of winnings when the RB is operated is different from that of the other embodiments.

The stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) of the address "F01E (H)" is a storage area for storing whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept.
The first (left) to third (right) stop switches 42 are assigned to the D0 to D2 bits of the stop reception information data, respectively. It is set to "0" before the start of rotation of the reel 31 and from the start of rotation of the reel 31 until the speed becomes constant and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. When the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, "1"".
Note that "until the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted" means that the index sensor corresponding to the reel 31 is detected and the symbol number is stored (any reel 31 for which the index is not detected). Even if there is, if there is another reel 31 that has detected the index, the other reel 31 may be stopped) or the index sensor corresponding to all reels 31 is detected and the symbol number is stored. Until it is done.
In particular, in the present embodiment, in FIG. 140 (23rd embodiment), after the minimum game time is stored in the RWM 53 in step S767, "000000111 (B)" is set as the initial value in the stop reception information data. Then, for example, when the first (left) stop switch 42 is operated, the bit corresponding to the first stop switch 42 becomes "0" in the stop reception information data, and the stop reception information data is updated to "00000011 (B)".
This stop reception information data may be used when masking bits other than the D0 to D2 bits of the input port rise data A (FIG. 133).

The payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F023 (H)" and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F024 (H)" are the payout number data (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment), respectively. _NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the number of payouts data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is the same storage area.
To explain again, when one of the small winning combinations wins and the number of payouts is determined, the number of payouts (same value) is stored in the payout number data and the payout number data buffer, respectively. The payout number data is deducted by "1" each time one medal is paid out (including the addition of credits), and becomes "0" when the payout process is completed. On the other hand, the payout number data buffer is not subtracted even if the payout process is executed, and the initial value is maintained even after the payout process. The payout number data buffer is updated (overwritten) at the end of the next game. The number of payouts is updated using the value of the payout number data buffer, and the above-mentioned instruction-included bonus ratio (cumulative), continuous bonus ratio (6000 games), bonus ratio (6000 games), and continuous bonus ratio are used. (Cumulative) and bonus ratio (cumulative) can be calculated.

The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) of the address “F0AD (H)” is a storage area of the flag for determining whether or not the stop of the reel 31 has been accepted. It is "1" when the reel stop acceptance has not been completed, and it is "0" when the reel stop acceptance has been completed. Therefore, it becomes "000000111 (B)" when the stop acceptance of any of the reels 31 is not received while the reel 31 is rotating. For example, when the stop acceptance of the first (left) reel 31 is received, it is "00000011 (B)". Will be.

The stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address “F0AF (H)” is a storage area for storing the reel number during control or when the stop is accepted. It is set to "0" when the reel 31 is being controlled and when the stop is not received. For example, when the third stop switch 42 is operated and the stop of the third reel 31 is received, or when the stop control of the third reel 31 is being performed. Is "00000011 (B)" (3 (D)).

The control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) of the address “F0B4 (H)” is a storage area for storing the symbol number stopped at the reference position. Here, the reference position in the 25th embodiment is the "lower stage". Further, the "lower left"-"lower middle"-"lower right" line is referred to as a "reference line" in the 25th embodiment.
On the other hand, in FIGS. 135 to 137, the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) indicates the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the middle stage.
Therefore,
"Control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) ="# Reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) "-" 1 "
It becomes the relationship of.
Specifically, when the first (left) reel 31 is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 115 (A), the first reel symbol number (for the stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) is "13 (D) ( Red 7) ”, and the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) becomes“ 12 (D) (bell B) ”.

In FIGS. 174 and 175, the stop symbol data (groups 1 to 9) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) of the addresses "F0B7 (H)" to "F0BF (H)" determines the symbol combination to stop at the effective line. It is a storage area for storing data (stop symbol data) for storing data.
In the 25th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 121, as a role,
1BB
RB (RBA to RBP)
Replay (Replay 01 ~ Replay 10)
Small role (small role 01 to small role 34)
Is provided.
Then, the symbol group related to the symbol combination of the roles is defined as follows.
Symbol 1 group: RBA to RBH operation symbol symbol 2 group: RBI to RBP operation symbol symbol 3 group: 1BB operation symbol, and replay 01 to replay 07 operation symbol symbol 4 group: replay 08 to replay 10 operation symbol symbol 5 group: small Combination 01 to small combination 08 operation symbol 6 group: small combination 09 to small combination 16 operation symbol symbol 7 group: small combination 17 to small combination 24 operation symbol symbol 8 group: small combination 25 to small combination 32 operation symbol 9 group : Small combination 33 and small combination 34 operation symbol In addition, although it is described as "operation symbol" in FIGS. 174 and 175, "operation symbol" has the same meaning as "symbol combination". Hereinafter, it will be referred to as a "symbol combination" or an "operating symbol" as necessary. In addition, a symbol combination determined to be stopped or a symbol combination that is actually stopped may be referred to as a "stop symbol combination".

The stop symbol data (first group) and the stop symbol data (second group) correspond to RBA to RBP.
For example, when the stop symbol data (first group) is "000000 (B)" when all reels 31 are stopped, it means that the symbol combination of RBA to RBH is not stopped at the effective line. On the other hand, when the stop symbol data (first group) is "00000010 (B)" when all reels 31 are stopped, it means that the symbol combination of RBB is stopped at the effective line.
Further, in the stop symbol data (third group), the D0 bit corresponds to 1BB, and the D1 to D7 bits correspond to the replay 01 to the replay 07, respectively.

Furthermore, in the stop symbol data (fourth group), the D0 to D2 bits are bits corresponding to the replays 08 to 10, respectively. Bits D4 to D7 are unused.
Further, bits corresponding to the small winning combination 01 to 34 are assigned to each bit of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (9th group). The D2 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (group 9) are unused.
Then, the non-payout combination (1BB, RB, and replay) is assigned to the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (4th group), and the stop symbol data (5th group) to the stop symbol data (1st group) are assigned. A small winning combination with a payout is assigned to the 9th group).
By separating the storage area of the stopped symbol data in this way, it is possible to simplify the determination of the number of payouts when any symbol combination of the payout combination stops at the effective line, and also, the special combination. It is possible to simplify the counting of the number of winning small wins when the object (RB) is operating (details will be described later).
Further, in the stop symbol data (5th group) to the stop symbol data (9th group) having payouts, the D0 to D7 bits (small combination 01 to small combination 08) of the stop symbol data (5th group) and the stop symbol The D0 to D3 bits (small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 12) of the data (sixth group) correspond to the payout of 15 sheets.
Furthermore, the D4 to D7 bits (small winning combination 13 to small winning combination 16) of the stop symbol data (sixth group) and the D0 to D7 bits (small winning combination 17 to small winning combination 24) of the stop symbol data (seventh group) are Equivalent to paying out three cards.
Further, the D0 to D7 bits (small winning combination 25 to small winning combination 32) of the stop symbol data (8th group) and the D0 to D1 bits (small winning combination 33 to 34 small winning combination) of the stop symbol data (9th group) are Corresponds to one payout.

In the 25th embodiment, the winning combination lottery process is performed when the start switch 41 is operated (step S761 in FIG. 140), and the winning combination condition device number is saved based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition device number is obtained. After saving, set the initial value in the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC). Here, the bits corresponding to all the operation symbols of the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (9th group) are set to "1".
In particular,
Stop symbol data (1st group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (second group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (3rd group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (4th group): 00000111 (B)
Stop symbol data (5th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (6th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (7th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (8th group): 11111111 (B)
Stop symbol data (group 9): 000000111 (B)
Set to.

Then, after the stop position of the reel 31 is determined (may be after the reel 31 actually stops), the bit corresponding to the winning combination that is no longer likely to stop at the effective line is updated to "0". .. For example, when the symbol that stops at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped is "replay", as shown in FIG. 116, there is a possibility that all RB (RBA to RBP) symbol combinations stop at the effective line. It disappears. In this case, when the left reel 31 is stopped, when the symbol that stops at the effective line is "replay",
Stop symbol data (1st group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (2nd group): 00000000 (B)
Will be updated to.

Further, for example, when the symbol that stops at the effective line is "Red 7" when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the symbol combination of RBA to RBH and RBM to RBP among the RBs is effective as shown in FIG. 116. There is no possibility of stopping on the line. On the other hand, among the RBs, the symbol combinations of RBI to RBL have the possibility of stopping at the effective line. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped in this case,
Stop symbol data (1st group): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (2nd group): 000001111 (B)
Will be updated to.

In this way, after the stop positions of each reel 31 are determined, the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (9th group) are updated, and after the stop positions of all the reels 31 are determined, the stop is stopped. When all of the symbol data (1st group) to the stopped symbol data (9th group) are "00000000000 (B)", the symbol combination corresponding to the combination in the game is not stopped at the effective line (the combination is). It is judged that the prize has not been won).
On the other hand, when any bit of the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (9th group) is "1", the symbol combination of the winning combination corresponding to the bit stops at the valid line. It is judged that it is.
Further, when any bit of the data of the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (4th group) is "1", it is determined that no medal is paid out in the game.
On the other hand, when any bit of the data of the stop symbol data (group 5) to the stop symbol data (group 9) is "1", it is determined that the medal is paid out in the game. ..

Here, in the present embodiment,
Small win 01 to small win 12:15 payout Small win 13 to small win 24: 3 payout Small win 25 to small win 34: 1 payout.
Therefore, when any bit of the stop symbol data (5th group) or D0 to D3 bits of the stop symbol data (6th group) is "1", it is determined that 15 sheets are paid out. ..
Further, when any of the D4 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (6th group) or the D0 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (7th group) is "1", it is determined that three cards are paid out. ..
Furthermore, when either the D0 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (8th group) or the D0 to D1 bits of the stop symbol data (9th group) is "1", it is determined that one piece is paid out. To.

176 to 179 are diagrams showing definition data in the 25th embodiment. In the definition data, "EQUA" is an assembler instruction that defines a symbol as having an integer value, and means "equal".
FIG. 176 shows a reel symbol definition and a symbol definition.
In the reel symbol definition, the relationship between the symbols and the numerical values for the 10 types of symbols in the 25th embodiment is shown. For example, the "blue BAR" symbol is "@ ZGR_01" when indicated by a symbol, and "0" when indicated by a numerical value.
Further, in the symbol definition, the relationship between each symbol of the symbol 1 group to the symbol 9 group and the numerical value is shown. For example, "@ _PIC1" is a symbol indicating a group of symbols. As described above, for example, the symbol 1 group is composed of RBA to RBH, and each bit (D0 to D7) corresponds to RBA to RBH, respectively. Then, for example, the D0 bit of the numerical value of the symbol 1 group is a bit corresponding to RBA.

FIGS. 177 to 179 show definition data of each operation symbol in the symbol 1 group to the symbol 9 group. Each bit of each symbol group coincides with a bit corresponding to each operation symbol of the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (9th group).
As described above, for example, the D0 bit of the stop symbol data (first group) is a bit corresponding to the RBA operation symbol, but the numerical value of the symbol "@SRB_A" indicating the RBA operation symbol in the symbol 1 group is The D0 bit is defined as "00000001 (B)" which is "1". Similarly, the numerical value corresponding to the RBB operation symbol "@SRB_B" is set to "00000010 (B)" in which the D1 bit is "1", and ..., the numerical value corresponding to the RBH operation symbol "@SRB_H" is , D7 bit is defined as "10000000 (B)" which is "1".

In the definition data, "@SRB" is a symbol indicating a shift RB (SRB) operation symbol, and substantially refers to an RBA operation symbol to an RBP operation symbol.
Further, for example, "@SRB_A_H" refers to the RBA operation symbol to the RBH operation symbol. The numerical value is "11111111 (B)", which is equal to the case where all the bits of the stop symbol data (first group) are "1".
Furthermore, "@ 1BB" is a symbol indicating a 1BB operation symbol.
Further, "@REP" is a symbol indicating a replay operation symbol. Then, for example, "@ REP_01" is a symbol indicating the replay 01 operation symbol.
Further, in FIG. 178, "@WIN" is a symbol indicating a small winning combination operation symbol. Then, for example, "@ WIN_01" is a symbol indicating a small winning combination 01 operation symbol.
As described above, the symbols and numerical values of each operating symbol of each symbol group are defined.

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an outline of various tables used in the 25th embodiment.
All the tables described below are stored in the predetermined address of the ROM 54.
The reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) shown in FIG. 180 (A) specifies the start address (offset value) of the target table for each reel 31 when searching for the stop symbol of each reel 31. It is a table for.
For example, when searching for the stop symbol of the first reel 31, the value (offset value) stored in the address "1200 (H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "3 (H)", the offset value "3 (H)" is added to the address "1200 (H)" indicating the first reel 31 of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address "1203 (H)" indicated by the value is specified as the start address of the first reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_1). As shown in FIG. 180 (B), the first reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored in the addresses "1203 (H)" to "120C (H)" (details will be described later), and the start address is The address is "1203 (H)".

Further, when searching for the stop symbol of the second reel 31, the value (offset value) stored in the address "1201 (H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "39 (H)", the offset value "39 (H)" is added to the address "1201 (H)" indicating the second reel 31 of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address "123A (H)" indicated by the value is specified as the start address of the second reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_2) (FIG. 180 (B)).
Similarly, when searching for the stop symbol of the third reel 31, the value (offset value) stored in the address "1203 (H)" is referred to. Since the offset value is "8D (H)", the offset value "8D (H)" is added to the address "1202 (H)" indicating the third reel 31 of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH). The address "128F (H)" indicated by the value is specified as the start address of the third reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_3) (FIG. 180 (B)).

As described above, the offset values for specifying the start addresses of the symbol sequence tables of the first to third reels 31 are stored in the three addresses of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH), respectively.
Then, the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) corresponding to the first reel 31, the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) corresponding to the second reel 31, and the third reel symbol arrangement table corresponding to the third reel 31 (TBL_PICARG_3) is provided.
These #th reel symbol sequence tables (TBL_PICARG_ #) are tables used to identify symbols that stop at the effective line from the symbol numbers that stop at the reference position (details will be described later).

Further, as shown in FIG. 180 (B), a #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_ #) is provided at an address continuous with the #th reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_ #).
Each data of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_ #) is composed of reel symbol data information, reel symbol data information + table offset, and symbol data. Details of these data will be described later.

FIG. 181 is a diagram showing a first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1). In FIG. 181, the reel symbol symbol definition shown in FIG. 176 is also shown.
Here, the data stored in each address of the #th reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_ #) is referred to as "symbol data". This "design data" is data that can identify the type of the symbol.
The first reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_1), the second reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_3), which will be described later, are all tables having "10" addresses, and are "10". The 0th to 19th symbols (20 symbols) are specified by the address. In other words, two symbol data are specified by one address.

In FIG. 181, “* 16” in the figure indicates the upper 4 bits. For example, at the address "1203 (H)", the upper 4 bits are "@ ZGR_08" (2nd symbol, "cherry"), and the lower 4 bits are "@ ZGR_02" (3rd symbol, "black BAR"). Indicates that there is.
As shown in FIG. 114, in the left reel 31, the second symbol is "cherry" and the third symbol is "black BAR".
Then, from the definition data, "@ ZGR_08" is "7 (H)", that is, "0111 (B)". Further, "@ ZGR_02" is "1 (H)", that is, "0001 (B)".
Therefore, in the address "1203 (H)", the upper 4 bits are "0111 (B)" and the lower 4 bits are "0001 (B)", so that "0111/0001 (B)" is actually It is stored (“/” indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits).

Here, for example, when the left (first) reel 31 is stopped, when the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower) is the first "watermelon", the symbol that stops at the effective line is the third "black BAR". (See FIGS. 114 and 115).
In this case, when the first "watermelon" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops at the effective line is the address "1203 (H)" according to the program (flow chart) described later. It is configured to be identified as the value of the lower 4 bits ("@ ZGR_02", i.e. "black BAR").
Further, for example, when the second "cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol stopped at the effective line is the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "1204 (H)", that is, "@". It is configured to be identified as "ZGR_05" (Bell A).

As shown in FIG. 181, in this embodiment, 20 symbol data are stored in 10 addresses. That is, in one address, the upper 4 bits specify 1 symbol data and the lower 4 bits specify 1 symbol data. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the ROM 54 that stores the symbol data. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, there are 10 types of symbols (@ ZGR_01 to @ ZGR_10), which are less than 16 types, and therefore, “0000 (B)” to “1010 (B)” It can be represented by a range. Therefore, since it is possible to store in the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 20 symbol data may be stored in 20 addresses. In this case, one symbol data is stored per address. This example is shown in FIG. 228 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment) described later.

182 to 184 are diagrams showing a first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1). In FIGS. 182 to 184, and FIGS. 186 to 188 and 190 to 192, which will be described later, “; //” means that there is no address that stores the value. For example, the address "120F (H)" is an address that stores a value corresponding to "blue BAR" of the symbol 1 group, but corresponds to "black BAR" to "special figure bottom" of the symbol 1 group. There is no address that stores the value, and the next address "1210 (H)" is an address that stores the value of the reel symbol data information of the symbol 2 group. In other words, since the drawings are drawings for facilitating explanation, not all the data described in the drawings are stored in the ROM 54 (data and definitions described in "; //"). The data is not stored in the ROM 54).

An address is also provided for the content of "; //", and "0" is stored when the data is stored. In that case, the reel symbol data information and the table offset data (for example, "120D (H)" and "120E (H)") described later are not required. Specifically, the symbol combination data corresponding to each symbol (for specifying what the symbol combination having each symbol is) is stored in a predetermined order. For example, in the symbol 1 group, the address "XXX0 (H)" is for the symbol combination data containing "blue BAR" on the left reel 31, and the address "XXX1" is for the symbol combination data containing "black BAR" on the left reel 31. (H) ”, ..., If the symbol combination data includes“ on the special figure ”on the left reel 31, the address“ XXX8 (H) ”, and if the symbol combination data includes“ under the special figure ”on the left reel 31 For example, like the address "XXX9 (H)", the symbol combination data can be stored for each symbol group at the address (10 addresses in this example) interval corresponding to the number of symbols. However, in this example, since the data is stored in the ROM 54 even when the data is "0", the capacity of the ROM 54 increases, but the verification is easy when re-verifying from the data stored in the ROM 54. become.

Here, at each address of the #th reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_ #), for example, in the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) of FIG. 182, taking the symbol 1 group as an example, the first address "120D (H)). The data stored in the D7 and D6 bits of "120E (H)" is referred to as "reel symbol data information".
Further, the data stored in the D5 to D0 bits of the address "120E (H)" is referred to as "table offset".
Furthermore, the data stored in the address "120F (H)" is referred to as "symbol combination data".

First, the D0 to D7 bits of the address "120D (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "120E (H)" correspond to the reel symbol data information and correspond to 10 types of symbols.
In particular,
(1) Reel symbol data information of address "120D (H)" D7: Blue BAR
D6: Black BAR
D5: Red 7
D4: Replay D3: Bell A
D2: Bell B
D1: Watermelon D0: Cherry (2) Reel symbol data information of address "120E (H)" D7: Above special map D6: Below special map.

Then, it means that the symbol data corresponding to the bit "1" in the reel symbol data information is stored in the address following the addresses "120D (H)" and "120E (H)". For example, among the reel symbol data information stored in the addresses "120D (H)" and "120E (H)", only the D7 bit of the reel symbol data information stored in the address "120D (H)" is "1". ". Therefore, at the next address "120F (H)", symbol combination data (data of "blue BAR") for the D7 bit of the reel symbol data information of the address "120D (H)" is stored.

Further, in the data of the address "120E (H)", the lower 6 bits (D0 to D5) are table offset values.
For example, the table offset value stored in the address "120E (H)" is "3 (H)". In the present embodiment, the reel symbol data information and the table offset value are described separately in order to make it easier to understand the reel symbol data information and the table offset value. For example, in the data of the address "120E (H)", the reel symbol data information is "00000000000 (B)" and the table offset value is "03 (H)". The address "120E (H)" actually stores data obtained by logically summing the reel symbol data information and the table offset value, that is, "00000011 (H)".

The above reel symbol data information and reel symbol data information + table offset are the same for the symbol 2 group to the symbol 9 group. Further, the same applies to the symbols 1 to 9 groups of the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) (FIGS. 186 to 188) and the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) (FIGS. 190 to 192). ..

Here, the symbol 1 group of the first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) shown in FIG. 182 will be described in more detail.
For the D0 to D7 bits of the first address "120D (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address (120E (H)), which symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is a symbol combination of the symbol 1 group. It indicates whether it is a symbol constituting the above.
The symbol combination of the symbol 1 group is
RBA: "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Black BAR"
RBB: "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Red 7"
RBC: "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Watermelon"
RBD: "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Special map"
RBE: "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Black BAR"
RBF: "Blue BAR"-"Black BAR"-"Red 7"
RBG: "Blue BAR"-"Black BAR"-"Watermelon"
RBH: "Blue BAR"-"Black BAR"-"Special map"
(See FIG. 116).

Therefore, in the symbol combination of the symbol 1 group, all the symbols of the first (left) reel 31 are "blue BAR".
From this, the D7 bit of the address "120D (H)" corresponding to the "blue BAR" is "1", and the other D6 to D0 bits are "0".
Similarly, the D7 and D6 bits of the address "120E (H)" are "0".
Further, the table offset value indicated by the lower 6 bits of the address "120E (H)" indicates a numerical value up to the address of the next symbol group (symbol 2 group in this example). The table offset value stored in the address "120E (H)" is "3 (H)", but the address "1211 (H)" obtained by adding "3 (H)" to the address "120E (H)" is , It becomes an address that stores the table offset of the symbol 2 group.
Similarly, in the address "1211 (H)", an offset value "3 (H)" up to the address in which the table offset of the symbol 3 group is stored is stored. That is, the address "1211 (H)" + "3 (H)" = "1214 (H)" (the address that stores the table offset of the symbol 3 group).
Similarly, in the address "1214 (H)", an offset value "8 (H)" up to the address in which the table offset of the symbol 4 group is stored is stored. That is, the address "1214 (H)" + "8 (H)" = "121C (H)" (address storing the table offset of the symbol 4 group) (hereinafter, the description will be omitted).

In this way, the first two addresses
First address: Reel symbol data information of "Blue BAR" to "Cherry" Next address: Reel symbol data information of "special symbol top" and "special symbol bottom", and table offset of the next symbol group are stored. The offset value to the address is stored.
In this way, the "next address" stores two completely different data, the reel symbol data information and the offset value up to the address where the table offset of the next symbol group is stored. Since the corresponding bits of the data are different, the control process is not hindered. Then, if such a storage method is adopted, the capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced.
When the number of symbols is 8 or less, the reel symbol data information is stored in the "first address", and the offset value up to the address in which the table offset of the next symbol group is stored is stored in the "next address". You may. If the number of symbols is 9 or more, the reel symbol data information is stored at the "first address", the reel symbol data information is stored at the "next address", and the next address is used. It is possible to adopt various patterns such as storing the offset value up to the address where the table offset of the symbol group is stored (in this case, the total number of addresses is 3).

Further, in the next address "120F (H)", symbol combination data for specifying what is the symbol combination having the symbol of "blue BAR" on the first (left) reel 31 is stored. There is.
As described above, in the eight symbol combinations of the symbol 1 group, the symbols of the first (left) reel 31 are all "blue BAR". Therefore, in the address "120F (H)", "@SRB_A_H" (RBA to RBH) indicating the type of combination in which the first (left) reel 31 is "blue BAR" is stored.
As shown in FIG. 177, "@SRB_A_H" means an operation symbol related to all of the symbol 1 group, and the value corresponding to this symbol is "11111111 (B)". Therefore, in reality, "11111111 (B)" is stored in the address "120F (H)".

Of the first reel symbol combination table, the symbol 2 group is also defined in the same manner as the symbol 1 group.
Next, in the first reel symbol combination table, the symbol 3 group will be described.
First, the D7 to D0 bits of the address "1213 (H)" and the D7 and D6 bits of the address "1214 (H)" are
(1) Reel symbol data information of address "1213 (H)" D7: "1" (blue BAR)
D6: "1" (black BAR)
D5: "0" (red 7)
D4: "1" (replay)
D3: "1" (Bell A)
D2: "0" (Bell B)
D1: "1" (watermelon)
D0: "0" (cherry)
(2) Reel symbol data information of address "1214 (H)" D7: "1" (on special map)
D6: "0" (below special figure)
It has become.
Therefore, among the three groups of symbols (1BB or the symbol combination of replay 01 to replay 07), the symbols of the first (left) reel 31 are "blue BAR", "black BAR", "replay", and "bell A". , "Watermelon", or "on special map".

actually,
1BB: "Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"-"Blue BAR"
Replay 01: "Replay"-"Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / Special map"-"Bell A"
Replay 02: "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay"
Replay 03: "Bell A"-"Red 7 / Cherry"-"Replay / Bell B"
Replay 04: "Black BAR"-"Red 7 / Cherry"-"Replay / Bell B"
Replay 05: "On special map"-"Replay"-"Bell A"
Replay 06: "Watermelon"-"Replay / Watermelon"-"Red 7 / Watermelon / Special figure / Black BAR"
Replay 07: "Replay"-"Replay"-"Bell A"
(See FIGS. 116 and 117).

Then, among the reel symbol data information, the symbol combination data corresponding to the bit (symbol) of "1" is stored in the address after the address "1215 (H)".
In particular,
(1) Reel symbol data information of address "1213 (H)" D7: "1" (blue BAR) → address "1215 (H)"
D6: "1" (black BAR) → address "1216 (H)"
D5: "0" (red 7) → no address (no symbol combination data)
D4: "1" (replay) → address "1217 (H)"
D3: "1" (bell A) → address "1218 (H)"
D2: "0" (Bell B) → No address (No symbol combination data)
D1: "1" (watermelon) → address "1219 (H)"
D0: "0" (cherry) → no address (no symbol combination data)
(2) Reel symbol data information of address "1214 (H)" D7: "1" (on special map) → Address "121A (H)"
D6: "0" (below special figure) → no address (no symbol combination data)
It has become.

First, at the address "1215 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "blue BAR" is stored. In the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "blue BAR" is 1BB as described above, so that "@ 1BB" is stored in the address "1215 (H)". Has been done. As shown in FIG. 177, “@ 1BB” is “00000001 (B)”, and the value is stored in the address “1215 (H)”.
Next, at the address "1216 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "black BAR" is stored. In the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "black BAR" is the replay 04 as described above, so that "@ REP_04" is added to the address "1216 (H)". It is remembered. As shown in FIG. 177, “@ REP_04” is “00010000 (B)”, and the value is stored in the address “1216 (H)”.

Further, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "red 7" in the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "red 7" is used. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for identification is stored.
At the next address "1217 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "replay" is stored. In the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "replay" is replay 01, replay 02, and replay 07 as described above, so that the address "1217 (H)" has an address. , "@ REP_01 OR @ REP_02 OR @ REP_07" is stored. As shown in FIG. 177, "@ REP_01 OR @ REP_02 OR @ REP_07" is "00000010 (B)" OR "000000100 (B)" OR "10000000 (B)", so that the address is "1217 (H)". "10000110 (B)" is stored in.

At the next address "1218 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "bell A" is stored. In the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "bell A" is replay 03 as described above, so that "@ REP_03" is added to the address "1218 (H)". It is remembered. As shown in FIG. 177, “@ REP_03” is “00001000 (B)”, and the value is stored in the address “1218 (H)”.
Further, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "bell B" in the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "bell B" is used. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for identification is stored.

At the next address "1219 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "watermelon" is stored. In the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "watermelon" is replay 06 as described above, so that "@ REP_06" is stored in the address "1219 (H)". Has been done. Since "@ REP_06" is "01000000 (B)" as shown in FIG. 177, the value is stored in the address "1219 (H)".

Further, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" in the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" is specified. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for this purpose is stored.
At the next address "121A (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "special symbol" is stored. In the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "on the special symbol" is the replay 05 as described above, so that the address "121A (H)" is "@ REP_05". Is remembered. As shown in FIG. 177, “@ REP_05” is “0010000 (B)”, and the value is stored in the address “121A (H)”.

Further, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "under the special symbol" in the symbol 3 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the first (left) reel 31 is "cherry" is used. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for identification is stored.
As described above, the reel symbol data information, the reel symbol data information + table offset, and the symbol combination data are also stored in the other symbol groups.
The first reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_1) is provided with addresses "120D (H)" to "1239 (H)" (FIGS. 180, 182 to 184).

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. In FIG. 185, the reel symbol symbol definition shown in FIG. 176 is also shown.
For example, when the second (middle) reel 31 is stopped, when the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower) is the first "cherry", the symbol that stops at the effective line is the second "watermelon" (Fig.). 114 and FIG. 115).
In this case, when the first "cherry" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops at the effective line is the address "123A (H)" according to the program (flow chart) described later. It is configured to be identified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of the address "123A (H)" correspond to "@ ZGR_07", that is, "watermelon" (see FIG. 114).
In addition, when the second "watermelon" stops at the reference position (lower), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops at the effective line is specified to be the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "123B (H)". It is configured to. The upper 4 bits of the address "123B (H)" correspond to "@ ZGR_02", that is, "black BAR".

186 to 188 are views showing a second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2), and are views corresponding to FIGS. 182 to 184 of the first reel 31.
In the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2), the symbol 4 group of FIG. 187 will be described as an example.
For the D0 to D7 bits of the first address "1255 (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "1256 (H)", which symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is a symbol combination of the symbol 4 group. It indicates whether it is a symbol constituting the above.
The symbol combination of the 4 groups of symbols is
Replay 08: "On special map"-"Replay"-"Replay"
Replay 09: "Bell A"-"Red 7 / Cherry"-"Blue BAR / Special figure"
Replay 10: "Replay"-"Red 7 / Cherry"-"Bell B"
(See FIG. 117).

Therefore, in the symbol combination of the symbol 4 group, the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "replay", "red 7", or "cherry".
From this, among the reel symbol data information of the address "1255 (H)", the D5 bit corresponding to "Red 7", the D4 bit corresponding to "Replay", and the D0 bit corresponding to "Cherry" are "1". The other bits of the reel symbol data information are "0".
Further, since the address "125B (H)" in which the table offset of the symbol 4 group is stored is 5 ahead of the address "125B (H)" in which the table offset of the symbol 5 group is stored, the address "1256 (H)" is reached. The table offset value stored in "(H)" is "5 (H)".

Since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "blue BAR" or "black BAR" in the symbol 4 group, the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "blue BAR" or "blue BAR". There is no address in which the symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination that is "black BAR" is stored.
For the first address "1257 (H)" following the address "1255 (H)" and the address "1256 (H)", a symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "red 7" is specified. The symbol combination data for this is stored. In the symbol 4 group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "red 7" are replay 09 and replay 10, so that the address "1257 (H)" has "@ REP_09 OR @ REP_10". Is remembered. As shown in FIG. 178, "@ REP_09" is "00000010 (B)" and "@ REP_10" is "00000100 (B)". Therefore, the address "1257 (H)" has "00000011 (B)". Is remembered.

At the next address "1258 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "replay" is stored. In the symbol 4 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "replay" is replay 08, so that "@ REP_08" is stored in the address "1258 (H)". As shown in FIG. 178, since “@ REP_08” is “00000001 (B)”, the value is stored in the address “1258 (H)”.
Next, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "bell A", "bell B", or "watermelon" in the symbol 4 group, the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is not provided. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which is "bell A", "bell B", or "watermelon" is stored.

At the next address "1259 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "cherry" is stored. In the symbol 4 group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "cherry" are replay 09 and replay 10, so that the address "1259 (H)" is "@ REP_09 OR @ REP_10". Is remembered. As shown in FIG. 178, “@ REP_09” is “00000010 (B)” and “@ REP_10” is “00000100 (B)”, so that the address “1259 (H)” is “000000110 (B)”. Is remembered.

Next, since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "special symbol" in the symbol 4 group, the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "special symbol". There is no address in which the symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination is stored.
Further, since the second (middle) reel 31 does not have a "special figure bottom" (see FIG. 114), a symbol combination in which the symbol of the second (middle) reel 31 is "special figure bottom" is specified. There is no address in which the symbol combination data for this purpose is stored.
As described above, the second reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_2) is composed of the addresses "1244 (H)" to "128E (H)" (FIGS. 180 and 186 to 188).

FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3), and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 181 of the first reel 31. In FIG. 189, the definition data of the reel symbol shown in FIG. 176 is also shown.
Then, for example, when the right (third) reel 31 is stopped, when the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower stage) is the first "replay", the symbol that stops at the effective line is also the first "replay" ( See FIGS. 114 and 115).
In this case, when the first "replay" stops at the reference position (lower), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops at the effective line is the address "128F (H)" according to the program (flow chart) described later. It is configured to be identified as the value of the lower 4 bits. The lower 4 bits of the address "128F (H)" correspond to "@ ZGR_04", that is, "replay" (see FIG. 114).
In addition, when the second "blue BAR" stops at the reference position (lower row), the value corresponding to the symbol that stops at the effective line is specified to be the value of the upper 4 bits of the address "1290 (H)". It is configured to be. The upper 4 bits of the address "1290 (H)" correspond to "@ ZGR_01", that is, "blue BAR".

As shown in FIGS. 181, 185, and 189, the symbol numbers specified by the start addresses are different in the # reel symbol sequence table.
Specifically, at the start address "1203 (H)" of the first reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored from the second symbol. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the effective line on the left reel 31 is 2.
Further, at the start address "123A (H)" of the second reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored from the first symbol. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the effective line on the middle reel 31 is 1.
Furthermore, at the start address "128F (H)" of the third reel symbol arrangement table, symbol data is stored from the 0th symbol. This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol number of the symbol on the effective line on the right reel 31 is 0.

In this way, by shifting the symbol data stored in the symbol array table as necessary (considering the difference) and storing it, correction is performed for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) ( There is no need to add or subtract differences). Therefore, it is possible to acquire the symbol data on the effective line by a simple calculation based on the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position (lower row), simplifying the program processing and reducing the capacity of the ROM 54. Can be done.
Further, the order of the symbol data stored in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is determined according to the reference line and the effective line. The reference line (reference position) and the effective line can be freely set. However, the reference line is preferably a horizontal line.
Here, the effective lines of the present embodiment are "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right row" as shown in FIG. 115. The reference line is "lower left"-"lower middle"-"lower right". Therefore, the difference is "+2" in the first reel symbol arrangement table, the difference is "+1" in the second reel symbol arrangement table, and the difference is "0" in the third reel symbol arrangement table. In other words, the difference refers to the amount of deviation (number of steps) between the position of the effective line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, if the effective line is "left middle stage"-"middle middle stage"-"right middle stage", the difference in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "+1". In this case, the symbol data of the first symbol is stored in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 in order. Also, for example, when the reference line is the middle line ("left middle"-"middle middle"-"right middle") and the effective line is "left middle"-"middle middle"-"right middle". , The difference in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "0" (there is no difference). In this case, the symbol data of the 0th symbol is stored in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 in order.
The above also applies to FIG. 228 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment) described later.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment) described later, in each of the symbol arrangement tables of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the symbol data of the symbol number "0" is used. There is also a method of storing the difference data corresponding to each reel 31 in order from the first. Then, when the symbol data is acquired, the symbol data of the symbol on the effective line is acquired by adding or subtracting the difference data of the reel 31 to the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position. In this case, even if the effective line is changed, only the difference data needs to be changed, so that the development man-hours can be reduced.

In FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment), the difference data corresponds to the above-mentioned “difference” value. That is, in the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31, the difference data of the left reel 31 is "+2", the difference data of the middle reel 31 is "+1", and the difference data of the right reel 31 is "0".
Therefore, as described above, when the reference line is "lower left"-"lower middle"-"lower right" and the effective line is, for example, "middle left"-"middle middle"-"middle right", The difference data of the symbol arrangement table of each reel 31 is "+1". When the reference line is, for example, the middle line ("left middle"-"middle middle"-"right middle"), and the effective line is, for example, "left middle"-"middle middle"-"right middle". The difference data of the symbol array table of each reel 31 is "0". In this case, it is not necessary to provide the difference data, and the process of adding or subtracting the difference data is also unnecessary.

19 to 192 are views showing a third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3), and are views corresponding to FIGS. 182 to 184 of the first reel 31.
In the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3), the symbol 5 group of FIG. 191 will be described as an example.
In the D0 to D7 bits of the first address "12B5 (H)" and the D6 and D7 bits of the next address "12B6 (H)", which symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is a symbol combination of the symbol 5 group. It indicates whether it is a symbol constituting the above.
The symbol combination of the 5 groups of symbols is
Small role 01: "Watermelon"-"Cherry"-"Bell A"
Small role 02: "Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Blue BAR / Special figure"
Small role 03: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Bell A"
Small role 04: "Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Bell A"
Small role 05: "Bell A"-"Replay"-"Blue BAR / Special figure"
Small role 06: "Bell A"-"Bell A"-"Blue BAR / Special figure below"
Small role 07: "Watermelon"-"Cherry"-"Bell B"
Small role 08: "Watermelon"-"Bell A"-"Black BAR / Red 7 / Watermelon / On special map"
(See FIG. 118).

Therefore, the symbols of the third (right) reel 31 in the symbol combination of the symbol 5 groups are "bell A", "blue BAR", "special figure bottom", "bell B", "black BAR", and "red 7". , "Watermelon" or "on special map".
From this, among the reel symbol data information of the address "12B5 (H)", the D7 bit corresponding to "blue BAR", the D6 bit corresponding to "black BAR", the D5 bit corresponding to "red 7", and " The D3 bit corresponding to "Bell A", the D2 bit corresponding to "Bell B", and the D1 bit corresponding to "Watermelon" are "1".
Further, among the reel symbol data information of the address "12B6 (H)", the D7 bit corresponding to "on the special figure" and the D6 bit corresponding to "below the special figure" are "1".
Furthermore, since the address "12C0 (H)" in which the table offset of the symbol 6 group is stored is 10 addresses ahead of the address "12B6 (H)" in which the table offset of the symbol 5 group is stored, the address "12B6" The table offset value stored in "(H)" is "0A (H)".

Since there is no symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "replay" in the symbol 5 group, it is for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "replay". There is no address where the symbol combination data is stored.
Further, since the right reel 31 is not provided with the "cherry" (see FIG. 114), the symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is the "cherry" is stored. There is no address provided.
First, for the first address "12B7 (H)" following the addresses "12B5 (H)" and "12B6 (H)", a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "blue BAR" is specified. The symbol combination data for the purpose is stored. In the symbol 5 group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "blue BAR" are the small winning combination 02, the small winning combination 05, and the small winning combination 06, so that the address "12B7 (H)" is assigned. , "@ WIN_02 OR @ WIN_05 OR @ WIN_06" is stored. As shown in FIG. 178, "@ WIN_02" is "00000010 (B)", "@ WIN_05" is "00010000 (B)", and "@ WIN_06" is "0010000 (B)". "0010010 (B)" is stored in the address "12B7 (H)".

At the next address "12B8 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "black BAR" is stored. In the 5th group of symbols, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the 3rd (right) reel 31 is "black BAR" is a small winning combination 08, so "@ WIN_08" is stored in the address "12B8 (H)". There is. As shown in FIG. 178, since “@ WIN_08” is “10000000 (B)”, the value is stored in the address “12B8 (H)”.
At the next address "12B9 (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "red 7" is stored. In the symbol 5 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "red 7" is a small winning combination 08, so that the address "12B9 (H)" is similarly "10000000 (" B) ”is memorized.

At the next address "12BA (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "bell A" is stored. In the symbol 5 group, the symbol combinations in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "bell A" are the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 03, and the small winning combination 04, so that the address "12BA (H)" is assigned. , "@ WIN_01 OR @ WIN_03 OR @ WIN_04" is stored. As shown in FIG. 178, "@ WIN_01" is "00000001 (B)", "@ WIN_03" is "00000100 (B)", and "@ WIN_04" is "00001000 (B)". "000001101 (B)" is stored in the address "12BA (H)".

At the next address "12BB (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "bell B" is stored. In the symbol 5 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "bell B" is a small winning combination 07, so that "@ WIN_07" is stored in the address "12BB (H)". There is. As shown in FIG. 178, since “@ WIN_07” is “01000000 (B)”, the value is stored in the address “12BB (H)”.
At the next address "12BC (H)", symbol combination data for specifying the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "watermelon" is stored. In the symbol 5 group, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "watermelon" is a small winning combination 08, so "@ WIN_08" is stored in the address "12BC (H)". .. As shown in FIG. 178, since “@ WIN_08” is “10000000 (B)”, the value is stored in the address “12BC (H)”.

At the next address "12BD (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "special symbol" is stored. In the 5th group of symbols, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the 3rd (right) reel 31 is "on the special symbol" is the small winning combination 08, so that the address "12BD (H)" is the same as the address "12BC (H)". "1000000 (B)" is stored in "".
At the next address "12BE (H)", symbol combination data for specifying a symbol combination in which the symbol of the third (right) reel 31 is "under special symbol" is stored. In the 5th group of symbols, the symbol combination in which the symbol of the 3rd (right) reel 31 is "under the special symbol" is the small winning combination 02, the small winning combination 05, and the small winning combination 06, so that the address is "12BE (H)". Is stored as "@ WIN_02 OR @ WIN_05 OR @ WIN_06". As shown in FIG. 178, "@ WIN_02" is "00000010 (B)", "@ WIN_05" is "00010000 (B)", and "@ WIN_06" is "00100000 (B)". "00110010 (B)" is stored in the address "12BE (H)".
As described above, the third reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_3) is composed of the addresses "1299 (H)" to "12DE (H)" (FIGS. 180, 190 to 192).

FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL). In the 25th embodiment, after the symbol combination to be stopped on the effective line is determined, in other words, the stop positions of all reels 31 are determined, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) is updated, and then the symbol combination is determined. Whether or not there is a payout corresponding to the above is determined using this payout number table.
First, "6" stored in the address "1400 (H)" means the number of inspections. It means that it is inspected up to 6 times whether or not it has a payout.
These 6 times are
1st time: Small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 08 (15 sheets) (D0 to D7 of stop symbol data (5th group))
2nd time: Small winning combination 09 to 12 small winning combination (15 sheets) (D0 to D3 of stop symbol data (6th group))
3rd time: Small winning combination 13 to small winning combination 16 (3 sheets) (D4 to D7 of stop symbol data (6th group))
4th time: Small winning combination 17 to small winning combination 24 (3 sheets) (D0 to D7 of stop symbol data (7th group))
5th time: Small winning combination 25 to small winning combination 32 (1 sheet) (D0 to D7 of stop symbol data (8th group))
6th time: Small winning combination 33 to small winning combination 34 (1 sheet) (D0 to D1 of stop symbol data (9th group))
Corresponds to.
In particular, (in the stop symbol data (6th group), the number of payouts is different between the D0 to D3 bits (small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 12) and the D4 to D7 bits (small winning combination 13 to small winning combination 16). Inspect separately.

At the next address "1401 (H)", the upper 3 bits (* 32) indicate the number of transition bytes, and the lower 5 bits indicate the number of payouts. Here, since the upper 3 bits are "0 * 32", it is "000 (B)", and the lower 5 bits are "01111 (B)" because the number of payouts is "15 (D)". Therefore, in reality, "00001111 (B)" is stored in the address "1401 (H)".

The configuration of the number of transferred bytes and the number of payouts is the same for the addresses "1403 (H)", "1405 (H)", "1407 (H)", "1409 (H)", and "140B (H)". .. For example, in "1407 (H)", the upper 3 bits (number of transfer bytes) are "1 * 32", so it is "001 (B)", and the lower 5 bits (number of payouts) are "3 (D)". Since there is, it becomes "00011 (B)". Therefore, "00100011 (B)" is stored in the address "1407 (H)".

Here, the "number of migration bytes" means the number of migration bytes from the address of the stop symbol data. In this example, the initial value of the address of the stop symbol data is the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). Since the stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) to the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) are non-payout combinations (RB, 1BB, or replay), they are to be inspected whether or not they have payouts. It does not become. Therefore, the initial value of the stop symbol data to be inspected is the address of the stop symbol data (fifth group). In the present embodiment, the payout process can be simplified by grouping the symbols of the winning combination (small winning combination) having the payout into the 5th to 9th groups.
Therefore, for example, the number of migration bytes specified by the address "1401 (H)" is "0", but this is the migration from the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (group 5) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). It means not to let it.
Further, since the number of transition bytes specified by the address "1403 (H)" is "1", "1" is added to the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (group 5) (_WK_STOP_PIC5). Therefore, the address to be inspected is "F0BC (H)" (stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)).

Furthermore, the "designated data" means a bit (inspection data) corresponding to the symbol combination to be inspected. For example, since the address “1402 (H)” is “@ _PIC5”, it is “11111111 (B)” as shown in FIG. 176.
In this case, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) when all reels 31 are stopped and the data stored in the address "1402 (H)", that is, the inspection data "stop symbol data (fifth group)" 11111111 (B) ”is ANDed. Then, when the calculation result is "0", it is determined that there is no payout corresponding to the symbol combination of the fifth group. On the other hand, when the calculation result is not "0", it is determined that the value stored in the lower 5 bits of the address "1401 (H)", that is, "15" is paid out.

At the next address "1403 (H)", the number of transition bytes is "1" and the number of payouts is "15". The designated data (address "1404 (H)") is "@ WIN_09_12". Therefore, when the result of ANDing the stop symbol data (sixth group) of the address "F0BC (H)" and "@ WIN_09_12", that is, "000011111 (B)" (FIG. 178), it is not "0", it is 15. It means paying out the sheets.
As described above, the stop symbol data (sixth group) is small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 16, but among these small winning combination, the number of payouts of small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 12 at the time of winning is 15. Since the number of small wins 13 to 16 to be paid out at the time of winning is 3, at the address "1404 (H)", 15 small wins to be paid out are small wins 09 to 12 Is specified.

At the next address "1405 (H)", the number of transition bytes is "0" and the number of payouts is "3". The designated data (address "1406 (H)") is "@ WIN_13_16". Therefore, if the result of ANDing the stop symbol data (6th group) of the address "F0BC (H)" and "@ WIN_13_16", that is, "11110000 (B)" (FIG. 178) and the result is not "0", 3 It means paying out the sheets.
As described above, also in the addresses "1407 (H)" to "140C (H)", the number of transfer bytes, the acquired data, and the designated data are defined for the remaining small winning combination and the number of payouts.

Subsequently, the control process (program) in the 25th embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart.
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC). In the 25th embodiment, when the process proceeds to step S752 in FIG. 139 (23rd embodiment), the process proceeds to the flowchart of FIG. 194.
In addition, in FIG. 194, step S1013 is the same as step S792 of FIG. 146. Further, step S1014 is the same as step S793 in FIG. 146. Furthermore, step S1017 is the same as step S794 of FIG. 146.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 194, after step S1012, the process of step S791 of FIG. 146 (determination of whether or not the waiting time has elapsed) is executed.

Here, in the standby process shown in step S791 of FIG. 146, when the condition for permitting the winning of 1BB is not satisfied and the 1BB is tempered, the waiting time is set (steps S809 and S810 of FIG. 147). It is a judgment as to whether or not the waiting time has passed.
On the other hand, the waiting time shown in step S1012 of FIG. 194 is a determination as to whether or not the interrupt waiting process in step S1011 has been completed.
Further, in FIG. 194, when the process proceeds to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024, the process of FIG. 195 is executed, but the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) of the 25th embodiment is shown in addition to the process of FIG. It is assumed that the processing of 195 is executed.

Hereinafter, although a part of the description overlaps with the description of FIG. 146, the process of FIG. 194 will be described.
The reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_PIC) of FIG. 194 is a process of determining whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept a stop, and when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, the process shifts to the stop symbol set process.
In FIG. 194, in step S1011, interrupt wait processing is executed. The interrupt waiting process is the same as the process of step S239 of FIG. 39 (11th embodiment). However, in the 25th embodiment, the interrupt period is "1.1175" ms, as in the 23rd embodiment. Then, in the next step S1012, it is determined whether or not the next interrupt has arrived (whether or not the waiting time for interrupt waiting has become "0"). When it is determined that the next interrupt has not arrived, this flowchart ends. On the other hand, after the interrupt wait processing is started in step S1011 and the next interrupt arrives, the process proceeds to step S1013.

Note that this interrupt waiting process can prevent the plurality of reels 31 from stopping at the same time even when the plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. This is because the stop control is executed for one reel 31 by the processing after step S1015, and when the process returns to step S794, the rising data A is cleared by the interrupt waiting processing in step S1011.
Further, since the processing after step S1012 is executed all at once, it is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being executed (make it difficult to execute) until the next interrupt waiting processing (step S1011). As a result, interrupt processing is performed between the time when the rising data A is first acquired in step S1016 and the time when the rising data A is acquired in step S1016, and the data acquired in the first step S1016 and the next step S1016 It is possible to prevent the data from being different from the acquired data.

In step S1013, all motor index passage checks are performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (FIG. 135) is stored in the A register.
(2) OR (logical sum) calculation is performed between the A register value and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (FIG. 136). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(3) OR (logical sum) calculation is performed between the A register value and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (FIG. 137). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(4) Add "1" to the A register value.

Here, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC), the second reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL2_PASPIC), and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) are the # reels. Before the change in the motor index, it is "FF (H)", that is, "11111111 (B)".
Therefore, if at least one piece of data is "11111111 (B)", the calculation result up to (3) above is "111111111 (B)", and when "1" is added as shown in (4), it becomes "0". become. Therefore, for at least one reel 31, before the #th reel motor index changes, the above calculation result becomes "0", and for all reels 31, after the #th reel motor index changes, after The above calculation result is a value other than "0".

When there is a change in the # reel motor index, the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) is set to "10 (D)" (at the time of rising) or "10 (D)" (at the time of rising) as shown in step S897 of FIG. "0" (at the time of falling) is memorized. Then, every time it is determined that one symbol has moved, the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) is subtracted by "1". In this way, after the change of the #th reel motor index, the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position) is set to "0" (0000000000 (B)) to "19 (D)" (00010011 (B)). It will circulate. Therefore, after the change of the #th reel motor index, the OR calculation of (1) to (3) above does not result in "11111111 (B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1014, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 can accept the stop. This determination determines whether or not it is "0" (whether the zero flag is "1") in the operation (4) of step S1013. When it is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 cannot accept the stop. In other words, when there is a change in the #th reel motor index for all reels 31, stop acceptance of the stop switch 42 is permitted.
In step S1014, when it is determined that the stop switch 42 can accept the stop, the process proceeds to step S1015, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 cannot accept the stop, the process proceeds to step S1021.

In step S1015, the first reel number and the first reel bit are set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is stored in the HL register.
(2) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the B register.
Here, the B register value is a value corresponding to the value of the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) (any of "1" (first reel 31) to "3" (third reel 31)).
(3) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the C register.
Here, the C register value is a value corresponding to the stop switch 42. When the C register value is "00000001 (B)", it corresponds to the first (left) reel 31, and when it is "00000010 (B)", it corresponds to the second (middle) reel 31 and is "00000100 (B)". In the case of, it corresponds to the third (right) reel 31.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1016, and the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address “F017 (H)” in FIG. 133 is acquired. Here, the value of the input port rising data A is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1017, it is determined whether or not there is a rise of the stop switch 42 (whether or not the rise data of the stop switch 42 is on).
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) calculation is performed between the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rise data A). .. The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) the A register value and the C register value. The operation result is stored in the A register value.

Here, for example, when the loop processing in steps S1016 to S1019 is performed for the first time, the C register value is "00000001 (B)", so that the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (left) reel 31 is A. It is stored in the register value.
Further, when the loop processing is performed for the second time, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)", and the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (middle) reel 31 is stored in the A register value. Will be done.
Furthermore, when the loop processing is performed for the third time, the C register value is updated to "00000100 (B)", and the rising data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (right) reel is stored in the A register value. Will be done.
Further, in step S1019 in which the loop processing is performed for the third time, the C register value is updated to "00001000 (B)", and it is determined that the processing of all reels 31 is completed ("Yes" in step S1019).
(3) When it is determined that the result of the calculation in (2) above is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022. On the other hand, when it is determined as "0" (zero flag = "1") as a result of the calculation, it is determined that the stop switch 42 does not rise, and the process proceeds to step S1018.

In step S1018, the next reel number and reel bit are set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the B register value. Therefore, during the first loop of steps S1016 to S1019, it is updated from "00000001 (B)" to "000000010 (B)", and during the second loop, it changes from "00000010 (B)" to "000000111 (B)". Will be updated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not the processing has been completed for all the reels 31.
Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform a shift operation to shift the C register value to the left by "1". Therefore, during the first loop, it is updated from "00000001 (B)" to "000000010 (B)", and during the second loop, it is updated from "00000010 (B)" to "000000100 (B)", and the third loop. The time is updated from "00000100 (B)" to "00001000 (B)".
(2) When the D3 bit of the C register value is "1", it is determined that "Yes" (processing of all reels 31 is completed).
If "No" is determined in step S1019, the process returns to step S1016, and if "Yes" is determined, the process proceeds to step S1020.

In step S1020, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is acquired. At this point, since the address value of the reel stop flag is stored in the HL register (step S1015), the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1021 to save the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS). This process is a process of storing the A register value in the address "F01E (H)" (stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS)). By this processing, the value of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the value of the stop reception information data (_PT_STOP_STS) become the same.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1017 that the stop switch 42 rises and the process proceeds to step S1022, the stop switch 42 is accepted. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Update the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) to the latest information.
Here, the A register value (in step S1017, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) and the input port rise data A are ANDed, and the calculation result and the C register value are ANDed), and the reel stop flag ( _FL_STOP_LP) and XOR (exclusive OR) operation are performed, the result is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).

For example, in step S1017
Reel stop flag: 00000111 (B)
Input port rise data A: 00000001 (B)
When both are ANDed, it becomes "00000001 (B)".
Further, when the C register value is "00000001 (B)", the AND operation of both results in "00000001 (B)".
Further, when this value and the reel stop flag "000000111 (B)" are XOR-calculated, it becomes "000000110 (B)". This value becomes the reel stop flag after the update.
(2) Update the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) to the latest information. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the stop / control reel number data.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1023, and the symbol combination control is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) “Deceleration start”, that is, “4 (D)” is set in the reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137).
(2) The symbol number to be the stop position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).
(3) The value obtained by subtracting "1" from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) is stored in the A register value. When "1" is subtracted from the symbol number "0", the subtraction (special subtraction) is executed so as to be "19 (D)" (maximum value of the symbol number).
This process is an operation for obtaining the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) (lower row) by subtracting "1" from the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (middle row). At this point, the control symbol number is stored in the A register. For example, when the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) is "4", "3" is stored as the control symbol number. Further, when the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) is "0", "19" is stored as the control symbol number.
Then, the process proceeds to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) (FIG. 195) in step S1024.

In the example of FIG. 194, even when a plurality of stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, the reel stop control can be executed corresponding to one reel 31.
Here, "simultaneous pressing" refers to a case where the rising data of a plurality of (two in this example) stop switches 42 are turned on in the same interrupt processing.
less than,
1. 1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time while all reels 31 are rotating. 2. When the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating. An example will be described when the left and middle stop switches 42 are simultaneously pressed when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating.

1. 1. When the left and middle stop switches 42 are simultaneously pressed during the rotation of all reels 31 In FIG. 194, "Yes" is determined in step S1014, and when the process proceeds to step S1015, as described above,
(1) The address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is stored in the HL register.
(2) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the B register.
(3) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Here, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) calculation is performed between the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rise data A). .. The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this point is "00000011 (B)". Therefore, when this value and the A register value "00000011 (B)" are ANDed, the result is "00000011 (B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "00000001 (B)" of the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the C register value "00000001 (B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, as a result of the above calculation, since it is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information.
Here, the A register value (00000001 (B)) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (00000011 (B)) are subjected to XOR (exclusive OR) calculation, and the calculation result "00000011 (B)" is calculated in the A register. And the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000001 (B)) is stored in the stop / control reel number data.

As described above, when the left and middle stop switches 42 are simultaneously pressed during the rotation of all reels 31, the stop control of the left reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the left stop switch 42 is executed. In other words, the stop control of the middle reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
Further, by the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the data "00000011 (B)" indicating "0" that the left stop switch 42 has received.
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after the stop control of the left reel 31 is executed, generally, one interrupt time has elapsed, so the rising data A is cleared. However, even before one interrupt time has elapsed, when the process proceeds to step S752, the rising data A is cleared by steps S1011 and S1012, so that the middle reel is not operated again unless the middle stop switch 42 is operated. The stop control of 31 is not executed.

2. 2. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. In FIG. 194, "Yes" is determined in step S1014, and step S1015 is performed. Proceed, as mentioned above,
(1) The address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is stored in the HL register.
(2) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the B register.
(3) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the middle and right stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) calculation is performed between the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rise data A). .. The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this point is "00000011 (B)". Therefore, when this value and the A register value "000000110 (B)" are ANDed, the result is "000000110 (B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "000000000000 (B)" of the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the C register value "00000001 (B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 does not rise, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010 (B)".
Next, the process proceeds to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not the processing has been completed for all the reels 31.
Here, first, a shift operation for shifting the C register value to the left by "1" is performed. Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1", and since it is not "1" here, it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S1016.

In the second step S1016, the value of the input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) calculation is performed between the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rise data A). .. The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this point is "00000011 (B)". Therefore, when this value and the A register value "000000110 (B)" are ANDed, the result is "000000110 (B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) The A register value "00000011 (B)" and the C register value "00000010 (B)" are ANDed (logically producted), and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value is "00000010 (B)".

Then, in step S1017, as a result of the above calculation, since it is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information. In this process, the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) value "000000110 (B)" are XOR (exclusive-OR) calculated, and the calculation result is "00000100 (B)". Is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010 (B)) is stored in the stop / control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right stop switches 42 are simultaneously pressed while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is operated. The stop control of 31 is executed. In other words, the stop control of the right reel 31 corresponding to the operation of the right stop switch 42 is not executed at this timing.
Further, by the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the data "00000100 (B)" indicating "0" that the left and middle stop switches 42 have received.
Furthermore, when the process returns to step S752 again after the stop control of the middle reel 31 is executed, the rising data A is cleared as described above. Therefore, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated again, the right reel 31 Stop control is not executed.

3. 3. When the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, and the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time. In FIG. 194, "Yes" is determined in step S1014, and step S1015 is performed. When you proceed,
(1) The address "F0AD (H)" of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is stored in the HL register.
(2) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the B register.
(3) “00000001 (B)” is stored in the C register.

In the next step S1016, the value of the input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Here, since the left and middle stop switches 42 are pressed at the same time, the input port rising data A (A register value) is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) calculation is performed between the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rise data A). .. The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this point is "00000011 (B)". Therefore, when this value and the A register value "00000011 (B)" are ANDed, the result is "00000010 (B)". The value after this calculation becomes the A register value.
(2) AND (logical product) operation is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the AND operation result "0000000000 (B)" of the A register value "000000010 (B)" and the C register value "00000001 (B)" is set as the A register value.

Then, in step S1017, since the result of the above calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 does not rise, and the process proceeds to step S1018.
In step S1018, "1" is added to the B register value. Therefore, the B register value is updated to "00000010 (B)".
Next, the process proceeds to step S1019, and it is determined whether or not the processing has been completed for all the reels 31.
Here, first, a shift operation for shifting the C register value to the left by "1" is performed. Therefore, the C register value is updated to "00000010 (B)".
Next, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the C register value is "1", and since it is not "1" here, it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S1016.

In the second step S1016, the value of the input port rising data A is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value is "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1017, the following processing is executed.
(1) AND (logical product) calculation is performed between the data (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) stored in the address (F0AD (H)) indicated by the HL register value and the A register value (input port rise data A). .. The calculation result is stored in the A register value.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at this point is "00000011 (B)". Therefore, when this value and the A register value "00000011 (B)" are ANDed, the result is "00000010 (B)". This value becomes the A register value.
(2) The A register value "000000010 (B)" and the C register value "000000010 (B)" are ANDed (logically producted), and the operation result is stored in the A register value. Therefore, the A register value is "00000010 (B)".

Then, in step S1017, as a result of the above calculation, since it is not "0" (zero flag ≠ "1"), it is determined that the stop switch 42 has risen, and the process proceeds to step S1022.
In step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the latest information. In this process, the A register value "00000010 (B)" and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) value "000000110 (B)" are XOR (exclusive-OR) calculated, and the calculation result is "00000100 (B)". Is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP).
Next, the B register value (00000010 (B)) is stored in the stop / control reel number data.

As described above, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the left and middle stop switches 42 are simultaneously pressed while the middle and right reels 31 are rotating, the middle reel corresponding to the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is operated. The stop control of 31 is executed. In other words, even if the left stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 that has already stopped is operated, the stop control of the left reel 1 is not executed.
Further, by the process of step S1022, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is updated to the data "00000100 (B)" indicating "0" that the left and middle stop switches 42 have received.
As described above, even when the stop switch 42 is pressed at the same time, only one reel 31 can be stopped and controlled.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing a stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. 194.
This process is a process of updating the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) based on the reel 31 to be stopped this time.
In step S1031, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE). Here, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register value in step S1023 of FIG. 194.

In the next step S1032, the number of symbol groups is set. Since the symbol group of the present embodiment is composed of the first group to the ninth group, this process is a process of storing "9" in the B register. Next, the process proceeds to step S1033, and the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 196, which will be described later, and is a process of identifying any one address of the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_ #) and acquiring the symbol combination data stored in the address. .. The symbol combination data acquired in this process is stored in the A register.
Further, after storing "9" in the B register in step S1032, the B register value is saved in the stack area before executing the next step S1033. Then, after executing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033, the B register value saved in the stack area is restored. This is because in step S1033, the B register is newly used and the value stored in the B register is used again.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1034, and the RWM address of the stop symbol data corresponding to the symbol group to be updated is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address "F0B6 (H)" before the "1" address of the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add the B register value to the HL register value. Then, the result of addition is used as the HL register value.

Here, in step S1032, "9" is stored in the B register, so in the first step S1032,
HL register value = HL register value "F0B6 (H)" + "9 (H)" = "F0BF (H)"
And becomes the address of the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9). Further, in step S1036 described later, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and steps S1033 to S1036 are repeated until the B register value becomes "0". As a result, the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) is repeatedly executed from the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) to the stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1).

In step S1035, the stop symbol data is saved. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) An AND (logical product) operation is performed between the A register value (symbol combination data acquired in step S1033) and the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC)). Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC). As a result, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is updated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1036, and it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value, and use the subtraction result as the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is "0", it is determined that "Yes" (processing for the number of symbol groups has been completed), and this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that "No" (processing for the number of symbol groups has not been completed), the process returns to step S1033, and the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) corresponding to the next symbol group is executed.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the reel symbol data set (M_PICDAT_SET) in step S1033 of FIG. 195.
As described above, the B register value is saved in the stack area before executing this flowchart.
The reel symbol data set is a process of acquiring symbol combination data corresponding to the current symbol group. For example, this process
Stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = "1" (first (left) reel)
Control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) = "3" (symbol number that stops at the bottom)
Group 3 (B register value = "3")
Suppose that
In addition, the following example describes the case where the processing is performed under the above conditions.
Stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) = any of "1", "2", and "3" Control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) = any of "0" to "19" B register value = "0" to " In the case of any of 9 ”, the symbol combination data can be acquired by the same method.

When the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3" as described above, the symbol number stopped at the effective line is "5", and the corresponding symbol is "replay".
In this case, by processing the reel symbol data set, the data "@ REP_01 OR @ REP_02 OR @ REP_07" of the address "1217 (H)", that is, "10000110 (B)" is stored in the A register in FIG. 182. It becomes.

In FIG. 196, in step S1041, stop / control reel number data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
In the next step S1042, the reel symbol search table address offset table (FIG. 180 (A)) is set. This process is a process of storing the address "11FF (H)" in which "1" is subtracted from the start address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1043, and table selection (R_TBL_SET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 197, which will be described later. By this processing, the start address of the #th reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_ #), specifically,
1203 (H): Start address of the first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) 123A (H): Start address of the second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) 128F (H): Start of the third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) One of the values of the address is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1044 to acquire the control symbol number. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 198, which will be described later. When this process is executed, the symbol data corresponding to the symbol on the effective line is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the number of reel symbol data searches is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value (symbol data) in the C register value. The C register value that stores the symbol data is used in the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) described later.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1047, and the offset of the symbol combination table is set. This process is a process of storing "11 (D)" in the A register value. For example, the start address of the first reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_1) is "1203 (H)", but from this position to the address "120E (H)" where the first table offset is stored is "11". Since there is an address, it is set to "11".

In the next step S1048, the designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. Then, the result of addition is used as the HL register value.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Here, if "1203 (H)" (the start address of the first reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_1)) is stored in the HL register in step S1043,
HL register value = 1203 (H) +11 (D) = 120E (H)
Will be.
Therefore, the A register value is "00000011 (B)". As described above, in the data of the address "1203 (H)", the upper 2 bits are the reel symbol data information, and the lower 6 bits are the table offset values.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1049 to generate an offset for the next symbol combination table. This process performs an AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)". Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. As a result, for example, in the above example, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1050, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has been acquired. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when the subtraction result is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has not been acquired).
Here, the loop processing of steps S1048 to S1050 will be described by taking as an example the case where the HL register value is “120E (H)” and the B register value is “3” as in the above example.
(1) In the first step S1048,
HL register value = 1203 (H) +11 (D) = 120E (H)
Will be.
In step S1049
A register value = 3 (H)
Will be.
In step S1050
B register value = 3-1 = 2
Will be.
Therefore, it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step S step S1048.

(2) In the second step S1048,
HL register value = 120E (H) +3 (D) = 1211 (H)
Will be.
In step S1049
A register value = 000000111 (B)
Will be.
In step S1050
B register value = 2-1 = 1
Will be.
Therefore, it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step S step S1048.

(3) In the third step S1048,
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
Will be.
In step S1049
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
Will be.
In step S1050
B register value = 1-1 = 0
Will be.
Therefore, it is determined as "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S step S1051.
As a result, the table offset "8 (H)" of the symbol 3 group is stored in the A register.
When "Yes" is set in step S1050, the HL register value is saved in the stack area. The HL register value at this point is an address value that stores "reel symbol data information + table offset".

In step S1051, the reel symbol combination table is corrected. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. So, for example, in the above example,
HL register value = 1214 (H) -1 (H) = 1213 (H)
Will be.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1052, and the bit count (M_BIT_COUNT) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 199, which will be described later, and is a process of counting how many bits are “1” in the reel symbol data information. For example, when the bit number count is executed for the data "11011010 (B)" of the address "1213 (H)", it is counted as "5". After the bit number count is executed, the bit number is stored in the A register.
After the bit number count in step S1052 is completed, the HL register value and the BC register value are returned from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, it is determined whether or not the inspection final bit is on. This process determines whether or not the carry flag is "1", and if the carry flag is "1", it determines "Yes".
The details will be described later, but in the bit count (M_BIT_COUNT), the reel symbol data information is shifted to the left by the number corresponding to the symbol to be stopped this time, and "1" is displayed at the last left "1" shift. When it comes out, the carry flag is set to "1". For example, in the reel symbol data information "11011010 (B)" of the address "1213 (H)", when the symbol to be stopped this time is "replay", shift "1" to the left four times corresponding to "replay". To do. Therefore, in this case, the carry flag becomes "1" at the fourth left "1" shift.
If it is determined in step S1053 that the carry flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S1054, and if it is determined that the carry flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S1055. In other words, in step S1053, it is determined whether or not the left reel 31 has a symbol combination including "replay" and belongs to the third group. In this case, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no symbol combination, and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that there is a symbol combination.
In step S1054, the reel symbol data is set. This process executes an XOR (exclusive OR) operation between the A register value and the A register value, and sets the A register value to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

On the other hand, in step S1055, the designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is used as the HL register value.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Here, the HL register value is a value saved when “Yes” is set in step S1050, and is an address that stores the reel symbol data information and the table offset. Further, as the A register value, the number of bits turned on in the bit number count in step S1052 is stored. For example, when the HL register value is "1214 (H)" and the A register value is "3 (H)", the HL register value is "1217 (H)".
Therefore, the data at the address "1217 (H)" is "@ REP_01 OR @ REP_02 OR @ REP_07", that is, "100000110 (B)", and the value is stored in the A register.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the table selection (R_TBL_SEL) in step S1043 of FIG. 196.
In FIG. 197, in step S1061, the designated address data is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the A register value to the HL register value. The result of the addition is used as the HL register value.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In step S1042 of FIG. 196, "11FF (H)" is stored in the HL register. Further, the A register value is a value of stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL), and is any of "1", "2", and "3".
Therefore, by the processing of step S1061, the HL register value becomes any one of "1200 (H)", "1201 (H)", or "1202 (H)".
Further, by the process of (2) above, any offset value shown in FIG. 180 (A) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1062, and the designated address is set. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value and using the added result as the HL register value. For example, when the HL register value is "1200 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "3 (H)", the HL register value is "1203 (H)" and the first reel symbol array. It is the start address of the table (TBL_PICARG_1). When the HL register value is "1201 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "39 (H)", the HL register value is "123A (H)" and the second reel symbol. It is the start address of the array table (TBL_PICARG_2). Furthermore, when the HL register value is "1202 (H)" and the A register value (offset value) is "8D (H)", the HL register value is "128F (H)" and the third reel. It is the start address of the symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_3).
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) in step S1045 of FIG. 196.
This process is a process of acquiring the symbol data of the symbol stopped at the effective line by using the # reel symbol array table (TBL_PICARG_ #) based on the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) corresponding to the symbol to be stopped.
For example, in a game in which it is determined that the symbol that stops at the effective line is the third "black BAR" based on the stop operation reception of the left reel 31, the lower 4 of the address "1203 (H)" in FIG. 181. The symbol data "@ ZGR_02" corresponding to the bit data is acquired. As shown in the reel symbol definition of FIG. 181, "@ ZGR_02" is symbol data corresponding to "black BAR". Further, as shown in the reel symbol definition, the actual value of "@ ZGR_02" is "1 (H)".

In FIG. 198, step S1071 generates the table offset. This process is a process of issuing an instruction to shift the A register value to the right by "1".
Here, before this processing, in step S1044 of FIG. 196, the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register.
Therefore, when the A register value is, for example, "00000001 (B)" (odd number), the carry flag becomes "1" when shifted to the right by "1". Further, when the A register value is, for example, "00000010 (B)" (even number), the carry flag is "0" when shifted to the right by "1". Furthermore, when the A register value is, for example, "00000011 (B)" (odd number), shifting it to the right by "1" causes the carry flag to become "1".
Then, the value after shifting to the right by "1" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1072, the designated data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the A register.
Here, the start address of the #th reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_ #) is stored in the HL register by step S1043 (FIG. 197) of FIG. The A register value is a value obtained by shifting the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) to the right by "1". Therefore, when the HL register value is, for example, "1203 (H)" (see FIG. 181) and the A register value is, for example, "1" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "3"), A after the calculation is performed. The register value is the data of the address of "1204 (H)", that is, "@ ZGR_05 * 16 + @ ZGR_04".
Here, as shown in FIG. 181, "@ ZGR_05" (upper 4 bits) is "0100 (B)" (4 (H)), and "@ ZGR_04" (lower 4 bits) is "0011 (B)". "(3 (H)), so the A register value is" 0100/0011 (B) ".

In the next step S1073, it is determined whether or not the table data search number is an odd number. In this process, it is determined by the process of step S1071 whether or not the carry flag is "1", and when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the carry flag is an odd number. If it is determined that the table data search number is odd, the process proceeds to step S1075, and if it is determined that the table data search number is not odd, the process proceeds to step S1074.
In step S1074, even-numbered data is acquired. This process is a process of exchanging the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data (A register value) acquired in step S1072.
For example, when the A register value is "0100/0011 (B)" as in the above example, when the process of step S1074 is executed, it becomes "0011/0100 (B)".

In step S1075, designated data is generated. This process is a process of executing an AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "000011111 (B)" and storing the operation result in the A register value. By this process, the upper 4 bits are masked.
For example, when the A register value is "0100011 (B)" as described above, the AND (logical product) operation between this value and "00001111 (B)" is executed, and the A register value is "00000011 (B)". ) ”.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) in step S1052 of FIG. 196.
Here, immediately before the bit number count processing, the HL register value is the data updated in step S1051 of FIG. 196, and the start address value of the reel symbol data information (for example, in the case of the first group of the left reel 31). , “120D (H)” in FIG. 182).
Further, the C register value is the 4-bit data acquired by the 4-bit data acquisition in step S1045 by the process of step S1046 in FIG. 196.

In FIG. 199, in step S1081, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the C register value and using the result of the addition as the C register value.
In the next step S1082, "0" is set as the initial value of the number of on-bits. This process is a process of setting the A register value to "0" by performing an XOR (exclusive OR) operation of the A register value and the A register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1083, and the number of processes is set. This process is a process of storing "8" in the B register. Here, "8" is a value corresponding to the number of bits.

In the next step S1084, inspection data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the D register. Therefore, the D register value becomes the reel symbol data information.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1085, and it is determined whether or not the bit is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Perform an operation to shift the D register value to the left by "1".
(2) As a result of the above calculation, when the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes".

If it is determined in step S1085 that the bit is on, the process proceeds to step S1086, and if it is determined that the bit is not on, the process proceeds to step S1087.
In step S1086, "1" is added to the number of on-bits. This process is a process of adding "1" to the A register value.
In the next step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the number of inspections. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the C register value and using the subtraction result as the C register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1088 to determine whether or not to end the inspection. This process determines whether or not the C register value is "0" (whether or not the zero flag is "1"). When it is determined that the C register value is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the inspection is terminated, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the inspection is not completed, the process proceeds to step S1089.

In step S1089, it is determined whether or not the number of processes has been completed. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, it is determined whether or not the subtracted result is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the number of processes has been performed. When it is determined that the number of processes has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S1085. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of processes has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1090.
In step S1090, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the added value is used as the HL register value. Then, the process proceeds to step S1083.

The above bit number counting process will be described with reference to a specific example.
Although an example will be described below, the process can be executed in the same manner as below regardless of the number of symbols in any group of any reel 31.
In this example,
HL register value = 1213 (H) (3 groups of symbols on the 1st reel 31)
C register value = 3 (replay) (“4” in step S1081)
Suppose that
in this case,
(1) First step S1083: B register value = 8 (initial value)
Step S1084: D register value "11011010 (B)" (design data stored in the address "1213 (H))"
Step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left "1", carry flag = 1, and therefore "Yes"
Step S1086: A register value = 0 + 1 = 1
Step S1087: C register value = 4-1 = 3
Step S1088: Zero flag ≠ 1, hence "No"
Step S1089: B register value = 8-1 = 7, hence "No"
(2) Second step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left "1", carry flag = 1, and therefore "Yes".
Step S1086: A register value = 1 + 1 = 2
Step S1087: C register value = 3-1 = 2
Step S1088: Zero flag ≠ 1, hence "No"
Step S1089: B register value = 7-1 = 6, hence "No"
(3) Third step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left "1", carry flag ≠ 1, and therefore "No"
Step S1087: C register value = 2-1 = 1
Step S1088: Zero flag ≠ 1, hence "No"
Step S1089: B register value = 6-1 = 5, hence "No"
(4) Fourth step S1085: Shift the D register value to the left "1", carry flag = 1, and therefore "Yes".
Step S1086: A register value = 2 + 1 = 3
Step S1087: C register value = 1-1 = 0
Step S1088: Zero flag = 1, so "Yes" (end of processing)
Will be.

In this case, when the bit number counting is finished and the process proceeds to step S1053 in FIG. 196, the carry flag is “1”, so the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055
HL register value = HL register value "1214 (H)" + A register value "3 (H)" = 1217 (H)
A register value = data at the address "1217 (H)" indicated by the HL register value = @ REP_01 OR @ REP_02 OR @ REP_07 (10000110 (B))
Will be.
As described above, in the bit number count, when the stop symbol is determined, the symbol combination data of the Nth group of the # reel 31 corresponding to the stop symbol is specified.

Subsequently, how the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is updated by the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) shown in FIG. 195 when each stop switch 42 is operated will be described with reference to specific examples.
In the following explanation
1. 1. Example when the role is not won 1-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 1-2. During stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 1-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 2. Example of winning a special role (RBA) 2-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 2-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 2-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped. Example of winning a replay (replay 01) 3-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 3-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 3-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped. Example of winning a small role (when the push order is correct when the push order bell is won) 4-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped 4-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 4-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped. Example of winning a small role (when the push order is incorrect when the push order bell is won) 5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped 5-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped 5-3. The following will be described in the order of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42.

1. 1. When the winning combination is not won In this example, the game is determined to have the winning number "26" as a result of the winning combination lottery, and the left stop is made when the symbol number "18" passes through the middle of the left reel 31. The switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "17" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the middle stage of the right reel 41 is operated of symbol number "19". Because the stop switch 42 was operated while the symbol was passing,
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE): 1 (watermelon) when the left reel 31 is stopped
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the middle reel 31 is stopped: 0 (bell A)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the right reel 31 is stopped: 2 (blue BAR)
Shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the effective line is "black BAR (No. 3)"-"cherry (No. 1)"-"blue BAR (No. 2)", and the winning combination is not won.
Also, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "000000111 (B)"
Is.

1-1. During the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 In the stop symbol set of FIG. 195, in step S1031, "1" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
(1st time)
By the process of step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol 9 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "1236 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) of the address indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is "00000011 (B)"). As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

(2nd time)
By the process of step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol 8 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "1230 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

(3rd time)
By the process of step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol 7 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "122B (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) of the address indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

(4th time)
By the process of step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000 (B)" (@ WIN_15) of the address "1226 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the small winning combination 15 exists as a "black BAR" in the symbol 6 group of the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) of the address indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

(5th time)
By the process of step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol 5 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "1220 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

(6th time)
By the process of step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol 4 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "121B (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) of the address indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “000001111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

(7th time)
By the process in step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010000 (B)" (@ REP_04) of the address "1216 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that the replay 04 exists as a "black BAR" in the symbol 3 group of the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00010000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) of the address indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

(8th time)
In step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol 2 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "1210 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

(9th time)
In step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "black BAR" does not exist in the symbol 1 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "120D (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "black BAR" stops on the effective line during the stop operation of the left stop switch 42, there is a possibility that the symbol combination of the symbol 3 group or the symbol 6 group may be stopped, but other symbols It can be seen that there is no possibility of stopping the symbol combination.

Next, in the stop symbol set of FIG. 195, the reel symbol data set (FIG. 196) of step S1033 will be described with an example.
Of the above, the fourth step S1033 (6 groups of symbols) will be taken as an example. The B register value in this case is "6".
In FIG. 196, in step S1041, the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL), that is, “1” is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1042, "11FF (H)" is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1043, and table selection (R_TBL_SET) is executed. By this processing, the start address "1203 (H)" of the first reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_1) is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1044, and the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE), that is, "1" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1045, 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) is executed. By this process, the symbol data "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the "black BAR" is stored in the A register.
In the next step S1046, the A register value (symbol data) is stored in the C register value. Therefore, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1047, and "11 (D)" (offset value) is stored in the A register value.
In the next step S1048, the HL register value = "1203 (H)" (the start address of the first reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_1)) + "11 (D)" (offset value) = "120E (H)". ..
Further, the A register value is a table offset value of the lower 6 bits of the data at the address "120E (H)", and is "00000011 (B)".

In the next step S1049, the AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)" is performed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register value becomes "00000011 (B)".
In the next step S1050, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when the subtraction result is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the symbol combination table of the number of symbol groups has not been acquired).
Here, at the beginning,
HL register value = 120E (H)
B register value = 6
Is.
Therefore, the loop processing in steps S1048 to S1050 is as follows.
(1st time)
HL register value = 120E (H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(2nd time)
HL register value = 120E (H) +3 (D) = 1211 (H)
A register value = 3 (H)
B register value = 5-1 = 4 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(3rd time)
HL register value = 1211 (H) + 3 (D) = 1214 (H)
A register value = 8 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value = 4-1 = 3 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)

(4th time)
HL register value = 1214 (H) + 8 (D) = 121C (H)
A register value = 5 (H) (00001000 (B))
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(5th time)
HL register value = 121C (H) + 5 (D) = 1221 (H)
A register value = 4 (H)
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (determined as "No" and returns to step S1048)
(6th time)
HL register value = 1221 (H) + 4 (D) = 1225 (H)
A register value = 7 (H)
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (determined as "Yes" and proceeds to step S1051)

Here, the HL register value "1225 (H)" is saved in the stack area.
In step S1051, the HL register value = "1225 (H)"-"1 (H)" = "1224 (H)".
In step S1052, the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) is executed. Here, the bit number count is executed for the data "0111010 (B)" of the address "1224 (H)". In this example, since it is counted as "1", the A register value is "1".
After that, the HL register value and the BC register value are returned from the stack area.

In the next step S1053, since the carry flag is "1", it is determined to be "Yes".
In step S1055, the data stored in the address indicated by the value "1226 (H)" obtained by adding the A register value "1" to the HL register value "1225 (H)" is stored in the A register.
Therefore, the data "@ WIN_15" of the address "1226 (H)", that is, "01000000 (B)" is stored in the A register.
The A register value "01000000 (B)" is subsequently ANDed with the initial value "1111111 (B)" stored in the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) in the stop symbol set (_M_STOPPIC_SET). (Logical product) Calculated. As a result, the data of the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is updated from "11111111 (B)" to "01000000 (B)".

Next, in the above example, a specific example of 4-bit data acquisition (M_4BITDAT_GET) (FIG. 198) in step S1045 will be described.
Before this process
A register = 1 (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
HL register = 1203 (H) (start address of 1st reel symbol sequence table (TBL_PICARG_1))
It has become.
In FIG. 198, in step S1071, the A register value is shifted to the right by "1". As a result, the carry flag becomes "1". Further, the A register value is "00000000000 (B)".

In step S1072, the data stored in the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the A register. Since the HL register value is "1203 (H)" and the A register value is "0", the A register value after the calculation is the data "@ ZGR_08 * 16 + @ ZGR_02" of the address "1203 (H)", that is, It becomes "0111/0001 (B)".
In step S1073, since the carry flag is "1" by the above calculation, the process proceeds to step S1075.
In step S1075, the AND (logical product) operation of the A register value and "000011111 (B)" is executed. As a result, the A register value becomes "0000/0001 (B)", and the symbol data "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the "black BAR" is stored.

Next, in the above example, a specific example of the bit number count (M_BIT_COUNT) (FIG. 199) in step S1052 of FIG. 196 will be described.
Just before the bit count
HL register = 1224 (H) (data updated in step S1051 of FIG. 196)
C register = 00000001 (B) (symbol data acquired in 4-bit data acquisition in FIG. 196 (step S1045))
It has become.
In FIG. 199, in step S1081, "1" is added to the C register value, and the result of the addition is taken as the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "2".
In step S1082, the A register value is set to "0".
In step S1083, "8" is stored in the B register.

In step S1084, the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value “1224 (H)” is stored in the D register. Therefore, the D register value is "0111010 (B)".
In step S1085, the D register value is shifted to the left by "1". As a result, since the carry flag is "0", it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S1087.
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "1".
The process proceeds to step S1088, and since the C register value is not "0", it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S1089.
In step S1089, "1" is subtracted from the B register value. As a result, the B register value becomes "7" and is not "0", so the process returns to step S1085.

In step S1085, the D register value is shifted to the left by "1". Since the carry flag is "1", it is determined to be "Yes".
Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1086, and "1" is added to the A register value. As a result, the A register value becomes "1".
In step S1087, "1" is subtracted from the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes "0".
The process proceeds to step S1088, and since the C register value is “0”, it is determined as “Yes”, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Then, when the process proceeds to step S1053 of FIG. 196, it is determined that the inspection final bit is on, and the process proceeds to step S1055.
In step S1055, the designated address data is set.
Here, the value "1226 (H)" obtained by adding the A register value "1" to the HL register value "1225 (H)" returned from the stack area is set as the HL register value and stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. The existing data is stored in the A register. Therefore, the A register value becomes the data of the address "1226 (H)", that is, "01000000 (B)".

1-2. During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (bell A)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Cherry (No. 1)"
Suppose that
In addition, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at this point is as described above.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
Is.

In this case, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" of the address "128E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00110000 (B)" of the address "1289 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00110000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "127F (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the symbol 6 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "125F (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“01000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "0100001 (B)" of the address "125E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "000000110 (B)" of the address "1259 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “000000110 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“00000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000 (B)" of the address "1253 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00011000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00010000 (B) ") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the symbol 2 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "cherry" does not exist in the symbol 1 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "1244 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "black BAR" stops on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped and the "watermelon" stops on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 is used. It can be seen that it has the possibility of stopping.

1-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 2 (blue BAR)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Blue BAR (No. 2)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "2" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 9 group of the right reel 31 (see the address "12DA (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" of the address "12D3 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10000110 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010 (B)" of the address "12CA (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00011010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" of the address "12C1 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "10000000 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) ("01000000 (B)") of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "001110 (B)" of the address "12B7 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00110010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "12B1 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" of the address "12A7 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“00010000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 2 group of the right reel 31 (see the address "129F (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 1 group of the right reel 31 (see the address "1299 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the right stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
From the above, "black BAR" stops at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, "watermelon" stops at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and "watermelon" stops at the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. When "Blue BAR" is stopped, it is known that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped at the valid line (it is a non-winning of the winning combination).

2. 2. When the special role is won Next, the update of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) when the special role is won will be described.
In this example, the game is determined to have the winning number "26" as a result of the winning combination lottery, and the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of the symbol number "16" passes through the middle stage of the left reel 31. After that, the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "5" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the symbol of symbol number "7" is passed through the middle stage of the right reel 31. It is assumed that the RBA wins a prize because the right stop switch 42 is operated while it is on.
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the left reel 31 is stopped: 16 (watermelon)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the middle reel 31 is stopped: 7 (bell B)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the right reel 31 is stopped: 8 (black BAR)
Shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the effective line is "blue BAR (No. 18)"-"blue BAR (No. 8)"-"black BAR (No. 8)".
Also, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "000000111 (B)"
Is.

2-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped When the left stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, “16 (D)” is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "1238 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“00000011 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 8 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "1230 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 7 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "122B (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 6 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "1224 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 5 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "1220 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 4 group of the left reel 31 (see the address "121B (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000001111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" of the address "1215 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that 1 BB exists as "blue BAR" in the symbol 3 group of the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11111111 (B)" of the address "1212 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that RBI to RBP exist as "blue BAR" in the symbol 2 group of the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11111111 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“111111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "11111111 (B)" of the address "120F (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that RBA to RBH exist as "blue BAR" in the symbol 1 group of the left reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11111111 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“111111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "11111111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000010 (B)"
From the above, when "blue BAR" stops on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, there is a possibility that the symbol combination of the symbol 1 group to the symbol 3 group and the symbol 9 group may be stopped, but the symbol 4 group It can be seen that there is no possibility of stopping the symbol combination of the 8 groups of symbols.

2-2. During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (bell B)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Blue BAR (No. 8)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 9 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "128B (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“00000010 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "000000111 (B)" of the address "1283 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “000000111 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“00000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010000 (B)" of the address "1279 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00010000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" of the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 5 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "125A (H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 4 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "1255 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011 (B)" of the address "124E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (00000001 (B) ") indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 2 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data “000011111 (B)” of the address “1246 (H)” is stored in the A register. This means that RBA to RBD exist as the symbol of "blue BAR" in the first group of the middle reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “000011111 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "000011111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
From the above, when the "blue BAR" stops on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped and the "blue BAR" stops on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the RBA to RBD and 1BB are set. It can be seen that there is a possibility of stopping the corresponding symbol combination.

2-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 8 (black BAR)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Black BAR (No. 8)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "8" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" of the address "12DC (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010001 (B)" of the address "12D4 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00010001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100,000 (B)" of the address "12CB (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “011000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100 (B)" of the address "12C2 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000001100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" of the address "12B8 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000 (B)" of the address "12A8 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“00000001 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011111 (B)" of the address "12A1 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that RBI to RBM exist as the symbols of "black BAR" in the symbol 2 group of the right reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00011111 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010001 (B)" of the address "129B (H)" is stored in the A register. It means that RBA or RBE exists as the symbol of "black BAR" in the symbol 1 group of the right reel 31.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00010001 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("00001111 (B)" indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) is performed. ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the right stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
From the above, "blue BAR" stops at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, "blue BAR" stops at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and becomes the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. When the "black BAR" stops, it can be seen that the symbol combination corresponding to the RBA stops at the effective line.

3. 3. At the time of winning the replay Next, the update of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at the time of winning the replay will be described.
In this example, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of the symbol number "11" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31 in the game determined as the winning number "1" as a result of the winning combination lottery. After that, the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "5" passes through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the symbol of symbol number "2" passes through the middle stage of the right reel 31. It is assumed that Replay 01 wins a prize because the right stop switch 42 is operated while it is.
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the left reel 31 is stopped: 13 (red 7)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the middle reel 31 is stopped: 7 (bell B)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the right reel 31 is stopped: 4 (bell A)
Shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the effective line is "Replay (No. 15)"-"Blue BAR (No. 8)"-"Bell A (No. 4)".
Also, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "000000111 (B)"
Is.

3-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped When the left stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, “13 (D)” is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“00000011 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" of the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the symbol 8 group of the left reel 31, there are a small winning combination 25, a small winning combination 31, and a small winning combination 32 as a combination having the “replay” symbol.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "11000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100 (B)" of the address "122E (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the symbol 7 group of the left reel 31, there are a small winning combination 19, a small winning combination 20, a small winning combination 23, and a small winning combination 24 as the winning combination having the “replay” symbol.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11001100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "11001100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000 (B)" of the address "1228 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the symbol 6 group of the left reel 31, there are a small winning combination 14 and a small winning combination 16 as a combination having the “replay” symbol.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10100000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "1010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000100 (B)" of the address "121D (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (000011111 (B) ”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" of the address "1217 (H)" is stored in the A register. This means that in the symbol 3 group of the left reel 31, replay 01, replay 02, and replay 07 exist as a combination having the “replay” symbol.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10000110 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "100000110 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "1000101 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "1010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11001100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"

3-2. During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 7 (bell B)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Blue BAR (No. 8)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "7" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 9 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "128B (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "000000111 (B)" of the address "1283 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “000000111 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“11000001 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00010000 (B)" of the address "1279 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00010000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“11001100 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000000 (B)" of the address "1271 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“101000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "10000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 5 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "125A (H)").
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 4 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "1255 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (“00000100 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011 (B)" of the address "124E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000011 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“100000110 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data). This means that "blue BAR" does not exist in the symbol 2 group of the middle reel 31 (see the address "1248 (H)").
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, the symbol combination data “000011111 (B)” of the address “1246 (H)” is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00001111 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "000011111 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "10000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop, the winning combinations are the replay 01, the small winning combination 16, and the small winning combination 25.

3-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (bell A)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Bell A (No. 4)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "12DE (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000 (B)" of the address "12D7 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00001000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“00000001 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100 (B)" of the address "12C4 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000001100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“10000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "000001101 (B)" of the address "12BA (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000001101 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "1010010 (B)" of the address "12AB (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “1010010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“00000010 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“000000 (B)” indicated by the HL register value. ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the right stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
From the above, "replay" stops at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, "blue BAR" stops at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and "blue BAR" stops at the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. When "Bell A" stops, it can be seen that the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 stops at the effective line.

Next, in explaining "4. When a small winning combination is won (when the push order bell is won and the push order is correct)", the reel stop control when the push order bell is won will be described.
Here, a case where the winning number "10" is determined as a result of the winning combination lottery will be described as an example.
In the 23rd embodiment quoted in the 25th embodiment, when the push order bells (winning numbers "10" to "21") are won, a small winning combination is won with "PB = 1", and no omission occurs. Is set to.
In general, the following method can be mentioned as the stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations having different payout numbers are duplicated, such as the winning number "10".
As a first priority, when all the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the winning symbol combination can be stopped at the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to stop all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination on the effective line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), the second priority is "number of sheets priority" or " The reel 31 is stopped and controlled by any of "number priority".
Here, "number priority" means that among the symbol combinations of the winning combinations, the symbol of the reel 31 constituting the symbol combination having the largest number of payouts is preferentially stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. To say. Therefore, when the winning number "10" is won, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the symbol combination (15 pieces) having the largest number of payouts.
On the other hand, "number priority" means that the symbols of the reel 31 are stopped at the effective line so that the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped at the effective line is the largest.
In this embodiment, since the number of effective lines is one, it is not possible to stop the symbol combinations corresponding to all the winning combinations at the effective lines (first priority). 31 is stopped and controlled.
Then, when the push order bell is won, the reel 31 is stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the push order is correct, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the push order is incorrect.

In the game (during 1BB game) when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, when the left first stop is performed, the push order is correct at this point, so the "watermelon" is stopped at the effective line (upper stage). As shown in FIG. 114, since the "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is arranged in four pieces at intervals of five symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "PB = 1" arrangement), the left stop switch 42 is operated at any timing. Even if it is done, the "watermelon" can be stopped at the upper stage with "PB = 1".

Next, when it is the middle second stop, since the push order is correct at this point, the "cherry" is stopped at the effective line (middle). As shown in FIG. 114, since the "cherry" of the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB = 1", the "cherry" is set to the middle stage at "PB = 1" regardless of the timing when the middle stop switch 42 is operated. Can be stopped at.
Next, when the third stop is on the right, the correct answer is in the push order, so "Bell A" is stopped on the effective line (lower). As shown in FIG. 114, since the “bell A” of the right reel 31 is arranged at “PB = 1”, “Bell A” at “PB = 1” regardless of the timing at which the right stop switch 42 is operated. Can be stopped at the bottom.

On the other hand, when the left first stop and the right second stop, the push order is incorrect at this point, so the design of the left reel 31 is "watermelon" and is included in the small winning combination A1 condition device. Stop any of the winning combinations (excluding small combination 01) on the effective line.
As shown in FIG. 124, the winning combination (excluding the small combination 01) included in the small combination A1 condition device is
Small role 13: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Bell A / Bell B"
Small role 14: "Replay"-"Bell A"-"Bell A / Bell B"
Small role 15: "Black BAR"-"Bell A"-"Bell B"
Small role 16: "Replay"-"Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / Special map"-"Blue BAR"
Small role 17: "Watermelon"-"Red 7 / Replay"-"Replay"
Is.

Therefore, the small winning combination 17 whose design on the left reel 31 is "watermelon" is stopped.
As shown in FIG. 114, since the "replay" of the right reel 31 is arranged at "PB = 1", the "replay" is set to "PB = 1" at any timing when the right stop switch 42 is operated. Can be stopped at.
Next, at the time of the middle third stop, "Red 7 / Replay" is stopped at the effective line (middle). As shown in FIG. 114, since the “replay” of the middle reel 31 is arranged at “PB = 1”, the “replay” is performed at the middle stage with “PB = 1” regardless of the timing at which the middle stop switch 42 is operated. Since it can be stopped at, it is possible to set the "replay" to be stopped at the effective line. Therefore, the small winning combination 17 can be won. Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, "Red 7" may be stopped at the effective line.

On the other hand, in the game (during 1BB game) when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, when the middle first stop is performed, the push order is incorrect at this point, so the small winning combination (middle stage) is marked with a small winning combination. Stop any of the symbols related to 13 to 17 small wins. In this case, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line by executing the number priority. Since the "bell A" of the middle reel 31 is arranged at "PB = 1", the "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stage at "PB = 1" regardless of the timing when the middle stop switch 42 is operated. it can.
Next, when the second stop is on the left, there is no superiority or inferiority because one each of "Red 7", "Replay" and "Black BAR" is provided, and any one can be determined. Therefore, the "replay" in which "PB = 1" is arranged is stopped at the effective line (upper row).
Next, in the third right stop, "Bell A / Bell B" is stopped at the effective line (lower row). As for the right reel 31, since both "bell A" and "bell B" are arranged at "PB = 1", either of them may be stopped.

On the other hand, when the middle first stop and the right second stop, "Bell B" is stopped at the lower stage by priority on the number. As described above, the "bell B" of the right reel 31 has a "PB = 1" arrangement.
Further, at the time of the third left stop, any one of "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. For example, it may be determined to stop the "replay" in which the "PB = 1" arrangement is made. When the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when "Red 7" or "Black BAR" can be stopped at the effective line, "Red 7" or "Black BAR" may be stopped at the effective line, respectively. Of course.

In addition, in the game (during 1BB game) when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, when the right first stop is performed, the push order is incorrect at this point. Stop any of the symbols related to the small winning combination 17. In this case, "Bell B" is stopped at the effective line by executing the number priority.
Next, when it is the second left stop, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be defined that the "replay" having the "PB = 1" arrangement is stopped at the effective line (upper row).
Then, at the time of the middle third stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
On the other hand, when it is the middle second stop after the right first stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
Next, at the time of the third left stop, either "Red 7", "Replay" or "Black BAR" is stopped. In this case, similarly to the above, it may be defined that the "replay" having the "PB = 1" arrangement is stopped at the effective line (upper row).

As described above, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during the 1BB game,
Pushing order 123: Small role 01 prize (15 sheets)
Pushing order 132: Small role 17 prizes (3 sheets)
Pushing order 213: Small role 14 prizes (3 sheets)
Pushing order 231: Small role 14 prizes (3 sheets)
Pushing order 312: Small role 14 prizes (3 sheets)
Push order 3211: Small role 14 prizes (3 sheets)
Will be.

Further, when the winning number "10" is won during the normal game (during the non-special game), the reel 31 is stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number because there is no correct answer pressing order.
For example, when the winning number "10" is won during a normal game and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "123", "replay" is stopped at the effective line (upper) at the time of the first left stop due to the number priority. Let me.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, either "Bell A" or "Blue BAR / Black BAR / Red 7 / On the special map" is stopped. Here, if "blue BAR / black BAR / red 7 / on the special figure" related to the small winning combination 16 is stopped at the effective line, the "blue BAR" is arranged as "PB ≠ 1" when the right reel 31 is stopped. Therefore, it may not be possible to stop at the effective line. Therefore, at the time of the second middle stop, "Bell A" is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
Next, at the time of the third right stop, "Bell A / Bell B" is stopped at the effective line (lower row). As a result, the small role 14 is won.

4. When winning a small role (when the push order is correct when the push order bell is won)
Next, the update of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) at the time of the stop operation of each stop switch 42 when the small winning combination is won will be described.
In this example, in FIG. 124, in the game in which the winning number "10" is won during the 1BB game and the small winning combination A1 condition device is operated, the stop switch is operated in the correct answer pressing order "123", and the winning combination is 15 cards. Small role 01 shall win a prize.
Further, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "8" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31, and then the symbol of symbol number "8" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31. Sometimes the middle stop switch 42 is operated, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of symbol number "2" is passing through the middle stage of the right reel 31.
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the left reel 31 is stopped: 9 (bell A)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the middle reel 31 is stopped: 10 (bell A)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the right reel 31 is stopped: 4 (bell A)
Shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the effective line is "watermelon (11th)"-"cherry (11th)"-"bell A (4th)".
Also, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "000000111 (B)"
Is.

4-1. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped When the left stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "9 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“00000011 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011010 (B)" of the address "1234 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00011010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00011010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000011 (B)" of the address "122F (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000011 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "122A (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) of the address indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data “11001011 (B)” of the address 1223 (H) ”is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11001011 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) of the address indicated by the HL register value (the initial value is “11111111 (B)”). As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "11001011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (000011111 (B) “) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000 (B)" of the address "1219 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (group 5) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11001011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "000000111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00011010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"

4-2. During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 During the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 10 (bell A)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Cherry (No. 11)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, “10 (D)” is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000001 (B)" of the address "128E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00110000 (B)" of the address "1289 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00110000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“00011010 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "127F (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “000000010 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“00000011 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000010 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“00000010 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "0100001 (B)" of the address "125E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01000011 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“11001011 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "0100001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "000000110 (B)" of the address "1259 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000011 (B)" and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) ("00000000000 (B)") of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000 (B)" of the address "1253 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00011000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“01000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "0100001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000010 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
Therefore, at the time of the second stop operation, the winning combinations are the small winning combination 01, the small winning combination 07, the small winning combination 18, and the small winning combination 29.

4-3. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 4 (bell A)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Bell A (No. 4)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "4" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "12DE (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001000 (B)" of the address "12D7 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00001000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“00010000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“00000010 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00001100 (B)" of the address "12C4 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000001100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "000001101 (B)" of the address "12BA (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “000001101 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“01000011 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "1010010 (B)" of the address "12AB (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “1010010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“000000 (B)” indicated by the HL register value. ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the right stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000001 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
From the above, "watermelon" stops at the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" stops at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and "bell" is stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. When "A" stops, it can be seen that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 stops at the effective line.

5. When a small role is won (when the push order bell is wrongly answered)
In this example, in FIG. 124, in the game in which the winning number "10" is determined during the general game of the 1BB game and the small winning combination A1 condition device is operated, the stop switch is operated in the incorrect pressing order "321", and the above As in the example, it is assumed that the symbol combination "Replay"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" of the small role 14 which is a three-card combination wins a prize.
Further, when the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "1" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31, and the symbol of symbol number "7" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31. The middle stop switch 42 is operated, and the right stop switch 42 is operated while the symbol of symbol number "19" is passing through the middle stage of the right reel 31 (the pressing order is right → middle → left).
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the left reel 31 is stopped: 3 (black BAR)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the middle reel 31 is stopped: 9 (replay)
Symbol control number (_BF_PICTURE) when the right reel 31 is stopped: 0 (bell B)
Shall stop respectively.
In this case, the symbol combination on the effective line is "Replay (No. 5)"-"Bell A (No. 10)"-"Bell B (No. 0)".
Also, the initial value of the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00001111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "11111111 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "000000111 (B)"
Is.

5-1. When the right stop switch 42 is stopped When the right stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 0 (bell B)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Bell B (No. 0)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the right stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "0" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“00000011 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01110011 (B)" of the address "12C5 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01000000 (B)" of the address "12BB (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "01000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000100 (B)" of the address "12B3 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (“0001111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000100 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "00011000 (B)" of the address "12AC (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00011000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00011000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“11111111 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value "00000000000 (B)" and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) ("11111111 (B)" indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group). ) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the right stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00011000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000100 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "01000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"

5-2. When the middle stop switch 42 is stopped When the middle reel 31 is stopped, as described above,
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 9 (replay)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Bell A (No. 10)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the middle stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, “8 (D)” is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In the first step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000010 (B)" of the address "128D (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000010 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000000 (B)" of the address "1286 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "01100100 (B)" of the address "127D (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01100100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "01111011 (B)" of the address "1275 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “01111011 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“01110011 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "01110011 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10101110 (B)" of the address "125D (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10110110 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“01000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (“00000100 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“00011000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the middle stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "01110011 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"

5-3. When the left stop switch 42 is stopped When the left stop switch 42 is stopped, as described above.
Design control number (_BF_PICTURE): 3 (black BAR)
Design that stops on the effective line: "Replay (No. 5)"
Suppose that
In this case, when the left stop switch 42 is stopped, the process proceeds as follows.
In FIG. 195, in step S1031, "3 (D)" is stored in the A register value (symbol control number).
In step S1032, "9" is set in the B register (number of symbol groups).
In step S1033 (first time), "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BF (H)" (address of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (“000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "8", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the second step S1033, the symbol combination data "11000001 (B)" of the address "1233 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BE (H)" (address of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11000001 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "7", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the third step S1033, the symbol combination data "11001100 (B)" of the address "122E (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BD (H)" (address of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “11001100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "6", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fourth step S1033, the symbol combination data "10100000 (B)" of the address "1228 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BC (H)" (address of stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10100000 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (“01110011 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) becomes "0010000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "5", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the fifth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0BB (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "4", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the sixth step S1033, the symbol combination data "00000100 (B)" of the address "121D (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0BA (H)" (address of stop symbol data (fourth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “00000100 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC4) (“0000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "3", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the seventh step S1033, the symbol combination data "10000110 (B)" of the address "1217 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1034, "F0B9 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “10000110 (B)” and the address data (_WK_STOP_PIC3) (“00000000000 (B)”) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (third group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "2", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the eighth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B8 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC2) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (second group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "1", and the process returns to step S1033.

In the ninth step S1033, "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the A register (symbol combination data).
In step S1034, "F0B7 (H)" (address of stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1)) is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1035, an AND operation is performed between the A register value “0000000000 (B)” and the data (_WK_STOP_PIC1) (“0000000000 (B)”) of the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the stop symbol data (first group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1) becomes "00000000000 (B)".
In step S1036, the B register value is updated to "0" and it is determined that "Yes", so that the stop symbol set is terminated.

By the above processing, the stop symbol data at the time of the stop operation of the left stop switch 42 becomes as follows.
Stop symbol data (1st group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (2nd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC2): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (3rd group) (_WK_STOP_PIC3): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (4th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC4): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): "0010000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): "00000000000 (B)"
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): "00000000000 (B)"
Therefore, it is data indicating that the small winning combination 14 has won a prize.

By determining the stop symbol data as described above, even if the power is cut off, the game can be correctly restarted by using the already stored stop symbol data after recovering from the power off.
For example, as shown in FIG. 194, when the stop position is determined (when “Yes” is set in step S1017), the stop position is determined and the stop symbol data is updated (step S1035 in FIG. 195). ) (For example, 9.2 V. The same shall apply hereinafter) until the process including (the stop symbol set in step S1024 of FIG. 194) is completed. Even if a voltage of 12V is applied), the interrupt processing is not executed (by interrupt waiting processing), so the stop position is determined and stopped before the power off processing is executed. The symbol data is updated. Therefore, even if the power off processing is executed after the processing and the reel 31 does not stop at the determined stop position, the stop symbol data has already been updated, so that when the power is restored after that, Normal payout processing can be executed.

Further, in a situation where all reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, even if a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, only one stop switch 42 can be operated. Therefore, for example, stop. From the time when the position is decided (when "Yes" is set in step S1017 of FIG. 194), the stop position is determined and the process including the update of the stop symbol data (step S1035 of FIG. 195) is included (FIG. 194). Even if the reel 31 does not stop at the determined stop position when the voltage drops to the voltage at which the power off processing is executed until the stop symbol set in step S1024 of step S1024 is completed, the reel 31 Since there is only one, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a plurality of reels 31 do not stop at a determined stop position.

Furthermore, for example, even when the power is cut off after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated in a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and the power off processing is executed. Since the stop symbol data has been updated, after the power is turned off and restored, the stop symbol data is used based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31 using the stop symbol data before the power off occurs. Updates can be resumed (games can be resumed).

Here, in general, the data that can be held in one register is 1-byte data, and there are seven types of general-purpose registers that can be used in the one-chip microprocessor (Z80) of the gaming machine (main control board 50). As described above, in order to hold the symbol combination data having the number of stop symbol data (9 in this embodiment) exceeding the type of the general-purpose register, it is necessary to store the stop symbol data in the RWM53. is there.
When the stop symbol data is stored in the general-purpose register, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored after that, the stop symbol data (value stored in the general-purpose register) is cleared (set to the initial value). For example, it is set to "0".). Therefore, when the stop symbol data is stored in the general-purpose register, for example, if the power off occurs after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated and the power off processing is executed, after the power is restored. , There is a high possibility that the game cannot be restarted.
Further, when the stop symbol data is stored in the RWM 53, the stop symbol data is updated for each stop operation of the stop switch 42. Therefore, in the development stage, whether or not the stop position is correct for each stop operation is determined by the RWM 53. It can be confirmed by inspecting the stop symbol data.

When the symbol combination that stops at the effective line is specified as described above, the number of payouts is determined based on the stopped symbol data.
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a one-line display determination (M_LINE_JUDGE). This process is executed after all reels 31 have stopped and before the payout process. For example, in FIG. 139, it corresponds to the process of step S291.
By this process, the number of payouts is determined from the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC).
In FIG. 200, in step S1101, the payout number table is set. This process is a process of storing the start address "1400 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193 in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1102, and the stop symbol data 5 (“5” means the fifth group) RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing the address "F0BB (H)" of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) in the DE register.
In the present embodiment, the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (4th group) do not have a winning combination at the time of winning, and the stop symbol data (5th group) to the stop symbol data (1st group). Only in 9 groups), there is a role that has a payout at the time of winning. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not any bit of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (9th group) is "1", the stop symbol data (fifth) is used as an initial value. Group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1103, and the designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 201, which will be described later, and is the process of specifying the designated data corresponding to the number of payouts from the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL).
Next, the process proceeds to step S1104, and the payout number data is saved. Here, at the end of the process of step S1103, a value corresponding to the number of payouts is stored in the A register. Therefore, this process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F023 (H)".
Next, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the payout number buffer is saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F024 (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) in step S1103 of FIG. 200. In FIG. 201, the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) shown in FIG. 193 is also shown as a reference.
In FIG. 201, in step S1111, the number of inspections is set. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register. Since the HL register value is "1400 (H)" and the data stored in the address "1400 (H)" is "6 (H)", "6 (H)" is stored in the B register. To.
When inspecting the number of payouts,
1st time: 15 sheets of stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) (11111111 (B))
2nd time: 15 sheets of stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (000011111 (B))
3rd time: 3 pieces of stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) (11110000 (B))
4th time: 3 pieces of stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) (11111111 (B))
Fifth time: One piece of stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) (11111111 (B))
6th time: One piece of stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) (00000011 (B))
The number of inspections is set to "6" because the inspections are performed up to 6 times.

In the next step S1112, the table address is updated. In this process, "1" is added to the HL register value, and the value after adding "1" is used as the HL register value. As a result, the HL register value becomes "1401 (H)".
Next, the process proceeds to step S1113 to acquire table data. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. In the first step S1113, since the HL register value is "1401 (H)", the data stored in the address "1401 (H)" is "0 * 32 + 15" (actually, "00001111 (B)". ) ”) Is stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1114, and the A register value is divided by "32 (D)". Then, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the C register. As a result, the first time, the A register value is "0" and the C register value is "15 (D)". This C register value corresponds to the number of payouts when there is a winning combination.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1115 to acquire RWM data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Add the DE register value (address value of the stop symbol data) to the A register, and use the added result as the DE register value.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
Therefore, in the first step S1115, the DE register value is "F0BB (H)" stored in step S1102 of FIG. 200, and the A register value is "0". Therefore, the DE register value after addition is It is "F0BB (H)".
Next, assuming that the data (stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) stored at the address indicated by "F0BB (H)" is, for example, "00000001 (B)", the A register value is "00000001 (B)". ) ”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1116 to update the table address. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) "1" is added to the HL register value, and the result after adding "1" is used as the HL register value. In the first step S1116, the HL register value before this processing is "1401 (H)", so the HL register value becomes "1402 (H)" by adding "1".
(2) AND (logical product) the A register value and the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is performed. As a result of performing the AND operation, if it is "0", the zero flag becomes "1", and if it is not "0", the zero flag does not become "1".
Here, the value "@ _PIC5" stored in the address "1402 (H)" corresponds to a value in which all the bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) are set to "1" (see FIG. 176). Therefore, if this value and the A register value (the actual value of the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) are ANDed, it is determined whether or not any of the combinations in the fifth group has won a prize. It will be possible.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1117, and the acquired data is set. This process is a process of storing the C register value in the A register.
In the next step S1118, it is determined whether or not there is designated data. Here, if the zero flag is not "1" (as a result of the operation in step S1116), it is determined that there is designated data. When it is determined that there is designated data, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that there is no designated data, the process proceeds to step S1119.

In step S1119, it is determined whether or not the number of inspections has been completed. In this process, if the result of subtracting the B register value by "1" and the result is not "0", it is determined as "No" (the number of inspections is not completed). When it is determined that the number of inspections has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1120, and when it is determined that the number of inspections has not been completed, the process returns to step S1112.
In step S1120, no acquired data is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the A register value. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
Here, when the process proceeds to step S1120, the number of inspections has been completed, so the B register value is “0”. Therefore, the A register value becomes "0". This A register value corresponds to the number of payouts. In this way, when the symbol combination without the number of payouts is stopped and displayed, the data "0" of the number of inspections can be diverted and the payout number data can be stored.

Next, the one-line display determination shown in FIG. 200 will be described with reference to specific examples.
In this example, it is assumed that the small winning combination 19 has won a prize (the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 has stopped).
Therefore, before the one-line display determination is executed,
Stop symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7): 00000100 (B)
Stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8): 00000000 (B)
Stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9): 00000000 (B)
It has become.
Even if the symbol combination that is actually stopped on the effective line is different from the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 due to a malfunction of the motor 32 or the power supply is cut off, the stop symbol data (7th group) ( Since the data stored in (_WK_STOP_PIC7) is "00000100 (B)", the payout control corresponding to the small winning combination 19 can be executed.

In this case, in step S1101 (payout number table set) of FIG. 200, "1400 (H)" is stored in the HL register value.
In step S1102 (stop symbol data 5RWM address set), "F0BB (H)" is stored in the DE register value.
When the process proceeds to step S1103 (acquisition of designated data), the process proceeds to step S1111 (inspection count set) in FIG.
In the next step S1112 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1401 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "15 (D)" stored in the address "1401 (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1114 (division), the A register value "15 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)", the quotient "0" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "15 (D)" is stored in the C register. Remember in.
In the next step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0" is added to the DE register value "F0BB (H)", so that the DE register value remains "F0BB (H)".
Next, the data (stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5)) "00000000000 (B)" stored in the address "F0BB (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1402 (H)".
Further, AND (logical product) is performed between the A register value "00000000000 (B)" and the value "11111111 (B)" stored in the address indicated by the HL register value "1402 (H)". As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (acquired data set), the C register value “15 (D)” is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (is there specified data?), Since the zero flag is "1", it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S1119.
In step S1119 (end of inspection count?), "1" is subtracted from the B register value and updated to "5". Then, since the B register value is not "0", it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (second time) (table address update), the HL register value is set to "1403 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "47 (D)" stored in the address "1403 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), the A register value "47 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)". As a result, the quotient "1 (D)" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "15 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BB (H)" to set the DE register value to "F0BC (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC (H)" (data "00000000000 (B)" of the stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1404 (H)".
Further, AND (logical product) is performed between the A register value "00000000000 (B)" and the value "0000001111 (B)" stored in the address "1404 (H)" indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117 (acquired data set), the C register value “15 (D)” is stored in the A register.
In step S1118 (is there specified data?), Since the zero flag is "1", it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S1119.
In step S1119 (end of inspection count?), The B register value is subtracted by "1" and updated to "4". Then, since the B register value is not "0", it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (third time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1405 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "3 (D)" stored in the address "1405 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "3 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)". As a result, the quotient "0" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "3 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "0 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC (H)", and the DE register value is set to "F0BC (H)".
Then, the data stored in "F0BC (H)" (data "00000000000 (B)" of the stop symbol data (sixth group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1406 (H)".
Further, AND (logical product) is performed between the A register value "0000000000 (B)" and the value "11110,000 (B)" stored in the address "1406 (H)" indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
In step S1117, the C register value “3 (D)” is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is "1", it is determined as "No", and the process proceeds to step S1119.
In step S1119, the B register value is subtracted by "1" and updated to "3". Then, since the B register value is not "0", it is determined as "No", and the process returns to step S1112.

In step S1112 (fourth time) (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1407 (H)".
In the next step S1113 (table data acquisition), the data "35 (D)" stored in the address "1407 (H)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1114 (division), "35 (D)" is divided by "32 (D)". As a result, the quotient "1" is stored in the A register, and the remainder "3 (D)" is stored in the C register.
In step S1115 (RWM data acquisition), the A register value "1 (H)" is added to the DE register value "F0BC (H)", and the DE register value is set to "F0BD (H)".
Then, the data stored in the "F0BD (H)" (data "00000100 (B)" of the stop symbol data (7th group)) is stored in the A register.

In step S1116 (table address update), the HL register value is updated to "1408 (H)".
Further, AND (logical product) is performed between the A register value "00000100 (B)" and the value "11111111 (B)" stored in the address "1408 (H)" indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the zero flag becomes "0".
In step S1117, the C register value “3 (D)” is stored in the A register.
In step S1118, since the zero flag is “0”, it is determined that there is designated data, and the process proceeds to step S1104 in FIG. 200. At this point, "3 (D)" is stored in the A register.
In step S1104 of FIG. 200, the A register value “3 (D)” is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F023 (H)”.
In the next step S1105, the A register value “3 (D)” is stored in the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address “F024 (H)”.
By the above processing, when the small winning combination 17 is won, the payout number "3 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL).

As described above, at first, it is determined whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-card combination is stopped and displayed, and it is determined that any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-card combination is not stopped and displayed. If so, then it is determined whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the three-card combination is stopped and displayed. Further, in the above example, since it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 19 constituting the three-card combination is stopped and displayed, the subsequent processing is not executed, but the three-card combination is tentatively configured. If it is determined that any of the symbol combinations to be stopped is not displayed, then it is determined whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the one-card combination is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, if it is determined whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-card combination is stopped and displayed, and if it is determined that any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-card combination is stopped and displayed, the 3-card combination is used. It is not judged whether or not any of the constituent symbol combinations is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, the processing time can be shortened.

In addition, whether or not any of the symbol combinations constituting the 15-card combination is stopped and displayed is determined by the two addresses of the stopped symbol data (5th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) and the stopped symbol data (6th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6). Judgment is made based on the data (however, the stop symbol data (sixth group) is a part of the bit data of the address). In this way, when it is not possible to store the symbol combination data that gives the same number of payouts at one address, by arranging the addresses continuously, for example, whether or not there is the symbol combination data that pays out 15 sheets is continuously displayed. Can be judged. In other words, between the stop symbol data (fifth group) and the stop symbol data (sixth group), an address for storing the symbol combination data constituting the three-card combination and the symbol combination data constituting the one-card combination. Is not provided.

Furthermore, since the bits are also continuous for the same number of payouts at the same address, for example, when the bit of the 15-card combination is "X" and the bit of the 3-card combination is "Y", "XXXYYXXX (B)" The bit "Y" is not arranged between the plurality of bits "X". If the 15-card combination bit "X" and the 3-card combination bit "Y" are arranged in the same address, they are arranged as, for example, "XXXXXXYY (B)" or "YYXXXXXX (B)". ..
By arranging the bits in this way, it is possible to prevent an error in the number of payouts at the development stage.
Further, by judging from the combination of symbols with a large number of payouts, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. For example, even though the winning number "10" is actually determined and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed, not only the bit corresponding to the small winning combination 01 but also the small winning combination 25 is displayed due to noise. Even if the corresponding bit is also "1", when judging from the symbol combination with a large number of payouts, the number of payouts is judged when it is judged that the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 01 is stopped and displayed. Since the above is completed, 15 cards corresponding to the small winning combination 01 can be paid out.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing RB operation management in the 25th embodiment. This process corresponds to step S944 of FIG. 148 (23rd embodiment). As shown in FIG. 148, in the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK), when the RB operation state flag is not “0” (when “No” in step S943), the RB operation management is executed.
In the example of FIG. 202, the number of winnings at the time of RB operation is updated based on the stop symbol data.
In FIG. 202, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the RB is in operation. Here, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that the RB is operating. When it is determined that the RB is operating, the process proceeds to step S1201, and when it is determined that the RB is not operating, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S1202, "1" is subtracted from the number of games played when the RB is activated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of games (_CT_BONUS_PLAY) when the RB is activated.
In the next step S1203, it is determined whether or not the number of games played during RB operation is "0". This process determines whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1202, and when the zero flag is "1", it means that the number of games played during RB operation has become "0".
Then, if the number of games played during RB operation is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1204, and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1211.

In the next step S1204, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (fifth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC5) is "0". If it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1205, and if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
In step S1205, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (sixth group) (_WK_STOP_PIC6) is "0". If it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1206, and if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
In the next step S1206, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (7th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC7) is "0". If it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1207, and if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (8th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC8) is "0". If it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1208, and if it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209.
Next, in step S1208, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC9) is "0". If it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1209, and if it is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1209, "1" is subtracted from the number of winnings when the RB is activated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the number of winnings (_CT_BONUS_WIN) when the RB is operated.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1210, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings at the time of RB operation is “0”. This process determines whether or not the zero flag has become "1" in the process of step S1209, and when the zero flag is "1", it means that the number of winnings during RB operation has become "0".
Then, when the number of winnings at the time of RB operation is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1211.

When the process proceeds to step S1211, the RB operation end condition is satisfied, so the RB operation state flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D4 bit of the operating state flag to “0”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
As described above, when updating the number of winnings during RB operation, it is possible to update using the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (9th group). When any of the stop symbol data (5th group) to the stop symbol data (9th group) is not "0", the winning combination (any of the small winning combination 01 to 34 in this embodiment) has won a prize. This is because the condition for updating the number of winnings when the RB is activated is satisfied.

<26th Embodiment>
The 26th embodiment shows a modified example of the 25th embodiment.
Further, in the 26th embodiment, the symbol arrangement, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the combination, the number of payouts corresponding to the combination, and the definition data (FIGS. 176 to 179) are the same as those in the 25th embodiment.
FIG. 203 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RWM 53 in the 26th embodiment. The types of RWM53 in FIG. 203 show those used in the following description, and do not mean that they are limited to these.
In FIG. 203, the same storage area as that of the 25th embodiment (FIGS. 173 to 175) has the same address. The description of the storage area having the same address as that of the 25th embodiment will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

The symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3) shown in the addresses "F0A0 (H)" to "F0A5 (H)" are storage areas for storing the address for specifying the symbol combination data when the reel 31 is stopped. Is. The symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) of "F0A0 (H)" and "F0A1 (H)" is for the first (left) reel 31, and the symbols of "F0A2 (H)" and "F0A3 (H)". The array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is for the second (middle) reel 31, and the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) of "F0A4 (H)" and "F0A5 (H)" is the third (right) reel. It is for 31.
When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the start address "1200 (H)" of the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) (described later) is stored in the symbol array address buffer.
Further, when the stop is accepted, any address of the # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_ #) (described later) is stored in the symbol array address buffer.

In FIG. 204, (A) is a diagram showing a symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT), and (B) is a diagram showing a reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH).
The data stored in each address of the symbol control data table corresponds to the initial values of the stop symbol data (1st group) to the stop symbol data (9th group) of the 25th embodiment.
The symbol group (groups 1 to 9) in the 26th embodiment is the same as that in the 25th embodiment. That is,
Group 1: RBA-RBH
Group 2: RBJ to RBP
Group 3: 1BB, Replay 01-Replay 07
Group 4: Replay 08 to Replay 10 (D0 to D2), unused (D3 to D7)
Group 5: Small role 01-Small role 08
Group 6: Small role 09 to small role 16
Group 7: Small role 17 to Small role 24
Group 8: Small role 25 to Small role 32
Group 9: Small role 33 to small role 34 (D0 to D1), unused (D2 to D7)
It has become.

For example, "11111111 (B)" is stored in the address "1200 (H)", and this value corresponds to the initial value "111111111 (B)" of the stop symbol data (first group).
Therefore, the D4 to D7 bits of the data of the address "1203 (H)" (symbols 4 groups) and the D2 to D7 bits of the data of the address "1208 (H)" (symbols 9 groups) are "0". Bits other than are "1".

The reel symbol search table address offset table is a data table for specifying the start address of the # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_ #).
Details will be described later,
1st reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1): Addresses "1300 (H)" to "13B3 (H)"
2nd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2): Addresses "13B4 (H)" to "1467 (H)"
3rd reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3): Addresses "1468 (H)" to "151B (H)"
It is composed of.
Then, in the reel symbol search table address offset table, the address value immediately before the start address of the #th reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_ #) is specified.

FIGS. 205 to 209 are diagrams showing a first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1).
Further, FIGS. 210 to 214 are diagrams showing a second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2).
Furthermore, FIGS. 215 to 219 are diagrams showing a third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).
In the # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_ #), for each reel 31, which role is the symbol of the symbol number corresponding to the symbol of the # reel 31 with respect to the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the effective line. This is defined for all of the 1st to 9th groups.
The symbol combination data stored in each address of the # reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_ #) is the symbol combination stored in each address of the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_ #) in the 25th embodiment. It is similar to the data.

Regarding the left reel 31, when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the effective line corresponds to the symbol number 2 "cherry". Therefore, after the address "1300 (H)",
Addresses "1300 (H)" to "1308 (H)": No. 2 symbol "cherry" (groups 1 to 9)
Addresses "1309 (H)" to "1311 (H)": No. 3 symbol "Blue BAR" (Groups 1 to 9)
Addresses "1312 (H)" to "131A (H)": No. 4 symbol "Bell A" (Groups 1 to 9)
:
Addresses "1399 (H)" to "13A1 (H)": No. 19 symbol "Bell A" (Groups 1 to 9)
Addresses "13A2 (H)" to "13AA (H)": No. 0 symbol "Replay" (Groups 1 to 9)
Addresses "13AB (H)" to "13B3 (H)": No. 1 design "Watermelon" (Groups 1 to 9)
The first reel symbol search table is configured in the order of.

In addition, 9 addresses are assigned to each symbol, which correspond to the 1st group to the 9th group, respectively. For example, in the second design "cherry"
The address "1300 (H)" is the first group,
The address "1301 (H)" is the second group,
:
The address "1308 (H)" is assigned to the 9th group.
Therefore, in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1), the number of symbols "20" x the number of symbol groups "9" = "180" addresses (1300 (H) to 13B3 (H)) are assigned. The same applies to the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) and the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3).

Further, the symbol combination data stored in each address is the symbol that constitutes which combination of symbols in the Nth group of symbols when the symbol of the symbol number stops on the effective line when the reel 31 is stopped. It determines whether it can be.
For example, the symbol combination data of the address "1300 (H)" is "0", which is the combination of the first group (RBA) when the second "cherry" stops on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped. It means that it cannot be a symbol constituting the symbol combination of ~ RBH).
On the other hand, the symbol combination data of the address "1307 (H)" (group 8) is "@ WIN_27 OR WIN_30" (001100100 (B)). Therefore, when the second "cherry" stops when the left reel 31 is stopped, it means that it can be a symbol constituting a symbol combination of the small winning combination 27 and the small winning combination 30 among the combinations of the eighth group. (See FIG. 121).
Therefore, for the same symbol on the same reel 31, the same symbol combination data is obtained. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 205, the addresses "131B (H)" to "1323 (H)" store the symbol combination data for the fifth symbol "replay", but the same "replay" symbol is used. Certain addresses "1348 (H)" to "1350 (H)" (10th symbol "replay"), addresses "1375 (H)" to "137D (H)" (15th symbol "replay"), address "13A2" (H) "to" 13AA (H) "(No. 0 symbol" replay ") are also the same as the symbol combination data of the addresses" 131B (H) "to" 1323 (H) ".

As described above, in the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1), symbol combination data is stored from the second symbol (cherry). This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the effective line on the left reel 31 is number 2.
On the other hand, in the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) shown in FIGS. 210 to 214, symbol combination data is stored from the first symbol "cherry". This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the effective line on the middle reel 31 is number 1.
Similarly, in the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3), symbol combination data is stored from the 0th symbol "bell B". This is because when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) is "0", the symbol on the effective line on the right reel 31 is 0.
In this way, the symbol data to be stored in the left, middle, and right reel symbol search tables is stored with an offset (difference) (by shifting the symbol number) (stored in consideration of the difference). By doing so, it is not necessary to make corrections (add or subtract differences) for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54.
As shown in FIG. 229 (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment) described later, in each of the symbol arrangement tables of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the symbol data of the symbol number "0" is used. There is also a method of storing the difference data corresponding to each reel 31 in order from the first. Then, when the symbol data is acquired, the symbol data of the symbol on the effective line is acquired by adding or subtracting the difference data of the reel 31 to the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position. In this case, even if the effective line is changed, only the difference data needs to be changed, so that the development man-hours can be reduced.

Since the effective line of this embodiment is shown in FIG. 115, in each of the left, middle, and right reel symbol search tables, the offset (difference) is set to "+2" for the left reel 31 and "+2" for the middle reel 31. "+1" and the right reel 31 are set to "0". In other words, the offset value refers to the amount of deviation (number of steps) between the position of the effective line and the reference position.
Therefore, for example, when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a symbol that stops in the lower row and the effective line is "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", each reel on the left, middle, and right. In the symbol search table, each offset is "+1".
Also, for example, when the control symbol number (BF_PICTURE) indicates a symbol that stops in the middle row and the effective line is "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", the left, middle, and right reels. In the symbol search table, the offset is unnecessary (or "0").

Next, a specific example of the symbol array address buffer in the 26th embodiment will be described.
For example, assume that "Replay (No. 5)"-"Cherry (No. 16)"-"Bell B (No. 0)" stops on the effective line.
In this case, the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) has the address "131A (H)" immediately before the start address "131B (H)" of the fifth symbol (replay) of the first reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_1). Is memorized.
Further, in the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2), the address "143A (H)" immediately before the start address "143B (H)" of the 16th symbol (cherry) of the second reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_2) is displayed. Is memorized.
Furthermore, in the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3), the address "1467 (H)" immediately before the start address "1468 (H)" of the 0th symbol (bell B) of the third reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_3) is stored. ) ”Is remembered.
The process through which the above values are stored will be described later.

220 and 221 are diagrams showing a payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in the 26th embodiment.
In the 26th embodiment, one address is provided for each combination, and the number of payouts is stored. The address "1600 (H)" is set to the number of RBA payouts "0" of the symbol 1 group, and the addresses of all the combinations of the symbol 1 group, all the combinations of the symbol 2 groups, ..., All the combinations of the symbol 9 groups are sequentially set. It is provided and the number of payouts is memorized for each.
In the symbol 4 group, the addresses "1618 (H)" to "161A (H)" are set to replay 08, replay 09, and replay 10 corresponding to the D0 to D2 bits in order to correspond to the bits, and the address "161B ( “H)” to “161F (H)” are defined as unused areas corresponding to the D3 to D7 bits.
Then, for example, when the small winning combination 01 is won, the address "1620 (H)" is specified, and the "15 (D)" stored in the address "1620 (H)" is the number of payouts. It is stored in the data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).

Next, the control process according to the 26th embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart.
FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the main process in the 26th embodiment. The flowchart of FIG. 222 mainly shows the processing according to the 26th embodiment, and does not mean that only the processing shown in FIG. 222 is performed.
The main process is a process executed by the main control board 50 once per game, and is, for example, a process corresponding to FIG. 139 of the 23rd embodiment.
In FIG. 222, the game start process of step S1131 is a process corresponding to steps S271 and S272 in FIG. 139, and executes an operation state flag update process and the like (see, for example, FIG. 42).
In the next step S1132, the medal acceptance start processing is executed. This process is, for example, the process shown in steps S273 to S276 of FIG. 139, which is a process of detecting whether or not a medal has been inserted and whether or not the bet switch 40 has been operated, and when a medal has been inserted or the bet switch 40. Is operated to update the number of bets.

In the next step S1133, the process at the time of accepting the start switch is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 223, which will be described later, and the same process as in step S751 of FIG. 139 is executed. Specifically, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, a predetermined lottery process or the like is executed. However, in FIG. 223, which will be described later, the process shown in FIG. 140 is simplified and described.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1134, and the rotation of the reel 31 is started. In the next step S1135, reel stop control is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and is a process for stopping the corresponding reel 31 at a predetermined position based on the winning number when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.
In the next step S1136, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped (corresponding to step S289 in FIG. 139), and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S1137 and all the reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that there is no such thing, the process returns to step S1135.

In step S1137, the display determination process is performed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 227, which will be described later, and corresponds to step 291 in FIG. 139.
In the next step S1138, the game end check process is performed. This process corresponds to step 753 in FIG. 139. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the process at the time of receiving the start switch in step S1133 of FIG. 222.
In FIG. 223, in step S1141, the game start processing is executed. This process is a process of executing a lottery of a winning number (combination), a lottery of an advantageous section (AT), and the like, and corresponds to a process including the processes of steps S761 to S768 in FIG.
In the next step S1142, the reel rotation start preparation process is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 224, which will be described later, and is the process of setting the initial values in the symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3) described above. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start preparation process in step S1142 of FIG. 223.
In FIG. 224, in step S1151, the symbol control data table (TBL_PIC_DAT) is set. This process is a process of storing the start address "1200 (H)" of the symbol control data table in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1152, and the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 1 of the address “F0A0 (H)”.
In the next step S1153, the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 2 of the address “F0A2 (H)”.
In the next step S1154, the address of the symbol control data table is stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3). This process is a process of storing the HL register value (1200 (H)) in the symbol array address buffer 3 of the address “F0A4 (H)”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.
By the above processing, as the initial value at the start of reel rotation,
Symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1): 1200 (H)
Design array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2): 1200 (H)
Design array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3): 1200 (H)
Is remembered.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control in step S1135 of FIG. 222.
In FIG. 225, in step S1161, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated with respect to the rotating reel 31. Although the details of this process will be omitted, as shown in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment, the input port rise data A is detected and the rise data of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 is turned on. When becomes, it is determined as "Yes" in this step S1161.
When it is determined in step S1161 that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1162, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1162, the value corresponding to the (operated) stop switch 42 is stored in the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is used, "1" is saved.
In the next step S1163, the stop symbol determination process is executed. This process is a process of determining the stop position of the reel 31 based on the timing at which the stop switch 42 is operated, the winning number in the game, and the like. By this process, the symbol number to be stopped in the middle stage is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC).
In the next step S1164, the symbol number is stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE). In this process, "1" is subtracted from the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) to calculate the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) and store it. In the operation, when "1" is subtracted from "0", a special operation of "19 (D)" is executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1165, and the symbol array address buffer is set. This process is a process shown in FIG. 226, which will be described later, and is a process of acquiring and storing the reel symbol array table address. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the symbol array address buffer set in step S1165 of FIG. 225.
In FIG. 226, in step S1171, stop / control reel number data is acquired. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1172, and the RWM address is set in the symbol array address buffer corresponding to the stop / control reel number data. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The A register value and the A register value are added, and the result of the addition is taken as the A register value. In other words, the process is a process of doubling the A register value.
(2) The address "F09E (H)" value shifted by "2" from the address "F0A0 (H)" of the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) is stored in the DE register.
(3) Add the A register value to the DE register value. The result of the addition is used as the DE register value.
As a result, for example, when the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "1", the DE register value becomes "F0A0 (H)".
When the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "2", the DE register value is "F0A2 (H)".
Furthermore, when the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is "3", the DE register value is "F0A4 (H)".
By the process of step S1172, the address of the symbol array address buffer (_BF_PICARG_ADR #) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the DE register.

In the next step S1173, the reel symbol search table address offset table is set. This process is a process of storing the value "1207 (H)" obtained by subtracting "2" from the start address "1209 (H)" of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) in the HL register.
In the next step S1174, the reel symbol array table address corresponding to the stop / control reel number data is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the result of the addition is used as the HL register value.
For example, when the A register value is "2", the HL register value is "1209 (H)".
When the A register value is "4", the HL register value is "120B (H)".
Furthermore, when the A register value is "6", the HL register value is "120D (H)".
Therefore, the address of the reel symbol search table address offset table (TBL_PIC_SRCH) corresponding to the reel 31 is stored in the HL register (see FIG. 204 (B)).

(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the HL register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "1209 (H)", the HL register value is "12FF (H)".
When the HL register value is "120B (H)", the HL register value is "13B3 (H)".
Furthermore, when the HL register value is "120D (H)", the HL register value is "1467 (H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1175, and the reel symbol array table address corresponding to the control symbol number is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data stored in the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value is multiplied by "9", and the calculation result is stored in the A register. Here, multiplying by "9" corresponds to the number of symbol groups.
(3) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the result of the addition is used as the HL register value.

The above processing will be described with reference to specific examples (Examples 1 to 3).
(Example 1)
On the left reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 12th "bell B" stops at the effective line),
12FF (H) + 10 × 9 (D) (5A (H)) = 1359 (H)
This is the address immediately before the start address "135A (H)" corresponding to the 12th "bell B" on the left reel 31.
(Example 2)
Further, in the middle reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 11th "cherry" stops at the effective line),
13B3 (H) + 10 × 9 (D) = 140D (H)
Therefore, it becomes the address immediately before the start address "140E (H)" corresponding to the 11th "cherry" of the middle reel 31.
(Example 3)
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, when the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is "10" (the 10th "bell B" stops at the effective line),
1467 (H) + 10 × 9 (D) = 14C1 (H)
This is the address immediately before the start address "14C2 (H)" corresponding to the 10th "bell B" on the right reel 31.
In this way, in step S1175, the first address value of the start address corresponding to the stop symbol number of the reel 31 is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1176, and the symbol array address buffer corresponding to the stop / control reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the HL register value at the address indicated by the DE register value.
As shown in step S1172,
Stop / control reel number data "1" → DE register value "F0A0 (H)"
Stop / control reel number data "2" → DE register value "F0A2 (H)"
Stop / control reel number data "3" → DE register value "F0A4 (H)"
Is.
Therefore, in the case of the left reel 31, "1359 (H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 of the address "F0A0 (H)" in the above example 1.
Further, in the case of the middle reel 31, "140D (H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 of the address "F0A2 (H)" in the above example 2.
Furthermore, in the case of the right reel 31, "14C1 (H)" is stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 of the address "F0A4 (H)" in Example 3 above.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As described above, since the address value in which the symbol combination data is stored is stored in the symbol array address buffer of each reel, even if the power is cut off, it is already stored after the power is restored. The game can be restarted correctly using the existing address value.
For example, even if the power is cut off after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated in a situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and the power off processing is executed, the symbol is displayed. Since the address value in which the symbol combination data of the left reel 31 is stored is stored in the array address buffer 1, after the power is turned off and restored, based on the stop operation of the middle reel 31 and the stop operation of the right reel 31. The process of storing the address values in the symbol array address buffers 2 and 3 can be restarted (the game can be restarted).

If the address value (value stored in the symbol array address buffer) in which the symbol combination data is stored is stored in the general-purpose register, the power is cut off, and if the power is restored after that, the address is concerned. The value (value stored in the general-purpose register) is cleared (set to the initial value, for example, "0"). Therefore, when the address value in which the symbol combination data is stored is stored in the general-purpose register, for example, the power is cut off after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 31 is operated, and the power off processing is executed. In that case, there is a high possibility that the game cannot be restarted after the power is restored.
Further, when the symbol array address buffer is provided in the RWM 53 and the address value in which the symbol combination data is stored is stored, the address value is stored in the symbol array address buffer for each stop operation of the stop switch 42. At the development stage, it is possible to confirm whether or not the stop position is correct for each stop operation by inspecting the symbol array address buffer of the RWM53.

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the display determination process in step S1137 of FIG. 222.
This process is a process of determining the symbol combination data based on the address value stored in the symbol array address buffer, and determining whether or not the combination corresponding to the symbol combination data has a payout.
In FIG. 227, in step S1181, "9" is set in the number of symbol groups. In this process, "9" is stored in the B register and "8" is stored in the C register. “8” in the C register is a value corresponding to the number of bits.
In the next step S1182, the symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 1 in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1183, and the first reel symbol arrangement table data corresponding to the number of symbol groups is acquired. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The B register value is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is used as the HL register value.
(2) The symbol combination data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register value.
For example, when the HL register value is "12FF (H)", it becomes "12FF (H) + 9 (H) = 1308 (H)", so "@ WIN_33" stored in the address "1308 (H)". That is, "00000001 (B)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1184, the symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 2 in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1185, and the logical product of the second reel symbol array table data according to the number of symbol groups is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The B register value is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is used as the HL register value.
(2) The AND (logical product) operation of the symbol combination data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value is executed. The calculation result is used as the A register value.

In the next step S1186, the symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) is acquired. This process is a process of storing the symbol combination data stored in the symbol array address buffer 3 in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1187, and the logical product of the third reel symbol array table data according to the number of symbol groups is executed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The B register value is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is used as the HL register value.
(2) The AND (logical product) operation of the symbol combination data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value is executed. The calculation result is used as the A register value.
At this point, when the calculation result is "0", the zero flag is "1".

By the processing of steps S1181 to S1187 above, for example, when the B register value is "9", the symbol combination data of the ninth group of the stop symbol data of the left reel 31 and the ninth stop symbol data of the middle reel 31 are ninth. The symbol combination data of the group and the symbol combination data of the ninth group of the stop symbol data of the right reel 31 are ANDed.
Specifically, for example
B register value = 9
Symbol array address buffer 1 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1) = 12FF (H) (No. 2 symbol (cherry))
Symbol array address buffer 2 (_BF_PICARG_ADR2) = 13B3 (H) (No. 1 symbol (cherry))
Symbol array address buffer 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR3) = 1482 (H) (No. 3 symbol (red 7))
When is
Symbol combination data of address "1308 (H)" (@ WIN_33)
AND
Symbol combination data of address "13BC (H)" (@ WIN_33)
AND
Symbol combination data of address "148B (H)" (@ WIN_33)
Therefore, the logical product data becomes "@ WIN_33" (00000001 (B)).
On the other hand, if any of the symbol combination data of the address "1308 (H)", the address "13BC (H)", or the address "148B (H)" is "0", AND By the operation, the logical product data becomes "0".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1188, and it is determined whether or not the logical product data is “0”. This process determines whether or not the zero flag is "1", and if the zero flag is "1", it determines "Yes". When it is determined that the logical product data is "0", the process proceeds to step S1195, and when it is determined that the logical product data is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1189.
In step S1195, "1" is subtracted from the number of symbol groups. This process executes a process of subtracting the B register value by "1".
In the next step S1196, it is determined whether or not the number of symbol groups is "0". This process determines whether or not the result of subtracting "1" from the B register in step S1195 is "0". When the B register value after subtracting "1" is "0", it is determined as "Yes" (the number of symbol groups is "0").
When it is determined in step S1196 that the number of symbol groups is "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of symbol groups is not "0", the process returns to step S1182.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S1188 to step S1189, the payout number table address corresponding to the number of symbol groups is set. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Multiply the B register value by the C register value "8". Then, the result of multiplication is stored in the BC register.
(2) In the HL register, the result of subtracting "8" from the start address "1600 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) and further subtracting "1" is stored. Therefore, "15F7 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
(3) The BC register value is added to the HL register value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1190, and the table address is added by "1". This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value and using the addition result as the HL register value.

Here, in steps S1189 and S1190,
"1600 (H)"-"8 (H)"-"1 (H)" + B register value (value of symbol group) x C register value "8" (number of data included in one symbol group) + "1" (H) "
= "1600 (H)" + (value of symbol group-1) x (number of data included in one symbol group "8")
Is calculated.
Examples 1 and 2 will be given below as specific examples.
(1) Example 1
When the B register value at the time of proceeding to step S1189 is "1" (symbol 1 group),
1600 (H) + (1-1) x 8 = 1600 (H)
And the start address of the symbol 1 group is specified.
(2) Example 2
When the B register value at the time of proceeding to step S1189 is "5" (symbol 5 group),
1600 (H) + (5-1) x 8 = 1600 (H) + 20 (H) (32 (D))
= 1620 (H)
And the start address of the 5th group of symbols is specified.

In the next step S1191, the logical product data is shifted to the right by "1". This process is a process of shifting the bit of the A register value to the right by "1".
Then, in the next step S1192, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1" by the above-mentioned process of shifting "1" to the right. When it is determined that the carry flag is "1", it is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193. On the other hand, when it is determined that the carry flag is not "1", the process returns to step S1190.

In step S1193, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts is "0". This process determines whether or not the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is "0", and if it is "0", it determines that the number of payouts is "0". When it is determined that the number of payouts is "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1194.
In step S1194, the payout number data is saved. This process is a process of storing the value indicated by the address indicated by the HL register value in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Examples 1 and 2 are given as specific examples of the above steps S119 to S1192.
(1) Example 1 (when the symbol combination of the small winning combination 33 is stopped)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is “9” and the logical product data is “@ WIN_33” (00000001 (B)), the HL register value is “1640 (H)”.
When the logical product data “00000001 (B)” is shifted to the right by 1 bit in the next step S1191, the carry flag becomes “1”, so that it is determined as “Yes” in step S1192. Therefore, in step S1194, the data "1" stored in the address "1640 (H)" indicated by the HL register value is stored as the payout number data.

(2) Example 2 (when the symbol combination of small winning combination 03 is stopped)
In the first step S1190, when the B register value is “5” and the logical product data is “@ WIN_03” (00000100 (B)), the HL register value is “1620 (H)”.
If the logical product data "00000100 (B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit to be "00000010 (B)" in the next step S1191, the carry flag is "0", so that it is determined to be "No" in step S1192. , Return to step S1190.
In step S1190 (second time), the HL register value becomes "1621 (H)". In the next step S1191, if the logical product data "00000010 (B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit to be "00000001 (B)", the carry flag is "0", so it is determined as "No" in step S1192. Then, the process returns to step S1190.
In step S1190 (third time), the HL register value becomes "1622 (H)". In the next step S1191, when the logical product data "00000001 (B)" is shifted to the right by 1 bit, the carry flag becomes "1", so that it is determined to be "Yes" in step S1192. Therefore, in step S1194, the data "15 (D)" stored at the address indicated by the HL register value "1622 (H)" is stored as the payout number data.

The above display determination process will be described with reference to specific examples (first and second examples below).
(Example 1)
In the game in which the winning number "10" is determined by the winning combination lottery, the left stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of the symbol number "10" is passing through the middle stage of the left reel 31, and then the middle reel 31 The middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "9" is passing through the middle row, and then the right stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "3" is passing through the middle row of the right reel 31. As a result of the operation, "Watermelon (No. 11)"-"Cherry (No. 11)"-"Bell A (No. 4)" stopped on the effective line, and the small role 01 (15 sheets) won the prize. To do.
In this case, the symbol array address buffer set of FIG. 226 is as follows.
1. 1. Left reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value = "1" (stop / control reel number data).
In step S1172
(1) A register value = 1 × 2 = 2
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A0 (H)
In step S1173
HL register value = 1207 (H)
Will be.
In step S1174
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1209 (H)
(2) HL register value = address value indicated by HL register value = 12FF (H)
Will be.
In step S1175
(1) A register value = "9" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 81 (D) (51 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 1350 (H)
Will be.

2. 2. Medium reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value = "2" (stop / control reel number data).
In step S1172
(1) A register value = 2 × 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173
HL register value = 1207 (H)
Will be.
In step S1174
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = address value indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
Will be.
In step S1175
(1) A register value = "10 (D)" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 90 (D) (5A (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 140D (H)
Will be.

3. 3. Right reel 31
In step S1171, the A register value = "3" (stop / control reel number data).
In step S1172
(1) A register value = 3 × 2 = 6
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A4 (H)
In step S1173
HL register value = 1207 (H)
Will be.
In step S1174
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120D (H)
(2) HL register value = address value indicated by HL register value = 1467 (H)
Will be.
In step S1175
(1) A register value = "4 (D)" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 36 (D) (24 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 148B (H)
Will be.

From the above,
Symbol array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2: 140D (H)
Design array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
Will be.
In this case, in FIG. 227, in step S1181
B register value = 9
C register value = 8
To set.
(1st time)
In step S1182
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
Will be.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value)
Will be.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 140D (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1416 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000001 (B) (@ WIN_33)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value (@ WIN_33) AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@ WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 9-1 = 8
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(2nd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@ WIN_26 OR @ WIN_28 OR @ WIN_29)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 140D (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1415 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@ WIN_29 OR @ WIN_30)
Data indicated by the address of A register value = HL register value AND A register value = 00010000 (B)
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@ WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 8-1 = 7
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(3rd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 000000111 (B) (@ WIN_17 OR @ WIN_18)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 140D (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1414 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000010 (B) (@ WIN_18)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0000000010 (B)
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 7-1 = 6
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 000000010 (B) (@ WIN_10)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 140D (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1413 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@ WIN_13 OR @ WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 6-1 = 5
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(5th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@ WIN_01_02 OR @ WIN_04 OR @ WIN_07_08)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 140D (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 140D (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1412 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 01000001 (B) (@ WIN_01 OR @ WIN_07)
Data indicated by the address of A register value = HL register value AND A register value = 01000001 (B)
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 000001011 (B) (@ WIN_01 OR @ WIN_03 OR @ WIN_04)
Data indicated by the address of A register value = HL register value AND A register value = 00000001 (B)
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag ≠ "1".
Therefore, the result is "No" in step S1188, and the process proceeds to step S1189.
In step S1189
BC register value = B register value (value of symbol group) x C register value (number of data included in one symbol group) = 5 x 8 = 40 (D) (28 (H))
HL register value = 15F7 (H)
HL register value = HL register value + BC register value = 15F7 (H) +28 (H) = 161F (H)
Will be.

In step S1190
HL register value = 161F (H) + 1 (H) = 1620 (H)
Will be.
In step S1191, when the A register value “00000001 (B)” is shifted to the right by one, it becomes “0000000000 (B)” and the carry flag becomes “1”.
In step S1192, since the carry flag is "1", it is determined that "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1193.
In step S1193
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 15 (D)
Therefore, it is determined that the number of payouts is not "0", and the process proceeds to step S1194.
In step S1194, "15 (D)" is stored in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL).
As described above, when the small winning combination 01 is won, the address "1620 (H)" of the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) is specified, and the payout number "15 (D)" is stored.

Next, as a second example of the display determination process, in the game in which the winning number "26" is determined by the winning combination lottery, the left stop is made when the symbol of the symbol number "10" passes through the middle stage of the left reel 31. The switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number "2" is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the middle stage of the right reel 31 is operated of symbol number "3". Since the right stop switch 42 was operated while the symbol was passing, "watermelon (11th)"-"black BAR (3rd)"-"bell A (4th)" stopped on the effective line. , Shows an example of a non-winning role. This symbol combination differs from the symbol combination of the first example only in the symbol of the middle reel 31.
First, the middle reel 31 is as follows according to the symbol array address buffer set of FIG. 226.

In step S1171, the A register value = "2" (stop / control reel number data).
In step S1172
(1) A register value = 2 × 2 = 4
(2) DE register value = F09E (H)
(3) DE register value = DE register value + A register value = F0A2 (H)
In step S1173
HL register value = 1207 (H)
Will be.
In step S1174
(1) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 120B (H)
(2) HL register value = address value indicated by HL register value = 13B3 (H)
Will be.
In step S1175
(1) A register value = "2 (D)" (control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE))
(2) A register value = A register value x 9 = 18 (D) (12 (H))
(3) HL register value = HL register value + A register value = 13C5 (H)
Will be.

Therefore,
Symbol array address buffer 1: 1350 (H)
Symbol array address buffer 2: 13C5 (H)
Design array address buffer 3: 148B (H)
Will be.
In this case, in FIG. 227, in step S1181
B register value = 9
C register value = 8
To set.
(1st time)
In step S1182
HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 1)
Will be.
In the next step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1359 (H)
A register value = 0 (value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value)
Will be.

In the next step S1184,
HL register value = 135C (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In the next step S1185,
HL register value = 13C5 (H) +9 (H) (HL + B) = 13CE (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 9 (H) (HL + B) = 1494 (H)
A register value = HL register value (@ WIN_34) AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 9-1 = 8
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(2nd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1358 (H)
A register value = 00011010 (B) (@ WIN_26 OR @ WIN_28 OR @ WIN_29)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) +8 (H) (HL + B) = 13CD (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00000111 (B) (@ WIN_25 OR @ WIN_26 OR @ WIN_27)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0000000010 (B)
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 8 (H) (HL + B) = 1493 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00001000 (B) (@ WIN_28)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 8-1 = 7
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(3rd time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1357 (H)
A register value = 000000111 (B) (@ WIN_17 OR @ WIN_18)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) +7 (H) (HL + B) = 13CC (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00010000 (B) (@ WIN_21)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 7 (H) (HL + B) = 1492 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 7-1 = 6
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(4th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1356 (H)
A register value = 000000010 (B) (@ WIN_10)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 13CB (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 10000000 (B) (@ WIN_16)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 6 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 00110000 (B) (@ WIN_13 OR @ WIN_14)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 6-1 = 5
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(5th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1355 (H)
A register value = 11001011 (B) (@ WIN_01_02 OR @ WIN_04 OR @ WIN_07_08)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 13CA (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 5 (H) (HL + B) = 1490 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 000001011 (B) (@ WIN_01 OR @ WIN_03 OR @ WIN_04)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 5-1 = 4
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(6th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1).
In step S1183
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1354 (H)
A register value = 0
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 13C9 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 4 (H) (HL + B) = 1491 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 4-1 = 3
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(7th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) +3 (H) (HL + B) = 1353 (H)
A register value = 01000000 (B) (@ REP_06)
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 13C8 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 000000010 (B) (@ REP_01)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 3 (H) (HL + B) = 148E (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 10100010 (B) (@ REP_01 OR @ REP_05 OR @ REP_07)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 3-1 = 2
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(8th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 1352 (H)
A register value = 0
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 13C7 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 2 (H) (HL + B) = 148D (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 2-1 = 1
Will be.
In step S1196, “No” (B register value ≠ 0) is set, and the process returns to step S1182.

(9th time)
In step S1182, the HL register value = 1350 (H) (value of the symbol array address buffer 1). In step S1183,
HL register value = 1350 (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 1351 (H)
A register value = 0
Will be.

In step S1184
HL register value = 13C5 (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 2)
Will be.
In step S1185
HL register value = 13C5 (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 13C6 (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 11110000 (B) (@SRB_E_H)
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.

In the next step S1186,
HL register value = 148B (H) (value of symbol array address buffer 3)
Will be.
In the next step S1187,
HL register value = 148B (H) + 1 (H) (HL + B) = 148C (H)
Data indicated by the address of the HL register value = 0
A register value = data indicated by the address of the HL register value AND A register value = 0
Will be.
Therefore, the zero flag = "1".
Therefore, since it becomes "Yes" in step S1188, the process proceeds to step S1195.
B register value = 1-1 = 0
Will be.
In step S1196, “Yes” (B register value = 0) is set, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
As a result, the payout number data remains "0".

<27th Embodiment>
The 27th embodiment relates to a symbol arrangement table.
228 and 229 are diagrams showing a symbol arrangement table according to the 27th embodiment. The symbol array table stores symbol data corresponding to the symbol number at each address. In the 27th embodiment, the specific contents of the symbol data stored in each address will be omitted.
The symbol arrangement table in the 25th embodiment is configured as follows.
(1) First reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) (Fig. 181)
1203 (H): No. 2 symbol + No. 3 symbol 1204 (H): No. 4 symbol + No. 5 symbol:
120B (H): 18th symbol + 19th symbol 120C (H): 0th symbol + 1st symbol (2) 2nd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) (Fig. 185)
123A (H): 1st symbol + 2nd symbol 123B (H): 3rd symbol + 4th symbol:
1242 (H): 17th symbol + 18th symbol 1243 (H): 19th symbol + 0th symbol (3) 3rd reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) (Fig. 189)
128F (H): No. 0 symbol + No. 1 symbol 1290 (H): No. 2 symbol + No. 3 symbol:
1297 (H): 16th symbol + 17th symbol 1298 (H): 18th symbol + 19th symbol

As can be seen from the above, for the first (left) reel 31, the second symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored in the head address (1203 (H)). Since the reference position of the control symbol number (_BF_PICTURE) is set in this way, the left reel 31 is set to the effective line (upper row) when the 0th symbol stops at the lower row, which is the reference position. Is because the second symbol stops.
Further, for the second (middle) reel 31, the first symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored in the start address (123A (H)). This is because, in the middle reel 31, when the 0th symbol stops at the lower stage, which is the reference position, the 1st symbol stops at the effective line (middle stage).
Similarly, for the third (right) reel 31, the 0th symbol (upper 4 bits) is stored in the head address (128F (H)). This is because on the right reel 31, the reference position and the position on the effective line match.

In the examples of FIGS. 181, 185, and 189 in the 25th embodiment, data of two symbols per address (one symbol data in the upper four bits and one symbol data in the lower four bits) are stored.
On the other hand, when one symbol data is stored in one address, it is configured as shown in FIGS. 228 and 229.
In the symbol arrangement table of the 27th embodiment, for simplification of explanation, the symbol data of the left reel 31 starts from the address "1000 (H)", and the symbol data of the middle reel 31 starts from the address "1100 (H)". , And the symbol data of the right reel 31 shall start from the address “1200 (H)”.

FIG. 228 is a diagram showing an example (Example 1) when data of one symbol per address is used in the symbol array table of the 25th embodiment. As shown in FIG. 228, the symbol data of the left reel 31 is stored in order from the start address, starting with the symbol data of symbol number 2. Further, the symbol data of the middle reel 31 is stored in order from the leading address, starting with the symbol data of symbol number 1. Furthermore, the symbol data of the right reel 31 is stored in order from the start address, starting with the symbol data of symbol number 0.

In this way, in the symbol arrangement table of the left, middle, and right reels 31, by shifting the symbol number of the symbol data of the start address, the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the reference position (position on the reference line) is offset. As a result, it is possible to acquire the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the valid line.
For example, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbol number of the symbol stopped at the effective line (upper row) is "1000 (H) (start address value)". "+" 0 (symbol number) "=" 1000 (H) ", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 2) stored in the address" 1000 (H) ".
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the effective line (upper row) is "1000 (H)" + "10 ( By "D)" = "100A (H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 12) stored in the address "100A (H)".

Regarding the middle reel 31, for example, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the effective line (middle row) is "1100 (H) (" It is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 1) stored in the address "1100 (H)" by "start address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" = "1100 (H)". ..
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the effective line (middle row) is "1100 (H)" + "10 ( By "D)" = "110A (H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 11) stored in the address "110A (H)".

Regarding the right reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position (lower) of the right reel 31, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the effective line (lower) is "1200 (H) (head). By "address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" = "1200 (H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored in the address "1200 (H)".
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position (lower row) when the right reel 31 is stopped, the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the effective line (lower row) is "1200 (H)" + "10 ( By "D)" = "120A (H)", it is possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 10) stored in the address "120A (H)".

Since the effective line in this example is "upper left"-"middle middle"-"lower right", the symbol data is shifted as described above, but the effective line is, for example, a V-line "upper left". "-" Middle and lower "-" Upper right "
(1) Symbol arrangement table for left reel 31 1000 (H): For symbol number 2 1001 (H): For symbol number 3:
(2) Design arrangement table of middle reel 31 1100 (H): For symbol number 0 1101 (H): For symbol number 1:
(3) Design arrangement table for right reel 31 1200 (H): For symbol number 2 1201 (H): For symbol number 3:
And it is sufficient.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) in which the symbol data of the left, middle, and right reels 31 are not shifted in the symbol arrangement table. Further, in this example, the reference line is set to "upper left"-"middle upper"-"upper right" (effective line is the same as in FIG. 228).
Then, as shown in FIG. 229, in each of the symbol arrangement tables of the left, middle, and right reels 31, the symbol data is stored in order from the symbol data for symbol number 0.
On the other hand, in this example, the difference data is stored in the final address.
In the case of Example 2, it is possible to add the difference data to the symbol number that stops at the reference position and acquire the symbol number that stops at the effective line.

For example, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, "1000 (H) (start address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "0 (difference data)" = "1000 ( By "H)", it becomes possible to acquire the symbol data (for symbol number 0) stored in the address "1000 (H)".
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the left reel 31, the address "100A" is set by "1000 (H)" + "10 (D)" + "0" = "100A (H)". It is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 10) stored in "(H)".

Regarding the middle reel 31, when the symbol of symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, "1100 (H) (start address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "1 (difference) Data) ”=“ 1101 (H) ”, it is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 1) stored in the address“ 1101 (H) ”.
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the middle reel 31, it is stored in "1100 (H)" + "10 (D)" + "1" = "110B (H)". It is possible to acquire data (for symbol number 11).

Furthermore, for the right reel 31, when the symbol with symbol number 0 stops at the reference position of the right reel 31, "1200 (H) (start address value)" + "0 (symbol number)" + "2 ( By "difference data)" = "1202 (H)", it is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 2) stored in the address "1202 (H)".
Similarly, when the symbol of symbol number 10 stops at the reference position of the right reel 31, the address "120C (H)" is set by "1200 (H)" + "10" + "2" = "120C (H)". It is possible to acquire the data (for symbol number 12) stored in.
As described above, in order to obtain the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the effective line from the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position, a method of shifting and storing the symbol data in the symbol array data in advance, or a symbol Examples thereof include a method of storing the symbol data in the array data without shifting and acquiring the symbol number using the difference data.

In the 27th embodiment described above, in Example 1 of FIG. 228, the symbol number of the symbol data specified by the start address is different. In this way, the symbol data to be stored in the symbol arrangement table of the first reel 31, the second reel 31, and the third reel 31 is stored with the symbol numbers shifted (stored in consideration of the difference). By doing so, it is not necessary to make corrections (add or subtract differences) for each acquired control symbol number (BF_PICTURE). Therefore, it is possible to simplify the program processing and reduce the capacity of the ROM 54.

On the other hand, as in Example 2 of FIG. 229, in each of the symbol arrangement tables of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, the symbol data of the symbol number 0 is stored in order, and the symbol data is acquired. In this case, if the difference data of the reel 31 is added or subtracted from the symbol number of the symbol that stops at the reference position, even if the valid line is changed, only the difference data is changed. Since it is good, the development man-hours can be reduced.

Further, in the example of the 27th embodiment (including the 25th embodiment), the effective line does not change depending on the specified number. On the other hand, when the effective line changes depending on the specified number, for example, the following is performed.
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the 25th embodiment) of FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table may be provided for each specified number.
Further, in the case of Example 2 of FIG. 228, it is possible to provide difference data for each specified number. In particular, in the case of Example 2 of FIG. 228, since the symbol arrangement table does not change depending on the specified number (the symbol arrangement table is the same even if the specified number changes), the increase in the storage area can be suppressed.

Further, in the example of the 27th embodiment (including the 25th embodiment), an example in which the number of effective lines is one is shown, but when the number of effective lines is a plurality, for example, the following is performed. ..
First, in the case of Example 1 (including the 25th embodiment) of FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table may be provided for each effective line.
Further, in the case of Example 2 of FIG. 228, it is possible to provide difference data for each effective line. In particular, in the case of Example 2 of FIG. 228, the symbol arrangement table does not change even if the effective line increases (the symbol arrangement table is the same even if the effective line changes), so that the increase in the storage area is suppressed. be able to.
Furthermore, when the position and number of effective lines change depending on the specified number, in the case of Example 1 (including the 25th embodiment) of FIG. 228, a symbol arrangement table is provided for each effective line, for example, a predetermined number. In the case of the specified number of symbols, it is possible to specify which (one or more) symbol sequence tables to use.
Similarly, in the case of Example 2 of FIG. 228, difference data may be provided for all valid lines, and for example, in the case of a predetermined specified number, which (one or more) difference data to be used may be specified. Can be mentioned.

<28th Embodiment>
In the 25th to 27th embodiments described above, there is only one effective line.
On the other hand, in the 28th embodiment, a case where a plurality of effective lines are provided will be described.
FIG. 230 is a diagram showing a display window 18, an effective line, and an RWM region in the 28th embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows the relationship between each symbol in the display window 18 and the RWM area, and (B) shows the relationship between the effective lines L1 to L5 and the RWM area.
In the 28th embodiment, 9 symbols of "3x3" are displayed in the display window 18 as in the 23rd embodiment shown in FIG. 115.

As shown in (A) in the figure, one RWM (storage) area is provided for each stop position (design). For example, in the left reel 31, the RWM area of the upper row "1" is defined as "_WK_PIC_LFT1", the RWM region of the middle row "2" is defined as "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and the RWM region of the lower row "3" is defined as "_WK_PIC_LFT3". Therefore, nine RWM regions corresponding to all nine stop positions (designs) are also provided. Further, each RWM area is composed of 2 bytes.
Further, as shown in (B) in the figure, an RWM region is provided for each effective line. The effective lines in the 28th embodiment are five lines L1 to L5. Then, for example, the RWM region of the effective line L1 descending to the right is "_WK_PIC_L1".
Furthermore, the RWM area "_WK_ALL_PIC" for all effective lines is provided. "_WK_ALL_PIC" is a value obtained by performing an OR (logical sum) operation from "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L5".

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement in the 28th embodiment. In the 23rd embodiment shown in FIG. 114, the number of symbols per reel 31 is "20", but in the 28th embodiment, the number of symbols is "21".
Further, FIG. 232 is a diagram showing a first reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) in the 28th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 181 in the 25th embodiment.
Further, FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a second reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) in the 28th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 185 in the 25th embodiment.
Furthermore, FIG. 234 is a diagram showing a third reel symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) in the 28th embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 189 in the 25th embodiment.

In FIG. 232, in the first symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1) of the left reel 31, symbol data of each symbol is provided from the start address in order from the symbol numbers “0” to “20” in FIG. 231 ( The last two data together with the addresses "1200 (H)" to "1228 (H)") are the symbol data of the symbol numbers "0" and "1". Therefore, the symbol data of the address "122A (H)" is the same as the symbol data of the address "1200 (H)", and the symbol data of the address "122C (H)" is the symbol data of the address "1201 (H)". It is the same.
Similar to the first symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_1), the second symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_2) of the middle reel 31 and the third symbol arrangement table (TBL_PICARG_3) of the right reel 31 also have the symbol number "0" in order from the start address. , The symbol data of the symbol number "1", ..., The symbol data of the symbol number "20", the symbol data of the symbol number "0", and the symbol data of the symbol number "1" are arranged.

Then, for example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "bell" of the symbol number "0" in the upper row, the replay of the symbol number "1" in the middle row, and the "blank" of the symbol number "2" in the lower row are stopped.
_WK_PIC_LFT1 = 00001000 (B), 00000001 (B) (bell)
_WK_PIC_LFT2 = 000000111 (B), 00000001 (B) (replay)
_WK_PIC_LFT3 = 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B) (blank)
Is remembered.
The same applies when the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are stopped.
Further, as a method of storing the symbol data in each storage area when each reel 31 is stopped, the following method can be mentioned.
(Example 1) Method based on the upper row For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol stopped in the upper row is specified. Specifically, when the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol stopped in the upper row is "1200 (H)", the symbol data stored in the address "1200 (H)" is stored in "_WK_PIC_LFT1". To do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the symbol data stored in the address "1202 (H)" obtained by adding "2 (H)" to the address "1200 (H)" is stored.

Further, in "_WK_PIC_LFT3", the symbol data stored in the address "1204 (H)" obtained by adding "4 (H)" to the address "1200 (H)" is stored.
When the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the upper row is "0", the symbol data stored in the address "1200 (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored in the address "122A (H)". To do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the upper row is "1", the symbol data stored in the address "1202 (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored in the address "122C (H)". use.

(Example 2) Method based on the lower row For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol stopped in the lower row is specified. Specifically, when the address corresponding to the symbol data of the symbol stopped in the lower row is "1204 (H)", the symbol data stored in the address "1204 (H)" is stored in "_WK_PIC_LFT3". To do.
Next, in "_WK_PIC_LFT2", the symbol data stored in the address "1202 (H)" obtained by subtracting "2 (H)" from the address "1204 (H)" is stored.
Further, in "_WK_PIC_LFT1", the symbol data stored in the address "1200 (H)" obtained by subtracting "4 (H)" from the address "1204 (H)" is stored.

When the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the lower row is "0", the symbol data stored in the address "122A (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored in the address "1200 (H)". To do. Similarly, when the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the upper row is "1", the symbol data stored in the address "122C (H)" is used instead of the symbol data stored in the address "1202 (H)". use.
In any of the above methods 1 and 2, it is possible to acquire the symbol data of the other stages based on the symbol data of one stage for each reel 31.
Then, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234, the symbol combination data exceeding the number of symbol numbers is stored (the symbol combination data of the symbol number 20 is stored again next to the symbol combination data of the symbol number 20, and the symbol combination data is further stored. Next, by storing the symbol combination data of symbol number 1 again), for example, even if the symbol of symbol number 0 stops in the lower row, the symbol combination of symbol number 20 will stop in the middle row. It is possible to easily acquire the data and the symbol combination data of the symbol number 19 that will be stopped in the upper row.

Next, a method of specifying the symbol combination data that stops at the effective line will be described.
For example, the symbol data of the left reel 31 of the symbol combination data "_WK_PIC_L1" of the effective line L1 is "_WK_PIC_L1_L", the symbol data of the middle reel 31 is "_WK_PIC_L1_C", and the symbol data of the right reel 31 is "_WK_PIC_L1_R". The same applies to the other effective lines L2 to L5.
First, as a result of the winning combination lottery, when "bell"-"bell"-"bell" is determined to be the winning number that can be stopped on the valid line, and the symbol of symbol number 20 passes through the middle stage of the left reel 31. The left stop switch 42 is operated, and then the middle stop switch 42 is operated when the symbol of symbol number 1 is passing through the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and then the middle stage of the right reel 31 is operated by the symbol of symbol number 3. When the right stop switch 42 is operated while all reels 31 are stopped,
"1" (upper left): Design number "0" (bell)
"2" (middle left): symbol number "1" (replay)
"3" (lower left): symbol number "2" (blank)
"4" (upper middle): symbol number "2" (bell)
"5" (middle middle): Design number "3" (blue cherry)
"6" (lower middle): symbol number "4" (replay)
"7" (upper right): Design number "4" (bell)
"8" (middle right): symbol number "5" (replay)
"9" (lower right): Design number "6" (red cherry)
Suppose that stops.

In this case, the symbol data stored in the storage area corresponding to each stop position is
_WK_PIC_LFT1: 0000001000 (B), 00000000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_LFT2: 000000111 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_CEN1: 00111000 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_CEN2: 001000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_CEN3: 00110011 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_RIG1: 00110001 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_RIG2: 0010010 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_RIG3: 001100000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.

For effective line L1,
_WK_PIC_L1_L ＝ _WK_PIC_LFT1: 0000001000 (B), 000000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L1_C ＝ _WK_PIC_CEN2: 00100000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L1_R ＝ _WK_PIC_RIG3: 001100000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.
Then, the value obtained by executing the AND (logical product) operation between the upper bytes (three) and the AND operation between the lower bytes (three) is defined as "_WK_PIC_L1".
Specifically, "00001000 (B)" AND "00110000 (B)" AND "00110000 (B)" is set as a high-order byte.
In addition, "0000000000 (B)" AND "00000000 (B)" AND "0000000000 (B)" is subjected to a lower byte. The calculation result is "_WK_PIC_L1".
Therefore,
_WK_PIC_L1: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.

Further, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by the OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC". "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "0" before the first calculation.
In the OR operation, an OR operation between the upper 1-byte data and an OR operation between the lower 1-byte data are performed.
Therefore,
_WK_ALL_PIC = 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.

Next, regarding the effective line L2,
_WK_PIC_L2_L ＝ _WK_PIC_LFT1: 0000001000 (B), 000000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L2_C ＝ _WK_PIC_CEN1: 00111000 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_L2_R ＝ _WK_PIC_RIG1: 00110001 (B), 00000001 (B)
Will be.
Therefore,
_WK_PIC_L2: 0000001000 (B), 000000000 (B)
Will be.
In addition, the updated "_WK_ALL_PIC" (OR operation is performed with "_WK_ALL_PIC" when the valid line is L1) is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 0000001000 (B), 00000000000 (B)
Will be.

For effective line L3,
_WK_PIC_L3_L ＝ _WK_PIC_LFT2: 000000111 (B), 00000001 (B)
_WK_PIC_L3_C ＝ _WK_PIC_CEN2: 001000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L3_R ＝ _WK_PIC_RIG2: 0010010 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.
Therefore,
_WK_PIC_L3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.
Also, the updated "_WK_ALL_PIC" is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 0000001000 (B), 00000000000 (B)
Will be.

For effective line L4,
_WK_PIC_L4_L ＝ _WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L4_C ＝ _WK_PIC_CEN3: 00110011 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L4_R ＝ _WK_PIC_RIG3: 001100000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.
Therefore,
_WK_PIC_L4: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.
Also, the updated "_WK_ALL_PIC" is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 0000001000 (B), 00000000000 (B)
Will be.

For effective line L5,
_WK_PIC_L5_L ＝ _WK_PIC_LFT3: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_C ＝ _WK_PIC_CEN2: 001000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
_WK_PIC_L5_R ＝ _WK_PIC_RIG1: 00110001 (B), 00000001 (B)
Will be.
Therefore,
_WK_PIC_L5: 00000000 (B), 00000000 (B)
Will be.
Also, the updated "_WK_ALL_PIC" is
_WK_ALL_PIC = 0000001000 (B), 00000000000 (B)
Will be.
As described above, "_WK_ALL_PIC" when the symbol combination data of the five effective lines L1 to L5 is calculated (combined) is calculated, and this symbol combination data becomes the data of the symbol combination that stops at any of the effective lines. ..

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a combination definition in the 28th embodiment.
The high-order byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the role definition of the small role or replay are ANDed one by one, and if it is "0", it is judged that the combination has not won, and if it is "0" If not, it is judged that the role has won a prize.
In addition, the lower byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" and the role definition of the accessory are executed one by one by AND (logical product) operation, and if it is "0", it is determined that the accessory has not won, and "0". If not, it is judged that the relevant character has won a prize.

In addition, the above judgment may be executed for all small wins, replays, and bonuses, but if the specifications do not have duplicate winnings, when it is determined that the winning combination has won, the subsequent winnings will be made. The calculation may be stopped.
In the above example, the high-order byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00001000 (B)". "≠" 0 ", and it is judged that the small role B has won a prize.
Further, since the lower byte of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "00000000000 (B)", it will be "0" regardless of the role definition of any of the characters and the AND operation.

In addition, as a result of the winning combination lottery, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination C (red cherry) or the small winning combination D (blue cherry) is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed, there is no duplicate winning. , When the left reel 31 is stopped, even if "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at any of "1" (upper left), "2" (middle left), and "3" (lower left), payout The number of sheets is uniform (for example, 2 sheets).
On the other hand, as a result of the winning combination lottery, in the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D is determined to be a winning number that can be stopped and displayed, if the specification is such that there is a duplicate winning, the left reel 31 is stopped. Occasionally, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "2" (middle left), it will be a single prize on the effective line L3. On the other hand, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "1" (upper left), the effective lines L1 and L2 will be duplicated. Similarly, if the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" stops at "3" (lower left), the effective lines L4 and L5 will be duplicated.
Then, in the case of a single prize, two cards are paid out, and in the case of a duplicate (two duplicate) prizes, four cards are paid out.
Examples of the method for calculating the number of payouts in such a case include the following methods.

(First method)
Small role C (red cherry) and small role D (blue cherry) should not be won individually ("red cherry" and "blue cherry" do not stop in the middle left), and only duplicate winnings are given (left reel 31). When the "red cherry" or "blue cherry" is stopped, it stops at either the upper left or the lower left).
In this case, when the number of payouts at the time of winning the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D is set to "2", the number of payouts is set in advance because the winning number of the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D will always be two duplicate winnings. It is possible to set the number to "4".

(Second method)
At the time of winning the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D, it is possible to determine the stop position of the "blue cherry" or "red cherry" symbol on the left reel 31.
For example, if the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_LFT2", and "_WK_PIC_LFT3" is judged and the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT2" (middle left) is the symbol data corresponding to the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D, 2 It will be paid out.
On the other hand, when the symbol data of "_WK_PIC_LFT1" or "_WK_PIC_LFT3" (upper left or lower left) is the symbol data corresponding to the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D, four cards may be paid out.

(Third method)
For each effective line, the winning combination and the number of payouts can be determined.
When "(red or blue) cherry" stops in the middle left when the left reel 31 is stopped, only the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L3" becomes data other than "0". As a result, it is determined that two cards are paid out.
On the other hand, when "(red or blue) cherry" stops in the upper left when the left reel 31 is stopped, the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1" and the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2" are the data other than "0". Become. As a result, it is determined that two cards are paid out based on the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L1", and two cards are paid out based on the symbol combination data of "_WK_PIC_L2". Then, the two are totaled to make four payouts.

When set in this way, it can also be used, for example, when the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D (cherry) and the small winning combination A (bell) are set to win a duplicate prize.
For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the "red cherry" with the symbol number 3 stops in the upper row, and the "bell"-"bell"-"bell" stops at the effective line L3, the number of bells to be paid out. Assuming 8 sheets
"_WK_PIC_L1" symbol combination data: 2 payouts "_WK_PIC_L2" symbol combination data: 2 payouts "_WK_PIC_L3" symbol combination data: 8 payouts, for a total of 12 payouts.

Further, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of payouts in one game is set to, for example, 15, and the number of payouts at the time of winning the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D alone is set to 8.
In this case, 8 cards will be paid out when the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D is awarded independently.
Further, in the case of two duplicate winnings of the small winning combination C or the small winning combination D, "8 x 2 = 16" is obtained, but the upper limit value of 15 is given priority and 15 is paid out. Specifically, a method of executing a comparison operation between the calculation result “16” of “8 + 8” and the upper limit value “15” and setting the upper limit value when the upper limit value is exceeded can be mentioned.

Furthermore, in the 28th embodiment, the initialization timing of the storage areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3", "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L3", and "_WK_ALL_PIC" is, for example, after the payout process is completed. Until the reel 31 can be stopped in the game. For example, it may be set at a predetermined timing after the payout process is completed, a predetermined timing after the start switch 41 is operated, or a predetermined timing after the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Further, in the 28th embodiment, nine storage areas "_WK_PIC_LFT1" to "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and "_WK_ALL_PIC" shown in FIG. It is also possible not to provide.
In this case, a method of calculating as follows can be mentioned.
First, the value obtained by performing the AND (logical product) operation of the upper bytes (three) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and the AND operation of the lower bytes (three) is, for example, the HL register. (For example, the upper byte is stored in the H register and the lower byte is stored in the L register value).
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by the OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC". The initial value of "_WK_ALL_PIC" is "0".
In the OR operation, an OR operation between the upper 1-byte data and an OR operation between the lower 1-byte data are performed.
As a result, the symbol combination data on the effective line L1 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".

Next, the value obtained by performing the AND (logical product) operation of the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT1", "_WK_PIC_CEN1", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1" and the AND operation of the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by the OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the effective line L2 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
Next, the value obtained by performing the AND (logical product) operation of the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT2", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG2" and the AND operation of the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by the OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the effective line L3 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".

Next, the value obtained by performing the AND (logical product) operation of the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN3", and "_WK_PIC_RIG3" and the AND operation of the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by the OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the effective line L4 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
Next, the value obtained by performing the AND (logical product) operation of the upper bytes (3) of "_WK_PIC_LFT3", "_WK_PIC_CEN2", and "_WK_PIC_RIG1" and the AND operation of the lower bytes (3) is stored in the HL register. Remember.
Furthermore, "_WK_ALL_PIC" is updated by the OR (logical sum) operation between this data and "_WK_ALL_PIC".
As a result, the symbol combination data on the effective line L5 is reflected in "_WK_ALL_PIC".
If the calculation is executed as described above, it is not necessary to provide the storage areas "_WK_PIC_L1" to "_WK_PIC_L5", so that the storage area of the RWM 53 can be reduced.

Although the 25th to 28th embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) For example, in the 25th embodiment, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC) is composed of 9 pieces (1st group to 9th group) based on the number of 1BB, RB, replay, and small winning combination. Various settings can be made according to the type and number of combinations.
For example, when the number of combinations is 8 or less, the stop symbol data can be composed of 1-byte data.

Further, in the 25th embodiment, in order to separate the replay and the small winning combination, the D3 to D7 bits of the stop symbol data (4th group) are unused, and the bits corresponding to the small winning combination 01 or later are set to the stop symbol data (the fourth group). It was provided after 5 groups). However, not limited to this, the D3 bit of the stop symbol data (4th group) is set as the small winning combination 01 winning symbol, the D4 bit is used as the small winning combination 02 winning symbol, and so on, and the unused bits are eliminated and the stop symbol data is stored in RWM. You may save space.
In this case, when calculating the payout number data, the data of the stop symbol data (4th group) and the "11111000 (B)" may be ANDed to mask the data related to the replay operation symbol. ..

Or, contrary to the above,
Stop symbol data (5th group): Small winning combination 01 winning symbol ~ Small winning combination 08 winning symbol (15 payouts)
Stop symbol data (6th group): Small winning combination 09 winning symbol ~ Small winning combination 12 winning symbol (15 payouts)
Stop symbol data (7th group): 13 small wins to 20 small wins (3 payouts)
Stop symbol data (8th group): Small win 21 winning symbols to small winning 24 winning symbols (3 payouts)
Stop symbol data (Group 9): Small win 25 winning symbols to small winning 32 winning symbols (1 payout)
Stop symbol data (10th group): Small winning 33 winning symbols to small winning 34 winning symbols (1 payout)
It is also possible to divide the data so that the data with different numbers of payouts is not included in one stop symbol data.
In this case, it is preferable that the addresses of the stop symbol data (fifth group) to the stop symbol data (10th group) are continuous.

(2) In the designated data acquisition (M_SELDAT_SET) shown in FIG. 201, the flowchart is terminated when it is determined in step S1118 that there is designated data. However, for example, in the case of a specification having duplicate winnings of small winning combinations, even if it is determined that there is designated data, the flowchart is not terminated and the number of payouts is determined for all the stopped symbol data. On the other hand, in the specification where there is no duplicate winning of small wins, as shown in FIG. 201, the flowchart can be terminated when it is determined that there is designated data.
Further, in the case of a specification having duplicate winnings of small wins, when the maximum number of payouts in one game is set to 15, the following method can be mentioned.
First, when it is determined that a 15-card combination (maximum number of payouts in one game) such as a small combination 01 has won a prize, the designated data acquisition may be terminated as in the present embodiment.

Secondly, the number of payouts is determined for all the stopped symbol data, and each time it is judged that the small winning combination has won, the number of payouts is added up and stored (for example, the number of payout data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL)) or A. (Stored in a general-purpose register such as a register), and finally, when the total value exceeds "15 (D)", the number of payouts is corrected to "15 (D)" (set to the upper limit). Be done. Alternatively, the number of payouts is added up each time it is determined that the small winning combination has won, and it is determined whether or not the total value exceeds "15 (D)", and the total value exceeds "15 (D)". In some cases, the number of payouts is corrected to "15 (D)" to end the designated data acquisition, and when the total value does not exceed "15 (D)", the designated data acquisition is continued.

(3) In the 27th embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 232 to 234, the address of each symbol combination data of the reel symbol arrangement table is composed of 2 bytes. However, not limited to this, when the number of symbol combinations is 8 or less, it can be configured from 1 byte.

(4) In the 25th embodiment, for example, the following processing may be executed after the execution of the stop symbol set (FIG. 195) and before the transition to the one-line display determination (FIG. 200).
In the example shown in FIG. 173, the operating state flag is not provided with a replay, but as shown in FIG. 35 (11th embodiment), for example, the D0 bit of the operating state flag is provided with a flag related to the replay.
Then, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the operation state flag is checked, and when the operation state flags related to the replay, 1BB, and RB are on, the process does not proceed to the one-line display determination (FIG. 200). As a result, it is possible to proceed to the one-line display determination only when the small winning combination is won or when the winning combination is not won.

(5) In FIG. 229, a storage area for difference data is provided at the final address of the symbol sequence table. However, not limited to this, it is of course possible to store the difference data outside the symbol array table.

(6) In FIG. 173, when it is determined that the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address "F00C (H)" has a small winning combination (a winning combination with a payout), it becomes "1" and there is no winning. If it is determined, a bit area of "0" may be provided. In that case, in the game during RB operation, it is determined whether or not the data in the bit area is "1", and if it is "1", the number of winnings at the time of RB operation of the address "F010 (H)" is determined. Is configured to be updated (for example, "1" is subtracted or "1" is added), and when it is "0", the number of winnings during RB operation can be not updated.

(7) As shown in step S1017 of FIG. 194, the stop position was determined based on the rising data of the stop switch 42. Here, it is also possible to adopt level data instead of rising data.
However, when level data is adopted instead of rising data, for example, the stop switch 42 continues to be operated before the reel 31 reaches a constant speed, and then the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the reel 31 is stopped. At the timing when the reception becomes possible, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 that has been continuously operated will be stopped and controlled. Therefore, the reel 31 will stop regardless of the skill of the player. In this case, by adjusting the timing at which the stop operation of the reel 31 can be accepted, it becomes possible to stop the symbol combination (for example, 1BB symbol combination) that requires a push regardless of the skill of the player. In some cases. On the other hand, if the stop position is determined based on the rising data, the above problem does not occur. Therefore, from such a viewpoint, it is preferable to determine the stop position based on the rising data.

(8) In the example of FIG. 194, the stop position is determined and stopped from the time when the stop position is determined based on the rising data of the stop switch 42 (when “Yes” is set in step S1017). Until the process including the update of the symbol data (step S1035 in FIG. 195) (stop symbol set in step S1024 in FIG. 194) is completed, the interrupt wait process is executed so that the interrupt process is not inserted (step S1011). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the interrupt waiting processing, interrupt processing may be disabled so that the interrupt processing is not executed during that period.

(9) In the 25th embodiment, the update of the stopped symbol data was executed from the 9th group. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed from the first group.
Specifically, in FIG. 195, "9" was set in the B register in step S1032, and the B register value was subtracted by "1" in step S1036. Instead, "1" was set in the B register in step S1032. Is set, and in step S1036, the process of adding the B register value by "1" may be executed. In this case, in step S1036, when the B register value after addition of "1" becomes "10 (D)", the process may be terminated.
The above also applies to the display determination process (FIG. 227) in the 26th embodiment. Specifically, in FIG. 227, "9" is set in the B register in step S1181, the B register value is subtracted by "1" in step S1195, and whether or not the B register value is "0" in step S1196. Judged. Instead, "1" is set in the B register in step S1181, the B register value is added by "1" in step S1195, and whether or not the B register value is "10 (D)" is determined in step S1196. When the determination is made and the B register value becomes "10 (D)", the processing may be terminated.

(10) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example as one of the gaming machines, but the slot machine 10 is a "rotary cylinder type gaming machine" installed in the No. 4 branch office to which the Fuei Law is applied. It is not limited to (so-called "pachislot game machine"), and can be applied to, for example, a casino machine. Further, it can be applied to a managed game machine in which the game machine does not use medals regardless of whether or not the game machine is a rotating body type game machine.
(11) All the embodiments and various modifications described in the present specification including the 25th to 28th embodiments are not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<29th Embodiment>
Hereinafter, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, the left reel 31 may be referred to as a first reel 31, the middle reel 31 may be referred to as a second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as a third reel 31.
Further, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, the left stop switch 42 is referred to as a first stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42 is referred to as a second stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is referred to as a third stop switch 42. It may be referred to.

Furthermore, in the description of the 29th to 36th embodiments, "#" refers to all of "1" to "3" and any one of "1" to "3". Have.
Further, in FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253, and 254, which will be described later, the numerical values shown in parentheses in the “address” column indicate the number of bytes in the storage area.
Further, in FIGS. 237, 243, 249, 253, and 254, which will be described later, "D0" to "D7" indicate bits D0 to D7 of 8-bit data, respectively.

In the 29th embodiment, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed before the predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 elapses, and after the elapse of the predetermined period, at the time of winning. The medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is executed.
Here, the "four-phase excitation output" has the same meaning as the "four-phase excitation state" in the fourth embodiment and FIG.
Further, the “predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output” has the same meaning as the “time from the start of the 4-phase excitation state to the end of the 4-phase excitation state” in the fourth embodiment and FIG.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the other embodiments, the slot machine 10 includes three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, right reel 31), and 3 corresponding to each reel 31. It is provided with a number of stop switches 42 (left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, right stop switch 42).
Further, the symbol arrangement of the reel 31, the effective line, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment.
Furthermore, also in the present embodiment, as in the fourth and 23rd embodiments, the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is a four-phase stepping motor, and during the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32, A 1-2 phase excitation output that alternately performs 1-phase excitation and a 2-phase excitation is performed, and when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a 4-phase excitation output that simultaneously excites the 4 phases is performed.

Further, also in the present embodiment, similarly to the 25th embodiment, the all motor index passage check is performed in step S1013 of the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) (FIG. 194) during the main process (M_MAIN).
Here, for all reels 31, after the #th reel motor index has changed, the first reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) (FIG. 135) and the second reel symbol number (for passing position) The values of (_NB_RL2_PASPIC) (FIG. 136) and the third reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL3_PASPIC) (FIG. 137) are all values other than "FF (H) (11111111 (B))". Therefore, when "1" is added to the calculation result obtained by sequentially ORing these values, a value other than "0" is obtained.

Further, in step S1014 of FIG. 194, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted (stop acceptance). When the calculation result in step S1013 is a value other than "0", the result is "Yes" in step S1014. After that, when the stop switch 42 is operated, "Yes" is set in step S1017 of FIG. 194, the process proceeds to step S1022, and the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.

Also in the present embodiment, as described in the fourth embodiment and the 23rd embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a of the stop switch 42 is pushed in), the detection sensor 42e is turned from off to on. Then, the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned from off to on, and "1" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012 (H)".
For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the left stop switch 42 is turned from off to on, and "1" is stored in the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000001 (B)".

When the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the middle stop switch 42 is turned from off to on, and "1" is stored in the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV). At this time, if the left stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000010 (B)".

Furthermore, when the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are operated, the signals of both the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are turned from off to on, and the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) "1" is stored in both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of. At this time, if the right stop switch 42 and the start switch 41 are not operated, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "00000011 (B)".

Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) changes from "0" to "1" and "1" is stored in the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address "F017 (H)", the stop switch 42 It is judged that the operation of is accepted.
For example, when the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing is "1". Is stored in the D0 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). As a result, it is determined that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted.

When the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing is "0" and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing is "1". Is stored in the D1 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). As a result, it is determined that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Furthermore, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the previous interrupt processing are "0", and the D0 bit and the D0 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing. When both of the D1 bits are "1", "1" is stored in both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). As a result, it is determined that the two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

Also in this embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to "1.117 ms" as in the 23rd embodiment. Then, when the signals of both the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are turned from off to on during this "1.117 ms", both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) are ". 1 ”is stored, and it is determined that the two operations of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.

Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal of the stop switch 42 is changed from off to on, but conversely, it may be changed from on to off. That is, the signal of the stop switch 42 is not limited to active high, but may be active low. Then, when the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, it may be determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted.
That is, "the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 changes from off to on in the case of active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 in the case of active low. Means from on to off. The same applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

Then, in step S1022 of FIG. 194, when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted (“1” is stored in the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)), the process proceeds to the next step S1023.
In step S1023, "4 (D)" indicating "deceleration start" is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

Further, in step S1023, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery of this game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined according to the determined stop position. The symbol number is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) (FIGS. 135 to 137).

For example, when the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, and the small winning combination 01 that pays out 15 cards or the small winning combination 13 that pays out 3 cards. Any of ~ 17 can win a prize.
Here, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated during the general game of the 1BB game (when 1BB is operating) and the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order (left middle right), the small winning combination 01 (15 sheets) When the combination) wins and the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect pressing order (pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order), any one of the small winning combination 13 to 17 (three-card combination) wins.
On the other hand, when the accessory is not activated, there is no correct push order when the small combination A1 condition device is activated, and even if all of them are in the push order, any of the small combinations 13 to 17 (three cards) Win a prize.
Then, when the small winning combination A1 condition device is operating when the accessory is not operating, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, the symbols constituting the small winning combination 13 are within the range of the maximum number of moving frames from the effective line. When is located, the symbol number of that symbol is stored in the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC).

Further, in step S909 of the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) (FIG. 154) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed after the process of step S1023, the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and When it is determined that the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) is the same value, the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (Fig. 134) is added to the deceleration pulse data ""00001111(B)" (4 phase on) is stored, and "1 (D)" indicating "deceleration" is stored in the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIGS. 135 to 137). ..
Then, in the port output process of step S462 during the interrupt process (I_INTR) executed thereafter, φ1 of the motor 32 is based on “000011111 (B)” stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #). A four-phase excitation output is performed in which four phases of ~ φ4 are simultaneously excited. As a result, the motor 32 is braked to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32.

In this way, when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) become the same value, the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR) The deceleration pulse data "000011111 (B)" is stored in #), and 4-phase excitation output is performed.
Therefore, just because the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, it does not mean that the four-phase excitation output is immediately performed.

It should be noted that the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) are not limited to the same value, for example, the # reel. The symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) are the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol on the # reel 13 is the same. ) Becomes a predetermined value (for example, “3”), the deceleration pulse data “000011111 (B)” is stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #), and the 4-phase excitation output is generated. It may be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, the 4-phase excitation output is performed for each interrupt process of "1.117 ms" while "000011111 (B)" is stored in the # 1 reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #).
Furthermore, at the start of deceleration, the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) (FIGS. 135 to 137) has a "90 (D)" (deceleration pulse output counter) corresponding to the address "1050 (H)". ) (FIG. 156) is stored, and then the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts.

Then, when the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) becomes "0", the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) stores the pulse data "00000000000 (B)" at the time of stop. At the same time, "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS). As a result, the 4-phase excitation output is completed.

As described above, while the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) is "1" or more and "000011111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #). The 4-phase excitation output continues, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) becomes "0", and "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #). Then, the 4-phase excitation output is stopped.
Further, the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) becomes "0", the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) stores the pulse data "00000000000 (B)" at the time of stop, and the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) is stored. “0 (D)” indicating “stop” is stored in the reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS), and the state in which the 4-phase excitation output is completed is the state in which the reel 31 is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to "1.117 ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts. ..
Therefore, by the time the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) changes from "90 (D)" to "0 (D)", "1.117 x 2 x 90 = 201.06 ms". Therefore, the 4-phase excitation output continues for "201.06 ms", and the 4-phase excitation output ends when "201.06 ms" elapses.
That is, in the present embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "201.06 ms".

The interrupt processing cycle is not limited to "1.117 ms", and the subtraction of the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) is not limited to every two interrupts.
For example, the interrupt processing cycle may be set to "2.235 ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) may be subtracted by "1" for each interrupt.

Further, when the stop switch 42 is released (the player's hand is released from the stop button 42a of the stopped switch 42 that has been pushed in, and the stop button 42a returns to the original position (position in FIG. 12A)). , The detection sensor 42e is turned from on to off, the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned from on to off, and "0" is stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012 (H)". Will be done.
That is, "the stop switch 42 is released" means that the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned from on to off in the case of active high, and the signal of the stop switch 42 is turned off in the case of active low. Means to turn on from. The same applies not only to the stop switch 42 but also to other switches.

Then, in the present embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 that stops last elapses. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31 and the timing before the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31) are finally set. Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 to be stopped is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the lapse of the predetermined period (after the end of the 4-phase excitation output), at the time of winning. Execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Therefore, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last is released within a predetermined period (during the 4-phase excitation output) during which the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 that stops last is performed. Also, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after the lapse of the predetermined period (after the end of the 4-phase excitation output).

Further, in the present embodiment, if any operation of the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 is accepted, the result is "No" in step S1307 of FIG. Since the process after S291 does not proceed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 that is stopped last has elapsed. ..
Then, when a predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 that is finally stopped has elapsed, and the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are released, FIG. 236. In step S1307 of the above, "Yes" is set and the process proceeds to the process of step S291 and thereafter, so that the display determination process and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 29th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 29th embodiment shown in FIG. 236, the step number different from that of FIG. 139 is underlined, and the same step number as that of FIG. 139 is given the same step number.

Further, also in the main process (M_MAIN) of the 29th embodiment, the process of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the process of steps S295 to S300 is not shown in FIG. 236.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 236, in the 29th embodiment, when the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1301, and the main control board 50 has the address “F012 (H)” of RWM53. The data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1302.

In step S1302, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data “01000111 (B)”, and stores the result in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1303.
Here, the mask data "01000111 (B)" used in step S1302 is data for masking (making "0") bit data other than the D0 bit, the D1 bit, the D2 bit, and the D6 bit. That is, by performing the logical product (AND) calculation of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) data and "01000111 (B)", the D0 bit (left stop switch signal), the D1 bit (middle stop switch signal), Bit data other than the D2 bit (right stop switch signal) and the D6 bit (start switch signal) can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1303, the main control board 50 is ORed by the A register value and the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 135) of the RWM53 address “F04D (H)”. The operation is performed and the result is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1304.
In step S1304, the main control board 50 is ORed with the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 136) of the RWM53 address “F058 (H)”. The operation is performed and the result is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1305.

In step S1305, the main control board 50 is ORed with the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 137) of the RWM53 address “F063 (H)”. The operation is performed and the result is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1306.

In step S1306, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data “01111111 (B)”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1307.
Here, the mask data "01111111 (B)" used in step S1306 is data for masking (making "0") the bit data of the D7 bit. That is, by performing a logical product (AND) operation between the data of the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) and "01111111 (B)", the D7 bit (data indicating whether or not it is the excitation update timing) is generated. It can be masked (set to "0").

In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is "0".
Then, when the zero flag is "1" (the result of the logical product operation in step S1306 is "0"), it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the result is "Yes" in step S1307, and the display determination in step S291. Proceed to. As a result, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 can be executed thereafter.

That is, when the data of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all data indicating stop, all the data. It is determined that the reel 31 has stopped, and the display determination and the medal payout process at the time of winning can be executed.

On the other hand, when the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that one of the reels 31 is not stopped, the result is "No" in step S1307, and the process returns to the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in step S752. In this case, the processes after step S752 are repeated. As a result, the display determination in step S291 does not proceed, so the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is not executed either.

That is, when any of the data of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the data of the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the data of the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) is not the data indicating the stop. , Do not execute the medal payout process at the time of winning.
For example, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped, and the right reel 31 accepts the operation of the right stop switch 42, but is still in the deceleration start state or during deceleration (during 4-phase excitation output). In some cases, the medal payout process at the time of winning is not executed.

Here, when the D0 bit, D1 bit, D2 bit, and D6 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) are all "0", that is, the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, When both the right stop switch signal and the start switch signal are off, the result of the logical product (AND) calculation in step S1302 is "00000000000 (B)".

Further, when the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are all "000000 (B)" or "10000000 (B)", that is, , When all reels 31 are stopped, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS), the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS), and the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) are sequentially ORed, and the result is And the mask data "01111111 (B)" are logically producted (AND) and the result is "00000000000 (B)".

Therefore, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 is "00000000000 (B)" because the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal, and the start switch signal are all off. And only when all the reels 31 are stopped. Then, only at this time, "Yes" is set in step S1307, and the display determination in step S291 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 can be executed.

Further, when one or more of the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal, and the start switch signal are on, that is, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42. , And when the operation of one or more of the start switches 41 is accepted, the result of the logical product (AND) calculation in step S1306 is "00000000000 (B)" even if all the reels 31 are stopped. "do not become.

Specifically, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 that stops last is completed, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last can be operated. If it remains accepted, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000000 (B)".
In this case, since the result is "No" in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

Further, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) that stops last is completed, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) In the situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the above is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that has stopped first (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop switch corresponding to the reel 31 that has stopped first is operated. Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the 42 is operated, the stop switch corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated, so that the logical product (AND) calculation in step S1306 is performed. The result of is not "0000000000 (B)".

In this case as well, since the result is "No" in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.
In this way, under the situation where any of the stop switches 42 is operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is prevented from being executed, so that the number of credits can be obtained at the player's desired timing. Can be added or medals can be paid out from the hopper 35.

Further, even if the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal, and the start switch signal are all off, that is, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, the right stop switch 42, and the start switch. Even if all 41 are separated, if there is one or more reels 31 that are not stopped, the result of the logical product (AND) calculation in step S1306 will not be "00000000000 (B)".

Specifically, for example, four-phase excitation of the motor 32 of the reel 31 that stops last even if all the stop switches 42 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 that stops last and the start switch 41 are released. If the output is not completed, the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1306 will not be "00000000000 (B)".
In this case, since the result is "No" in step S1307, neither the display determination in step S291 nor the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 is executed.

Here, for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated to pay out 15 small winning combination 01 or 3 cards. It is assumed that any of the small roles 13 to 17 can win a prize.
Further, the two reels 31 are stopped (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is completed), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and three reels are paid out. It is assumed that the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses. (For example, the timing of performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31 and the timing before performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31) are three. Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 of the eye is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released within a predetermined period during which the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is performed, the medal is paid out at the time of winning. Do not execute the process (M_WIN_PAY).
Then, after a predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the credit number data is acquired in step S393, and the acquired credit number data is "50 (D)" in the next step S394. Determine if it exists. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50".
Then, when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the result is "Yes" in step S394, and the process proceeds to the process of paying out one medal in step S398. In this case, the process of adding the number of credits in step S397 does not proceed.

On the other hand, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the result is "No" in step S394. In this case, the process proceeds to the process of adding the number of credits in step S397, and the process of paying out one medal in step S398 does not proceed.
Further, when proceeding to the process of paying out one medal in step S398, as described in the first embodiment (C), the process of outputting the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is executed, and the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually drive the hopper motor 36. The medal is paid out from the hopper 35. Further, by detecting the on / off of the payout sensors 37a and 37b, it is determined that one medal has been paid out from the hopper 35.

In this way, in the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the process of adding the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50", and when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value "50". , The process of outputting the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and the actual medal is paid out from the hopper 35.
Further, a common process is executed halfway between when the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out medals from the hopper 35 and when the number of credits is added. As a result, the processing can be simplified, and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

That is, when the number of credits is the upper limit value "50", the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. Then, in the game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 in which the three medals are given is stopped and displayed, the third reel is displayed. After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, the third reel 31 is set to the third reel 31 at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed. Even when the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, the drive signal output process for outputting the drive signal of the hopper 35 is executed after a predetermined period of time for performing the excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed. To do.

As a result, the hopper motor 36 can be driven without driving the hopper motor 36 while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being excited in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 can be driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. The current required to drive the motor 36 can be secured.

On the other hand, when the number of credits is "0", the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the two reels 31 are stopped. Then, in the game in which the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 in which the three medals are given is stopped and displayed, the third reel is displayed. After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is accepted, the third reel 31 is set to the third reel 31 at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed. Even when the corresponding stop switch 42 is released, the addition process of adding the number of credits is executed after a predetermined period of exciting output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed.

In this case, the drive signal output process of the hopper 35 is not executed, but the number of medals is the same under the same conditions (stop of all reels 31 and signal off of various switches (start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switch 42)). By executing the addition process of, the process up to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be standardized. That is, since the processing up to the medal payout processing (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be standardized without determining the number of credits at the start of the game, the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Further, for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated to pay out 15 small winning combination 01 or 3 small winning combination. It is assumed that any of the roles 13 to 17 can be won.
Further, the two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 (third reel 31) is accepted, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out three is accepted. It is assumed that (Fig. 119) can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances (under the situation where the two reels 31 are stopped), even if a predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, the third reel 31 is stopped. If the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 is still accepted, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

In this way, in the game in which the symbol combination in which the medal is paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is performed. ) Is not executed, and when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Further, of the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, regardless of whether or not a predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed. If any of the above operations is accepted, the result is "No" in step S1307 of FIG. 236, and the process after step S291 does not proceed. Therefore, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are all released and a predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, FIG. 236 is taken. In step S1307 of the above, "Yes" is set, and the process proceeds to the process of step S291 and thereafter, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

In this way, in the game in which the symbol combination in which the medal is paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed, the operation of any one of the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 is continued. When the start switch 41 and the three (left, middle, right) stop switches 42 are all released without executing the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It will be possible.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power cutoff process is executed in the situation where the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, the three reels 31 are operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 is supported. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or the medal can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ends, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ) Is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least when all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Further, also in the present embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the medal payout device 15 rotates the hopper 35 for storing medals, the hopper disk 101 provided at the bottom of the hopper 35, and the hopper disk 101. A hopper motor 36 for this purpose and payout sensors 37a and 37b for detecting the payout of medals are provided.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the medal payout device 15 and controls the drive of the hopper motor 36.

Further, the hopper motor 36 is a DC motor (DC motor), and when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned on and a current is passed through the hopper motor 36, the rotation of the drive shaft is gradually accelerated from the stopped state. Eventually, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed). After that, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the rotation of the drive shaft gradually decelerates from the constant speed state, and then stops.
When the rotation of the drive shaft is stopped, the rotation of the drive shaft can be suddenly stopped by passing a current through the hopper motor 36 in the direction opposite to that when the medal is paid out.

Here, the maximum value of the current required to perform 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 (stepping motor) in order to stop the reel 31 is set to "500 to 800 mA" for one motor 32. ..
Further, the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 is set to "2.5 to 4.0 A (2,500 to 4000 mA)".
Furthermore, when the lamps and LEDs (for example, credit number display LED76, acquisition number display LED78, etc.) controlled on the main control board 50 side are lit, a current of "1A" is required.

Then, when a current exceeding "10 A" flows on the main control board 50 side, the protection circuit provided in the main control board 50 determines that it is an overcurrent (overload) and turns off (turns off) the power supply. Is set to.
If the power is turned off at this time, the power off process may not be executed. Temporarily, during a game (for example, in a situation where the number of credits is "50", the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, all reels 31 are stopped, and three medals are given. Is stopped and displayed, and just before the medal payout process at the time of winning (the process of driving the hopper motor 36 to pay out the medals), such a power cut occurs and the power cut process is executed. If this is not done, an unrecoverable error will occur even if the power is restored from the power off, and after the unrecoverable error is cleared (setting change processing is executed), the game will be restored in the state when the power was cut off. It becomes impossible to make it (for example, the process of giving three medals is not executed), which may give a disadvantage to the player.

The fuse of the power supply board may be blown when an overcurrent flows on the main control board 50 side. In this case, if the fuse blows, even if the power switch 11 is turned on, it will not recover from the power failure (it will break down).
Further, on the sub control board 80 side, the power supply is managed separately from the main control board 50 side.

As described above, the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is the current required to output the four-phase excitation output to the motor 32 (stepping motor) to stop the reel 31. It is set larger than the maximum value.
Therefore, when driving the hopper motor 36, it is preferable not to execute other control requiring a large current in order to secure the current required for that purpose.

Therefore, as described above, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses. (For example, the timing when the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the 3rd reel 31 and the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed to stop the 3rd reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 of the eye is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after the lapse of the predetermined period. I have to.

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being excited in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, it is possible to secure the current required to drive the hopper motor 36. That is, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and by extension, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Further, as described in the 23rd embodiment, in the reel drive management (I_REEL_ADM) (FIGS. 151 and 152) of step S841 during the interrupt processing (I_INTR), the right reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the left reel 31 are in this order. Drive control of the motors 32 (stepping motors) of the three reels 31 is sequentially performed. As a result, the drive control of the three motors 32 can be executed by one interrupt process.
Then, in the port output process (FIG. 151) of step S462 during the interrupt process (I_INTR), drive signals can be output to the three motors 32 at the same time.

As a result, the rotation of the three reels 31 and the motor 32 can be started all at once, and then all of them can be rotated at a constant speed.
Further, when the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operation is performed while the other two reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed. It is possible to stop the rotation by performing a 4-phase excitation output on the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 that has been accepted.

Furthermore, when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and any two stop switches 42 are operated quickly in sequence, the remaining one reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed. As it is, the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 whose operation was received earlier is subjected to 4-phase excitation output to stop the rotation, and the operation is performed later regardless of whether or not the 4-phase excitation output is completed. It is possible to stop the rotation by performing a 4-phase excitation output on the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 that has been accepted.

Further, before the predetermined period for stopping the first reel 31 and performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31 elapses (for example, 4 for stopping the second reel 31). The operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted at the timing when the phase excitation output is performed and the timing before the four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31). At that time, even before the predetermined period elapses, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 can be executed.
In this way, in order to stop any of the reels 31, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted and the stop switch is received before the predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 elapses. By enabling the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to 42 to execute the 4-phase excitation output, the game can proceed smoothly.

Further, as described above, since the maximum value of the current required to perform 4-phase excitation output to one motor 32 (stepping motor) is "500 to 800 mA", four-phase to three motors 32 The maximum value of the current required to perform the excitation output is "1500 to 2400 mA".
Since the maximum value of the current required to drive one hopper motor 36 is "2,500 to 4000 mA", the maximum value of the current required to perform four-phase excitation output to one motor 32. Is less than the maximum value of the current required to drive one hopper motor 36. Further, the maximum value of the current required to output the four-phase excitation output to the three motors 32 is smaller than the maximum value of the current required to drive one hopper motor 36.
Therefore, even if four-phase excitation outputs are simultaneously applied to the three motors 32, a sufficient current can be secured to stop them.

Although the 29th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1301, the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012 (H)" of the RWM53 is stored in the A register. Not exclusively.
For example, the data of the input port 51 to which the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, the right stop switch signal, and the start switch signal are input may be directly stored in the A register.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1302, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data “01000111 (B)” is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, data indicating on / off of the signal of the 3-bet switch 40b is stored in the D3 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address "F012 (H)" of the RWM53. Similarly, the D4 bit stores data indicating the on / off of the signal of the 1-bet switch 40a, the D5 bit stores the data indicating the on / off of the signal of the checkout switch 43, and the D7 bit stores the data indicating the on / off of the signal. Data indicating on / off of 17 signals is stored.

Then, in step S1301, the data of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is stored in the A register, and in the next step S1302, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data "11111111 (B)" is performed. You may go.
As a result, in addition to the start switch 41, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42, even when any of the signals of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the door switch 17 is on, It is possible to determine "No" in step S1307 of FIG. 236. That is, it is possible to prevent the process from proceeding to the display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 or the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294.

(3) In the above embodiment, in step S1306, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the mask data “01111111 (B)” is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, even if "000011111 (B)" is used as the mask data in step S1306, the same calculation result as described above can be obtained.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the reel drive control (I_REEL_CTL) is executed once every two interrupts, the D7 bit in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is "0" or "1" for each interrupt process. ". Therefore, not limited to such specifications, for example, when the D7 bit in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is always "0", in step S1306, the mask data is "11111111 (B)". It is also possible to use.

(4) For example, when the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) of the reel 31 that is stopped last becomes "10000000 (B)" or "0000000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output is completed. It may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
Then, the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "0000000 (B)", and the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) of the reel 31 that is stopped last is "10000000 (B)" or "0000000 (B)". ) ”, The display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 may be performed.

(5) For example, when the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) of the reel 31 that is stopped last becomes "00000000000 (B)", that is, the data of φ1 to φ4 of the motor 32 are all "0". When becomes, it may be determined that the 4-phase excitation output has ended, and it may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "0000000000 (B)" and the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) of the reel 31 that is stopped last is "0000000000 (B)", the figure is shown. The display determination in step S291 of 236 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 may be performed.

(6) For example, when the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) of all reels 31 becomes "00000000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of all motors 32 ends, and all reels 31 May be determined to have stopped.
That is, the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1), the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000 (B). , It may be determined that the four-phase excitation outputs of all the motors 32 have ended and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "000000 (B)" and the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) of all reels 31 is "000000 (B)", FIG. 236 shows. The display determination in step S291 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 may be performed.

(7) For example, when the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) of the reel 31 that is stopped last becomes "00000000 (B)", it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output has ended, and the reel 31 May be determined to have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "000000 (B)" and the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) of the reel 31 that is stopped last is "000000 (B)". , The display determination in step S291 in FIG. 236 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 may be performed.
Again, the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) is updated (subtracted) by interrupt processing. This point is the same in other embodiments.

(8) For example, when the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) of all reels 31 becomes "000000 (B)", the four-phase excitation output of all motors 32 ends, and all It may be determined that the reel 31 has stopped.
That is, the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL1_PLSOUT), the second reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL2_PLSOUT), and the third reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL3_PLSOUT) are sequentially ORed, and the result is "00000000". When “(B)” is reached, it may be determined that the four-phase excitation outputs of all the motors 32 have ended and all the reels 31 have stopped.
Then, when the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "000000 (B)" and the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) of all reels 31 is "000000 (B)", the figure is shown. The display determination in step S291 of 236 and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 may be performed.

(9) In the above embodiment, after the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 elapses (for example,). Other stop switch 42 operations are accepted at the timing when the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 is performed and the timing before the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31). The motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can be subjected to 4-phase excitation output, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, after the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is performed before the predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 elapses. May not be accepted and the stop control of the other reel 31 may not be executed.

Further, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted from the time when the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted until the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 starts the 4-phase excitation output. However, it is also possible not to execute the stop control of the other reel 31.
Furthermore, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reel 31 is not executed within a predetermined period during which the motor 32 of any reel 31 is subjected to the 4-phase excitation output. You can also.

Here, as in the above embodiment, after the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 elapses ( For example, the operation of another stop switch 42 is accepted at the timing when the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 is performed or the timing before the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 is performed. If the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the other stop switch 42 can execute the 4-phase excitation output, the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reel 31 may be interchanged.

Specifically, for example, when three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are operated quickly in this order. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, and then the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted before the left reel 31 stops. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from the acceptance of the operation of the left stop switch 42 to the stop of the left reel 31 is set to "4", and after the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted. , It is assumed that the number of moving symbols until the middle reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Therefore, after the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 elapses, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is performed. If the stop switch 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reel 31 is not executed, it is possible to prevent the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reel 31 from being interchanged.

Similarly, from the time when the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted until the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 starts the 4-phase excitation output, the operation of the other stop switch 42 is performed. Even when it is not accepted and the stop control of the other reel 31 is not executed, it is possible to prevent the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reel 31 from being interchanged.
Further, even when the operation of the other stop switch 42 is not accepted and the stop control of the other reel 31 is not executed within the predetermined period during which the motor 32 of any reel 31 is subjected to the 4-phase excitation output. , It is possible to prevent the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reel 31 from being interchanged.

(10) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an exciting output for stopping the reel 31, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, a one-phase excitation output may be performed, a two-phase excitation output may be performed, or a three-phase excitation output is performed as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. You may. Further, first, a two-phase excitation output is applied and a weak brake is applied, and then the two-phase excitation output is switched to a four-phase excitation output and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You may let it.
(11) The various modifications shown in the first to 29th embodiments and the first to 29th embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<30th Embodiment>
In the thirtieth embodiment, a predetermined period for performing a four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has elapsed based on the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) (FIG. 237) of the RWM 53. Judge whether or not. In addition, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed within the predetermined period during which the 4-phase excitation output is performed. Then, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output has elapsed (the 4-phase excitation output has ended), and then. , The medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reel 31, the effective line, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment.
FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the main data according to the thirtieth embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the thirtieth embodiment. The data shown in FIG. 237 is a part of the data, and various data other than the illustrated data are stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 237, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address “F005 (H)” includes an input sensor 1 signal (D0 bit), an input sensor 2 signal (D1 bit), which are input to each bit of the input port 2. This is a storage area for storing on / off of a full detection signal (D3 bit) and a stop release signal (D4 bit).

The throw-in sensor 1 signal means a signal that turns on when the throw-in sensor 44a (FIG. 2) detects a medal and turns off when it does not detect a medal.
The insertion sensor 2 signal means a signal that turns on when the insertion sensor 44b (FIG. 2) detects a medal and turns off when the insertion sensor 44b (FIG. 2) does not detect a medal.
Furthermore, it is equipped with a sub-tank that houses medals overflowing from the hopper 35 and a full sensor that turns on when the medals come into contact with the sub-tank when the sub-tank is full. Means a signal that turns on when the medals touch and turns off when the medals are not touching.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute a normal game and a special game (1BB game) that is advantageous to the player, and when the normal game is changed to the special game, the game is stopped at the end of the special game and the progress of the game is stopped. Is possible. The conditions for stopping are not limited to the end of the special game, and can be set as appropriate. In addition, it is equipped with a stop release switch, and when the conditions for stopping are satisfied, the stop release switch can be operated to release the stop and enable the game to proceed. The stop release signal means a signal that turns on when the stop release switch is operated and turns off when the stop release switch is released. The stop release switch can also be used as another switch such as the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14.

Then, in the interrupt processing this time, the signal input to each bit of the input port 2 is read, and the on / off of the input sensor 1 signal, the input sensor 2 signal, the full detection signal, and the stop release signal is determined and turned on. When is, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of the address “F006 (H)” is a setting / reset switch signal (D1 bit), a settlement switch signal (D3 bit), which are input to each bit of the input port 4. It is a storage area for storing on / off of a 1-bet switch signal (D4 bit), a 2-bet switch signal (D5 bit), a 3-bet switch signal (D6 bit), and a start switch signal (D7 bit).
The setting / reset switch signal means a signal of a setting change (reset) switch 153 that also serves as a setting change switch and a reset switch.

The checkout switch signal means a signal that turns on when the checkout switch 43 is operated and turns off when the checkout switch 43 is released.
Further, the 1-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated and turns off when the 1-bet switch 40a is released.

Furthermore, the 3-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and turns off when released.
Further, a 2-bet switch for inserting two medals is provided, and the 2-bet switch signal means a signal that turns on when the 2-bet switch is operated and turns off when released.
Furthermore, the start switch signal means the signal of the start switch 41.

Then, in the interrupt processing this time, the signal input to each bit of the input port 4 is read, and the setting / reset switch signal, the settlement switch signal, the 1-bet switch signal, the 2-bet switch signal, the 3-bet switch signal, and the start The on / off of the switch signal is determined, and when it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) of the address “F00A (H)” is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of the input port 3. ), And a storage area for storing the on / off of the third stop switch signal (D2 bit).

The # stop switch signal means a signal that turns on when the # stop switch 42 is operated and turns off when the # stop switch 42 is released.
Then, in the interrupt processing this time, the signal input to each bit of the input port 3 is read, and the on / off of the first stop switch signal, the second stop switch signal, and the third stop switch signal is determined and turned on. When is, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit, and when it is off, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 237, the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at the address “F007 (H)” is a storage area for storing data for managing the stop order of the reels 31.
In step S1311 of FIG. 238, which will be described later, the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is initialized (cleared, the initial value "0" is set). After that, each time step S1323 of FIG. 239, which will be described later, is executed, the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) is added by "1". Then, when the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) becomes the number of reels “3”, it becomes “Yes” in step S1315 of FIG. 238, which will be described later.

In FIG. 237, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) at the address “F008 (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the reel number at the time of receiving a stop.
When the first stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 of FIG. 239 described later, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) indicates "1 (1 ()" indicating the first reel 31. D) ”is memorized.

Further, when the second stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), the second reel 31 is indicated in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) in step S1322 of FIG. 239 described later. 2 (D) ”is stored.
Further, when the third stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), in step S1322 of FIG. 239 described later, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) indicates the third reel 31. 3 (D) ”is stored.

In FIG. 237, the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) at the address “F020 (H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the first reel 31. That is, it is a storage area for storing data for measuring a predetermined time for performing a four-phase excitation output for stopping the first reel 31.
The initial value "108 (D)" is set in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) at the start of deceleration of the first reel 31 (at the start of the four-phase excitation output of the first reel 31 to the motor 32). .. After that, the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is subtracted by "1" each time the interrupt processing is executed. When the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is "1" or more, a four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 of the first reel 31 for each interrupt process. Then, when the value of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output of the first reel 31 to the motor 32 ends.

In the present embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to "2.235 ms", and the value of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt process.
Therefore, it takes "2.235 x 108 = 241.38 ms" for the value of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) to change from "108 (D)" to "0 (D)". The 4-phase excitation output continues during "241.38 ms", and when "241.38 ms" elapses, the 4-phase excitation output ends.
That is, in the present embodiment, the "predetermined period" for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 corresponds to "241.38 ms".

Further, in FIG. 237, the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME) at the address “F030 (H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the second reel 31. That is, it is a storage area for storing data for measuring a predetermined time for performing a four-phase excitation output for stopping the second reel 31.
Further, in FIG. 237, the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME) at the address “F040 (H)” is a timer that manages the four-phase excitation output time of the third reel 31. That is, it is a storage area for storing data for measuring a predetermined time for performing a four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31.
These contents are the same as the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) of the address "F020 (H)".

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the thirtieth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the twenty-third embodiment.
In the flowchart of the thirtieth embodiment shown in FIG. 238, the steps different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Further, also in the main process (M_MAIN) of the thirtieth embodiment, the processes of steps S295 to S300 in FIG. 139 are executed, but in FIG. 238, the processes of steps S295 to S300 are not shown.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 238, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1311, and the main control board 50 initializes the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER). (Clear, set the initial value "0"). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1312.
Proceeding to step S1312, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 239, which will be described later. Then, when the reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1313.

Proceeding to step S1313, the main control board 50 executes an input inspection. This process is the process shown in FIG. 240, which will be described later. Then, when the input inspection in step S1313 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1314.
In step S1314, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is input port level data (“1” is set in the carry flag of the flag register).
Here, when the process proceeds to step S1337 of FIG. 240, which will be described later, "1" is set in the carry flag bit of the flag register. The carry flag set in step S1337 serves as a flag indicating that there is input port level data.
The flag register is updated when some arithmetic processing is executed. Therefore, even if the bit for the carry flag is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another arithmetic processing.

Input sensor 1 signal, input sensor 2 signal, stop release signal, 1st stop switch signal, 2nd stop switch signal, 3rd stop switch signal, setting / reset switch signal, settlement switch signal, 1 bet switch signal, 2 bet switch When any of the signal, the 3-bet switch signal, and the start switch signal is ON, a flag indicating that there is input port level data is set in step S1337 of FIG. 240 described later (in the bit for the carry flag of the flag register). "1" is set).

On the other hand, when all of the above signals are off, step S1337 of FIG. 240, which will be described later, is skipped, so that the flag indicating the presence of input port level data is not set.
In step S1337 of FIG. 240, which will be described later, the signal to be checked when setting the flag indicating the presence of input port level data is not limited to the above signal, and can be appropriately set.
For example, some of the above signals, such as the stop release signal and the setting / reset switch signal, do not need to be checked when setting the flag indicating the presence of input port level data.
Conversely, in addition to the above signals, for example, signals of other switches such as the door switch 17 and the setting key switch 152 may be checked when setting a flag indicating the presence of input port level data.

Then, in step S1314, when "1" is set in the bit for the carry flag, it is determined that there is input port level data ("Yes"), and the process returns to step S1313. In this case, the processes of step S1313 and step S1314 are repeated.
When returning to the input inspection in step S1313 and executing some arithmetic processing, the flag register is updated. As a result, even if the bit for the carry flag is "1", it may be updated to "0" by another arithmetic processing.

On the other hand, in step S1314, when "1" is not set in the bit for the carry flag, it is determined that there is no input port level data ("No"), and the process proceeds to the next step S1315.
As a result, when any of the above signals is on, the process does not proceed to step S1315, and when all of the above signals are turned off, the process proceeds to step S1315.

Proceeding to step S1315, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels “3” are the same value. That is, it is determined whether or not the stop control is executed for all the reels 31.
Here, when it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are not the same value, the process returns to step S1312. As a result, the processes from step S1312 to step S1315 are repeated until the stop control is executed for all the reels 31. Then, when it is determined that the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) and the number of reels "3" are the same value, it is determined that the stop control has been executed for all the reels 31, and the process proceeds to step S1316.

Proceeding to step S1316, the main control board 50 executes an all reel stop check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 241 described later. Then, when the check for stopping all reels in step S1316 is completed, the process proceeds to step S291.
In step S291, the main control board 50 executes the display determination. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S292.

Further, when the result is "No" in step S292 and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S294.
Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually drive the hopper motor 36. Pay out the medal from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.

FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1312 of FIG. 238.
In step S1321, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there has been a stop acceptance. That is, it is determined whether or not any of the operations of the first stop switch 42 to the third stop switch 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 has D0 bits (first stop switch signal), D1 bits (second stop switch signal), and D2 bits of the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) of the address “F00A (H)”. It is determined whether or not any of (third stop switch signal) is on. Then, step S1321 is repeated until the stop is accepted, and when the stop is accepted, the process proceeds to the next step S1322.

Proceeding to step S1322, the main control board 50 stores the stop reel number data corresponding to the stop switch signal.
Specifically, when the first stop switch signal is on (the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted), "1 (D)" indicating the first reel 31 is added to the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL). Remember.

Further, when the second stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the second stop switch 42 is accepted), "2 (D)" indicating the second reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Further, when the third stop switch signal is turned on (the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted), "3 (D)" indicating the third reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Then, when the stop reel number data corresponding to the stop switch signal is saved, the process proceeds to the next step S1323.

In step S1323, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the value of the reel stop order data (_NB_STOP_ORDER) at the address "F007 (H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1324.
Proceeding to step S1324, the main control board 50 executes the process at the time of receiving the stop. In this process, the stop position of the # reel 31 is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery of this game and the position of the # reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop is performed. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data for determining the symbol combination to stop at the effective line is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

More specifically, in the process at the time of receiving a stop in step S1324 of FIG. 239, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment is executed. That is, with respect to the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1321, the winning combination lottery result of this game and the operation of the stop switch 42 were accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective line is updated by the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

The # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S1324 (process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment). When it is determined that the values for the stop position) are the same, the initial value "108 (D)" is set in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME), and 4 for stopping the motor 32 of the #th reel 31. Start phase excitation output.
Further, the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of the #th reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "" When 3 ”) is reached, the initial value“ 108 (D) ”may be set in the # reel management timer, and 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the # reel 31 may be started.

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing an input inspection in step S1313 of FIG. 238.
In step S1331, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the address “F005 (H)” of the RWM53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1332.

Proceeding to step S1332, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the closing sensor 1 signal, the closing sensor 2 signal, and the stop release signal are on.
Specifically, whether or not the D0 bit (input sensor 1 signal), D1 bit (input sensor 2 signal), and D4 bit (stop release signal) of the acquired input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are "1". To judge.
Then, in step S1332, when it is determined that any signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1337, and when it is determined that any signal is off, the process proceeds to the next step S1333.

In step S1333, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the address “F00A (H)” of the RWM53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1334.
Proceeding to step S1334, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first stop switch signal, the second stop switch signal, and the third stop switch signal are on.

Specifically, the D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal) of the acquired input port 3 level data (_PT_IN3_OLD) are "1". Determine if it exists.
Then, in step S1334, when it is determined that any signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1337, and when it is determined that any signal is off, the process proceeds to the next step S1335.

In step S1335, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the address “F006 (H)” of the RWM53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1336.
Proceeding to step S1336, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting / reset switch signal, the settlement switch signal, the 1-bet switch signal, the 2-bet switch signal, the 3-bet switch signal, and the start switch signal are on. ..

Specifically, the acquired input port 4-level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) has D1 bit (setting / reset switch signal), D3 bit (payment switch signal), D4 bit (1-bet switch signal), and D5 bit (2-bet switch signal). ), D6 bit (3-bet switch signal), and D7 bit (start switch signal) are determined to be "1".
Then, in step S1336, when it is determined that any signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1337, and when it is determined that any signal is off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S1337, the main control board 50 sets a flag indicating that there is input port level data. Specifically, "1" is set in the bit for the carry flag of the flag register. Here, if a flag (carry flag) indicating that there is input port level data is set, the result is “Yes” in step S1314 of FIG. 238. On the other hand, if step S1337 is skipped, a flag (carry flag) indicating that there is input port level data is not set, so that the result is “No” in step S1314 of FIG. 238. Then, when step S1337 is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing a check for stopping all reels in step S1316 of FIG. 238.
In step S1341, the main control board 50 sets the address of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) according to the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL).
Specifically, in step S1341, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008 (H)" of the RWM 53 in the A register.

Here, at the time of proceeding to step S1316, the reel number of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 operated third (last) is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008 (H)". Has been done.
For example, when the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the third (right) stop switch 42, the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) of the address "F008 (H)" at the time of proceeding to step S1316. Stores "3 (D)" indicating the third (right) reel 31.

Next, "F010 (H)", which is the result of subtracting "16 (D)" from the address "F020 (H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010 (H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, the A register value is multiplied by "16 (D)", and the result is stored in the A register.
Next, the A register value is added to the HL register value, and the result is stored in the HL register.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1342.

Proceeding to step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) is “0”.
Then, the process of step S1342 is repeated until the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) becomes "0", and the data stored in the # reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) is stored. When it becomes "0", the process according to this flowchart ends.
In this way, in the present embodiment, when the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 becomes "0", this flowchart. Ends the processing by.

Specifically, in step S1342, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (# reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME)) is "0". To do.
Then, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is "0"("Yes"), the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Further, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (# reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME)) becomes "0", the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 of FIG. 238, and then the winning of step S294. Proceed to the time medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, after a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 has elapsed, the display determination and the medal payout process at the time of winning (M_WIN_PAY) Can be executed.

More specifically, for example, "3 (D)" indicating the third (right) reel 31 is stored in the stop reel number data (_NB_STOP_REEL) (FIG. 237) of the address "F008 (H)" of the RWM53. Suppose. That is, it is assumed that the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the third (right) stop switch 42. In this case, "3 (D)" is first stored in the A register by the process of step S1341.

Next, "F010 (H)", which is the result of subtracting "16 (D)" from the address "F020 (H)" of the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME), is stored in the HL register. This "F010 (H)" becomes the reference address.
Next, "48 (D)", which is the result of multiplying the A register value "3 (D)" by "16 (D)", is stored in the A register.
Next, "F040 (H)", which is the result of adding the A register value "48 (D)" to the HL register value "F010 (H)", is stored in the HL register.

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1342, and whether the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value “F040 (H)”, that is, the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME) is “0”. Make a judgment as to whether or not.
Here, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) is not "0"("No"), the process of step S1342 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1342 is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to the process after step S291 in FIG. 238.

On the other hand, when the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) is "0"("Yes"), the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME)) becomes "0", the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 238, and then proceeds to step S294.
As a result, after a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 has elapsed, the display determination and the medal payout process at the time of winning (M_WIN_PAY) Can be executed.

Here, for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated to pay out 15 small winning combination 01 or 3 cards. It is assumed that any of the small roles 13 to 17 can win a prize.
Further, the two reels 31 are stopped (under the situation where the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is completed for the two reels 31), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is stopped. It is assumed that the operation is accepted and the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, before the predetermined period for performing the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses. (For example, the timing of performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31 and the timing before performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31) are three. Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 of the eye is released, it becomes "No" in step S1342 of FIG. 241 and the process does not proceed to the process after step S291 of FIG. 238. Do not execute.
That is, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for the third reel 31 is "1" or more, four-phase excitation for stopping the third reel 31 is performed. Since the output continues and the process of step S1342 of FIG. 241 is repeated, the process after step S291 of FIG. 238 does not proceed. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal is paid out at the time of winning. Do not execute the process (M_WIN_PAY).

Then, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for the third reel 31 becomes "0", the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 ends. Then, in step S1342 of FIG. 241 it becomes “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S291 of FIG. 238, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 can be executed thereafter.
In the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the process of adding the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", and when the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", the hopper The process of outputting the drive signal of the motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and the actual medal is paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.

As described above, also in the present embodiment, as in the 29th embodiment, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, 4 for stopping the third reel 31. Before the lapse of a predetermined period for performing phase excitation output (for example, the timing of performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 or 4-phase excitation for stopping the third reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released at the timing before output), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and after the lapse of the predetermined period, at the time of winning. Execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).

As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being excited in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, it is possible to secure the current required to drive the hopper motor 36. That is, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and by extension, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Further, in the present embodiment, switches for inputting signals to the input port 3 and the input port 4 (setting / reset switch 153, settlement switch 43, 1-bet switch 40a, 2-bet switch, 3-bet switch 40b, start switch 41, (Left, middle, right) If any of the operations of the stop switch 42) is accepted, it becomes "Yes" in step S1314 of FIG. 238, and the process after step S1315 does not proceed, so that the process is stopped at the end. The medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed regardless of whether or not a predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has elapsed.

Then, when all the switches for inputting signals to the input port 3 and the input port 4 are released, the result becomes "No" in step S1314 of FIG. 238, the process proceeds to the process after step S1315, and at this time, the reel 31 that stops last. When a predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the winning is elapsed, the display determination process and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Further, the present embodiment includes a # reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) that stores data for measuring a predetermined time for performing a four-phase excitation output for stopping the # reel 31. This #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) is a data-dedicated storage area for measuring a predetermined time for performing 4-phase excitation output.
Then, when the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) is "1" or more (not "0"), the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is continued. When the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) becomes "0", the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is terminated.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME), whether or not a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 has elapsed (4th phase). Whether or not the excitation output is performed) can be easily determined.
In particular, in the present embodiment, only the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked, so that the four-phase excitation output is completed. The process for determining whether or not it is possible can be simplified, and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Note that the two reels 31 are stopped (under the situation where the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is completed for the two reels 31), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 In a situation where the operation is accepted and the symbol combination in which the medal is paid out (granted) can be stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is still accepted. Suppose it continued.

In this case, “Yes” is set in step S1334 of FIG. 240, and a flag (carry flag) indicating that there is input port level data is set in step S1337. Then, in step S1314 of FIG. 238, “Yes” is set, the processing of step S1313 and step S1314 is repeated, and the processing after step S1315 does not proceed. Therefore, a four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is performed. Even after the specified period has passed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the result becomes “No” in step 1314 of FIG. 238, and the process proceeds to step S1315 and subsequent steps. Therefore, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It will be possible.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ends, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ) Is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least when all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.

In this way, in the game in which the symbol combination in which the medal is paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is performed. ) Is not executed, and when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
Similarly, in a game in which the symbol combination in which the medal is paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to any reel 31 is continuously operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is performed. If the stop switches 42 corresponding to all reels 31 are released without being executed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power cutoff process is executed in the situation where the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, the three reels 31 are operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 is supported. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or the medal can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the number of bets that can execute the game is bet, the main control board 50 first receives the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" of the RWM53 (FIG. 237). The data stored in is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the acquired data is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", the data stored in the input port 4-level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the RWM53 address "F006 (H)" is then stored. The acquired data is subjected to a logical product (AND) operation of the acquired data and "01111111 (B)", and it is determined whether or not the result is "0".
Further, when it is determined that the result of the logical product operation is "0", it is next determined whether or not the rising data of the start switch 41 is on.

Then, when it is determined that the rise data of the start switch 41 is on, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" is not "0", it is determined that the result of the above logical product operation is not "0". When this is done, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
As a result, the start switch 41 can be operated in a situation where the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) is accepted after the number of bets that can execute the game has been bet. When it is accepted, it is possible to prevent the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 from being executed.

Further, also in this embodiment, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting key switch 152 is provided.
Then, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is pressed in a state where the power is turned on and the number of bets is not bet. Turn it on, then insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151, rotate it 90 degrees clockwise, for example, and turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on), the setting confirmation state Move to (setting confirmation mode).

When the number of bets is bet, it becomes "Yes" in step S274 of FIG. 41 and the process of waiting for medal insertion in step S275 does not proceed. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Do not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed (although the set value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current set value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Then, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation start control of the reel 31 is executed, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" and the address "F006" (H) ”, the data stored in the input port 4-level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) is checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, do not check the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, do not check the level data of the RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, or set key switch. Of the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, after the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on). When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted while the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. And.

Here, even though the bet switch 40 is released after the bet switch 40 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 may remain accepted due to the deterioration of the bet switch 40.
Then, in the state where the operation of the bet switch 40 is still accepted, in the present embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, even when the checkout switch 43 is operated and then the checkout switch 43 is released but the checkout switch 43 is deteriorated and the checkout switch 43 is still accepted for operation, the start switch is also used. Even if the 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.
As a result, the player can recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 because the reel 31 does not rotate even if the start switch 41 is operated. Then, when the player informs the clerk of the hall to that effect, the clerk of the hall can also recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operation of the bet switch 40 and the checkout switch 43 is still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 is notified of the error. This is because if the error notification is performed in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

Further, it is not usually considered that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game, and the signal of the setting key switch 152 is temporarily input (the setting key switch). Even if the signal of 152 is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) with the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) bet. When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in the situation where the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. To be executable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (for example, the eleventh implementation) based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being on By outputting FIG. 33)) of the form, it is possible to notify the hall computer or the like. Therefore, the clerk in the hall or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal is output.
In a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (for example, FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on is turned on. It may be configured to output))) other than external signals 1 to 5.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 50 first receives the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" of the RWM 53 at the timing when the stop acceptance time of the reel 31 has elapsed (FIG. 237). ) Is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the acquired data is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is "0", the data stored in the input port 4-level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) (FIG. 237) of the RWM53 address "F006 (H)" is then stored. The acquired data is subjected to a logical product (AND) operation of the acquired data and "11111111 (B)", and it is determined whether or not the result is "0".
Further, when it is determined that the result of the logical product operation is "0", it is next determined whether or not the rising data of the # stop switch 42 is on.

Then, when it is determined that the rising data of the # stop switch 42 is on, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address "F005 (H)" is not "0", it is determined that the result of the above logical product operation is not "0". When this is done, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is not executed.
As a result, when the operation of the # stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is accepted while the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted. In addition, the stop control of the # reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) can be prevented from being executed.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop control of the # # reel 31 is executed, the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address “F005 (H)” and the address “ The data stored in the input port 4-level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006 (H)" is checked, but the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, do not check the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, do not check the level data of the RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, or do not check the level data of the setting key switch. Of the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). When the operation of the #stop switch 42 is accepted under the circumstances, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even though the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 may remain accepted due to the deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, in the state where the operation of the start switch 41 is still accepted, in the present embodiment, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is executed. do not do.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 is still accepted due to the deterioration of the bet switch 40. When the payment switch 43 is operated and the payment switch 43 is released, but the payment switch 43 is deteriorated and the operation of the payment switch 43 is still accepted. Also, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is not executed.

As a result, the player can recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 because the # reel 31 does not stop even if the # stop switch 42 is operated. Then, when the player informs the clerk of the hall to that effect, the clerk of the hall can also recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operations of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43 are still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 notifies the error. This is because if the error notification is performed in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

Further, it is not usually considered that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game, and the signal of the setting key switch 152 is temporarily input (the setting key switch). Even if the signal of 152 is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (). When the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted under the situation (the door switch 17 is off), the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (for example, the eleventh implementation) based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being on By outputting FIG. 33)) of the form, it is possible to notify the hall computer or the like. Therefore, the clerk in the hall or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal is output.
In a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (for example, FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on is turned on. It may be configured to output))) other than external signals 1 to 5.

Although the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in the all reel stop check, only the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. Not limited to this.
For example, in the all reel stop check, the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for all reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in the all reel stop check, first, the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel management timer (_WK_RL2_TIME), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel management timer (_WK_RL3_TIME), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0", and when it is determined that the A register value is not "0"("No"), it is stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME). The process returns to the process of storing the data in the A register. That is, the process after the process of storing the data stored in the first reel management timer (_WK_RL1_TIME) in the A register is repeated. In this case, the process does not proceed to the process after step S291 in FIG. 238.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the A register value is "0"("Yes"), the all reel stop check is completed, the process proceeds to step S291 of FIG. 238, and then the process proceeds to step S294. As a result, the display determination and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning are sequentially executed.

Here, it is assumed that when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, these are quickly operated in the order of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42. Then, it is assumed that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, and then the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted before the middle reel 31 stops. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from the acceptance of the operation of the middle stop switch 42 to the stop of the middle reel 31 is set to "4", and after the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted. , It is assumed that the number of moving symbols until the right reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the right reel 31 may stop first, and then the middle reel 31 may stop.

That is, the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 stops at the second (first), and the reel 31 corresponding to the second operated stop switch 42 becomes the third (last). It may stop.
In this case, as in the above embodiment, in the all reel stop check, only the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. However, it cannot be determined that the four-phase excitation output for all the reels 31 has been completed.

Therefore, as in this modification (1), the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the operation order of the stop switch 42 are determined by checking the data of the #th reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME) for all reels 31 in the all reel stop check. Even if the stop order of the reels 31 is changed, it can be determined that the 4-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has ended, and a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has elapsed. After that, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1337 of FIG. 240, “1” is set in the carry flag bit of the flag register as a flag indicating the presence of input port level data, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, predetermined information may be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 as a flag indicating that there is input port level data.
In this case, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is not cleared when some arithmetic processing is executed like the bit data of the flag register. Therefore, for example, the step in the input inspection of FIG. 240. Prior to S1331, a process of clearing predetermined information stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the # # stop switch 42 is accepted. It is assumed that the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted. The stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first and the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, but the left stop switch 42 is operated, the start switch 41 deteriorates and the start switch By keeping the operation of 41 being accepted, it is possible to prevent the middle stop switch 42 from being determined to have been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first even though the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, a push order error will occur, which will be disadvantageous to the player. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 can be executed, so that a push order error during AT may occur. Occurrence can be prevented.

Specifically, for example, in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated during the general game of the 1BB game (when 1BB is operating), the correct answer is given. The push order is left, middle, and right. At this time, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 is operated first even though the left stop switch 42 is operated first, a push order error occurs and the push order is small. Any one of the roles 13 to 17 (three-card role) wins.
This is disadvantageous to the player, but even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the correct answer is pushed by enabling the stop control of the left reel 31 based on the operation of the left stop switch 42. Since the small winning combination 01 (15-card winning combination) wins in order, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a push order error occurs during AT.
For example, the same applies to the case where the winning number "16" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination B1 condition device (FIG. 125) is activated.

Note that, as in this modification, even when the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is enabled under the situation where the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the setting key is used. Regardless of whether the signal of the switch 152 is turned on or off, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 may be executed. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(4) For example, the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, and then the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be accepted under the condition that the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted. At the same time, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be executed based on the operation of the second stop switch 42.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the left stop switch 42 deteriorates due to deterioration of the stop switch 42. By keeping the operation of 42 being accepted, it is possible to prevent the right stop switch 42 from being determined to have been operated second.

In particular, in the AT machine, when the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are stopped in this order, the second right stop switch 42 is operated even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated second. If it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, a push order error will occur, which will be disadvantageous to the player. However, even if the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is still accepted, the other By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 of the above and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, a push order error during AT may occur. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation.

Specifically, for example, in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated during the general game of the 1BB game (when 1BB is operating), the correct answer is given. The push order is left, middle, and right. At this time, if it is determined that the right stop switch 42 is operated second even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, a push order error occurs. , Any of the small roles 13 to 17 (three-card role) wins.
This is a disadvantage to the player, but even if the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, the stop control of the middle reel 31 based on the operation of the middle stop switch 42 can be executed, which is a correct answer. Since the push order is set and the small winning combination 01 (15-card winning combination) wins, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the pushing order is mistaken during AT.
For example, the same applies to the case where the winning number "16" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the small winning combination B1 condition device (FIG. 125) is activated.

It should be noted that, as in this modification, even when the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be executed under the situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted. , Regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on / off, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be executed. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an exciting output for stopping the reel 31, but this is not limited to this. Absent.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, a one-phase excitation output may be performed, a two-phase excitation output may be performed, or a three-phase excitation output is performed as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. You may. Further, first, a two-phase excitation output is applied and a weak brake is applied, and then the two-phase excitation output is switched to a four-phase excitation output and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You may let it.

(6) The contents and arrangement of each bit of the input ports 2 to 4 level data shown in FIG. 237 are merely examples, and are not limited to these contents and arrangements. The content and arrangement of each bit of the input ports 2 to 4 level data can be appropriately set.
For example, the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) at the address “F005 (H)” may be unused without storing the on / off of the stop release signal.

Further, for example, for the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of the address "F006 (H)", the setting / reset switch signal on / off may not be stored in the D1 bit, and the D0 to D2 bits may be unused. ..
Furthermore, for example, the on / off of the first to third stop switch signals may be stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of "F006 (H)".
Further, the flowchart of the input inspection in FIG. 240 can be appropriately changed according to the content and arrangement of each bit of the input ports 2 to 4 level data.

It is preferable that the input port into which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input and the input port into which the signals of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 are input are different, but the bet switch 40 and the start switch 41, the signal of the setting key switch 152 may be input to the input port into which the signal of the stop switch 42 is input.
Further, in the above embodiment, the data stored in the input port 2 to 4 level data storage area of the RWM53 is acquired to determine the on / off of each signal, but the data stored in the RWM53 is acquired. Instead of doing so, the signals input to the input ports 2 to 4 may be directly acquired to determine the on / off of each signal.

(7) In the input inspection flowchart of FIG. 240, in step S1331, the data of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address “F005 (H)” is acquired, and in step S1332, the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 are acquired. Although it is determined whether or not the signal and the stop release signal are on, for example, the processes of steps S1331 and S1332 may not be performed.

Further, for example, the on / off of the first to third stop switch signals is stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 4 level data (_PT_IN4_OLD) of the "F006 (H)", and the settlement switch signal is stored in the D3 bit. The 1-bet switch signal is stored in the D4 bit, the 2-bet switch signal is stored in the D5 bit, the 3-bet switch signal is stored in the D6 bit, and the start switch signal is stored in the D7 bit.
Then, for example, in the flow chart of the input inspection of FIG. 240, the processing of steps S1331 to S1334 may not be performed, but only the processing of steps S1335 to S1337 may be performed.
(8) The various modifications shown in the first to thirtieth embodiments and the first to thirtieth embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<31st Embodiment>
In the 31st embodiment, a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has elapsed based on the data stored in the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (FIG. 134) of the RWM 53. Judge whether or not. In addition, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed within the predetermined period during which the 4-phase excitation output is performed. Then, when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) becomes the pulse data at the time of stop "00000000000 (B)", a predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output has elapsed (the 4-phase excitation output is It is determined that it has been completed), and then the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reel 31, the effective line, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment.
FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 31st embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 31st embodiment shown in FIG. 242, the steps different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Further, also in the main process (M_MAIN) of the 31st embodiment, the processes of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 are executed, but in FIG. 242, the processes of steps S295 to S300 are not shown.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 242, when the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed in the 31st embodiment, the process proceeds to step S1351.
Proceeding to step S1351, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the same as the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) of FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment.
Specifically, by the process corresponding to steps S1016 to S1017 in FIG. 194, the data of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address “F017 (H)” in FIG. 133 is acquired, and the D0 to D2 bits (left, left, It is determined whether or not any of the middle and right stop switch signals) is on. As a result, it is determined whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted.

Further, when it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, the result of the winning combination lottery for this game and the operation of the stop switch 42 have been accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). To do.
Further, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective line is updated by the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.
Then, by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S1351 (process corresponding to the reel stop acceptance check (M_STOP_CHK) in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment), the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (FIG. 135-). When it is determined that the # 137) and the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) are the same value, the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (FIG. 134) is displayed with the deceleration pulse data "000011111 (B)". Set (4 phase on). As a result, the 4-phase excitation output of the # reel 31 to the motor 32 is started.

The # reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of the # reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "" When 3 ”) is reached, the deceleration pulse data “000011111 (B)” may be set in the # reel motor signal data to start the 4-phase excitation output of the # reel 31 to the motor 32. ..
Then, when the reel stop acceptance check in step S1351 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1352.

Proceeding to step S1352, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the reel stop acceptance check in step S1351 has been completed for all reels 31. That is, it is determined whether or not all the operations of the stop switches 42 have been accepted.
Here, when it is determined in step S1352 that the reel stop acceptance check for all reels 31 has not been completed, the process returns to step S1351. In this case, the processes of steps S1351 and S1352 are repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1352 that the reel stop acceptance check for all reels 31 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1353.

In step S1353, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) of the address “F012 (H)” of the RWM 53 in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1354.
Proceeding to step S1354, the main control board 50 determines whether or not any of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted).

Specifically, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)", and determines whether or not the result is "0". Thereby, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.
Then, when the result of the above logical product operation is not "0", it is determined that one of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted), and in step S1354, " Yes ”, and the process returns to step S1353.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0", it is determined that all the stop switch signals are off (the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is not accepted), and in step S1354. The result is "No", and the process proceeds to step S291.

Here, when at least one operation of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port level data A ( At least one of the D0 to D2 bits of (_PT_IN_A_LV) becomes "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "1", the result of the above logical product operation is not "0".
Then, when the result of the above logical product operation is not "0", it becomes "Yes" in step S1354 and returns to step S1353. That is, the processes of steps S1353 and S1354 are repeated. In this case, since the process does not proceed to step S291 and subsequent steps, the display determination is not executed, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed either.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, and the right stop switch signal are all turned off. , The D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) are all "0".
When the D0 to D2 bits of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) are all "0", the result of the above logical product operation is "0".
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is "0", the result is "No" in step S1354, and the process proceeds to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes the display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, when the symbol combination in which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the number of medals paid out (granted) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.
The determined number of medals to be paid out (number of medals) may be stored (saved) only in a predetermined register and not stored (saved) in the RWM53, or may be stored (saved) in the RWM53. Good.

Further, when the result is "No" in step S292 and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1355.
In step S1355, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is in 4-phase excitation output.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (FIG. 134) for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42, and its value. Judges whether or not is "0".

Then, when the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) is not "0", it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is in progress, "Yes" is set in step S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. ..
On the other hand, when the value of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) is "0", it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is not in progress, the result is "No" in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, it is assumed that the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is the right stop switch 42. In this case, in step S1355, the main control board 50 acquires the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) (FIG. 134) corresponding to the right reel 31.
Further, at the start of deceleration of the right reel 31, deceleration pulse data "000011111 (B)" (4-phase on) is stored in the 3rd reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output has elapsed. Then, the stop pulse data "00000000000 (B)" is stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3).

Then, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is not "0", it becomes "Yes" in step S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1355 is repeated. In this case, since the process does not proceed to step S294, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
On the other hand, when the value of the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3) is "0", it becomes "No" in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294. As a result, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually drive the hopper motor 36. Pay out the medal from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.

Here, for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated to pay out 15 small winning combination 01 or 3 cards. It is assumed that any of the small roles 13 to 17 can win a prize.
Further, the two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out is stopped. It is assumed that it can be displayed.

Under such circumstances, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel Deceleration pulse data "000011111 (B)" (4-phase on) indicating that 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31 is performed on the # 1 reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) corresponding to 31. ) Is stored, it becomes “Yes” in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and the process does not proceed to step S294, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

That is, when the deceleration pulse data "000011111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) corresponding to the third reel 31, the third reel 31 is stopped. Since the 4-phase excitation output for this is continued and step S1355 in FIG. 242 is repeated, the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal payout process at the time of winning is performed. (M_WIN_PAY) Do not execute the process.

Then, when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes the stop pulse data "00000000000 (B)", the third reel 31 is stopped. The four-phase excitation output for making the data is completed, becomes "No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and proceeds to step S294, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
In the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning, the process of adding the number of credits is executed until the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", and when the number of credits reaches the upper limit "50", the hopper The process of outputting the drive signal of the motor 36 is executed, the hopper motor 36 is driven, and the actual medal is paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.

As described above, also in the present embodiment, as in the 29th and 30th embodiments, after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the third reel 31 is pressed. Before the lapse of a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping (for example, the timing for performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping the 3rd reel 31 or stopping the 3rd reel 31). Even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released at the timing before the 4-phase excitation output is performed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed and the predetermined period is reached. After that, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 (DC motor) is not driven while the motor 32 (stepping motor) is being excited in four phases, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed. Therefore, it is possible to secure the current required to drive the hopper motor 36. That is, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be reliably secured, and by extension, the hopper motor 36 can be reliably driven.

Further, in the present embodiment, at the start of deceleration of the #th reel 31, the pulse data “000011111 (B)” (4-phase on) during deceleration is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #), and 4-phase excitation is performed. When the predetermined period for outputting is elapsed, the stopped pulse data "000000000 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #).
Then, when the deceleration pulse data "000011111 (B)" is stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #), the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 is continued, and the #th reel When the data stored in the motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) becomes the stop pulse data "00000000000 (B)", the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is terminated.

As a result, by checking the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #), whether or not a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 has elapsed (4th phase). Whether or not the excitation output is performed) can be easily determined.
In particular, in the present embodiment, only the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) data for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked, so that the four-phase excitation output is completed. The process for determining whether or not it is possible can be simplified, and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Further, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, the result becomes "No" in step S1354 of FIG. 242. Since the process proceeds to step S291, the display determination is executed even under the situation where the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is being performed. Then, in the display determination, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and when the symbol combination for which the medal is paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the medal Determine the number of payouts (number of grants).

Further, after determining the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals) in step S291, the process proceeds to step S1355 to check the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) corresponding to the third reel 31. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is completed.
Then, when the data stored in the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) corresponding to the third reel 31 becomes the stop pulse data "00000000000 (B)", the third reel 31 is stopped. It is determined that the 4-phase excitation output for making the data is completed, the result is "No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, a four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is performed. However, when the display judgment is executed to determine the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be given), and then the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is completed, the medal payout process at the time of winning is completed ( M_WIN_PAY) is executed.
As a result, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals to be given) can be determined before the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is completed, so that the stop corresponding to the third reel 31 can be stopped. It is possible to shorten the time from when the switch 42 is released until the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

In a situation where the two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination in which the medal is paid out (granted) can be stopped and displayed. In the above, it is assumed that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted.

In this case, “Yes” is set in step S1354 of FIG. 242, step S1353 and step S1354 are repeated, and the process after step S291 does not proceed. Therefore, a predetermined 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is performed. Even if the period elapses, the display determination is not executed, therefore, the number of payouts is not determined, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the result becomes "No" in step 1354 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps. Therefore, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. It will be possible.

Specifically, for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated to pay out 15 small winning combination 01 or 3 cards. It is assumed that any of the small roles 13 to 17 can be won.
Further, the two reels 31 are stopped (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is completed), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and three reels are paid out. It is assumed that the symbol combination (FIG. 119) corresponding to the small winning combination 13 can be stopped and displayed.

Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 or the start switch 41 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted.
In this case, “Yes” is set in step S1354 of FIG. 242, step S1353 and step S1354 are repeated, and the process after step S291 does not proceed. Therefore, a predetermined 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is performed. Regardless of whether the period has passed or not, the display judgment is not executed, therefore, the number of payouts is not determined, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

Then, when all the stop switches 42 and the start switch 41 including the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 are released, the result becomes "No" in step 1354 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to the process of step S291 and thereafter, and further. When a predetermined period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 elapses, the result becomes "No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242, and the process proceeds to step S294. Therefore, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is performed. Can be executed.

In this way, in the game in which the symbol combination in which the medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, the display is determined and the medal at the time of winning is awarded. When the payout process (M_WIN_PAY) is not executed and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the display determination and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power cutoff process is executed in the situation where the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, the three reels 31 are operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 is supported. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or the medal can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ends, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ) Is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least when all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Although the 31st embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, in step S1355, only the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) data for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked. Not exclusively.
For example, in step S1355, the data of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) for all reels 31 may be checked.

Specifically, in step S1355, first, the data stored in the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR1) is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR2), and the result is stored in the A register value.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR3), and the result is stored in the A register value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the A register value is "0", and if the A register value is not "0", it is determined that the motor 32 of any reel 31 is in 4-phase excitation output, and the step is performed. It becomes "Yes" in S1355, and the process of step S1355 is executed again. In this case, the process does not proceed to step S294.
On the other hand, when the A register value is "0", it is determined that the motor 32 of any reel 31 is not in 4-phase excitation output, the result is "No" in step S1355, and the process proceeds to step S294. As a result, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.

Here, as described in the modified example (1) of the thirtieth embodiment, the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 stops second, and the second operated stop. The reel 31 corresponding to the switch 42 may stop at the third (last) position.
In this case, as in the above embodiment, even if only the # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) data for the reel 31 corresponding to the third (last) operated stop switch 42 is checked in step S1355. , It is not possible to determine that the 4-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has ended.

Therefore, as in this modification (1), in step S1355, by checking the data of the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) for all the reels 31, the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the reels 31 are checked. Even if the stop order of is changed, it can be determined that the 4-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has ended, and after a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for all reels 31 has elapsed. , The medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an exciting output for stopping the reel 31, but this is not limited to this. Absent.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, a one-phase excitation output may be performed, a two-phase excitation output may be performed, or a three-phase excitation output is performed as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. You may. Further, first, a two-phase excitation output is applied and a weak brake is applied, and then the two-phase excitation output is switched to a four-phase excitation output and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You may let it.
(3) The various modifications shown in the first to 31st embodiments and the first to 31st embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<32nd Embodiment>
In the 32nd embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out (granted) even in a situation where the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 is accepted and the state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted continues. The number) can be determined, and after determining the number of medals to be paid out, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 is operated, and if it is determined that none of the stop switches 42 are operated, a prize is won. It executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) of the time.

The symbol arrangement of the reel 31, the effective line, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment.
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the main data related to the 32nd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 32nd embodiment. The data shown in FIG. 243 is a part of the data, and various data other than the illustrated data are stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 243, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at the address “F067 (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31.

The drive state of the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is indicated by 2 bits of D0 to D1 bits. As shown in FIG. 243, “0 (D)” indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected the index. “1 (D)” indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is accelerating or is in a constant speed state, and before the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 detects the index. “3 (D)” indicates that the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in a step-out state.

The D2 bit indicates whether or not the standby effect is being executed, “1” indicates that the standby effect is being executed, and “0” indicates that the standby effect is not being executed.
The D3 bit indicates whether or not the deceleration is started, "1" indicates that the deceleration is started, and "0" indicates that the deceleration is not started.

The D5 bit indicates whether or not the step-out preparation is in progress (a state in which an abnormality has occurred in the rotation of the reel 31), "1" indicates that the step-out preparation is in progress, and "0" indicates that the step-out preparation is in progress. Indicates that you are not preparing for step-out.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 has detected the index, “1” indicates that the index has been detected, and “0” indicates that the index has not been detected.
The D7 bit indicates whether the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is stopped or decelerated, and "1" indicates that the motor 32 is not stopped or decelerated (acceleration or constant speed state). "Indicates that the vehicle is stopped or decelerated.

At the start of the standby effect, "1" is set in the D2 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).
Further, when the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted, "1" is set in the D3 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (the deceleration start state is set).
Furthermore, when the first reel symbol number (for passing position) is updated and the first reel symbol number (for passing position) falls below "0", the D5 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to ". 1 ”is set.

Further, the signal of the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is referred to as a first reel sensor signal. The first reel sensor signal is turned on when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is detecting the index, and is turned off when the reel sensor 33 of the first reel 31 is not detecting the index. Then, when the first reel sensor signal is turned from on to off, "1" is set in the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).
Further, at the start of rotation of the first reel 31, "81 (H)"("10000001(B)") is set in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).

Furthermore, when the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in the constant speed state and the D6 bit is "1", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "80 (H)"("10000000(B)". ) ”) Is set.
Further, in the deceleration start state (when the D3 bit is "1"), when the first reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the first reel symbol number (for the stop position) become the same value, the first “0 (H)” (“00000000000 (B)”) is set in the reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS). That is, "0 (H)" is set in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at the start of the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the first reel 31.
The first reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the first reel symbol number (for the stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of the first reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "" When 3 ”) is reached,“ 0 (H) ”may be set in the first reel drive state.

When the D5 bit in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1" and the D6 bit is "0", the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is set to "83 (H)"("". 10000011 (B) ") is set.
Furthermore, when the D6 bit in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) is "1", "0" is set in the D5 bit and D6 bit in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS).

In FIG. 243, the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) at the address “F077 (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31, and the address “F087 (H)”. The third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) of "H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31. These contents are the same as the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) of the address "F067 (H)".

In FIG. 243, the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address “F090 (H)” is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of the input port 2. ), The third stop switch signal (D2 bit), the first reel sensor signal (D4 bit), the second reel sensor signal (D5 bit), and the third reel sensor signal (D6 bit) are stored on / off. It is an area.

The # stop switch signal is turned on when the # stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed), and the # stop switch 42 is released (the pushed stop button 42a is released). (Return to the position of) turns off.
The # reel sensor signal turns on when the reel sensor 33 of the # reel 31 detects an index, and turns off when the index is not detected.
Then, in the interrupt processing, the signal input to each bit of the input port 2 is read, the on / off of each signal is determined, and when it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit and the signal is turned off. At one time, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 32nd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 32nd embodiment shown in FIG. 244, the steps different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and the same steps as in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Further, also in the main process (M_MAIN) of the 32nd embodiment, the processes of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 are executed, but in FIG. 244, the processes of steps S295 to S300 are not shown.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the 32nd embodiment, when the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1361.
Proceeding to step S1361, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 245, which will be described later. Then, when the reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 is completed, the process proceeds to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes the display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, when the symbol combination in which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the number of medals paid out (granted) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.
The determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (stored) only in a predetermined register and may not be stored in the RWM53, or may be stored in the RWM53.

Further, when the result is "No" in step S292 and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1362.
Proceeding to step S1362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not any of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted).

Specifically, in step S1362, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM53 in the A register. To do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)", and whether or not the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). To judge. Thereby, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

When the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted). It is determined that the result is "Yes" in step S1362, and the process of step S1362 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1362 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all the stop switch signals are off (the operation of any stop switch 42 is also accepted. No), the result is "No" in step S1362, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, when at least one operation of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 2 level data (input port 2 level data ( At least one of the D0 to D2 bits of (_PT_IN2_OLD) is "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) is "1", the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1").
Then, when the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it becomes "Yes" in step S1362, and the process of step S1362 is repeated. In this case, since the process does not proceed to step S294, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, and the right stop switch signal are all turned off. , The D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are all "0".
When the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) are all "0", the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the result is "No" in step S1362, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually drive the hopper motor 36. Pay out the medal from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1361 of FIG. 244.
In step S1371, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection.
First, the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) of the address "F067 (H)" of the RWM53 is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 243) of the RWM53 address "F077 (H)", and the result is obtained. Stored in the A register.

Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 243) of the RWM53 address “F087 (H)”, and the result is obtained. Store in the A register.
Finally, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is performed.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1372.

Proceeding to step S1372, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerated.
Specifically, whether or not the result of the logical product operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" in step S1371 is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). To judge.

Then, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped or decelerating, and the result is "Yes" in step S1372. The process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product calculation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), the motor 32 of any reel 31 is not stopped or decelerated (acceleration or constant speed state). ), The result is "No" in step S1372, and the process proceeds to the next step S1373.

Here, it is assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 are already stopped (stopped). Further, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 was accepted, but the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has not yet been performed (4-phase excitation). Before output). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 is still in the constant speed state.
In this case, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) of the two reels 31 that have already stopped is "00000000000 (B)", but the third (last) reel 31 Since the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) is "10001000 (B)", the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) of all reels 31 is ORed (OR). ) The result of the calculation is "10001000 (B)".

Therefore, the result of logical product (AND) calculation of "10001000 (B)" and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is "10000000 (B)" and does not become "0" (zero flag is set). Since it does not become "1"), it becomes "No" in step S1372, and the process proceeds to the next step S1373.
Therefore, since the process does not proceed to step S291 of FIG. 244, the display determination is not executed, and the number of medals paid out (number of medals granted) is not determined.

Further, it is assumed that the motors 32 of the two reels 31 have already stopped (they have been stopped, and the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 has ended). Then, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has already been performed (after the 4-phase excitation output). There is). That is, it is assumed that the motor 32 of the third (last) reel 31 has already stopped.
In this case, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 is "00000000000 (B)", so that the # reel drive state (_WK_RL) of the three reels 31 is The result of the logical sum (OR) calculation of #_STS) (FIG. 243) is "00000000000 (B)".

Therefore, the result of logical product (AND) operation of "000000000 (B)" and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is "00000000000 (B)" and becomes "0" (zero flag is set). Since it becomes "1"), it becomes "Yes" in step S1372, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Therefore, since the process proceeds to step S291 of FIG. 244, the display determination can be executed and the number of medals paid out (number of medals granted) can be determined.

Further, when proceeding to step S1373 of FIG. 245, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection for all the reels 31.
Specifically, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)"), and the result is "0" (. It is determined whether or not the zero flag is "1"). Thereby, for all the reels 31, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection.

Then, when the result of the above logical product calculation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is not after the index detection for at least one reel 31. , Step S1373 becomes "No", and the process proceeds to the next step S1374.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection for all the reels 31. It is determined that there is, and it becomes "Yes" in step S1373, skips step S1374, and proceeds to step S1375.

Here, for all reels 31, when the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) will be in any time. Is also "80 (H)"("10000000(B)").
In this case, the result of ORing the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 is "10000000 (B)".
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1373, the A register value is “10000000 (B)”.

Therefore, in step S1373, when the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") is performed, the result becomes "0" (the zero flag is "1"). Since it becomes "Yes" in step S1373, the step S1374 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1375.
Therefore, since the process of step S1375 (process at the time of accepting the stop) can be executed, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 can be executed.

Further, it is assumed that the motor 32 is in a constant speed state for all three reels 31, but the reel sensor 33 has not yet detected the index (before detection) for at least one reel 31.
In this case, since the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) of the reel 31 before index detection is “81 (H)” (“10000001 (B)”), the three reels 31 The result of ORing the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) is "10000001 (B)".
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1373, the A register value is “10000001 (B)”.

Therefore, in step S1373, when the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") is performed, the result is "00000001 (B)" and "0". (The zero flag does not become "1"), so that the result becomes "No" in step S1373, and the process proceeds to step S1374.
Therefore, since the process of step S1374 (preparation for step-out inspection) is performed and the process of step S1375 (process at the time of receiving a stop) is not executed, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed either.

Further, when the reel 31 is in the constant speed state, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is "10000000 (B)", and when the reel 31 is stopped, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is _WK_RL # _STS) is "0000000 (B)".
Therefore, one reel 31 has already stopped (the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended), and the remaining two reels 31 are in a constant speed state, or two reels. Even under the condition that 31 has already stopped (the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 has ended) and the remaining one reel 31 is in the constant speed state, the # reel drive state of the three reels 31 When the logical sum (OR) operation of (_WK_RL # _STS) is performed and the logical product (AND) operation of the result and "00000011 (B)" is performed, the same result "00000000000 (B)" is obtained.
As a result, even if there is a reel 31 that has already stopped, it is possible to determine whether or not the stop can be accepted by the same processing, so that the processing can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced. Can be reduced.

Proceeding to step S1374, the main control board 50 executes the step-out inspection preparation. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246, which will be described later. Then, when the preparation for the step-out inspection in step S1374 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1375.
Proceeding to step S1375, the main control board 50 executes the process at the time of receiving the stop. In this process, the stop position of the # reel 31 is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery of this game and the position of the # reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop is performed. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data for determining the symbol combination to stop at the effective line is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

More specifically, in the process at the time of receiving a stop in step S1375 of FIG. 245, the processes corresponding to steps S1016, step S1017, step 1022, step S1023, and step S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment are executed.
That is, the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address “F017 (H)” in FIG. 133 is acquired by the process corresponding to step S1016 in FIG. 194.
Next, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 rises (whether or not the rise data of the stop switch 42 is on) by the process corresponding to step S1017 in FIG. 194.
Further, when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has a rise (corresponding to “Yes” in step S1017 of FIG. 194), the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to have a rise corresponds to steps S1022 to S1023 of FIG. By the processing, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery of this game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is determined. , Stored in the reel symbol number (for stop position).
Further, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective line is updated by the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

The # reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) are generated by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S1375 (processing corresponding to steps S1016 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment). When it is determined that the values for the stop position) are the same, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is started.
Further, the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of the #th reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "" When 3 ”) is reached, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the # reel 31 may be started.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing the preparation for step-out inspection in step S1374 of FIG. 245 and step S1404 of FIG. 248 described later.
In step S1381, the main control board 50 sets the address “F067 (H)” of the RWM53 in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1382.

Proceeding to step S1382, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1381 and executes a step-out inspection on the first (left) reel 31. This process is the process shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later. Then, when the step-out inspection in step S1382 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1383.
In step S1383, the main control board 50 sets the address “F077 (H)” of the RWM53 in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1384.

Proceeding to step S1384, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1383 and executes a step-out inspection on the second (middle) reel 31. This process is the process shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same content as step S1382. Then, when the step-out inspection in step S1384 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1385.
In step S1385, the main control board 50 sets the address “F087 (H)” of the RWM53 in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 243). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1386.

Proceeding to step S1386, the main control board 50 refers to the address set in step S1385 and executes a step-out inspection on the third (right) reel 31. This process is the process shown in FIG. 247, which will be described later, and has the same contents as in steps S1382 and S1384. Then, when the step-out inspection in step S1386 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1387.
Proceeding to step S1387, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance wait. This process is the process shown in FIG. 248, which will be described later. Then, when the waiting for the stop acceptance in step S1387 ends, the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the step-out inspection in step S1382, step S1384 and step S1386 of FIG. 246.
In step S1391, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in a step-out state. Then, when it is determined that the step-out state is established, the process proceeds to the next step S1392, and when it is determined that the step-out state is not present, step S1392 is skipped and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S1392, the main control board 50 sets a parameter for reacceleration for the reel 31 determined to be in the step-out state. As a result, the motor 32 of the reel 31 determined to be in the step-out state is subjected to the excitation output for accelerating again. Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the waiting for the stop acceptance in step S1387 of FIG. 246.
In step S1401, the main control board 50 executes a reel drive state inspection. This process is the same as step S1371 in FIG. 245.
That is, the data stored in the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) (FIG. 243) of the address "F067 (H)" of the RWM53 is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) (FIG. 243) of the RWM53 address "F077 (H)", and the result is obtained. Stored in the A register.

Next, a logical sum (OR) operation is performed between the A register value and the data stored in the third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) (FIG. 243) of the RWM53 address “F087 (H)”, and the result is obtained. Store in the A register.
Finally, the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is performed.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1402.

Proceeding to step S1402, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection for all the reels 31. This process is the same as step S1373 in FIG. 245.
That is, is the logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") performed, and the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1")? Judge whether or not. Thereby, for all the reels 31, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection.

Then, when the result of the above logical product calculation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is not after the index detection for at least one reel 31. The result is "No" in step S1402, and the process proceeds to the next step S1403.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product calculation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection for all the reels 31. It is determined that there is, and it becomes “Yes” in step S1402, skips step S1403 and step S1404, and ends the process according to this flowchart.

Proceeding to step S1403, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in a step-out state. Then, when it is determined that the step is out of step, the process proceeds to the next step S1404, and when it is determined that the step is not in the step out state, the process returns to step S1401.
Proceeding to step S1404, the main control board 50 executes the step-out inspection preparation. This process is the process shown in FIG. 246 described above. Then, when the preparation for the step-out inspection in step S1404 is completed, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the two reels 31 are stopped (the four-phase excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is completed), and the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 When the operation is accepted and the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is performed, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) of the three reels 31 will be changed. Is also "000000 (B)", so the result of logical sum (OR) calculation of these is "00000 (B)".
Then, the result of the logical product (AND) calculation of "000000 (B)" and "83 (H)"("10000011(B)" is "0000000000 (B)", so that in step S1372 of FIG. Since the result is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 of FIG. 244, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals to be granted) can be determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the period for performing the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the third reel 31 has not elapsed (even during the 4-phase excitation output), the 4-phase excitation is performed. When the output is started, the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) of the third reel 31 becomes "000000 (B)", so that it becomes "Yes" in step S1372 of FIG. 245, and it becomes "Yes" in FIG. 244. Since the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291 of the above, the number of medals to be paid out (number of grants) can be determined.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted (even if the stop switch 42 is not released and is still pressed). When the 4-phase excitation output is started, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) of the third reel 31 becomes "00000000000 (B)", so that it becomes "Yes" in step S1372 of FIG. Proceeding to the display determination in step S291 of 244, the number of medals to be paid out (number of grants) can be determined.
As a result, the time from the reception of the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 until the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be given) can be shortened, and the subsequent medals to be paid out (the number of medals to be paid out) ( Grant) can be executed smoothly.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped in this order. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (FIG. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01, which is the payout of 15 cards, can be stopped and displayed. Suppose.
Under such circumstances, if the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the 3rd reel 31 is started, even if the period for performing the 4-phase excitation output does not elapse, 3 reels Even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the reel 31 of the eye continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

Further, the number of medals to be paid out is determined in step S291 of FIG. 244, and then the process proceeds to step S1362, which is stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) of the RWM53 address “F090 (H)”. Based on the data, it is determined whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

Then, in step S1362, when it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 (all the stop switches 42 including the last operated stop switch 42) is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal at the time of winning is awarded. Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the medals of the number of payouts (number of grants) determined in step S291 are paid out (granted). At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to drive the actual medal. Is paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Even if the power switch 11 is unintentionally turned off and the power cutoff process is executed in the situation where the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is operated, the three reels 31 are operated. By turning on the power switch 11 while the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is being operated, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed, and the third reel 31 is supported. When the stop switch 42 is released, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, even if the power is cut off at an unintended timing, the number of credits can be added or the medal can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a timing desired by the player.

Similarly, for example, even if the four-phase excitation output of the motors 32 of all reels 31 including the motor 32 of the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ends, the reel 31 that stops last (for example, the right reel 31) ) Is accepted, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is operated, and then the stop corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 is operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the last stopped reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is being operated, even if a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 has elapsed, Do not execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first stopped reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31) is released (at least when all the stop switches are released), the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed. Become.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 243) capable of storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the #th reel 31.
Then, in step S1373 of FIG. 245, the main control board 50 calculates the logical sum (OR) of the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) of the three reels 31, and "03 (H)"(" The logical product (AND) operation with "00000011 (B)") is performed, and it is determined whether or not the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1").
Thereby, for all the reels 31, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection.

Then, for all the reels 31, when the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection, the result of the above logical product calculation is "0" (zero flag is "1"). In this case, “Yes” is set in step S1373, the process proceeds to step S1375, and the process at the time of receiving the stop can be executed. Therefore, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 can be executed.

That is, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the index is detected for all the reels 31, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) of the three reels 31 is logically summed (_WK_RL # _STS). When the OR) operation is performed and the result and the result and the logical product (AND) operation of "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") are performed, the result becomes "0" (the zero flag becomes "1"). At this time, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can be executed.
In other words, when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the indexes have been detected for all the reels 31, the result is "Yes" in step S1373, the process proceeds to step S1375, and the diagram of the 25th embodiment is shown. The processing corresponding to step S1016, step S1017, step 1022, and step S1023 in 194 is executed.

On the other hand, for any of the reels 31, when the reel sensor 33 has not yet detected the index (before detection), the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (zero flag is "1"). It doesn't become. In this case, the result is "No" in step S1373, and the process proceeds to step S1374 to prepare for the step-out inspection. Since the process does not proceed to step S1375, the process at the time of receiving the stop is not executed, and the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.

That is, even when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any of the reels 31, the #th reel driven state (_WK_RL # _STS) of the three reels 31 ) Is ORed, and the result and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") are ANDed, the result is not "0" (zero flag is "1"). "do not become). At this time, even if the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.
In other words, even when all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, if the index has not yet been detected for any of the reels 31, the result is "No" in step S1373. In this case, the 25th execution is performed. The processing corresponding to step S1016, step S1017, step 1022, and step S1023 in FIG. 194 of the embodiment is not executed.

In this way, for all the reels 31, it is possible to determine whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection, that is, whether or not the stop can be accepted by a simple calculation. The processing can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

Although the 32nd embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) For example, in step S1373 of FIG. 245, first, the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address “F017 (H)” of FIG. 133 is acquired, and whether or not the stop switch 42 rises (stop). Whether or not the rising data of the switch 42 is on) is determined, and if it is determined that the stop switch 42 has rising, then the A register value and "03 (H)"("00000011(B)") are displayed. By performing the logical product (AND) calculation of and determining whether or not the result is "0" (zero flag is "1"), the motor 32 is in a constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is in a constant speed state for all the reels 31. May be determined whether or not is after index detection.

That is, even if it is first determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated, and then for all the reels 31, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 is in the constant speed state and the reel sensor 33 is after the index detection. Good.
When the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (zero flag is "1"), the result becomes "No" in step S1373, the process proceeds to step S1374, and the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (zero flag). Is "1"), it becomes "Yes" in step S1373, skips step S1374, and proceeds to step S1375.

Further, as in this modification (1), in step S1373 of FIG. 245, it is first determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated, and then the motor 32 is in a constant speed state for all reels 31. When determining whether or not the reel sensor 33 has detected the index, the process at the time of stop acceptance in step S1375 of FIG. 245 executes the processes corresponding to steps 1022 and S1023 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment. To do. That is, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery of this game and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is assigned. Stored in the reel symbol number (for stop position).

(2) In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S1362 of FIG. 244 whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, and it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is not accepted. Proceeded to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 244, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a start switch signal is input to the input port 2, and the on / off of the start switch signal is stored in any bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) (FIG. 243) of the RWM53 address "F090 (H)". Make it possible.
Further, in step S1362 of FIG. 244, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 41 or the three stop switches 42 is accepted based on the data stored in the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD). to decide.

Then, when it is determined that the operation of any of the switches is accepted, the process of step S1362 is repeated, and when it is determined that the operation of any of the switches is not accepted, at the time of winning the prize in step S294 of FIG. You may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning from being executed even when the operation of the start switch 41 as well as the stop switch 42 is accepted.
Then, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

(3) In step S1362 of FIG. 244, it is determined whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 (last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) is determined. When it is determined that the operation of the last operated stop switch 42) is not accepted, the process may proceed to the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 244.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 during AT and the small winning combination A1 condition device (FIG. 124) is activated, the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 are stopped in this order. Then, the operation of the right stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) right reel 31 is accepted, and the symbol combination (FIG. 118) corresponding to the small winning combination 01, which is the payout of 15 cards, can be stopped and displayed. Suppose.
Under such circumstances, if the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the 3rd reel 31 is started, even if the period for performing the 4-phase excitation output does not elapse, 3 reels Even if the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the reel 31 of the eye continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out can be determined.

Further, the number of medals to be paid out is determined in step S291 of FIG. 244, and then the process proceeds to step S1362, and the operation of the stop switch 42 (last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted. Judge whether or not it is.
Then, in step S1362, when it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 (the last operated stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal at the time of winning is awarded. Execute the payout process (M_WIN_PAY). As a result, the medals of the number of payouts (number of grants) determined in step S291 are paid out (granted).

At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to drive the actual medal. Is paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 (stepping motor) as an exciting output for stopping the reel 31, but this is not limited to this. Absent.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, a one-phase excitation output may be performed, a two-phase excitation output may be performed, or a three-phase excitation output is performed as the excitation output for stopping the reel 31. You may. Further, first, a two-phase excitation output is applied and a weak brake is applied, and then the two-phase excitation output is switched to a four-phase excitation output and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You may let it.

(5) In the above embodiment, "0 (H)" is set in the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) at the start of the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31, but this is set. Not limited to this, for example, "0 (H)" may be set to the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) at the end of the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31.
(6) The various modifications shown in the first to 32nd embodiments and the first to 32nd embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<33rd Embodiment>
In the 33rd embodiment, the two reels 31 are stopped (the excitation output for stopping the reels 31 is finished), the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is accepted, and the medal When the symbol combination to be paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, three of them are used. After the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 of the eye is completed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed. Then, after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, there is a case where an effect related to the game result is output.

Further, in the 33rd embodiment, the type of combination, the combination of symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, and the effective line are different from those in the 23rd embodiment.
Specifically, in the 33rd embodiment, the roles are roughly classified into a special role (role), a replay (replaying role), and a small role. In addition, it has 1BB (first-class accessory continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) as a special role, and has a bell, watermelon, and cherry as a small role.

The symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is set to "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7", and the symbol combination corresponding to replay is set to "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay". , The symbol combination corresponding to the bell is set to "bell"-"bell"-"bell", and the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is set to "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon", and corresponds to the cherry. The symbol combination to be used is set to "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY".
In addition, "ANY" means that any symbol may be used (arbitrary symbol).

The effective line has five lines: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, a rising line, and a falling line.
When the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the medal is not paid out in this game, but the 1BB game is started from the next game.
Further, if 1BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed on the effective line, the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line. The game state in which the winning information of 1BB is carried over is called "inside 1BB".

Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line, medals are automatically inserted and the replay can be executed.
Further, the number of bells to be paid out is set to 15, the number of watermelons to be paid out is set to 7, and the number of cherries to be paid out is set to 1.
In addition, both Replay and Bell will be elected individually and will not be elected in duplicate with other roles.
Furthermore, the watermelon has a case of being single-winned and a case of being double-winned with 1BB, and the cherry has a case of being single-winning and a case of being double-winning with 1BB.
Further, 1BB has a case of winning alone and a case of winning multiple times with watermelon or cherry.

Further, in the 33rd embodiment, any one of the winning numbers "0" to "7" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61. Then, when the winning number is determined, the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number operates.
Winning number "0" corresponds to non-winning, winning number "1" corresponds to single winning of replay, winning number "2" corresponds to single winning of bell, winning number "3" corresponds to single winning. It corresponds to the single winning of watermelon, and the winning number "4" corresponds to the single winning of cherry.
In addition, the winning number "5" corresponds to the single winning of 1BB, the winning number "6" corresponds to the duplicate winning of "1BB + watermelon", and the winning number "7" corresponds to the duplicate winning of "1BB + cherry". Correspond.

For example, when the winning number "1" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the replay condition device corresponding to the winning number "1" is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay can be stopped and displayed.
Further, when the winning number "7" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or the cherry is supported. The symbol combination can be stopped and displayed.
In the game in which the winning number "7" is determined by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed. May be good.

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the main data related to the 33rd embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 33rd embodiment.
In FIG. 249, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address “F0AD (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. is there.

The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted, “0” indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and “1” indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. Indicates that (accepted).
Further, the D1 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are the same as those of the D0 bit.

The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD (H)" in FIG. 249 is the bit "0" and "1" with the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F0AD (H)" in FIG. 173. Is the opposite. That is, in FIG. 173, "1" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and "0" indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (accepted), but in FIG. 249, "1" is , Indicates that the stop operation has been accepted (accepted), and "0" indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted.

When the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, "1" is set in the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP). Similarly, when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, "1" is set in the D1 bit, and when the operation of the right stop switch 42 is accepted, "1" is set in the D2 bit.
In addition, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is initialized (cleared, the initial value "00000000000 (B)" is set) at a predetermined timing (for example, every time the game ends or every game starts).

FIG. 250 is a diagram showing each signal input to the input port 0 in the 33rd embodiment.
The types and arrangements of the signals input to the input port 0 shown in FIG. 250 are merely examples, and the types and arrangements of the signals input to the input port 0 can be appropriately set.
Further, the RWM 53 may be provided with a level data storage area corresponding to the input port 0, and the data stored in the level data storage area may be acquired and used for processing.
FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 33rd embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 of the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 251, the step number different from that of FIG. 139 is underlined, and the same step number as that of FIG. 139 is given the same step number.

Further, also in the main process (M_MAIN) of the 33rd embodiment, the processes of steps S295 to S300 in FIG. 139 are executed, but in FIG. 251, the processes of steps S295 to S300 are not shown.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 251. When the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed in the 33rd embodiment, the process proceeds to step S1411.
Proceeding to step S1411, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop acceptance has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not any of the operations of the first stop switch 42 to the third stop switch 42 has been accepted.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of the input port 0, and has D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2 bit (third stop switch signal). Determine if either is on. Then, step S1411 is repeated until the stop is accepted, and when the stop is accepted, the process proceeds to the next step S1412.

Proceeding to step S1412, the main control board 50 executes the process at the time of receiving the stop. In this process, the stop position of the # reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the # reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted, and the stop position of the # reel 31 is determined according to the determined stop position. The symbol number is set to the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). Further, the stop symbol data for determining the symbol combination to stop at the effective line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of receiving a stop in step S1412 of FIG. 251, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment is executed. That is, with respect to the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1411, the winning combination lottery result of this game and the operation of the stop switch 42 were accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective line is updated by the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.

The # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) are generated by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S1412 (the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment). When it is determined that the values for the stop position are the same, the # reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) (FIGS. 135 to 137) is indicated by the deceleration pulse output counter "90 (D)" (FIG. 156). # Reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (Fig. 134), set deceleration pulse data "00001111 (B)" (4 phase on), and # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) ( “1 (D)” indicating “deceleration” is set in FIGS. 135 to 137).

Further, the #th reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the #th reel symbol number (for the stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of the #th reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "" When 3 ”) is reached, the deceleration pulse output counter“ 90 (D) ”is set in the # reel drive pulse output counter, and the deceleration pulse data“ 000011111 (B) ”is set in the # reel motor signal data. "Is set, and" 1 (D) "indicating" deceleration "may be set in the #th reel driven state.

After that, the 4-phase excitation output of the # reel 31 to the motor 32 is started.
Further, in the present embodiment, the interrupt processing cycle is set to "1.117 ms", and the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) is subtracted by "1" every two interrupts.
Then, when the value of the #th reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) becomes "0", the #th reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (FIG. 134) is displayed with the pulse data "00000000000 (B)" at the time of stop. Is set, and "0 (D)" indicating "stop" is set in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS). As a result, the 4-phase excitation output is completed.

Then, when the process at the time of receiving the stop in step S1412 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1413, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the four-phase excitation output is in progress.
Specifically, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 has been accepted and the process for stopping the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 is executed in step S1412, In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the motor 32 of the first reel 31 is in the 4-phase excitation output.

Then, when it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is in progress, the process of step S1413 is executed again, and when it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is not in progress (the 4-phase excitation output is completed), the next step S1414 is performed. Proceed to.
Here, when it is determined in step S1411 that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the value of the first reel drive pulse output counter (_CT_RL # _PLSOUT) (FIG. 135) is "0" in step S1413. By determining whether or not, it is possible to determine whether or not the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 has been completed.

Further, in step S1413, by determining whether or not the first reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (FIG. 134) is "00000000000 (B)" (pulse data when stopped), the first (left) reel 31 It is also possible to determine whether or not the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 has been completed.
Furthermore, in step S1413, the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31 is determined by determining whether or not the first reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 135) is “0 (D)” (stopped). It is also possible to determine whether or not the 4-phase excitation output of is completed.

In this embodiment, in step S1413, the process of step S1413 is repeated until it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is completed, and the process does not proceed to the next step S1414.
Therefore, during the period during which the motor 32 of any reel 31 is subjected to the 4-phase excitation output, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the other reel 31 is not accepted, and the stop control of the other reel 31 is not executed. ..
For example, during the period when the 4-phase excitation output is being performed on the 1st (left) reel 31, the operation of the 2nd (middle) stop switch 42 and the 3rd (right) stop switch 42 is not accepted, and therefore, the second (2) The stop control of the middle) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 is also not executed.

Proceeding to step S1414, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 (stop operation) has been accepted for all the reels 31.
Then, when it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation is not accepted for at least one reel 31, the process returns to step S1411. In this case, the processes of steps S141 to S1414 are repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1414 that the stop operation has been accepted for all the reels 31, the process proceeds to step S291.

Here, in step S1414, the main control board 50 stores the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address “F0AD (H)” in FIG. 249 in the A register, and displays “000000111 (B)”. Compare.
Then, when both are not the same value, it is determined that the stop operation is not accepted for at least one reel 31, and the result is "No" in step S1414, and the process returns to step S1411.
On the other hand, when both have the same value, it is determined that the stop operation has been accepted for all the reels 31, the result is "Yes" in step S1414, and the process proceeds to step S291.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time the stop operation of one reel 31 is accepted, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the 4-phase excitation output is in progress, and when it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output is completed , The next stop operation of the reel 31 can be accepted.
As a result, while the four-phase excitation output is being performed on the motor 32 of any of the reels 31, the stop operation of the other reels 31 cannot be accepted.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes the display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, when the symbol combination in which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the number of medals paid out (granted) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.

Further, when the result is "No" in step S292 and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S294.
Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit value "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit value "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually drive the hopper motor 36. Pay out the medal from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”. Then, the process proceeds to step S1415.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the signal of the input port 0 is off.
Specifically, the main control board 50 acquires the data of the input port 0 and determines whether or not it is "000000 (B)".
Then, when the data of the input port 0 is not "000000 (B)", it is determined that one of the signals is on (the operation of any of the switches including the stop switch 42 is accepted), and step S1415 Will be "No", and the process of step S1415 will be executed again.

On the other hand, when the data of the input port 0 is "00000000000 (B)", it is determined that all the signals are off (the operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is not accepted), and the step is taken. It becomes "Yes" in S1415, and the process proceeds to the next step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets a command related to the end of the game (game end command) in the command buffer. Further, when the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed thereafter.

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the game end command, the sub-control board 80 may execute an effect related to the game result.
Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the winning number "5" is won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "5" is activated. In this case, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 is performed, and the 1BB condition device is activated, a command related to the operation of the 1BB condition device (1BB operation command) is issued from the main control board 50 to the sub control board. It is transmitted to 80. As a result, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub control board 80 side.

Further, it is assumed that the winning number "7" is won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated. In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB or the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry can be stopped and displayed.
As described above, in the game in which the winning number "7" is won by the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry can be stopped and displayed, but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed. It may be configured as.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery is performed by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the "1BB + cherry" condition device is activated, the 1BB operation command and the cherry operation command are transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Will be sent. As a result, it can be determined that the 1BB condition device has been activated on the sub control board 80 side.

Further, in the game in which the sub-control board 80 receives the 1BB operation command and the cherry operation command, the sub-control board 80 performs an effect lottery regarding notification of winning of the 1BB condition device. In this effect lottery, whether or not to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device, the timing of notification, the mode of notification, and the like are determined.
Here, for example, it is assumed that it is decided to turn on the effect lamp at the timing of the end of the game by the effect lottery to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device. In this case, when the sub-control board 80 receives a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), the sub-control board 80 turns on the effect lamp to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the two reels 31 are stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third (last) reel 31 is accepted, and the medal is paid out (granted). When the combination is stopped and displayed, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is continued even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted. Is completed, the result is “No” in step S1413, “Yes” in step S1414, and the process proceeds to step S291 and subsequent steps. Therefore, the number of medals to be paid out (number of grants) is determined, and the medals are paid out (granted) by the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning.
As a result, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals to be granted) can be determined and the medals to be paid out (granted) smoothly. Can be executed.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the two reels 31 (for example, the left reel 31, In the situation where the middle reel 31) is stopped, the operation of the stop switch 42 (right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is accepted, and the operation corresponding to the cherry is accepted. It is assumed that the symbol combination of "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" is stopped and displayed on the middle line of the effective line.

In this case, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the four-phase excitation output for stopping the third reel 31 is output. After the end, the number of medals to be paid out "1" is determined, and one medal is paid out. At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added by "1", and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven. Pay out one medal from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals to be granted) is determined and the number of medals to be paid out (granted). ) Is possible, but if the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 continues to be accepted, "Yes" is set in step S1415 and the process does not proceed to step S1416. The specified command (for example, the game end command) is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 side does not execute the effect based on the reception of a predetermined command (for example, the game end command).

Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released (at least when all the stop switches 42 are not operated), the result becomes "No" in step S1415, and step S1416. Therefore, a predetermined command (for example, a game end command) can be transmitted to the sub control board 80. Therefore, on the sub-control board 80 side, it is possible to execute an effect based on receiving a predetermined command (for example, a game end command).

In particular, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" corresponding to the cherry is activated. The symbol combination of "" is stopped and displayed on the middle line of the effective line, and even after one medal corresponding to the cherry prize is paid out (granted), the stop switch corresponding to the third reel 31 After the 42 is released, the effect lamp is turned on to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
As a result, it is possible to execute the effect related to the game result at the desired timing of the player.

In the game in which the winning number "7" is won and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, 1BB is released at the timing when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released. It may have a case where the operation of the condition device is not notified.
Further, if the 1BB condition device is activated but the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stopped and displayed on the effective line, the winning information of 1BB is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the winning combination lottery means 61 operates. When the lottery is performed and the "1BB + cherry" condition device is activated, a 1BB operation command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.
Further, the situation in which the operation of the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is accepted continues even after the medal payout process is executed. If so, the game end command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 after the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released.

Further, when the sub control board 80 receives the 1BB operation command and the cherry operation command, the sub control board 80 performs an effect lottery regarding notification of the operation of the 1BB condition device. At this time, it is assumed that it is decided to turn on the effect lamp at the timing of the end of the game to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a predetermined command (for example, a game end command), the sub-control board 80 turns on the effect lamp to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device.

Further, for example, in a game in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) ) Is being operated (pressed) while the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) is being operated (pressed), while another stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is being operated (pressed). It is assumed that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released while the switch 42 is operated (pressed).
In this case, in the state where the other stop switch 42 is operated (pressed), the game end command is not transmitted to the sub control board 80 (the effect related to the game result is not executed), and all the stop switches 42 including the other stop switch 42 are not executed. When the stop switch 42 is released, the game end command can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 (the effect related to the game result can be executed).

Further, when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the actual medals are paid out from the hopper 35, the medals collide with each other and make a loud noise, or the payout effect sound accompanying the payout is output. Therefore, the operation of the 1BB condition device is shown. Although it becomes difficult to hear the sound of the effect (effect related to the game result), in the present embodiment, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, the game is played even if the medals are paid out. The effect related to the result is not executed, and then when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the effect related to the game result is executed.
Therefore, after the medals are paid out, the effect related to the game result can be executed, so that the sound of the effect can be easily heard.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the 4-phase excitation output, “Yes” is set in step S1413, and the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed during the 4-phase excitation output, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed after the end of the 4-phase excitation output.
As a result, the hopper motor 36 is not driven during the 4-phase excitation output, and the hopper motor 36 is driven after the 4-phase excitation output is completed. Therefore, the current required to drive the hopper motor 36 can be secured. it can.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 50 first acquires the data of the input port 0 after the number of bets that can execute the game is bet, and whether the acquired data is "10000000 (B)". Judge whether or not.
Then, when the acquired data is "10000000 (B)", it is determined that only the start switch signal is on, and the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.

On the other hand, for example, when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in the situation where the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b is accepted, the data of the input port 0 becomes "11000000 (B)". In this case, it is determined that the start switch signal and the signal other than the start switch signal (3-bet switch signal) are on, and the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

As a result, the start switch 41 can be operated in a situation where the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) is accepted after the number of bets that can execute the game has been bet. When it is accepted, it is possible to prevent the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 from being executed.

Further, also in this embodiment, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting key switch 152 is provided.
Then, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is pressed in a state where the power is turned on and the number of bets is not bet. Turn it on, then insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151, rotate it 90 degrees clockwise, for example, and turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on), the setting confirmation state Move to (setting confirmation mode).

When the number of bets is bet, it becomes "Yes" in step S274 of FIG. 41 and the process of waiting for medal insertion in step S275 does not proceed. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Do not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed (although the set value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current set value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not input to the input port 0.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the rotation start control of the reel 31 is executed, the data of the input port into which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.

For example, do not check the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, do not check the level data of the RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, or do not check the level data of the setting key switch. Of the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, after the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on). When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted while the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. And.

Here, even though the bet switch 40 is released after the bet switch 40 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 may remain accepted due to the deterioration of the bet switch 40.
Then, in the state where the operation of the bet switch 40 is still accepted, in the present embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

As a result, the player can recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 because the reel 31 does not rotate even if the start switch 41 is operated. Then, when the player informs the clerk of the hall to that effect, the clerk of the hall can also recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operation of the bet switch 40 is still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 is notified of the error. This is because if the error notification is performed in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

Further, it is not usually considered that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game, and the signal of the setting key switch 152 is temporarily input (the setting key switch). Even if the signal of 152 is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) with the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) bet. When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in the situation where the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. To be executable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (for example, the eleventh implementation) based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being on By outputting FIG. 33)) of the form, it is possible to notify the hall computer or the like. Therefore, the clerk in the hall or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal is output.
In a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (for example, FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on is turned on. It may be configured to output))) other than external signals 1 to 5.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 50 acquires the data of the input port 0 in step S1411 of FIG. 251 and obtains D0 bit (first stop switch signal), D1 bit (second stop switch signal), and D2. Determines if any of the bits (third stop switch signal) is on.
Then, when only one of the D0 to D2 bits is "1", the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is executed.

On the other hand, when two or more of the D0 to D2 bits are "1", or in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits, one or more of the D3 to D7 bits is "1". At this time, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is not executed.
In particular, when one or more of the D5 to D7 bits is "1" in addition to one of the D0 to D2 bits, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is performed. Do not execute.

As a result, under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b) and the start switch 41 is accepted, the # stop switch 42 When the operation is accepted, it is possible not to execute the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42.

Similarly, in a situation where a plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the left stop switch 42 is accepted, when the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted, the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is performed. Based on this, it is possible not to execute the stop control of the middle reel 31.

Further, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not input to the input port 0.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the stop control of the # reel 31 is executed, the data of the input port into which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is not checked.
For example, do not check the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, do not check the level data of the RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, or do not check the level data of the setting key switch. Of the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). When the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted under the circumstances, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even though the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 may remain accepted due to the deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, in the state where the operation of the start switch 41 is still accepted, in the present embodiment, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is executed. do not do.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 is still accepted due to the deterioration of the bet switch 40. Even when the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is not executed even in the case of.

As a result, the player can recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 because the # reel 31 does not stop even if the # stop switch 42 is operated. Then, when the player informs the clerk of the hall to that effect, the clerk of the hall can also recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operation of the bet switch 40 and the start switch 41 is still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 is notified of the error. This is because if the error notification is performed in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

Further, it is not usually considered that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game, and the signal of the setting key switch 152 is temporarily input (the setting key switch). Even if the signal of 152 is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (). When the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted under the situation (the door switch 17 is off), the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (for example, the eleventh implementation) based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being on By outputting FIG. 33)) of the form, it is possible to notify the hall computer or the like. Therefore, the clerk in the hall or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal is output.
In a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (for example, FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on is turned on. It may be configured to output))) other than external signals 1 to 5.

Although the 33rd embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing a modification of the main process (M_MAIN) by the main control board 50 in the 33rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the modified example of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 252, the step number different from that of FIG. 251 is underlined, and the same step number as that of FIG. 251 is given the same step number. ..
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 251 will be mainly described.

In the modified example of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 252, when the display determination in step S291 is executed, the result is “No” in step S292, and the process in step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1417, and the main control board 50 is specified. Judge whether the condition device is operating.
Here, as a state in which the specific condition device is operating, for example, a state in which the winning number "6" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + watermelon" condition device corresponding to the winning number "6" is operating. , And the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is operating.

Then, when the specific condition device is operating (winning number "6" or "7" is won), the result becomes "Yes" in step S1417, the process proceeds to step S1415, and the specific condition device is not operating. When (a predetermined condition device different from the specific condition device is operating), the result is "No" in step S1417, skipping step S1415, and proceeding to step S294.
As a state in which the predetermined condition device is operating, for example, a state in which the winning number "3" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the watermelon condition device corresponding to the winning number "3" is operating, and a winning combination lottery. A state in which the winning number “4” is won by the means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number “4” is operating can be mentioned.

Proceeding to step S1415, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the signal of the input port 0 is off. That is, it is determined whether or not the operation of any switch including the stop switch 42 is accepted.
Then, when it is determined that the operation of any of the switches is accepted, the process of step S1415 is executed again, and when it is determined that the operation of any of the switches is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, the medal is paid out (granted). At this time, if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and if the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to drive the actual medal. Is paid out from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”. Then, the process proceeds to step S1416.
Proceeding to step S1416, the main control board 50 sets the game end command in the command buffer. As described above, when the game end command is set in the command buffer, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed thereafter.

As described above, in the modified example of the 33rd embodiment shown in FIG. 252, after the display determination process of step S291 is executed, the specific condition is set before the medal payout (M_WIN_PAY) process at the time of winning in step S294 is executed. It is determined whether or not the device is operating, and when it is determined that the specific condition device is operating, it is next determined whether or not the operation of any of the switches is accepted. Then, if it is determined that the operation of any of the switches is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S294.
Therefore, if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated in the game in which the specific condition device is operating, the medal is not paid out and the stop switch corresponding to the third reel 31 is not paid out. When 42 is released, medals are paid out.

On the other hand, in the game in which the specific condition device is not operating, medals are paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated.
As a result, the medal is paid out even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated, or the medal is issued when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released without being paid out, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific condition device is operating depending on whether or not the medal is paid out.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "4" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the cherry condition device corresponding to the winning number "4" is activated, the symbols of "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" corresponding to the cherry are activated. When the combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the medal is paid out even if the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is continuously operated. ..

On the other hand, in the game in which the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated, the "cherry"-"ANY"-corresponding to the cherry. When the symbol combination of "ANY" is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) corresponding to the third reel 31 (for example, the right reel 31) is continuously operated. , The medal is not paid out. Then, when the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is released, the medal is paid out.

As a result, even if the stop switch 42 corresponding to the third reel 31 is continuously operated when the symbol combination of "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed on the effective line. It is possible to determine whether or not the 1BB condition device has been activated depending on whether or not the medal has been paid out.

(2) In the above embodiment, in step S1415, any operation of the first stop switch 42, the second stop switch 42, the third stop switch 42, the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the start switch 41 is accepted. It was judged whether or not it was done, but it is not limited to this.
For example, in step S1415, it may be determined whether or not the operation is accepted only for the first stop switch 42, the second stop switch 42, and the third stop switch 42.

(3) In the above embodiment, in step S1416, the game end command is set in the command buffer. Then, the game end command was transmitted to the sub control board 80, and the sub control board 80 side controlled the effect related to the game result. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the effect related to the game result may be controlled on the main control board 50 side. Then, in step 1418, the main control board 50 may execute the effect related to the game result.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 (stepping motor), but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output may be performed, two-phase excitation output may be performed, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Further, first, a two-phase excitation output is applied and a weak brake is applied, and then the two-phase excitation output is switched to a four-phase excitation output and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You may let it.
(5) The various modifications shown in the first to 33rd embodiments and the first to 33rd embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<34th Embodiment>
The 34th embodiment includes a # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) capable of storing data indicating the drive state of the reel 31 for each reel 31, and is stored in the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS). When the logical product (AND) operation of the existing data and "40 (H)" is executed and the result becomes "0", it is judged that the index has been detected and the result does not become "0". If so, it is determined that the index has not been detected.

Then, when the logical product operation of the data stored in the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) and "40 (H)" is executed and the result is not "0", the stop switch 42 is operated. Even if it is done, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reel 31, the effective line, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment.
253 and 254 are diagrams showing the main data according to the 34th embodiment among the data stored in the RWM 53 in the 34th embodiment. The data shown in FIGS. 253 and 254 are some data, and various data other than the illustrated data are stored in the RWM 53.
In FIG. 254, "D0" to "D15" indicate D0 bits to D15 bits of 16-bit data, respectively.

In FIG. 253, the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) at the address “F067 (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the first (left) reel 31.
The D0 bit indicates whether or not deceleration is due to 4-phase excitation, "1" indicates that deceleration is due to 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates that deceleration is not due to 4-phase excitation. ..
The D1 bit indicates whether or not the vehicle is decelerating by 2-phase excitation, "1" indicates that the vehicle is decelerating by 4-phase excitation, and "0" indicates that the vehicle is not decelerating by 4-phase excitation. ..
The D5 bit indicates whether or not the vehicle is decelerating, "1" indicates that the vehicle is decelerating, and "0" indicates that the vehicle is not decelerating.

Even during deceleration by 4-phase excitation, the D1 bit becomes "1".
Further, the D5 bit becomes "1" in both the deceleration by the two-phase excitation and the deceleration by the four-phase excitation.
As a result, the D0 bit becomes "0" and the D1 bit and the D5 bit become "1" during deceleration by two-phase excitation.
Further, during deceleration by 4-phase excitation, the D0 bit, the D1 bit, and the D5 bit are all set to "1".

In the present embodiment, when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) are the same value, first, two-phase excitation output is performed. I do. As a result, a weak brake is applied to the motor 32. After that, the two-phase excitation output is switched to the four-phase excitation output. As a result, a strong brake is applied to the motor 32 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32.
In this way, in the present embodiment, the load on the motor 32 is reduced.

Further, when the #th reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the #th reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) are the same value, the D5 bit becomes "1".
Further, when the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel 13 is less than "16", two-phase excitation output is performed. At this time, the D1 bit becomes "1". That is, deceleration is in progress due to two-phase excitation, the D0 bit becomes "0", and the D1 bit and the D5 bit become "1".

Then, when the D5 bit is "1" and the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the #th reel 13 becomes "16" or more, the two-phase excitation output is switched to the four-phase excitation output (two-phase excitation). The deceleration by is completed). At this time, the D1 bit and the D5 bit remain “1”, and the D0 bit becomes “1”. That is, deceleration is in progress due to 4-phase excitation, and the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit are all set to "1".

The two-phase excitation / deceleration period during deceleration by two-phase excitation may be timed (counted), and the deceleration by four-phase excitation may be started after the two-phase excitation / deceleration period has elapsed.
Also, not only when the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) are the same value, for example, the # reel The symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) are the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol on the # reel 13 is the same. ) Becomes a predetermined value (for example, “3”), a two-phase excitation output may be performed to apply a weak brake to the motor 32, and the D5 bit may be set to “1”.

The D2 bit indicates whether or not the speed is constant, "1" indicates that the speed is constant, and "0" indicates that the speed is not constant.
When the acceleration process is completed, the D2 bit becomes "1".
Deceleration start (after the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the # reel 31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL) Until #_STPPIC) becomes the same value), the D2 bit is "1" even during deceleration, deceleration by two-phase excitation, and deceleration by four-phase excitation.

After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the # reel 31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL #) _STPPIC) becomes the same value, and deceleration starts until the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol on the # 1 reel 13 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "3"). The D2 bit may be set to "1".

The D3 bit indicates whether or not acceleration is in progress, “1” indicates that acceleration is in progress, and “0” indicates that acceleration is not in progress.
The D4 bit indicates whether or not the rotation is ready, "1" indicates that the rotation is ready, and "0" indicates that the rotation is not ready.
The D6 bit indicates whether or not the index is detected, “1” indicates that the index is detected, and “0” indicates that the index is not detected (after the index is detected).

When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, "50 (H)"("01010000(B)") is set in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS).
After that, at the start of acceleration of the motor 32 of the # reel 31, the # reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) is set to "48 (H)"("0101000(B)").
From the time when the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted until the acceleration of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 starts, the rotation ready state is set. During this time, the D4 bit becomes "1". Then, when the acceleration of the motor 32 of the # reel 31 starts, the D3 bit becomes "1" and the D4 bit becomes "0".
After that, when the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit changes from "1" to "0" when the #th reel sensor signal rises.

The D7 bit indicates whether or not the deceleration has started, “1” indicates that the deceleration has started, and “0” indicates that the deceleration has not started.
When the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the #th reel 31 is accepted, the D7 bit becomes “1”.
After the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the # reel 31 is accepted, the # reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL # _PASPIC) and the # # reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL # _STPPIC) The deceleration start state is until and becomes the same value.
Further, the D7 bit is "1" even during deceleration, deceleration by two-phase excitation, and deceleration by four-phase excitation.

In FIG. 253, the second reel drive state (_WK_RL2_STS) at the address “F068 (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the second (middle) reel 31, and the address “F069 (H)” The third reel drive state (_WK_RL3_STS) of "H)" is a storage area for storing data indicating the drive state of the motor 32 of the third (right) reel 31. These contents are the same as the first reel drive state (_WK_RL1_STS) of the address "F067 (H)".

In FIG. 254, the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the address “F090 (H)” is the first stop switch signal (D0 bit) and the second stop switch signal (D1 bit) input to each bit of the input port 0. ), 3rd stop switch signal (D2 bit), 1 bet switch signal (D3 bit), 3 bet switch signal (D4 bit), start switch signal (D5 bit), checkout switch signal (D6 bit) on / off It is a storage area to be stored.

The # stop switch signal is turned on when the # stop switch 42 is operated (the stop button 42a is pushed), and the # stop switch 42 is released (the pushed stop button 42a is released). (Return to the position of) turns off.
Similar to the #stop switch signal, the 1-bet switch signal, 3-bet switch signal, start switch signal, and settlement switch signal are turned on when the corresponding switch is operated, and turned off when the corresponding switch is released. Become.
Then, in the interrupt processing, the signal input to each bit of the input port 0 is read, the on / off of each signal is determined, and when it is on, "1" is stored in the corresponding bit and the signal is turned off. At one time, "0" is stored in the corresponding bit.

In FIG. 254, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address “F095 (H)” is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted. is there.
The D0 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the first (left) reel 31 has been accepted, “1” indicates that the stop operation has not been accepted, and “0” indicates that the stop operation has been accepted. Indicates that (accepted).
Further, the D1 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the second (middle) reel 31 has been accepted, and the D2 bit indicates whether or not the stop operation of the third (right) reel 31 has been accepted. These contents are the same as those of the D0 bit.

Each time the game starts, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to the initial value "00000011 (B)".
Then, when the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, "0" is set in the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP). Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, "0" is set in the D1 bit, and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, "0" is set in the D2 bit. It is set.

FIG. 255 (a) is a diagram showing a stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK). The data stored in the stop switch determination table (TBL_STPBTN_CHK) is compared with the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD), and the stop switch 42 depends on whether or not both data match. It is used to determine whether or not the operation of is valid.
FIG. 255 (b) is a diagram showing a stop acceptance determination table. The data stored in the stop acceptance determination table is used when each reel 31 is inspected before or after the index is detected, and is it possible to accept the stop of the reel 31 by this inspection? It is used when determining whether or not.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 34th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 34th embodiment shown in FIG. 256, the step number different from that of FIG. 139 is underlined, and the same step number as that of FIG. 139 is given the same step number.

Further, also in the main process (M_MAIN) of the 34th embodiment, the process of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 is executed, but the process of steps S295 to S300 is not shown in FIG. 256.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 256, in the 34th embodiment, when the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1421.
Proceeding to step S1421, the main control board 50 executes a reel stop acceptance check. This process is the process shown in FIG. 257, which will be described later. Then, when the reel stop acceptance check in step S1421 is completed, the process proceeds to step S291.

Proceeding to step S291, the main control board 50 executes the display determination.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. In addition, when the symbol combination in which medals are paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, the number of medals paid out (granted) is determined. Then, the process proceeds to step S292.
The determined number of medals to be paid out may be stored (stored) only in a predetermined register and may not be stored in the RWM53, or may be stored in the RWM53.

Further, when the result is "No" in step S292 and the process of step S293 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1422.
Proceeding to step S1422, the main control board 50 determines whether or not any of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted).
Specifically, in step S1422, the main control board 50 first stores the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM53 in the A register. To do.
Next, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and "00000011 (B)", and whether or not the result is "0" (the zero flag is "1"). To judge. Thereby, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switch signals is on, that is, whether or not the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted.

When the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), one of the stop switch signals is on (the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted). It is determined that the result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1422 is repeated.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), all the stop switch signals are off (the operation of any stop switch 42 is also accepted. No), the result is "No" in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Here, when at least one operation of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is accepted, at least one stop switch signal is turned on, and the input port 0 level data (input port 0 level data ( At least one of the D0 to D2 bits of (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "1".
Further, when at least one of the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "1", the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1").
Then, when the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it becomes "Yes" in step S1422, and the process of step S1422 is repeated. In this case, since the process after step S294 does not proceed, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

On the other hand, when the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are all released, the left stop switch signal, the middle stop switch signal, and the right stop switch signal are all turned off. , Input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) D0 to D2 bits are all "0".
When the D0 to D2 bits of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) are all "0", the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Then, when the result of the logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), the result is "No" in step S1422, and the process proceeds to step S294.

Proceeding to step S294, the main control board 50 executes the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning. That is, when the number of credits has not reached the upper limit "50", the number of credits is added, and when the number of credits has reached the upper limit "50", the hopper motor 36 is driven to actually drive the hopper motor 36. Pay out the medal from the hopper 35. It should be noted that, for example, in step S394 of FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the number of credits has reached the upper limit value “50”.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display determination is performed in step S291, then it is determined in step S1422 whether or not any of the stop switch signals is on, and when any of the stop switch signals is off, The process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is executed.
Therefore, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals granted) can be determined, but the operation of any of the stop switches 42 If is accepted, the result is "Yes" in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed. Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, the result becomes “No” in step S1422, the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Further, for example, in a situation where the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) is accepted, another stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is operated, and then the other. It is assumed that the third (last) stop switch 42 (for example, the right stop switch 42) is released while the stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is being operated.
In this case, even if the operation of the other stop switch 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) continues to be accepted, the number of medals to be paid out (the number of medals granted) can be determined, but the other stop switch Since the operation of 42 (for example, the left stop switch 42) is accepted, the result is “Yes” in step S1422, and the process does not proceed to step S294. Therefore, the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.

As described above, in the situation where the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, the result is “Yes” in step S1422 and the process does not proceed to step S294, so that the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning is not executed.
Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, "No" is set in step S1422, the process proceeds to step S294, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.
As a result, the number of credits can be added or the medals can be paid out from the hopper 35 at a desired timing of the player.

FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing a reel stop acceptance check in step S1421 of FIG. 256.
In step S1431, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the address “F090 (H)” of the RWM 53 is “0”.
Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the RWM53 address "F090 (H)" is stored in the A register, and whether the A register value is "0". Judge whether or not.

Then, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the result is "No" in step S1431, and the process of step S1431 is executed again. That is, the process of step S1431 is repeated until "Yes" is obtained.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is "0", it becomes "Yes" in step S1431, and the process proceeds to the next step S1432.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1431 whether or not the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1432. ..
As a result, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed when the signal of any switch input to the input port 0 is on (the operation of any switch is accepted). ..
In step S1431, instead of acquiring the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of the RWM 53, the data of the signal input to the input port 0 may be directly acquired.

Proceeding to step S1432, the main control board 50 executes a stop acceptance inspection. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. Then, when the stop acceptance inspection in step S1432 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1433.
Proceeding to step S1433, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1433, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 of FIG. 258, which will be described later, is “0”.

Then, when the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is inspection data, the result is "Yes" in step S1433, and the process proceeds to the stop acceptance inspection in step S1439.
On the other hand, when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no inspection data, the result is "No" in step S1433, and the process proceeds to step S1434.
Proceeding to step S1434, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the address “F090 (H)” of the RWM 53 is “0”.

Specifically, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) of the RWM53 address "F090 (H)" is stored in the A register, and whether the A register value is "0". Judge whether or not.
Then, when it is determined that it is "0", it becomes "Yes" in step S1434 and returns to step S1432. As a result, the processes from step S1432 to step S1434 are repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not "0", the result is "No" in step S1434, and the process proceeds to the next step S1435.

Proceeding to step S1435, the main control board 50 matches the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) with any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table (there is matching data). Judge whether or not.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and "00000100 (B)" stored at the beginning (first row) of the stop switch determination table match. ..
Then, when it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S1436.

On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, next, does the data stored in the A register in step S1434 match the "00000010 (B)" stored in the second row of the stop switch determination table? Judge whether or not.
Then, when it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, next, does the data stored in the A register in step S1434 match the "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table? Judge whether or not.

Then, when it is determined that they match, it is determined that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S1436.
On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, it is determined that none of the data stored in the stop switch determination table matches (no matching data), and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes from step S1431 to step S1435 are repeated.

For example, when the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000001 (B)".
In this case, since it matches "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table, it is determined that the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436. ..

Further, for example, when the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (middle) stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) becomes "00000011 (B)".
In this case, since it does not match any of the data stored in the stop switch determination table, it is determined that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operations of the plurality of stop switches 42 are received at the same time, the stop switch 42 and other switches (1-bet switch 40a, 3-bet switch 40b, start switch 41, settlement switch 43). When the operations of are accepted at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no matching data, and the process returns to step S1431.
As a result, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, or when the stop switch 42 and another switch are operated at the same time, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

That is, even if all the reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and detect the index and are in a state where the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time or When the stop switch 42 and another switch are operated at the same time, it is determined in step S1435 that there is no matching data, the process returns to step S1431, and the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

Proceeding to step S1436, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which the stop has been accepted has been turned on (the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted).
Specifically, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the data stored in the A register in step S1434 and the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address "F095 (H)" of the RWM53, and the result is "0". (The zero flag is "1").

Then, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 for which the stop has been accepted has been turned on, and in step S1436, " Yes ”, and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes from step S1431 to step S1436 are repeated. In this case, since the process does not proceed to step S1437, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that the stop switch signal for the reel 31 that has not received the stop (can accept the stop) has been turned on. Then, the result becomes "No" in step S1436, and the process proceeds to step S1437. In this case, the stop control of the reel 31 can be executed.
In this way, in the present embodiment, the stop control for the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which the stop operation has already been accepted is not executed, and the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 for which the stop operation has not yet been accepted is not executed. The stop control for is executed.

Proceeding to step S1437, the main control board 50 executes the process at the time of receiving the stop. In this process, the stop position of the # reel 31 is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery of this game and the position of the # reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted, and the determined stop is performed. The symbol number corresponding to the position is stored in the # reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data for determining the symbol combination to stop at the effective line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of receiving a stop in step S1437 of FIG. 257, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment is executed. That is, with respect to the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in steps S1434 to S1436, the winning combination lottery result of this game and the operation of the stop switch 42 are accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the reel 31 is set, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective line is updated by the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.

The # reel symbol number (for passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S1437 (process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment). When it is determined that the values for the stop position) are the same, the motor 32 of the # reel 31 is decelerated by two-phase excitation, and then decelerated by four-phase excitation.

Further, the # reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the # reel symbol number (for the stop position) have the same value, and the step number (_NB_RL # _STEP) of one symbol of the # reel 13 is predetermined. When the value (for example, "3") is reached, the motor 32 of the # reel 31 may be decelerated by two-phase excitation and then switched to deceleration by four-phase excitation.

Then, when the process at the time of accepting the stop in step S1437 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1438, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped.
Specifically, it is determined whether or not the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) of the address "F095 (H)" of the RWM53 is "0".
Here, when the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is not "0", it is determined that one of the reels 31 is not stopped, the result is "No" in step S1438, and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes after step S1431 are repeated.

On the other hand, when the data of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "0", it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the result is "Yes" in step S1438, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
When the process according to this flowchart is completed, the process proceeds to step S291 of FIG. 256 to execute the display determination. Then, in the display determination in step S291 of FIG. 256, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the symbol combination for which the medal is paid out (granted) is stopped and displayed on the effective line. If so, the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals granted) is determined.

As described above, even if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the process proceeds to step S291 in FIG. 256, so that the number of medals to be paid out (number of medals granted) can be determined. is there.
However, if the operation of the third (last) stop switch 42 continues to be accepted, the result is "Yes" in step S1422 of FIG. 256, and the process does not proceed to step S294 of FIG. 256. Do not execute the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY).
Then, when all the stop switches 42 are released, the result becomes "No" in step S1422 of FIG. 256, the process proceeds to step S294 of FIG. 256, and the medal payout process (M_WIN_PAY) at the time of winning can be executed.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S1439 of FIG. 257, the main control board 50 executes the stop acceptance inspection. This process is the process shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. Then, when the stop acceptance inspection in step S1439 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1440.
Proceeding to step S1440, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is inspection data.
Specifically, in step S1440, it is determined whether or not the zero flag is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product (AND) operation in step S1454 of FIG. 258, which will be described later, is “0”.

Then, when the zero flag is not "1", it is determined that there is inspection data, the result is "Yes" in step S1440, and the process returns to the stop acceptance inspection in step S1439. As a result, the processes of step S1439 and step S1440 are repeated.
On the other hand, when the zero flag is "1", it is determined that there is no inspection data, the result becomes "No" in step S1440, and the process returns to step S1431. As a result, the processes after step S1431 are repeated.

FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing a stop acceptance inspection in steps S1432 and S1439 of FIG. 257.
In step S1451, the main control board 50 sets the stop acceptance determination table (FIG. 255 (b)). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1452.
Proceeding to step S1452, the main control board 50 acquires the number of inspections from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the number of inspections "3" stored at the beginning (first row) of the stop acceptance determination table is acquired and stored in the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1453.

Proceeding to step S1453, the main control board 50 acquires the mask data and the lower address of the inspection RWM address from the stop acceptance determination table. Specifically, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second to fourth rows of the stop acceptance judgment table is acquired and stored in the C register, and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS" of the inspection RWM address is acquired. "" To "LOW_WK_RL1_STS" ("67 (H)" to "69 (H)") are acquired and stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1454.

Here, in the first inspection, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the second line and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL1_STS"("67(H)") of the inspection RWM address are acquired, and the second inspection is performed. In the inspection, the mask data "40 (H)" stored in the third line and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL2_STS"("68(H)") of the inspection RWM address are acquired, and in the third inspection, the fourth line. The mask data "40 (H)" stored in the above and the lower address "LOW_WK_RL3_STS"("69(H)") of the inspection RWM address are acquired.
After the first inspection, if "No" is obtained in step S1456, which will be described later, the second inspection is performed, and then, if the result is "No" again in step S1456, the third inspection is performed. Do. In this way, each reel 31 is inspected (whether it is before or after the index is detected).

Proceeding to step S1454, the main control board 50 acquires the data of the storage area indicated by the inspection RWM address. Specifically, the data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 having the A register value as the lower address is stored in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1455.
Here, in the first inspection, the data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) is stored in the A register. Further, in the second inspection, the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is stored in the A register, and in the third inspection, the data of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) is stored in the A register.

Proceeding to step S1455, the main control board 50 performs a logical product (AND) calculation of the data acquired in step S1454 and the mask data. Specifically, in step S1455, the data of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS) stored in the A register in step S1454 and the mask data “40 (H)” (“01000000”” stored in the C register in step S1453. (B) ”) and the logical product operation. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1456.

Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed but before the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS) is It is "1". Therefore, the result of the above logical product operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").
Further, when step-out occurs in the motor 32 of the #th reel 31 after the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed, reacceleration processing is performed. At this time, "1" is set in the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS), and the reacceleration process is performed. Also in this case, the result of the above logical product operation does not become "0" (the zero flag does not become "1").

On the other hand, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit in the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS) is set. It is "0". Therefore, the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (the zero flag becomes "1").
Proceeding to step S1456, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is inspection data. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result of the logical product operation executed in step S1455 is "0", and if it is "0" (the zero flag is "1"), it is determined that there is no inspection data. Then, the result is "No" in step S1456, and the process proceeds to the next step S1457.

Here, when the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed and after the reel sensor 33 detects the index, when the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the reel 31 is performed, and when the reel 31 stops. When it has been completed, the D6 bit in the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS) is “0”, so the result of the above logical product operation is “0” (zero flag is “1”). In this case, the result is "No" in step S1456, and the process proceeds to the next step S1457.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (the zero flag is not "1"), it is determined that there is inspection data, the result is "Yes" in step S1456, and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Proceeding to step S1457, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the number of inspections has been completed. Specifically, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and the result is stored in the B register. Then, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the number of inspections has been completed, and in step S1457, it becomes "Yes" and the process according to this flowchart ends. ..
On the other hand, when the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the number of inspections has not been completed, the result becomes "No" in step S1457, and the process returns to step S1453. In this case, the processing after step S1453 will be repeated.

Further, when the result is “Yes” (with inspection data) in step S1456 and the process according to this flowchart is completed, the result is “Yes” in step S1433 of FIG. 257 and “Yes” in step S1440 of FIG. 257. Therefore, since the process does not proceed to step 1437 of FIG. 257, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed. That is, before the reel sensor 33 detects the index, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.

Further, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has been stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and after index detection, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed. Suppose that it is medium and after index detection.
In this case, since the D6 bit of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) is "0", the data of the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)"("01000000(B)" are found in the first inspection. The result of the logical product operation with) ”) is“ 0 ”(zero flag is“ 1 ”).

Further, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is also "0", the logical product calculation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" is performed in the second inspection. The result is "0".
Furthermore, since the D6 bit of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) is also "0", the logical product calculation of the data of the third reel drive state (WK_RL3_STS) and "40 (H)" is performed in the third inspection. The result is "0".
Then, in the third inspection, the result is "No" in step S1456 and "Yes" in step S1457, and the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Further, for example, the first (left) reel 31 has been stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and before index detection, and the third (right) reel 31 is also rotating at a constant speed. Suppose that it is medium and after index detection.
In this case, as described above, in the first inspection, the result of the logical product operation between the data in the first reel drive state (WK_RL1_STS) and "40 (H)" is "0".

However, since the D6 bit of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) is "1", the logical product operation of the data of the second reel drive state (WK_RL2_STS) and "40 (H)" is performed in the second inspection. The result is "01000000 (B)" (not "0").
Then, in the second inspection, step S1456 becomes "Yes", and the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In this way, in the stop reception inspection shown in FIG. 258, each reel 31 is inspected (checked) whether the index is before or after the detection. Since each reel 31 can be inspected by a common process, the process can be simplified and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is provided with a #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (FIG. 253) capable of storing data indicating the drive state of the reel 31. Further, in step S1455 of FIG. 258, a logical product (AND) operation of the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) and the mask data “40 (H)” is executed.
Here, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed and the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS) is ". It is "0". Therefore, the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (zero flag is "1"). At this time, it is determined that the index has been detected, and the result is “No” in step S1456 of FIG. 258.

On the other hand, when the rotation of the #th reel 31 reaches a constant speed but before the reel sensor 33 of the #th reel 31 detects the index, the D6 bit in the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS) Is "1". Therefore, the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (zero flag is "1"). At this time, it is determined that the index has not been detected, and the result is “Yes” in step S1456 of FIG. 258.
Then, when the result of the above logical product operation does not become "0" (zero flag is "1"), it becomes "Yes" in step S1433 and step S1440 of FIG. 257, and the process does not proceed to step S1437. Even if the 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is not executed.

That is, in the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS), as information on the drive state of the reel 31, information that can identify whether the index is before or after detection is stored even in the constant speed state. When a predetermined operation is executed using the data of the #th reel drive state (WK_RL # _STS), the result of the predetermined operation differs between before and after the index is detected.
Then, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed by a simple calculation process by determining whether the index is before or after the detection based on the result of the predetermined calculation and, by extension, whether or not the stop control of the reel 31 can be executed. It is possible to judge whether or not it is feasible.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet on the main control board 50, first, the input port 0 of the address "F090 (H)" of the RWM 53 is 0. The data stored in the level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the acquired data is "0".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the acquired data is not "0", the logical product (AND) operation of the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and "11011111 (B)" is performed, and the result is Judges whether or not is "0".

Then, when it is determined that the result of the logical product operation is "0", it is determined that only the start switch signal is on, and the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is "0" and the result of the above logical product operation is not "0", it is based on the operation of the start switch 41. The rotation start control of the reel 31 is not executed.

As a result, after the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) has been bet, the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), (left, middle, right). When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in the situation where the operation of the stop switch 42 and the settlement switch 43 is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed. Can be done.

Further, also in this embodiment, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the setting key switch 152 is provided.
Then, as described in the eleventh embodiment and the nineteenth embodiment (A), the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is pressed in a state where the power is turned on and the number of bets is not bet. Turn it on, then insert the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151, rotate it 90 degrees clockwise, for example, and turn on the setting key switch 152 (when the signal of the setting key switch 152 turns on), the setting confirmation state Move to (setting confirmation mode).

When the number of bets is bet, it becomes "Yes" in step S274 of FIG. 41 and the process of waiting for medal insertion in step S275 does not proceed. Therefore, even if the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Do not migrate.
In the setting confirmation state, the set value cannot be changed (although the set value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current set value can be confirmed. The current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73. When the setting key is rotated counterclockwise and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends.

Then, as described above, when the rotation start control of the reel 31 is executed, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked, but the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Do not check the data of.
For example, do not check the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, do not check the level data of the RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, or do not check the level data of the setting key switch. Of the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, after the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) is bet, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on). When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted while the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 can be executed. To do.

Here, even though the bet switch 40 is released after the bet switch 40 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the bet switch 40 may remain accepted due to the deterioration of the bet switch 40.
Then, in the state where the operation of the bet switch 40 is still accepted, in the present embodiment, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is not executed.

Similarly, when the stop switch 42 and the checkout switch 43 (left, middle, right) are deteriorated and these operations are still accepted, even if the start switch 41 is operated, the start switch 41 The rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation is not executed.
As a result, the player can recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 because the reel 31 does not rotate even if the start switch 41 is operated. Then, when the player informs the clerk of the hall to that effect, the clerk of the hall can also recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operation of the bet switch 40, the (left, middle, right) stop switch 42 and the settlement switch 43 remains accepted, both the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are notified of errors. Do not do. This is because if the error notification is performed in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

Further, it is not usually considered that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game, and the signal of the setting key switch 152 is temporarily input (the setting key switch). Even if the signal of 152 is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) with the number of bets that can execute the game (the number of bets corresponding to the specified number) bet. When the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted in the situation where the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off), the rotation start control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the start switch 41 is performed. To be executable.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (for example, the eleventh implementation) based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being on By outputting FIG. 33)) of the form, it is possible to notify the hall computer or the like. Therefore, the clerk in the hall or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal is output.
In a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (for example, FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on is turned on. It may be configured to output))) other than external signals 1 to 5.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 50 is stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and the stop switch determination table in step S1435 of the reel stop reception check in FIG. 257. Judge whether or not any of the data matches (there is matching data).
Then, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and the "00000100 (B)" stored at the beginning (first row) of the stop switch determination table match, the first 3 (Right) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436.

If it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) matches the "00000010 (B)" stored in the second row of the stop switch determination table, the second (middle) ) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436.
Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) and the "00000001 (B)" stored in the third row of the stop switch determination table match, the first (left) ) It is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1436.

On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the data stored in the stop switch determination table matches (no matching data), the process returns to step S1431.
As a result, when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted in the situation where the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted. The stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the above is not executed.

Further, as described above, when the stop control of the #th reel 31 is executed, the data stored in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) is checked, but the input of the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input. Do not check port data.
For example, do not check the data of the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, do not check the level data of the RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input, or do not check the level data of the setting key switch. Of the data of the input port to which the signal of 152 is input, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked, and the level data of RWM53 corresponding to the input port to which the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input is Among them, the bit corresponding to the signal of the setting key switch 152 is not checked.

Therefore, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (the door switch 17 is off). When the operation of the #stop switch 42 is accepted under the circumstances, the stop control of the #th reel 31 based on the operation of the #stop switch 42 can be executed.

Here, even though the start switch 41 is released after the start switch 41 is operated, there is a possibility that the operation of the start switch 41 may remain accepted due to the deterioration of the start switch 41.
Then, in the state where the operation of the start switch 41 is still accepted, in the present embodiment, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is executed. do not do.

Similarly, even though the bet switch 40 is released after operating the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b), the operation of the bet switch 40 is still accepted due to the deterioration of the bet switch 40. When the payment switch 43 is operated and the payment switch 43 is released, but the payment switch 43 is deteriorated and the operation of the payment switch 43 is still accepted. Also, even if the # stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is not executed.

As a result, the player can recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10 because the # reel 31 does not stop even if the # stop switch 42 is operated. Then, when the player informs the clerk of the hall to that effect, the clerk of the hall can also recognize that some abnormality has occurred in the slot machine 10.
Even if the operations of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the settlement switch 43 are still accepted, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub control board 80 notifies the error. This is because if the error notification is performed in such a case, the player may feel annoyed.

Further, it is not usually considered that the setting key switch 152 is turned on (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on) in the middle of the game, and the signal of the setting key switch 152 is temporarily input (the setting key switch). Even if the signal of 152 is on), it is likely to be noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed, the signal of the setting key switch 152 is input (the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on), and the front door 12 is closed (). When the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted under the situation (the door switch 17 is off), the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 can be executed.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

On the other hand, in a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, an external signal 4 for notifying an error or the like (for example, the eleventh implementation) based on the signal of the setting key switch 152 being on By outputting FIG. 33)) of the form, it is possible to notify the hall computer or the like. Therefore, the clerk in the hall or the like can grasp that some error has occurred in the slot machine 10 to which the predetermined external signal is output.
In a situation where the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, a predetermined external signal (for example, the external signal X (for example, FIG. 33 of the eleventh embodiment)) that can identify that the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on is turned on. It may be configured to output))) other than external signals 1 to 5.

Although the 34th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted under the condition that the plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the # # stop switch 42 is accepted. It is assumed that the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 is not executed.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a plurality of reels 31 rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the operation of the # stop switch 42 is accepted. The stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 may be made executable.

As a result, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first and the middle stop switch 42 is operated second, but the left stop switch 42 is operated, the start switch 41 deteriorates and the start switch By keeping the operation of 41 being accepted, it is possible to prevent the middle stop switch 42 from being determined to have been operated first.

In particular, in an AT machine, if it is determined that the middle stop switch 42 has been operated first even though the left stop switch 42 has been operated first, a push order error will occur, which will be disadvantageous to the player. However, even if the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 can be executed, so that a push order error during AT may occur. Occurrence can be prevented.

Note that, as in this modification, even when the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 is enabled under the situation where the operation of the start switch 41 is accepted, the setting key is used. Regardless of whether the signal of the switch 152 is turned on or off, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 may be executed. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the # reel 31 based on the operation of the # stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(2) In the above embodiment, when the operation of the plurality of stop switches 42 is accepted, the stop control of the reel 31 is not executed.
However, the operation is not limited to this, for example, the operation of the second stop switch 42 is performed under the condition that the operation of the first stop switch 42 is accepted and then the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted. In addition to making it acceptable, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 may be made executable based on the operation of the second stop switch 42.

As a result, for example, even though the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are operated in this order, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the left stop switch 42 deteriorates due to deterioration of the stop switch 42. By keeping the operation of 42 being accepted, it is possible to prevent the right stop switch 42 from being determined to have been operated second.

In particular, in the AT machine, when the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are stopped in this order, the second right stop switch 42 is operated even though the middle stop switch 42 is operated second. If it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, a push order error will occur, which will be disadvantageous to the player. However, even if the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is still accepted, the other By making it possible to accept the operation of the stop switch 42 of the above and to execute the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 based on the operation of the other stop switch 42, a push order error during AT may occur. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation.

It should be noted that, as in this modification, even when the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the second stop switch 42 can be executed under the situation where the operation of the first stop switch 42 is still accepted. , Regardless of whether the signal of the setting key switch 152 is turned on / off, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may be executed. Further, when the signal of the setting key switch 152 is on, the stop control of the reel 31 based on the operation of the stop switch 42 may not be executed.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 (stepping motor) are stopped, first a two-phase excitation output is performed, a weak brake is applied, and then a two-phase excitation output to a four-phase excitation output are applied. I tried to switch to and apply a stronger brake, but it is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, a one-phase excitation output may be performed, a two-phase excitation output may be performed, a three-phase excitation output may be performed, or a four-phase excitation output is performed. May be good.
(4) The various modifications shown in the first to 34th embodiments and the first to 34th embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<35th Embodiment>
In the 35th embodiment, when the operations of the plurality of stop switches 42 are received at the same time, the information for determining which stop switch 42 the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can be executed is stored. It is equipped with a stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259).

Then, in a situation where the plurality of reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first (any one) stop switch 42 and the operation of the second (another one different from the first) stop switch 42 When the operation is received at the same time, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 can be executed based on the information acquired by using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Further, the reel 31 corresponding to the first (any one) stop switch 42 is stopped, and the reel 31 corresponding to the second (another one different from the first) stop switch 42 rotates at a constant speed. If the operation of the first stop switch 42 and the operation of the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time, based on the information acquired using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN), The stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 can be executed.

The symbol arrangement of the reel 31, the effective line, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment.
The 35th embodiment also includes a reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) of the address “F0AD (H)” of the RWM53, as in FIG. 173 of the 25th embodiment.
The reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is a storage area for storing data indicating whether or not the operation (stop operation) of the stop switch 42 corresponding to each reel 31 has been accepted.
The content of each bit is the same as that of FIG. 173 of the 25th embodiment.

Each time the game starts, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to the initial value "00000011 (B)".
Then, when the operation of the first (left) stop switch 42 is accepted, "0" is set in the D0 bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP). Similarly, when the operation of the second (middle) stop switch 42 is accepted, "0" is set in the D1 bit, and when the operation of the third (right) stop switch 42 is accepted, "0" is set in the D2 bit. It is set.

FIG. 259 is a diagram showing a stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).
The data stored in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) indicates which stop switch 42 the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 can be stopped and controlled when the operations of the plurality of stop switches 42 are simultaneously received. It is used when deciding.
Further, in FIG. 259, "00000001 (B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the first (left) reel 31 is executed, and "00000010 (B)" is data of the second (middle) reel 31. It is the data which shows that the stop control is executed, and "00000100 (B)" is the data which shows that the stop control of the 3rd (right) reel 31 is executed.

Subsequently, the control process according to the 35th embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart.
FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing a reel stop reception check according to the 35th embodiment. In the 35th embodiment, the reel stop acceptance check in step S1460 of FIG. 260 is executed instead of the reel stop acceptance check in step S752 of FIG. 139.
In step S1461, the main control board 50 acquires the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) at the address “F0AD (H)” in FIG. 173 and stores it in the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1462.

Proceeding to step S1462, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 has been accepted.
Specifically, first, the data stored in the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) of the address “F017 (H)” in FIG. 133 is stored in the A register.
Next, a logical product (AND) operation of the A register value and the B register value is performed, and the result is stored in the A register. That is, a logical product (AND) operation is performed between the data stored in the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the data stored in the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP), and the result is stored in the A register.

When the result of the above logical product operation is not "0" (zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 has been accepted, and "Yes" in step S1462. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1463.
On the other hand, when the result of the above logical product operation is "0" (zero flag is "1"), it is determined that the operation of the stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 is not accepted, and the step. The result is "No" in S1462, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
Proceeding to step S1463, the main control board 50 sets the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). Specifically, "1100 (H)" (reference address) obtained by subtracting "1" from the start address "1101 (H)" of the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is set in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1464.

Proceeding to step S1464, the main control board 50 sets the designated address data. Here, the HL register value (“1100 (H)”) at the time of proceeding to step S1464 is used as the reference address, and the A register value is used as the offset value. Further, the address obtained by adding the offset value to the reference address is used as the designated address. Then, in step S1464, first, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (reference address), and the result (designated address) is stored in the HL register. Next, the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (designated address) is acquired and stored in the A register. The A register value at this time indicates the reel 31 that performs stop control. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1465.

Proceeding to step S1465, the main control board 50 executes the process at the time of receiving the stop. Here, the A register value at the time of proceeding to step S1465 indicates the reel 31 that performs stop control. Then, in step S1465, for the reel 31 indicated by the A register value, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the corresponding stop switch 42 is accepted. , The symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1466. Further, the stop symbol data for determining the symbol combination to stop at the effective line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of receiving a stop in step S1465 of FIG. 260, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment is executed. That is, with respect to the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1462, the winning combination lottery result of this game and the operation of the stop switch 42 were accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective line is updated by the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.

The reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) are generated by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S1465 (processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment). When it is determined that the values are the same, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is started.
When the reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) become the same value, and the step number of one symbol of the reel 13 becomes a predetermined value (for example, "3"). , The 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 may be started.
Proceeding to step S1466, the main control board 50 updates the reel stop flag. Specifically, the bit of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) corresponding to the reel 31 indicated by the A register value is updated (rewritten) to "0". Then, the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Here, it is assumed that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and all the operations of the stop switches 42 can be accepted. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "00000011 (B)".
Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the operations of the first (left) stop switch 42 and the second (middle) stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted.

Here, both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) (FIG. 133) at the time of the previous interrupt processing are "0", and the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) at the time of the current interrupt processing. When both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the above are "1", "1" is stored in both the D0 bit and the D1 bit of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP). As a result, it is determined that the two operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 have been accepted at the same time.
In this case, since the input port level data A (_PT_IN_A_LV) is "00000011 (B)", in step S1462, the A register value (input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) )) When the logical product (AND) operation is performed, the result is "00000011 (B)".

Further, when this "00000011 (B)" is added to the reference address ("1100 (H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1103 (H)".
The data corresponding to the address "1103 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259. Since this "00000001 (B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the first (left) reel 31 is executed as described above, when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. Will be done.

In this way, when the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in the situation where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the stop switch acceptance table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is used. Based on the information acquired in the above, the stop control of the first reel 31 corresponding to the first stop switch 42 is executed.

Further, the first reel (left reel 31) is stopped, the second (middle) reel 31 and the third (right) reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the second (middle) stop switch 42 and the third (right) It is assumed that the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted. At this time, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is set to "00000011 (B)".

Under such circumstances, it is assumed that the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are accepted at the same time. In this case, since the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "00000011 (B)", in step S1462, the A register value (input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) )) When the logical product (AND) operation is performed, the result is "00000010 (B)".
Further, when this "00000010 (B)" is added to the reference address ("1100 (H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1102 (H)".

The data corresponding to the address "1102 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259. As described above, this "00000010 (B)" is data indicating that the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.
In this way, under the condition that the first reel 31 is stopped and the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the second stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted. At that time, the stop control of the second reel 31 corresponding to the second stop switch 42 is executed based on the information acquired by using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN).

Further, it is assumed that the operations of the first stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000011 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "000000101 (B)". Therefore, in step S1462, the A register value (input port). When the logical product (AND) operation of the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) is performed, the result is "000000101 (B)".

Further, when this "000000101 (B)" is added to the reference address ("1100 (H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1105 (H)".
Then, the data corresponding to the address "1105 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed.

Further, it is assumed that the operations of the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 are simultaneously accepted in a state where all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and the operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000011 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "000000110 (B)". Therefore, in step S1462, the A register value (input port). When the logical product (AND) operation of the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) is performed, the result is "00000011 (B)".

Further, when this "00000011 (B)" is added to the reference address ("1100 (H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1106 (H)".
Then, the data corresponding to the address "1106 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.

Further, it is assumed that all the reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed and all the operations of the stop switches 42 are accepted at the same time in a state where the operations of all the stop switches 42 can be accepted.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000011 (B)", and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "000000111 (B)". Therefore, in step S1462, the A register value (input port). When the logical product (AND) operation of the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) is performed, the result is "00000011 (B)".

Further, when this "00000011 (B)" is added to the reference address ("1100 (H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1107 (H)".
Then, the data corresponding to the address "1107 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000001 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the first reel 31 is executed.

Further, in a state where the first reel is stopped, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the operations of the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 can be accepted, the first stop switch 42 And it is assumed that the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000011 (B)" and the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is "000000101 (B)". Therefore, in step S1462, the A register value (input port). When the logical product (AND) operation of the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) is performed, the result is "00000100 (B)".

Further, when this "00000100 (B)" is added to the reference address ("1100 (H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1104 (H)".
Then, as shown in FIG. 259, the data corresponding to the address "1104 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000100 (B)", and the stop control of the third reel 31 is executed. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the third reel 31 is executed.

Further, the second stop switch 42 is in a state where the first reel is stopped, the second reel 31 and the third reel 31 rotate at a constant speed, and the operations of the second stop switch 42 and the third stop switch 42 can be accepted. And it is assumed that the operation of the third stop switch 42 is accepted at the same time.
In this case, the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is "00000011 (B)", and the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "000000110 (B)". Therefore, in step S1462, the A register value (input port). When the logical product (AND) operation of the rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP)) and the B register value (reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP)) is performed, the result is "00000011 (B)".

Further, when this "00000011 (B)" is added to the reference address ("1100 (H)") as an offset value, the result (designated address) becomes "1106 (H)".
Then, the data corresponding to the address "1106 (H)" in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) is "00000010 (B)" as shown in FIG. 259, and the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1465, the stop control of the second reel 31 is executed.

Here, the reel stop flags (_FL_STOP_LP) are "00000000000 (B)", "00000001 (B)", "000000010 (B)", "000000100 (B)", "000000111 (B)", and "000000101 (B)". ) ”,“ 00000110 (B) ”, and“ 00000111 (B) ”.
Also, when focusing only on the signals of the three stop switches 42, the input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) is also "000000000 (B)", "00000001 (B)", "00000010 (B)", and "000000100 (B)". ) ”,“ 00000011 (B) ”,“ 00000101 (B) ”,“ 00000011 (B) ”, and“ 00000011 (B) ”.

Therefore, the result of logical product (AND) calculation of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) is also "000000000 (B)", "00000001 (B)", "00000010 (B)". , "00000100 (B)", "000000111 (B)", "000000101 (B)", "00000011 (B)", and "000000111 (B)".

Then, when the result of the above logical product operation is "00000000000 (B)", it becomes "No" in step S1462, and the process does not proceed to the process after step S1463, so that the reference address ("1100 (H)") is used. The offset value to be added is any one of "1 (D)" to "7 (D)".
Therefore, no matter what state the drive state of each reel 31 is and what combination of the plurality of stop switches 42 are operated at the same time, based on the information acquired by using the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN). The stop control of any one reel 31 can be appropriately executed.

<36th Embodiment>
In the 36th embodiment, the stop switch 42 corresponding to the first (any one) reel 31 is operated at the first timing, and then at the second timing before the first reel 31 is stopped. When the stop switch 42 corresponding to the second (other than the first) reel 31 is operated, the first reel 31 may stop after the second reel 31 has stopped. ..

Further, the symbol arrangement of the reel 31, the effective line, the type of the combination, the combination of the symbols of the combination, the number of payouts, the condition device, the winning combination, the RT, and the main game state are the same as those in the 23rd embodiment.
Then, as a result of the first reel 31 being stopped after the second reel 31 is stopped, the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination (for example, "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR") are on a straight line. When the stop display is displayed, a predetermined effect (for example, a tempai sound) can be output according to the timing at which the first reel 31 stops.

261 to 263 are schematic views showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch 42, the stop order of the reel 31, the stop display of the symbol, and the output of the tempai sound in the 36th embodiment.
In the present embodiment, after the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is accepted, before a predetermined period for performing 4-phase excitation output to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 elapses (for example, 4-phase excitation). At the timing of output or before the 4-phase excitation output), the operation of the other stop switch 42 is accepted, and the 4-phase excitation output is sent to the motor 32 of the reel 31 corresponding to the other stop switch 42. It is configured to be executable.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reel 31 may be interchanged.

For example, the winning number "25" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game in which the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, as shown in FIGS. 261 (a) to 261 (c), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42, It is assumed that these are operated quickly in the order of the middle stop switch 42. Further, it is assumed that the operation of the left stop switch 42 is first accepted, and then the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted before the left reel 31 is stopped. At this time, the number of moving symbols (number of sliding frames) from the acceptance of the operation of the left stop switch 42 to the stop of the left reel 31 is set to "4", and the operation of the middle stop switch 42 is accepted and then the middle. It is assumed that the number of moving symbols until the reel 31 stops is set to "0". In such a case, the middle reel 31 may stop first, and then the left reel 31 may stop.

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first, as shown in FIG. 261 (b), “blue BAR” is stopped and displayed in the middle stage, and then when the left reel 31 is stopped, FIG. 261 (c). As shown in, it is assumed that "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the upper row. That is, it is assumed that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" are stopped and displayed on the straight downward effective line.

Here, when the two reels 31 are stopped and the remaining one reel 31 is rotating, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are stopped and displayed on the effective line, and the remaining one reel 31 is stopped. When the symbols that make up the symbol combination corresponding to the combination are stopped and displayed on the effective line, the situation in which the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed is called "tempai". .. That is, when the two reels 31 are stopped, a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, which is called a tenpai.
In the case of having four reels 31, when the three reels 31 are stopped, a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, which is called tempai. That is, in the case of having N reels 31, when N-1 reels 31 are stopped, a part of the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line, which is called tempai.

Then, as shown in FIG. 261 (c), as a result of the left reel 31 stopping after the middle reel 31 stops, the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" are on the right. When the stop is displayed on the downward effective line, the symbol that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is not the timing when the middle reel 31 is stopped, but the timing when the left reel 31 is stopped. Outputs the tempai sound, which is a sound effect peculiar to tempai). That is, the tempai sound is output based on the stop order of the reel 31 rather than the operation order of the stop switch 42.

For example, the winning number "25" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" is activated, and the "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB is activated. In a game in which the symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is assumed that "blue BAR" is set to be stopped and displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 31 only when the left stop switch 42 is first operated. ..
In this case, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, if "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the left reel 31, the player can select "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR". It can be recognized that the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination is operating.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time, if "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the left reel 31, "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" Performs a definite effect (for example, an effect that outputs sounds such as "Ichikaku" and "Congratulations") indicating that the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination of is operating.
However, in the game in which the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" is operating, as shown in FIGS. 261 (a) to 261 (c), the left stop switch 42 , Even though the operation is performed in the order of the middle stop switch 42, when the middle reel 31 and the left reel 31 are stopped in the order, even if "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the upper row of the left reel 31, the confirmation effect is displayed. Do not execute.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed on the straight invalid line, the same sound effect as in the tempai is output.
For example, in a game in which the winning number "2" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either the replay 01 or 02 can be won, FIG. 262. As shown in (a) to (c), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, it is assumed that the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are operated quickly in this order. Then, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the first timing (the number of moving symbols of the left reel 31 is set to "4"), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing (movement of the middle reel 31). The number of symbols is set to "1").

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped first, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), "replay" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and then the left reel is stopped. When 31 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), "replay" is stopped and displayed in the upper row, and "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row. That is, it is assumed that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" are stopped and displayed on the lower straight invalid line. In such a case, the same sound effect as in the tempai is output according to the timing when the left reel 31 stops, not when the middle reel 31 stops.

For example, in a game in which the winning number "2" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the replay B condition device corresponding to the winning number "2" is activated, and either the replay 01 or 02 can be won. As shown in (a) to (d), when the three reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are quickly operated in this order. Suppose. Then, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the first timing (the number of moving symbols of the left reel 31 is set to "4"), and the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the second timing (moving symbols of the middle reel 31). It is assumed that the number is set to "1") and the right stop switch 42 is operated at the third timing (the number of moving symbols on the right reel 31 is set to "0"). In such a case, the middle reel 31 may be stopped first, the right reel 31 may be stopped second, and the left reel 31 may be stopped last.

Further, when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, as shown in FIG. 263 (b), "replay" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, and the second right. When the reel 31 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 263 (c), "replay" is stopped and displayed in the lower row, "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the middle row, and finally the left reel 31 is stopped. As shown in FIG. 263 (d), it is assumed that "replay" is stopped and displayed in the upper row and "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed in the lower row.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to 263 (d), since "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 31 and the lower stage of the middle reel 31, the left reel is tentatively the same as the operation order of the stop switch 42. If the middle reel 31 is stopped in the order of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the same sound effect as at the time of tempai is output.
However, unlike the operation order of the stop switch 42, if the reel 31 stops in the order of the middle reel 31, the right reel 31, and the left reel 31, when the right reel 31 stops second, "blue BAR"-"blue BAR" -Since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR" are not stopped and displayed on the straight invalid line, the same sound effect as in the tempai is not output.

FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 36th embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 139 in the 23rd embodiment.
In the flowchart of the 36th embodiment shown in FIG. 264, steps different from those in FIG. 139 are underlined, and steps same as those in FIG. 139 are given the same step numbers.

Further, also in the main process (M_MAIN) of the 36th embodiment, the processes of steps S295 to S300 of FIG. 139 are executed, but in FIG. 264, the processes of steps S295 to S300 are not shown.
Hereinafter, the differences from FIG. 139 will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 264, in the 36th embodiment, when the start switch acceptance process (M_START_CTL) in step S751 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1471.
Proceeding to step S1471, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop acceptance has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not any of the operations of the first stop switch 42 to the third stop switch 42 has been accepted.

Specifically, the main control board 50 has D0 bit (left stop switch signal), D1 bit (middle stop switch signal), and D2 of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) at the address “F017 (H)” in FIG. 133. Determines if any of the bits (right stop switch signal) is on. Here, when it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 has been accepted, the process proceeds to the next step S1472. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of any of the stop switches 42 is not accepted, step S1472 and step S1473 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S1474.

Proceeding to step S1472, the main control board 50 executes the process at the time of receiving the stop. In this process, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the winning combination lottery result and the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is assigned to the reel. Set to the symbol number (for stop position) (FIGS. 135 to 137). Further, the stop symbol data for determining the symbol combination to stop at the effective line is updated.

More specifically, in the process at the time of receiving a stop in step S1472 of FIG. 264, the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194 of the 25th embodiment is executed. That is, with respect to the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 determined to be on in step S1471, the winning combination lottery result of this game and the operation of the stop switch 42 were accepted by the process corresponding to steps S1022 to S1023 in FIG. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the position of the reel 31 at the moment, and the symbol number corresponding to the determined stop position is stored in the reel symbol number (for the stop position). Further, the stop symbol data (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9) for determining the symbol combination to be stopped at the effective line is updated by the process corresponding to the stop symbol set (M_STOPPIC_SET) in step S1024 of FIG.

The reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) are set to the same value by the interrupt processing executed after the processing in step S1472 (the processing corresponding to steps S1022 to S1024 in FIG. 194). When it is determined that the reel 31 has become, the 4-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 is started.
Further, the reel symbol number (for the passing position) and the reel symbol number (for the stop position) are the same value, and the step number of one symbol of the reel 13 is a predetermined value (for example, "3"). Occasionally, a four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 on the reel 31 may be started.

Then, when the process at the time of stop acceptance in step S1472 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1473, and the main control board 50 sets a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the stop switch 42 has been accepted in the command buffer.
Here, the stop acceptance command may include, for example, information indicating which stop switch 42 operation has been accepted and information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 operation has been accepted. , Information indicating which stop switch 42 operation has been accepted, and information capable of determining the stop position of the reel 31 for which the stop switch 42 operation has been accepted are included.
The stop acceptance command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S1472.

Then, when the stop acceptance command set process of step S1473 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1474, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has been started. .. Here, when it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output has been started for the motor 32 of any of the reels 31, the process proceeds to the next step S1475. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 4-phase excitation output has not been started for the motor 32 of any of the reels 31, step S1475 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1476.

Proceeding to step S1475, the main control board 50 sets a stop command in the command buffer indicating that the four-phase excitation output for stopping the motor 32 of the reel 31 has been started.
Here, the stop command includes information indicating which reel 31 motor 32 has started the four-phase excitation output.
The stop command set in the command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S1475.

Proceeding to step S1476, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped.
Then, when it is determined in step S1476 that at least one reel 31 is not stopped, the process returns to step S1471. In this case, the processes after step S1471 are repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1476 that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to the display determination in step S291.

Here, when the winning number is drawn by the winning combination lottery means 61 and the condition device corresponding to the determined winning number is activated, the main control board 50 issues a condition device command corresponding to the operated condition device to the sub control board 80. Send to. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can determine which condition device has been activated.
Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 261 (a) to 261 (c), a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted is first transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, then a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 is stopped is transmitted, and finally, the left reel 31 is stopped. A stop command is sent to indicate that it should be done.

Furthermore, when the sub control board 80 receives the stop acceptance command from the main control board 50, it can determine which reel 31 stops at which position based on the condition device command and the stop acceptance command. .. As a result, for example, it is determined that the "blue BAR" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper row, and that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" are tempered. can do.

Further, when the sub control board 80 receives the stop command from the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 can determine the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31.
Then, the sub-control board 80 outputs a tempai sound based on the stop position of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, and the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the stop command. , It is possible to output the same sound effect as during tempai.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 261 (a) to 261 (c), the sub-control board 80 determines the stop timing of the left reel 31 based on the stop command indicating that the left reel 31 is stopped, and determines the stop timing of the left reel 31. Outputs a tempai sound at the stop timing.
As a result, even if the operation order of the stop switch 42 and the stop order of the reel 31 are different, it is possible to output a tempai sound or a sound effect similar to that at the time of tempai at an appropriate timing that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to 263 (c), a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the left stop switch 42 has been accepted is first transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. Next, a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the middle stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted, and then a stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted. Next, a stop command indicating that the middle reel 31 is stopped is transmitted, then a stop command indicating that the right reel 31 is stopped is transmitted, and finally, a stop command indicating that the left reel 31 is stopped is transmitted. Is sent.

Further, the sub control board 80 determines that the "blue BAR" of the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle stage based on the stop acceptance command indicating that the operation of the right stop switch 42 has been accepted, and then the right. Based on the stop command indicating that the reel 31 is stopped, it is determined that the right reel 31 is stopped second.
Then, the sub control board 80 determines that when the right reel 31 is stopped, two "blue BARs" are not aligned on the straight invalid line, and does not output the same sound effect as at the time of tempai. Can be done.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to 263 (d), "blue BAR" is stopped and displayed at the lower stage of the left reel 31 and the lower stage of the middle reel 31.
Therefore, if the reels 31 are stopped in the order of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, which is the same as the operation order of the stop switch 42, the "blue BAR" is in the lower row when the middle reel 31 is stopped. It will be stopped and displayed on a straight invalid line.
However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to 263 (d), since the middle reel 31 is stopped first, if the same sound effect as that at the time of tempai is output at this point, the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 263 (a) to 263 (d), it is the right reel 31 that stops second, and at this point, it is confirmed that two "blue BARs" are not aligned on the straight invalid line. Therefore, if the same sound effect as during tempai is output, the player will feel uncomfortable.
Then, in the present embodiment, the sub control board 80 determines that the reels 31 stop in the order of the middle reel 31, the right reel 31, and the left reel 31 based on the stop command of each reel 31, and the middle reel 31 is the first. Even when the right reel 31 is stopped second, it is judged that two "blue BARs" are not aligned on the straight invalid line, and the same sound effect as at the time of tempai is not output. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, in the slot machine 10 in which the AT is controlled and managed on the main control board 50 side, the main control board 50 issues a winning number and a condition device command to the sub control board 80. Send the production group number without sending.
In this case, the stop position of the reel 31 cannot be determined from the effect group number and the information indicating the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.

Therefore, in the slot machine 10 that controls and manages the AT on the main control board 50 side, the main control board 50 indicates to the sub control board 80 which stop switch 42 operation has been accepted, and stops. A stop acceptance command including information capable of determining the stop position of the reel 31 for which the operation of the switch 42 has been accepted is transmitted.
Then, the sub-control board 80 can determine which reel 31 stops at which position based on the information that can determine the stop position of the reel 31 included in the received stop acceptance command. As a result, for example, it is determined that the "blue BAR" of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper row, and that the symbols constituting the symbol combination of "blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR" are tempered. can do.

Although the 36th embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and various modifications such as the following are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the sub control board 80 determines the stop order and stop timing of each reel 31 based on the stop command received from the main control board 50, and makes a tempai sound or a tempai time at an appropriate timing. A similar sound effect was output.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 may be determined based on the condition device command and the stop acceptance command received from the main control board 50. Then, based on the stop position, stop order, and stop timing of each reel 31 determined from the condition device command and the stop acceptance command, a tempai sound or a sound effect similar to that at the time of tempai may be output.
In this case, the stop command of each reel 31 may not be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80.

(2) In the above embodiment, when the reel 31 and the motor 32 are stopped, a four-phase excitation output is performed on the motor 32 (stepping motor), but the present invention is not limited to this.
When stopping the reel 31 and the motor 32, for example, one-phase excitation output may be performed, two-phase excitation output may be performed, or three-phase excitation output may be performed. Further, first, a two-phase excitation output is applied and a weak brake is applied, and then the two-phase excitation output is switched to a four-phase excitation output and a strong brake is applied to stop the rotation of the reel 31 and the motor 32. You may let it.

(3) In the 29th to 36th embodiments, three reels 31 are provided, but the number of reels 31 is not limited to three, and may be, for example, four or more.
(4) In the 29th to 36th embodiments, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a parrot that uses a game ball as a game medium, an enclosed game machine (medalless game machine) that uses electronic information (electronic medal) without using a physical (tangible object) medal, and a casino machine are also applied. The invention can be applied.
(5) The various modifications shown in the first to 36th embodiments and the first to 36th embodiments are not limited to being carried out individually, but can be carried out in combination as appropriate.

<Additional notes>
Examples of the inventions (initial inventions) described in the original specification of the present application include the following initial inventions 1 to 54, in order to solve the problems to be solved by the initial invention and the problems related to the initial invention, respectively. The means and the effects of the original invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification does not mean that the invention is limited to the initial inventions 1 to 54.

1. 1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 1 The initial invention relates to a game machine in which processing related to a game medium is not executed after a power failure occurs.
In a conventional game machine, by turning off the blocker before executing the backup process as the power off process, even if a medal is inserted during the execution of the backup process, the medal is returned to the player via the blocker. Therefore, a technique is known in which the medal addition process is not performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-173832).
However, for example, if the power is cut off at the moment when the medal is inserted from the medal slot, the medal will pass through the blocker before the power off processing is executed, and the medal will be counted. There was a possibility. It is not preferable in terms of control to execute the medal addition process (medal bet process or medal credit process) after the power is cut off.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the addition process of the game medium from being executed even when the power is cut off at approximately the same time as when the game medium is input from the game medium input port. ..

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 1 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (first embodiment (A)) is
Game medium slot (medal slot 47) and
It is provided in the passage (medal passage) of the game medium (medal) inserted from the game medium slot, and is in a state of permitting the passage of the game medium (on state) or a state of disallowing the passage of the game medium (off state). ) With a controllable blocker (45),
Detection means A (input sensor 44a) and B (input sensor 44b) provided in the passage of the game medium input from the game medium input port and capable of detecting the game medium (detection means B is on the downstream side of the detection means A). Located in) and equipped with
When an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off while the blocker is being controlled in a state where the passage of the game medium is permitted, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected to detect the event of the game medium. The time until the blocker is controlled so as to disallow passage is set to T1 (T1 in FIGS. 2 and 3).
When the game medium is released from the game medium slot toward the inside of the game machine in a situation where the blocker is controlled so that the game medium can pass through, the game medium is not visible from the front of the game machine. From the time when it becomes possible (position of M2 in FIG. 2) until the detection means B detects the game medium and the detection means B does not detect the game medium (position of M4 in FIG. 2). When the time is T2 (T2 in FIGS. 2 and 3)
T1 <T2
It is characterized by making it become.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 1 According to the initial invention, when the game medium is released from the game medium slot toward the inside of the game machine and the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine, a power failure occurs. In that case, the blocker is controlled so as to detect an event in which the power supply is cut off and disallow the passage of the game medium by the time the detection means B does not detect the game medium. At least, it is not detected by the detection means B.
Therefore, since the game medium is not normally detected by the detection means A and B, the addition process (bet process or credit process) of the game medium is not executed. Therefore, even if the power is cut off when the game medium becomes invisible from the front of the game machine, that is, even if the power is cut off immediately after the game medium is released inside the game machine, the game is played. It is possible to prevent the medium from being accepted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the addition process of the game medium from being executed after the power failure occurs.

2. 2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 2 The initial invention relates to a gate mark of a substrate case in a gaming machine including a substrate case containing a control substrate inside.
In a conventional game machine, a board case in which a main control board is housed is known. Here, since the substrate case is generally formed by molding, a gate mark remains on the substrate case. Then, a technique using this gate mark as a mark has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-042270).
However, the gate mark of the substrate case is not clear when viewed from the outside because it has a cut portion of the resin. Therefore, there is a problem that the gate mark may be opened and the inside of the main control board may be accessed.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to suppress the goto action using the gate mark of the substrate case.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 2 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (second embodiment) is
A predetermined IC (main CPU 55) equipped with a calculation function and
A control board (main control board 50) on which the predetermined IC is mounted on one surface (a surface facing the upper surface of the upper cover 57), and
It has a plurality of surfaces (upper surface, side surface, etc.), and includes a substrate case (a substrate case 56 including an upper cover 57 and a lower cover 58) for accommodating the control substrate.
The inside of the substrate case is visibly formed.
A gate mark (57b) at the time of molding of the substrate case is arranged on a surface (outside the upper surface of the upper cover 57) that is outside the substrate case and faces the one surface of the control substrate.
It is characterized in that the predetermined IC of the control board is not positioned in the direction perpendicular to the surface facing the gate trace.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 2 According to the original invention, since the predetermined IC of the control board is not located in the vertical direction of the gate trace of the substrate case, the gate trace is illegally opened to access the predetermined IC. Can be prevented.
Further, since the gate mark of the substrate case does not exist in the vertical direction of the predetermined IC on the control board, the predetermined IC can be visually confirmed without being obstructed by the gate mark. As a result, it is possible to easily visually confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on the predetermined IC.

3. 3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 3 The initial invention relates to a process when communication is restored from a disconnection after a disconnection occurs in communication between the main control board and the sub control board.
In a conventional game machine, a game machine is known in which a command is transmitted from a main control board to a sub control board, and the sub control board controls an image display device or the like based on the received command.
Here, the sub-control board is known to have a technique of comparing a command received last time with a command received this time and determining a command reception abnormality based on the consistency of these received commands (for example, special feature). Open 2014-226503).
However, when a command is transmitted from the main control board to the sub control board, a disconnection may occur between the main control board and the sub control board. Then, when the communication is restored, the sub control board may not be able to output a normal effect.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make the effect when communication is restored after the disconnection between the main control board and the sub control board occurs.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 3 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (third embodiment) is
Main control board (50) and
A sub control board (80) that controls the effect based on the information received from the main control board is provided.
The sub control board can receive the information of the operated stop switch (42) from the main control board.
In a predetermined gaming state (AT), the sub-control board can output an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switch based on the information of the operated stop switch.
The sub-control board
When the predetermined stop switch is operated in the "N" game in the predetermined game state and the information that the predetermined stop switch is operated is received, the predetermined stop switch corresponding to the operation of the predetermined stop switch is received. The effect (the effect when the reel corresponding to the predetermined stop switch is stopped) is output, and then the information from the main control board becomes unreceivable before all the remaining stop switches in the "N" game are operated. After that, in the "N + a" game, the information from the main control board can be received, and then in the "N + a" game, the information that a specific stop switch different from the predetermined stop switch is operated is received. When, an effect corresponding to the operation of the specific stop switch and related to the predetermined effect (an effect following the predetermined effect and an effect when the reel corresponding to the specific stop switch is stopped) is output. Then, when the predetermined information is received in the "N + a + 1" game, the effect of the "N + a + 1" game is output based on the predetermined information.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 3 According to the initial invention, when communication is restored in the middle of the "N + a" game, an effect related to the predetermined effect of the "N" game that has been output up to that point is output. Therefore, in the "N + a" game, the effect following the "N" game can be output. Then, since the normal effect is restored when the game shifts to the "N + a + 1" game, it is possible to prevent the effect from suddenly changing due to the return of communication in the middle of the "N + a" game. As a result, it is possible to output a natural effect before and after the occurrence of disconnection.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 4 The initial invention relates to a game machine capable of operating a stop switch at high speed.
In a conventional game machine, when a stop switch is operated, the reel corresponding to the stop switch is stopped at a predetermined position corresponding to the lottery result. Further, after the reel is stopped at a predetermined position, the motor is excited for a predetermined time. Here, when the operated stop switch is in the ON state or the motor is in the exciting state, the operation of the next stop switch is not accepted.
Here, there is known a technique in which even if the second stop switch is operated, the stop operation is not accepted from the operation of the first stop switch until the reel status becomes the stop state (). For example, see JP-A-2017-093576).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, if it takes a long time after the stop switch is operated until the next stop switch operation can be accepted, there is a problem that the game cannot be digested at high speed.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to enable the stop switch to be operated at high speed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 4 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (fourth embodiment) is
Reel (31) and
A motor (32) for rotating the reel and
Based on the detection of the operation of the stop button (stop button 42a), the reel control means (65) that drives and controls the motor to stop the rotation of the reel, and
Equipped with an internal lottery means (role lottery means 61)
The sensor (detection sensor 42e) that detects the operation of the stop button is turned on until the stop button is pushed to the deepest part (position shown in FIG. 12C), and when the push of the stop button is released, the stop is stopped. The button is configured to be movable to the initial position (position shown in FIG. 12A) by urging force, and the sensor is turned off before the stop button is moved to the initial position.
In a game in which the internal lottery means determines a predetermined result, the stop button is operated on a predetermined reel at a predetermined timing under a situation where all the reels are rotated by the reel control means, and the predetermined reel is operated. After detecting the on of the sensor of the stop button with respect to the reel, an excitation state (4-phase excitation state) for stopping the predetermined reel is set, and a predetermined time (T12 in FIG. 13) has elapsed since the excitation state was set. When it is, it is configured to end the excitation state.
When the time from the moment when the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released until the sensor is turned off is T1 (T11 in FIG. 13) and the predetermined time is T2.
T1 <T2
It is characterized by making it become.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 4 According to the initial invention, it is assumed that the start of the excited state of the motor when the reel is stopped and the moment when the push of the stop button pushed to the deepest part is released at the same time. Occasionally, the excited state ends after the sensor is turned off. Therefore, it is possible to accept the operation of the next stop button at the timing when the excited state of the motor is completed.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 5 The initial invention relates to the control of the medal payout device.
It is known that it takes about 100 ms to pay out one medal in a conventional game machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-214434).
Here, a DC motor (DC motor) is used as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disk, but when a constant current is passed through the DC motor, the drive shaft gradually accelerates from the stopped rotation state. After that, it reaches a constant speed (constant speed).
For this reason, the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates from the start of driving of the hopper motor to the ejection of the first medal, and therefore from the start of driving of the hopper motor to the ejection of the first medal. The time required is longer than the medal ejection interval when the drive shaft of the hopper motor is rotating at a constant speed, which may give the player the feeling that the ejection of the first medal is delayed.
The problem that the invention initially seeks to solve is to prevent the player from feeling that the first medal has been ejected late.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 5 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (sixth embodiment) is
A hopper (35) that stores medals and
A hopper disk (101) provided on the hopper and
A hopper motor (36) that rotates the hopper disc and
A control means (main control board 50) for controlling the drive of the hopper motor is provided.
The hopper disc is provided with a plurality (8) holding portions (102) capable of holding medals stored in the hopper along the outer circumference of the hopper disc.
When the hopper motor is driven to rotate the hopper disk, the medals held in the holding portion are formed so as to be sequentially ejected from the discharging portion (103).
The position of the holding portion where the last ejected medal was held at the moment when the last ejected medal in one payout process is ejected from the ejected portion is set as the first position.
The position of the holding portion where the first ejected medal in the next payout process is held at the moment when the last ejected medal in the one payout process is ejected from the ejected portion is set as the second position.
When the control means finishes the one payout process, the holding portion holding the first ejection medal in the next payout process is located between the first position and the second position. It is characterized in that the drive of the hopper motor is controlled so that the rotation of the hopper disk is stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 5 According to the original invention, when the holding portion holding the first ejected medal is stopped between the first position and the second position, it reaches the first position. The distance is shorter than when stopped at the second position. As a result, the time to reach the first position is also shorter than when stopped at the second position, so even if the rotation of the drive shaft of the hopper motor gradually accelerates, the ejection of the first medal is delayed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling the feeling.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 6 The initial invention relates to an arrangement of a main control board mounted inside a cabinet and a sub control board mounted on the back surface of a front door.
It is known that a conventional gaming machine is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity on a sub-control board for controlling an effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-131656).
Here, the electrolytic capacitor for storing electricity is filled with an electrolytic solution, but when the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect and the filled electrolytic solution scatters and adheres to the main CPU on the main control board, There is a possibility that the main CPU will malfunction. In addition, the main CPU may be damaged by the impact when the electrolytic capacitor bursts.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to prevent the main CPU from malfunctioning even if the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is scattered. Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect, the main CPU is not damaged by the impact at that time.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 6 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (7th embodiment) is
Cabinet (13) and
A front door (12) that is openably attached to the cabinet and
The main control board (50) that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a sub control board (80) that controls the production,
The main control board is mounted inside the cabinet.
The sub control board is attached to the back surface of the front door.
The main control board and the sub control board are arranged so as to face each other with the front door closed.
A main CPU (55) is arranged on the main control board.
The sub-control board is characterized in that the electrolytic capacitor (86) is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 6 According to the initial invention, since the electrolytic capacitor is arranged at a position other than the position facing the main CPU on the sub control board, the electrolytic capacitor bursts due to a defect and the electrolytic solution is used. It is possible to prevent the scattered electrolytic solution from adhering to the main CPU even if the particles are scattered, thereby preventing the main CPU from malfunctioning.
Further, even if the electrolytic capacitor bursts, the impact can be prevented from being directly received by the main CPU, whereby the main CPU can be prevented from being damaged.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 7 The initial invention relates to reel stop control on the main control board side and control of the output of the effect on the sub control board side.
In a conventional game machine, it is possible to execute multiple types of production contents, and each production content is divided into when a special role is won (inside) and when a special role is not won (non-internal). Are known to have different selection probabilities (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-146608).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the production content is selected regardless of the lottery result of the internal lottery in both the inside and the non-inside.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately determine the effect to be output according to the lottery result of the internal lottery.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 7 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (9th embodiment) is
A plurality of reels (31) displaying a plurality of symbols and
A plurality of stop switches (42) operated by the player when stopping each of the reels,
The main control means (main control board 50) that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a sub-control means (sub-control board 80) for controlling the production.
The main control means
An internal lottery that draws so that there is a case where the first lottery result (for example, "BB" alone is won in the non-internal) or a second lottery result (for example, "non-winning" in the BB) Means (role lottery means 61) and
A plurality of stop position determination tables that determine the stop positions of the reels corresponding to the positions of the reels at the moment when the stop switch is operated.
A reel control means (65) for determining a stop position of the reel using any of the stop position determination tables and stopping the reel at the determined stop position is provided.
The reel control means determines the stop position of the reel by using the same stop position determination table in the game that resulted in the first lottery and the game that resulted in the second lottery.
The sub control means
Multiple production decision tables that determine the production to be output,
It is provided with an effect output control means (91) that determines the effect to be output using any of the above-mentioned effect determination tables and outputs the determined effect.
The effect output control means is characterized in that the effect to be output is determined by using different effect determination tables for the game that is the result of the first lottery and the game that is the result of the second lottery.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 7 According to the initial invention, the reel control means is stopped at the same stop on the main control means side in the game in which the first lottery result is obtained by the internal lottery means and the game in which the second lottery result is obtained. The position determination table is used to determine the stop position of the reel, but on the sub-control means side, the effect output control means determines the effect to be output using a different effect determination table.
As a result, even if the reel stop control on the main control means side is the same, different effects can be output on the sub control means side, and the effects can be diversified.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 8 The initial invention relates to a gap between a cabinet and a front door.
In a conventional game machine, a protruding side protruding outward is provided at the edge of an opening on the front side of the cabinet so that the protruding side is accommodated inside the front door when the front door is closed. As a result, it is known that the gap between the cabinet and the front door is bent to make it difficult for foreign matter to enter (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-198949).
However, it is conceivable to open the front door a little so that the protruding side is separated from the front door so that foreign matter can enter through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to open the front door a little to prevent fraudulent acts (goto acts) in which foreign matter is invaded through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 8 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (eighth embodiment) is
Cabinet (13) and
A front door (12) that is openably attached to the cabinet and
It is equipped with a door sensor that detects the opening of the front door.
At the lower part of the cabinet, a first closing portion (13c) that protrudes toward the front door when the front door is closed is provided.
A second closing portion (12a) that protrudes toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position below the first closing portion in the lower part of the front door.
A third closed portion (12b) that protrudes toward the cabinet when the front door is closed is provided at a position above the first closed portion in the lower part of the front door.
When the front door is closed, the first closed portion is formed so as to be arranged between the second closed portion and the third closed portion.
The position of the front door when the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door is set as the detection start position.
Even when the front door is in the detection start position, the first closed portion is formed so as to be arranged between the second closed portion and the third closed portion.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 8 According to the initial invention, when the front door is opened from the closed state, the door sensor first detects the opening of the front door, and then the second closed portion and the third closed portion are formed. The first obstruction will come out from between. Further, when the door sensor detects the opening of the front door, it is possible to notify that the front door is open.
Therefore, before it becomes possible to notify that the front door is open, the first closed portion does not come out from between the second closed portion and the third closed portion, and the front door is notified that the front door is open. Even at a possible position, the gap between the cabinet and the front door has a bent shape, so that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts (goto acts) in which foreign matter enters through the gap between the cabinet and the front door.

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 9 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with an advantageous section indicator.
Conventionally, a game machine provided with an advantageous section indicator has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section indicator, the lighting control of the advantageous section indicator at the time of recovery from a power failure has not been sufficiently studied.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately control the advantageous section indicator when returning from a power failure.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 9 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42), and
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed and
It is equipped with an advantageous section indicator (advantageous section display LED77) that indicates that it is an advantageous section.
When the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit and the power supply is restarted with the setting change switch off, the advantageous section indicator is turned on after the interrupt processing is started. It is possible to execute the process for lighting,
A process for turning off the advantageous section indicator when the power supply is restarted while the setting change switch is on after the power supply is cut off while the advantageous section indicator is lit. The feature is that it is possible to shift to the setting change process after executing.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 9 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section indicator can be appropriately controlled according to the situation when the power is turned off and then restored.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 10 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with four reels and a stop button.
Conventional game machines generally have three reels and three stop buttons (see, for example, JP-A-2018-000797).
It has also been proposed to increase the number of reels and stop buttons to four in conventional game machines. However, if the number of stop buttons is set to 4, there is a problem that an operation error of the stop button is likely to occur at AT.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it difficult for an operation error of the stop button to occur when the number of stop buttons is four.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 10 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (13th embodiment) is
4 reels (31A-31D) and
It is equipped with four stop buttons (stop switches 42A to 42D) corresponding to each of the four reels.
A predetermined operation button (24) is arranged above the four stop buttons.
At least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42A) on the left end side is positioned vertically downward from the left end of the predetermined operation button.
It is characterized in that at least a part of the stop button (stop switch 42D) on the right end side is positioned vertically downward from the right end of the predetermined operation button.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 10 According to the original invention, even when the number of stop buttons is 4, the left and right ends of the operation buttons can be used as markers to operate the left and right ends of the stop buttons. , It is possible to prevent the operation error of the stop button from occurring.

11. Initial invention 11
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 11 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine capable of instructing a specified number.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of playing with a specified number of any one of a plurality of specified numbers (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in a conventional game machine, even if a game can be played with a specified number of any one of a plurality of types of specified numbers, an appropriate specified number and an inappropriate specified number may occur.
The problem that the invention initially tries to solve is to make it possible to play games in an appropriate specified number.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 11 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (12th embodiment)
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) is provided.
When the operation mode is notified in the notification game state, the information corresponding to the operation mode (push order instruction information) can be displayed on a predetermined display unit (acquired number display LED78).
In the notified game state, the game can be started when a specified number of game values out of at least a plurality of specified numbers (“2” or “3”) is input.
In the notification game state, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed on the predetermined display unit.
In the notification game state, when displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, a predetermined timing (in FIG. 42) from when all the reels are stopped until the start switch is detected to be turned on. , Displayed in step S322),
When displaying the information corresponding to the specified number on the predetermined display unit, it is indicated that the information is displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from the information corresponding to the operation mode (when the specified number is "2", it is displayed as "0A"). It is a feature.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 11 According to the initial invention, information corresponding to a specified number can be displayed at a predetermined timing until the start switch is detected to be turned on, so that the appropriate timing for the player. Therefore, an appropriate specified number in the game can be notified.
In addition, the player can prevent the player from confusing the information corresponding to the operation mode with the information corresponding to the specified number.

12. Initial invention 12
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 12 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter for counting the difference number of sheets in the notified gaming state.
Conventionally, a game machine including a counter for counting the difference number of sheets in AT has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
In the conventional game machine, it is required to initialize the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. However, there are cases where the next AT is won early after the end of the AT, and there are cases where it is desired to take over the difference in the number of the previous AT.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to take over the difference number of the previous notification game state (AT) while initializing the information about the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 12 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode (correct answer pressing order) of the stop button (stop switch 42), and
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed and
In the first control means (main control board 50), the cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the number of bets on the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits; the same applies hereinafter), and the minimum value is "0". The first difference counter (difference counter) that stores the value set to
The second control means (sub-control board 80) is provided with a second difference counter (sub-difference number counter) that stores the cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the number of bets and the number of payouts of the game value.
At the end of the advantageous section, the first difference counter may be cleared (step S435 in FIG. 51 or 52), and the second difference counter may not be cleared.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 12 According to the initial invention, since the first difference counter is cleared at the end of the advantageous section, the rule of initializing the information regarding the advantageous section can be observed. In addition, the second difference counter may not be cleared, in which case it is possible to take over the difference number of the previous notified game state at the start of the next notified game state.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 13 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a counter that counts the difference number of sheets in the notified gaming state.
Conventionally, a game machine including a counter for counting the difference number of sheets in AT has been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in the conventional game machine, how to count (update) the difference number at the time of winning the replay has not been sufficiently examined.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately execute the update process of the difference number at the time of winning the replay.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 13 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42) and
An advantageous section in which the notification game state can be executed and
A difference counter that stores the cumulative value of the difference indicating the difference between the number of bets of the game value and the number of payouts (including addition to credits. The same shall apply hereinafter) with the minimum value set to "0".
It is equipped with an advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) that counts the number of games played in the advantageous section.
1. 1. At least in the game in which the small winning combination is won, after all the reels are stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section ( 51 or 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is set without determining the value of the difference counter (without executing the process of step S434). The process for terminating (step S435) can be executed,
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section (when "No" in step S424), the update process of the difference counter (steps S428 and W429) is executed. Later, when it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (step S434), and it is determined that the value satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (Yes in step S434). ”), The process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.
2. 2. In the game in which the replay is won, after all the reels are stopped (after step S289 in FIG. 41), it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (FIG. 51). Or in FIG. 52, step S424),
1) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (when "Yes" in step S424), the value of the difference counter is not determined (in step S434). The process (step S435) for ending the advantageous section (without executing the process) can be executed.
2) When it is determined that the value of the advantageous section counter does not satisfy the end condition of the advantageous section (when "No" in step S424), the difference counter is not executed without updating the difference counter. Is a value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section (in FIG. 51 or 52, if “Yes” in step S426, the process proceeds to step S434), and the value that satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. When it is determined that the above is true (when “Yes” in step S434), the process for ending the advantageous section (step S435) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 13 According to the initial invention, in the game that won the replay, the difference counter update process is performed regardless of whether or not the value of the advantageous section counter satisfies the end condition of the advantageous section. Is not executed, so that it is possible to appropriately execute the update process of the difference number in the game that won the replay. Further, the program processing can be speeded up.

14. Initial invention 14
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 14 The initial invention relates to a game machine capable of executing processing related to an instruction function in a predetermined predetermined number.
Conventionally, game machines having an instruction function have been known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-000797).
However, in the conventional game machine, the relationship between the specified number and the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section has not been sufficiently examined.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately execute the processing related to the instruction function and the processing related to the advantageous section according to the specified number.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 14 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (11th embodiment) is
A notification game state (AT) capable of executing an instruction function for notifying the operation mode of the stop button (stop switch 42), and
An advantageous section where the notification game state can be executed, and
An advantageous section counter (advantageous section clear counter) for counting a predetermined variable related to an advantageous section, and
It is equipped with a notification game counter (AT game number counter or AT difference number counter) for counting specific variables related to the notification game state (for example, the number of games and the difference number).
It has a game in which at least the first specified number (specified number "3") or the second specified number (specified number "2") can be input.
In the game (AT) in the advantageous section, in the game started based on the input of the first specified number, it is possible to execute the process related to the instruction function (for example, notification of the correct answer pressing order) (in FIG. 48). , "Yes" in step S382), and in the game started based on the input of the second specified number, the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed ("No" in step S382 in FIG. 48). ,
In the notified game state, in the game started based on the input of the first specified number, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the notified game The counter can be updated (step S333 in FIG. 43).
In the game started based on the input of the second specified number in the notified game state, the advantageous section counter can be updated (step S422 in FIG. 51 or FIG. 52), and the notified game counter Make the update infeasible (“No” in step S332 in FIG. 43)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 14 According to the initial invention, the advantageous section can be optimized by making it possible to update the advantageous section counter in either the first specified number or the second specified number of games. ..
In addition, by not updating the notification game counter in the second specified number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed, it is possible to ensure consistency between the execution of the processing related to the instruction function and the update of the notification game counter. it can.

15. Initial invention 15
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 15 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine having a signal line for starting.
Conventionally, it has been known to use a harness composed of a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) when electrically connecting the control boards of a game machine. And as one of the signal lines, there is a signal line related to starting.
In the prior art, since the signal related to the start is used for the lottery, it is necessary to suppress the goto action on the signal line related to the start.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it difficult to identify the signal line related to the start and to suppress the goto action.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 15 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (21st embodiment) is
In a game machine (slot machine 10, pachinko game machine 500) provided with a control board (main control board 50, 530),
It has a plurality of signal lines (lead wires) electrically connected to the control board, and has a plurality of signal lines (lead wires).
The plurality of signal lines include at least a first signal line, a second signal line, and a third signal line.
The first signal line is a signal line related to the start of the game (for example, the lead wire No. 7 of the harness D in FIG. 111).
The second signal line (for example, the lead wire of harness D in FIG. 111) and the third signal line (for example, the lead wire of harness D in FIG. 111) are both. It is a signal line different from the signal line related to the start of the game,
The first signal line and the second signal line have substantially the same diameter and have substantially the same diameter.
The first signal line and the third signal line are characterized in that they have different diameters.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 15 According to the initial invention, it is possible to make it difficult to specify which signal line is the signal line for starting. As a result, it is possible to suppress the goto action on the signal line related to the start.

16. Initial invention 16
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 16 The initial invention relates to a game machine capable of outputting a setting change end sound.
Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values has been known.
In the prior art, for example, when the setting key is turned off, the setting change process ends, and it is not possible to easily grasp the timing when the setting change process ends from the outside.
Therefore, when the setting change process is completed, it is conceivable to notify the fact.
However, when the game is started immediately after the setting change processing is completed and the notification that the setting change processing is completed is notified, the notification that the setting change processing is completed and the notification output in the game are the same. There is a risk that they will be output at different times (overlapping), and it may be difficult to understand the important notifications that are output in the game.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to appropriately output a closing sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 16 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (19th embodiment)
It is a gaming machine (slot machine 10, pachinko gaming machine 500) whose advantage to the player can be changed.
Specific operation detecting means for detecting that a specific operation has been performed in order to control either the setting change state in which the advantage can be changed or the normal state in which the advantage cannot be changed and the game can be started. (Setting key switches 152, 535) and
Equipped with speakers (22, 542)
When the condition for shifting to the normal state is satisfied in the setting change state, the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended can be output from the speaker for the time T1 (“T01” in FIG. 96). And
The game start condition (in the case of the slot machine 10, the specified number has been bet and the start switch 41 has been operated. In the case of the Pachinko game machine 500, the game ball has won the start port 532). In one fulfilled game, it is possible to end the game at time T2 (“T12” or “T22” in FIG. 96).
In the setting change state, after shifting to the normal state, it takes at least time T3 (“T11” or “T12” in FIG. 96) to satisfy the start condition of the game.
When one game is started immediately after shifting from the setting change state to the normal state, T1 <T2 + T3 (T1> 0, T2> 0, T3> 0) are configured to hold the following equations. )
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 16 According to the original invention, even if the game is started at the same time as the end of the setting change state, an end sound indicating that the setting change state is completed is heard before the end of the game. Since the output is completed, the effect output at the end of the game does not overlap with the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect output at the end of the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the end sound indicating that the setting change state has ended.

17. Initial invention 17
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 17 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which a net increase and a base value can be set to appropriate values.
Conventionally, there are known game machines in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-029839).
However, in the above 1BB internal medium specs, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when the game is played in the push order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. There is a problem that it is difficult to make it.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to realize a high net increase during AT without increasing the base value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 17 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
In the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation information of the stop switch (correct answer pressing order).
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed.
The first situation (inside 1BB) where the winning information of the special role is carried over in the advantageous section,
It has a second situation (1BB is in operation) that is an advantageous section and is in a special game, and has.
In the first situation, there is no case of executing the notification game state,
In the second situation, there is a case where the notification game state is executed,
The payout rate in the first situation (referring to the value obtained by dividing the number of game media granted by the number of bets; the same applies hereinafter) is α, and the payout rate in the second situation and the unannounced gaming state is β. The ball ejection rate in the situation of 2 and the notification game state (in the game in which the operation information of the stop switch is notified, the ball ejection rate when the stop switch is operated according to the notified operation information) is defined as γ. When
α <β <1 <γ
And
Let x (a value larger than "0") be the probability of deciding to execute the notified game state in the non-notified game state of the second situation.
When the probability of determining to execute the notified gaming state in the non-notifying gaming state of the first situation is y (“0” in the 23rd embodiment),
x <y
And
The second situation is characterized in that a predetermined value (advantageous section clear counter value) relating to the advantageous section can be updated according to the execution of the game even in the non-notification game state.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 17 According to the initial invention, in the special game, the ball ejection rate is higher than that in the non-special game. Therefore, by executing the notified gaming state during the special game, the ball ejection in the notified game state is performed. The rate can be increased. In addition, since the notified game state is not executed in the non-special game, the base value can be lowered.
Furthermore, when the game shifts to the special game in the non-notified game state, the ball output rate does not exceed "1" and the predetermined value for the advantageous section is updated, so that the player does not have the right to the notified game state. Even if the player shifts to the game, the player can be prevented from having any merit. In particular, when the game shifts to the special game in the non-notified game state, the probability of being determined to be the notified game state is set lower than during the non-notified game, so that the shift to the special game in the non-notified game state is restrained. can do.

18. Initial invention 18
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 18 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that outputs a test signal.
Conventionally, there are known game machines in which both non-AT and AT are inside 1BB (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-029839).
However, in the above 1BB internal medium specs, the ball output rate cannot exceed "1" even when the game is played in the push order that is most advantageous to the player, so the net increase during AT is increased. It's hard to let.
Here, various specifications have been proposed that realize a low base and increase the net increase during AT.
In such a low-base and AT medium-high net increase spec, what kind of test signal is output becomes a problem.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to output an appropriate test signal even with a low base and AT medium / high net increase specifications.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 18 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
A game in which the winning information of the special role (1BB) is carried over and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role can be stopped and displayed (the character condition device number is "1", and the winning and replay condition device numbers are "0". ”)
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied (main game state "3" and AT standby counter "0"), a test signal (""" includes operation information of the stop switch that can stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination. It is possible to execute the process for outputting 0,16,7,2 ").
If the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, the process for outputting the test signal (“0,6,127,127”) including the operation information of the stop switch that does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be executed. The feature is that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 18 According to the initial invention, a test signal capable of stopping and displaying a symbol combination corresponding to a special combination can be output when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and special when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Since it is possible to output a test signal that does not stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the combination, it is the same as the player (market) in a game machine having specifications that guide the player to a special game when the notification game state (AT) is executed. It is possible to carry out a test in a different way.

19. Initial invention 19
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 19 The initial invention relates to a game machine that prevents erroneous winning of a special role.
Conventionally, a game machine that executes non-AT and AT in a state inside the MB has been known. In this case, in order to avoid winning the MB that has carried over the winning, it is known to notify the target symbol for avoiding the winning of the MB (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147537).
However, there is a problem that the above notification may mislead the player. In addition, even if the MB is tempted and then notified, if the time between the second stop and the third stop of the stop switch is short, the notification may not be in time and the MB may win a prize.
The problem that the invention initially tries to solve is to prevent erroneous winning of a special role when the winning is carried over and the special role to avoid winning is tempted.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 19 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed.
In a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination can be stopped and displayed, it is special in a situation where a predetermined reel (third reel 31) is rotating and other reels (first and second reels 31) are stopped. When the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the combination are stopped and displayed (so-called special combination is tempai), the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until the waiting time elapses). It is characterized in that the predetermined reel is not stopped even if the stop switch corresponding to the reel is operated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 19 According to the initial invention, the predetermined reel does not stop even if the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated until the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that erroneous winning of a special role is prevented. be able to.

20. Initial invention 20
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 20 Same as the original invention 19.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 20 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
When the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (1BB) is stopped and displayed, the special game (1BB game) can be executed.
In the special game, the notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42) can be executed.
In a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role can be stopped and displayed, the stop switch corresponding to a reel other than the predetermined reel (third reel 31) is operated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role can be stopped and displayed. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied (when the standby time has not elapsed) in the case of (so-called special role tempai), the stop switch corresponding to the reel other than the predetermined reel is operated. From the subsequent predetermined timing (initially when the standby time is saved in step S810 in FIG. 147) to at least one rotation of the predetermined reel (at least 750.624 ms from the time of step S810 (one rotation time of the reel 31). ) Elapses, the feature is that the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is not stopped even if the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated.
(C) Effect of the original invention 20 Same as the original invention 19.

21. Initial invention 21
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 21 The initial invention makes it possible to realize a ceiling function in a game machine provided with an advantageous section.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a ceiling counter and counting the number of games elapsed without shifting to an AT (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061760).
However, the advantageous section may end while the number of games is being counted by the ceiling counter. Here, since the ceiling counter is data related to the instruction function, it is considered that the ceiling counter is the target of the data to be cleared when the advantageous section ends. Therefore, there is a problem that the ceiling counter is cleared when the advantageous section ends while the number of games is being counted by the ceiling counter.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to realize the ceiling function even when an advantageous section is provided.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 21 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
The first lottery state (RT1) and the second lottery state (non-RT),
It is equipped with an advantageous section that can execute a notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation information of the stop switch.
When the number of games in the first lottery state satisfies a predetermined condition (when 1400 games are reached), it is possible to shift to the second lottery state.
In the first lottery state which is an advantageous section, if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the first lottery state which is a non-advantageous section.
Even when the first lottery state, which is an advantageous section, is changed to the first lottery state, which is a non-advantageous section, the number of games played in the first lottery state is continuously counted.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 21 According to the initial invention, the number of games in the first lottery state is still counted even if the advantageous section ends in the middle, so that the number of games in the first lottery state is used as the basis. It is possible to provide a ceiling function.

22. Initial invention 22
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 22 The initial invention relates to a game machine capable of executing a reel effect.
Conventionally, a gaming machine that performs a reel effect of temporarily stopping a reel in a simulated game has been known (for example, Japanese Patent No. 5709176).
However, the simulated game in the prior art is a reel production based on the operation of the stop switch by the player.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to execute the reel effect without being based on the operation of the stop switch by the player, and to give the reel stop timing regularity.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention 22 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
Each reel (31) is stopped at a predetermined stop scheduled position, and a reel effect (standby effect) for stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol combination can be executed (standby effect start (M_TARPIC_EXE)).
When executing the reel effect, information on the scheduled stop position (information on the reel effect data table (TBL_TARPIC_DAT)) and a timer value until the reel can be stopped (reel effect execution timer table (TBL_TARPIC_TM #)) are executed for each reel. ) Information) can be stored
Even when the predetermined reel can be stopped at the scheduled stop position during the execution of the reel effect, the timer value corresponding to the predetermined reel is a value that enables the predetermined reel to be stopped. When it is not set to, it is characterized in that the predetermined reel is not stopped.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 22 According to the initial invention, it is possible to give regularity to the timing at which each reel stops by a simple method in the reel production.

23. Initial invention 23
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 23 The initial invention relates to a game machine that outputs information on prevention of entanglement.
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that outputs information on prevention of entanglement when the AT is terminated (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6288357).
However, the conventional output of information on entanglement prevention has been uniform.
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to properly output information on prevention of entanglement.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 23 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
It is possible to execute the notification game state (AT) that can notify the operation information (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42).
When it is determined that a plurality of sets of notified game states can be executed, there is a case where it is notified that the next set of notified game states will be executed during the execution of one set of notified game states.
In a situation where multiple sets of notified game states can be executed, if it is notified that the next set of notified game states will be executed during the execution of one set of notified game states, one set of notified game states will be executed. After executing the state and before executing the notification game state of the next set, the information regarding the prevention of entanglement is not output (in FIG. 160, “Yes” in step S975).
In a situation where multiple sets of notified game states can be executed, if it is not notified that the next set of notified game states will be executed during the execution of one set of notified game states, one set of notified game states will be executed. After executing the notification game state, before the next set of notification game states are executed, it is possible to output information related to prevention of entanglement (in FIG. 160, if "No" in step S975, step S978 is executed. To do)
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 23 According to the initial invention, the output of information on prevention of entanglement can be made to correspond to the content of notification in one set of notification game states. In addition, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether or not the next set of notification game states is executed depending on whether or not the information regarding the prevention of entanglement is output.

24. Initial invention 24
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 24 The initial invention relates to a game machine capable of outputting a subsequent effect based on the operation of a stop switch.
In the prior art, when transmitting an effect message from a control device to an effect device, it is known to include a message with a delay function that delays the execution of the effect message after a set time has elapsed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-042759). Issue).
In the prior art, when the effect is delayed at the time of the third stop, it is necessary to send a command indicating the delay at the time of the third stop.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to delay the output timing of the effect without transmitting a command indicating a delay at the time of the third stop.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 24 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
The timer value from the predetermined timing after the predetermined switch (start switch 41) is operated can be stored (step S993 in FIG. 161).
In a game that outputs a specific effect (the end of the effect), when the timer value reaches a predetermined value when the last operated stop switch is turned from on to off (“Yes” in step S995). When) makes it possible to output a specific effect when the last operated stop switch is turned from on to off.
In a game that outputs a specific effect, if the timer value is not the predetermined value when the last operated stop switch is turned from on to off, the timer value becomes the predetermined value at the timing (step). It is characterized in that a specific effect can be output (when "Yes" is set in S995).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 24 According to the initial invention, it is possible to delay the timing of outputting a specific effect. In addition, a player who does not want to output a specific effect immediately can delay the output timing of the specific effect by his / her own will.

25. Initial invention 25
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 25 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine in which the output volume can be set.
In the prior art, it is known that the manager (store side) sets a standard for the volume of the effect, and the player can set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). ..
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, the volume is often set to be high on the store side, and in this case, even if the player sets the volume to a low level, the volume should be reduced to the extent desired by the player. There is a problem that it cannot be done.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to enable a player who desires a low volume to reduce the volume regardless of the setting on the store side.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 25 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
As a mode for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162 (A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162 (B)) are provided.
The first volume setting mode can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on / off, when the setting is changed, or when the setting is confirmed).
The second volume setting mode can be executed by the player and
It is configured so that the output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode.
A predetermined production sound (for example, start) that is output when a predetermined volume (for example, "loud") is set in the first volume setting mode and is set to the minimum volume (volume 1) in the second volume setting mode. In the volume (“20” in FIG. 162 (C)) of the operation sound of the switch 41, the operation sound of the stop switch 42, the tempai sound, the winning sound of the role, the GBM during AT, etc., and the first volume setting mode. With the volume of the predetermined production sound (“20” in FIG. 162 (C)) that is output when the specific volume (for example, “low”) is set and the minimum volume is set in the second volume setting mode. Is characterized by being substantially the same.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 25 According to the initial invention, the volume is set in the second volume setting mode depending on whether the volume is set to a predetermined volume or a specific volume in the first volume setting mode. If it is set to the minimum volume, a predetermined effect sound is output at substantially the same volume. As a result, the volume can be set to the minimum volume in the second volume setting mode without being affected by the volume setting in the first volume setting mode.

26. Initial invention 26
The original invention relates to a gaming machine in which the output volume can be set.
In the prior art, it is known that the manager (store side) sets a standard for the volume of the effect, and the player can set the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074301). ..
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, since it is not possible to grasp the specific volume on the volume setting screen, the administrator may try the game after setting the volume. It was necessary.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to be able to know a concrete guideline of how loud the volume is when setting the volume.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 26 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (23rd embodiment) is
As a mode for setting the volume, a first volume setting mode (administrator mode in FIG. 162 (A)) and a second volume setting mode (player mode in FIG. 162 (B)) are provided.
The first volume setting mode can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on / off, when the setting is changed, or when the setting is confirmed).
The second volume setting mode can be executed by the player and
It is configured so that the output volume is determined based on the volume set in the first volume setting mode and the volume set in the second volume setting mode.
In the first volume setting mode, icons corresponding to multiple selectable volume levels are displayed as images, and when any icon is selected, a predetermined sound can be output at the volume corresponding to the selected icon. It is characterized by doing.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 26 According to the initial invention, when the volume is set in the first volume setting mode, it is possible to grasp a guideline of how loud the set volume is.

27. Original invention 27
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 27 The initial invention relates to a game machine that executes a predetermined command by a program.
It is known that a conventional game machine is composed of a plurality of modules (processes) in order to execute game control (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-104160).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, there is a complicated point about the instructions constituting the module, and there is room for improvement.
The problem that the invention initially seeks to solve is to simplify the instructions.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 27 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
It has a plurality of storage areas (RWM53) capable of storing data based on the execution of a program, and has a plurality of storage areas (RWM53).
As a program instruction
The value of the reference address is stored in a predetermined register (HL register), and
A specific instruction (CLRHL) capable of executing a process of storing "0" in the storage area from the storage area corresponding to the reference address stored in the predetermined register to the storage area up to the "n (n is an integer)" address. Has HL), n)
Even after executing the specific instruction, the value of the reference address is stored in the predetermined register.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 27 According to the original invention, it is possible to clear all the specified ranges (store "0") with one instruction.
Further, even after the value of the reference address is stored in a predetermined register and a specific instruction is executed, the value of the predetermined register does not change (the value of the reference address is stored). As a result, the value of the reference address can be read based on the value stored in the predetermined register even after the end of the specific instruction. Therefore, for example, a process of re-memorizing the value of the reference address in the predetermined register. Is not required, and the processing can be simplified.

28. Original invention 28
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 28 Same as the original invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 28 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (24th embodiment) is
It has a storage means (RWM53) having a stack area, and has
Main processing (for example, FIG. 41) and interrupt processing (for example, FIG. 53) executed at a predetermined cycle can be executed.
As a program instruction
A predetermined value stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) is compared with "n (n is an integer)" (for example, "n" is subtracted from the A register value), and the carry is performed by the comparison operation. When the flag becomes "1", a specific instruction ("RCP C, A, n" that can execute a process that enables the program corresponding to the address based on the information stored in the stack area to be executed can be executed. ”)
It is characterized in that interrupt processing is permitted after the end of the specific instruction even when the predetermined cycle of interrupt processing arrives during the execution of the specific instruction.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 28 According to the original invention, interrupt processing is not executed during execution of a specific instruction. Therefore, the value of the carry flag corresponding to the operation by the specific instruction is the operation executed by the interrupt processing. Does not change. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the carry flag from being corrupted by interrupt processing and execute correct processing.

29. Initial invention 29
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 29 The initial invention relates to a method for specifying a stop symbol combination on an effective line.
In a conventional game machine, even if an abnormality occurs after the stop switch operation is accepted and an unintended symbol combination stops on the effective line, the payout process is executed based on the stop switch operation. (For example, Japanese Patent No. 6229810).
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to more appropriately identify the stop symbol combination.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 29 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
It is equipped with a storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data that can identify the stop symbol combination.
A predetermined initial value (11111111 (B), 000001111 (B), or 000000111 (B)) can be stored in the storage area at a predetermined timing before the stop switch (42) is operated.
Acquired and acquired the stop symbol data (symbol combination data stored in the # reel symbol combination table (TBL_PICCMB_ #)) corresponding to the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effective line in the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch. It is possible to perform a calculation based on the stop symbol data and the data stored in the storage area, and execute a predetermined process for storing the data corresponding to the result of the calculation in the storage area (stop symbol set of FIG. 195). (M_STOPPIC_SET)),
Each time the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel is operated, the predetermined process can be executed, so that the data stored in the storage area can be updated.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 29 According to the initial invention, even if the power is cut off during the game, the stop symbol data until the middle of the game can be retained. In addition, after the stop position was determined and before the symbol stopped, the reel could not be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power failure or a motor drive abnormality (the correct symbol did not stop at the effective line). ) Even in this case, it is possible to execute the payout process by regarding it as having stopped at the correct position. Therefore, there is no disadvantage to the player.

30. Initial invention 30
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 30 Same as the original invention 29.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 30 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
It is equipped with a data table (# reel symbol search table (TBL_PICARG_ #)) that stores data that can identify the stop symbol combination.
Each reel is provided with a storage means (symbol array address buffers 1 to 3 (_BF_PICARG_ADR1 to 3)) capable of storing the address value of the data table.
The address value corresponding to the stop symbol can be stored in the storage means.
Data can be acquired from the data table based on the address value stored in the storage means.
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined operation for specifying a stop symbol combination based on the acquired data.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 30 According to the initial invention, even if the power is cut off during the game, the data regarding the stop symbol until the middle of the game can be retained. In addition, after the stop position was determined and before the symbol stopped, the reel could not be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power failure or a motor drive abnormality (the correct symbol did not stop at the effective line). ) Even in this case, it is possible to execute the payout process by assuming that the reel has stopped at the correct position without squeezing the storage capacity of the RWM. Therefore, there is no disadvantage to the player.

31. Initial invention 31
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 31 Same as the original invention 29.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 31 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (28th embodiment)
The first position on the first reel (eg, "1" in FIG. 230), the second position on the second reel (eg, "5" in FIG. 230), and the third position on the third reel (in FIG. 230, eg, "5"). Having a predetermined valid line (eg, valid line L1) passing through "9")
The first storage area (_WK_PIC_LFT1) that can store the symbol data of the first position, the second storage area (_WK_PIC_CEN2) that can store the symbol data of the second position, and the third storage that can store the symbol data of the third position. With area (_WK_PIC_RIG3)
It is characterized in that it is possible to specify a stop symbol combination of the predetermined effective line based on the symbol data stored in the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 31 According to the initial invention, after the stop position is determined and before the symbol stops, the reel cannot be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power failure, a motor drive abnormality, or the like. Even if the correct symbol does not stop at the effective line, it can be regarded as having stopped at the correct position without squeezing the capacity of the program, and the payout process can be executed. Therefore, there is no disadvantage to the player.

32. Initial invention 32
(A) Same as the original invention 29.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 32 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses).
The original invention (28th embodiment)
It has a first effective line (effective line L1) to an N (N> 1) effective line (effective line L5) as an effective line in a predetermined game.
It has a specific storage area (_WK_ALL_PIC) that can store data for identifying stop symbol combinations of all effective lines in a predetermined game, and has a specific storage area (_WK_ALL_PIC).
In a given game
The first data (_WK_PIC_L1) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the first effective line can be calculated.
The Nth data (_WK_PIC_L5) corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the Nth valid line can be calculated.
The first data corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the first effective line to the Nth data corresponding to the stop symbol combination of the Nth effective line are combined by a predetermined operation (logical sum), and the combined data is stored in the specific storage area. It is characterized by being memorable.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 32 According to the original invention, after the stop position is determined and before the symbol stops, the reel cannot be stopped at the correct position due to an abnormality due to a power failure, a motor drive abnormality, or the like. Even if the correct symbol does not stop at the effective line, it can be regarded as having stopped at the correct position without squeezing the capacity of the program, and the payout process can be executed. Therefore, there is no disadvantage to the player.
Further, since the winning determination is performed based on the specific storage area instead of performing the winning determination for each valid line, the number of payouts can be determined collectively.

33. Initial invention 33
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 33 The initial invention relates to a data table for acquiring symbol data of symbols on an effective line.
In a conventional game machine, it is known to store a symbol sequence in order to identify a symbol on an effective line (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-039456).
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to more appropriately acquire the symbol data of the symbol on the effective line.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 33 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (Example 1 (or 25th embodiment) of the 27th embodiment) is
At least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31) are provided as reels.
The position of the effective line of the predetermined reel (upper stage) and the position of the effective line of the specific reel (middle stage) are positions that do not match on the horizontal line.
A predetermined data table (in FIG. 228 (B), a symbol arrangement table of the left reel) storing the symbol data of the predetermined reel and a specific data table (in FIG. 228 (B), middle) storing the symbol data of the specific reel. Equipped with a reel pattern arrangement table)
In the predetermined data table, the symbol data corresponding to the symbol number X (symbol number 2) is stored in the start address (1000 (H)) in which the symbol data is stored.
In the specific data table, the start address (1100 (H)) that stores the symbol data is characterized in that the symbol data corresponding to the symbol number Y (Y ≠ X) (symbol number 1) is stored. ..

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 33 According to the initial invention, the symbol data on the effective line can be acquired by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.

34. Original invention 34
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 34 Same as the original invention 33.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 34 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (Example 1 (or 25th embodiment) of the 27th embodiment) is
The first position (lower left) that is the reference position of the predetermined reel (left reel 31) and the second position (the second position) that is the symbol position on at least one effective line of the predetermined reel are different from the first position. ) (Upper left)
A data table (symbol arrangement table of FIG. 228 (B)) for storing symbol data is provided.
In the game in which the symbol of the predetermined symbol number (No. 0) of the predetermined reel stops at the first position, the symbol data of the symbol that stops at the second position based on the predetermined symbol number and the data table ( The feature is that the symbol data of symbol number 2) can be acquired.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 34 According to the initial invention, the symbol data on the effective line can be acquired by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, since a reference position (reference line) is set separately from the effective line and the symbol on the effective line is specified based on this reference position, even if the effective line is changed, the change can be easily dealt with. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be modified simply.

35. Initial invention 35
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 35 Same as the original invention 33.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 35 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
Initially, the invention of claim 1 (Example 1 of the 27th embodiment) is
At least a predetermined reel (right reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31) are provided as reels.
A first position (lower right) that is a reference position of the predetermined reel and is a symbol position on at least one effective line of the predetermined reel.
The second position (the second position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle and lower), which is the reference position of the specific reel, and the symbol on at least one effective line of the specific reel. It has a third position (third position ≠ second position) (middle and middle), which is the position.
A predetermined data table (in FIG. 228 (B), a symbol arrangement table of the right reel) storing the symbol data of the predetermined reel and a specific data table (in FIG. 228, the symbol of the middle reel) storing the symbol data of the specific reel. With an array table)
In the predetermined data table, the symbol data of the symbol number X (0) is stored in the start address in which the symbol data is stored.
In the specific data table, the symbol data of the symbol number Y (Y ≠ X) (No. 1) is stored in the start address in which the symbol data is stored.
In the game in which the symbol of the specific symbol number of the specific reel stops at the second position, the symbol of the symbol that stops at the third position of the specific reel based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table. It is characterized by making it possible to acquire data.
Initially, the invention of claim 2 is
At least a predetermined reel (left reel 31) and a specific reel (middle reel 31) are provided as reels.
A first position (lower left) that serves as a reference position for the predetermined reel and a second position (the second position may be the same as the first position) that serves as a symbol position on at least one effective line of the predetermined reel. Has (upper left) and
The third position (the third position and the first position are located on the same horizontal line) (middle and lower rows), which is the reference position of the specific reel, and the symbol on at least one effective line of the specific reel. It has a fourth position (fourth position ≠ third position) (middle and middle), which is the position.
A predetermined data table (in FIG. 228 (B), a symbol arrangement table of the left reel) storing the symbol data of the predetermined reel and a specific data table (in FIG. 228 (B), middle) storing the symbol data of the specific reel. Equipped with a reel pattern arrangement table)
In the predetermined data table, the symbol data of the symbol number X (No. 2) is stored in the start address (1000 (H)) in which the symbol data is stored.
In the specific data table, the symbol data of the symbol number Y (Y ≠ X) (No. 1) is stored in the start address (1100 (H)) in which the symbol data is stored.
In the game in which the symbol of the predetermined symbol number (0) of the predetermined reel is stopped at the first position, the symbol is stopped at the second position of the predetermined reel based on the predetermined symbol number and the predetermined data table. It is possible to acquire the symbol data of the symbol (design number 2 symbol data).
In the game in which the symbol of the specific symbol number (No. 0) of the specific reel stops at the third position, the symbol stops at the fourth position of the specific reel based on the specific symbol number and the specific data table. It is characterized in that it is possible to acquire the symbol data (the symbol data of the symbol number 1) of the symbol.

(C) Effect of the original invention 35 Same as the original invention 34.

36. Initial invention 36
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 36 Same as the original invention 33.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 36 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (Example 2 of the 27th embodiment)
The first position (upper right stage) which is the reference position of the predetermined reel (right reel 31) and the second position (the second position) which is the symbol position on at least one effective line of the predetermined reel is different from the first position. ) (Lower right)
A storage means (ROM 54 or RWM 53) that stores or can store information (difference data) for specifying the second position of the predetermined reel from the first position of the predetermined reel.
It is equipped with a data table (Fig. 229 (B)) that stores symbol data.
Based on the first position of the predetermined reel, the information of the storage means, and the data table, it is possible to acquire the symbol data of the symbol that will stop at the second position of the predetermined reel.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 36 According to the initial invention, symbol data on an effective line can be acquired by a simple method without performing complicated calculations.
In addition, since a reference position (reference line) is set separately from the effective line and the symbol on the effective line is specified based on this reference position, even if the effective line is changed, the change can be easily dealt with. be able to. In other words, data and programs can be modified simply.
Furthermore, even if the effective line is changed, it is sufficient to change only the data of the storage means without changing the data table.

37. Initial invention 37
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 37 The initial invention relates to a method for determining the number of game media to be provided corresponding to a combination of stop symbols on an effective line.
In a conventional game machine, there is known a method of determining the number of payouts using a payout table when a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination is stopped on an effective line (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-130066). ).
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to more appropriately determine the number of game media to be provided corresponding to the stop symbol combination on the effective line.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 37 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
It is provided with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying a stop symbol combination.
The data stored in the predetermined storage area and the data for determining whether or not the symbol combination for which the game value "X" is given is stopped (the payout number table (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 195) is stored. It is possible to execute a predetermined operation (process shown in FIG. 200) based on the data).
Based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation, it is possible to determine whether or not to give the game value "X" (for example, 15 cards).
When it is not decided to give the game value "X" based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation (in FIG. 201, all the bits of the stop symbol data (fifth group) and the stop symbol data (sixth group). ), As a result of inspecting the D0 to D3 bits, the result is "No" in step S1118), the data stored in the predetermined storage area and the game value "Y" (Y ≠ X) (3 sheets). ) Is added to the symbol combination, and the predetermined calculation can be executed based on the data for determining whether or not the combination is stopped.
It is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not to give the game value "Y" based on the calculation result of the predetermined calculation.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 37 According to the initial invention, the number of payouts is searched in order based on the number of payouts, so that the number of payouts can be specified by a simple method.

38. Initial invention 38
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 38 Same as the original invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 38 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (25th embodiment) is
Predetermined storage areas (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying the stop symbol combination,
It is equipped with a number of grants table (the number of payout tables (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIG. 193) that stores data that can specify the number of game values to be granted.
The granting number table stores at least collation data (designated data) for collating with data for specifying the stopped symbol combination and data for the number of granting game values (acquired data).
In a situation where predetermined data is stored in the predetermined storage area, it is possible to determine the number of game values to be granted based on the predetermined data and the collation data stored in the grant number table. To do.

(C) Effect of the original invention 38 Same as the original invention 37.

39. Original invention 39
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 39 Same as the original invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 39 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
Initially, the invention of claim 1 (25th embodiment) is
It is provided with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying a stop symbol combination.
As a symbol combination for giving the game value "X" (15 sheets), there are a plurality of symbol combinations (symbol combinations of small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 12).
As a symbol combination that gives the game value "Y" (3 cards), it has at least one symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of small winning combination 13).
Among the predetermined storage areas, the data storage areas (bits or addresses) for specifying the symbol combination to which the game value "X" is given are continuous.
Among the predetermined storage areas, there is a data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "Y" among a plurality of data storage areas for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "X". Don't
It is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not the symbol combination to which the game value "X" is given is stopped after it is determined whether or not the symbol combination to which the game value "X" is given is stopped.

Initially, the invention of claim 2 (25th embodiment) is
It is provided with a predetermined storage area (stop symbol data (1st group) to (9th group) (_WK_STOP_PIC1 to 9)) that can store data for specifying a stop symbol combination.
As a symbol combination for giving the game value "X" (15 sheets), there are a plurality of symbol combinations (symbol combinations of small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 12).
As a symbol combination that gives the game value "Y" (3 cards), it has at least one symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination of small winning combination 13).
Among the predetermined storage areas, the data storage areas (bits or addresses) for specifying the symbol combination to which the game value "X" is given are continuous.
Among the predetermined storage areas, there is a data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "Y" among a plurality of data storage areas for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "X". Don't
It is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not the symbol combination that gives the game value "X" is stopped after determining whether or not the symbol combination that gives the game value "Y" is stopped.

When the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value" X "" is in bit units as in the 25th embodiment, the "design combination to be given the game value" X "is used. The data storage area for identification is continuous. ”For example, in the stopped symbol data (group 5), 15 cards are paid from the D0 bit corresponding to the small winning combination 01 winning symbol that pays out 15 cards. It is shown that up to the D7 bit corresponding to the small winning combination 08 winning symbol to be issued is continuous.
Further, the data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "Y" does not exist between the plurality of data storage areas for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "X". In the stop symbol data (group 5), between the D0 bit corresponding to the small winning combination 01 winning symbol that pays out 15 cards and the D7 bit corresponding to the small winning combination 08 winning symbol that pays out 15 cards. Indicates that there is no bit corresponding to the small winning combination winning symbol that pays out three or one.

On the other hand, when the "data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to which the game value" X "is given" is in the address unit, as shown in the above-described modification, as shown in the above-mentioned modification.
Stop symbol data (5th group): Small winning combination 01 winning symbol ~ Small winning combination 08 winning symbol (15 payouts)
Stop symbol data (6th group): Small winning combination 09 winning symbol ~ Small winning combination 12 winning symbol (15 payouts)
Stop symbol data (7th group): 13 small wins to 20 small wins (3 payouts)
Stop symbol data (8th group): Small win 21 winning symbols to small winning 24 winning symbols (3 payouts)
Stop symbol data (Group 9): Small win 25 winning symbols to small winning 32 winning symbols (1 payout)
Stop symbol data (10th group): Small winning 33 winning symbols to small winning 34 winning symbols (1 payout)
It corresponds to the case where each payout has a separate address.
In this case, "the data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to which the game value" X "is given is continuous" means, for example, the stop symbol data (group 5) and the stop symbol for paying out 15 sheets. Indicates that the addresses of the data (sixth group) are continuous.
Further, the data storage area for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "Y" does not exist between the plurality of data storage areas for specifying the symbol combination to be given the game value "X". "" Means the address of the stop symbol data (7th group) to the stop symbol data (between the address of the stop symbol data (5th group) and the address of the stop symbol data (6th group) for paying out 15 sheets. It indicates that the address of the 10th group) does not exist.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 39 According to the initial invention, predetermined operations can be executed in the order of the addresses of the predetermined storage areas, and the program can be simplified.

40. Initial invention 40
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 40 Same as the original invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 40 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (26th embodiment) is
It is provided with a number of grant tables (table of number of payouts (TBL_WIN_CTL) in FIGS. 220 and 221) for determining the number of game values to be granted.
Predetermined data can be generated based on the stop symbol combination,
The address of the given number table can be specified based on the bit position which is a predetermined value in the predetermined data (steps S1189 to S1192 in FIG. 227).
The number of grants can be determined based on the data stored in the address of the number of grants table (steps S1192 and S1193 in FIG. 227).
It is characterized by that.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 40 According to the initial invention, since only the bits corresponding to the winning are set to predetermined values, the number of payouts can be specified by a simple method.

41. Initial invention 41
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 41 The initial invention relates to a game machine that uses a stepping motor as a motor for rotating a reel.
In a conventional game machine, a stepping motor is used as a motor for rotating a reel, and when the reel is stopped, a four-phase excitation output is output to the stepping motor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-016110). Issue).
Here, in a conventional game machine, it is common to use a DC motor (DC motor) as a hopper motor for rotating the hopper disc.
However, since the DC motor requires a relatively large current when driven, if the game medium can be applied while the stepping motor is being subjected to the 4-phase excitation output, the drive control of the hopper accompanying the application of the game medium can be performed. There is a possibility that the required current cannot be secured.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to make it possible to secure the current required for the drive control of the hopper accompanying the application of the game medium.

(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 41 (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses.)
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
When the number of credits is the upper limit ("50"), a predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and 15 cards are obtained. Either the small winning combination 01 to be paid out or the small winning combination 13 to 17 to be paid out of 3 can be won), and "N-1" (2) reels are stopped. The operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" th (third) reel is accepted, and the game medium (medal) is given to the specific symbol combination (for example, a small payout of three reels). In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the combination 13) is stopped and displayed, the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period has elapsed, the drive signal of the hopper (35) has passed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Enables execution of drive signal output processing to output
When the number of credits is "0", the predetermined lottery result is obtained, and in a situation where the "N-1" reel is stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is operated. Is accepted and the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted in the game in which the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and then the excitation for stopping the "N" th reel is received. Even if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for output elapses, the number of credits is added after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is characterized in that processing can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 41 According to the initial invention, the drive signal of the hopper can be output after a predetermined period of time for exciting output for stopping the reel has elapsed, so that the drive of the hopper is driven by the application of the game medium. The current required for control can be secured.
Further, when the number of credits is the upper limit and the hopper is driven to grant the game medium, and when the number of credits is "0" and the number of credits is added to grant the game medium, the reels It can be a common process until a predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the is elapsed. As a result, the processing can be simplified, and the amount of ROM used by the program can be reduced.

42. Initial invention 42
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 42 Same as the original invention 41.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 42 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 or 3 cards are paid out. (Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and in the situation where the "N-2" (1) reel is stopped, the "N-1" (2nd) reel When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" th reel (third reel) is accepted at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping has elapsed. Also, it is possible to execute the control to stop the "N" th reel,
When the predetermined lottery result is obtained and the "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted, and the game medium (medal) In a game in which the specific symbol combination to be assigned (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out three cards) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted. After that, when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel has elapsed. However, after the elapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the control of granting the game medium.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 42 According to the initial invention, it is possible to execute the control of applying the game medium after a predetermined period of time for performing the excitation output for stopping the reel, so that the hopper accompanying the application of the game medium can be executed. It is possible to secure the current required for the drive control of.
Further, since the control for stopping the "N-1" reel can be executed even before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N-1" reel has elapsed. , The game can proceed smoothly.

43. Initial invention 43
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 43 Same as the original invention 41.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 43 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (29th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 or 3 cards are paid out. (Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and in the situation where the "N-2" (1) reel is stopped, the "N-1" (2nd) reel When the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" th reel (third reel) is accepted at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping has elapsed. Also, it is possible to execute the control to stop the "N" th reel,
When the predetermined lottery result is obtained and the "N-1" reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted, and the game medium (medal) In a game in which the specific symbol combination to be assigned (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out of 3 cards) is stopped and displayed, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted. After that, when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at a predetermined timing before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel has elapsed. However, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the control of giving the game medium can be executed.
It is characterized in that the maximum value of the current required for the excitation output for stopping the reel is designed to be smaller than the maximum value of the current required for driving the hopper.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 43 According to the initial invention, it is possible to execute the control of applying the game medium after a predetermined period of time for performing the excitation output for stopping the reel, so that the hopper accompanying the application of the game medium can be executed. It is possible to secure the current required for the drive control of.
Further, since the control for stopping the "N-1" reel can be executed even before the predetermined period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N-1" reel has elapsed. , The game can proceed smoothly.
Furthermore, since it is designed so that the maximum value of the current required for the excitation output to stop the reels is smaller than the maximum value of the current required to drive the hopper, stop control of multiple reels can be executed at the same time. Can be.

44. Original invention 44
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 44 Same as the original invention 41.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 44 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (30th embodiment) is
"N" (3) reels (31) and
A storage means (RWM53 # reel management timer (_WK_RL # _TIME)) that can store information (data of "0 to 108 (D)") for measuring the period for performing excitation output for stopping the reel (FIG. 237). ) And
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 or 3 cards are paid out. Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and in the situation where the "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (3rd) reel. In a game in which the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and the specific symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out of 3 reels) for which the game medium (medal) is given is stopped and displayed. , At a predetermined timing after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted and before the period for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel has elapsed. , Even when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released ("No" in step S1314 of FIG. 238), the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined value ("0"). ) (“Yes” in step S1342 of FIG. 241), the control of granting the game medium (payment of medals at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 238) can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 44 According to the initial invention, a storage means capable of storing information for measuring a period during which an excitation output for stopping a reel is performed is provided, and the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined value. Since the control for applying the game medium can be executed after the above, the current required for the drive control of the hopper accompanying the application of the game medium can be secured.
Further, based on the information stored in the storage means, it can be easily determined that the period for performing the excitation output for stopping the reel has elapsed.

45. Initial invention 45
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 45 Same as the original invention 41.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 45 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (31st embodiment) is
"N" (3) reels (31) and
It is equipped with a storage means (RWM53 # reel motor signal data (_PT_MOTOR #) (FIG. 134)) that can store information on the excitation output of the motor related to the reel.
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 or 3 cards are paid out. Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and in the situation where the "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (3rd) reel. In a game in which the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and the specific symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out of 3 cards) for which the game medium (medal) is given is stopped and displayed. , Information indicating that the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is performed after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted (deceleration pulse data ". 0001111 (B) ”(4 phase on)) is stored in the storage means (“Yes” in step S1355 of FIG. 242), and the stop switch corresponding to the “N” th reel is released ( In the case of step S1354 of FIG. 242 (“No”), the control of granting the game medium (payment of medals at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 242) is not executed, and the information stored in the storage means is predetermined information. It is characterized in that the control of adding the game medium can be executed after the (stop pulse data “00000000000 (B)”) is reached (“No” in step S1355 of FIG. 242).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 45 According to the initial invention, the storage means is provided with a storage means capable of storing information on the excitation output of the motor related to the reel, and the information indicating that the excitation output for stopping the reel is performed is the storage means. When the information is stored in the game, the control for granting the game medium is not executed, and the control for granting the game medium can be executed after the information stored in the storage means becomes predetermined information. It is possible to secure the current required for the drive control of the hopper when the medium is applied.
Further, based on the information stored in the storage means, it can be easily determined that the period for performing the excitation output for stopping the reel has elapsed.

46. Initial invention 46
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 46 Same as the original invention 41.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 46 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (31st embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 or 3 cards are paid out. Any of the small wins 13 to 17 can be won), and in the situation where the "N-1" (2) reels are stopped, it corresponds to the "N" (3rd) reel. In a game in which the operation of the stop switch (42) is accepted and the specific symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 13 to be paid out three cards) for which the game medium (medal) is given is stopped and displayed. , After the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released ("No" in step S1354 of FIG. 242), and the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is performed. Even under such circumstances (“Yes” in step S1355 of FIG. 242), the number of game media to be granted can be determined (display determination in step S291 of FIG. 242), and after the number of game media to be granted is determined. Then, after the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is completed ("No" in step S1355 of FIG. 242), the control of granting the game medium (medal at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 242). It is characterized by making payout) feasible.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 46 According to the initial invention, it is possible to execute control for applying the game medium after the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is completed, so that the game medium is applied. It is possible to secure the current required for the drive control of the hopper.
Further, if the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released, the number of game media to be given is increased even in the situation where the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is performed. Is possible, so that the time from when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released until the control for applying the game medium is executed can be shortened.

47. Initial invention 47
(A) Problem to be Solved by Initial Invention 47 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that gives a gaming medium when a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
In a conventional game machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (neither stop switch is operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known that when it is determined that the game medium is present, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination to be given the game medium is stopped and displayed (winning determination) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
However, if the winning determination is made after all the stop switches are released, the winning determination processing is delayed when the player continues to operate the stop switches corresponding to the reels that stop last.
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is to shorten the time from the reception of the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel to the determination of the number of game media to be granted, and then to the game medium. It is to enable smooth execution of granting.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention 47 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (32nd embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
A predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "10" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the small winning combination A1 condition device is activated, and the small winning combination 01 or 3 cards are paid out. A specific symbol combination (medal) is given by operating the stop switch (42) in a predetermined operation mode (correct answer pressing order) with any of the small wins 13 to 17 being able to win a prize). For example, in a game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination 01, which is the payout of 15 cards, is displayed as a stop, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th (third) reel is accepted, and the stop is stopped. Even in a situation where the switch operation is being accepted, the number of game media to be granted can be determined (display determination in step S291 of FIG. 244), and after the number of game media to be granted is determined, When it is determined whether or not a predetermined switch including the stop switch corresponding to at least the "N" th reel is operated, and it is determined that the predetermined switch is not operated (in step S1362 of FIG. 244, ". No. ”) is characterized in that the control of granting the game medium (payment of medals at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 244) can be executed.
In addition, the initial invention was
Equipped with "N" reels
A stop corresponding to the "N" th reel in a game in which a predetermined lottery result is obtained and the stop switch is operated in a predetermined operation mode to stop and display a specific symbol combination to which a game medium is assigned. Even in a situation where the operation of the switch is accepted and the operation of the stop switch is accepted, the number of game media to be granted can be determined, and after the number of game media to be granted is determined, " It is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the N "th reel is operated, and if it is determined that the stop switch is not operated, it is possible to execute control for granting a game medium.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 47 According to the initial invention, the number of game media to be provided can be determined even if the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel continues to be accepted. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time from the reception of the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel to the determination of the number of game media to be granted, and the subsequent grant of game media can be smoothly executed. be able to.
Further, after determining the number of game media to be granted, it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is operated, and if it is determined that the stop switch is not operated, the control to grant the game media is controlled. Since it is possible to execute the game medium, it is possible to execute the addition of the game medium at a timing desired by the player.

48. Initial invention 48
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 48 Same as the original invention 41.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 48 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (33rd embodiment)
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
In the game in which the predetermined lottery result is obtained (for example, the winning number "7" is won by the winning combination lottery means 61, and the "1BB + cherry" condition device corresponding to the winning number "7" is activated), "N-1". In a situation where two (two) reels are stopped, the operation of the stop switch (42) corresponding to the "N" th (third) reel is accepted, and a specific symbol combination (for example, cherry) is accepted. When the "cherry"-"ANY"-"ANY" symbol combination corresponding to (1 piece combination) is displayed as a stop, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted. Even under the situation where the state continues, after the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is completed ("No" in step S1413 of FIG. 251), the game medium (medal) is inserted. The control to be given (the payout of the medal at the time of winning in step S294 of FIG. 251) can be executed, and the control to give the game medium is executed when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted. If it continues even after this, after the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released ("No" in step S1415 of FIG. 251), a predetermined effect regarding the game result is output. It is characterized by having a case (turning on the effect lamp to notify the winning of the 1BB condition device).

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 48 According to the initial invention, it is possible to execute control for applying the game medium after the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is completed, so that the game medium is applied. It is possible to secure the current required for the drive control of the hopper.
Further, when the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released, a predetermined effect related to the game result may be executed. Therefore, the predetermined effect related to the game result is executed at a desired timing of the player. Can be done.

49. Original invention 49
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 49 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine including a plurality of reels and a plurality of stop switches operated by a player when each reel is stopped.
In conventional game machines, when the rotation of all reels reaches a constant speed and the index of all reels is detected, it is known that all reels can be stopped and controlled based on the operation of a stop switch. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to make it possible to determine whether or not the indexes of all reels have been detected by a simple arithmetic process.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Original Invention 49 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with "N" (3) reels (31)
Each reel is equipped with a storage means (# reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) (Fig. 253)) that can store information on the reel drive state.
Using the information stored in each of the storage means, it is possible to execute a predetermined operation (logical product operation of the data stored in the #th reel drive state (_WK_RL # _STS) and "40 (H)").
Even when a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if an index has not yet been detected for any of the reels, a predetermined result (“0” (zero flag is “1”) even if the predetermined calculation is executed. ”)), Try not to
Even if the stop switch (42) is operated, if the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed.
In addition, the initial invention was
Equipped with "N" reels
Each reel is equipped with a storage means that can store information about the driving state of the reels.
Predetermined operations can be executed using the information stored in each of the storage means.
Even when a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, if an index has not yet been detected for any of the reels, the predetermined result is not obtained even if the predetermined calculation is executed.
In a situation where the predetermined result is not obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation, even if the stop switch is operated, the stop control of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is not executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 49 According to the initial invention, it is possible to determine whether or not the indexes of all reels have been detected depending on whether or not the predetermined result is obtained as a result of executing the predetermined calculation. It is possible to determine whether or not the reel stop control based on the operation of the stop switch can be executed by various arithmetic processes.

50. Initial invention 50
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 50 The initial invention relates to a game machine that starts rotation of a reel based on an operation of a start switch.
In a conventional game machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (neither stop switch is operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known that when it is determined that the game medium is present, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination to be given the game medium is stopped and displayed (winning determination) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to execute appropriate control according to the type of other input signals when the operation of the start switch is accepted.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 50 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
When the operation of the start switch is accepted after the number of bets that can execute the game is bet and the operation of the bet switch is accepted (input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of RWM53) ( When the result of the logical product calculation of the data of FIG. 254) and "11011111 (B)" is not "0"), the rotation start control of the reel based on the operation of the start switch is not executed.
If the start switch operation is accepted under the predetermined situation where the setting key switch signal is input after the number of bets that can execute the game has been bet, it is based on the start switch operation. Enables reel rotation start control
When the signal of the setting key switch is input under a specific situation where the number of bets is not bet, it is possible to shift to the mode in which the set value can be confirmed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 50 According to the initial invention, when the operation of the start switch is accepted in the situation where the operation of the bet switch is accepted, the rotation start control of the reel is not executed, so that the bet switch is not executed. It is possible to make the player or the clerk of the hall recognize that an abnormality such as not returning to the original state has occurred due to the deterioration of the.
In addition, when the start switch operation is accepted while the setting key switch signal is being input, the reel rotation start control is executed, but the setting key switch signal is noisy while the game is in progress. Since there is a high possibility, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

51. Initial invention 51
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 51 The initial invention relates to a game machine that stops a reel based on an operation of a stop switch.
In a conventional game machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (neither stop switch is operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known that when it is determined that the game medium is present, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination to be given the game medium is stopped and displayed (winning determination) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to execute appropriate control according to the type of other input signals when the operation of the stop switch is accepted.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 51 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (34th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
When a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed and the operation of the start switch (41) is accepted and the operation of the predetermined stop switch is accepted, the reel based on the operation of the predetermined stop switch is accepted. Since the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (FIG. 254) that does not execute the stop control of (FIG. 254) does not match any of the data in the stop switch determination table (FIG. 255), the result is "No" in step S1435 of FIG. , Do not proceed to step S1437)
When a predetermined stop switch operation is accepted under a predetermined situation in which a plurality of reels rotate at a constant speed and a setting key switch signal is input, a reel based on the predetermined stop switch operation. Stop control can be executed (even if the setting key switch signal is input, the data of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) (Fig. 254) and the data of either the stop switch judgment table (Fig. 255) are If they match, it becomes "Yes" in step S1435 of FIG. 257, and the process proceeds to step S1437).
When the signal of the setting key switch is input under a specific situation where the number of bets is not bet, it is possible to shift to the mode in which the set value can be confirmed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 51 According to the initial invention, when the operation of the start switch is accepted and the operation of the stop switch is accepted, the stop control of the reel is not executed. It is possible to make the player or the clerk of the hall recognize that an abnormality such as not returning to the original state has occurred due to deterioration.
Further, when the operation of the stop switch is accepted in the situation where the signal of the setting key switch is input, the stop control of the reel is executed, but the signal of the setting key switch during the progress of the game is noise. Since there is a high possibility, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted by noise.

52. Original invention 52
(A) Problems to be Solved by Initial Invention 52 The initial invention relates to a gaming machine that stops a reel based on an operation of a stop switch.
In a conventional game machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (neither stop switch is operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known that when it is determined that the game medium is present, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination to be given the game medium is stopped and displayed (winning determination) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the original invention is to execute appropriate control when the operations of a plurality of stop switches are received at the same time.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 52 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
When the operation of the first stop switch (42) and the operation of the second stop switch are accepted at the same time in a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, it corresponds to the first stop switch. The reel stop control can be executed (input port rise data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (Fig. 133)) and the result of the logical product operation of the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (Fig. 173) is used as the offset value, and this is used as the reference address "1100". (H) ”is used as the designated address, and the stop control of the reel 31 is executed based on the data indicated by the designated address in the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (FIG. 259).
In a situation where the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are performed. When they are received at the same time, the reel stop control corresponding to the second stop switch can be executed.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 52 According to the initial invention, when the operation of a plurality of stop switches is received at the same time, the stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

53. Original invention 53
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention 53 Same as the original invention 52.
(B) Means for Solving the Problem of Initial Invention 53 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (35th embodiment) is
Multiple (3) reels (31) and
It is equipped with a predetermined table (stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259)).
When the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are accepted at the same time in a situation where a plurality of reels are rotating at a constant speed, predetermined information is acquired using the predetermined table. The result of the logical product operation of the input port rising data A (_PT_IN_A_UP) (Fig. 133) and the reel stop flag (_FL_STOP_LP) (Fig. 173) was used as the offset value, and this was added to the reference address "1100 (H)". With the result as the specified address, the data indicated by the specified address can be acquired from the stop switch reception table (TBL_STOP_BTN) (Fig. 259), and the stop control of the reel corresponding to the first stop switch can be executed based on the predetermined information. age,
In a situation where the reel corresponding to the first stop switch is stopped and the reel corresponding to the second stop switch is rotating at a constant speed, the operation of the first stop switch and the operation of the second stop switch are performed. When they are received at the same time, the specific information is acquired using the predetermined table, and the stop control of the reel corresponding to the second stop switch can be executed based on the specific information. ..

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 53 According to the initial invention, when the operation of a plurality of stop switches is received at the same time, the stop control of any one reel can be appropriately executed.

54. Original invention 54
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Initial Invention 54 The initial invention relates to a game machine that stops a reel based on an operation of a stop switch.
In a conventional game machine, when all reels are stopped, it is determined whether or not all stop switches are released (neither stop switch is operated), and all stop switches are released. It is known that when it is determined that the game medium is present, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination to be given the game medium is stopped and displayed (winning determination) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-026717).
The problem to be solved by the initial invention is that the stop switch corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated, and then the stop switch corresponding to the specific reel is operated before the predetermined reel is stopped, and the specific reel is stopped first. , To perform appropriate control later when a given reel stops.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the Initial Invention 54 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention (36th embodiment) is
Equipped with multiple (3) reels (31),
The result of the predetermined lottery was obtained (for example, the winning number "25" was won by the winning combination lottery means 61, the 1BB condition device corresponding to the winning number "25" was activated, and the "blue BAR"-"blue BAR" corresponding to 1BB was activated. "-The symbol combination of" blue BAR "can be stopped and displayed on the effective line.) In the game, the stop switch (42) corresponding to the predetermined reel is operated at the first timing, and then the predetermined reel is stopped. Previously, when the stop switch corresponding to the specific reel was operated at the second timing, the predetermined reel may stop after the specific reel stopped.
As a result of the predetermined reel stopping after the specific reel has stopped, when the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination ("blue BAR"-"blue BAR"-"blue BAR") are stopped and displayed in a straight line, the predetermined reel is displayed. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to output a predetermined effect (tempai sound) according to the timing of stopping.

(C) Effect of Initial Invention 54 According to the initial invention, even if the operation order of the stop switch and the stop order of the reels are different, it is possible to output a predetermined effect at an appropriate timing that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. ..

10 slot machine (game machine)
11 Power switch 12 Front door 12a 2nd closed part 12b 3rd closed part 12c Control panel 12d Index 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c 1st closed part 14 Design display device 14a Reel frame 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door Switch 18 Display window 21 Production lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 25 Operation instruction lamp 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 38a Fixed shaft 38b Movable shaft 39a Movable piece 39b Spring 40a 1 Bet switch 40b 3 Bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 42a Stop button 42b Stopper 42c Coil spring 42d Moving piece 42e Detection sensor 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal insertion port 47a Medal guard part 47b Part 48 Shoot passage 49 Shoot sensor 50 Main control board (main control means)
50a screw hole 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
56 Board case (main board case)
57 Top cover 57a Caulking part 57b Gate mark 57c Indentation part 57d Protrusion 57e Protrusion part 58 Lower cover 58a Caulking part 58b Gate mark 58c Boss 61 Role lottery means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Pushing order instruction number selection means 64 Production group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning judgment means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Set value display LED
74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED
77 Advantageous section display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1-bet display LED
79b 2-bet display LED
79c 3-bet display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e input display LED
79f replay display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
86 Electrolytic capacitor 87 Sub-board case 91 Directing output control means 101 Hopper disk 102 Holding part 103 Discharge part 110 Reel base 120 Reel control board 121 Reel board case 130 Passage forming member 131 Upper medal entrance 132 Return medal passage 133 Lower medal entrance 134 Payout medal passage 151 Setting key insertion port 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 500 Pachinko game machine 501 Outer frame 502 Front frame 503 Hing mechanism 504 Game board 505 Glass door 506 Upper plate 507 Lower plate 508 Launch handle 510 Power supply Board 511 Power switch 512 Launch board 513 Launch device 520 Payout control board 521 Key insertion port 522 Door open switch 523 Frame open switch 524 Payout device 525 External terminal board 530 Main control board 530a Hole 531 Special symbol display device 532 Start port 533 Start port Switch 534 Setting key insertion slot 535 Setting key switch 536 Setting change (reset) switch 537 Setting value display LED
538 Management information display LED (performance display monitor)
539a ~ 539h Connector 539b'~ 539h' Connector foot 540 Sub control board 541 Directional lamp 542 Speaker 543 Image display device 550 Board case 560 Upper case 560a Lower edge 561 Cover 562 Crimping part 563a ~ 563g Opening 564 Boss 565 570a Outer edge 571 Side wall 572 Caulking part B to H harness

Claims (1)

Equipped with "N" reels
When the number of credits is the upper limit, the predetermined lottery result is determined, and in the situation where the "N-1" reel is stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is accepted. Then, in a game in which the specific symbol combination to which the game medium is added is stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "specific game") , the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted. In this case, the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel can be executed for a predetermined period, and the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel also elapses for the predetermined period. Can be continued until
In the specific game, after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted, before the predetermined period has elapsed for performing the excitation output for stopping the "N" -th reel When the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at a predetermined timing, the number of game media to be provided can be determined before the predetermined period elapses, and the hopper after the predetermined period elapses. It is possible to output the drive signal of
When the number of credits is "0", the predetermined lottery result is determined, and in a situation where the "N-1" reel is stopped, the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" reel is operated. Is accepted, and in a game in which the specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined game") , when the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted , The excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel can be executed over the predetermined period, and the exciting output can be continued until the predetermined period elapses even after the "N" th reel is stopped. age,
In the predetermined game, after the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is accepted , the excitation output for stopping the "N" th reel is performed before the predetermined period elapses. When the stop switch corresponding to the "N" th reel is released at the predetermined timing, the number of game media to be provided can be determined before the predetermined period elapses, and after the predetermined period elapses. A game machine characterized by being able to add the number of credits.